Use pursuant to applicable agreements

Title page

1678 Metro Core Connect (MCC) | Release 05.05

Installation and System Turn-Up Guide

ITG
Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary
3AG 24622 EAAA TQZZA
Use pursuant to applicable agreements ISSUE 1
FEBRUARY 2010
Use pursuant to applicable agreements

Legal notice

Legal notice

Alcatel, Lucent, Alcatel-Lucent and the Alcatel-Lucent logo are trademarks of Alcatel-Lucent. All other trademarks are the property of their respective
owners.

The information presented is subject to change without notice. Alcatel-Lucent assumes no responsibility for inaccuracies contained herein.
Copyright © 2010 Alcatel-Lucent. All rights reserved.
Contains proprietary/trade secret information which is the property of Alcatel-Lucent and must not be made available to, or copied or used by anyone outside
Alcatel-Lucent without its written authorization.
Not to be used or disclosed except in accordance with applicable agreements.

Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary
Use pursuant to applicable agreements
Contents

About this document

Purpose ........................................................................................................................................................................................... xix
xix

Safety information ..................................................................................................................................................................... xix

xix

Orientation aids ........................................................................................................................................................................... xix

xix

Conventions used ......................................................................................................................................................................... xx

xx

Related information ................................................................................................................................................................... xxi

xxi

Technical support ...................................................................................................................................................................... xxii

xxii

How to comment ....................................................................................................................................................................... xxii

xxii

1 Safety

Structure of safety statements ................................................................................................................................................ 1-1

1-1

Safety awareness ........................................................................................................................................................................ 1-3

1-3

Electrostatic sensitive devices ............................................................................................................................................ 1-17

1-17

2 General information

Product support information .................................................................................................................................................. 2-1

2-1

3 Installation

Overview ....................................................................................................................................................................................... 3-1

3-1

Procedure 3-1: Unpack and inspect equipment .............................................................................................................. 3-3

Procedure 3-2: Prepare floor .................................................................................................................................................. 3-5

3-5

Procedure 3-3: Install racks ................................................................................................................................................. 3-14

3-14

Procedure 3-4: Install overhead rack support ................................................................................................................ 3-19

Procedure 3-5: Route and connect frame-ground cable ............................................................................................ 3-22

Procedure 3-6: Mount 1678 Metro Core Connect shelf and NGTRU in rack .................................................. 3-24

Procedure 3-7: Connect shelf and NGTRU ground cables to rack ....................................................................... 3-43

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
3AG 24622 EAAA TQZZA Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary iii
Issue 1 February 2010 Use pursuant to applicable agreements
Contents

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Procedure 3-8: Install NGTRU cables ............................................................................................................................. 3-46

Procedure 3-9: Connect power cables between NGTRU and 1678 Metro Core Connect ............................ 3-51

Procedure 3-10: Route and terminate office battery power cables ........................................................................ 3-57

Procedure 3-11: Install electrical cables .......................................................................................................................... 3-64

3-64

Procedure 3-12: Install fiber management ..................................................................................................................... 3-70

Procedure 3-13: Route fiber-optic cables ....................................................................................................................... 3-74

Procedure 3-14: Install rear kick plate ............................................................................................................................. 3-82

Procedure 3-15: Install AC outlets .................................................................................................................................... 3-83

3-83

Procedure 3-16: Install front base plate ........................................................................................................................... 3-87

Procedure 3-17: Install electrical switch ......................................................................................................................... 3-89

Procedure 3-18: Verify NGTRU ground ......................................................................................................................... 3-92

Procedure 3-19: Verify frame ground .............................................................................................................................. 3-98

Procedure 3-20: Install trim .............................................................................................................................................. 3-100

3-100

Procedure 3-21: Verify final installation ....................................................................................................................... 3-110

4 System turn-up and testing

Overview ....................................................................................................................................................................................... 4-1

4-1

Procedure 4-1: Verify and turn-up system ........................................................................................................................ 4-4

Procedure 4-2: Site-specific information ........................................................................................................................ 4-10

Procedure 4-3: Perform overall visual inspection ....................................................................................................... 4-12

Procedure 4-4: Verify test equipment availability ....................................................................................................... 4-13

Procedure 4-5: Verify NGTRU power ............................................................................................................................. 4-15

Procedure 4-6: Install plug-in modules ........................................................................................................................... 4-27

Procedure 4-7: Install an FTP server ................................................................................................................................ 4-33

Procedure 4-8: Verify FLC software load ....................................................................................................................... 4-39

Procedure 4-9: Set up and verify system and ES64SC IP communications ...................................................... 4-43

Procedure 4-10: Provision LAN communication to external router ..................................................................... 4-47

Procedure 4-11: Configure BITS timing source and clock output ........................................................................ 4-49
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
iv Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary 3AG 24622 EAAA TQZZA
Use pursuant to applicable agreements Issue 1 February 2010
Contents

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Procedure 4-12: Create clean database backup ............................................................................................................ 4-54

Procedure 4-13: Provision equipment .............................................................................................................................. 4-57

Procedure 4-14: Confirm cabling between GBE I/O and LGX panel .................................................................. 4-64

Procedure 4-15: Confirm cabling between OC-n I/O and LGX panel ................................................................ 4-68

Procedure 4-16: Clean fiber-optic connectors .............................................................................................................. 4-75

Procedure 4-17: GBE error-free verification setup ..................................................................................................... 4-85

Procedure 4-18: OC-n error-free verification setup ................................................................................................. 4-124

Procedure 4-19: Perform error-free verification test (copy 0) .............................................................................. 4-134

Procedure 4-20: Verify shelf redundant power copy 0 ............................................................................................ 4-139

Procedure 4-21: Verify clock and control switching ................................................................................................ 4-144

Procedure 4-22: Verify OC-n protection switching (working to protect) ......................................................... 4-160

Procedure 4-23: Perform error-free verification test (copy 1) .............................................................................. 4-166

Procedure 4-24: Verify OC-n protection switching (protect to working) ......................................................... 4-171

Procedure 4-25: Provision and test ES64SC data path ........................................................................................... 4-177

Procedure 4-26: Disconnect test equipment and test cables .................................................................................. 4-207

Procedure 4-27: Perform FTP restore of provisioning database .......................................................................... 4-208

Procedure 4-28: Verify alarm-free system ................................................................................................................... 4-210

Procedure 4-29: Verify NGTRU rack lamp unit ........................................................................................................ 4-211

Procedure 4-30: Verify shelf redundant power copy 1 ............................................................................................ 4-219

Procedure 4-31: Install or remove SFP drawer .......................................................................................................... 4-224

Procedure 4-32: Install or remove XFP drawer ......................................................................................................... 4-227

Procedure 4-33: Module mechanical removal or installation ............................................................................... 4-229

Procedure 4-34: Confirm cabling between 10GBE I/O and LGX panel .......................................................... 4-232

Procedure 4-35: 10 GBE error-free verification setup ............................................................................................ 4-237

Procedure 4-36: Provision equipment protection ...................................................................................................... 4-282

Record site information ...................................................................................................................................................... 4-284

4-284

Visual inspection and module installation ................................................................................................................... 4-285

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
3AG 24622 EAAA TQZZA Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary v
Issue 1 February 2010 Use pursuant to applicable agreements
Contents

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Recommended test equipment ......................................................................................................................................... 4-290
4-290

Verify NGTRU power ......................................................................................................................................................... 4-292

4-292

Verify software download .................................................................................................................................................. 4-293

4-293

Database backup .................................................................................................................................................................... 4-294

4-294

Verify cabling between GBE IO and LGX panel ...................................................................................................... 4-295

Verify cabling between OC-n I/O and LGX panel ................................................................................................... 4-305

Verify GBE provisioning ................................................................................................................................................... 4-315

4-315

Verify OCn provisioning .................................................................................................................................................... 4-377

4-377

Record error-free verification test results (copy 0) ................................................................................................... 4-382

Verify shelf redundant power copy 0 ............................................................................................................................. 4-383

Verify clock and control subsystem switching ........................................................................................................... 4-384

Verify OC-n protection switching (working to protect) .......................................................................................... 4-386

Record error-free verification test results (copy 1) ................................................................................................... 4-395

Verify OC-n protection switching (protect to working) .......................................................................................... 4-396

Provision and test L2 data path ........................................................................................................................................ 4-405

4-405

Verify NGTRU rack lamp unit ......................................................................................................................................... 4-408

4-408

Verify shelf redundant power copy 1 ............................................................................................................................. 4-409

Verify cabling between 10GBE I/O and LGX panel ................................................................................................ 4-410

Verify 10GBE provisioning ............................................................................................................................................... 4-412

4-412

5 1678 Metro Core Connect addresses and locations

Overview ....................................................................................................................................................................................... 5-1

5-1

Numbering scheme .................................................................................................................................................................... 5-4

5-4

System shelves ............................................................................................................................................................................ 5-9

5-9

Glossary

Index

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
vi Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary 3AG 24622 EAAA TQZZA
Use pursuant to applicable agreements Issue 1 February 2010
List of tables

3-1 BITS reference connector pin-out ..................................................................................................................... 3-66

3-2 Housekeeping connector pin-out ....................................................................................................................... 3-67

3-3 AC duplex outlet kits ............................................................................................................................................. 3-83

3-83

4-1 Supported modules ................................................................................................................................................. 4-58

4-58

4-2 Supported optics ...................................................................................................................................................... 4-59

4-59

4-3 SFP optical power specifications ....................................................................................................................... 4-65

4-4 SFP/XFP optical power specifications ............................................................................................................ 4-70

4-5 SFP optical power specifications ....................................................................................................................... 4-88

4-6 GBE STS-3C connections (Shelf fully populated with GBEs) .............................................................. 4-92

4-7 SFP/XFP optical power specifications .......................................................................................................... 4-126

4-8 STS-nC connections (Shelf fully populated with OCns) ....................................................................... 4-130

4-9 XFP optical power specifications ................................................................................................................... 4-234

4-10 XFP optical power specifications ................................................................................................................... 4-240

4-11 10 GBE test set provisioning ............................................................................................................................ 4-242

4-12 GBE10 STS-3C connections (shelf fully populated with 10GBEs) .................................................. 4-244

4-13 Site-specific information .................................................................................................................................... 4-284

4-14 Visual inspection list ............................................................................................................................................ 4-285

4-285

4-15 NGTRU modules .................................................................................................................................................. 4-285

4-285

4-16 Equipped shelf modules ..................................................................................................................................... 4-285

4-17 Equipped SFPs/XFPs .......................................................................................................................................... 4-286

4-18 Verify spare modules ........................................................................................................................................... 4-288

4-19 Test equipment and miscellaneous items ..................................................................................................... 4-290

4-20 NGTRU verification ............................................................................................................................................ 4-292

4-292

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
3AG 24622 EAAA TQZZA Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary vii
Issue 1 February 2010 Use pursuant to applicable agreements
List of tables

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
4-21 Load software generic verification ................................................................................................................. 4-293

4-22 Items to verify before creating a clean backup .......................................................................................... 4-294

4-23 Items to record after creating a clean backup ............................................................................................. 4-294

4-24 Items to record after restoring a backup ....................................................................................................... 4-294

4-25 OC3 optical transmitter power measurements over fiber ...................................................................... 4-295

4-26 OC3 optical transmitter power measurements over fiber ...................................................................... 4-305

4-27 Verify provisioning GBE facility and STS3C ............................................................................................ 4-315

4-28 Verify provisioning facility, FFP, and STSnC ............................................................................................ 4-377

4-29 Copy 0 error-free verification test results .................................................................................................... 4-382

4-30 Verify redundant power copy 0 ....................................................................................................................... 4-383

4-31 Verify clock and control subsystem switching ........................................................................................... 4-384

4-32 Verify primary BITS clock output and control subsystem switching ................................................ 4-384

4-33 Verify secondary BITS clock output and control subsystem switching ........................................... 4-385

4-34 Verify protection switching test (OC-n) ....................................................................................................... 4-386

4-35 Copy 1 error-free verification test results .................................................................................................... 4-395

4-36 Verify protection switching test (OC-n) ....................................................................................................... 4-396

4-37 Items to verify before testing ............................................................................................................................ 4-405

4-38 Previous test provisioning changes ................................................................................................................ 4-405

4-39 L1 and L2 provisioning ...................................................................................................................................... 4-406

4-40 Error free operation and data switch .............................................................................................................. 4-407

4-41 Provisioned value for LANDEGR ................................................................................................................. 4-408

4-42 NGTRU rack lamp unit test results ................................................................................................................ 4-408

4-43 Verify redundant power copy 1 ....................................................................................................................... 4-409

4-44 10GBE Optical power measurements over fiber ..................................................................................... 4-410

4-45 Verify provisioning GBE10 facility and STS3C ...................................................................................... 4-412

5-1 GigE and embedded facility AIDs and values ................................................................................................ 5-4

5-2 GBE10 and embedded facility AIDs and values ............................................................................................ 5-4

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
viii Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary 3AG 24622 EAAA TQZZA
Use pursuant to applicable agreements Issue 1 February 2010
List of tables

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
5-3 OC-3 and embedded facility AIDs and values ................................................................................................ 5-5

5-4 OC-12 and embedded facility AIDs and values ............................................................................................. 5-5

5-5 OC-48 and embedded facility AIDs and values ............................................................................................ 5-5

5-6 OC-192 and embedded facility AIDs and values ........................................................................................... 5-5

5-7 Logical port on ES64 L2 switching server and embedded facility AIDs and values ........................ 5-6

5-8 Equipment addressing .............................................................................................................................................. 5-7

5-7

5-9 Common system entity AIDs ................................................................................................................................ 5-8

5-10 Database backup AIDs ............................................................................................................................................. 5-8

5-8

5-11 Software generic AIDs ............................................................................................................................................. 5-8

5-8

5-12 I/O module and SFP/XFP relationships .......................................................................................................... 5-11

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
3AG 24622 EAAA TQZZA Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary ix
Issue 1 February 2010 Use pursuant to applicable agreements
List of figures

1-1 Laser warning labels ................................................................................................................................................. 1-7

1-7

1-2 Shelf laser warning labels ....................................................................................................................................... 1-8

1-8

1-3 Laser radiation label on module ........................................................................................................................... 1-9

1-4 Subrack labels, view 1 ........................................................................................................................................... 1-10

1-5 Subrack label, view 2 ............................................................................................................................................. 1-11

1-11

1-6 Labels on units with standard cover plate ...................................................................................................... 1-12

1-7 Module label ............................................................................................................................................................. 1-13

1-13

1-8 Internal label for printed board assembly ....................................................................................................... 1-13

1-9 Internal backpanel label ........................................................................................................................................ 1-14

1-14

1-10 Part number and serial number label (item on catalog) ............................................................................ 1-14

1-11 Equipment name label ........................................................................................................................................... 1-15

1-15

1-12 Communauté Européenne (CE) label .............................................................................................................. 1-15

1-13 Waste electrical and electronic equipment (WEEE) label ........................................................................ 1-15

1-14 Item identification label (item on catalog) ..................................................................................................... 1-16

1-15 Part number and serial number label (item not on catalog) ..................................................................... 1-16

1-16 Electrostatic-sensitive sign .................................................................................................................................. 1-17

1-17

1-17 Wrist band and cord ............................................................................................................................................... 1-18

3-1 Rack footprint ............................................................................................................................................................. 3-6

3-6

3-2 Rack bay (PN 1AD014120032) ........................................................................................................................... 3-7

3-3 Self-drilling anchor ................................................................................................................................................. 3-10

3-10

3-4 Anchor setting .......................................................................................................................................................... 3-10

3-10

3-5 Recommended configuration (front) ................................................................................................................ 3-15

3-6 Alternate configuration (front) ........................................................................................................................... 3-16

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
3AG 24622 EAAA TQZZA Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary xi
Issue 1 February 2010 Use pursuant to applicable agreements
List of figures

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
3-7 Typical overhead uni-strut support ................................................................................................................... 3-18

3-8 Typical overhead rack support ........................................................................................................................... 3-20

3-9 Frame ground location, top of rack .................................................................................................................. 3-23

3-10 Frame ground location, base of rack ................................................................................................................ 3-23

3-11 NGTRU hardware ................................................................................................................................................... 3-32

3-32

3-12 Mounting brackets .................................................................................................................................................. 3-33

3-33

3-13 Rear plastic guard ................................................................................................................................................... 3-33

3-33

3-14 Bus bars without cover .......................................................................................................................................... 3-33

3-15 NGTRU and recommended shelf locations (upper shelf) ........................................................................ 3-34

3-16 NGTRU and alternate shelf locations (lower shelf) ................................................................................... 3-35

3-17 Locations of the existing shelf catching mechanisms ................................................................................ 3-36

3-18 Label bracket installation ..................................................................................................................................... 3-37

3-37

3-19 Shelf bracket installation ...................................................................................................................................... 3-38

3-38

3-20 Shelf installation ...................................................................................................................................................... 3-39

3-39

3-21 Shelf installation ...................................................................................................................................................... 3-40

3-40

3-22 Cable tie bracket installation ............................................................................................................................... 3-41

3-41

3-23 Module removal ....................................................................................................................................................... 3-42

3-42

3-24 Internal frame ground termination .................................................................................................................... 3-45

3-25 NGTRU cable installation .................................................................................................................................... 3-50

3-50

3-26 Internal power cable termination (2-kW step-up) ....................................................................................... 3-55

3-27 Internal power cable termination (2.2-kW step-up) ................................................................................... 3-56

3-28 Input power cable termination ............................................................................................................................ 3-60

3-29 Input power cable termination ............................................................................................................................ 3-61

3-30 Input power cable termination ............................................................................................................................ 3-62

3-31 Input power cable termination ............................................................................................................................ 3-63

3-32 BITS cable installation .......................................................................................................................................... 3-69

3-69

3-33 Flex-Tube holder locations .................................................................................................................................. 3-72

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
xii Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary 3AG 24622 EAAA TQZZA
Use pursuant to applicable agreements Issue 1 February 2010
List of figures

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
3-34 Rack level fiber management installation ...................................................................................................... 3-73

3-35 Fiber-optic cables .................................................................................................................................................... 3-74

3-74

3-36 Customer fiber installation .................................................................................................................................. 3-79

3-79

3-37 Fiber routing inside the rack ............................................................................................................................... 3-80

3-38 Black fiber retainer clips ...................................................................................................................................... 3-81

3-81

3-39 Rear kick plate installation .................................................................................................................................. 3-82

3-82

3-40 AC duplex outlet installation, front mount .................................................................................................... 3-85

3-41 AC duplex outlet installation, rear mount ...................................................................................................... 3-86

3-42 Front base plate installation ................................................................................................................................. 3-88

3-43 Electrical switch box installation ...................................................................................................................... 3-90

3-44 Rack location for electrical switch box installation .................................................................................... 3-91

3-45 Frame ground ............................................................................................................................................................ 3-94

3-94

3-46 Installation rear trim hardware kit .................................................................................................................. 3-102

3-47 Installation rear trim hardware kit .................................................................................................................. 3-103

3-48 Front middle kick plate installation ............................................................................................................... 3-104

3-49 Rear end trim installation ................................................................................................................................... 3-105

3-105

3-50 Rear end trim installation (upper mounting details) ................................................................................ 3-106

3-51 Front end trim installation ................................................................................................................................. 3-107

3-52 Front end trim installation (side view) .......................................................................................................... 3-108

3-53 Shelf cover installation ....................................................................................................................................... 3-109

3-109

4-1 2-kW step-up converter wire jumper ............................................................................................................... 4-17

4-2 2.2-kW step-up converter switch settings ...................................................................................................... 4-19

4-3 NGTRU battery connections ............................................................................................................................... 4-20

4-4 2-kW step-up converter front panel .................................................................................................................. 4-24

4-5 2.2-kW step-up converter front panel .............................................................................................................. 4-25

4-6 Module insertion steps .......................................................................................................................................... 4-28

4-28

4-7 Module slots .............................................................................................................................................................. 4-30

4-30
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
3AG 24622 EAAA TQZZA Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary xiii
Issue 1 February 2010 Use pursuant to applicable agreements
List of figures

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
4-8 SFP/XFP Installation ............................................................................................................................................. 4-32
4-32

4-9 Shelf slot locations .................................................................................................................................................. 4-63

4-63

4-10 GBE LGX panel receive fiber power measurement ................................................................................... 4-67

4-11 LGX panel transmit fiber power measurement ............................................................................................ 4-70

4-12 LGX panel receive fiber power measurement .............................................................................................. 4-72

4-13 Fiber-optic connector inspection ....................................................................................................................... 4-77

4-14 Fiber-optic connector types, illustrations ....................................................................................................... 4-79

4-15 Fiber-optic connector types, photographs ...................................................................................................... 4-80

4-16 Optical removal and cleaning tool (PN 3EM07060AAAA) ................................................................... 4-82

4-17 GBE LGX ports jumpered ................................................................................................................................... 4-88

4-18 GBESTS3C cross-connections ........................................................................................................................... 4-90

4-19 OCn test set connections .................................................................................................................................... 4-128

4-20 NGTRU step-up converter front panel ......................................................................................................... 4-143

4-21 FLC Sync. Connectors ........................................................................................................................................ 4-147

4-22 Fiber connections for OCn modules .............................................................................................................. 4-162

4-23 Fiber connections for OCn modules .............................................................................................................. 4-173

4-24 ES64SC provisioning and test ......................................................................................................................... 4-180

4-25 NGTRU rack lamp unit detail .......................................................................................................................... 4-218

4-26 NGTRU step-up converter front panel ......................................................................................................... 4-223

4-27 SFP extraction tool ............................................................................................................................................... 4-226

4-226

4-28 10GBE LGX panel receive fiber power measurement ........................................................................... 4-235

4-29 10GBE LGX ports jumpered ............................................................................................................................ 4-240

4-30 GBE10STS3C Cross-Connections ................................................................................................................. 4-243

5-1 NGTRU and recommended shelf locations (upper shelf) .......................................................................... 5-2

5-2 NGTRU and alternate shelf locations (lower shelf) ...................................................................................... 5-3

5-3 NGTRU, front view .................................................................................................................................................. 5-9

5-9

5-4 1678 Metro Core Connect shelf, front view .................................................................................................. 5-10
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
xiv Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary 3AG 24622 EAAA TQZZA
Use pursuant to applicable agreements Issue 1 February 2010
List of procedures

3 Installation

3-1 Unpack and inspect equipment ............................................................................................................................. 3-3

3-2 Prepare floor ................................................................................................................................................................ 3-5

3-5

3-3 Install racks ............................................................................................................................................................... 3-14

3-14

3-4 Install overhead rack support .............................................................................................................................. 3-19

3-5 Route and connect frame-ground cable .......................................................................................................... 3-22

3-6 Mount 1678 Metro Core Connect shelf and NGTRU in rack ................................................................. 3-24

3-7 Connect shelf and NGTRU ground cables to rack ...................................................................................... 3-43

3-8 Install NGTRU cables ........................................................................................................................................... 3-46

3-46

3-9 Connect power cables between NGTRU and 1678 Metro Core Connect .......................................... 3-51

3-10 Route and terminate office battery power cables ........................................................................................ 3-57

3-11 Install electrical cables .......................................................................................................................................... 3-64

3-64

3-12 Install fiber management ...................................................................................................................................... 3-70

3-70

3-13 Route fiber-optic cables ........................................................................................................................................ 3-74

3-74

3-14 Install rear kick plate .............................................................................................................................................. 3-82

3-82

3-15 Install AC outlets ..................................................................................................................................................... 3-83

3-83

3-16 Install front base plate ........................................................................................................................................... 3-87

3-87

3-17 Install electrical switch .......................................................................................................................................... 3-89

3-89

3-18 Verify NGTRU ground .......................................................................................................................................... 3-92

3-19 Verify frame ground ............................................................................................................................................... 3-98

3-20 Install trim ............................................................................................................................................................... 3-100

3-100

3-21 Verify final installation ....................................................................................................................................... 3-110

3-110

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
3AG 24622 EAAA TQZZA Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary xv
Issue 1 February 2010 Use pursuant to applicable agreements
List of procedures

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
4 System turn-up and testing

4-1 Verify and turn-up system ...................................................................................................................................... 4-4

4-2 Site-specific information ...................................................................................................................................... 4-10

4-10

4-3 Perform overall visual inspection ...................................................................................................................... 4-12

4-4 Verify test equipment availability ..................................................................................................................... 4-13

4-5 Verify NGTRU power ........................................................................................................................................... 4-15

4-6 Install plug-in modules .......................................................................................................................................... 4-27

4-27

4-7 Install an FTP server .............................................................................................................................................. 4-33

4-33

4-8 Verify FLC software load ..................................................................................................................................... 4-39

4-9 Set up and verify system and ES64SC IP communications ..................................................................... 4-43

4-10 Provision LAN communication to external router ...................................................................................... 4-47

4-11 Configure BITS timing source and clock output ......................................................................................... 4-49

4-12 Create clean database backup ............................................................................................................................. 4-54

4-13 Provision equipment .............................................................................................................................................. 4-57

4-57

4-14 Confirm cabling between GBE I/O and LGX panel .................................................................................. 4-64

4-15 Confirm cabling between OC-n I/O and LGX panel ................................................................................. 4-68

4-16 Clean fiber-optic connectors ............................................................................................................................... 4-75

4-17 GBE error-free verification setup ...................................................................................................................... 4-85

4-18 OC-n error-free verification setup .................................................................................................................. 4-124

4-19 Perform error-free verification test (copy 0) ............................................................................................... 4-134

4-20 Verify shelf redundant power copy 0 ............................................................................................................ 4-139

4-21 Verify clock and control switching ................................................................................................................ 4-144

4-22 Verify OC-n protection switching (working to protect) ......................................................................... 4-160

4-23 Perform error-free verification test (copy 1) ............................................................................................... 4-166

4-24 Verify OC-n protection switching (protect to working) ......................................................................... 4-171

4-25 Provision and test ES64SC data path ............................................................................................................ 4-177

4-26 Disconnect test equipment and test cables .................................................................................................. 4-207

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
xvi Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary 3AG 24622 EAAA TQZZA
Use pursuant to applicable agreements Issue 1 February 2010
List of procedures

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
4-27 Perform FTP restore of provisioning database .......................................................................................... 4-208

4-28 Verify alarm-free system .................................................................................................................................... 4-210

4-29 Verify NGTRU rack lamp unit ......................................................................................................................... 4-211

4-30 Verify shelf redundant power copy 1 ............................................................................................................ 4-219

4-31 Install or remove SFP drawer ........................................................................................................................... 4-224

4-32 Install or remove XFP drawer .......................................................................................................................... 4-227

4-33 Module mechanical removal or installation ................................................................................................ 4-229

4-34 Confirm cabling between 10GBE I/O and LGX panel ........................................................................... 4-232

4-35 10 GBE error-free verification setup ............................................................................................................. 4-237

4-36 Provision equipment protection ....................................................................................................................... 4-282

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
3AG 24622 EAAA TQZZA Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary xvii
Issue 1 February 2010 Use pursuant to applicable agreements
About this document
About this document

Purpose
This 1678 MCC Installation and System Turn-Up Guide (ITG) provides information on
the installation and configuration of a 1678 Metro Core Connect (MCC) system.
Furthermore, all steps for putting the system into operation are described.

Safety information
For your safety, this document contains safety statements. Safety statements are given at
points where risks of damage to personnel, equipment, and operation may exist. Failure to
follow the directions in a safety statement may result in serious consequences.

Orientation aids
This document contains the following orientation aids:
• Overall TOC
• Chapter TOCs
• Index
The following graphic depicts the principle structure of this document:

Overall TOC

Chapter TOC

Index

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
3AG 24622 EAAA TQZZA Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary xix
Issue 1 February 2010 Use pursuant to applicable agreements
About this document

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Overall TOC
The overall table of contents (TOC) provides a structural overview of the entire
document. It lists the content of each chapter and the associated page number where the
respective information can be found.
The overall table of contents can be found after the legal page, before the “About this
document” preface.
Chapter TOCs
Each chapter contains a table of contents (TOC) in its “Overview” section. The scope of
each chapter TOC is limited to the corresponding chapter. As in the overall TOC, page
numbers indicate where the respective information can be found.
Index
This manual also contains an alphabetical index, which can be found at the end of the
document, after the “Glossary”.
The index helps users to find specific information quickly by providing an alphabetical
list of key words with associated page numbers.

Conventions used
The following conventions are used in this document:
Numbering
The chapters of this document are numbered consecutively. The page numbering restarts
at “1” in each chapter. To facilitate identifying pages in different chapters, the page
numbers are prefixed with the chapter number. For example, page 2-3 is the third page in
chapter 2.
Cross-references
Cross-reference conventions are identical with the conventions used for numbering. The
first number in a reference to a particular page refers to the corresponding chapter.
Keyword blocks
This document contains so-called keyword blocks to facilitate the location of specific text
passages. The keyword blocks are placed to the left of the main text and indicate the
contents of a paragraph or group of paragraphs.

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
xx Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary 3AG 24622 EAAA TQZZA
Use pursuant to applicable agreements Issue 1 February 2010
About this document

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Typographical conventions
Special typographical conventions apply to elements of the graphical user interface
(GUI), file names and system path information, keyboard entries, alarm messages, and so
on.
• Examples of text that appears on a graphical user interface (GUI), such as menu
options, window titles, or buttons:
– Provision…, Delete, Apply, Close, OK (buttons)
– Provision Timing/Sync (window title)
– Administration → Security → User Provisioning… (path for invoking a window)
• Examples for file names and system path information:
– setup.exe
– C:\Program Files\Alcatel-Lucent
• Examples for keyboard entries:
– F1, Esc X, Alt-F, Ctrl-D, Ctrl-Alt-Del (simple keyboard entries)
A hyphen between two keys means that both keys have to be pressed
simultaneously. Otherwise, press a single key or a number of keys in sequence.
– copy abc xyz
Enter the complete command.
• Examples for alarms and error messages:
– Loss of Signal
– HP-UNEQ, MS-AIS, LOS, LOF
Abbreviations
The abbreviations used in this document are explained in the “Glossary” unless it can be
assumed that the reader is familiar with the abbreviation.

Related information
The manuals related to 1678 Metro Core Connect (MCC) are shown in the following
table:

Document title Document code

1678 Metro Core Connect (MCC) Product Information and Planning Guide 3AG 24622 AAAA TQZZA
Presents a detailed overview of the system, describes its applications, gives planning
requirements, engineering rules, ordering information, and technical specifications.
1678 Metro Core Connect (MCC) TL1 User Provisioning Guide 3AG 24622 BAAA TQZZA
Provides step-by-step information for use in daily system operations. The manual demonstrates
how to perform system provisioning, operations, and administrative tasks.
1678 Metro Core Connect (MCC) Maintenance and Trouble-Clearing Guide 3AG 24622 CAAA TQZZA
Gives detailed information on each possible alarm message. Furthermore, it provides procedures
for routine maintenance, troubleshooting, diagnostics, and component replacement.

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
3AG 24622 EAAA TQZZA Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary xxi
Issue 1 February 2010 Use pursuant to applicable agreements
About this document

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Document title Document code

1678 Metro Core Connect (MCC) TL1 Command Guide 3EM 23236 0606 RKZZA
A reference for all TL1 commands which can be used to operate the network element. The
manual gives an introduction to the concept of the TL1 commands and instructs how to use them.

1678 Metro Core Connect (MCC) Installation and System Turn-Up Guide 3AG 24622 EAAA TQZZA
A step-by-step guide to system installation and setup. It also includes information needed for
pre-installation site planning and post-installation acceptance testing.

1678 Metro Core Connect (MCC) Documentation CD-ROM (all manuals on a CD-ROM) 3AL 24681 AAAA ADZZA

These documents and drawings can be ordered at or downloaded from the Alcatel-Lucent
Online Customer Support Site (OLCS) (https://support.lucent.com) or through your Local
Customer Support.

Technical support
For technical support, contact your local Alcatel-Lucent customer support team. See the
Alcatel-Lucent Support web site (http://www.alcatel-lucent.com/support/) for contact
information.

How to comment
To comment on this document, go to the Online Comment Form (http://infodoc.
alcatel-lucent.com/comments/enus/) or e-mail your comments to the Comments Hotline
(comments@alcatel-lucent.com).

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
xxii Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary 3AG 24622 EAAA TQZZA
Use pursuant to applicable agreements Issue 1 February 2010
1 Safety
1

Structure of safety statements

Overview
Safety statements describe the safety risks relevant while performing tasks on
Alcatel-Lucent products during deployment and/or use. Failure to avoid the hazards may
have serious consequences.

General structure
Safety statements include the following structural elements:

B C D
CAUTION
Lifting hazard E F
Lifting this equipment by yourself can result in injury
due to the size and weight of the equipment. G
Always use three people or a lifting device to transport
and position this equipment. [ABC123]
H
Item Structure element Purpose
1 Safety alert symbol Indicates the potential for personal injury
(optional)
2 Safety symbol Indicates hazard type (optional)
3 Signal word Indicates the severity of the hazard
4 Hazard type Describes the source of the risk of damage or
injury
5 Safety message Consequences if protective measures fail
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
3AG 24622 EAAA TQZZA Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary 1-1
Issue 1 February 2010 Use pursuant to applicable agreements
Safety Structure of safety statements

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Item Structure element Purpose

6 Avoidance message Protective measures to take to avoid the hazard
7 Identifier The reference ID of the safety statement
(optional)

Signal words
The signal words identify the hazard severity levels as follows:

Signal word Meaning

DANGER Indicates an extremely hazardous situation which, if not avoided, will
result in death or serious injury.
WARNING Indicates a hazardous situation which, if not avoided, could result in
death or serious injury.
CAUTION Indicates a hazardous situation which, if not avoided, could result in
minor or moderate injury.
NOTICE Indicates a hazardous situation not related to personal injury.

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1-2 Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary 3AG 24622 EAAA TQZZA
Use pursuant to applicable agreements Issue 1 February 2010
Safety Safety awareness

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Safety awareness
Fan, equipment rack, and equipment cabinet precautions
When installing the equipment observe the following:

DANGER
Possibility of personal injury.
Keep fingers away from the rotating fan blades. Pull the fan-tray by the thumbscrews only
and wait for the fan blades to stop spinning before attempting to remove the fan-tray
completely from the shelf.

CAUTION
Lifting hazard
Possibility of personal injury.
The Alcatel-Lucent 1678 Metro Core Connect (MCC) requires at least three people to
support, align, and attach it to an equipment rack. To prevent equipment damage or
personal injury, make sure help is available.

WARNING
Risk of injury due to unsecured shelf.
Possibility of personal injury.
To prevent personal injury and equipment damage due to unbalanced loading of the
equipment rack or cabinet, make sure the equipment rack or cabinet is properly secured
to the floor, ceiling, or other rigid structure before mounting the Alcatel-Lucent 1678
Metro Core Connect (MCC) in it. For approved methods of securing the equipment rack,
read the equipment-rack installation instructions or contact the equipment-rack
manufacturer.

Electrical precautions
Take appropriate safety precautions when performing procedures on electrical equipment.
Hazardous electrical potentials are present when system power is on.
Some procedures in this manual require working with small conductive objects, such as
screwdrivers, fuses, washers, screws, and nuts. When working on a shelf at the top of an
equipment rack, a dropped object that falls into a lower shelf can cause physical damage

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
3AG 24622 EAAA TQZZA Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary 1-3
Issue 1 February 2010 Use pursuant to applicable agreements
Safety Safety awareness

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
and electrical short circuits. To prevent this, place a piece of paper or other cover over the
lower shelf to catch fallen objects. Remove the paper or other cover when work is
complete.
Restricted access locations

CAUTION
Laser hazard
Possibility of personal injury.
Install the Alcatel-Lucent 1678 Metro Core Connect (MCC) in a restricted-access area
only. Entrance to a restricted-access area is intended for qualified or trained personnel
and access to it is controlled by a locked barrier.

NOTICE
Possibility of equipment damage.
The shelf does not contain main over-current protection devices.
The user must provide circuit breakers or fuses and disconnects between the power source
and the Alcatel-Lucent 1678 Metro Core Connect (MCC). Each power feed from a source
(−48 V DC and Return) requires a 25-amp DC-rated fast-trip circuit breaker or fuse and
disconnect. Circuit breakers or fuses must meet applicable local and national electrical
safety codes and be approved for the intended application.

WARNING
Possibility of personal injury.
Make sure to connect the node to a −48 V DC source that is electrically isolated from the
AC source and is reliably connected to earth ground.

WARNING
Possibility of personal injury.
For personal safety, make sure to connect and secure the installation site’s frame-ground
(earth ground) wire to the frame ground terminal on the 1678 Metro Core Connect
(MCC) before connecting any other wires to the node.

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1-4 Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary 3AG 24622 EAAA TQZZA
Use pursuant to applicable agreements Issue 1 February 2010
Safety Safety awareness

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
WARNING
Possibility of personal injury.
A DC-power source provides high energy, which can cause serious injury or equipment
damage.
Only Alcatel-Lucent qualified personnel should connect the dc power to the
Alcatel-Lucent 1678 Metro Core Connect (MCC). To prevent serious injury or equipment
damage, make sure the power source cables are de-energized before handling or
connecting them to the node.

Laser precautions
Verify that laser labels on equipment state that the system conforms to all applicable
standards of 21 CFR 1040.10. See Figure 1-1, “Laser warning labels” (p. 1-7). If there are
no danger labels, call the Alcatel-Lucent Technical Support Center (TSC). See Figure 1-2,
“Shelf laser warning labels” (p. 1-8) through Figure 1-9, “Internal backpanel label”
(p. 1-14) for label locations on equipment. See Figure 1-10, “Part number and serial
number label (item on catalog)” (p. 1-14) through Figure 1-15, “Part number and serial
number label (item not on catalog)” (p. 1-16) for illustrations of labels called out in
Figure 1-4, “Subrack labels, view 1” (p. 1-10) through Figure 1-9, “Internal backpanel
label” (p. 1-14).
The invisible infrared radiation emitted by the fiber-optic transmitter can cause eye
damage. Observe local office procedures and the following dangers:

DANGER
Laser hazard
Possibility of personal injury.
Laser infrared radiation is not in the visible spectrum; therefore, it is not visible to the
naked eye or with laser safety glasses. Although it cannot be seen, laser radiation may be
present.

DANGER
Laser hazard
Possibility of personal injury.
Never look directly into an unterminated fiber-optic connector unless it is absolutely
known that no optical power is being emitted by the connector.

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
3AG 24622 EAAA TQZZA Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary 1-5
Issue 1 February 2010 Use pursuant to applicable agreements
Safety Safety awareness

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
DANGER
Laser hazard
Possibility of personal injury.
Never look directly into a broken optical fiber cable unless it is absolutely known that no
laser radiation is present.

DANGER
Laser hazard
Possibility of personal injury.
Never look at an optical fiber splice, cable, or connector unless it is absolutely known
that no laser radiation is present in the fiber. Laser radiation can come from a fiber-optic
transmitter, an Optical Time Domain Reflectometer (OTDR), or other optical test
equipment.

DANGER
Laser hazard
Possibility of personal injury.
Never look directly into an unterminated optical connector or cable with a
magnifier/microscope unless it is absolutely known that no laser radiation is being
emitted from the connector or cable. A magnifier or microscope greatly increases the
laser radiation hazard to the eyes.

DANGER
Laser hazard
Possibility of personal injury.
This system uses Hazard Levels 1 and 1M. During servicing operations when optical
connectors are being connected, disconnected, or handled without dust covers, it is
possible to be exposed to laser radiation that can cause eye damage. See Figure 1-1,
“Laser warning labels” (p. 1-7) for examples of laser warning labels.

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1-6 Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary 3AG 24622 EAAA TQZZA
Use pursuant to applicable agreements Issue 1 February 2010
Safety Safety awareness

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
CAUTION
Laser hazard
Possibility of personal injury. The use of controls and/or adjustments, or the performance
of procedures other than those specified herein may result in hazardous infrared radiation
exposure.

Figure 1-1 Laser warning labels

ADHESIVE LABELS ON THE FRONT PANEL
(BLACK PRINT ON YELLOW BACKGROUND)

678-0317-1
022307

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
3AG 24622 EAAA TQZZA Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary 1-7
Issue 1 February 2010 Use pursuant to applicable agreements
Safety Safety awareness

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
DANGER
Laser hazard
Possibility of personal injury.
Everyone within a 10 ft radius of an unterminated optical fiber or connector that is
connected to a powered transmitter must wear laser safety goggles or eye shields.
Laser safety goggles or eye shields are not required if the following work rules are strictly
followed:
1. Always remove electrical power from fiber-optic transmitters before disconnecting
fiber-optic connectors in the path between the transmitter and the receiver.
2. Never connect an unterminated optical cable to a fiber-optic transmitter. Always
connect fiber-optic cables to fiber-optic receivers, test sets, or some other termination
first.

Figure 1-2 Shelf laser warning labels

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1-8 Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary 3AG 24622 EAAA TQZZA
Use pursuant to applicable agreements Issue 1 February 2010
Safety Safety awareness

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Figure 1-3 Laser radiation label on module

LASER
RADIATION
LABEL

PUSH
PUSH

678-0190-1
022006

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
3AG 24622 EAAA TQZZA Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary 1-9
Issue 1 February 2010 Use pursuant to applicable agreements
Safety Safety awareness

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Figure 1-4 Subrack labels, view 1

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1-10 Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary 3AG 24622 EAAA TQZZA
Use pursuant to applicable agreements Issue 1 February 2010
Safety Safety awareness

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Figure 1-5 Subrack label, view 2

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
3AG 24622 EAAA TQZZA Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary 1-11
Issue 1 February 2010 Use pursuant to applicable agreements
Safety Safety awareness

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Figure 1-6 Labels on units with standard cover plate

ITEM IDENTIFICATION LABEL

(ITEM ON CATALOG)

PART NUMBER/
SERIAL NUMBER LABEL
(ITEM ON CATALOG)
XXXXXXXXX
XXXXXX
XXXXXX

ABC

678-0180-1
022006

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1-12 Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary 3AG 24622 EAAA TQZZA
Use pursuant to applicable agreements Issue 1 February 2010
Safety Safety awareness

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Figure 1-7 Module label

PART NUMBER/
SERIAL NUMBER LABEL
(ITEM ON CATALOG)

ABC

678-0181-1
022006

Figure 1-8 Internal label for printed board assembly

ABC

PART NUMBER/
SERIAL NUMBER LABEL
(ITEM NOT ON CATALOG)

678-0182-1
022006

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
3AG 24622 EAAA TQZZA Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary 1-13
Issue 1 February 2010 Use pursuant to applicable agreements
Safety Safety awareness

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Figure 1-9 Internal backpanel label

PART NUMBER/
SERIAL NUMBER LABEL
(ITEM NOT ON CATALOG)

ABC

678-0183-1
022006

Figure 1-10 Part number and serial number label (item on catalog)

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1-14 Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary 3AG 24622 EAAA TQZZA
Use pursuant to applicable agreements Issue 1 February 2010
Safety Safety awareness

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Figure 1-11 Equipment name label
EQUIPMENT NAME

678-0187-1
022006

Figure 1-12 Communauté Européenne (CE) label

678-0188-1
022006

Figure 1-13 Waste electrical and electronic equipment (WEEE) label

678-0189-1
022006

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
3AG 24622 EAAA TQZZA Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary 1-15
Issue 1 February 2010 Use pursuant to applicable agreements
Safety Safety awareness

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Figure 1-14 Item identification label (item on catalog)
FREQUENCY ACRONYM
(Optional)

ANV ITEM PART NUMBER

678-0186-1
022006

Figure 1-15 Part number and serial number label (item not on catalog)

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1-16 Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary 3AG 24622 EAAA TQZZA
Use pursuant to applicable agreements Issue 1 February 2010
Safety Electrostatic sensitive devices

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Electrostatic sensitive devices

Electrostatic sensitivity
An electrostatic-sensitive (ESS) device can withstand voltage spikes of only 10 to 100
volts and can be damaged or effectively destroyed by a discharge that might go unnoticed
by a technician. Some devices have built-in protection. However, because this protection
is effective only against the lower levels of electrostatic charges, a false sense of security
often prevails.

NOTICE
ESD hazard
Possibility of equipment damage.
Common plastic, white foam, cellophane, and masking adhesive tapes must not come in
contact with ESS devices or their packaging.
Common plastics (synthetic insulating materials), clothing, and paper or cardboard are
the most common sources of static charges.
Observe special precautions when the ESS sign is displayed. See Figure 1-16,
“Electrostatic-sensitive sign” (p. 1-17).

Figure 1-16 Electrostatic-sensitive sign

The following items are examples of ESS devices:

• MOS (Metal Oxide Semiconductor) capacitors, transistors, Integrated Circuits (ICs)
• CMOS (Complementary Metal Oxide Semiconductor) transistors, ICs
• JFET (Junction Field Effect Transistors)
• IGFET (Insulated Gate Field Effect Transistors)

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
3AG 24622 EAAA TQZZA Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary 1-17
Issue 1 February 2010 Use pursuant to applicable agreements
Safety Electrostatic sensitive devices

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Handling modules

NOTICE
ESD hazard
Although the risk of damage to an ESS device is reduced considerably after it is
assembled into a circuit designed to protect sensitive components, take the
following precautions to reduce static charges to harmless levels:
• Handle all modules as ESS devices unless they are known not to contain
electrostatic-sensitive parts.
Heel straps are effective only while standing on conductive or
electrostatic-dissipative surfaces.
• Wear ground straps, wrist (PN 1AD012470001) before and while touching or
handling circuit packs containing ESDs. See Figure 1-17, “Wrist band and
cord” (p. 1-18) for an illustration of the wrist strap with cord. The wrist
strap is an elasticized band connected to the coiled cord connected to the
rack frame ground.
• Store (even temporarily), pack, and ship modules in antistatic bags or
containers.
• Do not handle printed circuit board or components unnecessarily. Use
plastic handle.
• Do not use synthetic bristled brushes or acid brushes to clean modules.
• Handle failed modules with same precautions as good modules.

Figure 1-17 Wrist band and cord

ELASTICIZED BAND

COILED CORD

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1-18 Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary 3AG 24622 EAAA TQZZA
Use pursuant to applicable agreements Issue 1 February 2010
Safety Electrostatic sensitive devices

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Repairing modules
To protect ESS devices during repair, take the following precautions:
• The workbench must be earth-grounded, and the work surface must be covered with
an antistatic or static dissipative material bonded to the bench (bolt). A field service
kit (PN 1AD068980001) or equivalent can be used if an adequate workbench is not
available.
• Repair technicians must wear a wrist strap of 250 kilohms to 2 meg ohms that
contacts the repair technician's skin and the bolt bonding the covering to the bench or
safety ground. The wrist strap must be connected before parts are removed from
packaging.
• All electrical equipment must be grounded using a 3-wire power cord.
• Clothing must not touch the device under repair.
• ESS devices are delivered with protective packing (containers or conductive foam).
The devices should remain in their original containers until needed.
• Containers with ESS devices must contact the antistatic work surface, and the wrist
strap must be connected before parts are removed from packaging. Devices must be
handled by their bodies. Leads must be contacted only when necessary.
• Test setups must have correct voltage polarity.
• Volt Ohm Milliamp (VOM)-type meters must not be used to measure resistance; they
can damage devices.
• Only antistatic (metallized) desoldering tools should be used.
ESS devices are protected when properly packaged in conductive or antistatic packaging.
Acceptable packaging is marked as either conductive or antistatic.

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
3AG 24622 EAAA TQZZA Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary 1-19
Issue 1 February 2010 Use pursuant to applicable agreements
2 General information
2

Product support information

Telephone support
Customer service telephone support
For telephone support for the customer services mentioned in this Product Support
Information, call the Alcatel-Lucent Welcome Center at 1-(888) 252-2832 for details, 8:00
a.m. to 5:00 p.m., Central Time, Monday through Friday. Ask the operator for the
appropriate service to be connected to a qualified representative or engineer.
After-hours emergency telephone support is also available by calling the Alcatel-Lucent
Welcome Center at 1-(888) 252-2832. An emergency is defined as an out-of-service,
traffic-affecting problem or a non-operating alarm system on traffic-bearing systems.

Product documentation and training

Product documentation
Product documentation is available on both paper and CD-ROM. The documentation can
also be accessed through Alcatel-Lucent's Online Support Documentation and Software
web site at https://support.alcatel-lucent.com/portal/olcsHome.do (https://support.
alcatel-lucent.com/portal/olcsHome.do).
Product documentation updates appear on Alcatel-Lucent's Online Support
Documentation and Software web site before they are available in any other format.
At Alcatel-Lucent's Online Support Documentation and Software web site, follow the
on-screen instructions to register for access and obtain a login ID. In addition to accessing
product documentation, the Alcatel-Lucent Online Support Documentation and Software
web site allows the user to view the following:
• Application notes
• Configuration notes
• Data collections
• Frequently Asked Questions (FAQs)

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
3AG 24622 EAAA TQZZA Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary 2-1
Issue 1 February 2010 Use pursuant to applicable agreements
General information Product support information

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
• General information books
• General Release Documents (GRDs)
• Installation documents
• Methods of Procedure (MOPs)
• Product Change Notifications (PCNs)
• Product Information Bulletins (PIBs)
• Product manual updates
• Software patch and software load documents
• Software Update Documents (SUDs)
• Technical bulletins
• Training documents
• Urgent Product Warnings (UPWs)
Training
Equipment training is available to all customers. Crafts and maintenance personnel who
are trained by Alcatel-Lucent's Training department can expect more effective assistance
if they need to call the Technical Support Center. Regularly scheduled courses are
available at the training facilities in Plano, Texas. If a customer cannot attend a standard
course, the Training department can arrange a course for a specific requirement and
conduct it at the customer's facility. For further information, call customer service
telephone support and ask for a training coordinator or write to one of the following
addresses:

In USA: In CANADA:
Alcatel-Lucent USA Alcatel-Lucent Canada
3400 W. Plano Pkwy. Network Services Division
Plano, Texas 75075 P.O. Box 13600
ATTN: Training M/S 1206-553 Ottawa, Ontario K2K 2E6

The annual Product Training Catalog can be ordered by calling the training coordinator,
or it can be viewed online at http://www1.alcatel-lucent.com/us/product_training/catalog
(http://www1.alcatel-lucent.com/us/product_training/catalog).

Technical Support Center

The Technical Support Center (TSC) staff is always ready to provide high-quality
technical assistance. Customers can expect effective telephone assistance when their
crafts and maintenance personnel have been trained by Alcatel-Lucent's Training
department and are equipped with adequate test equipment, spares, and documentation at
the site.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
2-2 Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary 3AG 24622 EAAA TQZZA
Use pursuant to applicable agreements Issue 1 February 2010
General information Product support information

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
For technical assistance, call Alcatel-Lucent's customer Technical Support Center at
1-(888) 252-2832.
After-hours emergency telephone support
Emergency support is available after-hours for emergencies by calling 1-(888) 252-2832.
An emergency is defined as an out-of-service, traffic-affecting problem or a nonoperating
alarm system on traffic-bearing systems.
Nonemergency is defined as installation turn-ups, application questions, traffic cutover,
routine maintenance, or other non-service-affecting maintenance. All non-service-
affecting, after-hours telephone services are billable to the customer.
Please provide the operator with the following information:
• Company name
• Caller name
• A telephone number where caller can be reached
• A brief description of the problem, including the product involved
After-hours non-emergency telephone support
After-hours telephone support to address new installations, system expansions, system
operations, system application, or other non-service-affecting issues is available by
contacting Alcatel-Lucent at 1-(888) 252-2832.
On-site technical support
On-site technical support is available when an issue cannot be resolved remotely. This
determination is usually made by Alcatel-Lucent TSC during the problem investigation
process. These services may or may not be billable to a customer. This depends on several
factors such as what type of Service Level Agreement a customer has with
Alcatel-Lucent, the age of the product, etc.

Repair and return services

As part of a comprehensive technical support program, Alcatel-Lucent provides factory
repair services for equipment. This service is available both during and after the warranty
period through Alcatel-Lucent's Return and Repair department.

Spare parts and replacement cards

For spare parts, spare cards, card exchange, and in-warranty replacement on a routine or
emergency basis, call customer service telephone support.
Provide the following information:
• Customer Contact Name
• Customer Company Name
• Company name
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
3AG 24622 EAAA TQZZA Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary 2-3
Issue 1 February 2010 Use pursuant to applicable agreements
General information Product support information

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
• Customer telephone number
• Customer E-mail Address
• A brief description of the problem, including product line, part number, and quantity
of parts needed
For emergency assistance after normal business hours, call customer service telephone
support, ask the operator for Emergency Parts Assistance, and provide the operator with
the required information. The operator will contact an appropriate individual to respond.
Return for credit or warranty exchange procedure
Returned equipment must have a Parts Request (PR) number. Obtain a PR number by
calling the Alcatel-Lucent Welcome Center at 1-866-582-3688.
No equipment should be returned without a PR number. The following information is
required:
• Description and quantity of equipment to be returned
• Reason for return
• Order number the equipment was purchased against and approximate date of purchase

Service center
The Service Center tests, repairs, and modifies all cards (both in and out of warranty).
Cards received for repair or modification are returned promptly.
Return for repair procedure
Refer to “Return for credit or warranty exchange procedure” (p. 2-4) for information on
obtaining a PR number. Notification to the Service Center and issuance of a PR number
by Alcatel-Lucent personnel must be made prior to shipment of parts. The following
information must be furnished with the request for return authorization:
• Purchase order number or requisition number
• Description and quantity of equipment to be returned
• Reason for return:
– Modification required
– Defective equipment to be repaired
• Warranty status (in or out of warranty) and warranty date stamped on unit
• Specific nature of problem
• Name and telephone number of person who identified problem
• Special instruction/information

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
2-4 Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary 3AG 24622 EAAA TQZZA
Use pursuant to applicable agreements Issue 1 February 2010
General information Product support information

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Shipping instructions for repair, credit, or warranty exchange
Return equipment or parts prepaid to the address provided when the PR number was
issued. The PR number must be prominently marked on the shipping label, the packing
list, and any correspondence regarding the order.
• Include company name, address, and name of person to contact in case of a question.
• Include specific reason for return. (This aids prompt processing.)
• Include the same requisition number or purchase order number that was furnished
with request for return authorization.
• Include type number and part number of unit.
• State whether equipment is in or out of warranty.
• Furnish shipping address for return of unit, if applicable, or other pertinent details.
• Mail purchase order, if applicable, to address shown under Return for Repair
Procedure, Attention: Service Center.

Installation and maintenance services

Engineering and installation service
Whether installation for specific equipment or a full turnkey network facility is needed,
Installation Service can help. Alcatel-Lucent has experience in central office, outside
plant, and customer premises applications, and specializes in flexible scheduling and
high-quality service. Qualified staff are in place nationwide, so an installation can be
started and completed promptly.
Contract maintenance service
Field service from Alcatel-Lucent US and Canada offices are available. Alcatel-Lucent
field service is well-suited for private networks of any size.
Factory-trained service technicians are qualified on similar systems before they are
allowed to maintain customer equipment. They have direct access to additional technical
support around the clock and to all necessary tools and test equipment.

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
3AG 24622 EAAA TQZZA Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary 2-5
Issue 1 February 2010 Use pursuant to applicable agreements
3 Installation
3

Overview
Purpose
This chapter of the 1678 MCC Installation and System Turn-Up Guide contains the
physical installation of the racks and subracks, the system cabling and powering,

Contents

Procedure 3-1: Unpack and inspect equipment 3-3

Procedure 3-2: Prepare floor 3-5
Procedure 3-3: Install racks 3-14
Procedure 3-4: Install overhead rack support 3-19
Procedure 3-5: Route and connect frame-ground cable 3-22
Procedure 3-6: Mount 1678 Metro Core Connect shelf and NGTRU in rack 3-24
Procedure 3-7: Connect shelf and NGTRU ground cables to rack 3-43
Procedure 3-8: Install NGTRU cables 3-46
Procedure 3-9: Connect power cables between NGTRU and 1678 Metro Core 3-51
Connect
Procedure 3-10: Route and terminate office battery power cables 3-57
Procedure 3-11: Install electrical cables 3-64
Procedure 3-12: Install fiber management 3-70
Procedure 3-13: Route fiber-optic cables 3-74
Procedure 3-14: Install rear kick plate 3-82
Procedure 3-15: Install AC outlets 3-83
Procedure 3-16: Install front base plate 3-87
Procedure 3-17: Install electrical switch 3-89

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
3AG 24622 EAAA TQZZA Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary 3-1
Issue 1 February 2010 Use pursuant to applicable agreements
Installation Overview

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Procedure 3-18: Verify NGTRU ground 3-92

Procedure 3-19: Verify frame ground 3-98
Procedure 3-20: Install trim 3-100
Procedure 3-21: Verify final installation 3-110

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
3-2 Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary 3AG 24622 EAAA TQZZA
Use pursuant to applicable agreements Issue 1 February 2010
Installation Procedure 3-1: Unpack and inspect equipment

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Procedure 3-1: Unpack and inspect equipment

When to use
This chart provides instructions to unpack and inspect the 1678 Metro Core Connect shelf
and to report any shipping damage or missing parts.

Recommended tools
• Tin snips
• Box cutter

Task

CAUTION
Lifting hazard
The 1678 Metro Core Connect requires two people to unpack the shelf from the box.
To prevent equipment damage or personal injury, make sure appropriate help or suitable
lifting equipment is available if needed.

NOTICE
Possibility of equipment damage.
If product must be transported or reshipped, repack equipment with approved shipping
materials. Repacking equipment improperly or using unapproved shipping materials may
result in equipment damage, which is sender's responsibility.
If any shipping materials are lost, contact Alcatel-Lucent before transporting or
reshipping product.

Complete the following steps.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

1 Remove external packing slip from shipping container.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

2 Before unpacking container, ensure there is no visible damage to outside of container.

If damage is visible, report damage to freight carrier before opening container. Freight
carrier will advise as to next step to take. (If a camera is available, take several pictures of
damage.)

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
3AG 24622 EAAA TQZZA Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary 3-3
Issue 1 February 2010 Use pursuant to applicable agreements
Installation Procedure 3-1: Unpack and inspect equipment

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

3 Use tin snips to cut container strapping.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

4 If necessary, unstack boxes onto a level surface.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

5 Open top flaps of all boxes.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

6 In box containing 1678 Metro Core Connect shelf, remove packing foam over front of
shelf.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

7 In box containing 1678 Metro Core Connect shelf, carefully cut away portion of ESD bag
covering front of shelf.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

8 Remove fans and modules, excluding filler panels, from shelf. Place modules onto an
appropriate static-dissipative work surface or into antistatic bags or containers to prevent
module damage.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

9 Remove shelf from box, removing any additional packing material covering shelf. Place
shelf onto a level surface.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

10 Inspect 1678 Metro Core Connect shelf and its card cage area for visible damage. If
damage is visible, contact Alcatel-Lucent to report damage and to find out what to do
next.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

11 Inspect contents of box containing accessories for damage or missing parts.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

12 To report damage or missing parts, contact Alcatel-Lucent TSC at 1-888-252-2832.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

13 STOP. This procedure is complete.

E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
3-4 Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary 3AG 24622 EAAA TQZZA
Use pursuant to applicable agreements Issue 1 February 2010
Installation Procedure 3-2: Prepare floor

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Procedure 3-2: Prepare floor

When to use
This chart provides instructions to prepare floors.

General
Equipment racks are designed for fixed-location installation. Standard and earthquake
rack assemblies are available. The 26 in. wide equipment racks are installed on 36 in.
centers.
Alcatel-Lucent provides expert Installation Services for installations that have different
requirements from the recommended configuration as outlined in this manual. Contact
Alcatel-Lucent at 1-888-252-2832 for details.

Recommended tools
• Safety glasses
• Chalk line and chalk (blue)
• Heavy duty extension cord (50 ft.)
• Felt-tipped marking pen
• Insulated trouble lamp (droplight—Duralamp, or equivalent)
• Rotary impact drill and associated drill bits
• Steel measuring tape (50 ft.)
• System template, single rack layout (PN 3EM19359AAAAHCZZA)
• Vacuum cleaner, High Efficiency Particulate Arrester (HEPA)

Task
Complete the following steps.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

1 Observe the following guidelines:

1. Verify that layouts of floor, ceiling, and walls are as indicated in applicable drawings
and specifications.
2. Verify that area dimensions and location of reference points correspond to floor plan.
3. Mark all reference and layout lines.
4. To avoid possibility of cumulative errors when short dimensions are laid out in a
straight line, mark total length, divide into shorter lengths, and leave steel measuring
tape in place.
5. Where layout lines intersect, extend lines at least 6 in. beyond point of intersection to
check equipment alignment.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
3AG 24622 EAAA TQZZA Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary 3-5
Issue 1 February 2010 Use pursuant to applicable agreements
Installation Procedure 3-2: Prepare floor

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

2 NOTICE
Possibility of equipment damage.
Use a level to check entire mounting floor space. Do not try to mount rack on uneven
floor.

Figure 3-1 Rack footprint

36.0

DS3 MATRIX MATRIX DS3

DS3

DC PWR DC PWR

15.5
AC PWR

AC PWR
LAN

LAN
FIBER

FIBER
ALL DIMENSIONS FRONT
678-0222-1
IN INCHES
022006

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
3-6 Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary 3AG 24622 EAAA TQZZA
Use pursuant to applicable agreements Issue 1 February 2010
Installation Procedure 3-2: Prepare floor

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Figure 3-2 Rack bay (PN 1AD014120032)

5.00

21.50 0.50

1.75

22.31

84.00

REMOVABLE COVER

5.91

25.94
7.00

ALL DIMENSIONS 678-0223-1

IN INCHES 022106

Verify required space for rack (see Figure 3-1, “Rack footprint” (p. 3-6)).
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

3 Follow chalk line to mark front baseline and end of rack.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

4 Lay out system template (PN 3EM19359AAAAHCZZA, single rack layout).

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
3AG 24622 EAAA TQZZA Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary 3-7
Issue 1 February 2010 Use pursuant to applicable agreements
Installation Procedure 3-2: Prepare floor

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

5 Use felt-tipped marking pen to mark anchor points for rack.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

6 Prepare for Rack Installation

Rack design is 5.00 in. extruded steel channel with 43 vertical EIA mounting increments
with 12-24 tapped holes. Tapped hole pattern provides for mounting shelf assemblies and
ancillary equipment on front of channels and rack rear covers. Racks are typically
installed on concrete floors; however, rack can also be bolted to wood or steel floor.
Earthquake rack installation is effective only on concrete flooring that is at least 6 in.
thick, has minimum strength of 300 psi, and is reinforced with 0.5 percent steel rebar.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

7 Is installation on concrete floor, raised computer-equipment floor, uni-strut floor anchor

system, or wood or steel floor?
If concrete floor, go to Step 8.
If raised computer-equipment floor, go to Step 23.
If uni-strut floor anchor system, go to Step 33.
If wood or steel floor, go to Step 43.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

8 Concrete Floor
Install floor anchors and mount rack. Use base-mounting kit for standard rack on concrete
floors.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

9 Position and lock chuck/shank assembly in rotary impact drill.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

10 Insert and seat anchor in chuck.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

11 Let the tool do the work. Apply only enough pressure to control tool. Vertical force in
excess of weight of tool reduces impact force, thus inhibiting drilling process for self-drill
anchors.
To position anchor, operate drill in impact mode. Use impact action until teeth are
embedded just below concrete surface.

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
3-8 Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary 3AG 24622 EAAA TQZZA
Use pursuant to applicable agreements Issue 1 February 2010
Installation Procedure 3-2: Prepare floor

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

12 WARNING
Possibility of personal injury.
Never use air hose to clean dust from a hole, as dust may be blown into eyes and
equipment. For the same reason, do not flick out dust. Use HEPA vacuum cleaner to
remove dust from hole.

Care must be taken to ensure that concrete dust from drilling is contained in immediate
vicinity of drill hole. The following two methods ensure that dust does not spread:
1. Use a HEPA vacuum cleaner to completely remove concrete cuttings from hole while
drilling. Hole must be completely clear for proper seating of anchor.
2. Fill disposable cup with shaving cream and place it over drill hole. Drill through
bottom of cup. Shaving cream will contain and trap dust particles.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

13 Engage rotation mode, then drill until chuck is within 1/16 in. above concrete surface. See
Figure 3-3, “Self-drilling anchor” (p. 3-10).
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

14 Stop tool and lift approximately 1 in. to disengage impact action, then start tool and
withdraw anchor.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

15 Disengage rotation action. While anchor is still attached, start tool to expel concrete
cuttings from anchor.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

16 Completely remove concrete cuttings from hole with vacuum, and inspect hole for any
concrete chips. Hole must be completely clear for proper seating of anchor.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

17 Insert and lightly seat expansion plug in anchor.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

18 Verify that tool is in impact position. Insert anchor in hole and seat with impact action of
tool until chuck is 1/16 in. above concrete. See Figure 3-4, “Anchor setting” (p. 3-10).

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
3AG 24622 EAAA TQZZA Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary 3-9
Issue 1 February 2010 Use pursuant to applicable agreements
Installation Procedure 3-2: Prepare floor

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Figure 3-3 Self-drilling anchor

CHUCK

CHUCKING CONE

1/16 IN. ANCHOR

(SELF-DRILLING)

CONCRETE
CUTTING
BIT

678-0252-1
081806

Figure 3-4 Anchor setting

SHANK

CHUCK

CHUCKING CONE

1/16 IN.

EXPANSION PLUG

678-0253-1
081706

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

19 Break off chucking cone with hard push of tool.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

20 Remove chucking cone from chuck.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

21 If rack is not to be installed immediately, cover anchors with tape.

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
3-10 Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary 3AG 24622 EAAA TQZZA
Use pursuant to applicable agreements Issue 1 February 2010
Installation Procedure 3-2: Prepare floor

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

22 Go to Step 47.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

23 Raised Computer-Equipment Floor

Installation of equipment on raised computer-equipment floor is site-specific. Installation
should be in accordance with GR-1275-CORE, Central Office Environment
Installation/Removal Generic Requirements for raised-floor environments. Method of
installation will be determined when preparing Method of Procedure (MOP).
To install rack assembly on raised computer-equipment floor, ensure that floor can
support rack load.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

24 Follow job floor plan, and mark equipment locations on floor with chalk line.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

25 Follow chalk line to mark front baseline and end of rack.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

26 Lay out 1678 Metro Core Connect system template (PN 3EM19359AAAAHCZZA,
single rack layout).
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

27 Use felt-tipped marking pen and template to mark location of mounting holes.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

28 Drill 5/8 in. hole for 5/8 in. threaded rod.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

29 Drop plumb bob through drilled holes.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

30 Use felt-tipped marking pen to mark position on concrete floor.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

31 Remove floor tiles to gain access to concrete floor.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

32 To install floor anchors on concrete floor, go to Step 8.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

33 Uni-Strut Floor Anchor System

Use felt-tipped marking pen and template to mark location of mounting holes.

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
3AG 24622 EAAA TQZZA Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary 3-11
Issue 1 February 2010 Use pursuant to applicable agreements
Installation Procedure 3-2: Prepare floor

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

34 Drill 5/8 in. hole for 5/8 in. threaded rod.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

35 Drop plumb bob through drilled holes.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

36 Use felt-tipped marking pen to mark position on concrete floor.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

37 Remove floor tiles to gain access to concrete floor.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

38 Use chalk line to mark line on front and rear of concrete floor; refer to MOP.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

39 Position uni-strut on chalk lines.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

40 Use felt-tipped marking pen to mark floor for anchor holes.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

41 Remove uni-strut then drill holes for anchors.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

42 To install floor anchors on concrete floor, go to Step 8.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

43 Wood or Steel Floor

Mark position for rack with four pilot holes for lag bolts, or four clearance holes for
machine screws.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

44 To mount standard rack on wood or steel floor, use 3/8 in. lag bolts on wood floor, or 1/2
in. screws or studs on steel floor.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

45 Drill 3/16 in. pilot hole for lag bolts, or 9/16 in. clearance hole for machine screws.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

46 If rack is not to be installed immediately, cover holes with tape.

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
3-12 Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary 3AG 24622 EAAA TQZZA
Use pursuant to applicable agreements Issue 1 February 2010
Installation Procedure 3-2: Prepare floor

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

47 STOP. This procedure is complete.

E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
3AG 24622 EAAA TQZZA Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary 3-13
Issue 1 February 2010 Use pursuant to applicable agreements
Installation Procedure 3-3: Install racks

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Procedure 3-3: Install racks

When to use
This chart provides instructions to install standard racks.

General
The standard equipment rack design uses 5.00 in. extruded steel channel with 43 vertical
EIA mounting increments that use 12-24 tapped holes. The tapped-hole pattern provides
for mounting shelf assemblies and ancillary equipment on the front and rear of the
channels. Standard racks are typically installed on concrete floors; however, standard
racks can also be bolted to wood, steel, or raised tile floor.
The racks shown in this chart are typical 23 in. ANSI racks.
The recommended configuration includes integrated rack-level fiber management and
trim. See Figure 3-5, “Recommended configuration (front)” (p. 3-15), which illustrates a
single-shelf configuration, consisting of an NGTRU and one 1678 Metro Core Connect
shelf. Only one 1678 Metro Core Connect shelf can be installed in a rack.
An alternate configuration is available with the 1678 Metro Core Connect shelf mounted
in the lower position in the rack. See figure 3-2, which illustrates the alternate,
lower-shelf configuration, consisting of an NGTRU and one 1678 Metro Core Connect
shelf mounted near the bottom of the rack
Alcatel-Lucent provides expert Installation Services for installations that have different
requirements from the recommended configuration as outlined in this manual. Contact
Alcatel-Lucent at 1-888-252-2832 for details.

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
3-14 Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary 3AG 24622 EAAA TQZZA
Use pursuant to applicable agreements Issue 1 February 2010
Installation Procedure 3-3: Install racks

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Figure 3-5 Recommended configuration (front)

NGTRU

1678 MCC

678-0221-1
022006

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
3AG 24622 EAAA TQZZA Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary 3-15
Issue 1 February 2010 Use pursuant to applicable agreements
Installation Procedure 3-3: Install racks

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Figure 3-6 Alternate configuration (front)

NGTRU

1678 MCC

678-0339-1
050108

Recommended tools
• Carpenter's level, heavy duty
• Heavy-duty extension cord (50 ft)
• Foot-pound torque wrench
• Insulated trouble lamp (droplight—Duralamp, or equivalent)
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
3-16 Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary 3AG 24622 EAAA TQZZA
Use pursuant to applicable agreements Issue 1 February 2010
Installation Procedure 3-3: Install racks

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
• Pinch bar
• Shims (0.06 in., 0.09 in., 0.012 in.)
• Socket set, 3/8 in. drive with ratchet handle and extensions
• Steel measuring tape (50 ft)
• Wrenches (3/8 to 11/16 in.), open- and box-end combination

Task
Complete the following steps.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

1 Verify that equipment rack is unpacked properly and that all other site-specific equipment
is on site. Ensure that floor is properly prepared. Refer to Procedure 3-2: “Prepare floor”
(p. 3-5).
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

2 Cover surrounding floor area with protective covering as required by local practice.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

3 NOTICE
Possibility of equipment damage.
Brace top of rack during movement to prevent tipping and to avoid strains that might
twist or otherwise damage rack.
Position Rack
If positioning dolly is not available, place piece of canvas under rack footing to prevent
damage to floor.
Use positioning dolly to move equipment to its permanent location in equipment room or
vault.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

4 Move frame to floor location for installation.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

5 Verify proper rack type for each location, using site-specific engineering specification
package.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

6 NOTICE
Possibility of equipment damage.
If installed in rack, do not use NGTRU as a hand hold when lifting rack.

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
3AG 24622 EAAA TQZZA Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary 3-17
Issue 1 February 2010 Use pursuant to applicable agreements
Installation Procedure 3-3: Install racks

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Raise rack to vertical position.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

7 Carefully position frame over mounting holes on floor.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

8 Use hardware supplied in rack mechanical kits to secure rack to floor.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

9 Secure top of rack to overhead superstructure. See Figure 3-7, “Typical overhead uni-strut
support” (p. 3-18) for typical overhead uni-strut support assembly.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

10 Install but do not tighten anchor bolts.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

11 STOP. This procedure is complete.

Figure 3-7 Typical overhead uni-strut support

NUT

WASHER

OVERHEAD UNI-STRUT SUPPORT BAR

NUT

5/8-11 STOCK

FRONT EQUIPMENT
OF SPACE
BAY

678-0254-1
081706

E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
3-18 Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary 3AG 24622 EAAA TQZZA
Use pursuant to applicable agreements Issue 1 February 2010
Installation Procedure 3-4: Install overhead rack support

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Procedure 3-4: Install overhead rack support

When to use
This chart provides instructions to install overhead rack supports.

General
Alcatel-Lucent provides expert Installation Services for installations that have different
requirements from the recommended configuration as outlined in this manual. Contact
Alcatel-Lucent at 1-888-252-2832 for details.

Recommended tools
• Insulated trouble lamp
• Socket set, 3/8 in. drive with ratchet handle and extensions
• Wrenches, (3/8 to 11/16 in.) open- and box-end combination
• V-bolts, corner and wall brackets, channels, and other hardware

Task
Complete the following steps.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

1 Brace rack per recommended office practice. See Figure 3-8, “Typical overhead rack
support” (p. 3-20) for typical method of bracing standard rack.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

2 Lay out appropriate length of uni-strut support bar sections on top of adjacent racks
equipped with 1678 Metro Core Connect systems.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

3 Use supplied kit hardware to join uni-strut support bar sections until uni-strut support bar
runs length of all adjacent racks.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

4 Use hardware supplied in rack mechanical kits to secure rack to overhead uni-strut
support bar.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

5 Attach uni-strut bar under rack to secure rack to floor. Ensure that bar goes under both
parallel support stringers below equipment.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

6 Use supplied hardware to secure uni-strut bar to rack by running precut threaded rod
through uni-strut, tile, and mounting hole in equipment.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
3AG 24622 EAAA TQZZA Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary 3-19
Issue 1 February 2010 Use pursuant to applicable agreements
Installation Procedure 3-4: Install overhead rack support

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

7 Use supplied washers and nuts to secure rod.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

8 Line up and plumb rack.

Figure 3-8 Typical overhead rack support

NUT

WASHER

OVERHEAD UNI-STRUT SUPPORT BAR

NUT

5/8-11 STOCK

FRONT EQUIPMENT
OF SPACE
BAY

678-0254-1
081706

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

9 Check level and alignment of frame at base, top, and both sides. When necessary, insert
shims under base to correct leveling.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

10 Tighten and torque floor anchor bolts to 80 ft-lbs.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

11 Tighten top support hardware and recheck floor anchor bolts.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

12 Repeat Step 1 through Step 11 for each adjacent rack until all racks are installed.

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
3-20 Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary 3AG 24622 EAAA TQZZA
Use pursuant to applicable agreements Issue 1 February 2010
Installation Procedure 3-4: Install overhead rack support

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

13 STOP. This procedure is complete.

E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
3AG 24622 EAAA TQZZA Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary 3-21
Issue 1 February 2010 Use pursuant to applicable agreements
Installation Procedure 3-5: Route and connect frame-ground cable

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Procedure 3-5: Route and connect frame-ground cable

When to use
This chart provides instructions to route and connect frame-ground cable to equipment
rack.

Recommended tools
• Anti-oxidation compound such as NO-OX-ID™1 or equivalent
• Wire crimp tool and die
• Station-ground cable, #6 AWG (or larger) wire rack frame-ground
• Wire compression lug (PN 304-0538-010)

Task

DANGER
Possibility of personal injury.
Hazardous electrical potentials are present. Severe arcing is possible and can cause
burns or eye injury.
Remove rings, watches, and other metal jewelry when working with primary circuits.
Exercise caution to avoid shorting power input terminals.

WARNING
Electric-shock hazard
Exposed voltage of up to −56 V DC might be present on terminal.
Exercise care during the following test.

Complete the following steps.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

1 Refer to job site documentation for cable specifications.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

2 Complete an identification tag for each cable then attach tag to cable.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

3 Connect the frame-ground cable. See figures Figure 3-9, “Frame ground location, top of
rack” (p. 3-23) and Figure 3-10, “Frame ground location, base of rack” (p. 3-23) for
frame ground locations.

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
3-22 Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary 3AG 24622 EAAA TQZZA
Use pursuant to applicable agreements Issue 1 February 2010
Installation Procedure 3-5: Route and connect frame-ground cable

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

4 STOP. This procedure is complete.

Figure 3-9 Frame ground location, top of rack

TO OFFICE/STATION
GROUNDING SYSTEM

GROUNDING
STRIP

LUG
SCREW
ASSEMBLIES

RACK REAR

678-0259-1
081706

Figure 3-10 Frame ground location, base of rack

RAISED FLOOR
C.O. GROUND
LOCATION

RACK REAR

678-0260-1
081706

E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
3AG 24622 EAAA TQZZA Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary 3-23
Issue 1 February 2010 Use pursuant to applicable agreements
Installation Procedure 3-6: Mount 1678 Metro Core Connect shelf and
NGTRU in rack
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Procedure 3-6: Mount 1678 Metro Core Connect shelf and

NGTRU in rack
When to use
This chart provides instructions to mount the 1678 Metro Core Connect shelf and the
NGTRU in an equipment rack.

General
Alcatel-Lucent provides expert Installation Services for installations that have different
requirements from the recommended configuration as outlined in this manual. Contact
Alcatel-Lucent at 1-888-252-2832 for details.

Recommended tools
• Screwdrivers, T9, T10, and T15
• Adjustable wrench, 6 in.
• Hex-head socket wrench, 6 mm
• Screwdriver, Phillips, #1 x 6-inch

Task

CAUTION
Lifting hazard
The empty 1678 Metro Core Connect shelf requires only one person to lift, support, align,
and attach it to an equipment rack. The 1678 Metro Core Connect requires two people to
unpack the shelf from the box.
To prevent equipment damage or personal injury, make sure appropriate help or suitable
lifting equipment is available if needed.

CAUTION
Possibility of personal injury.
Install Alcatel-Lucent 1678 Metro Core Connect in a restricted-access area only.
Entrance to a restricted access area is intended for qualified or trained personnel and
access to it is controlled by a locked barrier.

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
3-24 Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary 3AG 24622 EAAA TQZZA
Use pursuant to applicable agreements Issue 1 February 2010
Installation Procedure 3-6: Mount 1678 Metro Core Connect shelf and
NGTRU in rack
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
CAUTION
Possibility of personal injury.
To prevent personal injury and equipment damage due to unbalanced loading of
equipment rack or cabinet, make sure equipment rack or cabinet is properly secured to
floor, ceiling, or other rigid structure before mounting 1678 Metro Core Connect shelf
and NGTRU.

NOTICE
Possibility of equipment damage.
Use care when installing metric hardware. The fine threads of the metric hardware are
more suspect to stripping.

NOTICE
Possibility of equipment damage.
Do not handle the NGTRU by the top panel. Handle the NGTRU only by the shelf
mounting brackets (once installed) for ESD purposes.

NOTICE
Possibility of equipment damage.
The intra-building port(s) of the equipment or subassembly is suitable for connection to
intra-building or unexposed wiring or cabling only. The intra-building port(s) of the
equipment or subassembly MUST NOT be metallically connected to interfaces that
connect to the OSP or its wiring. These interfaces are designed for use as intra-building
interfaces only (Type 2 or Type 4 ports as described in GR-1089-CORE, Issue 4) and
require isolation from the exposed OSP cabling. The addition of Primary Protectors is not
sufficient protection in order to connect these interfaces metallically to OSP wiring.
Complete the following steps.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

1 Install NGTRU
If an appropriate ESD work surface is not available, lay out the ESD bag removed from
the 1678 Metro Core Connect shelf to use as a work surface for assembling NGTRU.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

2 Verify no strap is installed across power terminals of NGTRU. If strap is present, remove
and discard it. See Figure 3-11, “NGTRU hardware” (p. 3-32) and detail A.

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
3AG 24622 EAAA TQZZA Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary 3-25
Issue 1 February 2010 Use pursuant to applicable agreements
Installation Procedure 3-6: Mount 1678 Metro Core Connect shelf and
NGTRU in rack
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

3 NOTICE
Possibility of equipment damage.
Excessive force applied to the bars will cause the NGTRU backplane to fail.
Never exert more than 80 lbs of force on power bus bars once they are installed to the
NGTRU backplane.

Install NGTRU mounting brackets left (PN 3AG24353AA) and right (PN 3AG24353AB)
to respective sides of NGTRU using two M6 × 12 hex-head screws and two lock washers
per bracket. Torque screws to 43-50 inch-pounds. See Figure 3-12, “Mounting brackets”
(p. 3-33).
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

4 Attach rear plastic guard to NGTRU backplane using one M2.5 × 8 screw. See Figure
3-13, “Rear plastic guard” (p. 3-33).
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

5 Insert each bus bar into rear plastic guard and attach to backplane terminals using two
M3 × 16 screws per bus bar and a screwdriver, Phillips, #1. Torque each screw to 5 to 7
inch-pounds. The bus bars wrap over the top and hang off of the back for power cable
termination. See Figure 3-13, “Rear plastic guard” (p. 3-33) and Figure 3-14, “Bus bars
without cover” (p. 3-33).
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

6 Attach front cover to bus bar assembly using two M2.5 × 8 screws. See Figure 3-13,
“Rear plastic guard” (p. 3-33).
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

7 Using four rack screws install assembled NGTRU to front of rack in rack increments 2
through 5 as shown in Figure 3-15, “NGTRU and recommended shelf locations (upper
shelf)” (p. 3-34).
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

8 Install 1678 Metro Core Connect Shelf

Install upper (PN 3AG24289AA) and lower (PN 3AG24290AA) shelf cover extensions to
left and right sides of shelf. Secure the extension brackets using two M3 × 20 screws per
bracket. See Figure 3-17, “Locations of the existing shelf catching mechanisms”
(p. 3-36) and details A and B.

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
3-26 Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary 3AG 24622 EAAA TQZZA
Use pursuant to applicable agreements Issue 1 February 2010
Installation Procedure 3-6: Mount 1678 Metro Core Connect shelf and
NGTRU in rack
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

9 Attach square EMI gasket to each top bracket. Refer to 1678 Metro Core Connect
Engineering Support Documentation (PN 3EM19211AE) and see Figure 3-17, “Locations
of the existing shelf catching mechanisms” (p. 3-36) and detail A.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

10 Loosen screws at top front of shelf. Insert label bracket beneath loosened plate and torque
previously loosened screws to 20-24 in pounds. Refer to 1678 Metro Core Connect
Engineering Support Documentation (PN 3EM19211AE) and see Figure 3-18, “Label
bracket installation” (p. 3-37) Front view.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

11 Terminate 45 degree lug of frame ground cable (PN 3EM19954AA) to existing screws on
lower right side of shelf. Leave opposite end loose. See Figure 3-18, “Label bracket
installation” (p. 3-37) Right view.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

12 Where is the 1678 Metro Core Connect shelf to be mounted?

If upper shelf location If lower shelf location,

go to Step 13. go to Step 21.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

13 Using five rack screws each, attach shelf mounting brackets left (PN 3AG24351AA) and
right (PN 3AG24351AB) to their respective sides of rack in rack increments 11 through
23, orienting bracket so that it extends inward towards the rear of the rack. See Figure
3-19, “Shelf bracket installation” (p. 3-38) and view A.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

14 Mount wrist strap jack (PN 3EM19546AA) in rack increment 24. See Figure 3-19, “Shelf
bracket installation” (p. 3-38).
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

15 Install eight M6 × 12 hex-head screws and eight lock washers to previously installed shelf
mounting brackets in rack increments 8 through 23 as shown in Figure 3-15, “NGTRU
and recommended shelf locations (upper shelf)” (p. 3-34). Tighten screws by hand until
heads are 1/4 in. from mounting bracket. See Figure 3-20, “Shelf installation” (p. 3-39).
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

16 Carefully lift 1678 Metro Core Connect shelf and temporarily hang onto screws installed
onto shelf mounting brackets in Step 15. Refer to 1678 Metro Core Connect Engineering
Support Documentation (PN 3EM19211AE) and see Figure 3-21, “Shelf installation”
(p. 3-40).
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
3AG 24622 EAAA TQZZA Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary 3-27
Issue 1 February 2010 Use pursuant to applicable agreements
Installation Procedure 3-6: Mount 1678 Metro Core Connect shelf and
NGTRU in rack
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

17 Align shelf then tighten mounting screws to secure the shelf to the mounting brackets.
Torque screws to 43-50 inch-pounds.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

18 Install Air Deflector

Install air deflector directly above 1678 Metro Core Connect shelf using two rack screws
as shown in Figure 3-15, “NGTRU and recommended shelf locations (upper shelf)”
(p. 3-34) and Figure 3-21, “Shelf installation” (p. 3-40).
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

19 Install Fans
Install fans (do not seat them) above and below 1678 Metro Core Connect shelf,
tightening retaining screws on top left and top right of each fan after installation. See
Figure 3-21, “Shelf installation” (p. 3-40).
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

20 Install fan filter below bottom fan, securing filter by tightening center retaining screw.
See Figure 3-21, “Shelf installation” (p. 3-40).
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

21 Using five rack screws each, attach shelf mounting brackets left (PN 3AG24351AA) and
right (PN 3AG24351AB) to their respective sides of rack in rack increments 27 through
42, orienting bracket so that it extends inward towards the rear of the rack. See Figure
3-19, “Shelf bracket installation” (p. 3-38) and view A.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

22 Mount wrist strap jack (PN 3EM19546AA) in rack increment 24. See Figure 3-19, “Shelf
bracket installation” (p. 3-38).
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

23 Install eight M6 × 12 hex-head screws and eight lock washers to previously installed shelf
mounting brackets in rack increments 27 through 42 as shown in Figure 3-16, “NGTRU
and alternate shelf locations (lower shelf)” (p. 3-35). Tighten screws by hand until heads
are 1/4 in. from mounting bracket. See Step 23.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

24 Carefully lift 1678 Metro Core Connect shelf and temporarily hang onto screws installed
onto shelf mounting brackets in Step 15. Refer to 1678 Metro Core Connect Engineering
Support Documentation (PN 3EM19211AE) and see Figure 3-21, “Shelf installation”
(p. 3-40).

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
3-28 Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary 3AG 24622 EAAA TQZZA
Use pursuant to applicable agreements Issue 1 February 2010
Installation Procedure 3-6: Mount 1678 Metro Core Connect shelf and
NGTRU in rack
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

25 Align shelf then tighten mounting screws to secure the shelf to the mounting brackets.
Torque screws to 43-50 inch-pounds.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

26 Install Air Deflector

Install air deflector directly above 1678 Metro Core Connect shelf using two rack screws
as shown in Figure 3-16, “NGTRU and alternate shelf locations (lower shelf)” (p. 3-35).
Refer to 1678 Metro Core Connect Engineering Support Documentation (PN
3EM19211AE).
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

27 Install Fans
Install fans (do not seat them) above and below 1678 Metro Core Connect shelf,
tightening retaining screws on top left and top right of each fan after installation. Refer to
1678 Metro Core Connect Engineering Support Documentation (PN 3EM19211AE) and
see drawing 3EM195420004RJZZA, page 31, figure 3102.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

28 Install fan filter below bottom fan, securing filter by tightening center retaining screw.
Refer to 1678 Metro Core Connect Engineering Support Documentation (PN
3EM19211AE).
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

29 Install brackets
Mount rear kick panel mounting brackets (PN 3EM16494AB) to plates (PN
3EM131405AB) on bottom-rear of rack frame, placing plates on inside of rack frame and
brackets on outside of rack frame. See Figure 3-22, “Cable tie bracket installation”
(p. 3-41) view A.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

30 Mount tie brackets (PN 3EM11696AB) to rack at rack increments 2, 5, 9, 15, 23, 28, 34,
and 41 on both sides of rack. See Figure 3-22, “Cable tie bracket installation”
(p. 3-41) and view B for proper bracket orientation.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

31 Mount spool mounting brackets (PN 3EM15917AA) to each side of top, rear of rack,
facing bracket opening downward. See Figure 3-22, “Cable tie bracket installation”
(p. 3-41).

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
3AG 24622 EAAA TQZZA Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary 3-29
Issue 1 February 2010 Use pursuant to applicable agreements
Installation Procedure 3-6: Mount 1678 Metro Core Connect shelf and
NGTRU in rack
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

32 WARNING
Electric-shock hazard
Plug-in modules can be installed and removed with rack power on. Hazardous electrical
potential are present.
Use extreme care when installing or removing modules.

NOTICE
ESD hazard
Plug-in modules contain electrostatic-sensitive devices. These devices can be damaged by
electrostatic discharge.
Refer to Introduction, Section “Electrostatic sensitive devices” (p. 1-17) for special
handling instructions.

NOTICE
Possibility of equipment damage.
To prevent screw head damage, do not use a power screwdriver to loosen screws.

NOTICE
Service-disruption hazard
Possibility of service interruption.
Use this procedure only for initial turn-up of a system. Never use this procedure on a
traffic-carrying system. When working with a traffic-carrying system, refer to the 1678
MCC Maintenance and Trouble-Clearing Guide.

Unseat Modules
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

33 Using a screwdriver, Phillips,#1, loosen two captive screws on module (see Figure 3-23,
“Module removal” (p. 3-42)).
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

34 NOTICE
Possibility of equipment damage.
To prevent thumbscrew damage, do not use a power screwdriver to loosen thumbscrews.

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
3-30 Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary 3AG 24622 EAAA TQZZA
Use pursuant to applicable agreements Issue 1 February 2010
Installation Procedure 3-6: Mount 1678 Metro Core Connect shelf and
NGTRU in rack
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Simultaneously, pull upper and lower ejector handles (see Figure 3-23, “Module removal”
(p. 3-42)).
Ejector handles force module from backplane connectors.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

35 Continue pulling on ejector handles until about 2 inches of module extend from slot.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

36 Have all modules been unseated in shelf?

If yes, go to Step 37.
If no, go to Step 33.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

37 In shelf, loosen four captive screws on front of fan tray.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

38 Simultaneously, pull left and right ejector handles.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

39 Carefully slide out fan tray until about 2 inches of fan tray extends from slot.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

40 STOP. This procedure is complete.

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
3AG 24622 EAAA TQZZA Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary 3-31
Issue 1 February 2010 Use pursuant to applicable agreements
Installation Procedure 3-6: Mount 1678 Metro Core Connect shelf and
NGTRU in rack
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Figure 3-11 NGTRU hardware

Detail A

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
3-32 Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary 3AG 24622 EAAA TQZZA
Use pursuant to applicable agreements Issue 1 February 2010
Installation Procedure 3-6: Mount 1678 Metro Core Connect shelf and
NGTRU in rack
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Figure 3-12 Mounting brackets

Mounting
Brackets

Figure 3-13 Rear plastic guard

Figure 3-14 Bus bars without cover

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
3AG 24622 EAAA TQZZA Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary 3-33
Issue 1 February 2010 Use pursuant to applicable agreements
Installation Procedure 3-6: Mount 1678 Metro Core Connect shelf and
NGTRU in rack
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Figure 3-15 NGTRU and recommended shelf locations (upper shelf)

NGTRU
INSTALLS IN
RU 2-5

AIR DEFLECTOR
RU 7-8

1678 SHELF
FAN ASSEMBLY INSTALLS IN
RU 8-23

FILTER ASSEMBLY

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
3-34 Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary 3AG 24622 EAAA TQZZA
Use pursuant to applicable agreements Issue 1 February 2010
Installation Procedure 3-6: Mount 1678 Metro Core Connect shelf and
NGTRU in rack
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Figure 3-16 NGTRU and alternate shelf locations (lower shelf)

NGTRU
INSTALLS IN
RU 2-5

AIR DEFLECTOR
RU 26-27

1678 SHELF
FAN ASSEMBLY INSTALLS IN
RU 27-42

FILTER ASSEMBLY

678-0340-1
050108

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
3AG 24622 EAAA TQZZA Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary 3-35
Issue 1 February 2010 Use pursuant to applicable agreements
Installation Procedure 3-6: Mount 1678 Metro Core Connect shelf and
NGTRU in rack
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Figure 3-17 Locations of the existing shelf catching mechanisms

Detail A

Detail B

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
3-36 Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary 3AG 24622 EAAA TQZZA
Use pursuant to applicable agreements Issue 1 February 2010
Installation Procedure 3-6: Mount 1678 Metro Core Connect shelf and
NGTRU in rack
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Figure 3-18 Label bracket installation

Right view
Front view

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
3AG 24622 EAAA TQZZA Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary 3-37
Issue 1 February 2010 Use pursuant to applicable agreements
Installation Procedure 3-6: Mount 1678 Metro Core Connect shelf and
NGTRU in rack
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Figure 3-19 Shelf bracket installation

Front view View A

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
3-38 Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary 3AG 24622 EAAA TQZZA
Use pursuant to applicable agreements Issue 1 February 2010
Installation Procedure 3-6: Mount 1678 Metro Core Connect shelf and
NGTRU in rack
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Figure 3-20 Shelf installation

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
3AG 24622 EAAA TQZZA Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary 3-39
Issue 1 February 2010 Use pursuant to applicable agreements
Installation Procedure 3-6: Mount 1678 Metro Core Connect shelf and
NGTRU in rack
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Figure 3-21 Shelf installation

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
3-40 Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary 3AG 24622 EAAA TQZZA
Use pursuant to applicable agreements Issue 1 February 2010
Installation Procedure 3-6: Mount 1678 Metro Core Connect shelf and
NGTRU in rack
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Figure 3-22 Cable tie bracket installation
Views A, B

View A

View B Rear view

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
3AG 24622 EAAA TQZZA Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary 3-41
Issue 1 February 2010 Use pursuant to applicable agreements
Installation Procedure 3-6: Mount 1678 Metro Core Connect shelf and
NGTRU in rack
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Figure 3-23 Module removal

E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
3-42 Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary 3AG 24622 EAAA TQZZA
Use pursuant to applicable agreements Issue 1 February 2010
Installation Procedure 3-7: Connect shelf and NGTRU ground cables to
rack
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Procedure 3-7: Connect shelf and NGTRU ground cables to

rack
When to use
This chart provides instructions to connect shelf and NGTRU ground cables to equipment
rack.

Recommended tools
• Anti-oxidation compound such as NO-OX-ID™1 or equivalent
• Wire crimp tool and die
• Station-ground cable, #6 AWG (or larger) wire rack frame-ground
• Wire compression lug (PN 304-0538-010)
Notes
NO-OX-OD is a trademark of Sanchem, Inc.

Task

DANGER
Possibility of personal injury.
Hazardous electrical potentials are present. Severe arcing is possible and can cause
burns or eye injury.
Remove rings, watches, and other metal jewelry when working with primary circuits.
Exercise caution to avoid shorting power input terminals.

WARNING
Electric-shock hazard
Exposed voltage of up to −56 V DC might be present on terminal.
Exercise care during the following test.

Complete the following steps.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

1 Refer to job site documentation for cable specifications.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

2 Complete an identification tag for each cable, then attach tag to cable.

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
3AG 24622 EAAA TQZZA Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary 3-43
Issue 1 February 2010 Use pursuant to applicable agreements
Installation Procedure 3-7: Connect shelf and NGTRU ground cables to
rack
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

3 Apply anti-oxidation compound to NGTRU bus bar and rack frame ground connection
points. See Figure 3-24, “Internal frame ground termination” (p. 3-45).
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

4 Using two rack screws at each end connect frame ground cable (PN 3EM19954AB)
between NGTRU bus bar and frame ground location at top of rack. See Figure 3-24,
“Internal frame ground termination” (p. 3-45).
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

5 Using two rack screws terminate loose end of shelf frame ground cable (PN
3EM19954AA) installed in Procedure 3-6: “Mount 1678 Metro Core Connect shelf and
NGTRU in rack” (p. 3-24) to the left position of NGTRU buss bar. See Figure 3-24,
“Internal frame ground termination” (p. 3-45).
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

6 Secure frame ground cable as necessary.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

7 STOP. This procedure is complete.

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
3-44 Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary 3AG 24622 EAAA TQZZA
Use pursuant to applicable agreements Issue 1 February 2010
Installation Procedure 3-7: Connect shelf and NGTRU ground cables to
rack
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Figure 3-24 Internal frame ground termination

E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
3AG 24622 EAAA TQZZA Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary 3-45
Issue 1 February 2010 Use pursuant to applicable agreements
Installation Procedure 3-8: Install NGTRU cables

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Procedure 3-8: Install NGTRU cables

When to use
This chart provides instructions to install cables on the NGTRU.

General
Alcatel-Lucent provides expert Installation Services for installations that have different
requirements from the recommended configuration as outlined in this manual. Contact
Alcatel-Lucent at 1-888-252-2832 for details.

Recommended tools
• Safety glasses
• Screwdriver, Phillips, #2

Before you begin

Equipment rack must be disconnected from any power source. Main CO breakers at the
BDFB panel are used to disconnect power from the rack.

Task

DANGER
Possibility of personal injury.
Hazardous electrical potentials are present. Severe arcing is possible and can cause
burns or eye injury.
Remove rings, watches, and other metal jewelry when working with primary circuits.
Exercise caution to avoid shorting power input terminals.

WARNING
Electric-shock hazard
Exposed voltage of up to −56 V DC might be present on terminal.
Exercise care during the following test.

Complete the following steps.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

1 Verify that CO ground is connected to rack.

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
3-46 Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary 3AG 24622 EAAA TQZZA
Use pursuant to applicable agreements Issue 1 February 2010
Installation Procedure 3-8: Install NGTRU cables

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

2 Where is the 1678 Metro Core Connect shelf mounted?

If upper shelf location If lower shelf location,

go to Step 3. go to Step 9.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

3 Upper shelf location

Install cable (PN 3AG24381AA) between connectors M9 and M15 on the NGTRU. See
Figure 3-25, “NGTRU cable installation” (p. 3-50).
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

4 Connect cable (PN 3AG24383AA) to connector M1 on NGTRU. Route cable to

lower-right portion of 1678 Metro Core Connect shelf. See Figure 3-25, “NGTRU cable
installation” (p. 3-50).
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

5 Tie cable to inside facing surface of brackets (PN 3EM11696AB) as necessary.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

6 Leave unterminated end of cable hanging in front of appropriate slot of 1678 Metro Core
Connect shelf.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

7 Connect cable (PN 3AG24382AA) to connector M1 on NGTRU. Route cable to

middle-right portion of 1678 Metro Core Connect shelf. See Figure 3-25, “NGTRU cable
installation” (p. 3-50).
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

8 Go to Step 14.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

9 Lower shelf location

Install cable (PN 3AG24381AA) between connectors M9 and M15 on the NGTRU. See
Figure 3-25, “NGTRU cable installation” (p. 3-50).
Refer to 1678 Metro Core Connect Engineering Support Documentation (PN
3EM19211AE).
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

10 Connect cable (PN 3AG24383AA) to connector M7 on NGTRU. Route cable to

lower-right portion of 1678 Metro Core Connect shelf. See Figure 3-25, “NGTRU cable
installation” (p. 3-50).
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
3AG 24622 EAAA TQZZA Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary 3-47
Issue 1 February 2010 Use pursuant to applicable agreements
Installation Procedure 3-8: Install NGTRU cables

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Refer to 1678 Metro Core Connect Engineering Support Documentation (PN
3EM19211AE).
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

11 Tie cable to inside facing surface of brackets (PN 3EM11696AB) as necessary.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

12 Leave unterminated end of cable hanging in front of appropriate slot of 1678 Metro Core
Connect shelf.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

13 Connect cable (PN 3AG24382AA) to connector M1 on NGTRU. Route cable to

middle-right portion of 1678 Metro Core Connect shelf. See Figure 3-25, “NGTRU cable
installation” (p. 3-50).
Refer to 1678 Metro Core Connect Engineering Support Documentation (PN
3EM19211AE).
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

14 Tie cable to inside facing surface of brackets (PN 3EM11696AB) as necessary.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

15 Leave unterminated end of cable hanging in front of appropriate slot of 1678 Metro Core
Connect shelf.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

16 STOP. This procedure is complete.

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
3-48 Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary 3AG 24622 EAAA TQZZA
Use pursuant to applicable agreements Issue 1 February 2010
Installation Procedure 3-8: Install NGTRU cables

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Figure 3-25 NGTRU cable installation (1 of 2)

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
3AG 24622 EAAA TQZZA Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary 3-49
Issue 1 February 2010 Use pursuant to applicable agreements
Installation Procedure 3-8: Install NGTRU cables

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Figure 3-25 NGTRU cable installation (2 of 2)

E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
3-50 Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary 3AG 24622 EAAA TQZZA
Use pursuant to applicable agreements Issue 1 February 2010
Installation Procedure 3-9: Connect power cables between NGTRU and
1678 Metro Core Connect
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Procedure 3-9: Connect power cables between NGTRU and

1678 Metro Core Connect
When to use
This chart provides instructions to terminate shelf power cables between the NGTRU and
1678 Metro Core Connect shelf installed in the rack.

General
The 2-kW step-up converter supports systems with zero to four ES64SC modules. The
2.2-kW step-up converter supports all system configurations and is required in systems
with five or more ES64SC modules.
The 1678 Metro Core Connect lower shelf configuration does not support the 2-kW
step-up converter. Only the 2.2-kW step-up converter is supported in the lower shelf
configuration.
Alcatel-Lucent provides expert Installation Services for installations that have different
requirements from the recommended configuration as outlined in this manual. Contact
Alcatel-Lucent at 1-888-252-2832 for details.

Recommended tools
• 3/8 in. hex-nut driver, box wrench, or open end wrench
• Screwdriver, Phillips, #2 × 6 in.

Task

NOTICE
Possibility of equipment damage.
Minimum bend radius of 3.0 inches must be maintained for power cables.

NOTICE
Possibility of equipment damage.
Do not allow power cables to rest against shelf or mounting brackets of the NGTRU.

Complete the following steps.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

1 Which step-up converter equipped in this system?

If 2-kW step-up converter, go to Step 2.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
3AG 24622 EAAA TQZZA Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary 3-51
Issue 1 February 2010 Use pursuant to applicable agreements
Installation Procedure 3-9: Connect power cables between NGTRU and
1678 Metro Core Connect
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
If 2.2-kW step-up converter, go to Step 10.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

2 2-kW step-up converter Power Cable Installation

Connect A power cable (PN 3AG24386AA) to connector M10 on NGTRU. See Figure
3-26, “Internal power cable termination (2-kW step-up)” (p. 3-55) and view A.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

3 Route A power cable out left side of NGTRU and down left-rear side of rack to 1678
Metro Core Connect shelf, tying power cable to outside surface of previously installed
cable tie brackets (PN 3EM11696AB) as necessary. See Figure 3-26, “Internal power
cable termination (2-kW step-up)” (p. 3-55) and view A.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

4 Pass A power cable from rear of rack to front of 1678 Metro Core Connect shelf for future
termination at slot 24 once module is installed into shelf.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

5 Connect B power cable (PN 3AG24387AA) to connector M11 on NGTRU. See Figure
3-26, “Internal power cable termination (2-kW step-up)” (p. 3-55) and view A.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

6 Route B power cable out right side of NGTRU and down right-rear side of rack to 1678
Metro Core Connect shelf, tying power cable to inside surface of previously installed
cable tie brackets (PN 3EM11696AB) as necessary. See Figure 3-26, “Internal power
cable termination (2-kW step-up)” (p. 3-55) and view A.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

7 Pass B power cable from rear of rack to front of 1678 Metro Core Connect shelf for
future termination at slot 25 once module is installed into shelf.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

8 Go to Step 23.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

9 2.2-kW step-up converter Power Cable Installation

Where is the 1678 Metro Core Connect shelf mounted?
If upper shelf location, go to Step 10.
If lower shelf location, go to Step 17.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

10 Upper shelf location

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
3-52 Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary 3AG 24622 EAAA TQZZA
Use pursuant to applicable agreements Issue 1 February 2010
Installation Procedure 3-9: Connect power cables between NGTRU and
1678 Metro Core Connect
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Dress A (red) power cable (PN 3AG24591AA) starting from top middle of NGTRU slot
1. See Figure 3-27, “Internal power cable termination (2.2-kW step-up)” (p. 3-56) and
view A.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

11 Route A (red) power cable out left side of NGTRU and down left-rear side of rack to
1678 Metro Core Connect shelf, tying power cable to outside surface of previously
installed cable tie brackets (PN 3EM11696AB) as necessary. See Figure 3-27, “Internal
power cable termination (2.2-kW step-up)” (p. 3-56) and view A.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

12 Pass A (red) power cable from rear of rack to front of 1678 Metro Core Connect shelf for
future termination at slot 24 once module is installed into shelf.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

13 Dress B (blue) power cable (PN 3AG24591AB) starting from top middle of NGTRU slot
2. See Figure 3-27, “Internal power cable termination (2.2-kW step-up)” (p. 3-56) and
view A.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

14 Route B (blue) power cable out right side of NGTRU and down right-rear side of rack to
1678 Metro Core Connect shelf, tying power cable to inside surface of previously
installed cable tie brackets (PN 3EM11696AB) as necessary. See Figure 3-27, “Internal
power cable termination (2.2-kW step-up)” (p. 3-56) and view A.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

15 Pass B (blue) power cable from rear of rack to front of 1678 Metro Core Connect shelf
for future termination at slot 25 once module is installed into shelf.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

16 Go to Step 23.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

17 Lower shelf location

Dress A (red) power cable (PN 3AG24591AA) starting from top middle of NGTRU slot
1. See Figure 3-27, “Internal power cable termination (2.2-kW step-up)” (p. 3-56) and
view A.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

18 Route A (red) power cable out left side of NGTRU and down left-rear side of rack to
1678 Metro Core Connect shelf, tying power cable to outside surface of previously
installed cable tie brackets (PN 3EM11696AB) as necessary. See Figure 3-27, “Internal
power cable termination (2.2-kW step-up)” (p. 3-56) and view A.

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
3AG 24622 EAAA TQZZA Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary 3-53
Issue 1 February 2010 Use pursuant to applicable agreements
Installation Procedure 3-9: Connect power cables between NGTRU and
1678 Metro Core Connect
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

19 Pass A (red) power cable from rear of rack to front of 1678 Metro Core Connect shelf for
future termination at slot 24 once module is installed into shelf.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

20 Dress B (blue) power cable (PN 3AG24591AB) starting from top middle of NGTRU slot
2. See Figure 3-27, “Internal power cable termination (2.2-kW step-up)” (p. 3-56) and
view A.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

21 Route B (blue) power cable out right side of NGTRU and down right-rear side of rack to
1678 Metro Core Connect shelf, tying power cable to inside surface of previously
installed cable tie brackets (PN 3EM11696AB) as necessary. See Figure 3-27, “Internal
power cable termination (2.2-kW step-up)” (p. 3-56) and view A.
Refer to 1678 Metro Core Connect Engineering Support Documentation (PN
3EM19211AE).
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

22 Pass B (blue) power cable from rear of rack to front of 1678 Metro Core Connect shelf
for future termination at slot 25 once module is installed into shelf.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

23
STOP. This procedure is complete.

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
3-54 Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary 3AG 24622 EAAA TQZZA
Use pursuant to applicable agreements Issue 1 February 2010
Installation Procedure 3-9: Connect power cables between NGTRU and
1678 Metro Core Connect
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Figure 3-26 Internal power cable termination (2-kW step-up) (1 of 2)

Figure 3-26 Internal power cable termination (2-kW step-up) (2 of 2)

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
3AG 24622 EAAA TQZZA Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary 3-55
Issue 1 February 2010 Use pursuant to applicable agreements
Installation Procedure 3-9: Connect power cables between NGTRU and
1678 Metro Core Connect
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Figure 3-27 Internal power cable termination (2.2-kW step-up) (1 of 2)

Figure 3-27 Internal power cable termination (2.2-kW step-up) (2 of 2)

E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
3-56 Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary 3AG 24622 EAAA TQZZA
Use pursuant to applicable agreements Issue 1 February 2010
Installation Procedure 3-10: Route and terminate office battery power
cables
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Procedure 3-10: Route and terminate office battery power

cables
When to use
This chart provides instructions to route and terminate office battery power cables from
the office battery source to the NGTRU.
Office battery power is not applied in this procedure. Power is applied during initial
turn-up. Refer to Chapter 4, “System turn-up and testing”.

General
Each rack operates on −48 V DC(−42 to −56 V DC) with isolated positive (+) return.
Office battery power and return cables are connected to NGTRU. This unit provides
transition from large cables that run between the office BDFB to smaller cables that
provide power to rack. It also steps up the voltage from the −48 V feed to −65 V required
for the 1678 Metro Core Connect shelf.
Recommended lug sizes are for access to the 1678 Metro Core Connect NGTRU. Power
cable size requirements from the Power Distribution Bay to the equipment NGTRU will
be determined on a site-by-site basis per proper power calculations.
#6 gauge cable is required for overhead and raised floor applications. H-taps must be
applied to transition from #6 gauge cable to a larger gauge cable to properly access the
equipment NGTRU and/or the Battery Distribution Fuse Bay (BDFB).
Alcatel-Lucent provides expert Installation Services for installations that have different
requirements from the recommended configuration as outlined in this manual. Contact
Alcatel-Lucent at 1-888-252-2832 for details.

Recommended tools
Wire crimp tool and die
Wire compression lug requirements:
• Two-hole, #6, long barrel compression lugs are used to terminate #6 AWG wire used
as power cables at the NGTRUs in the racks. These lugs feature a peephole for visual
inspection and verification of proper cable wire insertion.
• 1/4 in. hole diameter with 5/8 in. spacing between centers

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
3AG 24622 EAAA TQZZA Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary 3-57
Issue 1 February 2010 Use pursuant to applicable agreements
Installation Procedure 3-10: Route and terminate office battery power
cables
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Task

DANGER
Possibility of personal injury.
Hazardous electrical potentials are present. Severe arcing is possible and can cause
burns or eye injury.
Remove rings, watches, and other metal jewelry when working with primary circuits.
Exercise caution to avoid shorting power input terminals.

WARNING
Electric-shock hazard
Exposed voltage of up to −56 V DC might be present on terminal.
Exercise care during the following test.

NOTICE
Possibility of equipment damage.
Excessive force applied to the bars will cause the NGTRU backplane to fail.
Never exert more than 80 lbs. of force on power bus bars once they are installed to the
NGTRU backplane. Route and secure all power and ground cables connected to the
NGTRU in a manner such that they create no strain on the NGTRU power bus bars.

Complete the following steps.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

1 Verify main CO breakers for A power and B power are off. If not, set them to OFF.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

2 Refer to job documentation for rack layout and cable specifications.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

3 NOTICE
Possibility of equipment damage.
Do not violate minimum bend radius for cable size.

Complete an identification tag for each power cable then attach tag to power cable.

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
3-58 Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary 3AG 24622 EAAA TQZZA
Use pursuant to applicable agreements Issue 1 February 2010
Installation Procedure 3-10: Route and terminate office battery power
cables
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

4 #6 gauge cable is required for overhead and raised floor applications. Apply H-taps to
transition from larger gauge cable to #6 gauge cable to properly access and connect to the
NGTRU.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

5 Is cable being routed overhead or under floor?

If overhead, go to Step 6.
If under floor, go to Step 8.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

6 Power and Frame Ground Routing Overhead

Route power cables down from cable ducts to NGTRU. See Figure 3-28, “Input power
cable termination” (p. 3-60).
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

7 Go to Step 10.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

8 Power and Frame Ground Routing Under Floor

In a raised floor environment, route power cables through floor access holes. See Figure
3-29, “Input power cable termination” (p. 3-61).
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

9 Route cables up rack and tie power cables to the outside facing surface of cable tie
brackets. Eight cable tie brackets are on each side of rack. See Figure 3-30, “Input power
cable termination” (p. 3-62) and detail A.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

10 DANGER
Possibility of personal injury.
Short circuiting, low-voltage, low-impedance DC circuits can cause severe arcing that
can cause burns or injure eyes.
Remove rings, watches, and other metal jewelry when working with primary circuits.
Exercise caution to avoid shorting power input terminals.

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
3AG 24622 EAAA TQZZA Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary 3-59
Issue 1 February 2010 Use pursuant to applicable agreements
Installation Procedure 3-10: Route and terminate office battery power
cables
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
WARNING
Electric-shock hazard
Exposed voltage of up to −56 V DC might be present on terminal.
Exercise care during the following test.

NOTICE
Possibility of equipment damage.
Do not apply battery power until it is determined that −48 V DC A and B battery cables
with isolated returns and power cables are wired correctly.

Connect lug of office A-battery return cable to A-battery return power bus bar on
NGTRU. See Figure 3-31, “Input power cable termination” (p. 3-63).
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

11 Connect lug of office B-battery return cable to B-battery return power bus bar on
NGTRU.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

12 Connect lug of office A-battery power cable to A-battery power bus bar on NGTRU.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

13 Connect lug of office B-battery power cable to B-battery power bus bar on NGTRU.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

14 Tie down power cable according to local office practice.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

15 STOP. This procedure is complete.

Figure 3-28 Input power cable termination

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
3-60 Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary 3AG 24622 EAAA TQZZA
Use pursuant to applicable agreements Issue 1 February 2010
Installation Procedure 3-10: Route and terminate office battery power
cables
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Figure 3-29 Input power cable termination

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
3AG 24622 EAAA TQZZA Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary 3-61
Issue 1 February 2010 Use pursuant to applicable agreements
Installation Procedure 3-10: Route and terminate office battery power
cables
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Figure 3-30 Input power cable termination

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
3-62 Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary 3AG 24622 EAAA TQZZA
Use pursuant to applicable agreements Issue 1 February 2010
Installation Procedure 3-10: Route and terminate office battery power
cables
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Figure 3-31 Input power cable termination

E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
3AG 24622 EAAA TQZZA Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary 3-63
Issue 1 February 2010 Use pursuant to applicable agreements
Installation Procedure 3-11: Install electrical cables

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Procedure 3-11: Install electrical cables

When to use
This chart provides instructions to route and terminate the BITS cables and the
Housekeeping cable to the 1678 Metro Core Connect shelf.

General
Alcatel-Lucent provides expert Installation Services for installations that have different
requirements from the recommended configuration as outlined in this manual. Contact
Alcatel-Lucent at 1-888-252-2832 for details.

Recommended tools
• Safety glasses
• Soldering iron

Task

DANGER
Possibility of personal injury.
This equipment might contain aluminum electrolytic capacitors that present a potential
safety hazard when overstressed.
Wear safety glasses and observe all normal safety precautions.

DANGER
Possibility of personal injury.
Hazardous electrical potentials are present. Severe arcing is possible and can cause
burns or eye injury.
Remove rings, watches, and other metal jewelry when working with primary circuits.
Exercise caution to avoid shorting power input terminals.

WARNING
Electric-shock hazard
Exposed voltage of up to −56 V DC might be present on terminal.
Exercise care during the following test.

Complete the following steps.

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
3-64 Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary 3AG 24622 EAAA TQZZA
Use pursuant to applicable agreements Issue 1 February 2010
Installation Procedure 3-11: Install electrical cables

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

1 Where is the 1678 Metro Core Connect shelf mounted?

If upper shelf location, go to Step 2.
If lower shelf location, go to Step 4.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

2 Upper shelf location

If system is in a raised floor environment, route BITS cables into rack through left and
right floor access holes. If cable access is from overhead, route cables into rack at left and
right top rear. See Figure 3-32, “BITS cable installation” (p. 3-69).
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

3 Go to Step 6.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

4 Lower shelf location

If system is in a raised floor environment, route BITS cables into rack through left and
right floor access holes. If cable access is from overhead, route cables into rack at left and
right top rear. See Figure 3-32, “BITS cable installation” (p. 3-69).
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

5 Run primary BITS cable down left rack rail as viewed from front of rack. Pass cable out
of rack channel near middle of shelf slot 1 and allow approximately one foot of cable for
service loop.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

6 Run secondary BITS cable down right rack rail as viewed from front of rack. Pass cable
out of rack channel near middle of shelf slot 20 and allow approximately one foot of cable
for service loop.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

7 Attach cables to inside plane of cable tie brackets as necessary.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

8 Terminate BITS Cables

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
3AG 24622 EAAA TQZZA Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary 3-65
Issue 1 February 2010 Use pursuant to applicable agreements
Installation Procedure 3-11: Install electrical cables

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Use connector hardware kit (PN 3AL89587AA) to terminate BITS cables. Solder 9-pin
D-sub connector to primary and secondary BITS cables. Refer to Table 3-1, “BITS
reference connector pin-out” (p. 3-66) for pin designations.

Table 3-1 BITS reference connector pin-out

Pin Signal Wire color
1 BITS Reference Output TIP Green
2 Not Used
3 Not Used
4 Not Used
5 BITS Reference Input TIP White
6 BITS Reference Output RING Blue
7 Frame GND
8 Frame GND
9 BITS Reference Input RING Red

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

9 Assemble remaining connector hardware and leave for future connection to modules.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

10 Route Housekeeping Cable

If system is in a raised floor environment, route housekeeping cable into rack through
right floor access hole. If cable access is from overhead, route cables into rack at right top
rear.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

11 Run housekeeping cable down right rack rail as viewed from front of rack. Pass cable out
of rack channel near middle of shelf slot 20 and allow approximately one foot of cable for
service loop.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

12 Attach cable to inside plane of cable tie brackets as necessary.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

13 Terminate Housekeeping Cables

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
3-66 Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary 3AG 24622 EAAA TQZZA
Use pursuant to applicable agreements Issue 1 February 2010
Installation Procedure 3-11: Install electrical cables

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Use connector hardware kit (PN 3AL89584AA) to terminate housekeeping cable. Solder
25-pin D-sub connector to housekeeping cable. Refer to Table 3-2, “Housekeeping
connector pin-out” (p. 3-67) for pin designations.

Table 3-2 Housekeeping connector pin-out

Pin Signal
1 GND HKIN
2 TORC
3 IND
4 NURG
5 URG
6 TOR
7 TAND
8 INT
9 GND_RA
10 HK OUT 3
11 GND HK OUT 3
12 HK OUT 4
13 GND HK OUT 4
14 HK IN 8
15 HK IN 7
16 HK IN 6
17 HK IN 5
18 HK IN 4
19 HK IN 3
20 HK IN 2
21 HK IN 1
22 HK OUT 2
23 GND HK OUT 2
24 HK OUT 1
25 GND HK OUT 1

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

14 Assemble remaining connector hardware and leave for future connection to modules.

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
3AG 24622 EAAA TQZZA Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary 3-67
Issue 1 February 2010 Use pursuant to applicable agreements
Installation Procedure 3-11: Install electrical cables

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

15 STOP. This procedure is complete.

Figure 3-32 BITS cable installation (1 of 2)

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
3-68 Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary 3AG 24622 EAAA TQZZA
Use pursuant to applicable agreements Issue 1 February 2010
Installation Procedure 3-11: Install electrical cables

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Figure 3-32 BITS cable installation (2 of 2)

E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
3AG 24622 EAAA TQZZA Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary 3-69
Issue 1 February 2010 Use pursuant to applicable agreements
Installation Procedure 3-12: Install fiber management

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Procedure 3-12: Install fiber management

When to use
This chart provides instructions to install shelf-level and rack-level fiber management.

General
Rack fiber management consists of four assembled pieces mounted to the left and right
sides of the rack and then joined together.
Alcatel-Lucent provides expert Installation Services for installations that have different
requirements from the recommended configuration as outlined in this manual. Contact
Alcatel-Lucent at 1-888-252-2832 for details.

Recommended tools
Screwdriver Phillips, #2

Task
Complete the following steps.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

1 Use site plan to determine configuration of system.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

2 Select action.
For raised-floor application, go to Step 3.
For overhead application, go to Step 4.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

3 Move all flex-tube holders (PN 4-29000-1150) from top-left (PN 1329212) and top-right
(PN 1328514) assemblies to bottom-left (PN 1329216) and bottom-right (PN 1328510)
assemblies, respectively. See Figure 3-33, “Flex-Tube holder locations” (p. 3-72) for
flex-tube holder locations. See Figure 3-34, “Rack level fiber management installation”
(p. 3-73), detail A.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

4 Using six rack screws each, install top-left (PN 1329212), top-right (PN 1328514),
bottom-left (PN 1329216), and bottom-right (PN 1328510) assemblies to front of rack.
See Figure 3-34, “Rack level fiber management installation” (p. 3-73).
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

5 Using 6-32x.250 screws and #6 washers, join top-left assembly to bottom-left assembly.
See Figure 3-34, “Rack level fiber management installation” (p. 3-73), detail B.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
3-70 Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary 3AG 24622 EAAA TQZZA
Use pursuant to applicable agreements Issue 1 February 2010
Installation Procedure 3-12: Install fiber management

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

6 Using 6-32x.250 screws and #6 washers, join top-right assembly to bottom-right

assembly. See Figure 3-34, “Rack level fiber management installation” (p. 3-73), detail B.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

7 Install second layer of radius-limiting spools onto existing spools on assemblies. See
Figure 3-34, “Rack level fiber management installation” (p. 3-73), detail C and detail D.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

8 STOP. This procedure is complete.

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
3AG 24622 EAAA TQZZA Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary 3-71
Issue 1 February 2010 Use pursuant to applicable agreements
Installation Procedure 3-12: Install fiber management

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Figure 3-33 Flex-Tube holder locations

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
3-72 Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary 3AG 24622 EAAA TQZZA
Use pursuant to applicable agreements Issue 1 February 2010
Installation Procedure 3-12: Install fiber management

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Figure 3-34 Rack level fiber management installation

E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
3AG 24622 EAAA TQZZA Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary 3-73
Issue 1 February 2010 Use pursuant to applicable agreements
Installation Procedure 3-13: Route fiber-optic cables

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Procedure 3-13: Route fiber-optic cables

When to use
This chart provides instructions to route Central Office (CO) fiber-optic cables to 1678
Metro Core Connect IO modules. Signal cables are routed to staging positions in front of
shelf slots, to be terminated when modules are installed.

General
Customer fiber-optic cables carry traffic signals between CO Network Elements (NEs)
and 1678 Metro Core Connect IO modules.
Fiber-optic cables have LC connectors at the 1678 Metro Core Connect end and are
available with SC (Alcatel-Lucent PN 3EM198500000), LC (Alcatel-Lucent PN
3EM198930000), or ST (Alcatel-Lucent PN 3EM199030000) connectors at the client
end. See Figure 3-35, “Fiber-optic cables” (p. 3-74). Lengths range from one meter to 275
meters.

Figure 3-35 Fiber-optic cables

AVAILABLE WITH SC, FC,
AND ST CONNECTORS LC CONNECTORS
AT CLIENT END
AVAILABLE IN LENGTHS FROM
1 METER TO 275 METERS
1.00

3.00
3.00 PART NUMBER LABEL

678-0316-1
030207

Alcatel-Lucent provides expert Installation Services for installations that have different
requirements from the recommended configuration as outlined in this manual. Contact
Alcatel-Lucent at 1-888-252-2832 for details.

Task
Complete the following steps.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

1 Refer to job documentation for port configuration and cable specification.

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
3-74 Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary 3AG 24622 EAAA TQZZA
Use pursuant to applicable agreements Issue 1 February 2010
Installation Procedure 3-13: Route fiber-optic cables

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

2 Complete an identification tag for each cable (if not supplied) and attach tag to cable. Use
the following label format:
AID-Rack-Shelf-Slot-Port: RX/TX.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

3 Run signal cables through overhead or raised-floor fiber channel ducts to rack. Run signal
cables that support working modules to left side of rack (as viewed from front of rack),
and run signal cables that support protection modules to right side of rack (as viewed
from front of rack). Follow diversity rules if applicable.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

4 Are signal cables installed in raised-floor or cable-ladder environment?

If raised-floor environment, go to Step 5.
If cable-ladder environment, go to Step 18.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

5 Raised-floor environment
Where is the 1678 Metro Core Connect shelf mounted?
If upper shelf location, go to Step 6.
If lower shelf location, go to Step 4.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

6 Upper shelf location

Position flex-hose tubing under rack and attach to flex-tube holders mounted at bottom of
fiber management on left and right sides.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

7 Route signal cables out of office conduit and up and into flex hose tubing under rack on
front-left or front-right side (viewed from front of rack) as appropriate for module
location in shelf.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

8 Route signal cables up and into bottom of front-left or front-right rack conduit. See Figure
3-36, “Customer fiber installation” (p. 3-79).
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

9 Route signal cables up, using captive black retainer clips, and exit cables out of conduit at
appropriate (upper or lower) exit bracket to enter fiber storage area. See Figure 3-37,
“Fiber routing inside the rack” (p. 3-80) and Figure 3-38, “Black fiber retainer clips”
(p. 3-81).

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
3AG 24622 EAAA TQZZA Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary 3-75
Issue 1 February 2010 Use pursuant to applicable agreements
Installation Procedure 3-13: Route fiber-optic cables

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

10 Route signal cables across guides on front of shelf to designated module.

Refer to 1678 Metro Core Connect Engineering Support Documentation (PN
3EM19211AE).
Use guides on top of shelf to access top modules containing straight optical connectors;
use guides at bottom of shelf to access all bottom modules and top modules containing
downward facing connectors.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

11 Go to Step 30.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

12 Lower Shelf Location

Position flex-hose tubing under rack and attach to flex-tube holders mounted at bottom of
fiber management on left and right sides. Refer to 1678 Metro Core Connect Engineering
Support Documentation (PN 3EM19211AE).
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

13 Route signal cables out of office conduit and up and into flex hose tubing under rack on
front-left or front-right side (viewed from front of rack) as appropriate for module
location in shelf. Refer to 1678 Metro Core Connect Engineering Support Documentation
(PN 3EM19211AE).
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

14 Route signal cables up and into bottom of front-left or front-right rack conduit. Refer to
1678 Metro Core Connect Engineering Support Documentation (PN 3EM19211AE) for
lower shelf location.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

15 Route signal cables up, using captive black retainer clips, and exit cables out of conduit at
appropriate (upper or lower) exit bracket to enter fiber storage area. Refer to 1678 Metro
Core Connect Engineering Support Documentation (PN 3EM19211AE).
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

16 Route signal cables across guides on front of shelf to designated module. Refer to 1678
Metro Core Connect Engineering Support Documentation (PN 3EM19211AE).
Use guides on top of shelf to access top modules containing straight optical connectors;
use guides at bottom of shelf to access all bottom modules and top modules containing
downward facing connectors.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

17 Go to Step 30.

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
3-76 Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary 3AG 24622 EAAA TQZZA
Use pursuant to applicable agreements Issue 1 February 2010
Installation Procedure 3-13: Route fiber-optic cables

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

18 Cable-Ladder Environment
Where is the 1678 Metro Core Connect shelf mounted?
If upper shelf location, go to Step 19.
If lower shelf location, go to Step 25.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

19 Upper shelf location

Position flex-hose tubing above rack and attach to flex-tube holders mounted at top of
fiber management on left and right sides. See Figure 3-37, “Fiber routing inside the rack”
(p. 3-80), detail A.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

20 Route signal cables down from office conduit, into flex hose fiber duct on front-left or
front-right of rack (viewed from front of rack), as appropriate for module location in
shelf.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

21 Route signal cables down into top of front-left or front-right rack conduit.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

22 Route signal cables down, using captive black retainer clips, and exit cables out of
conduit at appropriate (upper or lower) exit bracket to enter fiber storage area. See Figure
3-37, “Fiber routing inside the rack” (p. 3-80) and Figure 3-38, “Black fiber retainer
clips” (p. 3-81).
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

23 Route signal cables across guides on front of shelf to designated module. See Figure 3-37,
“Fiber routing inside the rack” (p. 3-80), detail B.
Use guides on top of shelf to access top modules containing straight optical connectors;
use guides at bottom of shelf to access all bottom modules and top modules containing
downward facing connectors.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

24 Go to Step 30.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

25 Lower shelf location

Position flex-hose tubing above rack and attach to flex-tube holders mounted at top of
fiber management on left and right sides. See Figure 3-37, “Fiber routing inside the rack”
(p. 3-80), detail A.

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
3AG 24622 EAAA TQZZA Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary 3-77
Issue 1 February 2010 Use pursuant to applicable agreements
Installation Procedure 3-13: Route fiber-optic cables

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

26 Route signal cables down from office conduit, into flex hose fiber duct on front-left or
front-right of rack (viewed from front of rack), as appropriate for module location in
shelf.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

27 Route signal cables down into top of front-left or front-right rack conduit.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

28 Route signal cables down, using captive black retainer clips, and exit cables out of
conduit at appropriate (upper or lower) exit bracket to enter fiber storage area. See Figure
3-37, “Fiber routing inside the rack” (p. 3-80) and Figure 3-38, “Black fiber retainer
clips” (p. 3-81).
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

29 Route signal cables across guides on front of shelf to designated module. See Figure 3-37,
“Fiber routing inside the rack” (p. 3-80), detail B.
Use guides on top of shelf to access top modules containing straight optical connectors;
use guides at bottom of shelf to access all bottom modules and top modules containing
downward facing connectors.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

30 Leave working signal cable connectors in front of designated module slots.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

31 Cut connector dust cap captive leads from signal cables.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

32 Leave dust caps on connectors and discard severed leads.

Dust caps are removed and stored/discarded later when connected to module ports.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

33 Dress signal cables according to local practice.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

34 STOP. This procedure is complete.

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
3-78 Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary 3AG 24622 EAAA TQZZA
Use pursuant to applicable agreements Issue 1 February 2010
Installation Procedure 3-13: Route fiber-optic cables

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Figure 3-36 Customer fiber installation

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
3AG 24622 EAAA TQZZA Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary 3-79
Issue 1 February 2010 Use pursuant to applicable agreements
Installation Procedure 3-13: Route fiber-optic cables

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Figure 3-37 Fiber routing inside the rack

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
3-80 Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary 3AG 24622 EAAA TQZZA
Use pursuant to applicable agreements Issue 1 February 2010
Installation Procedure 3-13: Route fiber-optic cables

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Figure 3-38 Black fiber retainer clips

E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
3AG 24622 EAAA TQZZA Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary 3-81
Issue 1 February 2010 Use pursuant to applicable agreements
Installation Procedure 3-14: Install rear kick plate

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Procedure 3-14: Install rear kick plate

When to use
This chart provides instructions to install a rear kick plate to the rear of a rack containing
a 1678 Metro Core Connect system.

General
Brackets and fastening hardware, when required, are supplied in the kits.

Recommended tools
Phillips screw driver

Task
Complete the following steps.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

1 Mount rear kick plate (PN 3EM13407AC) to brackets (PN 3EM16494AB) using screws
(PN 1AD009010033). See Figure 3-39, “Rear kick plate installation” (p. 3-82)
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

2 Attach captive cable on rear kick plate to rack rail using one rack screw.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

3 STOP. This procedure is complete.

Figure 3-39 Rear kick plate installation

E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
3-82 Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary 3AG 24622 EAAA TQZZA
Use pursuant to applicable agreements Issue 1 February 2010
Installation Procedure 3-15: Install AC outlets

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Procedure 3-15: Install AC outlets

When to use
This chart provides instructions to install AC outlets.

General
Contact Alcatel-Lucent at 1-888-252-2832 for details.

Recommended tools
• Insulated trouble lamp
• Screwdriver, Phillips, #2

Task
Complete the following steps.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

1 Use site plan to determine configuration of system and installation location of AC outlet.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

2 Install AC Outlets
Refer to Table 3-3, “AC duplex outlet kits” (p. 3-83) to verify AC outlet installation kits.

Table 3-3 AC duplex outlet kits

Outlet kit Part number
Front 3EM13721DM
Rear 3EM13721FP

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

3 Route power cable inside approved AC conduit.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

4 Route power cable through AC conduit using 2 in. round cutouts at bottom of rack
channel. Use cutouts located within rack channel, not those in front of channel.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

5 Terminate AC cabling at desired outlets according to local practice.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

6 Is AC outlet being installed on front or rear of rack?

If front of rack, go to Step 7.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
3AG 24622 EAAA TQZZA Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary 3-83
Issue 1 February 2010 Use pursuant to applicable agreements
Installation Procedure 3-15: Install AC outlets

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
If rear of rack, go to Step 9.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

7 Install mounting bracket, duplex box, and AC outlet on rack (see Figure 3-40, “AC
duplex outlet installation, front mount” (p. 3-85)).
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

8 Go to Step 11.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

9 Using #2 Phillips screwdriver remove AC junction box cover from rack rear kick plate.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

10 Install duplex box, AC outlet, and outlet cover on rack rear kick plate (see Figure 3-41,
“AC duplex outlet installation, rear mount” (p. 3-86)).
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

11 Wire outlets according to local code.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

12 STOP. This procedure is complete.

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
3-84 Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary 3AG 24622 EAAA TQZZA
Use pursuant to applicable agreements Issue 1 February 2010
Installation Procedure 3-15: Install AC outlets

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Figure 3-40 AC duplex outlet installation, front mount

MOUNTING
BRACKET

RACK BASE
DUPLEX (FRONT VIEW)
BOX

AC OUTLET
678-0256-1
081706

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
3AG 24622 EAAA TQZZA Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary 3-85
Issue 1 February 2010 Use pursuant to applicable agreements
Installation Procedure 3-15: Install AC outlets

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Figure 3-41 AC duplex outlet installation, rear mount

RACK BASE
DUPLEX (REAR VIEW)
BOX

AC OUTLET

OUTLET
COVER
678-0257-1
081706

E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
3-86 Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary 3AG 24622 EAAA TQZZA
Use pursuant to applicable agreements Issue 1 February 2010
Installation Procedure 3-16: Install front base plate

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Procedure 3-16: Install front base plate

When to use
This chart provides instructions to install a front base plate on a rack.

General
A front base plate kit (PN 3EM13721DN) is installed on a 1678 Metro Core Connect
rack.

Recommended tools
• Hammer
• Screwdriver, Phillips, #2
• Screwdriver, flat

Task
Complete the following steps.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

1 Is AC outlet installed in front of rack base?

If yes, go to Step 2.
If no, go to Step 3.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

2 Using hammer and flat screwdriver, remove outlet knockouts from front base plate for all
racks on which front-mounted AC outlet is installed.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

3 Install front base plate on each rack in system. See Figure 3-42, “Front base plate
installation” (p. 3-88).
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

4 STOP. This procedure is complete.

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
3AG 24622 EAAA TQZZA Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary 3-87
Issue 1 February 2010 Use pursuant to applicable agreements
Installation Procedure 3-16: Install front base plate

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Figure 3-42 Front base plate installation

E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
3-88 Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary 3AG 24622 EAAA TQZZA
Use pursuant to applicable agreements Issue 1 February 2010
Installation Procedure 3-17: Install electrical switch

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Procedure 3-17: Install electrical switch

When to use
This chart provides instructions to install an optional electrical switch.

General
Installation of an electrical switch is optional. If not installing an electrical switch, skip
this Chart.

Recommended tools
Phillips screwdriver, #2

Task
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

1 Use site plan to determine configuration of system and installation location of electrical
switch.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

2 Mount electrical switch box (PN 1AD001250003) to switch box mounting bracket (PN
3EM18639AB). See Figure 3-43, “Electrical switch box installation” (p. 3-90).
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

3 Mount switch box and switch box mounting bracket to rear rack channel. See Figure
3-44, “Rack location for electrical switch box installation” (p. 3-91) and detail A.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

4 Route power cable inside approved conduit.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

5 Terminate AC cabling at electrical switch box according to local practice.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

6 Wire electrical switch (PN 1AB198810002) according to local code and install using four
screws (PN 1AD009010012).
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

7 STOP. This procedure is complete.

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
3AG 24622 EAAA TQZZA Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary 3-89
Issue 1 February 2010 Use pursuant to applicable agreements
Installation Procedure 3-17: Install electrical switch

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Figure 3-43 Electrical switch box installation

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
3-90 Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary 3AG 24622 EAAA TQZZA
Use pursuant to applicable agreements Issue 1 February 2010
Installation Procedure 3-17: Install electrical switch

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Figure 3-44 Rack location for electrical switch box installation

E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
3AG 24622 EAAA TQZZA Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary 3-91
Issue 1 February 2010 Use pursuant to applicable agreements
Installation Procedure 3-18: Verify NGTRU ground

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Procedure 3-18: Verify NGTRU ground

When to use
This chart provides instructions to verify the isolation of frame, signal, return, and
grounding of duplex outlets.

General
Alcatel-Lucent provides expert Installation Services for installations that have different
requirements from the recommended configuration as outlined in this manual. Contact
Alcatel-Lucent at 1-888-252-2832 for details.

Recommended tools
Digital multimeter (dmm)

Before you begin

Equipment rack must be disconnected from any power source. Main CO breakers at the
BDFB panel are used to disconnect power from the rack.

Task

DANGER
Possibility of personal injury.
This equipment might contain aluminum electrolytic capacitors that present a potential
safety hazard when overstressed.
Wear safety glasses and observe all normal safety precautions.

DANGER
Possibility of personal injury.
Hazardous electrical potentials are present. Severe arcing is possible and can cause
burns or eye injury.
Remove rings, watches, and other metal jewelry when working with primary circuits.
Exercise caution to avoid shorting power input terminals.

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
3-92 Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary 3AG 24622 EAAA TQZZA
Use pursuant to applicable agreements Issue 1 February 2010
Installation Procedure 3-18: Verify NGTRU ground

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
WARNING
Electric-shock hazard
Exposed voltage of up to −56 V DC might be present on NGTRU circuit panel.
Exercise care during the following test.

NOTICE
Possibility of equipment damage.
The shelf does not contain main over-current protection devices.
The user must provide breakers or fuses and disconnects between the power source and
the Alcatel-Lucent 1678 Metro Core Connect.

NOTICE
Possibility of equipment damage.
Each power feed from a source (−48 V DC and Return) requires a 48-amp DC-rated
fast-trip circuit breaker or fuse and disconnects.
Circuit breakers or fuses must meet applicable local and national electrical safety codes
and be approved for the intended application.

Complete the following steps.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

1 Is A power and B power turned on to rack?

If yes, go to Step 2.
If no, go to Step 3.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

2 Verify that all A power and B power CO main breakers at BDFB are off; if not, set them
to OFF.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

3 Verify that CO ground is connected to rack. See Figure 3-45, “Frame ground” (p. 3-94).
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

4 Set digital multimeter (dmm) to measure ohms.

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
3AG 24622 EAAA TQZZA Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary 3-93
Issue 1 February 2010 Use pursuant to applicable agreements
Installation Procedure 3-18: Verify NGTRU ground

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Figure 3-45 Frame ground

ZINC ELECTRO DEPOSITED
GROUNDING STRIP

TOP MOUNT

LOCKWASHERS

SCREW / WASHER ASSEMBLY

(PN 330-2882-000)

REAR VIEW OF RACK

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

5 Make sure that contact with foreign objects (i.e. clothing or skin) is not made across
measured circuits, as this contact affects the resistance measurement.
Use dmm to measure from frame ground on rear of NGTRU to NGTRU A return. Return
distribution should be greater than 500 kilohms.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

6 Is measured of resistance greater than 500 kilohms?

If yes, go to Step 8.
If no, go to Step 7.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

7 Refer to 1678 Metro Core Connect Engineering Support Documentation (PN

3EM19211AE) power and ground distribution drawings for battery return paths, and clear
any shorts to frame ground. Go to Step 5.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

8 Use dmm to measure from frame ground on rear of NGTRU to NGTRU B return. Return
distribution should be greater than 500 kilohms.

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
3-94 Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary 3AG 24622 EAAA TQZZA
Use pursuant to applicable agreements Issue 1 February 2010
Installation Procedure 3-18: Verify NGTRU ground

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

9 Is measured of resistance greater than 500 kilohms?

If yes, go to Step 11.
If no, go to Step 10.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

10 Refer to 1678 Metro Core Connect Engineering Support Documentation (PN

3EM19211AE) power and ground distribution drawings for battery return paths, and clear
any shorts to frame ground. Go to Step 8.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

11 Use dmm to measure continuity from NGTRU A power to B power.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

12 Is measured value from NGTRU A power to B power the equivalent of open circuit
(infinite resistance) between points?
If yes, go to Step 14.
If no, go to Step 13.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

13 Refer to 1678 Metro Core Connect Engineering Support Documentation (PN

3EM19211AE) power and ground distribution drawings. Include analysis of fan assembly
as a point of failure during troubleshooting. Go to Step 11.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

14 Is rack equipped with AC outlet?

If yes, go to Step 15.
If no, go to Step 18.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

15 Use dmm to measure from frame ground to AC ground.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

16 Is measured value from frame ground to AC ground a maximum of 0.5 ohms between
points?
If yes, go to Step 18.
If no, go to Step 17.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

17 Verify AC wiring and correct if necessary. Go to Step 15.

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
3AG 24622 EAAA TQZZA Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary 3-95
Issue 1 February 2010 Use pursuant to applicable agreements
Installation Procedure 3-18: Verify NGTRU ground

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

18 Use dmm to measure A return cable to B return cable in NGTRU.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

19 Is measured value from A return cable to B return cable greater than 500 kilohms?
If yes, go to Step 21.
If no, go to Step 20.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

20 Refer to 1678 Metro Core Connect Engineering Support Documentation (PN

3EM19211AE) power and ground distribution drawings for battery return paths, and clear
any shorts between A1 and B1 returns. Go to Step 18.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

21 Use dmm to measure from A return feeder cable and CO ground feeder cable in NGTRU.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

22 Is measured value from A return feeder cable to CO ground feeder cable greater than 500
kilohms?
If yes, go to Step 24.
If no, go to Step 23.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

23 Refer to 1678 Metro Core Connect Engineering Support Documentation (PN

3EM19211AE) power and ground distribution drawings for battery return paths, and clear
any shorts between A1 return feeder and CO ground. Go to Step 21.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

24 Use dmm to measure from B return feeder cable and CO ground feeder cable in NGTRU.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

25 Is measured value from B return feeder cable to CO ground feeder cable greater than 500
kilohms between points?
If yes, go to Step 27.
If no, go to Step 26.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

26 Refer to 1678 Metro Core Connect Engineering Support Documentation (PN

3EM19211AE) power and ground distribution drawings for battery return paths, and clear
any shorts between B1 return feeder and CO ground. Go to Step 24.

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
3-96 Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary 3AG 24622 EAAA TQZZA
Use pursuant to applicable agreements Issue 1 February 2010
Installation Procedure 3-18: Verify NGTRU ground

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

27 Verify mechanical connections and repair any gaps in metal-to-metal connections.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

28 STOP. This procedure is complete.

E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
3AG 24622 EAAA TQZZA Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary 3-97
Issue 1 February 2010 Use pursuant to applicable agreements
Installation Procedure 3-19: Verify frame ground

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Procedure 3-19: Verify frame ground

When to use
This chart provides instructions to verify frame grounding of equipment rack and 1678
Metro Core Connect shelf.

Recommended tools
Digital multimeter (dmm)

Task

DANGER
Possibility of personal injury.
This equipment might contain aluminum electrolytic capacitors that present a potential
safety hazard when overstressed.
Wear safety glasses and observe all normal safety precautions.

DANGER
Possibility of personal injury.
Hazardous electrical potentials are present. Severe arcing is possible and can cause
burns or eye injury.
Remove rings, watches, and other metal jewelry when working with primary circuits.
Exercise caution to avoid shorting power input terminals.

WARNING
Electric-shock hazard
Exposed voltage of up to −56 V DC might be present on terminal.
Exercise care during the following test.

Complete the following steps.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

1 Use digital multi-meter (dmm) verify voltage does not exist between Power A and RTN
and Power B and RTN.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

2 Set dmm to measure resistance.

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
3-98 Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary 3AG 24622 EAAA TQZZA
Use pursuant to applicable agreements Issue 1 February 2010
Installation Procedure 3-19: Verify frame ground

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

3 Use dmm to measure resistance between A battery return and frame ground.
Measured resistance includes all wiring from battery return to frame ground.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

4 Is measured value of resistance above 50 ohms?

If yes, troubleshoot and go to Step 1.
If no, go to Step 5.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

5 Use dmm to measure resistance between B battery return and frame ground.
Measured resistance includes all wiring from battery return to frame ground.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

6 Is measured value of resistance above 50 ohms?

If yes, troubleshoot and go to Step 5.
If no, go to Step 7.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

7 On BDFB or equivalent, use dmm to measure between frame ground and BDFB return
point for A and B return distribution. Make note of measurement.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

8 STOP. This procedure is complete.

E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
3AG 24622 EAAA TQZZA Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary 3-99
Issue 1 February 2010 Use pursuant to applicable agreements
Installation Procedure 3-20: Install trim

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Procedure 3-20: Install trim

When to use
This chart provides instructions to install rack rear, front, and middle trim.

Recommended tools
Screwdriver, Phillips, #2

Task
Complete the following steps.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

1 Mount 16 standoffs (PN 3EM11892AD) and washers (PN 1AD000870176) to rack.

Mount to lower hole of rack increments 8, 17, 27, and 36 on both sides of rack. Mount to
upper hole of rack increments 11, 20, 30, and 39 on both sides of rack. See Figure 3-46,
“Installation rear trim hardware kit” (p. 3-102).
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

2 Install trim latch plates (PN 3EM13421AB) to the rear of the rack. See Figure 3-46,
“Installation rear trim hardware kit” (p. 3-102).
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

3 Install rear middle kick plate. See Figure 3-47, “Installation rear trim hardware kit”
(p. 3-103).
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

4 Install front middle kick plate. See Figure 3-48, “Front middle kick plate installation”
(p. 3-104).
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

5 Attach plate (PN 3EM13404) to left (PN 3EM19843AA) and right (PN 3EM19843AB)
end trim brackets using two screws (PN 1AD044650001) per plate. See Figure 3-49,
“Rear end trim installation” (p. 3-105).
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

6 Install end trim brackets, loosely tightening mounting screws. See Figure 3-50, “Rear end
trim installation (upper mounting details)” (p. 3-106).
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

7 Install rear trim panels (PN 3EM16590AM and PN 3EM16590AN), loosely tightening
mounting screws. See Figure 3-51, “Front end trim installation” (p. 3-107).

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
3-100 Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary 3AG 24622 EAAA TQZZA
Use pursuant to applicable agreements Issue 1 February 2010
Installation Procedure 3-20: Install trim

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

8 Is electrical switch mounted on rack?

If yes, go to Step 9.
If no, go to Step 11.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

9 Install electrical switch plate (PN 695-9147-002) onto electrical switch box opening on
side of each rear trim panel. See Figure 3-52, “Front end trim installation (side view)”
(p. 3-108).
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

10 Go to Step 12.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

11 Install blank wall plate (PN 695-9147-001) onto electrical switch box opening on side of
each rear trim panel. See Figure 3-52, “Front end trim installation (side view)” (p. 3-108).
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

12 Install front trim panels (PN 3EM16590AM and PN 3EM16590AN) to rack.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

13 Tighten mounting screws used to install rear trim panels in Step 7.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

14 Is rack installed adjacent to another rack containing 1678 Metro Core Connect shelves?
If yes, go to Step 15.
If no, go to Step 17.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

15 Install front and rear middle trim (PN 3EM16590AP).

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

16 Install front NGTRU and 1678 Metro Core Connect shelf covers. See Figure 3-53, “Shelf
cover installation” (p. 3-109).
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

17 STOP. This procedure is complete.

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
3AG 24622 EAAA TQZZA Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary 3-101
Issue 1 February 2010 Use pursuant to applicable agreements
Installation Procedure 3-20: Install trim

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Figure 3-46 Installation rear trim hardware kit

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
3-102 Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary 3AG 24622 EAAA TQZZA
Use pursuant to applicable agreements Issue 1 February 2010
Installation Procedure 3-20: Install trim

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Figure 3-47 Installation rear trim hardware kit

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
3AG 24622 EAAA TQZZA Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary 3-103
Issue 1 February 2010 Use pursuant to applicable agreements
Installation Procedure 3-20: Install trim

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Figure 3-48 Front middle kick plate installation

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
3-104 Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary 3AG 24622 EAAA TQZZA
Use pursuant to applicable agreements Issue 1 February 2010
Installation Procedure 3-20: Install trim

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Figure 3-49 Rear end trim installation

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
3AG 24622 EAAA TQZZA Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary 3-105
Issue 1 February 2010 Use pursuant to applicable agreements
Installation Procedure 3-20: Install trim

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Figure 3-50 Rear end trim installation (upper mounting details)

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
3-106 Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary 3AG 24622 EAAA TQZZA
Use pursuant to applicable agreements Issue 1 February 2010
Installation Procedure 3-20: Install trim

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Figure 3-51 Front end trim installation

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
3AG 24622 EAAA TQZZA Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary 3-107
Issue 1 February 2010 Use pursuant to applicable agreements
Installation Procedure 3-20: Install trim

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Figure 3-52 Front end trim installation (side view)

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
3-108 Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary 3AG 24622 EAAA TQZZA
Use pursuant to applicable agreements Issue 1 February 2010
Installation Procedure 3-20: Install trim

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Figure 3-53 Shelf cover installation

E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
3AG 24622 EAAA TQZZA Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary 3-109
Issue 1 February 2010 Use pursuant to applicable agreements
Installation Procedure 3-21: Verify final installation

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Procedure 3-21: Verify final installation

When to use
This chart provides instructions to verify final installation. Final inspection ensures that
basic installation is complete and that all electrical connections are made. When this
procedure is complete, the system is ready for initial turn-up.

Recommended tools
Digital multimeter (dmm)

Task
Complete the following steps.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

1 Check that −48 V DC office power to 1678 Metro Core Connect is turned off.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

2 Ensure mounting assemblies (shelves, fuse panels, and so forth) were properly secured to
equipment rack.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

3 Check that equipment rack was located per approved floor plan.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

4 Ensure equipment rack was properly secured to floor and/or overhead support.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

5 Ensure framework was properly aligned and plumbed within allowable tolerances.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

6 Check that all shelves and ancillary equipment were installed per job description.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

7 Check that all AC outlets were properly installed (proper locations, continuous ground,
and polarity verification).
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

8 Ensure all conduit pieces were properly placed and secured.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

9 Check that all cable lengths and cable segregation requirements are satisfied.

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
3-110 Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary 3AG 24622 EAAA TQZZA
Use pursuant to applicable agreements Issue 1 February 2010
Installation Procedure 3-21: Verify final installation

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

10 Check that all cables are protected against physical damage, especially where they contact
metal edges or rough surfaces.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

11 Check that all cables were routed in accordance with detailed office engineering
specifications and that cable runways are free of cable pile-ups and blocked cable runs.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

12 Check that all cables are supported properly.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

13 Ensure all cable ties are free of sharp edges.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

14 Ensure power source and ground leads were properly secured.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

15 Check that appropriate shelf continuity tests were performed and cables were properly
terminated per local practice.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

16 Verify all relay rack and BDFB labels are properly installed.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

17 This completes basic installation. To turn up system, refer to Chapter 4, “System turn-up
and testing”.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

18 STOP. This procedure is complete.

E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
3AG 24622 EAAA TQZZA Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary 3-111
Issue 1 February 2010 Use pursuant to applicable agreements
4 S4ystem turn-up and
testing

Overview
Purpose
This section provides step-by-step procedures to enable the user to perform a task. Each
procedure contains important introductory information that is essential to understanding
and completing the task properly. Procedures must be started at step 1, and steps must be
performed in the order given. Failure to do so may cause unforeseen hazardous
conditions.

Contents

Procedure 4-1: Verify and turn-up system 4-4

Procedure 4-2: Site-specific information 4-10
Procedure 4-3: Perform overall visual inspection 4-12
Procedure 4-4: Verify test equipment availability 4-13
Procedure 4-5: Verify NGTRU power 4-15
Procedure 4-6: Install plug-in modules 4-27
Procedure 4-7: Install an FTP server 4-33
Procedure 4-8: Verify FLC software load 4-39
Procedure 4-9: Set up and verify system and ES64SC IP communications 4-43
Procedure 4-10: Provision LAN communication to external router 4-47
Procedure 4-11: Configure BITS timing source and clock output 4-49
Procedure 4-12: Create clean database backup 4-54
Procedure 4-13: Provision equipment 4-57
Procedure 4-14: Confirm cabling between GBE I/O and LGX panel 4-64
Procedure 4-15: Confirm cabling between OC-n I/O and LGX panel 4-68
Procedure 4-16: Clean fiber-optic connectors 4-75
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
3AG 24622 EAAA TQZZA Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary 4-1
Issue 1 February 2010 Use pursuant to applicable agreements
System turn-up and testing Overview

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Procedure 4-17: GBE error-free verification setup 4-85

Procedure 4-18: OC-n error-free verification setup 4-124
Procedure 4-19: Perform error-free verification test (copy 0) 4-134
Procedure 4-20: Verify shelf redundant power copy 0 4-139
Procedure 4-21: Verify clock and control switching 4-144
Procedure 4-22: Verify OC-n protection switching (working to protect) 4-160
Procedure 4-23: Perform error-free verification test (copy 1) 4-166
Procedure 4-24: Verify OC-n protection switching (protect to working) 4-171
Procedure 4-25: Provision and test ES64SC data path 4-177
Procedure 4-26: Disconnect test equipment and test cables 4-207
Procedure 4-27: Perform FTP restore of provisioning database 4-208
Procedure 4-28: Verify alarm-free system 4-210
Procedure 4-29: Verify NGTRU rack lamp unit 4-211
Procedure 4-30: Verify shelf redundant power copy 1 4-219
Procedure 4-31: Install or remove SFP drawer 4-224
Procedure 4-32: Install or remove XFP drawer 4-227
Procedure 4-33: Module mechanical removal or installation 4-229
Procedure 4-34: Confirm cabling between 10GBE I/O and LGX panel 4-232
Procedure 4-35: 10 GBE error-free verification setup 4-237
Procedure 4-36: Provision equipment protection 4-282
Record site information 4-284
Visual inspection and module installation 4-285
Recommended test equipment 4-290
Verify NGTRU power 4-292
Verify software download 4-293
Database backup 4-294
Verify cabling between GBE IO and LGX panel 4-295
Verify cabling between OC-n I/O and LGX panel 4-305
Verify GBE provisioning 4-315
Verify OCn provisioning 4-377
Record error-free verification test results (copy 0) 4-382
Verify shelf redundant power copy 0 4-383
Verify clock and control subsystem switching 4-384
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
4-2 Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary 3AG 24622 EAAA TQZZA
Use pursuant to applicable agreements Issue 1 February 2010
System turn-up and testing Overview

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Verify OC-n protection switching (working to protect) 4-386

Record error-free verification test results (copy 1) 4-395
Verify OC-n protection switching (protect to working) 4-396
Provision and test L2 data path 4-405
Verify NGTRU rack lamp unit 4-408
Verify shelf redundant power copy 1 4-409
Verify cabling between 10GBE I/O and LGX panel 4-410
Verify 10GBE provisioning 4-412

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
3AG 24622 EAAA TQZZA Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary 4-3
Issue 1 February 2010 Use pursuant to applicable agreements
System turn-up and testing Procedure 4-1: Verify and turn-up system

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Procedure 4-1: Verify and turn-up system

When to use
This procedure is used to verify and turn-up the system.

General
The following non-trouble-clearing procedure verifies proper hardware and software
operation before placing the 1678 Metro Core Connect into operation.
Step details are in Detailed Level Procedures (DLPs). Checklists (CKLs) are provided
when necessary to record and mark off steps accomplished.
The referenced procedures presume the equipment and system hardware installation was
performed and verified in accordance with established procedures.
Use this procedure to turn-up a 1678 Metro Core Connect only. If performing an upgrade,
use documentation provided with the software release kit.

Task
Complete the following steps.
Preparation
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

1 Get office record.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

2 Record site-specific information.

For details, refer to Procedure 4-2: “Site-specific information” (p. 4-10) and “Record site
information” (p. 4-284).
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

3 Read turn-up test plan.

For details, refer to site configuration documentation.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

4 Review safety awareness information.

For details, refer to Introduction Section Chapter 1, “SAFETY AWARENESS”
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

5 Review static-sensitive device handling procedures.

For details, refer to Introduction Section Chapter 2, “ELECTROSTATIC-SENSITIVE
DEVICES”
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
4-4 Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary 3AG 24622 EAAA TQZZA
Use pursuant to applicable agreements Issue 1 February 2010
System turn-up and testing Procedure 4-1: Verify and turn-up system

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

6 Perform overall visual inspection.

For details, refer to Procedure 4-3: “Perform overall visual inspection” (p. 4-12) and
“Visual inspection and module installation” (p. 4-285).
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

7 Verify availability of recommended test equipment.

For details, refer to Procedure 4-4: “Verify test equipment availability” (p. 4-13) and
“Recommended test equipment” (p. 4-290).
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

8 Set up FTP server.

For details, refer to Procedure 4-7: “Install an FTP server” (p. 4-33).
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

9 System Start-Up
Verify NGTRU input power.
For details, refer to Procedure 4-5: “Verify NGTRU power” (p. 4-15), and “Verify
NGTRU power” (p. 4-292).
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

10 Install plug-in modules.

For details, refer to Procedure 4-6: “Install plug-in modules” (p. 4-27) and “Visual
inspection and module installation” (p. 4-285).
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

11 Normally, new systems are delivered with the latest software pre-loaded. In this case, a
complete installation of the software is not required as part of initial turn-up.
For details, refer to Procedure 4-8: “Verify FLC software load” (p. 4-39) and “Verify
software download” (p. 4-293).
Is latest software pre-loaded onto system?
If yes, go to Step 13.
If no, go to Step 12.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

12 Load software generic.

For details, refer to Procedure 4-8: “Verify FLC software load” (p. 4-39) and “Verify
software download” (p. 4-293).

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
3AG 24622 EAAA TQZZA Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary 4-5
Issue 1 February 2010 Use pursuant to applicable agreements
System turn-up and testing Procedure 4-1: Verify and turn-up system

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

13 Set-Up and Verify IP Communications.

For details, refer to Procedure 4-9: “Set up and verify system and ES64SC IP
communications” (p. 4-43).
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

14 Provision LAN Communication to External Router.

For details, refer to Procedure 4-10: “Provision LAN communication to external router”
(p. 4-47).
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

15 Provision BITS timing source and clock output.

For details, refer to Procedure 4-11: “Configure BITS timing source and clock output”
(p. 4-49).
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

16 Provision I/O modules.

For details, refer to Procedure 4-13: “Provision equipment” (p. 4-57).
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

17 System Verification
Create clean database backup.
For details, refer to Procedure 4-12: “Create clean database backup” (p. 4-54) and
“Database backup” (p. 4-294).
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

18 Provision equipment protection. For details, refer to Procedure 4-36: “Provision

equipment protection” (p. 4-282).
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

19 Create clean database backup with equipment protection provisioned.

For details, refer to Procedure 4-12: “Create clean database backup” (p. 4-54) and
“Database backup” (p. 4-294).
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

20 System Verification
Provision Gigabit Ethernet (GBE) facilities and verify cabling between client side of
system I/O and customer LGX panel.
For details, refer to Procedure 4-14: “Confirm cabling between GBE I/O and LGX panel”
(p. 4-64) and “Verify cabling between GBE IO and LGX panel” (p. 4-295).

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
4-6 Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary 3AG 24622 EAAA TQZZA
Use pursuant to applicable agreements Issue 1 February 2010
System turn-up and testing Procedure 4-1: Verify and turn-up system

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

21 Provision 10 Gigabit Ethernet (GBE10) facilities and verify cabling between client side of
system I/O and customer LGX panel.
For details, refer to Procedure 4-34: “Confirm cabling between 10GBE I/O and LGX
panel” (p. 4-232) and “Verify cabling between 10GBE I/O and LGX panel” (p. 4-410).
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

22 Provision OC-n facilities and verify cabling between client side of system I/O and
customer LGX panel.
For details, refer to Procedure 4-15: “Confirm cabling between OC-n I/O and LGX panel”
(p. 4-68) and “Verify cabling between OC-n I/O and LGX panel” (p. 4-305).
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

23 Set up GBE facilities for error-free verification tests.

For details, refer to Procedure 4-17: “GBE error-free verification setup” (p. 4-85) and
“Verify GBE provisioning” (p. 4-315).
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

24 Set up 10 Gigabit Ethernet (GBE10) facilities for error-free verification tests.

For details, refer to Procedure 4-35: “10 GBE error-free verification setup” (p. 4-237) and
“Verify 10GBE provisioning” (p. 4-412).
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

25 Set up IOCn facilities for error-free verification tests.

For details, refer to Procedure 4-18: “OC-n error-free verification setup” (p. 4-124) and
“Verify OCn provisioning” (p. 4-377).
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

26 Lock matrix to copy 0 and perform 15-minute error-free verification test.

For details, refer to Procedure 4-19: “Perform error-free verification test (copy 0)”
(p. 4-134), and “Record error-free verification test results (copy 0)” (p. 4-382).
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

27 Verify copy 0 matrix redundant power.

For details, refer to Procedure 4-20: “Verify shelf redundant power copy 0” (p. 4-139) and
“Verify shelf redundant power copy 0” (p. 4-383).
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

28 Verify clock and control subsystem switching.

For details, refer to Procedure 4-21: “Verify clock and control switching” (p. 4-144) and
“Verify clock and control subsystem switching” (p. 4-384).
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
3AG 24622 EAAA TQZZA Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary 4-7
Issue 1 February 2010 Use pursuant to applicable agreements
System turn-up and testing Procedure 4-1: Verify and turn-up system

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

29 Verify OC-n protection switching (working to protect).

For details, refer to Procedure 4-22: “Verify OC-n protection switching (working to
protect)” (p. 4-160) and “Verify OC-n protection switching (working to protect)”
(p. 4-386).
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

30 Lock matrix to copy 1 and perform 15-minute error-free verification test.

For details, refer to Procedure 4-23: “Perform error-free verification test (copy 1)”
(p. 4-166) and “Record error-free verification test results (copy 1)” (p. 4-395).
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

31 Verify copy 1 matrix redundant power.

For details, refer to Procedure 4-29: “Verify NGTRU rack lamp unit” (p. 4-211) and
“Verify shelf redundant power copy 1” (p. 4-409).
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

32 Verify OC-n protection switching (protect to working).

For details, refer to Procedure 4-24: “Verify OC-n protection switching (protect to
working)” (p. 4-171) and “Verify OC-n protection switching (protect to working)”
(p. 4-396).
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

33 Verify ES64C data path and switching.

For details, refer to Procedure 4-25: “Provision and test ES64SC data path” (p. 4-177) and
“Provision and test L2 data path” (p. 4-405).
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

34 Verify NGTRU rack lamp unit.

For details, refer to Procedure 4-29: “Verify NGTRU rack lamp unit” (p. 4-211) and
“Verify NGTRU rack lamp unit” (p. 4-408).
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

35 Completion
Disconnect all test equipment and test cables from system.
For details, refer to Procedure 4-26: “Disconnect test equipment and test cables”
(p. 4-207).
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

36 Restore database from clean database backup.

For details, refer to “Database backup” (p. 4-294).
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
4-8 Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary 3AG 24622 EAAA TQZZA
Use pursuant to applicable agreements Issue 1 February 2010
System turn-up and testing Procedure 4-1: Verify and turn-up system

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

37 Verify alarm-free system.

For details, refer to Procedure 4-28: “Verify alarm-free system” (p. 4-210).
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

38 Turn-up procedure is complete. Refer to 1678 MCC TL1 User Provisioning Guide for
details concerning system provisioning.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

39 STOP. This procedure is complete.

E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
3AG 24622 EAAA TQZZA Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary 4-9
Issue 1 February 2010 Use pursuant to applicable agreements
System turn-up and testing Procedure 4-2: Site-specific information

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Procedure 4-2: Site-specific information

When to use
This procedure provides instructions to collect site-specific information.

General
Not all of this procedure can be performed initially. Some of the data that is requested is
not available until turn-up is complete.
Use “Record site information” (p. 4-284) for this procedure.

Task
Complete the following steps.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

1 Is Procedure 4-1: “Verify and turn-up system” (p. 4-4) being used for correct sequence?
If yes, go to Step 2.
If no, refer to Procedure 4-1: “Verify and turn-up system” (p. 4-4) for correct sequence.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

2 From office records and engineering specifications, find the following information and
record in “Record site information” (p. 4-284).
1. Name of customer
2. Sales order number
3. Date initial turn-up is started (Completion date will be recorded after turn-up is
finished.)
4. Site name and address
5. Name of customer representative
6. Phone number of customer representative
7. Signature of customer representative
8. Name of Alcatel-Lucent field service engineer
9. Phone number of Alcatel-Lucent field service engineer
10. Signature of Alcatel-Lucent field service engineer
11. Customer supplied IP Addresses
12. Equipped matrix size
13. Equipped Ethernet Switch Cards
14. Number of OC-3 ports equipped
15. Number of OC-12 ports equipped
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
4-10 Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary 3AG 24622 EAAA TQZZA
Use pursuant to applicable agreements Issue 1 February 2010
System turn-up and testing Procedure 4-2: Site-specific information

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
16. Number of OC-48 ports equipped
17. Number of OC-192 ports equipped
18. Number of Gigabit Ethernet ports equipped
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

3 Site-specific information is provided to Technical Support Group (TSG) for online

support.
Record site-specific information in “Record site information” (p. 4-284).
1. Indicate whether Alcatel-Lucent users have access
2. Indicate whether modem is accessible by Alcatel-Lucent users
3. Customer contact including name, title, and address (if different from site address)
4. Modem phone number – Customer must be aware that this number is being provided
to TSG for online support.
5. Location of TSG modem bay
6. Modem operation
7. Number of software generic release
8. Indicate whether configured database is loaded
9. Indicate whether configured database is provisioned
10. Provide a hard copy of software checksums and indicate whether software checksums
are verified
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

4 STOP. This procedure is complete.

E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
3AG 24622 EAAA TQZZA Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary 4-11
Issue 1 February 2010 Use pursuant to applicable agreements
System turn-up and testing Procedure 4-3: Perform overall visual inspection

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Procedure 4-3: Perform overall visual inspection

When to use
This procedure provides instructions for visual inspection of the local terminal and
inter-connection wiring. The physical inspection shall ensure that all units are undamaged
and that rack, shelves and office wiring has been properly installed. It also ensures that all
mounting and labeling is satisfactory.

General
Use “Visual inspection and module installation” (p. 4-285) for this procedure.

Task
Complete the following steps.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

1 Confirm steps Step 2 through Step 5 and record information in “Visual inspection and
module installation” (p. 4-285).
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

2 Determine configuration per office records.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

3 Verify shelf is in designated rack and rack is in correct location.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

4 Verify each node is properly secured and free of damage.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

5 Verify all modules are available per site configuration.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

6 STOP. This procedure is complete.

E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
4-12 Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary 3AG 24622 EAAA TQZZA
Use pursuant to applicable agreements Issue 1 February 2010
System turn-up and testing Procedure 4-4: Verify test equipment availability

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Procedure 4-4: Verify test equipment availability

When to use
This procedure provides steps to verify availability of test equipment needed to turn up
the system.

General
Test equipment types listed are recommended, but equivalent test equipment can be
substituted. Before substituting test equipment, carefully check the procedure to
determine required characteristics.
Personnel performing these procedures must be familiar with the operation of all test
equipment. Operating instructions for test equipment are not included, except for specific
instrument settings or precautionary notes. Obtain operating instructions from the
equipment manufacturer.
When using calibrated test equipment, verify that the calibration date is within the time
frame for accuracy.
The personnel performing steps in these procedures need access to standard installation
handtools, including assorted screwdrivers, small pliers, etc.
Use “Recommended test equipment” (p. 4-290) for this procedure.

Task
Complete the following steps.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

1 Verify that the following test equipment is available before testing:

1. CT cable kit (3AL 89585 AAAA) F-Interface
2. Test set capable of measuring OC-3 through OC-192 or equivalent
3. Test set capable of measuring DS1 equivalent
4. Gigabit-Ethernet Analyzer
5. 10 Gigabit-Ethernet Analyzer
6. Optical power meter capable of measuring +3 to –30 dBm at wavelengths of 850 nm,
1310 nm, and 1550 nm
7. Optical power meter adapter, AMP 492328-2
8. Inspection microscope, 200X to 400X—Aerotech World Trade Ltd. AWT200 or
AWT300
9. CLETOP®1 fiber-optic cleaner—Aerotech World Trade Ltd. PN 14100500
10. Optical fiber light source

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
3AG 24622 EAAA TQZZA Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary 4-13
Issue 1 February 2010 Use pursuant to applicable agreements
System turn-up and testing Procedure 4-4: Verify test equipment availability

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
11. Laser safety glasses
12. Plug-in style ESD wrist strap
13. (2) 5-foot SC-to-SC Single Mode (SM) optic cable
14. (1) SC-SC dual optic coupler
15. Single Mode and SC-to-SC looping plugs
16. Single Mode SC-to-SC jumper cables
17. LC-to-SC adapter cables
18. Variable optical attenuator
19. (258) 5 dBm attenuators
20. (258) 10 dBm attenuators
21. (258) 15 dBm attenuators
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

2 STOP. This procedure is complete.

E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S

Notes
CLETOP is a registered trademark of NTT International.

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
4-14 Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary 3AG 24622 EAAA TQZZA
Use pursuant to applicable agreements Issue 1 February 2010
System turn-up and testing Procedure 4-5: Verify NGTRU power

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Procedure 4-5: Verify NGTRU power

When to use
This procedure provides instructions to verify source voltage at the NGTRU in each rack
containing a 1678 Metro Core Connect.

General
Racks served by NGTRUs do not contain main over-current protection devices. The user
must provide circuit breakers or fuses and disconnects between the power source and the
Alcatel-Lucent 1678 Metro Core Connect.
Each power feed from a source (−48 V DC and Return) requires a 48-amp DC-rated
fast-trip circuit breaker or fuse and disconnects. Circuit breakers or fuses must meet
applicable local and national electrical safety codes and be approved for the intended
application.
The acceptable input voltage range is between −40 V DC and −57.5 V DC.
The step-up converter fan does not run continuously. It cycles on and off as required.
The 2-kW step-up converter supports systems with zero to four ES64SC modules. The
2.2-kW step-up converter supports all system configurations and is required in systems
with five or more ES64SC modules.
Alcatel-Lucent provides expert Installation Services for installations that have different
requirements from the recommended configuration as outlined in this manual. Contact
Alcatel-Lucent at 1-888-252-2832 for details.
Use “Visual inspection and module installation” (p. 4-285) and “Verify NGTRU power”
(p. 4-292) for this procedure.

Required tools and equipment

The following tools and equipment are required for this procedure:
• Digital multimeter (dmm)
• #1 flat-bladed screwdriver

Before you begin

Central Office (CO) Battery Distribution Feeder Bay (BDFB) circuit breakers that
provide power to the 1678 Metro Core Connect are in the off position. NGTRU step-up
converter front panel power switches are in the off position.

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
3AG 24622 EAAA TQZZA Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary 4-15
Issue 1 February 2010 Use pursuant to applicable agreements
System turn-up and testing Procedure 4-5: Verify NGTRU power

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Task

DANGER
Possibility of personal injury.
Hazardous electrical potentials are present. Severe arcing is possible and can cause
burns or eye injury.
Remove rings, watches, and other metal jewelry when working with primary circuits.
Exercise caution to avoid shorting power input terminals.

NOTICE
Service-disruption hazard
Possibility of service interruption. The procedure to verify NGTRU power should ONLY
be performed during a scheduled maintenance window.
All work should be scheduled and agreed upon with the customer in writing prior to
beginning work on Procedure 4-5: “Verify NGTRU power” (p. 4-15).

NOTICE
ESD hazard
Plug-in modules contain electrostatic-sensitive devices. These devices can be damaged by
electrostatic discharge.
Refer to Introduction, Section “Electrostatic sensitive devices” (p. 1-17) for special
handling instructions.

Complete the following steps.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

1 Which step-up converter to be equipped in this system?

If 2-kW step-up converter, go to Step 2.
If 2.2-kW step-up converter, go to Step 5.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

2 On the rear of the step-up converters, remove the wire jumper. See Figure 4-1, “2-kW
step-up converter wire jumper” (p. 4-17).

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
4-16 Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary 3AG 24622 EAAA TQZZA
Use pursuant to applicable agreements Issue 1 February 2010
System turn-up and testing Procedure 4-5: Verify NGTRU power

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Figure 4-1 2-kW step-up converter wire jumper

Wire Jumper
Installed;
Step-Up
Configured For
ETSI Power
Configuration

Wire Jumper
Removed;
Step-Up
Configured for
ANSI Power
Configuration

678-0342-1
060208

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
3AG 24622 EAAA TQZZA Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary 4-17
Issue 1 February 2010 Use pursuant to applicable agreements
System turn-up and testing Procedure 4-5: Verify NGTRU power

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

3 NOTICE
Possibility of equipment damage.
Do not push directly on the FAN backing that is on the step-up converter. It will bend the
backing and the FAN will become inoperable.

Slide step-up converters into NGTRU slots 1 and 2 and seat step-up converters in
NGTRU slots 1 and 2 into backplane connectors. Tighten two captive screws on front of
each module. See Figure 4-3, “NGTRU battery connections” (p. 4-20).
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

4 Go to Step 11.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

5 On the rear of the step-up converters, toggle the Input Threshold switch to the ANSI
position. See Figure 4-2, “2.2-kW step-up converter switch settings” (p. 4-19).
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

6 On the rear of the step-up converters, toggle the No Load Sense switch to the ON
position. See Figure 4-2, “2.2-kW step-up converter switch settings” (p. 4-19).

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
4-18 Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary 3AG 24622 EAAA TQZZA
Use pursuant to applicable agreements Issue 1 February 2010
System turn-up and testing Procedure 4-5: Verify NGTRU power

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Figure 4-2 2.2-kW step-up converter switch settings

LEGEND:

1. INPUT THRESHOLD:
ANSI / ETSI

2. NO LOAD SENSE:
ON / OFF
678-0341-1
060208

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

7 Slide step-up converters into NGTRU slots 1 and 2 but do not seat modules at this time.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

8 Connect A power cable (red) to the top of the Step-Up Converter located in NGTRU slot
1.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

9 Connect B power cable (blue) to the top of the Step-Up Converter located in NGTRU slot
2.

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
3AG 24622 EAAA TQZZA Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary 4-19
Issue 1 February 2010 Use pursuant to applicable agreements
System turn-up and testing Procedure 4-5: Verify NGTRU power

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

10 NOTICE
Possibility of equipment damage.
Do not push directly on the FAN backing that is on the step-up converter. It will bend the
backing and the FAN will become inoperable.

Seat step-up converters in NGTRU slots 1 and 2 into backplane connectors. Tighten two
captive screws on front of each module. See Figure 4-3, “NGTRU battery connections”
(p. 4-20).
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

11 Install blank panels in slots 3, 4, and 5. Tighten two captive screws on front of each blank
module.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

12 Install by-pass module in slots 6 seating module into backplane connectors. Tighten two
captive screws on front of module.
Refer to “Visual inspection and module installation” (p. 4-285) to record installed
NGTRU modules.

Figure 4-3 NGTRU battery connections

–A +A GNDM +B –B

+ +

Vout Vout

ON

OFF

NGTRU SLOT 1 2 3 4 5 6
678-0309-1
010307

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

13 BDFB Power A and NGTRU

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
4-20 Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary 3AG 24622 EAAA TQZZA
Use pursuant to applicable agreements Issue 1 February 2010
System turn-up and testing Procedure 4-5: Verify NGTRU power

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
At Central Office (CO) Battery Distribution Feeder Bay (BDFB) panel, switch A BDFB
breaker to ON. Ensure B BDFB breaker is OFF.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

14 Use digital multi-meter (dmm) to measure voltage between A INPUT, −48 V and A
INPUT, RETURN power-ground distribution blocks. Acceptable range is −40.5 V DC to
−57 V DC.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

15 Is −48 V DC present?
If yes, record A input voltage and verify in “Verify NGTRU power” (p. 4-292), then go to
Step 17.
If no, go to Step 16.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

16 Cable routing problem exists between BDFB and NGTRU. Correct problem before
proceeding. Then go to Step 14.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

17 Use dmm to measure voltage between B INPUT, −48 V and B INPUT, RETURN
power-ground distribution blocks.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

18 Is −48 V DC present?
If yes, go to Step 19.
If no, go to Step 20.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

19 Cable routing problem exists between BDFB and NGTRU. Correct problem before
proceeding. Then go to Step 17.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

20 At CO BDFB panel, switch A BDFB breaker to OFF.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

21 BDFB Power B and NGTRU

At Central Office (CO) Battery Distribution Feeder Bay (BDFB) panel, switch B BDFB
breaker to ON. Ensure A BDFB breaker is OFF.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

22 Use dmm to measure voltage between A INPUT, −48 V and A INPUT, RETURN
power-ground distribution blocks.

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
3AG 24622 EAAA TQZZA Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary 4-21
Issue 1 February 2010 Use pursuant to applicable agreements
System turn-up and testing Procedure 4-5: Verify NGTRU power

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

23 Is −48 V DCpresent?
If yes, go to Step 24.
If no, go to Step 25.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

24 Cable routing problem exists between BDFB and NGTRU. Correct problem before
proceeding. Then go to Step 22.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

25 Use dmm to measure voltage between B INPUT, −48 V and B INPUT, RETURN
power-ground distribution blocks. Acceptable range is −40.5 V DC to −57 V DC.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

26 Is −48 V DCpresent?
If yes, record B input voltage and verify in “Verify NGTRU power” (p. 4-292), then go to
Step 28.
If no, go to Step 27.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

27 Cable routing problem exists between BDFB and NGTRU. Correct problem before
proceeding. Then go to Step 25.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

28 At CO BDFB panel, switch B BDFB breaker to OFF.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

29 Measure Step-Up Converter Output Voltage

At CO BDFB panel, switch A BDFB breaker to ON.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

30 At both step–up converter front panels, set power switches to ON.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

31 Using dmm, check voltage at test points on both step-up converter front panels. See
Figure 4-4, “2-kW step-up converter front panel” (p. 4-24).
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

32 Which step-up converter is equipped?

If 2-kW, go to Step 33.
If 2.2-kW, go to Step 34.

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
4-22 Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary 3AG 24622 EAAA TQZZA
Use pursuant to applicable agreements Issue 1 February 2010
System turn-up and testing Procedure 4-5: Verify NGTRU power

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

33 Is voltage on A step-up converter −65 V DC±2 V DCand B step-up converter 0 V DC?

If yes, verify in “Verify NGTRU power” (p. 4-292) and go to Step 36.
If no, go to Step 35.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

34 Is voltage on A step-up converter −58 V DC±2 V DCand B step-up converter 0 V DC?

If yes, verify in “Verify NGTRU power” (p. 4-292) and go to Step 36.
If no, go to Step 35.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

35 Refer to 1678 MCC Maintenance and Trouble-Clearing Guide to clear problem and go to
Step 31.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

36 At CO BDFB panel, B BDFB breakers to ON switch and A BDFB breaker to OFF.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

37 Using dmm, check voltage at test points on both step-up converter front panels. See
Figure 4-4, “2-kW step-up converter front panel” (p. 4-24) and Figure 4-5, “2.2-kW
step-up converter front panel” (p. 4-25).
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

38 Which step-up converter is equipped?

If 2-kW, go to Step 39.
If 2.2-kW, go to Step 40.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

39 Is voltage on B step-up converter −65 V DC±2 V DC and A step-up converter 0 V DC?

If yes, verify in “Verify NGTRU power” (p. 4-292) and go to Step 42.
If no, go to Step 41.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

40 Is voltage on B step-up converter −58 V DC±2 V DC and A step-up converter 0 V DC?

If yes, verify in “Verify NGTRU power” (p. 4-292) and go to Step 42.
If no, go to Step 41.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

41 Refer to 1678 MCC Maintenance and Trouble-Clearing Guide to clear problem and go to
Step 37.

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
3AG 24622 EAAA TQZZA Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary 4-23
Issue 1 February 2010 Use pursuant to applicable agreements
System turn-up and testing Procedure 4-5: Verify NGTRU power

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

42 At CO BDFB panel, switch both A and B BDFB breakers to OFF.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

43 Slide PSF modules into slots 24 and 25 but do not seat modules at this time.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

44 Connect power cables to PSFs and secure them.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

45 Seat PSF modules into slots 24 and 25 and secure by tightening screw on the front of the
module.

Figure 4-4 2-kW step-up converter front panel

1 2 3 4

LEGEND:

Vout 1. OUTPUT VOLTAGE TEST POINT:

-65VDC +/-2VDC

2. LED GREEN:
ON IN NORMAL OUTPUT VOLTAGE CONDITION

3. LED RED:
ON IN PRESENCE OF UNIT ALARM

4. MANUAL SWITCH ON/OFF

678-0343-1
060308

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
4-24 Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary 3AG 24622 EAAA TQZZA
Use pursuant to applicable agreements Issue 1 February 2010
System turn-up and testing Procedure 4-5: Verify NGTRU power

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Figure 4-5 2.2-kW step-up converter front panel
1 2 3 4

LEGEND:

Vout 1. OUTPUT VOLTAGE TEST POINT:

-58VDC +/-2VDC

2. LED GREEN:
ON IN NORMAL OUTPUT VOLTAGE CONDITION

3. LED RED:
ON IN PRESENCE OF UNIT ALARM

4. MANUAL SWITCH ON/OFF

678-0344-1
060308

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

46 NGTRU LEDs
At CO BDFB panel, switch A BDFB breaker to ON.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

47 Is POWER LED on A NGTRU ON?

If on, go to Step 48.
If off, troubleshoot CO BDFB panel breakers, then go to Step 46.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

48 At CO BDFB panel, switch A BDFB breaker to OFF.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

49 At CO BDFB panel, switch B BDFB breaker to ON.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

50 Is POWER LED on B NGTRU ON?

If on, go to Step 51
If off, troubleshoot CO BDFB panel breakers, then go to Step 48.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

51 At CO BDFB panel, switch A BDFB breaker to ON. (Both A BDFB breaker and B BDFB
breaker are now ON.)

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
3AG 24622 EAAA TQZZA Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary 4-25
Issue 1 February 2010 Use pursuant to applicable agreements
System turn-up and testing Procedure 4-5: Verify NGTRU power

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

52 Are POWER LEDs on NGTRU ON?

If on, verify in “Verify NGTRU power” (p. 4-292) and go to Step 53.
If off, troubleshoot CO BDFB panel breakers, then go to Step 51.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

53 STOP. This procedure is complete.

E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
4-26 Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary 3AG 24622 EAAA TQZZA
Use pursuant to applicable agreements Issue 1 February 2010
System turn-up and testing Procedure 4-6: Install plug-in modules

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Procedure 4-6: Install plug-in modules

When to use
This procedure provides instructions to install modules in the correct slots of the chassis.

General
Modules must be installed in order to reduce deflection of the upper and lower shelf
horizontal rails caused by insertion force of the matrix modules.
Network architecture may govern module slot placement.
Refer to the Chapter 5, “1678 Metro Core Connect addresses and locations” for module
locations.
Use “Visual inspection and module installation” (p. 4-285) for this procedure.

Required tools
Phillips screwdriver, #2 × 8-inch

Task

WARNING
Electric-shock hazard
Plug-in modules can be installed and removed with rack power on. Hazardous electrical
potential are present.
Use extreme care when installing or removing modules.

NOTICE
ESD hazard
Plug-in modules contain electrostatic-sensitive devices. These devices can be damaged by
electrostatic discharge.
Refer to Introduction, Section “Electrostatic sensitive devices” (p. 1-17) for special
handling instructions.

Complete the following steps.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

1 Ensure ESD wrist or shoe strap is worn before handling modules.

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
3AG 24622 EAAA TQZZA Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary 4-27
Issue 1 February 2010 Use pursuant to applicable agreements
System turn-up and testing Procedure 4-6: Install plug-in modules

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

2 Slide fan trays into upper and lower shelf fan slots. Use module handles to fully seat fan
trays as shown on Figure 4-6, “Module insertion steps” (p. 4-28).
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

3 Tighten two captive screws on front of each fan tray.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

4 Verify that fan tray is operating.

If operating, go to Step 5.
If not operating, troubleshoot fault, then go to Step 5.

Figure 4-6 Module insertion steps

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

5 Identify insertion location of plug-in module. See Figure 4-7, “Module slots”
(p. 4-30) and refer to site-specific documentation.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

6 Install BUSTERM modules before any other modules are installed. BUSTERMs are
installed in slots 21 and 22 behind FLCCONGI and FLCSERVA.
BUSTERM modules must be PN 3AL81209AA ICS 03 or later or PN 3AL81209AB ICS
01 or later.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
4-28 Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary 3AG 24622 EAAA TQZZA
Use pursuant to applicable agreements Issue 1 February 2010
System turn-up and testing Procedure 4-6: Install plug-in modules

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

7 Insert I/O or dummy boards into slots 9 and 12 using top and bottom handles to seat
module into backplane. Tighten two captive screws on front of each module.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

8 Insert matrix modules in slots 10 and 11 using top and bottom handles to seat module into
backplane. Tighten two captive screws on front of each module.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

9 Starting with slots 8 and 13 moving outward toward slots 2 and 19, insert remaining I/O
or dummy modules using top and bottom handles to seat modules into backplane. Tighten
two captive screws on front of each module. See Figure 4-7, “Module slots” (p. 4-30) for
module locations.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

10 Install FLCSERVA in slot 1 and FLCCONGI in slot 20.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

11 Attach NGTRU rack alarm cable to FLCCONGI. Attach NGTRU housekeeping and
remote alarm cable to FLCCONGI.

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
3AG 24622 EAAA TQZZA Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary 4-29
Issue 1 February 2010 Use pursuant to applicable agreements
System turn-up and testing Procedure 4-6: Install plug-in modules

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Figure 4-7 Module slots

FAN

24 PSF

25 PSF
MX640GA OR MX320GA

MX640GA OR MX320GA
I/O OR ES64SC
I/O OR ES64SC
I/O OR ES64SC
I/O OR ES64SC
I/O OR ES64SC
I/O OR ES64SC
I/O OR ES64SC
I/O OR ES64SC

I/O OR ES64SC
I/O OR ES64SC
I/O OR ES64SC
I/O OR ES64SC
I/O OR ES64SC
I/O OR ES64SC
I/O OR ES64SC
I/O OR ES64SC
20 FLCCONGI
FLCSERVA
1
21 BUSTERM

22 BUSTERM
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
10

11
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9

FAN

678-0020-1
011106

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
4-30 Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary 3AG 24622 EAAA TQZZA
Use pursuant to applicable agreements Issue 1 February 2010
System turn-up and testing Procedure 4-6: Install plug-in modules

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

12 Install IO Module SFP Drawers

Refer to site documentation to determine correct SFP port locations and types.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

13 Install SFP drawer. See Figure 4-8, “SFP/XFP Installation” (p. 4-32). Refer to Procedure
4-31: “Install or remove SFP drawer” (p. 4-224) for detailed instruction to install SFP
drawers into IO modules.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

14 Are all SFP drawers installed in all IO modules?

If yes, go Step 15.
If no, go to Step 12.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

15 Install IO Module XFP Drawers

Refer to site documentation to determine correct XFP port locations and types.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

16
Install XFP drawer. See Figure 4-8, “SFP/XFP Installation” (p. 4-32). Refer to Procedure
4-32: “Install or remove XFP drawer” (p. 4-227) for detailed instruction to install XFP
drawers into IO modules.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

17 Are all XFP drawers installed in all IO modules?

If yes, go Step 18.
If no, go to Step 15.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

18 Refer to “Visual inspection and module installation” (p. 4-285) to record installed
modules and spare modules.

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
3AG 24622 EAAA TQZZA Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary 4-31
Issue 1 February 2010 Use pursuant to applicable agreements
System turn-up and testing Procedure 4-6: Install plug-in modules

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Figure 4-8 SFP/XFP Installation

IO
(LOWER HALF)

B&W (USER)
1) INTERFACE 1

B&W (USER)
2) INTERFACE 2

SFP
L
BE
LA

B&W (USER)
3)
INTERFACE 3

B&W (USER)
4)
INTERFACE 4

OPTICAL SAFETY
LABEL

EXTRACTION HANDLE

678-0319-1
030507

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

19 STOP. This procedure is complete.

E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
4-32 Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary 3AG 24622 EAAA TQZZA
Use pursuant to applicable agreements Issue 1 February 2010
System turn-up and testing Procedure 4-7: Install an FTP server

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Procedure 4-7: Install an FTP server

When to use
This procedure provides instructions to configure a Windows® 2000 or XP PC as an FTP
server to perform NE database backup and restore or download software to a 1678 Metro
Core Connect.

General
File Transfer Protocol (FTP) services should be installed and administered by the local
customer organization responsible for workstation operations. Follow customer
guidelines.
This procedure may be used to determine if an FTP service is running, install generic
Microsoft 2000 Professional, Internet Information Services (ISS) and/or configure a
generic FTP service. Customer guidelines may very. Consult appropriate local
organization before installing any Microsoft products.
When using a PC as an FTP server, a remote NE communicating using IPoverOSI-Tunnel
interface, may experience time out problems. A possible cause of the problem may be that
the FTP server PC is configured for all TCP traffic / IP packets enabled option set to:
"don't fragment". Experiencing time out problems and receiving an error messages
similar to:
"Destination unreachable / Fragmentation needed / MTU of next hop: 448 Bytes"
Are strong indications that this may be the problem. Resolution of this problem may
require changing the configuration of the FTP server PC's MTU value. Consult the IT
department supporting the FTP server PC for appropriate resolution.
There is no checklist for this procedure.

Task
Complete the following steps.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

1 Is there currently a Microsoft ® FTP server set up on the local machine?

If yes, go to Step 2.
If unsure, go to Step 3.
If no, go to Step 18.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

2 Is the Local Path information known?

If yes, go to Step 43.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
3AG 24622 EAAA TQZZA Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary 4-33
Issue 1 February 2010 Use pursuant to applicable agreements
System turn-up and testing Procedure 4-7: Install an FTP server

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
If no, go to Step 3.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

3 Check if Microsoft ®FTP Server is Installed

Open the Control Panel. Select Start>Settings>Control Panel.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

4 Double-click the Administrative Tools icon.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

5 Double-click the Computer Management icon.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

6 In the Computer Management window, expand the Services and Applications node.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

7 Is Internet Information Services listed?

If yes, go to Step 8.
If no, there is currently no FTP server installed. Close the Computer Management
window and go to Step 18.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

8 Select Internet Information Services.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

9 Is an FTP site listed in the details window?

If yes, go to Step 10.
If no, go to Step 18.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

10 FTP server is set up on local machine. Is current FTP site to be configured with the
Alcatel-Lucent default configuration?
If yes, go to Step 34.
If no, go to Step 11.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

11 Right-click the FTP site and select Properties.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

12 Select the Home Directory tab.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

13 Write down the value entered for the Local Path for future use.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
4-34 Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary 3AG 24622 EAAA TQZZA
Use pursuant to applicable agreements Issue 1 February 2010
System turn-up and testing Procedure 4-7: Install an FTP server

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

14 Verify the Read and Write boxes are checked.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

15 Click OK.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

16 Close the Computer Management window.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

17 Go to Step 43.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

18 Install Microsoft ® FTP Server Software

Open the Control Panel. Select Start>Settings>Control Panel.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

19 Double-click Add/Remove Programs.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

20 On the left side of the Add/Remove Programs window, select Add/Remove Windows
Components.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

21 In the Components window, highlight Internet Information Services (IIS) and click the
Details... button.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

22 Select the File Transfer Protocol (FTP) Server/Service checkbox.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

23 Click OK.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

24 In the Windows Components window, click Next to initiate the installation.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

25 As the installation continues, the user may be asked to provide Windows1 media. Either
insert the disk or browse to location of files.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

26 In the completion window, click Finish.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

27 Close the Add/Remove Programs window.

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
3AG 24622 EAAA TQZZA Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary 4-35
Issue 1 February 2010 Use pursuant to applicable agreements
System turn-up and testing Procedure 4-7: Install an FTP server

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

28 Configure FTP Site

Open the Control Panel. Select Start>Settings>Control Panel.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

29 Double-click on the Administrative Tools icon.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

30 Double-click on the Computer Management icon.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

31 In the Computer Management window, expand the Services and Applications node.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

32 Select the Internet Information Services node.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

33 Right-click Default FTP Site in the details window and select Properties.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

34 Select the Security Accounts tab.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

35 Uncheck the Allow Anonymous Connections box.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

36 If prompted, click Yes in the confirmation window.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

37 Select the Home Directory tab.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

38 Under the FTP Site Directory pane, set the Local Path to where the NE database backups
and NE generic software is to be stored.
The Alcatel-Lucent preferred path is: C:\ALCATEL
Note: If selecting a different directory, note the location for future use.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

39 Verify that the Read and Write check boxes are selected.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

40 Click OK.

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
4-36 Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary 3AG 24622 EAAA TQZZA
Use pursuant to applicable agreements Issue 1 February 2010
System turn-up and testing Procedure 4-7: Install an FTP server

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

41 Close the Computer Management window.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

42 Close the Administrative Tools window.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

43 Configure FTP User Account

Open the Control Panel. Select Start>Settings>Control Panel.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

44 Double-click Users and Passwords. (For Windows XP, double-click User Accounts.)
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

45 In the Users and Passwords/User Accounts window, select the Advanced tab.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

46 Under Advanced User Management, click the Advanced button.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

47 Right-click the Users node and select New User...

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

48 Enter the name gemftp for the User name.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

49 Enter and confirm password.

Note: Record this password for future reference and protect it to prevent unauthorized
use.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

50 Uncheck the User must change password at next login box.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

51 Check the User cannot change password and Password never expires boxes.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

52 Click Create.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

53 Click Close.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

54 Close the Local Users and Groups window.

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
3AG 24622 EAAA TQZZA Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary 4-37
Issue 1 February 2010 Use pursuant to applicable agreements
System turn-up and testing Procedure 4-7: Install an FTP server

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

55 In the Users and Passwords/User Accounts window, click OK.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

56 Is PC running Windows XP Service Pack 2?

If yes, go to Step 57.
If no, go to Step 65.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

57 Create Exception for FTP Port

Open the Control Panel. Select Start>Settings>Control Panel.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

58 Double-click the Windows Firewall icon.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

59 Click the Exceptions tab.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

60 Click the Add Port... button.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

61 In the name field, enter FTP.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

62 In the Port number field, enter 21.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

63 Click OK.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

64 Click OK to close the Windows Firewall box.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

65 STOP. This procedure is complete.

E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
4-38 Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary 3AG 24622 EAAA TQZZA
Use pursuant to applicable agreements Issue 1 February 2010
System turn-up and testing Procedure 4-8: Verify FLC software load

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Procedure 4-8: Verify FLC software load

When to use
This procedure provides instructions to verify the correct 1678 Metro Core Connect NE
software is loaded on the FLCs. If software is not loaded the user instructed to load NE
software generic from an FTP server to the system disk.

General
The preferred method of software installation, maintenance and backup of the 1678 Metro
Core Connect is to and from an FTP server. Software and maintenance backup
information resides on the FTP server freeing additional space on system disks This is the
best practice for offline storage of software, file systems, and databases.
It is recommended that the Alcatel-Lucent Field Service Engineer use a laptop as the FTP
server location and use a generic or customer provided IP addresses during the software
installation process while being locally connected to the new 1678 Metro Core Connect.
For information on TL1 command syntax, refer to the 1678 MCC TL1 Command Guide.
For details concerning software installation and upgrades, refer to the 1678 Metro Core
Connect R05.05.xx Software Installation/Upgrade Guide (3EM232361203RJZZA).
Use “Verify software download” (p. 4-293) for this procedure.

Before you begin

All available equipment must be installed and powered on.
Standard LAN cable is supplied with the system and must be available.
The customer must provide previously defined IP address for the system and the gateway
as well as an FTP server IP address. An image of the software is copied to the FTP server
and downloaded to the 1678 Metro Core Connect for installation and configuration.
Procedure 4-7: “Install an FTP server” (p. 4-33) has been performed, and an FTP Server
is available to perform software download to a 1678 Metro Core Connect.
Each release software is supplied on CD-ROM. A CD-ROM drive is required to copy the
software image from the CD-ROM to the FTP server. The software image must be copied
to an accessible directory on the FTP server before beginning this procedure.
The procedure requires the user to be logged on to the craft PC as “install” user prior to
beginning this procedure.

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
3AG 24622 EAAA TQZZA Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary 4-39
Issue 1 February 2010 Use pursuant to applicable agreements
System turn-up and testing Procedure 4-8: Verify FLC software load

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Task

NOTICE
Service-disruption hazard
Possibility of service interruption.
Use this procedure only for initial turn-up of a system. Use this procedure only on a
non-traffic-carrying system. Never use this procedure on a traffic-carrying system.

Complete the following steps.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

1 Verify NE Software Is Loaded

What type of physical connection to be used?
If LAN connection, go to Step 2.
If RS-232 connection, go to Step 11.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

2 On craft PC select START>Control Panel.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

3 Double click the Network Connections icon.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

4 In Network Connections window right click LAN device and select Properties in context
menu.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

5 On device properties window General tab select Internet Protocol (TCP/IP) and click
Properties button.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

6 On Internet Protocol (TCP/IP) Properties window General tab select Use the following IP
address.
The provided IP address is a generic IP address. Use this generic IP address or an IP
address defined per local policies and procedures.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

7 Enter the following:

IP Address: 100.1.123.100
Subnet mask: 255.255.255.0

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
4-40 Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary 3AG 24622 EAAA TQZZA
Use pursuant to applicable agreements Issue 1 February 2010
System turn-up and testing Procedure 4-8: Verify FLC software load

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Default gateway: 100.1.123.254

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

8 Click OK.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

9 Connect PC to Q3A port on FLCCONGI in slot 20 using Cat 5 cable. F interface port is
third RJ-45 port from top in group of four RJ-45 ports.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

10 Go to Step 12.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

11 Connect PC to RS-232, F interface port, on FLCCONGI in slot 20 using RS-232 cable

(PN 3AL89583AAAA).
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

12 Enter ACT-USER::UID:::PID;
where:
UID=User ID
PID=System password
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

13 Was login successful?

If yes, go to Step 14.
If no, software must be loaded. Go to Step 17.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

14 Enter RTRV-PRMTR-NE;
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

15 Examine system response to verify correct software version is loaded.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

16 Is correct software loaded?

If yes, go to Step 21.
If no, go to Step 17.
Load Software Generic
For details concerning software installation and upgrades, refer to the 1678 Metro Core
Connect R05.05.xx Software Installation/Upgrade Guide (3EM232361203RJZZA).
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
3AG 24622 EAAA TQZZA Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary 4-41
Issue 1 February 2010 Use pursuant to applicable agreements
System turn-up and testing Procedure 4-8: Verify FLC software load

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

17 Record the predetermined FTP server IP Address _________________.

This information will be used through out the installation.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

18 Record the predetermined network FTP server directory where the image software is
stored:
________________________________________________________________________
This information will be used throughout the installation.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

19 Perform sections 3 through 5, Initial Installation of the FLC Software for 1678 Metro
Core Connect R05.05.xx on a New Simplex or Duplex System, of 1678 Metro Core
Connect R05.05.xx Software Installation Guide (PN 3EM232361203RJZZA) to load
generic software
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

20 Refer to “Verify software download” (p. 4-293) to record results of software installation.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

21 STOP. This procedure is complete.

E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
4-42 Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary 3AG 24622 EAAA TQZZA
Use pursuant to applicable agreements Issue 1 February 2010
System turn-up and testing Procedure 4-9: Set up and verify system and ES64SC IP
communications
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Procedure 4-9: Set up and verify system and ES64SC IP

communications
When to use
This procedure provides the instructions to perform and verify the provisioning of the
1678 Metro Core Connect IP addresses.

General
The IP addresses of the 1678 Metro Core Connect are provisioned at system turn-up.
The IP addresses for the ES64SCs are not required to be on the same subnet mask as the
1678 Metro Core Connect.
For information on TL1 command syntax, refer to 1678 MCC TL1 Command Guide.
Refer to Chapter 5, “1678 Metro Core Connect addresses and locations” for module
locations.
There is no checklist for this procedure.

Task
Complete the following steps.
PROVISION LOCAL SYSTEM IP ADDRESS
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

1 Enter
ED-IP-ADDR::AID::::ACTIVEDCRIP=a,ACTIVEEMIP=b,DCRCONGIP=c,
DCRSERVIP=d,EMCONGIP=e,EMSERVIP=f,LOOPBKIP=g,MASK=h; to configure the
IP addresses.
where:
AID=Access Identifier of OC-n facility on Node 1
a=IP address configured on DCR controller of currently active FLC
b=IP address configured on EM controller of currently active FLC
c=IP address configured on the DCR controller of the FLCCONGI card
d=IP address configured on the DCR controller of the FLCSERVICE card
e=IP address configured on the EM controller of the FLCCONGI card
f=IP address configured on the EM controller of the FLCSERVICE card
g=SNMP management address of the ES64 card or the loopback IP address of the NE.
The NE loopback address is also used as OSPF Router Id.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
3AG 24622 EAAA TQZZA Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary 4-43
Issue 1 February 2010 Use pursuant to applicable agreements
System turn-up and testing Procedure 4-9: Set up and verify system and ES64SC IP
communications
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
h=Subnet mask of the network the NE is connected to on the Customer LAN
The ED-IP-ADDR command logs out the user.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

2 Enter ACT-USER::UID:::PID;
where:
UID=User ID
PID=System password
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

3 Enter RTRV-IP-ADDR::::::; to retrieve the configured IP addresses.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

4 Verify all IP address information is correctly configured. All IP addresses must be on

same subnet.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

5 Is all information correct?

If yes, go to Step 6.
If no, go to Step 1.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

6 Confirm Connectivity
Ping NE from a node (router or PC) on the management LAN.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

7 Was ping successful?

If yes, go to Step 8.
If no, contact next level of support.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

8 Does a gateway NE address need to be configured?

If yes, go to Step 9.
If no, go to Step 22.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

9 Configure Default Gateway

Enter ENT-NE-IPRT::AID:::DESTADDR,MASK,NEXTHOP; to provision default route
in IP routing table. These addresses are supplied by customer.

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
4-44 Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary 3AG 24622 EAAA TQZZA
Use pursuant to applicable agreements Issue 1 February 2010
System turn-up and testing Procedure 4-9: Set up and verify system and ES64SC IP
communications
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
where:
AID=specifies OCn facility carrying DCC with the next hop network interface or
identifies IP Tunnel or Customer LAN.
DESTADDR=IP address of the destination host or network.
MASK=IP subnet mask of route.
NEXTHOP=IP address of the next interface in route.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

10 Enter RTRV-NE-IPRT; to retrieve all IP routes entered in IP routing table.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

11 Are IP routes correctly listed in system response?

If yes, go to Step 12.
If no, go to Step 9 and reenter incorrect IP routes.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

12 CONFIRM CONNECTIVITY
IP ping 1678 Metro Core Connect ACTIVEDCRIP and LOOPBKIP addresses from a PC
on the management LAN.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

13 Is ping successful?
If yes, go to Step 22.
If no, contact the next level of support.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

14 PROVISION LOCAL ES64SC IP ADDRESSES

Enter ED-IP-ADDR::AID::::LOOPBKIP=a; to configure the IP addresses for each
ES64SC equipped in the system.
where:
AID=Access Identifier of ES64SC
a=SNMP management address of the ES64SC.
The IP addresses for the ES64SCs are not required to be on the same subnet mask as the
1678 Metro Core Connect.
The ED-IP-ADDR command logs out the user.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

15 Enter ACT-USER::UID:::PID;
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
3AG 24622 EAAA TQZZA Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary 4-45
Issue 1 February 2010 Use pursuant to applicable agreements
System turn-up and testing Procedure 4-9: Set up and verify system and ES64SC IP
communications
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
where:
UID=User ID
PID=System password
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

16 Repeat Step 14 and Step 15 for each ES64SC equipped in the system.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

17 Enter RTRV-IP-ADDR::::::; to retrieve the configured ES64SC IP addresses.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

18 Verify all ES64SC IP address information is correctly configured.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

19 Is all information correct?

If yes, go to Step 20.
If no, go to Step 14.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

20 CONFIRM CONNECTIVITY
IP ping 1678 Metro Core Connect ES64SC addresses from a PC on the management
LAN.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

21 Are pings successful?

If yes, go to Step 22.
If no, contact the next level of support.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

22 STOP. This procedure is complete.

E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
4-46 Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary 3AG 24622 EAAA TQZZA
Use pursuant to applicable agreements Issue 1 February 2010
System turn-up and testing Procedure 4-10: Provision LAN communication to external
router
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Procedure 4-10: Provision LAN communication to external

router
When to use
This procedure provides the instructions to provision the LAN interface between the 1678
Metro Core Connect and the external routers for the data network.

Prerequisites
The IP addresses must be configured on the FLCs and connectivity with the external
routers must be verified.
The procedure configures the destination address as a default route.
The procedure configures the IP subnet mask as a default route.
For information on TL1 command syntax, refer to 1678 MCC TL1 Command Guide.
Refer to Chapter 5, “1678 Metro Core Connect addresses and locations” for module
locations.
There is no checklist for this procedure.

Task
PROVISION IP
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

1 Enter ENT-NE-IPRT::LAN-1:::0-0-0-0,0-0-0-0,a,N; to configure the static IP

Route from the NE to the External Router.
where:
AID=Access Identifier of the LAN-1
a=Nexthop (IP address of external router
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

2 Static IP routes on the external routers and IDN routers must also be configured.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

3 Verify setup by pinging NE from a PC on the IDN network.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

4 Was ping successful?

If yes, go to Step 6.
If no, go to Step 5.

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
3AG 24622 EAAA TQZZA Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary 4-47
Issue 1 February 2010 Use pursuant to applicable agreements
System turn-up and testing Procedure 4-10: Provision LAN communication to external
router
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

5 Contact next level of support.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

6 STOP. This procedure is complete.

E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
4-48 Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary 3AG 24622 EAAA TQZZA
Use pursuant to applicable agreements Issue 1 February 2010
System turn-up and testing Procedure 4-11: Configure BITS timing source and clock
output
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Procedure 4-11: Configure BITS timing source and clock

output
When to use
This procedure provides instructions to configure the 1678 Metro Core Connect BITS
timing source and clock output.

General
The 1678 Metro Core Connect supports external BITS timing. This procedure assumes
that the BITS source is connected to both timing modules.
Sync switching is provisionable to either non-revertive or revertive.
Sync messaging is provisionable to either CRG reference selection by priorities or by
SSM quality levels (SSM-messaging enabled).
If SSM-messaging is enabled the frame format is either Super Frame (SF) or Extended
Super Frame (ESF).
Line build-out (LBO) in the following procedure represents the length in feet (meters) of
DS1 cable from the BITS output reference to the DSX panel.
For information on TL1 command syntax, refer to 1678 MCC TL1 Command Guide.
There is no checklist for this procedure.

Before you begin

Ensure the reference clocks are running at least 15 to 20 minutes before testing.

Task

NOTICE
Service-disruption hazard
Possibility of service interruption.
Use this procedure only for initial turn-up of a system. Use this procedure only on a
non-traffic-carrying system. Never use this procedure on a traffic-carrying system. When
working with a traffic-carrying system, refer to the 1678 MCC Maintenance and
Trouble-Clearing Guide.

Complete the following steps.

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
3AG 24622 EAAA TQZZA Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary 4-49
Issue 1 February 2010 Use pursuant to applicable agreements
System turn-up and testing Procedure 4-11: Configure BITS timing source and clock
output
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Configure Timing Source
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

1 Enter RTRV-SYNCN; to view system timing information.

BITS-0 and BITS-1 are the recommended values for PRICREF and SECCREF,
respectively. To set PRICREF and SECCREF to other values, refer to the 1678 MCC TL1
Command Guide and the 1678 MCC TL1 User Provisioning Guide.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

2 Enter ED-BITS::BITS-0::::LINECDE=a,FMT=b; to set attributes for BITS external

timing ports. Refer to CO requirements.
where:
a=AMI (alternate mark inversion) or B8ZS (binary eight zero substitution)
b=ESF (Extended Super Frame) or SF (Super Frame)
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

3 Repeat Step 2 to configure BITS-1.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

4 Is BITS-0 primary reference (PRICREF) and BITS-1 secondary reference (SECCREF)?

If yes, go to Step 9.
If no, go to Step 5.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

5 Enter ED-SYNCN::::::PRICREF=BITS-0,SECCREF=BITS-1; to set sync references.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

6 Enter RTRV-SYNCN; to verify that system timing information is correct.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

7 Is system timing set to BITS-0 for PRICREF and BITS-1 for SECCREF?
If yes, go to Step 9.
If no, go to Step 5.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

8 Refer to the 1678 MCC Maintenance and Trouble-Clearing Guide to correct timing
problem then go to Step 1.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

9 Enter ED-SYNCN::::::SYNCMSG=a,RVRTV=b; to set sync messaging and switching

parameters. Refer to CO requirements.

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
4-50 Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary 3AG 24622 EAAA TQZZA
Use pursuant to applicable agreements Issue 1 February 2010
System turn-up and testing Procedure 4-11: Configure BITS timing source and clock
output
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
where:
a=N (sync messaging disabled) or Y (sync messaging enabled)
b=N (switching is non-revertive) or Y (switching is revertive)
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

10 Verify BITS Clock Distribution

Enter RTRV-BITS; to verify line code and format.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

11 Are line code and format set according to CO requirements?

If yes, go to Step 13.
If no, repeat Step 2, Step 10, and Step 11 to reprovision line code and format.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

12 Enter RTRV-SYNCN; to verify sync messaging and switching parameters.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

13 Are sync messaging and switching set according to CO requirements?

If yes, go to Step 14.
If no, repeat Step 9, Step 12, and Step 13 to reprovision sync messaging and switching
parameters.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

14 Enter RTRV-ALM-ALL; to retrieve all alarms.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

15 Enter RTRV-COND-ALL; to retrieve all alarms.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

16 Are any timing alarms or conditions present?

If yes, troubleshoot, then go to Step 14.
If no, go to Step 17.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

17 Configure BITS Clock Output

Does system require BITS clock output configured? Refer to CO requirements.
If yes, go to Step 18.
If no, go to Step 27.

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
3AG 24622 EAAA TQZZA Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary 4-51
Issue 1 February 2010 Use pursuant to applicable agreements
System turn-up and testing Procedure 4-11: Configure BITS timing source and clock
output
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

18 Enter ED-BITS-OUT::ALL::::FMT=a,LBO0=b; to set parameters for BITS clock

output format and LBO value. Refer to CO requirements.
where:
a=ESF (Extended Super Frame) or SF (Super Frame)
b=1 (LBO1 = 0-133 feet (0-40 m)),
2 (LBO2 = 133-266 feet (40-80 m)),
3 (LBO3 = 266-399 feet (80-120 m)),
4 (LBO4 = 399-533 feet (120-160 m)), or
5 (LBO5 = 533-655 feet (160-197 m))
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

19 Enter ED-SYNCN-OUT::::::PRIOREFA=a,SECOREFB=a; to set BITS clock output

references. Refer to CO requirements.
where:
a=OC192-1-3-(2-9,12-19)-(1-4) (OC-192),
OC48-1-3-(2-9,12-19)-(1-16) (OC-48),
OC12-1-3-(2-9,12-19)-(1-16) (OC-12), or
OC3-1-3-(2-9,12-19)-(1-16) (OC-3)
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

20 Verify BITS Clock Output

Enter RTRV-SYNCN-OUT; to verify BITS clock output references.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

21 Are BITS clock output references set according to CO requirements?

If yes, go to Step 22.
If no, repeat Step 19, Step 20, and Step 21.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

22 Enter RTRV-BITS-OUT::ALL; to verify format and LBO values.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

23 Are frame format and LBO values set according to CO requirements?

If yes, go to Step 24.
If no, repeat Step 18, Step 22, and Step 23 to reprovision format and LBO value.

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
4-52 Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary 3AG 24622 EAAA TQZZA
Use pursuant to applicable agreements Issue 1 February 2010
System turn-up and testing Procedure 4-11: Configure BITS timing source and clock
output
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

24 Enter RTRV-ALM-ALL; to retrieve all alarms.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

25 Enter RTRV-COND-ALL; to retrieve all alarms.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

26 Are any timing alarms or conditions present associated with BITS clock output?
If yes, troubleshoot, then go to Step 24.
If no, go to Step 27.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

27 STOP. This procedure is complete.

E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
3AG 24622 EAAA TQZZA Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary 4-53
Issue 1 February 2010 Use pursuant to applicable agreements
System turn-up and testing Procedure 4-12: Create clean database backup

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Procedure 4-12: Create clean database backup

When to use
This procedure provides instructions to backup the current provisioning database of the
1678 Metro Core Connect to an FTP server.

General
The ACT-DB-BACKUP command performs a backup of the primary active database
(ACT DSK DB) to the secondary standby database (STDBY DB).
The COPY-RFILE command is used to move database or software generic files from and
to different locations: disk storage on the NE or a Remote File Server (RFS).
Two database backups are performed during the turn-up process, one without equipment
protection provisioned and one with equipment protection provisioned.
For parameter descriptions of TL1 commands used in this procedure, refer to the 1678
MCC TL1 Command Guide or to Chapter 5, “1678 Metro Core Connect addresses and
locations”.
Use “Database backup” (p. 4-294) for this procedure.

Before you begin

To perform this procedure the NE being backed up must have IP-based access and the
user must be logged in to that node.

Task
Complete the following steps.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

1 Enter RTRV-PRMTR-NE; to retrieve general system level configuration information.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

2 Verify software release and date against that recorded in “Verify software download”
(p. 4-293).
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

3 Enter RTRV-ALM-ALL;
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

4 Are any alarms present?

If yes, go to Step 5.
If no, verify in “Database backup” (p. 4-294), then go to Step 6.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
4-54 Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary 3AG 24622 EAAA TQZZA
Use pursuant to applicable agreements Issue 1 February 2010
System turn-up and testing Procedure 4-12: Create clean database backup

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

5 Refer to 1678 MCC Maintenance and Trouble-Clearing Guide to clear alarms, verify in
“Database backup” (p. 4-294), then go to Step 6.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

6 Are any conditions present?

If yes, go to Step 7.
If no, verify in “Database backup” (p. 4-294), then go to Step 8.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

7 Refer to 1678 MCC Maintenance and Trouble-Clearing Guide to clear alarms, verify in
“Database backup” (p. 4-294), then go to Step 8.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

8 Enter ACT-DB-BACKUP::; to copy the primary active database (ACT DSK DB) to the
secondary standby database (STDBY DB).
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

9 Did database backup complete without errors?

If yes, verify in “Database backup” (p. 4-294), then go to Step 11.
If no, go to Step 10.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

10 Refer to 1678 MCC Maintenance and Trouble-Clearing Guide to clear errors, then go to
Step 8.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

11 Enter COPY-RFILE::STBYDB,RFSDB::::LOCATION=a; to copy the saved

provisioning database to the FTP server.
where:
a= Indicates the source/destination of the files on an RFS to be transferred. The syntax of
the url is as follows:
"ftp://<userid>:<password>@<ftphost>:<port>/<url-path>"
where:
userid=User identifier used for the ftp connection on the RFS.
password=User password used for the ftp connection on the RFS.
ftphost=IP address of the host (the Remote File)

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
3AG 24622 EAAA TQZZA Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary 4-55
Issue 1 February 2010 Use pursuant to applicable agreements
System turn-up and testing Procedure 4-12: Create clean database backup

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Other parameters are optional. If a value is not entered for these parameters, the system
will use the default value. Refer to 1678 MCC TL1 Command Guide for details on
parameter values.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

12 Wait for completion message, then verify in “Database backup” (p. 4-294).
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

13 STOP. This procedure is complete.

E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
4-56 Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary 3AG 24622 EAAA TQZZA
Use pursuant to applicable agreements Issue 1 February 2010
System turn-up and testing Procedure 4-13: Provision equipment

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Procedure 4-13: Provision equipment

When to use
This procedure provides instructions to provision the 1678 Metro Core Connect I/O
modules.

General
The ENT-NE command creates the mandatory default equipment in the system. The
system matrix type must be specified with the MATRIX parameter.
• NGTRU with DC/DC step-up power converters and Bypass module
• 1678 main shelf
• FAN
• FLCs (FLCSERVA, FLCCONGI)
• PSFs
• MX matrix cards (MX640GA, MX320GA)
The ENT-EQPT command assigns an equipment object entity at the AID physical
location and provisions the specified equipment (also called pre-provisioning), regardless
of whether the equipment is installed in the system. Refer to Table 4-1, “Supported
modules” (p. 4-58) for supported modules in the shelf.
Non-mandatory equipment is provisionable regardless of actual presence in the system.
There are two basic modes of provisioning for non-mandatory equipment:
• Auto-provisioning—The FLC discovers and provisions a module once it is inserted
into a slot and places it in service.
• Pre-provisioning—The slot is provisioned in advance of a card being inserted.
The following equipment is non-mandatory and can be pre-provisioned into the system
(using the ENT-EQPT command):
• ES64SC
• IOCs (P4S64X, P2S64X, P16S16, P8S16, P16S1S4, P16S1S, P16GEFC, P8GEFC)
• SFPs (IR1OC3, LR10C3, LR2OC3, IR1OC12, LR1OC12, LR2OC12, IR1OC48,
LR1OC48, LR2OC48, SR1OC48, 1000BLX, 1000BSX)
• XFPs (10GBE, 10GBL, 10GBS, IR2OC192, LR2OC192)
IOCs, SFPs, and XFPs can also be autoprovisioned.
To provision an SFP/XFP, the corresponding IOC must be provisioned. Refer to Table
4-2, “Supported optics” (p. 4-59).

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
3AG 24622 EAAA TQZZA Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary 4-57
Issue 1 February 2010 Use pursuant to applicable agreements
System turn-up and testing Procedure 4-13: Provision equipment

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
The AINSMODE parameter is used to specify if the card missing alarm is generated after
the ENT-EQPT command. A value of AINS indicates no alarm is generated after
pre-provisioning until a module is plugged into the slot for the first time. A value of
NOWAIT indicates an alarm is generated immediately after the ENT-EQPT command is
entered.
Once equipment is provisioned, ED-EQPT can be used to alter parameters.
See Figure 4-9, “Shelf slot locations” (p. 4-63) for a drawing of the shelf showing slot
locations.
Table 4-1 Supported modules
Module Function Required/ Card slots
Optional
BUSTERM Bus Termination 2/0 21 (W), 22 (P)
ES64SC ES64 L2 Switching Server Card 0/2 2-9, 12-19 (W and P)1
FAN Fan Units 2/0 Shelves 2 and 4, Slot 1
FLCCONGI First Level Controller/Control and 1/0 202
General Interface
FLCSERVA First Level Controller and Service 1/0 12
Interface
MX320GA Matrix 320G HPC and ANSI Timing 23/0 10 (W), 11 (P)
(CRU)
MX640GA Matrix 640G HPC and ANSI Timing 23/0 10 (W), 11 (P)
(CRU)
NGTRCSU DC/DC Step-Up Converter 2/0 1,2 (within NGTRU shelf)
P16S1S Sixteen Port OC-3 0/16 2-9, 12-19
P16S1S4 Sixteen Port OC-12/OC-34 0/16 2-9, 12-19
P8GEFC Eight Port Gigabit Ethernet 0/16 2-9, 12-19
P8S16 Eight Port OC-48 0/16 2-9, 12-19
P16GEFC Sixteen Port Gigabit Ethernet 0/16 2-9, 12-19
P16S16 Sixteen Port OC-48 0/16 2-9, 12-19
P2S64X Two Port OC-192 0/16 2-9, 12-19
P2XGE Two Port 10 Gigabit Ethernet 0/16 2-9, 12-19
P4S64X Four Port OC-192 0/16 2-9, 12-19
PSF Power Supply Filter 2/0 24 (W), 25 (P)
SFP OC-3/12/48 Small Form Factor Plug-In 0/256 2-9, 12-19
XFP 10 Gb Small Form Factor Plug-In 0/64 2-9, 12-19

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
4-58 Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary 3AG 24622 EAAA TQZZA
Use pursuant to applicable agreements Issue 1 February 2010
System turn-up and testing Procedure 4-13: Provision equipment

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Notes:
1. ES64SC can be placed in any I/O slot. One board is working and the other is protecting. Only three pairs
allowed per shelf.
2. For First Level Controller functionality, one board is working and the other is protecting.
3. Depending on required matrix capacity, either two MX640GAs or two MX320GAs can be equipped.
4. P16S1S4 can be mixed with OC-12 and OC-3 SFP modules. There are four groups of SFP modules (1-4, 5-8,
9-12, 13-16) and all interfaces of the group can support either OC-12 or OC-3.

Table 4-2 Supported optics

Function Provision Type Equipped on card
10 GBE XFP (10GBASE ER/EW) 10GBE P2XGE
10 GBE XFP (10GBASE LR/LW) 10GBL P2XGE
10 GBE XFP (10GBASE SR/SW) 10GBS P2XGE
GBE SFP (1000BASE-LX, 1310 nm) 1000BLX P8GEFC, P16GEFC
GBE SFP (1000BASE-LX, 850 nm) 1000BSX P8GEFC, P16GEFC
OC-3 SFP (Short Haul, 1310 nm) IR1OC3 P16S1S, P16S1S4
OC-3 SFP (Long Haul, 1310 nm) LR10C3 P16S1S, P16S1S4
OC-3 SFP (Long Haul, 1550 nm) LR2OC3 P16S1S, P16S1S4
OC-12 SFP (Short Haul, 1310 nm) IR1OC12 P16S1S4
OC-12 SFP (Long Haul, 1310 nm) LR1OC12 P16S1S4
OC-12 SFP (Long Haul, 1550 nm) LR2OC12 P16S1S4
OC-48 SFP (Short Haul, 1310 nm) IR1OC48 P8S16, P16S16
OC-48 SFP (Short Haul, 1310 nm) SR1OC48 P8S16, P16S16
OC-48 SFP (Long Haul, 1310 nm) LR1OC48 P8S16, P16S16
OC-48 SFP (Long Haul, 1550 nm) LR2OC48 P8S16, P16S16
OC-48 SFP (Long Haul, DWDM, 1520 - 1568 LR2OC48 P8S16, P16S16
nm)
OC-192 XFP (Intraoffice, 1310 nm) SR1OC192 P2S64X, P4S64X
OC-192 XFP (Short Haul, 1550 nm) IR2OC192 P2S64X, P4S64X
OC-192 XFP (Long Haul, 1550 nm) LR2OC192 P2S64X, P4S64X

Refer to 1678 MCC TL1 Command Guide for more information on commands and
command syntax.
There is no checklist for this procedure.

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
3AG 24622 EAAA TQZZA Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary 4-59
Issue 1 February 2010 Use pursuant to applicable agreements
System turn-up and testing Procedure 4-13: Provision equipment

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Task

NOTICE
Service-disruption hazard
Possibility of service interruption.
Use this procedure for only initial turn-up of the system. Never use this procedure on a
traffic-carrying system.

Complete the following steps.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

1 Install all modules to be provisioned in system. Refer to Procedure 4-6: “Install plug-in
modules” (p. 4-27) for more information.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

2 Enter RTRV-ALM-ALL; to retrieve alarms.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

3 Are any alarms present?

If yes, go to Step 4.
If no, go to Step 5.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

4 Clear all alarms that prevent installation. Refer to 1678 MCC Maintenance and
Trouble-Clearing Guide, then go to Step 2.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

5 Enter RTRV-COND-ALL; to retrieve conditions.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

6 Are any conditions present?

If yes, go to Step 7.
If no, go to Step 8.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

7 Clear all conditions that prevent installation. Refer to 1678 MCC Maintenance and
Trouble-Clearing Guide, then go to Step 5.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

8 Enter ENT-NE::::::MATRIX=a; to provision

where:

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
4-60 Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary 3AG 24622 EAAA TQZZA
Use pursuant to applicable agreements Issue 1 February 2010
System turn-up and testing
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
9 On both matrix modules, press the reset button.
10
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
3AG 24622 EAAA TQZZA
Issue 1 February 2010
Procedure 4-13: Provision equipment
a=MX320GA or MX640GA
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Enter ENT-EQPT::AID::::PROVISIONEDTYPE=a;
where:
AID=Access Identifier of module to be provisioned
a=P16OC3 for P16S1S module type,
P16OC3OC12 for P16S1S4 module type,
P16OC48 for P16S16X module type,
P8OC48 for P8S16X module type,
P4OC192 for P4S64X module type,
P2OC192 for P2S64X module type,
P2XGE for P2XGE module type,
P16GEFC for P16GEFC module type,
P8GEFC for P8GEFC module type,
ES64SC for ES64SC module type,
IR1OC3 for IR-1 OC3 SFP equipped on P16S1S or P16S1S4 module types,
LR1OC3 for LR-1 OC3 SFP equipped on P16S1S or P16S1S4 module types,
LR2OC3 for LR-2 OC3 SFP equipped on P16S1S or P16S1S4 module types,
IR1OC12 for IR-1 OC12 SFP equipped on P16S1S4 module type,
LR1OC12 for LR-1 OC12 SFP equipped on P16S1S4 module type,
LR2OC12 for LR-2 OC12 SFP equipped on P16S1S4 module type,
IR1OC48 for IR-1 OC48 SFP equipped on P16S16 or P8S16 module types,
LR1OC48 for LR-1 OC48 SFP equipped on P16S16 or P8S16 module types,
LR2OC48 for LR-2 OC48 SFP equipped on P16S16 or P8S16 module types,
SR1OC48 for SR-1 OC48 SFP equipped on P16S16 or P8S16 module types,
SR1OC192 for SR-1 OC192 XFP equipped on P4S64 or P2S64 module types,
IR2OC192 for IR-2 OC192 XFP equipped on P4S64 or P2S64 module types,
LR2OC192 for LR-2 OC192 XFP equipped on P4S64 or P2S64 module types,
1000BSX for 1000Base SX SFP equipped on P16GEFC or P8GEFC module types, or
Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary 4-61
Use pursuant to applicable agreements
System turn-up and testing Procedure 4-13: Provision equipment

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1000BLX for 1000Base LX SFP equipped on P16GEFC or P8GEFC module types
10GBE for 10GBase ER/EW XFP equipped on P2XGE module types,
10GBL for 10GBase LR/LW XFP equipped on P2XGE module types, or
10GBS for 10GBase SR/SW XFP equipped on P2XGE module type
Other parameters are optional. If a value is not entered for these parameters, the system
will use the default value. Refer to 1678 MCC TL1 Command Guide for details on
parameter values.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

11 Are there more modules to provision?

If yes, go to Step 10.
If no, go to Step 12
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

12 STOP. This procedure is complete.

E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
4-62 Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary 3AG 24622 EAAA TQZZA
Use pursuant to applicable agreements Issue 1 February 2010
System turn-up and testing Procedure 4-13: Provision equipment

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Figure 4-9 Shelf slot locations

FAN

24 PSF

25 PSF
MX640GA OR MX320GA

MX640GA OR MX320GA
I/O OR ES64SC
I/O OR ES64SC
I/O OR ES64SC
I/O OR ES64SC
I/O OR ES64SC
I/O OR ES64SC
I/O OR ES64SC
I/O OR ES64SC

I/O OR ES64SC
I/O OR ES64SC
I/O OR ES64SC
I/O OR ES64SC
I/O OR ES64SC
I/O OR ES64SC
I/O OR ES64SC
I/O OR ES64SC
20 FLCCONGI
FLCSERVA
1
21 BUSTERM

22 BUSTERM
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
10

11
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9

FAN

678-0020-1
011106

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
3AG 24622 EAAA TQZZA Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary 4-63
Issue 1 February 2010 Use pursuant to applicable agreements
System turn-up and testing Procedure 4-14: Confirm cabling between GBE I/O and LGX
panel
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Procedure 4-14: Confirm cabling between GBE I/O and LGX

panel
When to use
This procedure provides instructions to confirm fiber-optic cabling between the system
Gigabit Ethernet (GBE) I/O modules and the customer LGX panel.

General
For information on TL1 command syntax, refer to the 1678 MCC TL1 Command Guide.
Refer to Chapter 5, “1678 Metro Core Connect addresses and locations” for rack, shelf,
and module locations.
Use “Verify cabling between GBE IO and LGX panel” (p. 4-295) with this procedure.

Required equipment
The following equipment is required for this procedure:
• Test set capable of measuring Gigabit Ethernet
• Optical power meter with LC and SC adapters
• LC-to-SC adapter cables
• Multi-mode fiber optic cables
• Jumper cables compatible with LGX panel
• Optical attenuators (5 dB, 10 dB, 15 dB)

Task

CAUTION
Laser hazard
Use of controls or adjustments or performance of procedures other than those specified
herein may result in hazardous radiation exposure.

NOTICE
Service-disruption hazard
Possibility of service interruption.
Use this procedure for initial turn-up of a system only. Never use this procedure on a
traffic-carrying system. When working with a traffic-carrying system, refer to the 1678
MCC Maintenance and Trouble-Clearing Guide.

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
4-64 Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary 3AG 24622 EAAA TQZZA
Use pursuant to applicable agreements Issue 1 February 2010
System turn-up and testing Procedure 4-14: Confirm cabling between GBE I/O and LGX
panel
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Complete the following steps.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

1 Verify LGX to GBE Rx Fiber-Optic Cable

Using a test fiber-optic cable, measure the optical power output of the GBE test set TX
port and record level.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

2 Disconnect the LGX panel end fiber-optic cable for GBE facility and connect to GBE test
set output.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

3 Connect module end of fiber-optic cable that runs between LGX panel and Rx port of
GBE module to optical power meter. If necessary, use attenuation at test set end to protect
power meter.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

4 Is Rx fiber OK?
If yes, go to Step 5.
If no, clean fiber connections as explained in Procedure 4-16: “Clean fiber-optic
connectors” (p. 4-75) or replace defective fiber before proceeding.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

5 Disconnect fiber from optical power meter and connect to GBE module Rx port. If
necessary, use attenuation at test set end to protect module input. Refer to Table 4-3, “SFP
optical power specifications” (p. 4-65) for SFP specifications.
Table 4-3 SFP optical power specifications
RX sensitivity
Wavelength TX optical power (dBm)
OC rate Optical interface (dBm)
[nm]
Min Max Min /max
GBE 1000Base SX 850 −9.5 −4 −18 0
1000Base LX 1310 −11 −3 −20 −3

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

6 Measure GBE Module Tx Output Across Fiber-Optic Cable at LGX Panel End
Connect module end of fiber-optic cable that runs between LGX panel and Tx port of
GBE module and to GBE module.

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
3AG 24622 EAAA TQZZA Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary 4-65
Issue 1 February 2010 Use pursuant to applicable agreements
System turn-up and testing Procedure 4-14: Confirm cabling between GBE I/O and LGX
panel
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

7 Disconnect the LGX panel end fiber-optic cable for GBE Tx facility and connect to
optical power meter. If necessary, use attenuation at protect power meter end. See Figure
4-10, “GBE LGX panel receive fiber power measurement” (p. 4-67)
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

8 Enter ENT-GBE::AID::::NEGOTN=AUTO:IS,AINS; for GBE facility under test on a

GBE module. Refer to “Verify cabling between GBE IO and LGX panel” (p. 4-295) for
provisioning order.
where:
AID=access identifier of GBE facility.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

9 Is GBE module power level, including attenuator value, within minimum and maximum
specifications in Table 4-3, “SFP optical power specifications” (p. 4-65)?
If yes, record results in “Verify cabling between GBE IO and LGX panel” (p. 4-295), then
go to Step 12.
If no, go to Step 10.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

10 Clean fiber-optics and optical connectors (refer to Procedure 4-16: “Clean fiber-optic
connectors” (p. 4-75)), and then retest connection. If connection still fails test, recheck
fiber-optic cable routing, replace faulty fiber-optic cable or GBE SFP. Refer to the 1678
MCC Maintenance and Trouble-Clearing Guide.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

11 Go to Step 9 to retest connection.

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
4-66 Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary 3AG 24622 EAAA TQZZA
Use pursuant to applicable agreements Issue 1 February 2010
System turn-up and testing Procedure 4-14: Confirm cabling between GBE I/O and LGX
panel
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Figure 4-10 GBE LGX panel receive fiber power measurement

OPTICAL
LGX PANEL
POWER
METER A TX 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12

GBE
TEST TX
SET A RX 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12

GBE IO PUSH PUSH PUSH PUSH

MODULE
IN SHELF

A OPTICAL ATTENUATOR, IF REQUIRED

678-0311-1
010407

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

12 Disconnect fiber-optic cables from GBE test set then reconnect LGX Rx panel connector.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

13 Disconnect fiber-optic cables from optical power meter then reconnect to LGX Tx panel
connector.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

14 Have all GBE ports been tested?

If yes, go to Step 15.
If no, go to Step 2.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

15 STOP. This procedure is complete.

E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
3AG 24622 EAAA TQZZA Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary 4-67
Issue 1 February 2010 Use pursuant to applicable agreements
System turn-up and testing Procedure 4-15: Confirm cabling between OC-n I/O and LGX
panel
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Procedure 4-15: Confirm cabling between OC-n I/O and LGX

panel
When to use
This procedure provides instructions to confirm fiber-optic cabling between the system
Optical Carrier (OC) I/O modules and the customer LGX panel.

General
For information on TL1 command syntax, refer to the 1678 MCC TL1 Command Guide.
Refer to Chapter 5, “1678 Metro Core Connect addresses and locations” for rack, shelf,
and module locations.
Use “Verify cabling between OC-n I/O and LGX panel” (p. 4-305) with this procedure.

Required equipment
The following equipment is required for this procedure:
• OCn test set
• Optical power meter with LC and SC adapters
• LC-to-SC adapter cables
• Jumper cables compatible with LGX panel
• Optical attenuators (5 dB, 10 dB, 15 dB)

Task

CAUTION
Laser hazard
Use of controls or adjustments or performance of procedures other than those specified
herein may result in hazardous radiation exposure.

NOTICE
Service-disruption hazard
Possibility of service interruption.
Use this procedure for initial turn-up of a system only. Never use this procedure on a
traffic-carrying system. When working with a traffic-carrying system, refer to the 1678
MCC Maintenance and Trouble-Clearing Guide.

Complete the following steps.

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
4-68 Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary 3AG 24622 EAAA TQZZA
Use pursuant to applicable agreements Issue 1 February 2010
System turn-up and testing Procedure 4-15: Confirm cabling between OC-n I/O and LGX
panel
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

1 Measure OCn Module Output Across Fiber-Optic Cable at LGX Panel End
Using a test fiber-optic cable, measure the optical power output of the OCn test set TX
port and record level in “Verify cabling between OC-n I/O and LGX panel” (p. 4-305).
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

2 Connect fiber-optic cable that runs between Tx port of OCn module and LGX panel to Tx
port of OCn module under test.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

3 At LGX panel, disconnect fiber-optic cable connected to OCn module in Step 2.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

4 Set power meter wavelength to correct wavelength for the SFP/XFP under test. Refer to
Table 4-4, “SFP/XFP optical power specifications” (p. 4-70) for SFP/XFP optical
specifications.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

5 Connect LGX-panel end of fiber-optic cable to optical power meter using an attenuator to
prevent damage to optical power meter. Refer to Table 4-4, “SFP/XFP optical power
specifications” (p. 4-70) for transmit power levels to determine attenuator value. See
figure Figure 4-11, “LGX panel transmit fiber power measurement” (p. 4-70).
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

6 Enter ENT-OCn::AID::::ALSENB=N; for one OC-n on an OCn module. Refer to

“Verify cabling between OC-n I/O and LGX panel” (p. 4-305) for provisioning order.
where:
n=3, 12, 48, or 192
AID=access identifier of OC-n.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

7 Measure output optical signal. Refer to Table 4-4, “SFP/XFP optical power
specifications” (p. 4-70) for OCn module specifications.

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
3AG 24622 EAAA TQZZA Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary 4-69
Issue 1 February 2010 Use pursuant to applicable agreements
System turn-up and testing Procedure 4-15: Confirm cabling between OC-n I/O and LGX
panel
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Figure 4-11 LGX panel transmit fiber power measurement

LGX PANEL
TX 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12

OPTICAL
POWER A A A A A A A A A A A A
METER A
RX 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12

IO MODULE PUSH PUSH PUSH PUSH

IN SHELF

A OPTICAL ATTENUATOR, IF REQUIRED

FIBER CONNECTIONS ON LGX PANEL

678-0302-1
122106

Table 4-4 SFP/XFP optical power specifications

TX optical power RX sensitivity
Wavelength (dBm) (dBm)
OC rate Optical interface
[nm]
Min Max Min /max
OC-3 IR1OC3 (short haul) 1310 -15 -8 -28 -81
LR10C3 (long haul) 1310 -5 0 -34 -102
LR2OC3 (long haul) 1550 -5 0 -34 -102
OC-12 IR1OC12 (short haul) 1310 -15 -8 -28 -81
LR1OC12 (long haul) 1310 -3 2 -28 -82
LR2OC12 (long haul) 1550 -3 2 -28 -82

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
4-70 Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary 3AG 24622 EAAA TQZZA
Use pursuant to applicable agreements Issue 1 February 2010
System turn-up and testing Procedure 4-15: Confirm cabling between OC-n I/O and LGX
panel
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Table 4-4 SFP/XFP optical power specifications (continued)
TX optical power RX sensitivity
Wavelength (dBm) (dBm)
OC rate Optical interface
[nm]
Min Max Min /max
OC-48 SR1OC48 (short haul) 1310 -10 -3 -18 -31
IR1OC48 (short haul) 1310 -5 0 -18 01
LR1OC48 (long haul) 1310 -2 2 -27 -82
LR2OC48 (long haul) 1550 -2 2 -28 -82
LR2OC48 (long haul, 1520 - 1568 -2 2 -28 -82
DWDM)
OC-192 SR1OC192 1310 -6 -1 -11 -11
(intra–office)
IR2OC192 (short haul) 1550 -1 2 -14 -11
LR2OC192 (long haul) 1550 10 12 -14 -12

Notes:
1. 5 dB attenuator suggested
2. 15 dB attenuator required

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

8 Is power level, including attenuator value(s), within minimum and maximum

specifications in Table 4-4, “SFP/XFP optical power specifications” (p. 4-70)?
If yes, record results in “Verify cabling between OC-n I/O and LGX panel” (p. 4-305),
then go to Step 11.
If no, go to Step 9.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

9 Clean fiber-optics and optical connectors (refer to Procedure 4-16: “Clean fiber-optic
connectors” (p. 4-75)), and then retest connection. If connection still fails test, recheck
fiber-optic cable routing, replace faulty fiber-optic cable, or replace OCn module. Refer to
the 1678 MCC Maintenance and Trouble-Clearing Guide.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

10 Go to Step 7 to retest connection.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

11 Disconnect optical power meter (and attenuator, if applicable) from fiber-optic cable.

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
3AG 24622 EAAA TQZZA Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary 4-71
Issue 1 February 2010 Use pursuant to applicable agreements
System turn-up and testing Procedure 4-15: Confirm cabling between OC-n I/O and LGX
panel
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

12 Reconnect fiber-optic cable disconnected from power meter in Step 11, at LGX panel.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

13 On front side of LGX panel, connect fiber-optic jumper with attenuator (if required) to
loopback ports corresponding to fiber-optic cables from Tx and Rx port on OCn module
under test.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

14 Measure OCn Module Output Across Fiber-Optic Cable at RX Input End

Connect module end of fiber-optic cable that runs between Rx port of OCn module and
LGX panel to optical power meter. See figure Figure 4-12, “LGX panel receive fiber
power measurement” (p. 4-72).

Figure 4-12 LGX panel receive fiber power measurement

LGX PANEL
TX 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12

OPTICAL
POWER A A A A A A A A A A A A
METER A
RX 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12

IO MODULE PUSH PUSH PUSH PUSH

IN SHELF

A OPTICAL ATTENUATOR, IF REQUIRED

FIBER CONNECTIONS ON LGX PANEL

678-0303-1
122106

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

15 Is power level, including attenuator value(s), within minimum and maximum

specifications in Table 4-4, “SFP/XFP optical power specifications” (p. 4-70)?
If yes, record results in “Verify cabling between OC-n I/O and LGX panel” (p. 4-305),
then go to Step 18.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
4-72 Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary 3AG 24622 EAAA TQZZA
Use pursuant to applicable agreements Issue 1 February 2010
System turn-up and testing Procedure 4-15: Confirm cabling between OC-n I/O and LGX
panel
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
If no, go to Step 16.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

16 Clean fiber-optics and optical connectors (refer to Procedure 4-16: “Clean fiber-optic
connectors” (p. 4-75)), and then retest connection. If connection still fails test, recheck
fiber-optic cable routing, replace faulty fiber-optic cable.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

17 Go to Step 14 to retest connection.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

18 Connect fiber-optic cable that runs between Rx port of OCn module and LGX panel to Rx
port of OCn module under test.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

19 Enter RTRV-COND-OCn::AID:::LOS; for OC-n port for which fiber-optic cables were
jumpered in Step 13.
where:
n=3, 12, 48, or 192
AID=access identifier of OC-n.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

20 Is LOS set against OCn?

If yes, go to Step 21.
If no, go to Step 24.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

21 For connection between Rx port of OCn module and LGX panel, clean fiber-optics and
optical connectors (refer to -Procedure 4-16: “Clean fiber-optic connectors” (p. 4-75)),
and then retest connection. If connection still fails test, recheck fiber-optic cable routing,
replace faulty fiber-optic cable, or replace OCn SFP. Refer to the 1678 MCC Maintenance
and Trouble-Clearing Guide.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

22 Go to Step 19 to retest connection.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

23 Have all fiber-optic cables between all ports on all working and protect OCn module and
LGX panels been tested?
If yes, go to Step 24.
If no, go to Step 6 to test next fiber-optic cable.

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
3AG 24622 EAAA TQZZA Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary 4-73
Issue 1 February 2010 Use pursuant to applicable agreements
System turn-up and testing Procedure 4-15: Confirm cabling between OC-n I/O and LGX
panel
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

24 Remove all equipped TX and RX ports jumpers at LGX panel.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

25 STOP. This procedure is complete.

E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
4-74 Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary 3AG 24622 EAAA TQZZA
Use pursuant to applicable agreements Issue 1 February 2010
System turn-up and testing Procedure 4-16: Clean fiber-optic connectors

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Procedure 4-16: Clean fiber-optic connectors

When to use
This procedure provides the recommended instructions to clean fiber-optic connectors
found in Alcatel-Lucent equipment.

Prerequisites
Anyone who performs this procedure must be familiar with cleaning fiber-optic
connectors and with the specific system on which the procedure is to be performed.
This procedure must not be performed on traffic-carrying equipment. If a system is in
service, traffic must be removed from equipment to be cleaned.

Recommended tools
The following tools must be available for this procedure:
• Optical power meter with standard accessories
• Optical power meter adapter
– Spider, MPX-to-SC, 2-meter, single-mode, 8-fiber—AMP 492328-2
– Spider, MPX-to-SC, 2-meter, multimode, 8-fiber—AMP 97-A169-62-2
• Inspection microscope, 200X to 400X—Aerotech World Trade Ltd. AWT200 or
AWT300
• Inspection microscope tip
– MPX tip—Aerotech World Trade Ltd. AWT-MPX
– MPX backplane tip—Aerotech World Trade Ltd. AWT-MPXAPC
• Anti-static lint-free swab—Texwipe PN TX757E
• CLETOP®1 fiber-optic cleaner, Aerotech World Trade Ltd. PN 14100500 for all
fiber-optic connectors except MPX and bulkhead type
• CLETOP® 2.5mm Stick-Type cleaner- Aerotech World Trade Ltd. PN 14100400, box
of 200
• CLETOP® 1.25mm Stick-Type cleaner - Aerotech World Trade Ltd. PN 14100401
box of 200
• Optical removal and cleaning tool—Alcatel-Lucent PN 3EM07060AAAA
• Penlight (pocket-style flashlight)
• Laser safety glasses
Notes
CLETOP is a registered trademark of NTT International.

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
3AG 24622 EAAA TQZZA Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary 4-75
Issue 1 February 2010 Use pursuant to applicable agreements
System turn-up and testing Procedure 4-16: Clean fiber-optic connectors

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
General
If the cleaning method described in this procedure does not produce acceptable results,
connector may need to be replaced.

Task

DANGER
Laser hazard
Laser infrared radiation is present when fiber-optic connector is open and optical
interface is installed. Laser infrared radiation is not visible to naked eye or with laser
safety glasses
DO NOT LOOK INTO FIBER-OPTIC CONNECTOR.

DANGER
Laser hazard
Possibility of personal injury.
Ensure no optical power is connected to fiber being tested. An optical power meter must
be used to ensure all optical power has been removed.

NOTICE
Possibility of equipment damage.
Do not disassemble modules to clean fibers. Disassembling module could cause damage
to optical splice and could void warranty.

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
4-76 Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary 3AG 24622 EAAA TQZZA
Use pursuant to applicable agreements Issue 1 February 2010
System turn-up and testing Procedure 4-16: Clean fiber-optic connectors

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
NOTICE
Possibility of equipment damage.
To preserve integrity of fiber-optic connectors, observe the following precautions:
• Do not use cleaning swabs more than once.
• Do not use alcohol or any type of liquid to clean fiber-optic connectors.
• Do not use canned air to clean fiber-optic connectors. Canned air propellant leaves
residue that clouds fiber-optic connectors.
• Do not touch polished optical surface of fiber-optic connector. Oil from skin can
degrade performance of fiber-optic connector and attract dust particles.
• Always use protective covers to protect disconnected fiber-optic connectors. When
protective covers are not in use, store them in a clean container. Do not store
protective covers in clothes pocket.
Complete the following steps.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

1 Use optical power meter to determine if light is coming out of fiber-optic connector.

Figure 4-13 Fiber-optic connector inspection

PARTICLES

OIL FILM AND PARTICLES

ON CLADDING AND IN
CORE AREA

FIBER CONTAMINATED FIBER CONTAMINATED

WITH SOLID PARTICLES FIBER WITH OIL (FINGERPRINT)
CLADDING CORE

FERRULE
(SHAPE CAN VARY
BY CONNECTOR TYPE)

CLEAN FIBER

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
3AG 24622 EAAA TQZZA Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary 4-77
Issue 1 February 2010 Use pursuant to applicable agreements
System turn-up and testing Procedure 4-16: Clean fiber-optic connectors

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

2 Does optical power meter detect light coming out of fiber-optic connector?
If yes, go to Step 3.
If no, go to Step 4.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

3 Find laser transmission source and disable it.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

4 Remove fiber-optic connector from receptacle, if necessary.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

5 Use inspection microscope to inspect fiber-optic connector. See figure Figure 4-13,
“Fiber-optic connector inspection” (p. 4-77) for examples of clean and contaminated
fibers. Note that MPX connector has multiple fibers. Use the following criteria to
determine clean fiber:
1. Fiber core must have no contaminants or defects.
2. Fiber cladding must have no contaminants. Minor defects (pits and scratches) are
acceptable.
3. Fiber ferrule may not have contaminants or defects that interfere with fiber-optic
connector mating.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

6 Is fiber-optic connector clean?

If yes, go to Step 29.
If no, go to Step 7.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

7 Select type of connector to clean. For illustrations and photographs of connector types,
see figures Figure 4-14, “Fiber-optic connector types, illustrations” (p. 4-79) and Figure
4-15, “Fiber-optic connector types, photographs” (p. 4-80), respectively.
If non-backplane-mounted MPX fiber-optic connector, go to Step 8.
If FC, SC, MU, LC, or ST/STII fiber-optic connector, go to Step 10.
If backplane-mounted MPX fiber-optic connector, go to Step 14.
If bulkhead connectors, go to Step 21.

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
4-78 Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary 3AG 24622 EAAA TQZZA
Use pursuant to applicable agreements Issue 1 February 2010
System turn-up and testing Procedure 4-16: Clean fiber-optic connectors

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Figure 4-14 Fiber-optic connector types, illustrations

FC CONNECTOR SC CONNECTOR ST CONNECTOR

FEMALE MALE

SIDE VIEW END VIEWS SIDE VIEW

MPX CONNECTOR

MU FIBER CONNECTOR LC FIBER CONNECTOR

Nonbackplane-Mounted MPX Fiber-Optic Connector

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

8 Do not touch tip of TX757E swab.

Use TX757E swab to clean fiber-optic connector by gently wiping once between two
metal alignment pins, then discard swab.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

9 Go to Step 24.

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
3AG 24622 EAAA TQZZA Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary 4-79
Issue 1 February 2010 Use pursuant to applicable agreements
System turn-up and testing Procedure 4-16: Clean fiber-optic connectors

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Figure 4-15 Fiber-optic connector types, photographs

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

10 FC, SC, MU, LC, or ST/STII Fiber-Optic Connector

Holding CLETOP fiber-optic cleaner with one hand, use metal lever to open metal slide
and expose cleaning surface. Do not release lever.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

11 Place fiber ferrule firmly against CLETOP fiber-optic cleaner cleaning surface, rotate
ferrule 90 degrees, then gently wipe ferrule along cleaning surface one time in one
direction only.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

12 Release metal lever.

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
4-80 Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary 3AG 24622 EAAA TQZZA
Use pursuant to applicable agreements Issue 1 February 2010
System turn-up and testing Procedure 4-16: Clean fiber-optic connectors

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

13 Go to Step 24.
Backplane-Mounted MPX Fiber-Optic Connector
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

14 Do not touch tip of TX757E swab.

Insert swab handle into swab optical cleaning tool (extender). See figure Figure 4-16,
“Optical removal and cleaning tool (PN 3EM07060AAAA)” (p. 4-82).
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

15 NOTICE
Possibility of equipment damage.
Use care to prevent damaging backplane-mounted fiber-optic connector pins when
cleaning backplane-mounted fiber-optic connectors.

Use penlight to light backplane-mounted fiber-optic connector.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

16 Is fiber-optic connector top mounted or bottom mounted?

If top mounted, go to Step 17.
If bottom mounted, go to Step 18.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

17 Clean fiber-optic connector by gently wiping fiber ferrule once from top to bottom,
discard TX757E swab, then go to Step 19.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

18 Clean fiber-optic connector by gently wiping fiber ferrule once from bottom to top,
discard TX757E swab, then go to Step 19.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

19 Insert TX757E swab into bulkhead (barrel) receptacle and rotate swab, sliding it in and
out to clean inside of receptacle, then discard swab.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

20 Go to Step 24.

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
3AG 24622 EAAA TQZZA Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary 4-81
Issue 1 February 2010 Use pursuant to applicable agreements
System turn-up and testing Procedure 4-16: Clean fiber-optic connectors

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Figure 4-16 Optical removal and cleaning tool (PN 3EM07060AAAA)

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

21 Bulkhead Connectors
Select appropriate CLETOP Stick-Type to clean bulkhead connector for fiber optic
connection.
1. For FC, SC and ST bulkhead connectors use the CLETOP 2.5mm Stick-Type cleaner
2. For LC and MU bulkhead connectors use the CLETOP 1.25mm Stick-Type cleaner

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
4-82 Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary 3AG 24622 EAAA TQZZA
Use pursuant to applicable agreements Issue 1 February 2010
System turn-up and testing Procedure 4-16: Clean fiber-optic connectors

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

22 Insert CLETOP swab into the optical bulkhead adapter and gently twist/wipe to clean
fiber-optic interface. Discard swab after each use.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

23 Are there more fiber optic bulkheads to clean?

If yes, go to Step 21.
If no, go to Step 24.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

24 Inspect Connector
Use inspection microscope to inspect fiber-optic connector. See figure Figure 4-13,
“Fiber-optic connector inspection” (p. 4-77) for examples of clean and contaminated
fibers. Note that MPX connector has multiple fibers. Use the following criteria to
determine clean fiber:
1. Fiber core must have no contaminants or defects.
2. Fiber cladding must have no contaminants. Minor defects (pits and scratches) are
acceptable.
3. Fiber ferrule may not have contaminants or defects that interfere with fiber-optic
connector mating.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

25 Is fiber-optic connector clean?

If yes, go to Step 29.
If no, go to Step 26.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

26 Clean and inspect fiber-optic connector up to five more times.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

27 Is fiber-optic connector clean?

If yes, go to Step 28.
If no, contact next level of support.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

28 Remove permanent plastic cap retainer, if applicable. Follow customer practices.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

29 Are there more fiber-optic connectors to clean?

If yes, go to Step 7.

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
3AG 24622 EAAA TQZZA Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary 4-83
Issue 1 February 2010 Use pursuant to applicable agreements
System turn-up and testing Procedure 4-16: Clean fiber-optic connectors

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
If no, go to Step 30.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

30 STOP. This procedure is complete.

E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
4-84 Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary 3AG 24622 EAAA TQZZA
Use pursuant to applicable agreements Issue 1 February 2010
System turn-up and testing Procedure 4-17: GBE error-free verification setup

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Procedure 4-17: GBE error-free verification setup

When to use
This procedure provides setup instructions for performing GBE error-free verification
tests. Continuity is tested with physical connection (fiber and jumpers) and
cross-connections.

General
The procedure sets up the test parameters for GBE optical signals.
The parameter setting instructions in this procedure show how to set up transmit and
receiver parameters separately. These settings, however, can be coupled for alternative
setup.
The optical receiver on the test set could be damaged if excessive optical power levels are
applied to the receiver. Make sure the optical signal is within the maximum operating
range of the instrument before applying signal to the optical input port.
To prevent damage to the test set receiver, attenuate the incoming signal before
connecting it to the test set. To determine the level of attenuation, measure the power
level of the GBE module output. In addition, follow these precautions to ensure good,
reliable, repeatable measurement:
• Use extreme care when handling all optical cables and connectors.
• Verify that the connector interfaces are clean before making any connections.
• Keep connectors and cable ends covered when not in use.
For instructions on cleaning and inspecting optical cables and interface connectors, refer
to Procedure 4-16: “Clean fiber-optic connectors” (p. 4-75).
For information on TL1 command syntax, refer to the 1678 MCC TL1 Command Guide.
Refer to Chapter 5, “1678 Metro Core Connect addresses and locations” for module
locations.
In this procedure S=Slot, and P=Port.
Use “Verify GBE provisioning” (p. 4-315) for this procedure.

Required equipment
The following equipment is required for this procedure:
• Test set capable of measuring Gigabit Ethernet.
• Fiber-optic power meter capable of measuring at wavelengths of 850 nm, 1310 nm,
and 1550 nm
• (2) 5-foot FC-to-SC Single Mode (SM) optic cable

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
3AG 24622 EAAA TQZZA Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary 4-85
Issue 1 February 2010 Use pursuant to applicable agreements
System turn-up and testing Procedure 4-17: GBE error-free verification setup

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
• SC-SC Single Mode (SM) optic cable
• Multi-Mode fiber optic cables
• Single Mode and SC-to-SC looping plugs
• Attenuators, as appropriate for test set and power level of GBE or OCn module output
• 5 dB, 10 dB, and 15 dB attenuators

Before you begin

All optical module IO ports are looped back at the LGX panel following test performed in
Procedure 4-14: “Confirm cabling between GBE I/O and LGX panel” (p. 4-64).

Task
Complete the following steps.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

1 Verify all GBE module IO ports are fibered to LGX panel following tests performed in
Procedure 4-14: “Confirm cabling between GBE I/O and LGX panel” (p. 4-64).
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

2 Enter RTRV-ALM-ALL; to verify there are no alarms present to prevent testing.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

3 Do alarms exist that prevent testing?

If yes, go to Step 4.
If no, go to Step 5.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

4 Clear all alarms that prevent testing then go to Step 5. Refer to 1678 Metro Core
Connect1678 MCC Maintenance and Trouble-Clearing Guide.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

5 Enter RTRV-COND-ALL; to verify there are no conditions present to prevent testing.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

6 Do conditions exist that prevent testing?

If yes, go to Step 7.
If no, go to Step 10.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

7 Clear all conditions that prevent testing then go to Step 10. Refer to 1678 MCC
Maintenance and Trouble-Clearing Guide.

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
4-86 Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary 3AG 24622 EAAA TQZZA
Use pursuant to applicable agreements Issue 1 February 2010
System turn-up and testing Procedure 4-17: GBE error-free verification setup

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
The following steps establish test setup for GBE facilities. A unique daisy-chain must
be created to test each GBE optical interface wavelength.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

8 NOTICE
Possibility of equipment damage.
The optical receiver on the test set could be damaged if excessive optical power levels are
applied to the receiver.
Make sure the optical signal is within the maximum operating range of the instrument
before applying signal to the optical input port.

Using a test fiber-optic cable, connect GBE test set input to first GBE facility LGX panel
Tx port. Use attenuation if required. See Figure 4-17, “GBE LGX ports jumpered”
(p. 4-88). Refer to Table 4-5, “SFP optical power specifications” (p. 4-88).
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

9 Using a test fiber-optic cable, connect GBE test set output to first GBE facility LGX
panel Rx port. Use attenuation if required. See Figure 4-17, “GBE LGX ports jumpered”
(p. 4-88). Refer to Table 4-5, “SFP optical power specifications” (p. 4-88).
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

10 Connect a fiber jumper from the second LGX panel GBE Tx port to the third GBE Rx
port. Use attenuation if required. See Figure 4-17, “GBE LGX ports jumpered” (p. 4-88).
Refer to Table 4-5, “SFP optical power specifications” (p. 4-88).
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

11 Connect a fiber jumper from the second LGX panel GBE Rx port to the third GBE Tx
port. Use attenuation if required. See Figure 4-17, “GBE LGX ports jumpered” (p. 4-88).
Refer to Table 4-5, “SFP optical power specifications” (p. 4-88).
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

12 Repeat Step 10 and Step 11 for all equipped GBE ports. See Figure 4-17, “GBE LGX
ports jumpered” (p. 4-88).
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

13 Loop the last GBE facility LGX panel. Connect a fiber jumper from the last GBE facility
LGX panel Tx port to the last GBE facility LGX panel Rx port. See Figure 4-17, “GBE
LGX ports jumpered” (p. 4-88). Refer to Table 4-5, “SFP optical power specifications”
(p. 4-88).

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
3AG 24622 EAAA TQZZA Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary 4-87
Issue 1 February 2010 Use pursuant to applicable agreements
System turn-up and testing Procedure 4-17: GBE error-free verification setup

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Table 4-5 SFP optical power specifications

RX
TX optical power
Wavelength sensitivity
OC rate Optical interface (dBm)
[nm] (dBm)
MIN MAX MIN /MAX
GBE 1000Base SX 850 −9.5 −4 −18 0
1000Base LX 1310 −11 −3 −20 −3

Figure 4-17 GBE LGX ports jumpered

TX 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12

GBE RX A
TEST
SET
TX A
RX 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12

LGX PANEL

GBE IO PUSH PUSH PUSH PUSH

MODULE
IN SHELF

A OPTICAL ATTENUATOR, IF REQUIRED

678-0321-1
FIBER CONNECTIONS ON LGX PANEL
030707

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

14 Enter ENT-VCG::AID::::MAXMBR=7,VCGTYPE=STS3C; to provision a VCG for every

GBE facility on GBE module. Enter command for every GBE module in shelf. Refer to
“Verify GBE provisioning” (p. 4-315).
where:
AID=GBEVCG facility AID. For example: GBEVCG-1-3-9-12
&& ranging and & grouping allowed

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
4-88 Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary 3AG 24622 EAAA TQZZA
Use pursuant to applicable agreements Issue 1 February 2010
System turn-up and testing Procedure 4-17: GBE error-free verification setup

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

15 Create cross-connections
Enter CNTRL-VCPATH::AID::::PROVMBR=7; to enable traffic through Virtual
Concatenation paths of addressed VCG.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

16 Have VCG been entered for all GBE ports on every working GBE module?
If yes, go to Step 17.
If no, go to Step 14.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

17 Enter ENT-CRS-STS3C::FROM-1&&-7,TO-1&&-7:::2WAY; to establish

cross-connections on STS-3C facilities members 1 through 7 for each equipped GBE
facility.
where:
FROM=GBE AID members 1 through 7.
TO=GBE AID members 1 through 7.
Example, to create cross-connections between GBE module resident in slot 7, port 1,
members 1 through 7 to GBE module in slot 7, port 2, members 1 through 7 enter:
ENT-CRS-STS3C::GBESTS3C-1-3-7-1-1&&7,GBESTS3C-1-3-7-2-1&&7:::<
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

18 Repeat Step 17 until 2WAY connections have been made for all GBE facilities. See
Figure 4-18, “GBESTS3C cross-connections” (p. 4-90). Table 4-6, “GBE STS-3C
connections (Shelf fully populated with GBEs)” (p. 4-92) lists all cross-connections
required for a shelf fully equipped with GbE facilities.

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
3AG 24622 EAAA TQZZA Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary 4-89
Issue 1 February 2010 Use pursuant to applicable agreements
System turn-up and testing Procedure 4-17: GBE error-free verification setup

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Figure 4-18 GBESTS3C cross-connections

TX 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12

GBE RX A
TEST
SET
TX A

RX 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12

LGX PANEL

GBE IO PUSH PUSH PUSH PUSH

MODULE
IN SHELF

A OPTICAL ATTENUATOR, IF REQUIRED

FIBER CONNECTIONS ON LGX PANEL

PROVISIONED CROSS_CONNECTIONS
678-0322-1
030707

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

19 For the port that is looped upon itself, refer to Figure 4-18, “GBESTS3C
cross-connections” (p. 4-90) port 12, the autonegotiate feature must be disabled. To
disable the auto-negotiate feature on the port looped upon itself enter:
ED-GBE::AID::::NEGOTN=DISABLED;
where:
AID=GBE facility loop on itself
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

20 Press RUN/STOP function key on test set to run test. GREEN=RUN, OFF=STOP.
Ensure GBE test set is set for auto negotiation. Options may be different depending on
test set model.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

21 Press RESULT function key to access Results window.

Options may be different depending on test set model.

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
4-90 Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary 3AG 24622 EAAA TQZZA
Use pursuant to applicable agreements Issue 1 February 2010
System turn-up and testing Procedure 4-17: GBE error-free verification setup

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

22 Set Results and options as appropriate for GBE signal monitoring.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

23 Reset test set error count to zero.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

24 Are there errors?

If yes, go Step 25.
If no, record verification in “Verify GBE provisioning” (p. 4-315), then go to Step 26.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

25 Refer to 1678 MCC Maintenance and Trouble-Clearing Guide, then go to Step 23.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

26 When test is complete, leave test setup intact for subsequent tests.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

27 Delete Cross-Connections
Enter DLT-CRS-STS3C::FROM-1&&-7,TO-1&&-7; to delete cross-connections on
STS-3C facilities members 1 through 7 for each equipped GBE facility.
where:
FROM=GBE AID members 1 through 7
TO=GBE AID members 1 through 7.
Example, to delete cross-connections between GBE module resident in slot 7, port 1,
members 1 through 7 to GBE module in slot 7, port 2, members 1 through 7 enter:
DLT-CRS-STS3C::GBESTS3C-1-3-7-1-1&&7,GBESTS3C-1-3-7-2-1&&7;
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

28 Have cross-connections been deleted for all GBE facilities on every working GBE
module?
If yes, go to Step 29.
If no, go to Step 27.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

29 Delete Virtual Concatenation Groups

Enter DLT-VCG::AID; to delete a VCG for every GBE facility on GBE module. Enter
command for every GBE module in shelf. Refer to “Verify GBE provisioning” (p. 4-315).
where:

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
3AG 24622 EAAA TQZZA Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary 4-91
Issue 1 February 2010 Use pursuant to applicable agreements
System turn-up and testing Procedure 4-17: GBE error-free verification setup

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
AID=GBEVCG facility AID.
For example: GBEVCG-1-3-9-12 && ranging and & grouping allowed
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

30 Have VCG been deleted for all GBE ports on every working GBE module?
If yes, go to Step 31.
If no, go to Step 29.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

31 STOP. This procedure is complete.

E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S

Table 4-6 GBE STS-3C connections (Shelf fully populated with GBEs)
From STS-3C To STS-3C
(RACK-SHELF-SLOT-PORT#- (RACK-SHELF-SLOT-PORT#-
Order STS3C#) STS3C#)
1. 1-3-2-1-1 1-3-2-2-1
2. 1-3-2-1-2 1-3-2-2-2
3. 1-3-2-1-3 1-3-2-2-3
4. 1-3-2-1-4 1-3-2-2-4
5. 1-3-2-1-5 1-3-2-2-5
6. 1-3-2-1-6 1-3-2-2-6
7. 1-3-2-1-7 1-3-2-2-7
8. 1-3-2-3-1 1-3-2-4-1
9. 1-3-2-3-2 1-3-2-4-2
10. 1-3-2-3-3 1-3-2-4-3
11. 1-3-2-3-4 1-3-2-4-4
12. 1-3-2-3-5 1-3-2-4-5
13. 1-3-2-3-6 1-3-2-4-6
14. 1-3-2-3-7 1-3-2-4-7
15. 1-3-2-5-1 1-3-2-6-1
16. 1-3-2-5-2 1-3-2-6-2
17. 1-3-2-5-3 1-3-2-6-3

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
4-92 Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary 3AG 24622 EAAA TQZZA
Use pursuant to applicable agreements Issue 1 February 2010
System turn-up and testing Procedure 4-17: GBE error-free verification setup

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Table 4-6 GBE STS-3C connections (Shelf fully populated with GBEs)
(continued)
From STS-3C To STS-3C
(RACK-SHELF-SLOT-PORT#- (RACK-SHELF-SLOT-PORT#-
Order STS3C#) STS3C#)
18. 1-3-2-5-4 1-3-2-6-4
19. 1-3-2-5-5 1-3-2-6-5
20. 1-3-2-5-6 1-3-2-6-6
21. 1-3-2-5-7 1-3-2-6-7
22. 1-3-2-7-1 1-3-2-8-1
23. 1-3-2-7-2 1-3-2-8-2
24. 1-3-2-7-3 1-3-2-8-3
25. 1-3-2-7-4 1-3-2-8-4
26. 1-3-2-7-5 1-3-2-8-5
27. 1-3-2-7-6 1-3-2-8-6
28. 1-3-2-7-7 1-3-2-8-7
29. 1-3-2-9-1 1-3-2-10-1
30. 1-3-2-9-2 1-3-2-10-2
31. 1-3-2-9-3 1-3-2-10-3
32. 1-3-2-9-4 1-3-2-10-4
33. 1-3-2-9-5 1-3-2-10-5
34. 1-3-2-9-6 1-3-2-10-6
35. 1-3-2-9-7 1-3-2-10-7
36. 1-3-2-11-1 1-3-2-12-1
37. 1-3-2-11-2 1-3-2-12-2
38. 1-3-2-11-3 1-3-2-12-3
39. 1-3-2-11-4 1-3-2-12-4
40. 1-3-2-11-5 1-3-2-12-5
41. 1-3-2-11-6 1-3-2-12-6
42. 1-3-2-11-7 1-3-2-12-7
43. 1-3-2-13-1 1-3-2-14-1
44. 1-3-2-13-2 1-3-2-14-2
45. 1-3-2-13-3 1-3-2-14-3
46. 1-3-2-13-4 1-3-2-14-4

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
3AG 24622 EAAA TQZZA Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary 4-93
Issue 1 February 2010 Use pursuant to applicable agreements
System turn-up and testing Procedure 4-17: GBE error-free verification setup

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Table 4-6 GBE STS-3C connections (Shelf fully populated with GBEs)
(continued)
From STS-3C To STS-3C
(RACK-SHELF-SLOT-PORT#- (RACK-SHELF-SLOT-PORT#-
Order STS3C#) STS3C#)
47. 1-3-2-13-5 1-3-2-14-5
48. 1-3-2-13-6 1-3-2-14-6
49. 1-3-2-13-7 1-3-2-14-7
50. 1-3-2-15-1 1-3-2-16-1
51. 1-3-2-15-2 1-3-2-16-2
52. 1-3-2-15-3 1-3-2-16-3
53. 1-3-2-15-4 1-3-2-16-4
54. 1-3-2-15-5 1-3-2-16-5
55. 1-3-2-15-6 1-3-2-16-6
56. 1-3-2-15-7 1-3-2-16-7
57. 1-3-3-1-1 1-3-3-2-1
58. 1-3-3-1-2 1-3-3-2-2
59. 1-3-3-1-3 1-3-3-2-3
60. 1-3-3-1-4 1-3-3-2-4
61. 1-3-3-1-5 1-3-3-2-5
62. 1-3-3-1-6 1-3-3-2-6
63. 1-3-3-1-7 1-3-3-2-7
64. 1-3-3-3-1 1-3-3-4-1
65. 1-3-3-3-2 1-3-3-4-2
66. 1-3-3-3-3 1-3-3-4-3
67. 1-3-3-3-4 1-3-3-4-4
68. 1-3-3-3-5 1-3-3-4-5
69. 1-3-3-3-6 1-3-3-4-6
70. 1-3-3-3-7 1-3-3-4-7
71. 1-3-3-5-1 1-3-3-6-1
72. 1-3-3-5-2 1-3-3-6-2
73. 1-3-3-5-3 1-3-3-6-3
74. 1-3-3-5-4 1-3-3-6-4
75. 1-3-3-5-5 1-3-3-6-5

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
4-94 Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary 3AG 24622 EAAA TQZZA
Use pursuant to applicable agreements Issue 1 February 2010
System turn-up and testing Procedure 4-17: GBE error-free verification setup

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Table 4-6 GBE STS-3C connections (Shelf fully populated with GBEs)
(continued)
From STS-3C To STS-3C
(RACK-SHELF-SLOT-PORT#- (RACK-SHELF-SLOT-PORT#-
Order STS3C#) STS3C#)
76. 1-3-3-5-6 1-3-3-6-6
77. 1-3-3-5-7 1-3-3-6-7
78. 1-3-3-7-1 1-3-3-8-1
79. 1-3-3-7-2 1-3-3-8-2
80. 1-3-3-7-3 1-3-3-8-3
81. 1-3-3-7-4 1-3-3-8-4
82. 1-3-3-7-5 1-3-3-8-5
83. 1-3-3-7-6 1-3-3-8-6
84. 1-3-3-7-7 1-3-3-8-7
85. 1-3-3-9-1 1-3-3-10-1
86. 1-3-3-9-2 1-3-3-10-2
87. 1-3-3-9-3 1-3-3-10-3
88. 1-3-3-9-4 1-3-3-10-4
89. 1-3-3-9-5 1-3-3-10-5
90. 1-3-3-9-6 1-3-3-10-6
91. 1-3-3-9-7 1-3-3-10-7
92. 1-3-3-11-1 1-3-3-12-1
93. 1-3-3-11-2 1-3-3-12-2
94. 1-3-3-11-3 1-3-3-12-3
95. 1-3-3-11-4 1-3-3-12-4
96. 1-3-3-11-5 1-3-3-12-5
97. 1-3-3-11-6 1-3-3-12-6
98. 1-3-3-11-7 1-3-3-12-7
99. 1-3-3-13-1 1-3-3-14-1
100. 1-3-3-13-2 1-3-3-14-2
101. 1-3-3-13-3 1-3-3-14-3
102. 1-3-3-13-4 1-3-3-14-4
103. 1-3-3-13-5 1-3-3-14-5
104. 1-3-3-13-6 1-3-3-14-6

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
3AG 24622 EAAA TQZZA Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary 4-95
Issue 1 February 2010 Use pursuant to applicable agreements
System turn-up and testing Procedure 4-17: GBE error-free verification setup

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Table 4-6 GBE STS-3C connections (Shelf fully populated with GBEs)
(continued)
From STS-3C To STS-3C
(RACK-SHELF-SLOT-PORT#- (RACK-SHELF-SLOT-PORT#-
Order STS3C#) STS3C#)
105. 1-3-3-13-7 1-3-3-14-7
106. 1-3-3-15-1 1-3-3-16-1
107. 1-3-3-15-2 1-3-3-16-2
108. 1-3-3-15-3 1-3-3-16-3
109. 1-3-3-15-4 1-3-3-16-4
110. 1-3-3-15-5 1-3-3-16-5
111. 1-3-3-15-6 1-3-3-16-6
112. 1-3-3-15-7 1-3-3-16-7
113. 1-3-4-1-1 1-3-4-2-1
114. 1-3-4-1-2 1-3-4-2-2
115. 1-3-4-1-3 1-3-4-2-3
116. 1-3-4-1-4 1-3-4-2-4
117. 1-3-4-1-5 1-3-4-2-5
118. 1-3-4-1-6 1-3-4-2-6
119. 1-3-4-1-7 1-3-4-2-7
120. 1-3-4-3-1 1-3-4-4-1
121. 1-3-4-3-2 1-3-4-4-2
122. 1-3-4-3-3 1-3-4-4-3
123. 1-3-4-3-4 1-3-4-4-4
124. 1-3-4-3-5 1-3-4-4-5
125. 1-3-4-3-6 1-3-4-4-6
126. 1-3-4-3-7 1-3-4-4-7
127. 1-3-4-5-1 1-3-4-6-1
128. 1-3-4-5-2 1-3-4-6-2
129. 1-3-4-5-3 1-3-4-6-3
130. 1-3-4-5-4 1-3-4-6-4
131. 1-3-4-5-5 1-3-4-6-5
132. 1-3-4-5-6 1-3-4-6-6
133. 1-3-4-5-7 1-3-4-6-7

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
4-96 Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary 3AG 24622 EAAA TQZZA
Use pursuant to applicable agreements Issue 1 February 2010
System turn-up and testing Procedure 4-17: GBE error-free verification setup

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Table 4-6 GBE STS-3C connections (Shelf fully populated with GBEs)
(continued)
From STS-3C To STS-3C
(RACK-SHELF-SLOT-PORT#- (RACK-SHELF-SLOT-PORT#-
Order STS3C#) STS3C#)
134. 1-3-4-7-1 1-3-4-8-1
135. 1-3-4-7-2 1-3-4-8-2
136. 1-3-4-7-3 1-3-4-8-3
137. 1-3-4-7-4 1-3-4-8-4
138. 1-3-4-7-5 1-3-4-8-5
139. 1-3-4-7-6 1-3-4-8-6
140. 1-3-4-7-7 1-3-4-8-7
141. 1-3-4-9-1 1-3-4-10-1
142. 1-3-4-9-2 1-3-4-10-2
143. 1-3-4-9-3 1-3-4-10-3
144. 1-3-4-9-4 1-3-4-10-4
145. 1-3-4-9-5 1-3-4-10-5
146. 1-3-4-9-6 1-3-4-10-6
147. 1-3-4-9-7 1-3-4-10-7
148. 1-3-4-11-1 1-3-4-12-1
149. 1-3-4-11-2 1-3-4-12-2
150. 1-3-4-11-3 1-3-4-12-3
151. 1-3-4-11-4 1-3-4-12-4
152. 1-3-4-11-5 1-3-4-12-5
153. 1-3-4-11-6 1-3-4-12-6
154. 1-3-4-11-7 1-3-4-12-7
155. 1-3-4-13-1 1-3-4-14-1
156. 1-3-4-13-2 1-3-4-14-2
157. 1-3-4-13-3 1-3-4-14-3
158. 1-3-4-13-4 1-3-4-14-4
159. 1-3-4-13-5 1-3-4-14-5
160. 1-3-4-13-6 1-3-4-14-6
161. 1-3-4-13-7 1-3-4-14-7
162. 1-3-4-15-1 1-3-4-16-1

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
3AG 24622 EAAA TQZZA Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary 4-97
Issue 1 February 2010 Use pursuant to applicable agreements
System turn-up and testing Procedure 4-17: GBE error-free verification setup

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Table 4-6 GBE STS-3C connections (Shelf fully populated with GBEs)
(continued)
From STS-3C To STS-3C
(RACK-SHELF-SLOT-PORT#- (RACK-SHELF-SLOT-PORT#-
Order STS3C#) STS3C#)
163. 1-3-4-15-2 1-3-4-16-2
164. 1-3-4-15-3 1-3-4-16-3
165. 1-3-4-15-4 1-3-4-16-4
166. 1-3-4-15-5 1-3-4-16-5
167. 1-3-4-15-6 1-3-4-16-6
168. 1-3-4-15-7 1-3-4-16-7
169. 1-3-5-1-1 1-3-5-2-1
170. 1-3-5-1-2 1-3-5-2-2
171. 1-3-5-1-3 1-3-5-2-3
172. 1-3-5-1-4 1-3-5-2-4
173. 1-3-5-1-5 1-3-5-2-5
174. 1-3-5-1-6 1-3-5-2-6
175. 1-3-5-1-7 1-3-5-2-7
176. 1-3-5-3-1 1-3-5-4-1
177. 1-3-5-3-2 1-3-5-4-2
178. 1-3-5-3-3 1-3-5-4-3
179. 1-3-5-3-4 1-3-5-4-4
180. 1-3-5-3-5 1-3-5-4-5
181. 1-3-5-3-6 1-3-5-4-6
182. 1-3-5-3-7 1-3-5-4-7
183. 1-3-5-5-1 1-3-5-6-1
184. 1-3-5-5-2 1-3-5-6-2
185. 1-3-5-5-3 1-3-5-6-3
186. 1-3-5-5-4 1-3-5-6-4
187. 1-3-5-5-5 1-3-5-6-5
188. 1-3-5-5-6 1-3-5-6-6
189. 1-3-5-5-7 1-3-5-6-7
190. 1-3-5-7-1 1-3-5-8-1
191. 1-3-5-7-2 1-3-5-8-2

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
4-98 Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary 3AG 24622 EAAA TQZZA
Use pursuant to applicable agreements Issue 1 February 2010
System turn-up and testing Procedure 4-17: GBE error-free verification setup

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Table 4-6 GBE STS-3C connections (Shelf fully populated with GBEs)
(continued)
From STS-3C To STS-3C
(RACK-SHELF-SLOT-PORT#- (RACK-SHELF-SLOT-PORT#-
Order STS3C#) STS3C#)
192. 1-3-5-7-3 1-3-5-8-3
193. 1-3-5-7-4 1-3-5-8-4
194. 1-3-5-7-5 1-3-5-8-5
195. 1-3-5-7-6 1-3-5-8-6
196. 1-3-5-7-7 1-3-5-8-7
197. 1-3-5-9-1 1-3-5-10-1
198. 1-3-5-9-2 1-3-5-10-2
199. 1-3-5-9-3 1-3-5-10-3
200. 1-3-5-9-4 1-3-5-10-4
201. 1-3-5-9-5 1-3-5-10-5
202. 1-3-5-9-6 1-3-5-10-6
203. 1-3-5-9-7 1-3-5-10-7
204. 1-3-5-11-1 1-3-5-12-1
205. 1-3-5-11-2 1-3-5-12-2
206. 1-3-5-11-3 1-3-5-12-3
207. 1-3-5-11-4 1-3-5-12-4
208. 1-3-5-11-5 1-3-5-12-5
209. 1-3-5-11-6 1-3-5-12-6
210. 1-3-5-11-7 1-3-5-12-7
211. 1-3-5-13-1 1-3-5-14-1
212. 1-3-5-13-2 1-3-5-14-2
213. 1-3-5-13-3 1-3-5-14-3
214. 1-3-5-13-4 1-3-5-14-4
215. 1-3-5-13-5 1-3-5-14-5
216. 1-3-5-13-6 1-3-5-14-6
217. 1-3-5-13-7 1-3-5-14-7
218. 1-3-5-15-1 1-3-5-16-1
219. 1-3-5-15-2 1-3-5-16-2
220. 1-3-5-15-3 1-3-5-16-3

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
3AG 24622 EAAA TQZZA Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary 4-99
Issue 1 February 2010 Use pursuant to applicable agreements
System turn-up and testing Procedure 4-17: GBE error-free verification setup

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Table 4-6 GBE STS-3C connections (Shelf fully populated with GBEs)
(continued)
From STS-3C To STS-3C
(RACK-SHELF-SLOT-PORT#- (RACK-SHELF-SLOT-PORT#-
Order STS3C#) STS3C#)
221. 1-3-5-15-4 1-3-5-16-4
222. 1-3-5-15-5 1-3-5-16-5
223. 1-3-5-15-6 1-3-5-16-6
224. 1-3-5-15-7 1-3-5-16-7
225. 1-3-6-1-1 1-3-6-2-1
226. 1-3-6-1-2 1-3-6-2-2
227. 1-3-6-1-3 1-3-6-2-3
228. 1-3-6-1-4 1-3-6-2-4
229. 1-3-6-1-5 1-3-6-2-5
230. 1-3-6-1-6 1-3-6-2-6
231. 1-3-6-1-7 1-3-6-2-7
232. 1-3-6-3-1 1-3-6-4-1
233. 1-3-6-3-2 1-3-6-4-2
234. 1-3-6-3-3 1-3-6-4-3
235. 1-3-6-3-4 1-3-6-4-4
236. 1-3-6-3-5 1-3-6-4-5
237. 1-3-6-3-6 1-3-6-4-6
238. 1-3-6-3-7 1-3-6-4-7
239. 1-3-6-5-1 1-3-6-6-1
240. 1-3-6-5-2 1-3-6-6-2
241. 1-3-6-5-3 1-3-6-6-3
242. 1-3-6-5-4 1-3-6-6-4
243. 1-3-6-5-5 1-3-6-6-5
244. 1-3-6-5-6 1-3-6-6-6
245. 1-3-6-5-7 1-3-6-6-7
246. 1-3-6-7-1 1-3-6-8-1
247. 1-3-6-7-2 1-3-6-8-2
248. 1-3-6-7-3 1-3-6-8-3
249. 1-3-6-7-4 1-3-6-8-4

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
4-100 Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary 3AG 24622 EAAA TQZZA
Use pursuant to applicable agreements Issue 1 February 2010
System turn-up and testing Procedure 4-17: GBE error-free verification setup

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Table 4-6 GBE STS-3C connections (Shelf fully populated with GBEs)
(continued)
From STS-3C To STS-3C
(RACK-SHELF-SLOT-PORT#- (RACK-SHELF-SLOT-PORT#-
Order STS3C#) STS3C#)
250. 1-3-6-7-5 1-3-6-8-5
251. 1-3-6-7-6 1-3-6-8-6
252. 1-3-6-7-7 1-3-6-8-7
253. 1-3-6-9-1 1-3-6-10-1
254. 1-3-6-9-2 1-3-6-10-2
255. 1-3-6-9-3 1-3-6-10-3
256. 1-3-6-9-4 1-3-6-10-4
257. 1-3-6-9-5 1-3-6-10-5
258. 1-3-6-9-6 1-3-6-10-6
259. 1-3-6-9-7 1-3-6-10-7
260. 1-3-6-11-1 1-3-6-12-1
261. 1-3-6-11-2 1-3-6-12-2
262. 1-3-6-11-3 1-3-6-12-3
263. 1-3-6-11-4 1-3-6-12-4
264. 1-3-6-11-5 1-3-6-12-5
265. 1-3-6-11-6 1-3-6-12-6
266. 1-3-6-11-7 1-3-6-12-7
267. 1-3-6-13-1 1-3-6-14-1
268. 1-3-6-13-2 1-3-6-14-2
269. 1-3-6-13-3 1-3-6-14-3
270. 1-3-6-13-4 1-3-6-14-4
271. 1-3-6-13-5 1-3-6-14-5
272. 1-3-6-13-6 1-3-6-14-6
273. 1-3-6-13-7 1-3-6-14-7
274. 1-3-6-15-1 1-3-6-16-1
275. 1-3-6-15-2 1-3-6-16-2
276. 1-3-6-15-3 1-3-6-16-3
277. 1-3-6-15-4 1-3-6-16-4
278. 1-3-6-15-5 1-3-6-16-5

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
3AG 24622 EAAA TQZZA Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary 4-101
Issue 1 February 2010 Use pursuant to applicable agreements
System turn-up and testing Procedure 4-17: GBE error-free verification setup

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Table 4-6 GBE STS-3C connections (Shelf fully populated with GBEs)
(continued)
From STS-3C To STS-3C
(RACK-SHELF-SLOT-PORT#- (RACK-SHELF-SLOT-PORT#-
Order STS3C#) STS3C#)
279. 1-3-6-15-6 1-3-6-16-6
280. 1-3-6-15-7 1-3-6-16-7
281. 1-3-7-1-1 1-3-7-2-1
282. 1-3-7-1-2 1-3-7-2-2
283. 1-3-7-1-3 1-3-7-2-3
284. 1-3-7-1-4 1-3-7-2-4
285. 1-3-7-1-5 1-3-7-2-5
286. 1-3-7-1-6 1-3-7-2-6
287. 1-3-7-1-7 1-3-7-2-7
288. 1-3-7-3-1 1-3-7-4-1
289. 1-3-7-3-2 1-3-7-4-2
290. 1-3-7-3-3 1-3-7-4-3
291. 1-3-7-3-4 1-3-7-4-4
292. 1-3-7-3-5 1-3-7-4-5
293. 1-3-7-3-6 1-3-7-4-6
294. 1-3-7-3-7 1-3-7-4-7
295. 1-3-7-5-1 1-3-7-6-1
296. 1-3-7-5-2 1-3-7-6-2
297. 1-3-7-5-3 1-3-7-6-3
298. 1-3-7-5-4 1-3-7-6-4
299. 1-3-7-5-5 1-3-7-6-5
300. 1-3-7-5-6 1-3-7-6-6
301. 1-3-7-5-7 1-3-7-6-7
302. 1-3-7-7-1 1-3-7-8-1
303. 1-3-7-7-2 1-3-7-8-2
304. 1-3-7-7-3 1-3-7-8-3
305. 1-3-7-7-4 1-3-7-8-4
306. 1-3-7-7-5 1-3-7-8-5
307. 1-3-7-7-6 1-3-7-8-6

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
4-102 Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary 3AG 24622 EAAA TQZZA
Use pursuant to applicable agreements Issue 1 February 2010
System turn-up and testing Procedure 4-17: GBE error-free verification setup

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Table 4-6 GBE STS-3C connections (Shelf fully populated with GBEs)
(continued)
From STS-3C To STS-3C
(RACK-SHELF-SLOT-PORT#- (RACK-SHELF-SLOT-PORT#-
Order STS3C#) STS3C#)
308. 1-3-7-7-7 1-3-7-8-7
309. 1-3-7-9-1 1-3-7-10-1
310. 1-3-7-9-2 1-3-7-10-2
311. 1-3-7-9-3 1-3-7-10-3
312. 1-3-7-9-4 1-3-7-10-4
313. 1-3-7-9-5 1-3-7-10-5
314. 1-3-7-9-6 1-3-7-10-6
315. 1-3-7-9-7 1-3-7-10-7
316. 1-3-7-11-1 1-3-7-12-1
317. 1-3-7-11-2 1-3-7-12-2
318. 1-3-7-11-3 1-3-7-12-3
319. 1-3-7-11-4 1-3-7-12-4
320. 1-3-7-11-5 1-3-7-12-5
321. 1-3-7-11-6 1-3-7-12-6
322. 1-3-7-11-7 1-3-7-12-7
323. 1-3-7-13-1 1-3-7-14-1
324. 1-3-7-13-2 1-3-7-14-2
325. 1-3-7-13-3 1-3-7-14-3
326. 1-3-7-13-4 1-3-7-14-4
327. 1-3-7-13-5 1-3-7-14-5
328. 1-3-7-13-6 1-3-7-14-6
329. 1-3-7-13-7 1-3-7-14-7
330. 1-3-7-15-1 1-3-7-16-1
331. 1-3-7-15-2 1-3-7-16-2
332. 1-3-7-15-3 1-3-7-16-3
333. 1-3-7-15-4 1-3-7-16-4
334. 1-3-7-15-5 1-3-7-16-5
335. 1-3-7-15-6 1-3-7-16-6
336. 1-3-7-15-7 1-3-7-16-7

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
3AG 24622 EAAA TQZZA Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary 4-103
Issue 1 February 2010 Use pursuant to applicable agreements
System turn-up and testing Procedure 4-17: GBE error-free verification setup

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Table 4-6 GBE STS-3C connections (Shelf fully populated with GBEs)
(continued)
From STS-3C To STS-3C
(RACK-SHELF-SLOT-PORT#- (RACK-SHELF-SLOT-PORT#-
Order STS3C#) STS3C#)
337. 1-3-8-1-1 1-3-8-2-1
338. 1-3-8-1-2 1-3-8-2-2
339. 1-3-8-1-3 1-3-8-2-3
340. 1-3-8-1-4 1-3-8-2-4
341. 1-3-8-1-5 1-3-8-2-5
342. 1-3-8-1-6 1-3-8-2-6
343. 1-3-8-1-7 1-3-8-2-7
344. 1-3-8-3-1 1-3-8-4-1
345. 1-3-8-3-2 1-3-8-4-2
346. 1-3-8-3-3 1-3-8-4-3
347. 1-3-8-3-4 1-3-8-4-4
348. 1-3-8-3-5 1-3-8-4-5
349. 1-3-8-3-6 1-3-8-4-6
350. 1-3-8-3-7 1-3-8-4-7
351. 1-3-8-5-1 1-3-8-6-1
352. 1-3-8-5-2 1-3-8-6-2
353. 1-3-8-5-3 1-3-8-6-3
354. 1-3-8-5-4 1-3-8-6-4
355. 1-3-8-5-5 1-3-8-6-5
356. 1-3-8-5-6 1-3-8-6-6
357. 1-3-8-5-7 1-3-8-6-7
358. 1-3-8-7-1 1-3-8-8-1
359. 1-3-8-7-2 1-3-8-8-2
360. 1-3-8-7-3 1-3-8-8-3
361. 1-3-8-7-4 1-3-8-8-4
362. 1-3-8-7-5 1-3-8-8-5
363. 1-3-8-7-6 1-3-8-8-6
364. 1-3-8-7-7 1-3-8-8-7
365. 1-3-8-9-1 1-3-8-10-1

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
4-104 Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary 3AG 24622 EAAA TQZZA
Use pursuant to applicable agreements Issue 1 February 2010
System turn-up and testing Procedure 4-17: GBE error-free verification setup

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Table 4-6 GBE STS-3C connections (Shelf fully populated with GBEs)
(continued)
From STS-3C To STS-3C
(RACK-SHELF-SLOT-PORT#- (RACK-SHELF-SLOT-PORT#-
Order STS3C#) STS3C#)
366. 1-3-8-9-2 1-3-8-10-2
367. 1-3-8-9-3 1-3-8-10-3
368. 1-3-8-9-4 1-3-8-10-4
369. 1-3-8-9-5 1-3-8-10-5
370. 1-3-8-9-6 1-3-8-10-6
371. 1-3-8-9-7 1-3-8-10-7
372. 1-3-8-11-1 1-3-8-12-1
373. 1-3-8-11-2 1-3-8-12-2
374. 1-3-8-11-3 1-3-8-12-3
375. 1-3-8-11-4 1-3-8-12-4
376. 1-3-8-11-5 1-3-8-12-5
377. 1-3-8-11-6 1-3-8-12-6
378. 1-3-8-11-7 1-3-8-12-7
379. 1-3-8-13-1 1-3-8-14-1
380. 1-3-8-13-2 1-3-8-14-2
381. 1-3-8-13-3 1-3-8-14-3
382. 1-3-8-13-4 1-3-8-14-4
383. 1-3-8-13-5 1-3-8-14-5
384. 1-3-8-13-6 1-3-8-14-6
385. 1-3-8-13-7 1-3-8-14-7
386. 1-3-8-15-1 1-3-8-16-1
387. 1-3-8-15-2 1-3-8-16-2
388. 1-3-8-15-3 1-3-8-16-3
389. 1-3-8-15-4 1-3-8-16-4
390. 1-3-8-15-5 1-3-8-16-5
391. 1-3-8-15-6 1-3-8-16-6
392. 1-3-8-15-7 1-3-8-16-7
393. 1-3-9-1-1 1-3-9-2-1
394. 1-3-9-1-2 1-3-9-2-2

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
3AG 24622 EAAA TQZZA Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary 4-105
Issue 1 February 2010 Use pursuant to applicable agreements
System turn-up and testing Procedure 4-17: GBE error-free verification setup

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Table 4-6 GBE STS-3C connections (Shelf fully populated with GBEs)
(continued)
From STS-3C To STS-3C
(RACK-SHELF-SLOT-PORT#- (RACK-SHELF-SLOT-PORT#-
Order STS3C#) STS3C#)
395. 1-3-9-1-3 1-3-9-2-3
396. 1-3-9-1-4 1-3-9-2-4
397. 1-3-9-1-5 1-3-9-2-5
398. 1-3-9-1-6 1-3-9-2-6
399. 1-3-9-1-7 1-3-9-2-7
400. 1-3-9-3-1 1-3-9-4-1
401. 1-3-9-3-2 1-3-9-4-2
402. 1-3-9-3-3 1-3-9-4-3
403. 1-3-9-3-4 1-3-9-4-4
404. 1-3-9-3-5 1-3-9-4-5
405. 1-3-9-3-6 1-3-9-4-6
406. 1-3-9-3-7 1-3-9-4-7
407. 1-3-9-5-1 1-3-9-6-1
408. 1-3-9-5-2 1-3-9-6-2
409. 1-3-9-5-3 1-3-9-6-3
410. 1-3-9-5-4 1-3-9-6-4
411. 1-3-9-5-5 1-3-9-6-5
412. 1-3-9-5-6 1-3-9-6-6
413. 1-3-9-5-7 1-3-9-6-7
414. 1-3-9-7-1 1-3-9-8-1
415. 1-3-9-7-2 1-3-9-8-2
416. 1-3-9-7-3 1-3-9-8-3
417. 1-3-9-7-4 1-3-9-8-4
418. 1-3-9-7-5 1-3-9-8-5
419. 1-3-9-7-6 1-3-9-8-6
420. 1-3-9-7-7 1-3-9-8-7
421. 1-3-9-9-1 1-3-9-10-1
422. 1-3-9-9-2 1-3-9-10-2
423. 1-3-9-9-3 1-3-9-10-3

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
4-106 Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary 3AG 24622 EAAA TQZZA
Use pursuant to applicable agreements Issue 1 February 2010
System turn-up and testing Procedure 4-17: GBE error-free verification setup

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Table 4-6 GBE STS-3C connections (Shelf fully populated with GBEs)
(continued)
From STS-3C To STS-3C
(RACK-SHELF-SLOT-PORT#- (RACK-SHELF-SLOT-PORT#-
Order STS3C#) STS3C#)
424. 1-3-9-9-4 1-3-9-10-4
425. 1-3-9-9-5 1-3-9-10-5
426. 1-3-9-9-6 1-3-9-10-6
427. 1-3-9-9-7 1-3-9-10-7
428. 1-3-9-11-1 1-3-9-12-1
429. 1-3-9-11-2 1-3-9-12-2
430. 1-3-9-11-3 1-3-9-12-3
431. 1-3-9-11-4 1-3-9-12-4
432. 1-3-9-11-5 1-3-9-12-5
433. 1-3-9-11-6 1-3-9-12-6
434. 1-3-9-11-7 1-3-9-12-7
435. 1-3-9-13-1 1-3-9-14-1
436. 1-3-9-13-2 1-3-9-14-2
437. 1-3-9-13-3 1-3-9-14-3
438. 1-3-9-13-4 1-3-9-14-4
439. 1-3-9-13-5 1-3-9-14-5
440. 1-3-9-13-6 1-3-9-14-6
441. 1-3-9-13-7 1-3-9-14-7
442. 1-3-9-15-1 1-3-9-16-1
443. 1-3-9-15-2 1-3-9-16-2
444. 1-3-9-15-3 1-3-9-16-3
445. 1-3-9-15-4 1-3-9-16-4
446. 1-3-9-15-5 1-3-9-16-5
447. 1-3-9-15-6 1-3-9-16-6
448. 1-3-9-15-7 1-3-9-16-7
449. 1-3-12-1-1 1-3-12-2-1
450. 1-3-12-1-2 1-3-12-2-2
451. 1-3-12-1-3 1-3-12-2-3
452. 1-3-12-1-4 1-3-12-2-4

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
3AG 24622 EAAA TQZZA Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary 4-107
Issue 1 February 2010 Use pursuant to applicable agreements
System turn-up and testing Procedure 4-17: GBE error-free verification setup

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Table 4-6 GBE STS-3C connections (Shelf fully populated with GBEs)
(continued)
From STS-3C To STS-3C
(RACK-SHELF-SLOT-PORT#- (RACK-SHELF-SLOT-PORT#-
Order STS3C#) STS3C#)
453. 1-3-12-1-5 1-3-12-2-5
454. 1-3-12-1-6 1-3-12-2-6
455. 1-3-12-1-7 1-3-12-2-7
456. 1-3-12-3-1 1-3-12-4-1
457. 1-3-12-3-2 1-3-12-4-2
458. 1-3-12-3-3 1-3-12-4-3
459. 1-3-12-3-4 1-3-12-4-4
460. 1-3-12-3-5 1-3-12-4-5
461. 1-3-12-3-6 1-3-12-4-6
462. 1-3-12-3-7 1-3-12-4-7
463. 1-3-12-5-1 1-3-12-6-1
464. 1-3-12-5-2 1-3-12-6-2
465. 1-3-12-5-3 1-3-12-6-3
466. 1-3-12-5-4 1-3-12-6-4
467. 1-3-12-5-5 1-3-12-6-5
468. 1-3-12-5-6 1-3-12-6-6
469. 1-3-12-5-7 1-3-12-6-7
470. 1-3-12-7-1 1-3-12-8-1
471. 1-3-12-7-2 1-3-12-8-2
472. 1-3-12-7-3 1-3-12-8-3
473. 1-3-12-7-4 1-3-12-8-4
474. 1-3-12-7-5 1-3-12-8-5
475. 1-3-12-7-6 1-3-12-8-6
476. 1-3-12-7-7 1-3-12-8-7
477. 1-3-12-9-1 1-3-12-10-1
478. 1-3-12-9-2 1-3-12-10-2
479. 1-3-12-9-3 1-3-12-10-3
480. 1-3-12-9-4 1-3-12-10-4
481. 1-3-12-9-5 1-3-12-10-5

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
4-108 Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary 3AG 24622 EAAA TQZZA
Use pursuant to applicable agreements Issue 1 February 2010
System turn-up and testing Procedure 4-17: GBE error-free verification setup

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Table 4-6 GBE STS-3C connections (Shelf fully populated with GBEs)
(continued)
From STS-3C To STS-3C
(RACK-SHELF-SLOT-PORT#- (RACK-SHELF-SLOT-PORT#-
Order STS3C#) STS3C#)
482. 1-3-12-9-6 1-3-12-10-6
483. 1-3-12-9-7 1-3-12-10-7
484. 1-3-12-11-1 1-3-12-12-1
485. 1-3-12-11-2 1-3-12-12-2
486. 1-3-12-11-3 1-3-12-12-3
487. 1-3-12-11-4 1-3-12-12-4
488. 1-3-12-11-5 1-3-12-12-5
489. 1-3-12-11-6 1-3-12-12-6
490. 1-3-12-11-7 1-3-12-12-7
491. 1-3-12-13-1 1-3-12-14-1
492. 1-3-12-13-2 1-3-12-14-2
493. 1-3-12-13-3 1-3-12-14-3
494. 1-3-12-13-4 1-3-12-14-4
495. 1-3-12-13-5 1-3-12-14-5
496. 1-3-12-13-6 1-3-12-14-6
497. 1-3-12-13-7 1-3-12-14-7
498. 1-3-12-15-1 1-3-12-16-1
499. 1-3-12-15-2 1-3-12-16-2
500. 1-3-12-15-3 1-3-12-16-3
501. 1-3-12-15-4 1-3-12-16-4
502. 1-3-12-15-5 1-3-12-16-5
503. 1-3-12-15-6 1-3-12-16-6
504. 1-3-12-15-7 1-3-12-16-7
505. 1-3-13-1-1 1-3-13-2-1
506. 1-3-13-1-2 1-3-13-2-2
507. 1-3-13-1-3 1-3-13-2-3
508. 1-3-13-1-4 1-3-13-2-4
509. 1-3-13-1-5 1-3-13-2-5
510. 1-3-13-1-6 1-3-13-2-6

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
3AG 24622 EAAA TQZZA Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary 4-109
Issue 1 February 2010 Use pursuant to applicable agreements
System turn-up and testing Procedure 4-17: GBE error-free verification setup

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Table 4-6 GBE STS-3C connections (Shelf fully populated with GBEs)
(continued)
From STS-3C To STS-3C
(RACK-SHELF-SLOT-PORT#- (RACK-SHELF-SLOT-PORT#-
Order STS3C#) STS3C#)
511. 1-3-13-1-7 1-3-13-2-7
512. 1-3-13-3-1 1-3-13-4-1
513. 1-3-13-3-2 1-3-13-4-2
514. 1-3-13-3-3 1-3-13-4-3
515. 1-3-13-3-4 1-3-13-4-4
516. 1-3-13-3-5 1-3-13-4-5
517. 1-3-13-3-6 1-3-13-4-6
518. 1-3-13-3-7 1-3-13-4-7
519. 1-3-13-5-1 1-3-13-6-1
520. 1-3-13-5-2 1-3-13-6-2
521. 1-3-13-5-3 1-3-13-6-3
522. 1-3-13-5-4 1-3-13-6-4
523. 1-3-13-5-5 1-3-13-6-5
524. 1-3-13-5-6 1-3-13-6-6
525. 1-3-13-5-7 1-3-13-6-7
526. 1-3-13-7-1 1-3-13-8-1
527. 1-3-13-7-2 1-3-13-8-2
528. 1-3-13-7-3 1-3-13-8-3
529. 1-3-13-7-4 1-3-13-8-4
530. 1-3-13-7-5 1-3-13-8-5
531. 1-3-13-7-6 1-3-13-8-6
532. 1-3-13-7-7 1-3-13-8-7
533. 1-3-13-9-1 1-3-13-10-1
534. 1-3-13-9-2 1-3-13-10-2
535. 1-3-13-9-3 1-3-13-10-3
536. 1-3-13-9-4 1-3-13-10-4
537. 1-3-13-9-5 1-3-13-10-5
538. 1-3-13-9-6 1-3-13-10-6
539. 1-3-13-9-7 1-3-13-10-7

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
4-110 Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary 3AG 24622 EAAA TQZZA
Use pursuant to applicable agreements Issue 1 February 2010
System turn-up and testing Procedure 4-17: GBE error-free verification setup

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Table 4-6 GBE STS-3C connections (Shelf fully populated with GBEs)
(continued)
From STS-3C To STS-3C
(RACK-SHELF-SLOT-PORT#- (RACK-SHELF-SLOT-PORT#-
Order STS3C#) STS3C#)
540. 1-3-13-11-1 1-3-13-12-1
541. 1-3-13-11-2 1-3-13-12-2
542. 1-3-13-11-3 1-3-13-12-3
543. 1-3-13-11-4 1-3-13-12-4
544. 1-3-13-11-5 1-3-13-12-5
545. 1-3-13-11-6 1-3-13-12-6
546. 1-3-13-11-7 1-3-13-12-7
547. 1-3-13-13-1 1-3-13-14-1
548. 1-3-13-13-2 1-3-13-14-2
549. 1-3-13-13-3 1-3-13-14-3
550. 1-3-13-13-4 1-3-13-14-4
551. 1-3-13-13-5 1-3-13-14-5
552. 1-3-13-13-6 1-3-13-14-6
553. 1-3-13-13-7 1-3-13-14-7
554. 1-3-13-15-1 1-3-13-16-1
555. 1-3-13-15-2 1-3-13-16-2
556. 1-3-13-15-3 1-3-13-16-3
557. 1-3-13-15-4 1-3-13-16-4
558. 1-3-13-15-5 1-3-13-16-5
559. 1-3-13-15-6 1-3-13-16-6
560. 1-3-13-15-7 1-3-13-16-7
561. 1-3-14-1-1 1-3-14-2-1
562. 1-3-14-1-2 1-3-14-2-2
563. 1-3-14-1-3 1-3-14-2-3
564. 1-3-14-1-4 1-3-14-2-4
565. 1-3-14-1-5 1-3-14-2-5
566. 1-3-14-1-6 1-3-14-2-6
567. 1-3-14-1-7 1-3-14-2-7
568. 1-3-14-3-1 1-3-14-4-1

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
3AG 24622 EAAA TQZZA Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary 4-111
Issue 1 February 2010 Use pursuant to applicable agreements
System turn-up and testing Procedure 4-17: GBE error-free verification setup

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Table 4-6 GBE STS-3C connections (Shelf fully populated with GBEs)
(continued)
From STS-3C To STS-3C
(RACK-SHELF-SLOT-PORT#- (RACK-SHELF-SLOT-PORT#-
Order STS3C#) STS3C#)
569. 1-3-14-3-2 1-3-14-4-2
570. 1-3-14-3-3 1-3-14-4-3
571. 1-3-14-3-4 1-3-14-4-4
572. 1-3-14-3-5 1-3-14-4-5
573. 1-3-14-3-6 1-3-14-4-6
574. 1-3-14-3-7 1-3-14-4-7
575. 1-3-14-5-1 1-3-14-6-1
576. 1-3-14-5-2 1-3-14-6-2
577. 1-3-14-5-3 1-3-14-6-3
578. 1-3-14-5-4 1-3-14-6-4
579. 1-3-14-5-5 1-3-14-6-5
580. 1-3-14-5-6 1-3-14-6-6
581. 1-3-14-5-7 1-3-14-6-7
582. 1-3-14-7-1 1-3-14-8-1
583. 1-3-14-7-2 1-3-14-8-2
584. 1-3-14-7-3 1-3-14-8-3
585. 1-3-14-7-4 1-3-14-8-4
586. 1-3-14-7-5 1-3-14-8-5
587. 1-3-14-7-6 1-3-14-8-6
588. 1-3-14-7-7 1-3-14-8-7
589. 1-3-14-9-1 1-3-14-10-1
590. 1-3-14-9-2 1-3-14-10-2
591. 1-3-14-9-3 1-3-14-10-3
592. 1-3-14-9-4 1-3-14-10-4
593. 1-3-14-9-5 1-3-14-10-5
594. 1-3-14-9-6 1-3-14-10-6
595. 1-3-14-9-7 1-3-14-10-7
596. 1-3-14-11-1 1-3-14-12-1
597. 1-3-14-11-2 1-3-14-12-2

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
4-112 Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary 3AG 24622 EAAA TQZZA
Use pursuant to applicable agreements Issue 1 February 2010
System turn-up and testing Procedure 4-17: GBE error-free verification setup

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Table 4-6 GBE STS-3C connections (Shelf fully populated with GBEs)
(continued)
From STS-3C To STS-3C
(RACK-SHELF-SLOT-PORT#- (RACK-SHELF-SLOT-PORT#-
Order STS3C#) STS3C#)
598. 1-3-14-11-3 1-3-14-12-3
599. 1-3-14-11-4 1-3-14-12-4
600. 1-3-14-11-5 1-3-14-12-5
601. 1-3-14-11-6 1-3-14-12-6
602. 1-3-14-11-7 1-3-14-12-7
603. 1-3-14-13-1 1-3-14-14-1
604. 1-3-14-13-2 1-3-14-14-2
605. 1-3-14-13-3 1-3-14-14-3
606. 1-3-14-13-4 1-3-14-14-4
607. 1-3-14-13-5 1-3-14-14-5
608. 1-3-14-13-6 1-3-14-14-6
609. 1-3-14-13-7 1-3-14-14-7
610. 1-3-14-15-1 1-3-14-16-1
611. 1-3-14-15-2 1-3-14-16-2
612. 1-3-14-15-3 1-3-14-16-3
613. 1-3-14-15-4 1-3-14-16-4
614. 1-3-14-15-5 1-3-14-16-5
615. 1-3-14-15-6 1-3-14-16-6
616. 1-3-14-15-7 1-3-14-16-7
617. 1-3-15-1-1 1-3-15-2-1
618. 1-3-15-1-2 1-3-15-2-2
619. 1-3-15-1-3 1-3-15-2-3
620. 1-3-15-1-4 1-3-15-2-4
621. 1-3-15-1-5 1-3-15-2-5
622. 1-3-15-1-6 1-3-15-2-6
623. 1-3-15-1-7 1-3-15-2-7
624. 1-3-15-3-1 1-3-15-4-1
625. 1-3-15-3-2 1-3-15-4-2
626. 1-3-15-3-3 1-3-15-4-3

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
3AG 24622 EAAA TQZZA Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary 4-113
Issue 1 February 2010 Use pursuant to applicable agreements
System turn-up and testing Procedure 4-17: GBE error-free verification setup

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Table 4-6 GBE STS-3C connections (Shelf fully populated with GBEs)
(continued)
From STS-3C To STS-3C
(RACK-SHELF-SLOT-PORT#- (RACK-SHELF-SLOT-PORT#-
Order STS3C#) STS3C#)
627. 1-3-15-3-4 1-3-15-4-4
628. 1-3-15-3-5 1-3-15-4-5
629. 1-3-15-3-6 1-3-15-4-6
630. 1-3-15-3-7 1-3-15-4-7
631. 1-3-15-5-1 1-3-15-6-1
632. 1-3-15-5-2 1-3-15-6-2
633. 1-3-15-5-3 1-3-15-6-3
634. 1-3-15-5-4 1-3-15-6-4
635. 1-3-15-5-5 1-3-15-6-5
636. 1-3-15-5-6 1-3-15-6-6
637. 1-3-15-5-7 1-3-15-6-7
638. 1-3-15-7-1 1-3-15-8-1
639. 1-3-15-7-2 1-3-15-8-2
640. 1-3-15-7-3 1-3-15-8-3
641. 1-3-15-7-4 1-3-15-8-4
642. 1-3-15-7-5 1-3-15-8-5
643. 1-3-15-7-6 1-3-15-8-6
644. 1-3-15-7-7 1-3-15-8-7
645. 1-3-15-9-1 1-3-15-10-1
646. 1-3-15-9-2 1-3-15-10-2
647. 1-3-15-9-3 1-3-15-10-3
648. 1-3-15-9-4 1-3-15-10-4
649. 1-3-15-9-5 1-3-15-10-5
650. 1-3-15-9-6 1-3-15-10-6
651. 1-3-15-9-7 1-3-15-10-7
652. 1-3-15-11-1 1-3-15-12-1
653. 1-3-15-11-2 1-3-15-12-2
654. 1-3-15-11-3 1-3-15-12-3
655. 1-3-15-11-4 1-3-15-12-4

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
4-114 Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary 3AG 24622 EAAA TQZZA
Use pursuant to applicable agreements Issue 1 February 2010
System turn-up and testing Procedure 4-17: GBE error-free verification setup

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Table 4-6 GBE STS-3C connections (Shelf fully populated with GBEs)
(continued)
From STS-3C To STS-3C
(RACK-SHELF-SLOT-PORT#- (RACK-SHELF-SLOT-PORT#-
Order STS3C#) STS3C#)
656. 1-3-15-11-5 1-3-15-12-5
657. 1-3-15-11-6 1-3-15-12-6
658. 1-3-15-11-7 1-3-15-12-7
659. 1-3-15-13-1 1-3-15-14-1
660. 1-3-15-13-2 1-3-15-14-2
661. 1-3-15-13-3 1-3-15-14-3
662. 1-3-15-13-4 1-3-15-14-4
663. 1-3-15-13-5 1-3-15-14-5
664. 1-3-15-13-6 1-3-15-14-6
665. 1-3-15-13-7 1-3-15-14-7
666. 1-3-15-15-1 1-3-15-16-1
667. 1-3-15-15-2 1-3-15-16-2
668. 1-3-15-15-3 1-3-15-16-3
669. 1-3-15-15-4 1-3-15-16-4
670. 1-3-15-15-5 1-3-15-16-5
671. 1-3-15-15-6 1-3-15-16-6
672. 1-3-15-15-7 1-3-15-16-7
673. 1-3-16-1-1 1-3-16-2-1
674. 1-3-16-1-2 1-3-16-2-2
675. 1-3-16-1-3 1-3-16-2-3
676. 1-3-16-1-4 1-3-16-2-4
677. 1-3-16-1-5 1-3-16-2-5
678. 1-3-16-1-6 1-3-16-2-6
679. 1-3-16-1-7 1-3-16-2-7
680. 1-3-16-3-1 1-3-16-4-1
681. 1-3-16-3-2 1-3-16-4-2
682. 1-3-16-3-3 1-3-16-4-3
683. 1-3-16-3-4 1-3-16-4-4
684. 1-3-16-3-5 1-3-16-4-5

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
3AG 24622 EAAA TQZZA Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary 4-115
Issue 1 February 2010 Use pursuant to applicable agreements
System turn-up and testing Procedure 4-17: GBE error-free verification setup

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Table 4-6 GBE STS-3C connections (Shelf fully populated with GBEs)
(continued)
From STS-3C To STS-3C
(RACK-SHELF-SLOT-PORT#- (RACK-SHELF-SLOT-PORT#-
Order STS3C#) STS3C#)
685. 1-3-16-3-6 1-3-16-4-6
686. 1-3-16-3-7 1-3-16-4-7
687. 1-3-16-5-1 1-3-16-6-1
688. 1-3-16-5-2 1-3-16-6-2
689. 1-3-16-5-3 1-3-16-6-3
690. 1-3-16-5-4 1-3-16-6-4
691. 1-3-16-5-5 1-3-16-6-5
692. 1-3-16-5-6 1-3-16-6-6
693. 1-3-16-5-7 1-3-16-6-7
694. 1-3-16-7-1 1-3-16-8-1
695. 1-3-16-7-2 1-3-16-8-2
696. 1-3-16-7-3 1-3-16-8-3
697. 1-3-16-7-4 1-3-16-8-4
698. 1-3-16-7-5 1-3-16-8-5
699. 1-3-16-7-6 1-3-16-8-6
700. 1-3-16-7-7 1-3-16-8-7
701. 1-3-16-9-1 1-3-16-10-1
702. 1-3-16-9-2 1-3-16-10-2
703. 1-3-16-9-3 1-3-16-10-3
704. 1-3-16-9-4 1-3-16-10-4
705. 1-3-16-9-5 1-3-16-10-5
706. 1-3-16-9-6 1-3-16-10-6
707. 1-3-16-9-7 1-3-16-10-7
708. 1-3-16-11-1 1-3-16-12-1
709. 1-3-16-11-2 1-3-16-12-2
710. 1-3-16-11-3 1-3-16-12-3
711. 1-3-16-11-4 1-3-16-12-4
712. 1-3-16-11-5 1-3-16-12-5
713. 1-3-16-11-6 1-3-16-12-6

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
4-116 Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary 3AG 24622 EAAA TQZZA
Use pursuant to applicable agreements Issue 1 February 2010
System turn-up and testing Procedure 4-17: GBE error-free verification setup

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Table 4-6 GBE STS-3C connections (Shelf fully populated with GBEs)
(continued)
From STS-3C To STS-3C
(RACK-SHELF-SLOT-PORT#- (RACK-SHELF-SLOT-PORT#-
Order STS3C#) STS3C#)
714. 1-3-16-11-7 1-3-16-12-7
715. 1-3-16-13-1 1-3-16-14-1
716. 1-3-16-13-2 1-3-16-14-2
717. 1-3-16-13-3 1-3-16-14-3
718. 1-3-16-13-4 1-3-16-14-4
719. 1-3-16-13-5 1-3-16-14-5
720. 1-3-16-13-6 1-3-16-14-6
721. 1-3-16-13-7 1-3-16-14-7
722. 1-3-16-15-1 1-3-16-16-1
723. 1-3-16-15-2 1-3-16-16-2
724. 1-3-16-15-3 1-3-16-16-3
725. 1-3-16-15-4 1-3-16-16-4
726. 1-3-16-15-5 1-3-16-16-5
727. 1-3-16-15-6 1-3-16-16-6
728. 1-3-16-15-7 1-3-16-16-7
729. 1-3-17-1-1 1-3-17-2-1
730. 1-3-17-1-2 1-3-17-2-2
731. 1-3-17-1-3 1-3-17-2-3
732. 1-3-17-1-4 1-3-17-2-4
733. 1-3-17-1-5 1-3-17-2-5
734. 1-3-17-1-6 1-3-17-2-6
735. 1-3-17-1-7 1-3-17-2-7
736. 1-3-17-3-1 1-3-17-4-1
737. 1-3-17-3-2 1-3-17-4-2
738. 1-3-17-3-3 1-3-17-4-3
739. 1-3-17-3-4 1-3-17-4-4
740. 1-3-17-3-5 1-3-17-4-5
741. 1-3-17-3-6 1-3-17-4-6
742. 1-3-17-3-7 1-3-17-4-7

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
3AG 24622 EAAA TQZZA Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary 4-117
Issue 1 February 2010 Use pursuant to applicable agreements
System turn-up and testing Procedure 4-17: GBE error-free verification setup

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Table 4-6 GBE STS-3C connections (Shelf fully populated with GBEs)
(continued)
From STS-3C To STS-3C
(RACK-SHELF-SLOT-PORT#- (RACK-SHELF-SLOT-PORT#-
Order STS3C#) STS3C#)
743. 1-3-17-5-1 1-3-17-6-1
744. 1-3-17-5-2 1-3-17-6-2
745. 1-3-17-5-3 1-3-17-6-3
746. 1-3-17-5-4 1-3-17-6-4
747. 1-3-17-5-5 1-3-17-6-5
748. 1-3-17-5-6 1-3-17-6-6
749. 1-3-17-5-7 1-3-17-6-7
750. 1-3-17-7-1 1-3-17-8-1
751. 1-3-17-7-2 1-3-17-8-2
752. 1-3-17-7-3 1-3-17-8-3
753. 1-3-17-7-4 1-3-17-8-4
754. 1-3-17-7-5 1-3-17-8-5
755. 1-3-17-7-6 1-3-17-8-6
756. 1-3-17-7-7 1-3-17-8-7
757. 1-3-17-9-1 1-3-17-10-1
758. 1-3-17-9-2 1-3-17-10-2
759. 1-3-17-9-3 1-3-17-10-3
760. 1-3-17-9-4 1-3-17-10-4
761. 1-3-17-9-5 1-3-17-10-5
762. 1-3-17-9-6 1-3-17-10-6
763. 1-3-17-9-7 1-3-17-10-7
764. 1-3-17-11-1 1-3-17-12-1
765. 1-3-17-11-2 1-3-17-12-2
766. 1-3-17-11-3 1-3-17-12-3
767. 1-3-17-11-4 1-3-17-12-4
768. 1-3-17-11-5 1-3-17-12-5
769. 1-3-17-11-6 1-3-17-12-6
770. 1-3-17-11-7 1-3-17-12-7
771. 1-3-17-13-1 1-3-17-14-1

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
4-118 Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary 3AG 24622 EAAA TQZZA
Use pursuant to applicable agreements Issue 1 February 2010
System turn-up and testing Procedure 4-17: GBE error-free verification setup

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Table 4-6 GBE STS-3C connections (Shelf fully populated with GBEs)
(continued)
From STS-3C To STS-3C
(RACK-SHELF-SLOT-PORT#- (RACK-SHELF-SLOT-PORT#-
Order STS3C#) STS3C#)
772. 1-3-17-13-2 1-3-17-14-2
773. 1-3-17-13-3 1-3-17-14-3
774. 1-3-17-13-4 1-3-17-14-4
775. 1-3-17-13-5 1-3-17-14-5
776. 1-3-17-13-6 1-3-17-14-6
777. 1-3-17-13-7 1-3-17-14-7
778. 1-3-17-15-1 1-3-17-16-1
779. 1-3-17-15-2 1-3-17-16-2
780. 1-3-17-15-3 1-3-17-16-3
781. 1-3-17-15-4 1-3-17-16-4
782. 1-3-17-15-5 1-3-17-16-5
783. 1-3-17-15-6 1-3-17-16-6
784. 1-3-17-15-7 1-3-17-16-7
785. 1-3-18-1-1 1-3-18-2-1
786. 1-3-18-1-2 1-3-18-2-2
787. 1-3-18-1-3 1-3-18-2-3
788. 1-3-18-1-4 1-3-18-2-4
789. 1-3-18-1-5 1-3-18-2-5
790. 1-3-18-1-6 1-3-18-2-6
791. 1-3-18-1-7 1-3-18-2-7
792. 1-3-18-3-1 1-3-18-4-1
793. 1-3-18-3-2 1-3-18-4-2
794. 1-3-18-3-3 1-3-18-4-3
795. 1-3-18-3-4 1-3-18-4-4
796. 1-3-18-3-5 1-3-18-4-5
797. 1-3-18-3-6 1-3-18-4-6
798. 1-3-18-3-7 1-3-18-4-7
799. 1-3-18-5-1 1-3-18-6-1
800. 1-3-18-5-2 1-3-18-6-2

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
3AG 24622 EAAA TQZZA Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary 4-119
Issue 1 February 2010 Use pursuant to applicable agreements
System turn-up and testing Procedure 4-17: GBE error-free verification setup

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Table 4-6 GBE STS-3C connections (Shelf fully populated with GBEs)
(continued)
From STS-3C To STS-3C
(RACK-SHELF-SLOT-PORT#- (RACK-SHELF-SLOT-PORT#-
Order STS3C#) STS3C#)
801. 1-3-18-5-3 1-3-18-6-3
802. 1-3-18-5-4 1-3-18-6-4
803. 1-3-18-5-5 1-3-18-6-5
804. 1-3-18-5-6 1-3-18-6-6
805. 1-3-18-5-7 1-3-18-6-7
806. 1-3-18-7-1 1-3-18-8-1
807. 1-3-18-7-2 1-3-18-8-2
808. 1-3-18-7-3 1-3-18-8-3
809. 1-3-18-7-4 1-3-18-8-4
810. 1-3-18-7-5 1-3-18-8-5
811. 1-3-18-7-6 1-3-18-8-6
812. 1-3-18-7-7 1-3-18-8-7
813. 1-3-18-9-1 1-3-18-10-1
814. 1-3-18-9-2 1-3-18-10-2
815. 1-3-18-9-3 1-3-18-10-3
816. 1-3-18-9-4 1-3-18-10-4
817. 1-3-18-9-5 1-3-18-10-5
818. 1-3-18-9-6 1-3-18-10-6
819. 1-3-18-9-7 1-3-18-10-7
820. 1-3-18-11-1 1-3-18-12-1
821. 1-3-18-11-2 1-3-18-12-2
822. 1-3-18-11-3 1-3-18-12-3
823. 1-3-18-11-4 1-3-18-12-4
824. 1-3-18-11-5 1-3-18-12-5
825. 1-3-18-11-6 1-3-18-12-6
826. 1-3-18-11-7 1-3-18-12-7
827. 1-3-18-13-1 1-3-18-14-1
828. 1-3-18-13-2 1-3-18-14-2
829. 1-3-18-13-3 1-3-18-14-3

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
4-120 Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary 3AG 24622 EAAA TQZZA
Use pursuant to applicable agreements Issue 1 February 2010
System turn-up and testing Procedure 4-17: GBE error-free verification setup

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Table 4-6 GBE STS-3C connections (Shelf fully populated with GBEs)
(continued)
From STS-3C To STS-3C
(RACK-SHELF-SLOT-PORT#- (RACK-SHELF-SLOT-PORT#-
Order STS3C#) STS3C#)
830. 1-3-18-13-4 1-3-18-14-4
831. 1-3-18-13-5 1-3-18-14-5
832. 1-3-18-13-6 1-3-18-14-6
833. 1-3-18-13-7 1-3-18-14-7
834. 1-3-18-15-1 1-3-18-16-1
835. 1-3-18-15-2 1-3-18-16-2
836. 1-3-18-15-3 1-3-18-16-3
837. 1-3-18-15-4 1-3-18-16-4
838. 1-3-18-15-5 1-3-18-16-5
839. 1-3-18-15-6 1-3-18-16-6
840. 1-3-18-15-7 1-3-18-16-7
841. 1-3-19-1-1 1-3-19-2-1
842. 1-3-19-1-2 1-3-19-2-2
843. 1-3-19-1-3 1-3-19-2-3
844. 1-3-19-1-4 1-3-19-2-4
845. 1-3-19-1-5 1-3-19-2-5
846. 1-3-19-1-6 1-3-19-2-6
847. 1-3-19-1-7 1-3-19-2-7
848. 1-3-19-3-1 1-3-19-4-1
849. 1-3-19-3-2 1-3-19-4-2
850. 1-3-19-3-3 1-3-19-4-3
851. 1-3-19-3-4 1-3-19-4-4
852. 1-3-19-3-5 1-3-19-4-5
853. 1-3-19-3-6 1-3-19-4-6
854. 1-3-19-3-7 1-3-19-4-7
855. 1-3-19-5-1 1-3-19-6-1
856. 1-3-19-5-2 1-3-19-6-2
857. 1-3-19-5-3 1-3-19-6-3
858. 1-3-19-5-4 1-3-19-6-4

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
3AG 24622 EAAA TQZZA Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary 4-121
Issue 1 February 2010 Use pursuant to applicable agreements
System turn-up and testing Procedure 4-17: GBE error-free verification setup

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Table 4-6 GBE STS-3C connections (Shelf fully populated with GBEs)
(continued)
From STS-3C To STS-3C
(RACK-SHELF-SLOT-PORT#- (RACK-SHELF-SLOT-PORT#-
Order STS3C#) STS3C#)
859. 1-3-19-5-5 1-3-19-6-5
860. 1-3-19-5-6 1-3-19-6-6
861. 1-3-19-5-7 1-3-19-6-7
862. 1-3-19-7-1 1-3-19-8-1
863. 1-3-19-7-2 1-3-19-8-2
864. 1-3-19-7-3 1-3-19-8-3
865. 1-3-19-7-4 1-3-19-8-4
866. 1-3-19-7-5 1-3-19-8-5
867. 1-3-19-7-6 1-3-19-8-6
868. 1-3-19-7-7 1-3-19-8-7
869. 1-3-19-9-1 1-3-19-10-1
870. 1-3-19-9-2 1-3-19-10-2
871. 1-3-19-9-3 1-3-19-10-3
872. 1-3-19-9-4 1-3-19-10-4
873. 1-3-19-9-5 1-3-19-10-5
874. 1-3-19-9-6 1-3-19-10-6
875. 1-3-19-9-7 1-3-19-10-7
876. 1-3-19-11-1 1-3-19-12-1
877. 1-3-19-11-2 1-3-19-12-2
878. 1-3-19-11-3 1-3-19-12-3
879. 1-3-19-11-4 1-3-19-12-4
880. 1-3-19-11-5 1-3-19-12-5
881. 1-3-19-11-6 1-3-19-12-6
882. 1-3-19-11-7 1-3-19-12-7
883. 1-3-19-13-1 1-3-19-14-1
884. 1-3-19-13-2 1-3-19-14-2
885. 1-3-19-13-3 1-3-19-14-3
886. 1-3-19-13-4 1-3-19-14-4
887. 1-3-19-13-5 1-3-19-14-5

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
4-122 Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary 3AG 24622 EAAA TQZZA
Use pursuant to applicable agreements Issue 1 February 2010
System turn-up and testing Procedure 4-17: GBE error-free verification setup

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Table 4-6 GBE STS-3C connections (Shelf fully populated with GBEs)
(continued)
From STS-3C To STS-3C
(RACK-SHELF-SLOT-PORT#- (RACK-SHELF-SLOT-PORT#-
Order STS3C#) STS3C#)
888. 1-3-19-13-6 1-3-19-14-6
889. 1-3-19-13-7 1-3-19-14-7
890. 1-3-19-15-1 1-3-19-16-1
891. 1-3-19-15-2 1-3-19-16-2
892. 1-3-19-15-3 1-3-19-16-3
893. 1-3-19-15-4 1-3-19-16-4
894. 1-3-19-15-5 1-3-19-16-5
895. 1-3-19-15-6 1-3-19-16-6
896. 1-3-19-15-7 1-3-19-16-7

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
3AG 24622 EAAA TQZZA Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary 4-123
Issue 1 February 2010 Use pursuant to applicable agreements
System turn-up and testing Procedure 4-18: OC-n error-free verification setup

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Procedure 4-18: OC-n error-free verification setup

When to use
This procedure provides setup instructions for performing OC-n error-free verification
tests. Continuity is tested with physical connection (fiber and jumpers) and
cross-connections.

General
The procedure sets up the test parameters for OC-n optical signals.
The parameter setting instructions in this procedure show how to set up transmit and
receiver parameters separately. These settings, however, can be coupled for alternative
setup.
The optical receiver on the test set could be damaged if excessive optical power levels are
applied to the receiver. Make sure the optical signal is within the maximum operating
range of the instrument before applying signal to the optical input port.
To prevent damage to the test set receiver, attenuate the incoming signal before
connecting it to the test set. To determine the level of attenuation, measure the power
level of the OCn module output. In addition, follow these precautions to ensure good,
reliable, repeatable measurement:
• Use extreme care when handling all optical cables and connectors.
• Verify that the connector interfaces are clean before making any connections.
• Keep connectors and cable ends covered when not in use.
The procedure establishes daisy chained test configurations. Each daisy chain must be
comprised of like OCn (OC3, OC12, OC48, or OC192) signal rate and optical wavelength
(850 nm, 1310 nm, or 1550 nm).
Depending upon the complexity of the system under test and the quantity of available
equipment, it is possible that this procedure must be performed numerous times until all
SFP ports on all OCn modules have been tested.
Always use the highest available signal format for each optical signal rate. For example,
on OCn modules equipped with OC-48 optics, the test would be performed using a
STS-48c signal (for OC3 optics use STS-3c, for OC12 optics use STS-12c, for OC192
use STS-192c).
For instructions on cleaning and inspecting optical cables and interface connectors, refer
to Procedure 4-16: “Clean fiber-optic connectors” (p. 4-75).
For information on TL1 command syntax, refer to the 1678 MCC TL1 Command Guide.
Refer to Chapter 5, “1678 Metro Core Connect addresses and locations” for rack, shelf,
and module locations.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
4-124 Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary 3AG 24622 EAAA TQZZA
Use pursuant to applicable agreements Issue 1 February 2010
System turn-up and testing Procedure 4-18: OC-n error-free verification setup

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
In this procedure S=Slot, and P=Port.
Use “Verify OCn provisioning” (p. 4-377) for this procedure.

Required equipment
The following equipment is required for this procedure:
• Test set capable of measuring STS-1 through OC-192 or equivalent
• Fiber-optic power meter capable of measuring at wavelengths of 850 nm, 1310 nm,
and 1550 nm
• (2) 5-foot FC-to-SC Single Mode (SM) optic cable
• SC-SC Single Mode (SM) optic cable
• Single Mode and SC-to-SC looping plugs
• Attenuators, as appropriate for BER test set and power level of OCn module output
• 5 dB, 10 dB, and 15 dB attenuators

Before you begin

All optical module TX and RX ports are properly connected and tested between the OCn
modules and the LGX panel per Procedure 4-15: “Confirm cabling between OC-n I/O and
LGX panel” (p. 4-68).

Task
Complete the following steps.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

1 Enter RTRV-ALM-ALL; to verify there are no alarms present to prevent testing.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

2 Do alarms exist that prevent testing?

If yes, go to Step 3.
If no, go to Step 4.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

3 Clear all alarms that prevent testing then go to Step 4. Refer to 1678 MCC Maintenance
and Trouble-Clearing Guide.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

4 Enter RTRV-COND-ALL; to verify there are no conditions present to prevent testing.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

5 Do conditions exist that prevent testing?

If yes, go to Step 6.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
3AG 24622 EAAA TQZZA Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary 4-125
Issue 1 February 2010 Use pursuant to applicable agreements
System turn-up and testing Procedure 4-18: OC-n error-free verification setup

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
If no, go to Step 7.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

6 Clear all conditions that prevent testing then go to Step 7. Refer to 1678 MCC
Maintenance and Trouble-Clearing Guide.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

7 Begin with first OCn module in shelf.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

8 Enter ENT-STSn::AID; to provision the first STS-nC facility for every OC-n on
working OCn module. Enter command for every remaining working OCn module. Refer
to“Verify OCn provisioning” (p. 4-377).
where:
AID=STS-nC facility AID (
n=3 (for OC3),
12 (for OC12),
48 (for OC48), or
192 (for OC192)
&& ranging and & grouping allowed
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

9 Have facilities been entered for all OC-n ports on every working OCn module?
If yes, go to Step 10.
If no, go to Step 8.
Connect Test Sets
Table 4-7 SFP/XFP optical power specifications
TX optical power RX sensitivity
Wavelength (dBm) (dBm)
OC rate Optical interface
[nm]
MIN MAX MIN /MAX
OC-3 IR1OC3 (short haul) 1310 -15 -8 -28 -81
LR10C3 (long haul) 1310 -5 0 -34 -102
LR2OC3 (long haul) 1550 -5 0 -34 -102
OC-12 IR1OC12 1310 -15 -8 -28 -81
LR1OC12 (long haul) 1310 -3 2 -28 -82
LR2OC12 (long haul) 1550 -3 2 -28 -82

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
4-126 Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary 3AG 24622 EAAA TQZZA
Use pursuant to applicable agreements Issue 1 February 2010
System turn-up and testing Procedure 4-18: OC-n error-free verification setup

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Table 4-7 SFP/XFP optical power specifications (continued)
TX optical power RX sensitivity
Wavelength (dBm) (dBm)
OC rate Optical interface
[nm]
MIN MAX MIN /MAX
OC-48 SR1OC48 (short haul) 1310 -10 -3 -18 -31
IR1OC48 (short haul) 1310 -5 0 -18 01
LR1OC48 (long haul) 1310 -2 2 -27 -82
LR2OC48 (long haul) 1550 -2 2 -28 -82
LR2OC48 (long haul, 1520 - 1568 -2 2 -28 -82
DWDM)
OC-192 SR1OC192 1310 -6 -1 -11 -11
(intra–office)
IR2OC192 (short haul) 1550 -1 2 -14 -11
LR2OC192 (long haul) 1550 10 12 -14 -12
OC-192 V–64.2 (very long haul) 1550 2 6.5 -33 -13.53
OC-192 U–64.2 (ultra long haul) 1550 10 12 -34 -13

Notes:
1. 5 dB attenuator suggested
2. 15 dB attenuator required
3. 25 dB attenuator required

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

10 NOTICE
Possibility of equipment damage.
The optical receiver on the test set could be damaged if excessive optical power levels are
applied to the receiver.
Make sure the optical signal is within the maximum operating range of the instrument
before applying signal to the optical input port.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

11 Using a fiber-optic test cable, connect output of OCn test set to attenuator if required.
Refer to Table 4-7, “SFP/XFP optical power specifications” (p. 4-126) for SFP/XFP
specifications.

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
3AG 24622 EAAA TQZZA Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary 4-127
Issue 1 February 2010 Use pursuant to applicable agreements
System turn-up and testing Procedure 4-18: OC-n error-free verification setup

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

12 Using a fiber-optic test cable, connect the other end of attenuator connected to OCn test
set to RX port of first OCn module in shelf (Device Under Test). See Figure 4-19, “OCn
test set connections” (p. 4-128).

Figure 4-19 OCn test set connections

LGX PANEL
TX 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16

RX A
OCn
TEST C A C A C A C A C A C A C A C A
SET

TX A
RX 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16

FIBER CONNECTIONS ON LGX PANEL

ATTENUATION IS REQUIRED BETWEEN TX AND RX PORTS FOR

A CERTAIN TYPES OF SFPs AND XFPs. REFER TO SPECIFICATIONS.

C CROSS CONNECTION 678-0332-1

100507

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

13 Using a fiber-optic test cable, connect appropriate attenuator to TX port of first OCn
module in shelf. See Figure 4-19, “OCn test set connections” (p. 4-128). Refer to Table
4-7, “SFP/XFP optical power specifications” (p. 4-126) to determine attenuation required
for interconnection between test set and incoming signal of all OC-n physical layer types.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

14 Using a fiber-optic test cable, connect the other end of attenuator connected to OCn
module TX port to OCn test set input connector. See Figure 4-19, “OCn test set
connections” (p. 4-128).
Connect Daisy Chain Fibers
The procedure assumes that the OCn module under test is equipped with all compatible
SFPs. Each daisy chain must be comprised of like OCn (OC3, OC12, OC48, or OC192)
signal rate and optical wavelength (850 nm, 1310 nm, or 1550 nm). A unique daisy chain

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
4-128 Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary 3AG 24622 EAAA TQZZA
Use pursuant to applicable agreements Issue 1 February 2010
System turn-up and testing Procedure 4-18: OC-n error-free verification setup

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
must be established for each OCn/wavelength combination. Refer to Table 4-7,
“SFP/XFP optical power specifications” (p. 4-126) to establish compatible equipped ports
per OCn module.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

15 Using a fiber-optic test cable, connect appropriate attenuator to second TX port of first
OCn module in shelf. See Figure 4-19, “OCn test set connections” (p. 4-128). Refer to
Table 4-7, “SFP/XFP optical power specifications” (p. 4-126) to determine attenuation
required for interconnection between second TX port of first OCn module in shelf and
third RX port of first OCn module in shelf.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

16 Using a fiber-optic test cable, connect the other end of attenuator connected to OCn
module second TX port to third RX port of first OCn module in shelf. See Figure 4-19,
“OCn test set connections” (p. 4-128).
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

17 Using a fiber-optic test cable, connect appropriate attenuator to third TX port of first OCn
module in shelf. See Figure 4-19, “OCn test set connections” (p. 4-128). Refer to Table
4-7, “SFP/XFP optical power specifications” (p. 4-126) to determine attenuation required
for interconnection between third TX port of first OCn module in shelf and second RX
port of first OCn module in shelf.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

18 Using a fiber-optic test cable, connect the other end of attenuator connected to OCn
module third TX port to second RX port of first OCn module in shelf. See Figure 4-19,
“OCn test set connections” (p. 4-128).
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

19 Repeat Step 15 through Step 18 until every other compatible SFP is daisy chained on the
first OCn module in the shelf.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

20 Repeat Step 11 through Step 19 to establish test configuration for all other compatible
SFP types on the first OCn module in the shelf.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

21 Repeat Step 11 through Step 20 to establish test configuration for all OCn modules in the
shelf.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

22 Create Cross-Connections
Enter ENT-CRS-STSnC::FROM,TO:::2WAY; to establish 2WAY STS-nC
cross-connections to the next available port.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
3AG 24622 EAAA TQZZA Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary 4-129
Issue 1 February 2010 Use pursuant to applicable agreements
System turn-up and testing Procedure 4-18: OC-n error-free verification setup

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
where:
n=3 (for OC3),
12 (for OC12),
48 (for OC48), or
192 (for OC192)
FROM=OCnSTSnC AID. Refer to Table 4-8, “STS-nC connections (Shelf fully
populated with OCns)” (p. 4-130) for daisy chain provisioning order.
TO=OCnSTSnC AID. Refer to Table 4-8, “STS-nC connections (Shelf fully populated
with OCns)” (p. 4-130) for daisy chain provisioning order. If TO STS-nC port, as shown
in Table 4-8, “STS-nC connections (Shelf fully populated with OCns)” (p. 4-130), is not
populated in shelf or is already being used in another cross-connection, TO STS-nC port
= next available STS-nC port in shelf.
Example:
ENT-CRS-STSnC::OCnSTSnC-1-3-4-5,OCnSTSnC-1-3-4-6:::2WAY;
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

23 Repeat Step 22 until all daisy chain connections have been made for all OCn facilities.

Table 4-8 STS-nC connections (Shelf fully populated with OCns)

From STS-nC To STS-nC
Order (RACK-SHELF-SLOT-PORT#- (RACK-SHELF-SLOT-PORT#-
STSnC-STSnC) STSnC-STSnC)
Working Facility Cross-connections
1. 1-3-2-1 1-3-2-2
2. 1-3-2-3 1-3-2-4
3. 1-3-2-5 1-3-2-6
4. 1-3-2-7 1-3-2-8
5. 1-3-2-9 1-3-2-10
6. 1-3-2-11 1-3-2-12
7. 1-3-2-13 1-3-2-14
8. 1-3-2-15 1-3-2-16
9. 1-3-4-1 1-3-4-2
10. 1-3-4-3 1-3-4-4
11. 1-3-4-5 1-3-4-6
12. 1-3-4-7 1-3-4-8

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
4-130 Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary 3AG 24622 EAAA TQZZA
Use pursuant to applicable agreements Issue 1 February 2010
System turn-up and testing Procedure 4-18: OC-n error-free verification setup

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Table 4-8 STS-nC connections (Shelf fully populated with OCns) (continued)
From STS-nC To STS-nC
Order (RACK-SHELF-SLOT-PORT#- (RACK-SHELF-SLOT-PORT#-
STSnC-STSnC) STSnC-STSnC)
13. 1-3-4-9 1-3-4-10
14. 1-3-4-11 1-3-4-12
15. 1-3-4-13 1-3-4-14
16. 1-3-4-15 1-3-4-16
17. 1-3-6-1 1-3-6-2
18. 1-3-6-3 1-3-6-4
19. 1-3-6-5 1-3-6-6
20. 1-3-6-7 1-3-6-8
21. 1-3-6-9 1-3-6-10
22. 1-3-6-11 1-3-6-12
23. 1-3-6-13 1-3-6-14
24. 1-3-6-15 1-3-6-16
25. 1-3-8-1 1-3-8-2-
26. 1-3-8-3 1-3-8-4
27. 1-3-8-5 1-3-8-6
28. 1-3-8-7 1-3-8-8
29. 1-3-8-9 1-3-8-10
30. 1-3-8-11 1-3-8-12
31. 1-3-8-13 1-3-8-14
32. 1-3-8-15 1-3-8-16
33. 1-3-12-1 1-3-12-2
34. 1-3-12-3 1-3-12-4
35. 1-3-12-5 1-3-12-6
36. 1-3-12-7 1-3-12-8
37. 1-3-12-9 1-3-12-10
38. 1-3-12-11 1-3-12-12
39. 1-3-12-13 1-3-12-14
40. 1-3-12-15 1-3-12-16
41. 1-3-14-1 1-3-14-2

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
3AG 24622 EAAA TQZZA Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary 4-131
Issue 1 February 2010 Use pursuant to applicable agreements
System turn-up and testing Procedure 4-18: OC-n error-free verification setup

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Table 4-8 STS-nC connections (Shelf fully populated with OCns) (continued)
From STS-nC To STS-nC
Order (RACK-SHELF-SLOT-PORT#- (RACK-SHELF-SLOT-PORT#-
STSnC-STSnC) STSnC-STSnC)
42. 1-3-14-3 1-3-14-4
43. 1-3-14-5 1-3-14-6
44. 1-3-14-7 1-3-14-8
45. 1-3-14-9 1-3-14-10
46. 1-3-14-11 1-3-14-12
47. 1-3-14-13 1-3-14-14
48. 1-3-14-15 1-3-14-16
49. 1-3-16-1 1-3-16-2
50. 1-3-16-3 1-3-16-4
51. 1-3-16-5 1-3-16-6
52. 1-3-16-7 1-3-16-8
53. 1-3-16-9 1-3-16-10
54. 1-3-16-11 1-3-16-12
55. 1-3-16-13 1-3-16-14
56. 1-3-16-15 1-3-16-16
57. 1-3-18-1 1-3-18-2
58. 1-3-18-3 1-3-18-4
59. 1-3-18-5 1-3-18-6
60. 1-3-18-7 1-3-18-8
61. 1-3-18-9 1-3-18-10
62. 1-3-18-11 1-3-18-12
63. 1-3-18-13 1-3-18-14
64. 1-3-18-15 1-3-16-16

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

24 Press RUN/STOP function key on OC-n test set to run test. GREEN=RUN, OFF=STOP.
Options may be different depending on test set model.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

25 Press RESULT function key to access Results window.

Options may be different depending on test set model.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
4-132 Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary 3AG 24622 EAAA TQZZA
Use pursuant to applicable agreements Issue 1 February 2010
System turn-up and testing Procedure 4-18: OC-n error-free verification setup

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

26 Set Results=SONET RESULT.

Options may be different depending on test set model.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

27 Select the following options for OC-n signal monitoring:

• ERROR SUMMARY: to monitor error bits, optical power (reading power (dBm) –
attenuation (dBm)), SPE pointer, and elapsed time.
• ALARM SECOND: to monitor signal alarm detection. Clear Alarm=0
• FREQUENCY: Set GATE=16s, to monitor OC-n signal frequency (2488.320 MHz)
and frequency offset.
Options may be different depending on test set model.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

28 Reset test set error count to zero.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

29 Are there errors?

If yes, go Step 30.
If no, record verification in “Verify OCn provisioning” (p. 4-377), then go to Step 31.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

30 Refer to 1678 MCC Maintenance and Trouble-Clearing Guide, then go to Step 28.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

31 When test is complete, leave test setup intact for subsequent tests.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

32 STOP. This procedure is complete.

E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
3AG 24622 EAAA TQZZA Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary 4-133
Issue 1 February 2010 Use pursuant to applicable agreements
System turn-up and testing Procedure 4-19: Perform error-free verification test (copy
0)
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Procedure 4-19: Perform error-free verification test (copy 0)

When to use
This procedure provides instructions to force all traffic to the copy 0 matrix and perform
an error-free verification test with all traffic on the copy 0 matrix.

General
For information on TL1 command syntax, refer to the 1678 MCC TL1 Command Guide.
Refer to Chapter 5, “1678 Metro Core Connect addresses and locations” for rack, shelf,
and module locations.
Use “Record error-free verification test results (copy 0)” (p. 4-382) for this procedure.

Before you begin

The test environments established for GBE IOCs in Procedure 4-17: “GBE error-free
verification setup” (p. 4-85) , 10GBE IOCs in Procedure 4-35: “10 GBE error-free
verification setup” (p. 4-237), and for OCn IOCs Procedure 4-18: “OC-n error-free
verification setup” (p. 4-124) must be intact.

Task
Complete the following steps.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

1 Enter RTRV-ALM-ALL; to verify there are no alarms present to prevent testing.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

2 Do alarms exist?
If yes, go to Step 3.
If no, verify in “Record error-free verification test results (copy 0)” (p. 4-382), then go to
Step 4.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

3 Clear all alarms that prevent testing then go to Step 1. Refer to 1678 MCC Maintenance
and Trouble-Clearing Guide.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

4 Enter RTRV-COND-ALL; to verify there are no conditions present to prevent testing.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

5 Do conditions exist that prevent testing?

If yes, go to Step 6.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
4-134 Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary 3AG 24622 EAAA TQZZA
Use pursuant to applicable agreements Issue 1 February 2010
System turn-up and testing Procedure 4-19: Perform error-free verification test (copy
0)
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
If no, verify in “Record error-free verification test results (copy 0)” (p. 4-382), then go to
Step 7.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

6 Clear all alarms and conditions that prevent testing then go to Step 7. Refer to 1678 MCC
Maintenance and Trouble-Clearing Guide.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

7 Lock Traffic to Matrix Copy 0

Enter RTRV-DX-EQPT::MXa0GA-1-3-10 to retrieve equipment parameters of copy 0
and copy 1 matrix modules.
where:
a=32 or 64 depending on equipped matrix type
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

8 Observe output. Is matrix in slot 10 IS, WRK, and matrix in slot 11 IS,STBYH?
If yes, go to Step 22.
If no, go to Step 9.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

9 Enter SW-DX-EQPT::MXab0GA-1-3-10; to switch copy 0 matrix to active.

where:
ab=32 or 64 depending on equipped matrix type
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

10 Enter RTRV-ALM-ALL;
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

11 Is MISC-1 alarm standing?

If yes, go to Step 12.
If no, go to Step 13.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

12 Refer to 1678 MCC Maintenance and Trouble-Clearing Guide to clear MISC-1 alarm.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

13 Enter RTRV-EQPT::MXab0GA-1-3-10; to retrieve equipment parameters of copy 0 and

copy 1 matrix modules.
where:
ab=32 or 64 depending on equipped matrix type
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
3AG 24622 EAAA TQZZA Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary 4-135
Issue 1 February 2010 Use pursuant to applicable agreements
System turn-up and testing Procedure 4-19: Perform error-free verification test (copy
0)
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

14 Is matrix module in slot 10 IS, WRK, and matrix in slot 11 IS,STBYH?

If yes, go to Step 22.
If no, go to Step 15.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

15 Refer to 1678 MCC Maintenance and Trouble-Clearing Guide to clear trouble.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

16 Is trouble cleared?
If yes, go to Step 17.
If no, go to Step 7.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

17 Enter INH-SWDX-EQPT::MXab0GA-1-3-10:; to inhibit switching of matrix copy 0.

where:
ab=32 or 64 depending on equipped matrix type
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

18 Enter RTRV-DX-EQPT::MXab0GA-1-3-10:; to retrieve active status of matrix in slot

10.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

19 Is matrix module in slot 10 active status MXab0GA-1-3-10?

If yes, go to Step 22.
If no, go to Step 20.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

20 Refer to 1678 MCC Maintenance and Trouble-Clearing Guide to clear trouble.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

21 Is trouble cleared?
If yes, go to Step 22.
If no, go to Step 7.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

22 BER Test
Reset test set error count to zero.

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
4-136 Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary 3AG 24622 EAAA TQZZA
Use pursuant to applicable agreements Issue 1 February 2010
System turn-up and testing Procedure 4-19: Perform error-free verification test (copy
0)
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

23 Monitor test set(s) for 15 minutes for error-free verification.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

24 Are there errors on test set?

If yes, go to Step 25.
If no, record verification in “Record error-free verification test results (copy 0)”
(p. 4-382), then go to Step 26.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

25 Refer to 1678 MCC Maintenance and Trouble-Clearing Guide, then go to Step 22.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

26 Remove and Restore Copy 1 Matrix

Enter RMV-EQPT::MXab0GA-1-3-11:::FRCD; to logically remove matrix module in
slot 11.
where:
ab=32 or 64 depending on equipped matrix type
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

27 Did logical removal of matrix module cause errors on test set?

If yes, go Step 37.
If no, record verification in “Record error-free verification test results (copy 0)”
(p. 4-382), then go to Step 29.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

28 Refer to 1678 MCC Maintenance and Trouble-Clearing Guide, then go to Step 26.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

29 Physically unseat from backplane, matrix module in slot 11. Leave module in shelf.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

30 Did physical removal of matrix module cause errors on test set?

If yes, go Step 31.
If no, record verification in “Record error-free verification test results (copy 0)”
(p. 4-382), then go to Step 32.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

31 Refer to 1678 MCC Maintenance and Trouble-Clearing Guide, then go to Step 22.

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
3AG 24622 EAAA TQZZA Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary 4-137
Issue 1 February 2010 Use pursuant to applicable agreements
System turn-up and testing Procedure 4-19: Perform error-free verification test (copy
0)
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

32 Reseat matrix module into slot 11.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

33 Did reseating matrix module cause errors on test set?

If yes, go Step 34.
If no, record verification in “Record error-free verification test results (copy 0)”
(p. 4-382), then go to Step 35.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

34 Refer to 1678 MCC Maintenance and Trouble-Clearing Guide, then go to Step 22.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

35 Enter RST-EQPT::MXab0GA-1-3-11; to logically restore matrix module in slot 11.

where:
ab=32 or 64 depending on equipped matrix type
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

36 Did logical restoration of matrix module cause errors on test set?

If yes, go Step 37.
If no, record verification in “Record error-free verification test results (copy 0)”
(p. 4-382), then go to Step 38.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

37 Refer to 1678 MCC Maintenance and Trouble-Clearing Guide, then go to Step 22.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

38 Enter ALW-SWDX-EQPT::MXab0GA-1-3-10:; to allow switching of matrix copy 0.

where:
ab=32 or 64 depending on equipped matrix type
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

39 STOP. This procedure is complete.

E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
4-138 Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary 3AG 24622 EAAA TQZZA
Use pursuant to applicable agreements Issue 1 February 2010
System turn-up and testing Procedure 4-20: Verify shelf redundant power copy 0

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Procedure 4-20: Verify shelf redundant power copy 0

When to use
This procedure provides instructions to verify power supply redundancy for the shelf.
This procedure also provides instructions to verify that traffic remains stable in the event
of a power alarm.

General
Alcatel-Lucent provides expert Installation Services for system configurations outside the
scope of this manual. Contact Alcatel-Lucent at 1-888-252-2832 for details.
Use “Verify shelf redundant power copy 0” (p. 4-383) for this procedure.

NOTICE
Service-disruption hazard
The procedure to verify shelf redundant power copy 0 should ONLY be performed during
a scheduled maintenance window with the customer present or per customer
requirements.
All work should be scheduled and agreed upon with the customer in writing prior to
beginning work on Procedure 4-20: “Verify shelf redundant power copy 0” (p. 4-139).

Before you begin

The test environment established in Procedure 4-19: “Perform error-free verification test
(copy 0)” (p. 4-134) must be intact.
All circuit breakers and step-up converter power switches must be set to ON.

Task

DANGER
Possibility of personal injury.
Hazardous electrical potentials are present. Severe arcing is possible and can cause
burns or eye injury.
Remove rings, watches, and other metal jewelry when working with primary circuits.
Exercise caution to avoid shorting power input terminals.

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
3AG 24622 EAAA TQZZA Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary 4-139
Issue 1 February 2010 Use pursuant to applicable agreements
System turn-up and testing Procedure 4-20: Verify shelf redundant power copy 0

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
NOTICE
ESD hazard
Plug-in modules contain electrostatic-sensitive devices. These devices can be damaged by
electrostatic discharge.
Refer to Introduction, Section “Electrostatic sensitive devices” (p. 1-17) for special
handling instructions.

NOTICE
Service-disruption hazard
Possibility of service interruption.
Use this procedure only for initial turn-up of a system. Never use this procedure on a
traffic-carrying system. When working with a traffic-carrying system, refer to the 1678
MCC Maintenance and Trouble-Clearing Guide.

Complete the following steps.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

1 Enter RTRV-ALM-ALL; to verify there are no alarms present.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

2 Do alarms exist that prevent testing?

If yes, go to Step 3.
If no, verify in “Verify shelf redundant power copy 0” (p. 4-383), then go to Step 4.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

3 Clear all alarms that prevent testing then go to Step 1.

Refer to 1678 MCC Maintenance and Trouble-Clearing Guide to clear trouble.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

4 Enter RTRV-COND-ALL; to verify there are no conditions present.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

5 Do conditions exist that prevent testing?

If yes, go to Step 6.
If no, verify in “Verify shelf redundant power copy 0” (p. 4-383), then go to Step 7.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

6 Clear all conditions that prevent testing then go to Step 4. Refer to 1678 MCC
Maintenance and Trouble-Clearing Guide to clear trouble.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
4-140 Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary 3AG 24622 EAAA TQZZA
Use pursuant to applicable agreements Issue 1 February 2010
System turn-up and testing Procedure 4-20: Verify shelf redundant power copy 0

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

7 At CO BDFB, verify both A and B power circuit breakers are set to ON.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

8 Verify both NGTRU step-up converter power switches are set to ON.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

9 At NGTRU step-up converter slot 1, set power switch to OFF. LED on PSF in slot 24
should turn orange.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

10 Unseat the A-side PSF located in slot 24.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

11 Are errors displayed on test set(s)?

If yes, go to Step 12.
If no, go to Step 14.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

12 Refer to 1678 MCC Maintenance and Trouble-Clearing Guide to clear trouble then go to
Step 7.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

13 Seat the A-side PSF located in slot 24.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

14 At NGTRU step-up converter slot 1, set power switch to ON.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

15 Are the fans operating properly and do the test set(s) indicate error-free operation?
If yes, go to Step 16.
If no, go to Step 17.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

16 Refer to 1678 MCC Maintenance and Trouble-Clearing Guide to clear trouble then go to
Step 7.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

17 At NGTRU step-up converter slot 2, set power switch to OFF. LED on PSF in slot 25
should turn orange.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

18 Unseat the B-side PSF located in slot 25.

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
3AG 24622 EAAA TQZZA Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary 4-141
Issue 1 February 2010 Use pursuant to applicable agreements
System turn-up and testing Procedure 4-20: Verify shelf redundant power copy 0

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

19 Are the fans operating properly and do the test set(s) indicate error-free operation?
If yes, go to Step 20.
If no, go to Step 21.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

20 Refer to 1678 MCC Maintenance and Trouble-Clearing Guide to clear trouble then go to
Step 7.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

21 Seat the B-side PSF located in slot 25.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

22 At NGTRU step-up converter slot 2, set power switch to ON.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

23 Are the fans operating properly and do the test set(s) indicate error-free operation?
If no, go to Step 24.
If yes, go to Step 25.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

24 Refer to 1678 MCC Maintenance and Trouble-Clearing Guide to clear trouble then go to
Step 7.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

25 STOP. This procedure is complete.

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
4-142 Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary 3AG 24622 EAAA TQZZA
Use pursuant to applicable agreements Issue 1 February 2010
System turn-up and testing Procedure 4-20: Verify shelf redundant power copy 0

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Figure 4-20 NGTRU step-up converter front panel

STEP-UP CONVERTER
CONTROLS AND INDICATORS

OUTPUT VOLTAGE TEST POINTS

GREEN POWER LED
RED ALARM LED
POWER SWITCH

+ +

Vout Vout

SLOT 1 SLOT 2
678-0313-1
010507

E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
3AG 24622 EAAA TQZZA Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary 4-143
Issue 1 February 2010 Use pursuant to applicable agreements
System turn-up and testing Procedure 4-21: Verify clock and control switching

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Procedure 4-21: Verify clock and control switching

When to use
This procedure provides instructions to verify the following:
• Copy switching of redundant FLCs
• Clock subsystem switching for the shelf

General
For information on TL1 command syntax, refer to the 1678 MCC TL1 Command Guide.
The procedure to test the BITS clock outputs is written to test the primary outputs only. If
the secondary outputs are also provisioned, repeat the procedure a second time, testing the
secondary BITS clock output and substitute SEC for PRI throughout the procedure. If
only the secondary BITS clock outputs are provisioned, perform the procedure one time
testing the secondary BITS clock outputs and substitute SEC for PRI throughout the
procedure.
Use “Verify clock and control subsystem switching” (p. 4-384) for this procedure.

Before you begin

The test environment established in Procedure 4-17: “GBE error-free verification setup”
(p. 4-85) and Procedure 4-18: “OC-n error-free verification setup” (p. 4-124) must be
intact.

Task
Complete the following steps.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

1 Enter RTRV-ALM-ALL; to verify there are no alarms present.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

2 Do alarms exist that prevent testing FLCs?

If yes, then go to Step 3.
If no, verify in “Verify clock and control subsystem switching” (p. 4-384), go to Step 4.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

3 Clear all alarms that prevent testing, verify in “Verify clock and control subsystem
switching” (p. 4-384), then go to “Task” (p. 4-144). Refer to 1678 MCC Maintenance and
Trouble-Clearing Guide.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

4 Enter RTRV-COND-ALL; to verify there are no conditions present.

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
4-144 Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary 3AG 24622 EAAA TQZZA
Use pursuant to applicable agreements Issue 1 February 2010
System turn-up and testing Procedure 4-21: Verify clock and control switching

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

5 Do conditions exist that prevent testing?

If yes, then go to Step 6.
If no, verify in “Verify clock and control subsystem switching” (p. 4-384), go to Step 7.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

6 Clear all conditions that prevent testing, verify in “Verify clock and control subsystem
switching” (p. 4-384), then go to Step 4. Refer to 1678 MCC Maintenance and
Trouble-Clearing Guide.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

7 Is laptop connected to FLCCONGI, slot 20?

If yes, go to Step 9.
If no, go to Step 8.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

8 Logout of system, move PC interface cable to FLCCONGI and logon to system.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

9 Enter RD-SYNCN; to view current NE synchronization status.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

10 Is CLKREF=BITS-0?
If yes, go to Step 16.
If CLKREF=BITS-1, go to Step 11.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

11 Enter OPR-SYNCNSW:::::PRI; to switch to BITS-0.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

12 Enter RD-SYNCN; to view current NE synchronization status.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

13 Is CLKREF=BITS-0?
If yes, go to Step 16.
If no, go to Step 14.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

14 Refer to 1678 MCC Maintenance and Trouble-Clearing Guide to clear problem.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

15 Go to Step 9.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
3AG 24622 EAAA TQZZA Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary 4-145
Issue 1 February 2010 Use pursuant to applicable agreements
System turn-up and testing Procedure 4-21: Verify clock and control switching

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

16 Disconnect primary BITS cable on front of FLCSERVA in slot 1. See Figure 4-21, “FLC
Sync. Connectors” (p. 4-147).
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

17 Enter RD-SYNCN; to view current NE synchronization status.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

18 Is CLKMDE=NORMAL and CLKREF=BITS-1?

If yes, verify in “Verify clock and control subsystem switching” (p. 4-384), go to Step 21.
If no, go to Step 19.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

19 Refer to 1678 MCC Maintenance and Trouble-Clearing Guide to clear problem.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

20 Go to Step 17.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

21 Enter RTRV-COND-BITS;
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

22 Is LOS reported against BITS-0?

If yes, verify in “Verify clock and control subsystem switching” (p. 4-384), go to Step 25.
If no, go to Step 23.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

23 Refer to 1678 MCC Maintenance and Trouble-Clearing Guide to clear problem.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

24 Go to Step 17.

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
4-146 Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary 3AG 24622 EAAA TQZZA
Use pursuant to applicable agreements Issue 1 February 2010
System turn-up and testing Procedure 4-21: Verify clock and control switching

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Figure 4-21 FLC Sync. Connectors

FLCSERVA FLCCONGI
SLOT 1 SLOT 20
BITS 0 BITS 1

SYNC

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

25 Enter RTRV-DX-EQPT::ALL;
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

26 Is FLCCONGI active (ACT) and FLCSERVA standby hot (STBYH)?

If yes, go to Step 28.
If no, go to Step 27.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

27 Enter SW-DX-EQPT::AID;
where:
AID=FLC AID, either may be specified to cause an FLC switch.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

28 Enter RMV-EQPT::FLCSERVA-1-3-1;
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

29 Did logically removing FLCSERVA cause errors?

If yes, go to Step 30.
If no, verify in “Verify clock and control subsystem switching” (p. 4-384), go to Step 33.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

30 Refer to 1678 MCC Maintenance and Trouble-Clearing Guide to clear problem.

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
3AG 24622 EAAA TQZZA Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary 4-147
Issue 1 February 2010 Use pursuant to applicable agreements
System turn-up and testing Procedure 4-21: Verify clock and control switching

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

31 Enter RST-EQPT::FLCSERVA-1-3-1;
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

32 Go to Step 17.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

33 Unseat FLCSERVA in slot 1.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

34 Did unseating FLCSERVA cause errors?

If yes, go to Step 35.
If no, verify in “Verify clock and control subsystem switching” (p. 4-384), go to Step 39.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

35 Refer to 1678 MCC Maintenance and Trouble-Clearing Guide to clear problem.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

36 Seat FLCSERVA in slot 1.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

37 Enter RST-EQPT::FLCSERVA-1-3-1;
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

38 Go to Step 17.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

39 Seat FLCSERVA in slot 1.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

40 Did seating FLCSERVA cause errors?

If yes, go to Step 41.
If no, verify in “Verify clock and control subsystem switching” (p. 4-384), go to Step 44.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

41 Refer to 1678 MCC Maintenance and Trouble-Clearing Guide to clear problem.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

42 Enter RST-EQPT::FLCSERVA-1-3-1;
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

43 Go to Step 17.

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
4-148 Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary 3AG 24622 EAAA TQZZA
Use pursuant to applicable agreements Issue 1 February 2010
System turn-up and testing Procedure 4-21: Verify clock and control switching

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

44 Wait 15 minutes before continuing to the next step.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

45 Enter RST-EQPT::FLCSERVA-1-3-1;
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

46 Did logically restoring FLCSERVA cause errors?

If yes, go to Step 47.
If no, verify in “Verify clock and control subsystem switching” (p. 4-384), go to Step 49.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

47 Refer to 1678 MCC Maintenance and Trouble-Clearing Guide to clear problem.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

48 Go to Step 17.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

49 Reconnect primary BITS cable on front of FLCSERVA in slot 1.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

50 Enter RTRV-COND-BITS;
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

51 Did LOS condition against BITS-0 clear?

If yes, verify in “Verify clock and control subsystem switching” (p. 4-384), go to Step 53.
If no, go to Step 52.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

52 Refer to 1678 MCC Maintenance and Trouble-Clearing Guide to clear problem.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

53 Go to Step 17.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

54 Logout of system, move PC interface cable to FLCSERVA and logon to system.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

55 Disconnect primary BITS cable on front of FLCCONGI in slot 20. See Figure 4-21, “FLC
Sync. Connectors” (p. 4-147).
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

56 Enter RD-SYNCN; to view current NE synchronization status.

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
3AG 24622 EAAA TQZZA Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary 4-149
Issue 1 February 2010 Use pursuant to applicable agreements
System turn-up and testing Procedure 4-21: Verify clock and control switching

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

57 Is CLKMDE=NORMAL and CLKREF=BITS-0?

If yes, verify in “Verify clock and control subsystem switching” (p. 4-384), go to Step 60.
If no, go to Step 58.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

58 Refer to 1678 MCC Maintenance and Trouble-Clearing Guide to clear problem.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

59 Go to Step 56.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

60 Enter RTRV-COND-BITS;
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

61 Is LOS reported against BITS-1?

If yes, verify in “Verify clock and control subsystem switching” (p. 4-384), go to Step 64.
If no, go to Step 62.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

62 Refer to 1678 MCC Maintenance and Trouble-Clearing Guide to clear problem.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

63 Go to Step 56.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

64 Enter SW-DX-EQPT::AID;
where:
AID=FLC AID, either may be specified to cause an FLC switch.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

65 Did FLC switch cause errors?

If yes, go to Step 66.
If no, verify in “Verify clock and control subsystem switching” (p. 4-384), go to Step 68.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

66 Refer to 1678 MCC Maintenance and Trouble-Clearing Guide to clear problem.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

67 Go to Step 56.

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
4-150 Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary 3AG 24622 EAAA TQZZA
Use pursuant to applicable agreements Issue 1 February 2010
System turn-up and testing Procedure 4-21: Verify clock and control switching

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

68 Enter RTRV-DX-EQPT::ALL;
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

69 Is FLCSERVA active (ACT) and FLCCONGI standby hot (STBYH)?

If yes, go to Step 72.
If no, go to Step 70.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

70 Refer to 1678 MCC Maintenance and Trouble-Clearing Guide to clear problem.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

71 Go to Step 56.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

72 Enter RMV-EQPT::FLCCONGI-1-3-20;
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

73 Did logically removing FLCCONGI cause errors?

If yes, go to Step 74.
If no, verify in “Verify clock and control subsystem switching” (p. 4-384), go to Step 77.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

74 Refer to 1678 MCC Maintenance and Trouble-Clearing Guide to clear problem.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

75 Enter RST-EQPT::FLCCONGI-1-3-20;
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

76 Go to Step 56.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

77 Unseat FLCCONGI in slot 20.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

78 Did unseating FLCCONGI cause errors?

If yes, go to Step 79.
If no, verify in “Verify clock and control subsystem switching” (p. 4-384), go to Step 83.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

79 Refer to 1678 MCC Maintenance and Trouble-Clearing Guide to clear problem.

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
3AG 24622 EAAA TQZZA Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary 4-151
Issue 1 February 2010 Use pursuant to applicable agreements
System turn-up and testing Procedure 4-21: Verify clock and control switching

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

80 Seat FLCCONGI in slot 20.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

81 Enter RST-EQPT::FLCCONGI-1-3-20;
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

82 Go to Step 56.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

83 Seat FLCCONGI in slot 20.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

84 Did seating FLCCONGI cause errors?

If yes, go to Step 85.
If no, verify in “Verify clock and control subsystem switching” (p. 4-384), go to Step 88.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

85 Refer to 1678 MCC Maintenance and Trouble-Clearing Guide to clear problem.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

86 Enter RST-EQPT::FLCCONGI-1-3-20;
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

87 Go to Step 56.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

88 Wait 15 minutes before continuing to the next step.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

89 Enter RST-EQPT::FLCCONGI-1-3-20;
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

90 Did logically restoring FLCCONGI cause errors?

If yes, go to Step 91.
If no, verify in “Verify clock and control subsystem switching” (p. 4-384), go to Step 93.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

91 Refer to 1678 MCC Maintenance and Trouble-Clearing Guide to clear problem.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

92 Go to Step 56.

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
4-152 Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary 3AG 24622 EAAA TQZZA
Use pursuant to applicable agreements Issue 1 February 2010
System turn-up and testing Procedure 4-21: Verify clock and control switching

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

93 Reconnect primary BITS cable on front of FLCCONGI in slot 20.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

94 Enter RD-SYNCN; to view current NE synchronization status.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

95 Enter RTRV-COND-BITS;
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

96 Did LOS condition against BITS-1 clear?

If yes, verify in “Verify clock and control subsystem switching” (p. 4-384), go to Step 99.
If no, go to Step 97.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

97 Refer to 1678 MCC Maintenance and Trouble-Clearing Guide to clear problem.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

98 Go to Step 56.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

99 Verify Clock Outputs

Enter RTRV-SYNCN-OUT;
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

100 Is BITS clock output PRIOREFA or SECOREFA provisioned?

If yes, go to Step 101.
If no, go to Step 173.
The procedure to test the BITS clock outputs is written to test the primary outputs only. If
the secondary outputs are also provisioned, repeat the procedure a second time, testing the
secondary BITS clock output and substitute SEC for PRI throughout the procedure. If
only the secondary BITS clock outputs are provisioned, perform the procedure one time
testing the secondary BITS clock outputs and substitute SEC for PRI throughout the
procedure.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

101 Connect DS1 test set to BITS output at the patch panel that corresponds with FLCSERVA
in slot 1. See Figure 4-21, “FLC Sync. Connectors” (p. 4-147).
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

102 Connect DS1 test set to BITS output at the patch panel that corresponds with FLCCONGI
in slot 20. See Figure 4-21, “FLC Sync. Connectors” (p. 4-147).
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
3AG 24622 EAAA TQZZA Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary 4-153
Issue 1 February 2010 Use pursuant to applicable agreements
System turn-up and testing Procedure 4-21: Verify clock and control switching

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

103 Enter RTRV-BITS-OUT::ALL; to verify BITS output signal format.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

104 Configure test sets to match BITS output signal format.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

105 Enter RD-SYNCN; to view current NE synchronization status.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

106 Is CLKMDE=NORMAL?
If yes, verify in “Verify clock and control subsystem switching” (p. 4-384), go to Step 109
.
If no, go to Step 107.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

107 Refer to 1678 MCC Maintenance and Trouble-Clearing Guide to clear problem.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

108 Go to Step 105.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

109 Enter RD-SYNCN; to determine the selected BITS clock output.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

110 Is BITS clock output PRIOREFA selected?

If yes, go to Step 112.
If no, go to Step 111.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

111 Enter OPR-SYNCNSW-OUT:::::PRIO; to switch output to primary reference.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

112 Reset test sets.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

113 Are both test sets running error-free?

If yes, verify in “Verify clock and control subsystem switching” (p. 4-384), go to Step 116
.
If no, go to Step 114.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

114 Refer to 1678 MCC Maintenance and Trouble-Clearing Guide to clear problem.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
4-154 Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary 3AG 24622 EAAA TQZZA
Use pursuant to applicable agreements Issue 1 February 2010
System turn-up and testing Procedure 4-21: Verify clock and control switching

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

115 Go to Step 105.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

116 Enter RMV-EQPT::FLCCONGI-1-3-20;

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

117 Did logically removing FLCCONGI cause errors on test set connected to FLCSERVA?
If yes, go to Step 118.
If no, verify in “Verify clock and control subsystem switching” (p. 4-384), go to Step 121.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

118 Refer to 1678 MCC Maintenance and Trouble-Clearing Guide to clear problem.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

119 Enter RST-EQPT::FLCCONGI-1-3-20;

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

120 Go to Step 105.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

121 Unseat FLCCONGI in slot 20.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

122 Did unseating FLCCONGI cause errors on test set connected to FLCSERVA?
If yes, go to Step 123.
If no, verify in “Verify clock and control subsystem switching” (p. 4-384), go to Step 127.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

123 Refer to 1678 MCC Maintenance and Trouble-Clearing Guide to clear problem.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

124 Seat FLCCONGI in slot 20.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

125 Enter RST-EQPT::FLCCONGI-1-3-20;

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

126 Go to Step 105.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

127 Seat FLCCONGI in slot 20.

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
3AG 24622 EAAA TQZZA Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary 4-155
Issue 1 February 2010 Use pursuant to applicable agreements
System turn-up and testing Procedure 4-21: Verify clock and control switching

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

128 Did Seating FLCCONGI cause errors on test set connected to FLCSERVA?
If yes, go to Step 129.
If no, verify in “Verify clock and control subsystem switching” (p. 4-384), go to Step 132.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

129 Refer to 1678 MCC Maintenance and Trouble-Clearing Guide to clear problem.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

130 Enter RST-EQPT::FLCCONGI-1-3-20;

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

131 Go to Step 105.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

132 Wait 15 minutes before continuing to the next step.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

133 Enter RST-EQPT::FLCCONGI-1-3-20;

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

134 Did logically restoring FLCCONGI cause errors on test set connected to FLCSERVA?
If yes, go to Step 135.
If no, verify in “Verify clock and control subsystem switching” (p. 4-384), go to Step 137.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

135 Refer to 1678 MCC Maintenance and Trouble-Clearing Guide to clear problem.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

136 Go to Step 105.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

137 Is test set running error-free connected to FLCCONGI?

If yes, verify in “Verify clock and control subsystem switching” (p. 4-384), go to Step 140
.
If no, go to Step 138.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

138 Refer to 1678 MCC Maintenance and Trouble-Clearing Guide to clear problem.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

139 Go to Step 105.

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
4-156 Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary 3AG 24622 EAAA TQZZA
Use pursuant to applicable agreements Issue 1 February 2010
System turn-up and testing Procedure 4-21: Verify clock and control switching

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

140 Logout of system, move PC interface cable to FLCCONGI and logon to system.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

141 Reset test sets.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

142 Are test sets running error-free?

If yes, verify in “Verify clock and control subsystem switching” (p. 4-384), go to Step 145
.
If no, go to Step 143.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

143 Refer to 1678 MCC Maintenance and Trouble-Clearing Guide to clear problem.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

144 Go to Step 141.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

145 Enter RMV-EQPT::FLCSERVA-1-3-1;

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

146 Did logically removing FLCSERVA cause errors on test set connected to FLCCONGI?
If yes, go to Step 147.
If no, verify in “Verify clock and control subsystem switching” (p. 4-384), go to Step 150.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

147 Refer to 1678 MCC Maintenance and Trouble-Clearing Guide to clear problem.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

148 Enter RST-EQPT::FLCSERVA-1-3-1;

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

149 Go to Step 141.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

150 Unseat FLCSERVA in slot 1.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

151 Did unseating FLCSERVA cause errors on test set connected to FLCCONGI?
If yes, go to Step 152.
If no, verify in“Verify clock and control subsystem switching” (p. 4-384), go to Step 156.

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
3AG 24622 EAAA TQZZA Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary 4-157
Issue 1 February 2010 Use pursuant to applicable agreements
System turn-up and testing Procedure 4-21: Verify clock and control switching

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

152 Refer to 1678 MCC Maintenance and Trouble-Clearing Guide to clear problem.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

153 Seat FLCSERVA in slot 1.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

154 Enter RST-EQPT::FLCSERVA-1-3-1;

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

155 Go to Step 141.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

156 Seat FLCSERVA in slot 1.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

157 Did seating FLCSERVA cause errors on test set connected to FLCCONGI?
If yes, go to Step 158.
If no, verify in “Verify clock and control subsystem switching” (p. 4-384), go to Step 161.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

158 Refer to 1678 MCC Maintenance and Trouble-Clearing Guide to clear problem.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

159 Enter RST-EQPT::FLCSERVA-1-3-1;

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

160 Go to Step 141.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

161 Wait 15 minutes before continuing to the next step.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

162 Enter RST-EQPT::FLCSERVA-1-3-1;

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

163 Did logically restoring FLCSERVA cause errors on test set connected to FLCCONGI?
If yes, go to Step 164.
If no, verify in “Verify clock and control subsystem switching” (p. 4-384), go to Step 166.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

164 Refer to 1678 MCC Maintenance and Trouble-Clearing Guide to clear problem.

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
4-158 Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary 3AG 24622 EAAA TQZZA
Use pursuant to applicable agreements Issue 1 February 2010
System turn-up and testing Procedure 4-21: Verify clock and control switching

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

165 Go to Step 141.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

166 Is test set running error-free connected to FLCSERVA?

If yes, verify in “Verify clock and control subsystem switching” (p. 4-384), go to Step 169
.
If no, go to Step 167.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

167 Refer to 1678 MCC Maintenance and Trouble-Clearing Guide to clear problem.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

168 Go to Step 141.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

169 Are both BITS clock output PRIOREFA and SECOREFA provisioned?
If yes, go to Step 170.
If no, go to Step 173.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

170 Logout of system, move PC interface cable to FLCSERVA and logon to system.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

171 Go to Step 105 and repeat the procedure a second time, testing the secondary BITS clock
output and substitute SEC for PRI throughout the procedure.
After testing SECOREFA, go to Step 172.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

172 Enter RLS-SYNCNSW-OUT;

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

173 STOP. This procedure is complete.

E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
3AG 24622 EAAA TQZZA Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary 4-159
Issue 1 February 2010 Use pursuant to applicable agreements
System turn-up and testing Procedure 4-22: Verify OC-n protection switching (working
to protect)
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Procedure 4-22: Verify OC-n protection switching (working to

protect)
When to use
This procedure provides instructions to verify protection switching of OC-n facilities in
the working-to-protect direction.

General
For information on TL1 command syntax, refer to the 1678 MCC TL1 Command Guide.
Use “Verify OC-n protection switching (working to protect)” (p. 4-386) for this
procedure.

Before you begin

The test environment established in Procedure 4-18: “OC-n error-free verification setup”
(p. 4-124) must be intact.

Task
Complete the following steps.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

1 Enter RTRV-ALM-ALL; to verify there are no alarms present to prevent testing.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

2 Do alarms exist that prevent testing?

If yes, go to Step 3.
If no, go to Step 4.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

3 Clear all alarms that prevent testing then go to Step 4. Refer to 1678 MCC Maintenance
and Trouble-Clearing Guide.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

4 Enter RTRV-COND-ALL; to verify there are no conditions present to prevent testing.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

5 Do conditions exist that prevent testing?

If yes, go to Step 6.
If no, go to Step 7.

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
4-160 Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary 3AG 24622 EAAA TQZZA
Use pursuant to applicable agreements Issue 1 February 2010
System turn-up and testing Procedure 4-22: Verify OC-n protection switching (working
to protect)
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

6 Clear all conditions that prevent testing then go to Step 7. Refer to 1678 MCC
Maintenance and Trouble-Clearing Guide.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

7 NOTICE
Possibility of equipment damage.
The optical receiver on the test set could be damaged if excessive optical power levels are
applied to the receiver.
Make sure the optical signal is within the maximum operating range of the instrument
before applying signal to the optical input port.

Begin with first OCn module in shelf.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

8 Move test set and any attenuators from first RX and TX ports of first OCn module in
shelf to first RX and TX port of adjacent protect OCn module in shelf. See Figure 4-22,
“Fiber connections for OCn modules” (p. 4-162).
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

9 Connect fiber jumper and attenuator that was on working OCn module to RX and TX
ports of protect OCn module from which test set was removed. See Figure 4-22, “Fiber
connections for OCn modules” (p. 4-162).

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
3AG 24622 EAAA TQZZA Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary 4-161
Issue 1 February 2010 Use pursuant to applicable agreements
System turn-up and testing Procedure 4-22: Verify OC-n protection switching (working
to protect)
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Figure 4-22 Fiber connections for OCn modules

LGX PANEL
TX 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16

RX A
OCn
TEST C A C A C A C A C A C A C A C A
SET

TX A
RX 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16

FIBER CONNECTIONS ON LGX PANEL

ATTENUATION IS REQUIRED BETWEEN TX AND RX PORTS FOR

A CERTAIN TYPES OF SFPs AND XFPs. REFER TO SPECIFICATIONS.

C CROSS CONNECTION 678-0332-1

100507

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

10 Enter RTRV-OCn::AID; to retrieve information for first working facility on OCn

module.
where:
n=3 (for OC3),
12 (for OC12),
48 (forOC48), or
192 (for OC192)
AID=working OC-n facility AID
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

11 Enter OPR-PROTNSW-OCn::AID:::MAN; to perform a manual protection switch from

working to protect OC-n facility.
where:
n=3 (for OC3),
12 (for OC12),
48 (forOC48), or
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
4-162 Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary 3AG 24622 EAAA TQZZA
Use pursuant to applicable agreements Issue 1 February 2010
System turn-up and testing Procedure 4-22: Verify OC-n protection switching (working
to protect)
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
192 (for OC192)
AID=working OC-n facility AID
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

12 Enter RTRV-ALM-ALL; to retrieve current alarms.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

13 Enter RTRV-COND-ALL; to retrieve current conditions.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

14 Observe alarms and conditions. Is MANWKSWPR alarm declared against working

facility?
If yes, go to Step 17.
If no, go to Step 15.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

15 Refer to 1678 MCC Maintenance and Trouble-Clearing Guide to clear trouble.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

16 Is trouble cleared?
If yes, go to Step 11.
If no, go to Step 15.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

17 Reset test set error count to zero and monitor for 10 seconds.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

18 Does test set indicate that no errors occurred during monitoring period?
If yes, go to Step 21.
If no, go to Step 19.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

19 Refer to 1678 MCC Maintenance and Trouble-Clearing Guide to clear trouble.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

20 Is trouble cleared?
If yes, go to Step 21.
If no, go to Step 19.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

21 Have all OC-ns on working OCn module been switched to protect?

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
3AG 24622 EAAA TQZZA Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary 4-163
Issue 1 February 2010 Use pursuant to applicable agreements
System turn-up and testing Procedure 4-22: Verify OC-n protection switching (working
to protect)
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
If yes, record verification in “Verify OC-n protection switching (working to protect)”
(p. 4-386), then go to Step 22.
If no, go to Step 10 to switch next OC-n to protect.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

22 Enter RMV-EQPT::AID; to logically remove working OCn module that was made
STBYH by switching all facilities to protect.
where: AID=STBYH OCn module AID
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

23 Physically remove OCn module from the shelf. Refer to Procedure 4-33: “Module
mechanical removal or installation” (p. 4-229).
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

24 Reset test set error count to zero and monitor for 10 seconds.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

25 Does test set indicate that no errors occurred during monitoring period?
If yes, go to Step 28.
If no, go to Step 26.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

26 Refer to 1678 MCC Maintenance and Trouble-Clearing Guide to clear trouble.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

27 Is trouble cleared?
If yes, go to Step 28.
If no, go to Step 26.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

28 Physically install OCn module from the shelf. Refer to Procedure 4-33: “Module
mechanical removal or installation” (p. 4-229).
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

29 Enter RST-EQPT::AID; to restore working OCn module.

where: AID=OCn module AID
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

30 Have all OCn module mated pairs been tested?

If yes, go to Step 31.

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
4-164 Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary 3AG 24622 EAAA TQZZA
Use pursuant to applicable agreements Issue 1 February 2010
System turn-up and testing Procedure 4-22: Verify OC-n protection switching (working
to protect)
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
If no, go to Step 8 to perform working-to-protect switching for next OCn module mated
pair.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

31 STOP. This procedure is complete.

E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
3AG 24622 EAAA TQZZA Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary 4-165
Issue 1 February 2010 Use pursuant to applicable agreements
System turn-up and testing Procedure 4-23: Perform error-free verification test (copy
1)
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Procedure 4-23: Perform error-free verification test (copy 1)

When to use
This procedure provides instructions to force all traffic to the copy 1 matrix and perform
an error-free verification test with all traffic on the copy 1 matrix.

General
For information on TL1 command syntax, refer to the 1678 MCC TL1 Command Guide.
Refer to Chapter 5, “1678 Metro Core Connect addresses and locations” for rack, shelf,
and module locations.
Use “Record error-free verification test results (copy 1)” (p. 4-395) for this procedure.

Before you begin

The test environment established for GBE IOCs in Procedure 4-17: “GBE error-free
verification setup” (p. 4-85), 10GBE IOCs in Procedure 4-35: “10 GBE error-free
verification setup” (p. 4-237), and for OCn IOCs in Procedure 4-22: “Verify OC-n
protection switching (working to protect)” (p. 4-160) must be intact.

Task
Complete the following steps.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

1 Enter RTRV-ALM-ALL; to verify there are no alarms present to prevent testing.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

2 Do alarms exist?
If yes, go to Step 3.
If no, verify in “Record error-free verification test results (copy 1)” (p. 4-395), then go to
Step 1.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

3 Clear all alarms that prevent testing then go to Step 4. Refer to 1678 MCC Maintenance
and Trouble-Clearing Guide.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

4 Enter RTRV-COND-ALL; to verify there are no conditions present to prevent testing.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

5 Do conditions exist that prevent testing?

If yes, go to Step 6.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
4-166 Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary 3AG 24622 EAAA TQZZA
Use pursuant to applicable agreements Issue 1 February 2010
System turn-up and testing Procedure 4-23: Perform error-free verification test (copy
1)
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
If no, verify in “Record error-free verification test results (copy 1)” (p. 4-395), then go to
Step 7.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

6 Clear all alarms and conditions that prevent testing then go to Step 4. Refer to 1678 MCC
Maintenance and Trouble-Clearing Guide.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

7 Lock Traffic to Matrix Copy 1

Enter RTRV-DX-EQPT::MXab0GA-1-3-10 to retrieve equipment parameters of copy 0
and copy 1 matrix modules.
where:
ab=32 or 64 depending on equipped matrix type
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

8 Observe output. Is matrix in slot 11 IS,WRK and matrix in slot 10 IS,STBYH?

If yes, go to Step 22.
If no, go to Step 9.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

9 Enter SW-DX-EQPT::MXab0GA-1-3-10; to switch copy 1 matrix to active.

where:
ab=32 or 64 depending on equipped matrix type
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

10 Enter RTRV-ALM-ALL;
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

11 Is MISC-1 alarm standing?

If yes, go to Step 12.
If no, go to Step 13.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

12 Refer to 1678 MCC Maintenance and Trouble-Clearing Guide to clear MISC-1 alarm.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

13 Enter RTRV-EQPT::MXab0GA-1-3-10; to retrieve equipment parameters of copy 0 and

copy 1 matrix modules.
where:
ab=32 or 64 depending on equipped matrix type
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
3AG 24622 EAAA TQZZA Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary 4-167
Issue 1 February 2010 Use pursuant to applicable agreements
System turn-up and testing Procedure 4-23: Perform error-free verification test (copy
1)
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

14 Is matrix module in slot 10 IS,STBYH and matrix in slot 11 IS,WRK?

If yes, go to Step 22.
If no, go to Step 15.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

15 Refer to 1678 MCC Maintenance and Trouble-Clearing Guide to clear trouble.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

16 Is trouble cleared?
If yes, go to Step 17.
If no, go to Step 7.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

17 Enter INH-SWDX-EQPT::MXab0GA-1-3-11:; to inhibit switching of matrix copy 1.

where:
ab=32 or 64 depending on equipped matrix type
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

18 Enter RTRV-DX-EQPT::MXab0GA-1-3-11:; to retrieve active status of matrix in slot

11.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

19 Is matrix module in slot 11 active status MXab0GA-1-3-11?

If yes, go to Step 22.
If no, go to Step 20.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

20 Refer to 1678 MCC Maintenance and Trouble-Clearing Guide.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

21 Is trouble cleared?
If yes, go to Step 22.
If no, go to Step 7.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

22 Reset test set error count to zero.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

23 Monitor test set(s) for 15 minutes for error-free verification.

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
4-168 Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary 3AG 24622 EAAA TQZZA
Use pursuant to applicable agreements Issue 1 February 2010
System turn-up and testing Procedure 4-23: Perform error-free verification test (copy
1)
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

24 Are there errors?

If yes, go Step 25.
If no, record verification in“Record error-free verification test results (copy 1)”
(p. 4-395), then go to Step 26.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

25 Refer to 1678 MCC Maintenance and Trouble-Clearing Guide, then go to Step 22.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

26 Remove and Restore Copy 0 Matrix

Enter RMV-EQPT::MXab0GA-1-3-10:::FRCD; to logically remove matrix module in
slot 10.
where:
ab=32 or 64 depending on equipped matrix type
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

27 Did logical removal of matrix module cause errors on test set?

If yes, go Step 28.
If no, record verification in “Record error-free verification test results (copy 1)”
(p. 4-395), then go to Step 29.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

28 Refer to 1678 MCC Maintenance and Trouble-Clearing Guide, then go to Step 26.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

29 Physically unseat from backplane, matrix module in slot 10. Leave module in shelf.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

30 Did physical removal of matrix module cause errors on test set?

If yes, go Step 31.
If no, record verification in “Record error-free verification test results (copy 1)”
(p. 4-395), then go to Step 32.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

31 Refer to 1678 MCC Maintenance and Trouble-Clearing Guide to clear problem.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

32 Reseat matrix module into slot 10.

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
3AG 24622 EAAA TQZZA Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary 4-169
Issue 1 February 2010 Use pursuant to applicable agreements
System turn-up and testing Procedure 4-23: Perform error-free verification test (copy
1)
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

33 Did reseating matrix module cause errors on test set?

If yes, go Step 34.
If no, record verification in “Record error-free verification test results (copy 1)”
(p. 4-395), then go to Step 35.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

34 Refer to 1678 MCC Maintenance and Trouble-Clearing Guide, then go to Step 22.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

35 Enter RST-EQPT::MXab0GA-1-3-10; to logically restore matrix module in slot 10.

where:
ab=32 or 64 depending on equipped matrix type
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

36 Did logical restoration of matrix module cause errors on test set?

If yes, go Step 37.
If no, record verification in “Record error-free verification test results (copy 1)”
(p. 4-395), then go to Step 38.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

37 Refer to 1678 MCC Maintenance and Trouble-Clearing Guide, then go to Step 22.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

38 Enter ALW-SWDX-EQPT::MXab0GA-1-3-11:; to allow switching of matrix copy 1.

where:
ab=32 or 64 depending on equipped matrix type
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

39 STOP. This procedure is complete.

E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
4-170 Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary 3AG 24622 EAAA TQZZA
Use pursuant to applicable agreements Issue 1 February 2010
System turn-up and testing Procedure 4-24: Verify OC-n protection switching (protect
to working)
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Procedure 4-24: Verify OC-n protection switching (protect to

working)
When to use
This procedure provides instructions to verify protection switching of OC-n facilities in
the protect-to-working direction.

General
For information on TL1 command syntax, refer to the 1678 MCC TL1 Command Guide.
Use “Verify OC-n protection switching (protect to working)” (p. 4-396) for this
procedure.

Before you begin

The test environment established in Procedure 4-18: “OC-n error-free verification setup”
(p. 4-124) must be intact.

Task
Complete the following steps.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

1 Enter RTRV-ALM-ALL; to verify there are no alarms present to prevent testing.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

2 Do alarms exist that prevent testing?

If yes, go to Step 3.
If no, go to Step 4.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

3 Clear all alarms that prevent testing then go to Step 1. Refer to 1678 MCC Maintenance
and Trouble-Clearing Guide.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

4 Enter RTRV-COND-ALL; to verify there are no conditions present to prevent testing.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

5 Do conditions exist that prevent testing?

If yes, go to Step 6.
If no, go to Step 7.

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
3AG 24622 EAAA TQZZA Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary 4-171
Issue 1 February 2010 Use pursuant to applicable agreements
System turn-up and testing Procedure 4-24: Verify OC-n protection switching (protect
to working)
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

6 Clear all conditions that prevent testing then go to Step 4. Refer to 1678 MCC
Maintenance and Trouble-Clearing Guide.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

7 NOTICE
Possibility of equipment damage.
The optical receiver on the test set could be damaged if excessive optical power levels are
applied to the receiver.
Make sure the optical signal is within the maximum operating range of the instrument
before applying signal to the optical input port.

Begin with first OCn module in shelf.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

8 Move test set and any attenuators from first RX and TX ports of first protect OCn module
in shelf to first RX and TX port of mate working OCn module in shelf. See Figure 4-23,
“Fiber connections for OCn modules” (p. 4-173).
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

9 Connect fiber jumper that was on protect OCn module to RX and TX ports of working
OCn module from which test set was removed. See Figure 4-23, “Fiber connections for
OCn modules” (p. 4-173).

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
4-172 Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary 3AG 24622 EAAA TQZZA
Use pursuant to applicable agreements Issue 1 February 2010
System turn-up and testing Procedure 4-24: Verify OC-n protection switching (protect
to working)
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Figure 4-23 Fiber connections for OCn modules

LGX PANEL
TX 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16

RX A
OCn
TEST C A C A C A C A C A C A C A C A
SET

TX A
RX 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16

FIBER CONNECTIONS ON LGX PANEL

ATTENUATION IS REQUIRED BETWEEN TX AND RX PORTS FOR

A CERTAIN TYPES OF SFPs AND XFPs. REFER TO SPECIFICATIONS.

C CROSS CONNECTION 678-0332-1

100507

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

10 Enter RTRV-OCn::AID; to retrieve information for first working facility on OCn

module.
where:
n=3 (for OC3),
12 (for OC12),
48 (forOC48), or
192 (for OC192)
AID=working OC-n facility AID
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

11 Enter OPR-PROTNSW-OCn::AID:::MAN; to perform manual protection switch from

protect to working OC-n facility.
where:
n=3 (for OC3),
12 (for OC12),
48 (forOC48), or
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
3AG 24622 EAAA TQZZA Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary 4-173
Issue 1 February 2010 Use pursuant to applicable agreements
System turn-up and testing Procedure 4-24: Verify OC-n protection switching (protect
to working)
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
192 (for OC192)
AID=protecting OC-n facility AID
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

12 Enter RTRV-ALM-ALL; to retrieve current alarms.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

13 Enter RTRV-COND-ALL; to retrieve current conditions.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

14 Observe alarms and conditions. Is MANWKSWBK alarm declared against working OC-n
facility?
If yes, record verification in “Verify OC-n protection switching (protect to working)”
(p. 4-396), then go to Step 17.
If no, go to Step 15.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

15 Refer to 1678 MCC Maintenance and Trouble-Clearing Guide to clear trouble.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

16 Is trouble cleared?
If yes, go to Step 17.
If no, go to Step 15.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

17 Have all OC-ns on protect OCn module been switched back to working?
If yes, record verification in “Verify OC-n protection switching (protect to working)”
(p. 4-396), then go to Step 18.
If no, go to Step 10 to switch next OC-n back to working.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

18 Enter RMV-EQPT::AID; to logically remove protect OCn module that was made STBYH
by switching all facilities back to working.
where: AID=STBYH OCn module AID
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

19 Physically remove OCn module from the shelf. Refer to Procedure 4-33: “Module
mechanical removal or installation” (p. 4-229).
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

20 Reset test set error count to zero and monitor for 10 seconds.

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
4-174 Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary 3AG 24622 EAAA TQZZA
Use pursuant to applicable agreements Issue 1 February 2010
System turn-up and testing Procedure 4-24: Verify OC-n protection switching (protect
to working)
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

21 Does test set indicate that no errors occurred during monitoring period?
If yes, go to Step 24.
If no, go to Step 22.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

22 Refer to 1678 MCC Maintenance and Trouble-Clearing Guide to clear trouble.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

23 Is trouble cleared?
If yes, go to Step 24.
If no, go to Step 22.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

24 Physically install OCn module into the shelf. Refer to Procedure 4-33: “Module
mechanical removal or installation” (p. 4-229).
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

25 Enter RST-EQPT::AID; to restore protecting OCn module to in-service (IS) status.

where: AID=protecting OCn module AID
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

26 Enter RLS-PROTNSW-OCn::AID; to release protection switch for first OC-n facility on

protect OCn module.
where:
n=3 (for OC3),
12 (for OC12),
48 (forOC48), or
192 (for OC192)
AID=protecting OC-n facility AID
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

27 Have all facilities on protect OCn module been released from protection switch?
If yes, go to Step 28.
If no, go to Step 26.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

28 Have all OCn module mated pairs been tested?

If yes, go to Step 29.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
3AG 24622 EAAA TQZZA Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary 4-175
Issue 1 February 2010 Use pursuant to applicable agreements
System turn-up and testing Procedure 4-24: Verify OC-n protection switching (protect
to working)
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
If no, go to Step 8 to perform protect-to-working switching on next OCn module mated
pair.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

29 STOP. This procedure is complete.

E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
4-176 Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary 3AG 24622 EAAA TQZZA
Use pursuant to applicable agreements Issue 1 February 2010
System turn-up and testing Procedure 4-25: Provision and test ES64SC data path

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Procedure 4-25: Provision and test ES64SC data path

When to use
This procedure provides instructions to provision, for turn-up testing, Layer 2 (L2) data
functions as well as Layer 1 (L1) within the 1678 Metro Core Connect. Provisioning is
divided into L1 TDM components and L2 data components. L1 TDM components include
all physical interfaces (SONET and Ethernet) as well as TDM-based facility configuration
and matrix connections. L2 data components include data paths through the ES64SC L2
switch and data flow descriptors. See Figure 4-24, “ES64SC provisioning and test”
(p. 4-180).

General
L1 provisioning on the 1678 Metro Core Connect is accomplished using TL1 and
configures physical equipment and interfaces. L2 provisioning is accomplished using CLI
and configures the L2 data through the 1678 Metro Core Connect. L2 provisioning is
managed by the active L2 Switch (ES-64SC modules). CLI commands use the active IP
address of the ES64SC.
An ES64SC Logical Port must be configured as the ES64SC infrastructure over which a
virtual data container rides. The 1678 Metro Core Connect uses Virtual Container Groups
(VCGs) to encapsulate Ethernet data. These VCGs can be either defined on the ES64SC
(ESLPVCG), on the Gigabit Ethernet interface (GBEVCG), or on the 10 Gigabit Ethernet
interface (GBE10VCG). ES64SC VCGs must be associated with an ES64SC Logical Port
(ESLP). A total pool of 252 ESLPs are addressable as two separate groupings of 126
ESLPs each. Each grouping can be either DS3/STS1, STS3c, or STS12c.
Provisioning of the ES64SC is always done to the active ES64SC; the standby ES64SC
will assume the provisioning configured in the active. Creation of the Logical Port
(ESLP) on the ES64SC must always be done prior to creation of the Virtual Container
Group (VCG) on the ES64SC.
Each of the two groups is managed using TL1 using AIDs. The current 1678 Metro Core
Connect release provides a total of 252 ESLPs. Addressing for the two ESLP groupings is
as follows:
• The first grouping of ES64SC Logical Ports is numbered 1-126
• The second grouping of ES64SC Logical Ports is numbered 129-254
The 2-kW step-up converter supports systems with zero to four ES64SC modules. The
2.2-kW step-up converter supports all system configurations and is required in systems
with five or more ES64SC modules.
For detailed information on TL1 command syntax, refer to the 1678 MCC TL1 Command
Guide. For detailed information on CLI command syntax, refer to the 1678 MCC TL1
User Provisioning Guide Software Reference Guide.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
3AG 24622 EAAA TQZZA Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary 4-177
Issue 1 February 2010 Use pursuant to applicable agreements
System turn-up and testing Procedure 4-25: Provision and test ES64SC data path

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Use checklist “Provision and test L2 data path” (p. 4-405) for this procedure.

Required equipment
The following equipment is required for this procedure:
• GBE, 10 GBE, or OC-n test set depending on IOC modules used for test. OC-n test
set must support GFP.
• (2) 5-foot FC-to-SC Single Mode (SM) optic cable
• SC-SC Single Mode (SM) optic cable
• Single Mode and SC-to-SC looping plugs
• Attenuators, as appropriate for test set and power level of GBE, 10GBE or OCn
module output

Before you begin

This procedure assumes the test setup and provisioning following Procedure 4-18: “OC-n
error-free verification setup” (p. 4-124) and Procedure 4-19: “Perform error-free
verification test (copy 0)” (p. 4-134) remain intact.
This procedure requires the personnel performing the procedure has the user security
input parameter “CLICAL” set to level 4 or has a command user privilege level required
to execute the EDUSER-SECU command or that additional personnel is available to set
the “CLICAL” to level 4 for the personnel performing the procedure.

Task
Complete the following steps.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

1 Enter RTRV-USER-SECU; to verify the user security input parameter “CLICAL” level is
set to 4 for all personnel performing the procedure.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

2 Is “CLICAL” set to 4 for all personnel performing the procedure?

If yes, go to Step 4.
If no, go to Step 3.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

3 Enter ED-USER-SECU::UID::::CLICAL=4; to set all personnel CLICAL level to 4.

where:
UID=user identifier for personnel performing the procedure

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
4-178 Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary 3AG 24622 EAAA TQZZA
Use pursuant to applicable agreements Issue 1 February 2010
System turn-up and testing Procedure 4-25: Provision and test ES64SC data path

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

4 Enter RTRV-COND-ALL; to verify there are no conditions present on system.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

5 Do conditions exist?
If yes, go to Step 6.
If no, record verification in “Provision and test L2 data path” (p. 4-405), go to Step 7.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

6 Clear all conditions that can be cleared, then go to Step 10. Refer to 1678 MCC
Maintenance and Trouble-Clearing Guide.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

7 Enter RTRV-ALM-ALL; to verify there are no alarms present on system.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

8 Do alarms exist?
If yes, go to Step 9.
If no, record verification in “Provision and test L2 data path” (p. 4-405), then go to Step
10.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

9 Clear all alarms, then go to Step 10. Refer to 1678 MCC Maintenance and
Trouble-Clearing Guide.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

10 Enter RTRV-CRS::AID; to view existing cross-connections associated with IOC ports

required for ES64SC testing.
where:
AID=OCnSTS1 or VCGSTS1 AIDs
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

11 Do cross-connections exist associated with the IOC ports required for ES64SC testing?
If yes, go to Step 12.
If no, record verification in “Provision and test L2 data path” (p. 4-405), then go to Step
13.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

12 Enter DLT-CRS-STSn::FROM,TO:::CCT; to delete all cross-connections associated

with IOC ports required for ES64SC testing. After all cross-connections have been
deleted, record verification in “Provision and test L2 data path” (p. 4-405).
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
3AG 24622 EAAA TQZZA Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary 4-179
Issue 1 February 2010 Use pursuant to applicable agreements
System turn-up and testing Procedure 4-25: Provision and test ES64SC data path

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
where:
FROM=Origination OCnSTS1 or VCGSTS1 AIDs
TO=Destination OCnSTS1 or VCGSTS1 AIDs
CCT=1WAY or 2WAY
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

13 Use a fiber jumper and attenuator, if required, to connect Tx port 1 to Rx port of the IOC
selected for testing. See Figure 4-24, “ES64SC provisioning and test” (p. 4-180).
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

14 Connect test set Rx input to Tx port of last optical port. Use optical attenuator if
necessary. See Figure 4-24, “ES64SC provisioning and test” (p. 4-180).
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

15 Using fiber-optic cable, connect test set Tx output to Rx port of first optical port. See
Figure 4-24, “ES64SC provisioning and test” (p. 4-180). Use optical attenuator if
necessary. See Figure 4-24, “ES64SC provisioning and test” (p. 4-180).

Figure 4-24 ES64SC provisioning and test

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

16 After daisy-chain and test set connected, record verification in “Provision and test L2 data
path” (p. 4-405).
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
4-180 Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary 3AG 24622 EAAA TQZZA
Use pursuant to applicable agreements Issue 1 February 2010
System turn-up and testing Procedure 4-25: Provision and test ES64SC data path

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

17 Provision VCGs
Enter ENT-VCG::AID::::MAXMBR=x,VCGTYPE=STS1; to provision a VCG for every
Gb Ethernet facility on GBE or GBE10 module.
where:
AID=GBEVCG or GBE10VCG facility AID.
For example: GBEVCG-1-3-8-1&-2 or GBE10VCG-1-3-8-1-1,
&& ranging and & grouping allowed,
x=21 (for GBEVCG facility) or 192 (for GBE10VCG facility)
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

18 Provision ES64SC Logical Ports

Enter ENT-ESLP::AID::::ESLPTYPE=VCG; to enter logical port 1, ESLP, in the lower
numbered group of ports (1 through 126).
where:
AID=Access Identifier, example: ESLP-1-3-18-1.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

19 Enter ENT-ESLP::AID::::ESLPTYPE=VCG; to enter logical port 129, ESLP, in the

higher numbered group of ports (129 through 254).
where:
AID=Access Identifier, example: ESLP-1-3-18-129.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

20 Provision ES64SC VCGs

Enter ENT-VCG::AID::::MAXMBR=x,VCGTYPE=STS1,BIDISERVPROP=Y; to
provision first active ES64SC port. Port number must match port number used in Step 18.
Standby ES64SC is provisioned automatically.
where:
AID=Access Identifier, example: ESLPVCG-1-3-18-1,
x=21 (for GBEVCG facility) or 192 (for GBE10VCG facility)
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

21 Enter ENT-VCG::AID::::MAXMBR=x,VCGTYPE=STS1,BIDISERVPROP=Y; to
provision second active ES64SC port. Port number must match port number used in Step
19.
where:
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
3AG 24622 EAAA TQZZA Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary 4-181
Issue 1 February 2010 Use pursuant to applicable agreements
System turn-up and testing Procedure 4-25: Provision and test ES64SC data path

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
AID=Access Identifier, example: ESLPVCG-1-3-18-129
x=21 (for GBEVCG facility) or 192 (for GBE10VCG facility)
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

22 Activate Data Path

Enter CNTRL-VCPATH::AID::::PROVMBR=x; to activate the Gb Ethernet ports out of
the idle state. Port number must match port number used in Step 17. Standby ES64SC is
provisioned automatically.
where:
AID=GBEVCG or GBE10VCG port AID, example: GBEVCG-1-3-8-1&-2 or
GBE10VCG-1-3-8-1-1,
&& ranging and & grouping allowed
x=21 (for GBEVCG port) or 192 (for GBE10VCG port)
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

23 Enter CNTRL-VCPATH::AID::::PROVMBR=x; to activate data path between the

ES64SC and Gb Ethernet interfaces.
where:
AID=Access Identifier, example: ESLPVCG-1-3-8-1,
x=21 (for GBEVCG port) or 192 (for GBE10VCG port)
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

24 Enter CNTRL-VCPATH::AID::::PROVMBR=x; to activate second data path between the

ES64SC and Gb Ethernet interfaces.
where:
AID=Access Identifier, example: ESLPVCG-1-3-8-129,
x=21 (for GBEVCG port) or 192 (for GBE10VCG port)
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

25 Provision IOC to ES64SC Cross-Connections

Enter ENT-CRS-STS1::FROM,TO; to cross-connect first IOC port to ES64SC port.
where:
FROM=IOC AID, example GBESTS1-1-3-8-1-1&&-21 or
GBE10STS1-1-3-8-1-1-1&&-192,
&& ranging and & grouping allowed
TO=ES64SC logical port AID, example VCGSTS1-1-3-18-1&&-21

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
4-182 Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary 3AG 24622 EAAA TQZZA
Use pursuant to applicable agreements Issue 1 February 2010
System turn-up and testing Procedure 4-25: Provision and test ES64SC data path

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
&& ranging and & grouping allowed
Logical Ports used in cross-connect TL1 ESLP AIDs must match previously configured
ESLPs for VCGs.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

26 Enter ENT-CRS-STS1::FROM,TO; to cross-connect second IOC port to ES64SC port.

where:
FROM=IOC AID, example GBESTS1-1-3-8-2-1&&-21 or
GBE10STS1-1-3-8-1-1-1&&-192,
&& ranging and & grouping allowed,
TO=ES64SC logical port AID, example VCGSTS1-1-3-18-129-1&&-21
&& ranging and & grouping allowed
Logical Ports used in cross-connect TL1 ESLP AIDs must match previously configured
ESLPs for VCGs.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

27 L2 PROVISIONING USING CLI

Establish a CLI session to the active ES64SC. Enter ACT-CLI::AID;
where:
AID=active ES64SC
User must have sufficient permission level to perform L2 provisioning. For detailed
information on CLI permission levels, refer to the 1678 MCC TL1 User Provisioning
Guide Software Reference Guide.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

28 At Cli Mib ## prompt enter interface position pa remoteeth activate to

activate first logical port on ES64SC, same port number entered in Step 18.
where:
a=logical port number 1-126, 129-254 on ES64SC.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

29 At Cli Mib ## prompt enter interface position pa remoteeth activate to

activate second logical port on ES64SC, same port number entered in Step 19.
where:
a=logical port number 1-126, 129-254 on ES64SC.

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
3AG 24622 EAAA TQZZA Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary 4-183
Issue 1 February 2010 Use pursuant to applicable agreements
System turn-up and testing Procedure 4-25: Provision and test ES64SC data path

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

30 Enter
trafficdescriptor activate trafficdescriptor_userlabel
traffictype gua cir 1000000 pir 1000000 cbs 40000 pbs 40000 activate
and configure an Ethernet Transport Services (ETS) traffic descriptor associated with
same port number entered in Step 18.
where: trafficdescriptor_userlabel=User defined label with a string length less than or not
exceeding 29 characters. Example: p_2_2.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

31 Enter
trafficdescriptor activate trafficdescriptor_userlabel
traffictype gua cir 1000000 pir 1000000 cbs 40000 pbs 40000 activate
and configure an Ethernet Transport Services (ETS) traffic descriptor associated with
same port number entered in Step 19.
where:
trafficdescriptor_userlabel=User defined label with a string length less than or not
exceeding 29 characters. Example: p_2_2.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

32 Enter
etsflowunidir activate flow_userlabel port1 pa port2 pa
inflowclassifier vlan dontcare trafficdescriptor
trafficdescriptor_userlabel to make port to port connection on ES64SC for first
logical port used in Step 18.
where:
flow_userlabel=User defined label with a string length less than or not exceeding 29
characters. Example: con_2_2.
a=logical port number 1-126, 129-254 on ES64SC. For this test, from and to port
numbers are equal to create a loopback.
trafficdescriptor_userlabel=User defined label with a string length less than or not
exceeding 29 characters. Example: p_2_2.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

33 Enter
etsflowunidir activate flow_userlabel port1 pa port2 pa
inflowclassifier vlan dontcare trafficdescriptor
trafficdescriptor_userlabel to make port to port connection on ES64SC for first
logical port used in Step 19.
where:
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
4-184 Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary 3AG 24622 EAAA TQZZA
Use pursuant to applicable agreements Issue 1 February 2010
System turn-up and testing Procedure 4-25: Provision and test ES64SC data path

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
flow_userlabel=User defined label with a string length less than or not exceeding 29
characters. Example: con_2_2.
a=logical port number 1-126, 129-254 on ES64SC. For this test, from and to port
numbers are equal to create a loopback.
trafficdescriptor_userlabel=User defined label with a string length less than or not
exceeding 29 characters. Example: p_2_2.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

34 Enter interface showall to verify the state of all the ports. The Admin and
Operational status must be “Up”

ifIndex (#port) Type RateLimit ifSpeed AdminStat OperStat

----------------- ------------ --------- -------- --------- --------
9 (#1) gfp 0 1016064 Up Up
NOTE: (The admin and operational status must be "up")
17 (#2) gfp 0 0 Down Down
25 (#3) gfp 0 0 Down Down
33 (#4) gfp 0 0 Down Down
41 (#5) gfp 0 0 Down Down
49 (#6) gfp 0 0 Down Down
57 (#7) gfp 0 0 Down Down
65 (#8) gfp 0 0 Down Down
73 (#9) gfp 0 0 Down Down
81 (#10) gfp 0 0 Down Down
89 (#11) gfp 0 0 Down Down
97 (#12) gfp 0 0 Down Down
105 (#13) gfp 0 0 Down Down
113 (#14) gfp 0 0 Down Down
121 (#15) gfp 0 0 Down Down
129 (#16) gfp 0 0 Down Down
137 (#17) gfp 0 0 Down Down
145 (#18) gfp 0 0 Down Down
153 (#19) gfp 0 0 Down Down
161 (#20) gfp 0 0 Down Down
169 (#21) gfp 0 0 Down Down
177 (#22) gfp 0 0 Down Down
185 (#23) gfp 0 0 Down Down
193 (#24) gfp 0 0 Down Down
201 (#25) gfp 0 0 Down Down
209 (#26) gfp 0 0 Down Down
217 (#27) gfp 0 0 Down Down
225 (#28) gfp 0 0 Down Down
233 (#29) gfp 0 0 Down Down
241 (#30) gfp 0 0 Down Down
249 (#31) gfp 0 0 Down Down
257 (#32) gfp 0 0 Down Down
265 (#33) gfp 0 0 Down Down
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
3AG 24622 EAAA TQZZA Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary 4-185
Issue 1 February 2010 Use pursuant to applicable agreements
System turn-up and testing Procedure 4-25: Provision and test ES64SC data path

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
273 (#34) gfp 0 0 Down Down
281 (#35) gfp 0 0 Down Down
289 (#36) gfp 0 0 Down Down
297 (#37) gfp 0 0 Down Down
305 (#38) gfp 0 0 Down Down
313 (#39) gfp 0 0 Down Down
321 (#40) gfp 0 0 Down Down
329 (#41) gfp 0 0 Down Down
337 (#42) gfp 0 0 Down Down
345 (#43) gfp 0 0 Down Down
353 (#44) gfp 0 0 Down Down
361 (#45) gfp 0 0 Down Down
369 (#46) gfp 0 0 Down Down
377 (#47) gfp 0 0 Down Down
385 (#48) gfp 0 0 Down Down
393 (#49) gfp 0 0 Down Down
401 (#50) gfp 0 0 Down Down
409 (#51) gfp 0 0 Down Down
417 (#52) gfp 0 0 Down Down
425 (#53) gfp 0 0 Down Down
433 (#54) gfp 0 0 Down Down
441 (#55) gfp 0 0 Down Down
449 (#56) gfp 0 0 Down Down
457 (#57) gfp 0 0 Down Down
465 (#58) gfp 0 0 Down Down
473 (#59) gfp 0 0 Down Down
481 (#60) gfp 0 0 Down Down
489 (#61) gfp 0 0 Down Down
497 (#62) gfp 0 0 Down Down
505 (#63) gfp 0 0 Down Down
513 (#64) gfp 0 0 Down Down
521 (#65) gfp 0 0 Down Down
529 (#66) gfp 0 0 Down Down
537 (#67) gfp 0 0 Down Down
545 (#68) gfp 0 0 Down Down
553 (#69) gfp 0 0 Down Down
561 (#70) gfp 0 0 Down Down
569 (#71) gfp 0 0 Down Down
577 (#72) gfp 0 0 Down Down
585 (#73) gfp 0 0 Down Down
593 (#74) gfp 0 0 Down Down
601 (#75) gfp 0 0 Down Down
609 (#76) gfp 0 0 Down Down
617 (#77) gfp 0 0 Down Down
625 (#78) gfp 0 0 Down Down
633 (#79) gfp 0 0 Down Down
641 (#80) gfp 0 0 Down Down
649 (#81) gfp 0 0 Down Down
657 (#82) gfp 0 0 Down Down
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
4-186 Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary 3AG 24622 EAAA TQZZA
Use pursuant to applicable agreements Issue 1 February 2010
System turn-up and testing Procedure 4-25: Provision and test ES64SC data path

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
665 (#83) gfp 0 0 Down Down
673 (#84) gfp 0 0 Down Down
681 (#85) gfp 0 0 Down Down
689 (#86) gfp 0 0 Down Down
697 (#87) gfp 0 0 Down Down
705 (#88) gfp 0 0 Down Down
713 (#89) gfp 0 0 Down Down
721 (#90) gfp 0 0 Down Down
729 (#91) gfp 0 0 Down Down
737 (#92) gfp 0 0 Down Down
745 (#93) gfp 0 0 Down Down
753 (#94) gfp 0 0 Down Down
761 (#95) gfp 0 0 Down Down
769 (#96) gfp 0 0 Down Down
777 (#97) gfp 0 0 Down Down
785 (#98) gfp 0 0 Down Down
793 (#99) gfp 0 0 Down Down
801 (#100) gfp 0 0 Down Down
809 (#101) gfp 0 0 Down Down
817 (#102) gfp 0 0 Down Down
825 (#103) gfp 0 0 Down Down
833 (#104) gfp 0 0 Down Down
841 (#105) gfp 0 0 Down Down
849 (#106) gfp 0 0 Down Down
857 (#107) gfp 0 0 Down Down
865 (#108) gfp 0 0 Down Down
873 (#109) gfp 0 0 Down Down
881 (#110) gfp 0 0 Down Down
889 (#111) gfp 0 0 Down Down
897 (#112) gfp 0 0 Down Down
905 (#113) gfp 0 0 Down Down
913 (#114) gfp 0 0 Down Down
921 (#115) gfp 0 0 Down Down
929 (#116) gfp 0 0 Down Down
937 (#117) gfp 0 0 Down Down
945 (#118) gfp 0 0 Down Down
953 (#119) gfp 0 0 Down Down
961 (#120) gfp 0 0 Down Down
969 (#121) gfp 0 0 Down Down
977 (#122) gfp 0 0 Down Down
985 (#123) gfp 0 0 Down Down
993 (#124) gfp 0 0 Down Down
1001 (#125) gfp 0 0 Down Down
1009 (#126) gfp 0 0 Down Down
1017 (#127) gfp 0 0 Down Down
1025 (#128) gfp 0 0 Down Down
1033 (#129) gfp 0 1016064 Up Up
NOTE: (The admin and operational status must be "up")
1041 (#130) gfp 0 0 Down Down
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
3AG 24622 EAAA TQZZA Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary 4-187
Issue 1 February 2010 Use pursuant to applicable agreements
System turn-up and testing Procedure 4-25: Provision and test ES64SC data path

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1049 (#131) gfp 0 0 Down Down
1057 (#132) gfp 0 0 Down Down
1065 (#133) gfp 0 0 Down Down
1073 (#134) gfp 0 0 Down Down
1081 (#135) gfp 0 0 Down Down
1089 (#136) gfp 0 0 Down Down
1097 (#137) gfp 0 0 Down Down
1105 (#138) gfp 0 0 Down Down
1113 (#139) gfp 0 0 Down Down
1121 (#140) gfp 0 0 Down Down
1129 (#141) gfp 0 0 Down Down
1137 (#142) gfp 0 0 Down Down
1145 (#143) gfp 0 0 Down Down
1153 (#144) gfp 0 0 Down Down
1161 (#145) gfp 0 0 Down Down
1169 (#146) gfp 0 0 Down Down
1177 (#147) gfp 0 0 Down Down
1185 (#148) gfp 0 0 Down Down
1193 (#149) gfp 0 0 Down Down
1201 (#150) gfp 0 0 Down Down
1209 (#151) gfp 0 0 Down Down
1217 (#152) gfp 0 0 Down Down
1225 (#153) gfp 0 0 Down Down
1233 (#154) gfp 0 0 Down Down
1241 (#155) gfp 0 0 Down Down
1249 (#156) gfp 0 0 Down Down
1257 (#157) gfp 0 0 Down Down
1265 (#158) gfp 0 0 Down Down
1273 (#159) gfp 0 0 Down Down
1281 (#160) gfp 0 0 Down Down
1289 (#161) gfp 0 0 Down Down
1297 (#162) gfp 0 0 Down Down
1305 (#163) gfp 0 0 Down Down
1313 (#164) gfp 0 0 Down Down
1321 (#165) gfp 0 0 Down Down
1329 (#166) gfp 0 0 Down Down
1337 (#167) gfp 0 0 Down Down
1345 (#168) gfp 0 0 Down Down
1353 (#169) gfp 0 0 Down Down
1361 (#170) gfp 0 0 Down Down
1369 (#171) gfp 0 0 Down Down
1377 (#172) gfp 0 0 Down Down
1385 (#173) gfp 0 0 Down Down
1393 (#174) gfp 0 0 Down Down
1401 (#175) gfp 0 0 Down Down
1409 (#176) gfp 0 0 Down Down
1417 (#177) gfp 0 0 Down Down
1425 (#178) gfp 0 0 Down Down
1433 (#179) gfp 0 0 Down Down
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
4-188 Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary 3AG 24622 EAAA TQZZA
Use pursuant to applicable agreements Issue 1 February 2010
System turn-up and testing Procedure 4-25: Provision and test ES64SC data path

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1441 (#180) gfp 0 0 Down Down
1449 (#181) gfp 0 0 Down Down
1457 (#182) gfp 0 0 Down Down
1465 (#183) gfp 0 0 Down Down
1473 (#184) gfp 0 0 Down Down
1481 (#185) gfp 0 0 Down Down
1489 (#186) gfp 0 0 Down Down
1497 (#187) gfp 0 0 Down Down
1505 (#188) gfp 0 0 Down Down
1513 (#189) gfp 0 0 Down Down
1521 (#190) gfp 0 0 Down Down
1529 (#191) gfp 0 0 Down Down
1537 (#192) gfp 0 0 Down Down
1545 (#193) gfp 0 0 Down Down
1553 (#194) gfp 0 0 Down Down
1561 (#195) gfp 0 0 Down Down
1569 (#196) gfp 0 0 Down Down
1577 (#197) gfp 0 0 Down Down
1585 (#198) gfp 0 0 Down Down
1593 (#199) gfp 0 0 Down Down
1601 (#200) gfp 0 0 Down Down
1609 (#201) gfp 0 0 Down Down
1617 (#202) gfp 0 0 Down Down
1625 (#203) gfp 0 0 Down Down
1633 (#204) gfp 0 0 Down Down
1641 (#205) gfp 0 0 Down Down
1649 (#206) gfp 0 0 Down Down
1657 (#207) gfp 0 0 Down Down
1665 (#208) gfp 0 0 Down Down
1673 (#209) gfp 0 0 Down Down
1681 (#210) gfp 0 0 Down Down
1689 (#211) gfp 0 0 Down Down
1697 (#212) gfp 0 0 Down Down
1705 (#213) gfp 0 0 Down Down
1713 (#214) gfp 0 0 Down Down
1721 (#215) gfp 0 0 Down Down
1729 (#216) gfp 0 0 Down Down
1737 (#217) gfp 0 0 Down Down
1745 (#218) gfp 0 0 Down Down
1753 (#219) gfp 0 0 Down Down
1761 (#220) gfp 0 0 Down Down
1769 (#221) gfp 0 0 Down Down
1777 (#222) gfp 0 0 Down Down
1785 (#223) gfp 0 0 Down Down
1793 (#224) gfp 0 0 Down Down
1801 (#225) gfp 0 0 Down Down
1809 (#226) gfp 0 0 Down Down
1817 (#227) gfp 0 0 Down Down
1825 (#228) gfp 0 0 Down Down
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
3AG 24622 EAAA TQZZA Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary 4-189
Issue 1 February 2010 Use pursuant to applicable agreements
System turn-up and testing Procedure 4-25: Provision and test ES64SC data path

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1833 (#229) gfp 0 0 Down Down
1841 (#230) gfp 0 0 Down Down
1849 (#231) gfp 0 0 Down Down
1857 (#232) gfp 0 0 Down Down
1865 (#233) gfp 0 0 Down Down
1873 (#234) gfp 0 0 Down Down
1881 (#235) gfp 0 0 Down Down
1889 (#236) gfp 0 0 Down Down
1897 (#237) gfp 0 0 Down Down
1905 (#238) gfp 0 0 Down Down
1913 (#239) gfp 0 0 Down Down
1921 (#240) gfp 0 0 Down Down
1929 (#241) gfp 0 0 Down Down
1937 (#242) gfp 0 0 Down Down
1945 (#243) gfp 0 0 Down Down
1953 (#244) gfp 0 0 Down Down
1961 (#245) gfp 0 0 Down Down
1969 (#246) gfp 0 0 Down Down
1977 (#247) gfp 0 0 Down Down
1985 (#248) gfp 0 0 Down Down
1993 (#249) gfp 0 0 Down Down
2001 (#250) gfp 0 0 Down Down
2009 (#251) gfp 0 0 Down Down
2017 (#252) gfp 0 0 Down Down
2025 (#253) gfp 0 0 Down Down
2033 (#254) gfp 0 0 Down Down
2041 (#255) gfp 0 0 Down Down
2049 (#256) gfp 0 0 Down Down
268435465 (#1) ethernetCsmacd 0 1016064 Up Up
NOTE: (The admin and operational status must be "up")
268435473 (#2) ethernetCsmacd 0 0 Down Down
268435481 (#3) ethernetCsmacd 0 0 Down Down
268435489 (#4) ethernetCsmacd 0 0 Down Down
268435497 (#5) ethernetCsmacd 0 0 Down Down
268435505 (#6) ethernetCsmacd 0 0 Down Down
268435513 (#7) ethernetCsmacd 0 0 Down Down
268435521 (#8) ethernetCsmacd 0 0 Down Down
268435529 (#9) ethernetCsmacd 0 0 Down Down
268435537 (#10) ethernetCsmacd 0 0 Down Down
268435545 (#11) ethernetCsmacd 0 0 Down Down
268435553 (#12) ethernetCsmacd 0 0 Down Down
268435561 (#13) ethernetCsmacd 0 0 Down Down
268435569 (#14) ethernetCsmacd 0 0 Down Down
268435577 (#15) ethernetCsmacd 0 0 Down Down
268435585 (#16) ethernetCsmacd 0 0 Down Down
268435593 (#17) ethernetCsmacd 0 0 Down Down
268435601 (#18) ethernetCsmacd 0 0 Down Down
268435609 (#19) ethernetCsmacd 0 0 Down Down
268435617 (#20) ethernetCsmacd 0 0 Down Down
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
4-190 Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary 3AG 24622 EAAA TQZZA
Use pursuant to applicable agreements Issue 1 February 2010
System turn-up and testing Procedure 4-25: Provision and test ES64SC data path

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
268435625 (#21) ethernetCsmacd 0 0 Down Down
268435633 (#22) ethernetCsmacd 0 0 Down Down
268435641 (#23) ethernetCsmacd 0 0 Down Down
268435649 (#24) ethernetCsmacd 0 0 Down Down
268435657 (#25) ethernetCsmacd 0 0 Down Down
268435665 (#26) ethernetCsmacd 0 0 Down Down
268435673 (#27) ethernetCsmacd 0 0 Down Down
268435681 (#28) ethernetCsmacd 0 0 Down Down
268435689 (#29) ethernetCsmacd 0 0 Down Down
268435697 (#30) ethernetCsmacd 0 0 Down Down
268435705 (#31) ethernetCsmacd 0 0 Down Down
268435713 (#32) ethernetCsmacd 0 0 Down Down
268435721 (#33) ethernetCsmacd 0 0 Down Down
268435729 (#34) ethernetCsmacd 0 0 Down Down
268435737 (#35) ethernetCsmacd 0 0 Down Down
268435745 (#36) ethernetCsmacd 0 0 Down Down
268435753 (#37) ethernetCsmacd 0 0 Down Down
268435761 (#38) ethernetCsmacd 0 0 Down Down
268435769 (#39) ethernetCsmacd 0 0 Down Down
268435777 (#40) ethernetCsmacd 0 0 Down Down
268435785 (#41) ethernetCsmacd 0 0 Down Down
268435793 (#42) ethernetCsmacd 0 0 Down Down
268435801 (#43) ethernetCsmacd 0 0 Down Down
268435809 (#44) ethernetCsmacd 0 0 Down Down
268435817 (#45) ethernetCsmacd 0 0 Down Down
268435825 (#46) ethernetCsmacd 0 0 Down Down
268435833 (#47) ethernetCsmacd 0 0 Down Down
268435841 (#48) ethernetCsmacd 0 0 Down Down
268435849 (#49) ethernetCsmacd 0 0 Down Down
268435857 (#50) ethernetCsmacd 0 0 Down Down
268435865 (#51) ethernetCsmacd 0 0 Down Down
268435873 (#52) ethernetCsmacd 0 0 Down Down
268435881 (#53) ethernetCsmacd 0 0 Down Down
268435889 (#54) ethernetCsmacd 0 0 Down Down
268435897 (#55) ethernetCsmacd 0 0 Down Down
268435905 (#56) ethernetCsmacd 0 0 Down Down
268435913 (#57) ethernetCsmacd 0 0 Down Down
268435921 (#58) ethernetCsmacd 0 0 Down Down
268435929 (#59) ethernetCsmacd 0 0 Down Down
268435937 (#60) ethernetCsmacd 0 0 Down Down
268435945 (#61) ethernetCsmacd 0 0 Down Down
268435953 (#62) ethernetCsmacd 0 0 Down Down
268435961 (#63) ethernetCsmacd 0 0 Down Down
268435969 (#64) ethernetCsmacd 0 0 Down Down
268435977 (#65) ethernetCsmacd 0 0 Down Down
268435985 (#66) ethernetCsmacd 0 0 Down Down
268435993 (#67) ethernetCsmacd 0 0 Down Down
268436001 (#68) ethernetCsmacd 0 0 Down Down
268436009 (#69) ethernetCsmacd 0 0 Down Down
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
3AG 24622 EAAA TQZZA Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary 4-191
Issue 1 February 2010 Use pursuant to applicable agreements
System turn-up and testing Procedure 4-25: Provision and test ES64SC data path

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
268436017 (#70) ethernetCsmacd 0 0 Down Down
268436025 (#71) ethernetCsmacd 0 0 Down Down
268436033 (#72) ethernetCsmacd 0 0 Down Down
268436041 (#73) ethernetCsmacd 0 0 Down Down
268436049 (#74) ethernetCsmacd 0 0 Down Down
268436057 (#75) ethernetCsmacd 0 0 Down Down
268436065 (#76) ethernetCsmacd 0 0 Down Down
268436073 (#77) ethernetCsmacd 0 0 Down Down
268436081 (#78) ethernetCsmacd 0 0 Down Down
268436089 (#79) ethernetCsmacd 0 0 Down Down
268436097 (#80) ethernetCsmacd 0 0 Down Down
268436105 (#81) ethernetCsmacd 0 0 Down Down
268436113 (#82) ethernetCsmacd 0 0 Down Down
268436121 (#83) ethernetCsmacd 0 0 Down Down
268436129 (#84) ethernetCsmacd 0 0 Down Down
268436137 (#85) ethernetCsmacd 0 0 Down Down
268436145 (#86) ethernetCsmacd 0 0 Down Down
268436153 (#87) ethernetCsmacd 0 0 Down Down
268436161 (#88) ethernetCsmacd 0 0 Down Down
268436169 (#89) ethernetCsmacd 0 0 Down Down
268436177 (#90) ethernetCsmacd 0 0 Down Down
268436185 (#91) ethernetCsmacd 0 0 Down Down
268436193 (#92) ethernetCsmacd 0 0 Down Down
268436201 (#93) ethernetCsmacd 0 0 Down Down
268436209 (#94) ethernetCsmacd 0 0 Down Down
268436217 (#95) ethernetCsmacd 0 0 Down Down
268436225 (#96) ethernetCsmacd 0 0 Down Down
268436233 (#97) ethernetCsmacd 0 0 Down Down
268436241 (#98) ethernetCsmacd 0 0 Down Down
268436249 (#99) ethernetCsmacd 0 0 Down Down
268436257 (#100) ethernetCsmacd 0 0 Down Down
268436265 (#101) ethernetCsmacd 0 0 Down Down
268436273 (#102) ethernetCsmacd 0 0 Down Down
268436281 (#103) ethernetCsmacd 0 0 Down Down
268436289 (#104) ethernetCsmacd 0 0 Down Down
268436297 (#105) ethernetCsmacd 0 0 Down Down
268436305 (#106) ethernetCsmacd 0 0 Down Down
268436313 (#107) ethernetCsmacd 0 0 Down Down
268436321 (#108) ethernetCsmacd 0 0 Down Down
268436329 (#109) ethernetCsmacd 0 0 Down Down
268436337 (#110) ethernetCsmacd 0 0 Down Down
268436345 (#111) ethernetCsmacd 0 0 Down Down
268436353 (#112) ethernetCsmacd 0 0 Down Down
268436361 (#113) ethernetCsmacd 0 0 Down Down
268436369 (#114) ethernetCsmacd 0 0 Down Down
268436377 (#115) ethernetCsmacd 0 0 Down Down
268436385 (#116) ethernetCsmacd 0 0 Down Down
268436393 (#117) ethernetCsmacd 0 0 Down Down
268436401 (#118) ethernetCsmacd 0 0 Down Down
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
4-192 Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary 3AG 24622 EAAA TQZZA
Use pursuant to applicable agreements Issue 1 February 2010
System turn-up and testing Procedure 4-25: Provision and test ES64SC data path

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
268436409 (#119) ethernetCsmacd 0 0 Down Down
268436417 (#120) ethernetCsmacd 0 0 Down Down
268436425 (#121) ethernetCsmacd 0 0 Down Down
268436433 (#122) ethernetCsmacd 0 0 Down Down
268436441 (#123) ethernetCsmacd 0 0 Down Down
268436449 (#124) ethernetCsmacd 0 0 Down Down
268436457 (#125) ethernetCsmacd 0 0 Down Down
268436465 (#126) ethernetCsmacd 0 0 Down Down
268436473 (#127) ethernetCsmacd 0 0 Down Down
268436481 (#128) ethernetCsmacd 0 0 Down Down
268436489 (#129) ethernetCsmacd 0 1016064 Up Up
NOTE: (The admin and operational status must be "up")
268436497 (#130) ethernetCsmacd 0 0 Down Down
268436505 (#131) ethernetCsmacd 0 0 Down Down
268436513 (#132) ethernetCsmacd 0 0 Down Down
268436521 (#133) ethernetCsmacd 0 0 Down Down
268436529 (#134) ethernetCsmacd 0 0 Down Down
268436537 (#135) ethernetCsmacd 0 0 Down Down
268436545 (#136) ethernetCsmacd 0 0 Down Down
268436553 (#137) ethernetCsmacd 0 0 Down Down
268436561 (#138) ethernetCsmacd 0 0 Down Down
268436569 (#139) ethernetCsmacd 0 0 Down Down
268436577 (#140) ethernetCsmacd 0 0 Down Down
268436585 (#141) ethernetCsmacd 0 0 Down Down
268436593 (#142) ethernetCsmacd 0 0 Down Down
268436601 (#143) ethernetCsmacd 0 0 Down Down
268436609 (#144) ethernetCsmacd 0 0 Down Down
268436617 (#145) ethernetCsmacd 0 0 Down Down
268436625 (#146) ethernetCsmacd 0 0 Down Down
268436633 (#147) ethernetCsmacd 0 0 Down Down
268436641 (#148) ethernetCsmacd 0 0 Down Down
268436649 (#149) ethernetCsmacd 0 0 Down Down
268436657 (#150) ethernetCsmacd 0 0 Down Down
268436665 (#151) ethernetCsmacd 0 0 Down Down
268436673 (#152) ethernetCsmacd 0 0 Down Down
268436681 (#153) ethernetCsmacd 0 0 Down Down
268436689 (#154) ethernetCsmacd 0 0 Down Down
268436697 (#155) ethernetCsmacd 0 0 Down Down
268436705 (#156) ethernetCsmacd 0 0 Down Down
268436713 (#157) ethernetCsmacd 0 0 Down Down
268436721 (#158) ethernetCsmacd 0 0 Down Down
268436729 (#159) ethernetCsmacd 0 0 Down Down
268436737 (#160) ethernetCsmacd 0 0 Down Down
268436745 (#161) ethernetCsmacd 0 0 Down Down
268436753 (#162) ethernetCsmacd 0 0 Down Down
268436761 (#163) ethernetCsmacd 0 0 Down Down
268436769 (#164) ethernetCsmacd 0 0 Down Down
268436777 (#165) ethernetCsmacd 0 0 Down Down
268436785 (#166) ethernetCsmacd 0 0 Down Down
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
3AG 24622 EAAA TQZZA Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary 4-193
Issue 1 February 2010 Use pursuant to applicable agreements
System turn-up and testing Procedure 4-25: Provision and test ES64SC data path

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
268436793 (#167) ethernetCsmacd 0 0 Down Down
268436801 (#168) ethernetCsmacd 0 0 Down Down
268436809 (#169) ethernetCsmacd 0 0 Down Down
268436817 (#170) ethernetCsmacd 0 0 Down Down
268436825 (#171) ethernetCsmacd 0 0 Down Down
268436833 (#172) ethernetCsmacd 0 0 Down Down
268436841 (#173) ethernetCsmacd 0 0 Down Down
268436849 (#174) ethernetCsmacd 0 0 Down Down
268436857 (#175) ethernetCsmacd 0 0 Down Down
268436865 (#176) ethernetCsmacd 0 0 Down Down
268436873 (#177) ethernetCsmacd 0 0 Down Down
268436881 (#178) ethernetCsmacd 0 0 Down Down
268436889 (#179) ethernetCsmacd 0 0 Down Down
268436897 (#180) ethernetCsmacd 0 0 Down Down
268436905 (#181) ethernetCsmacd 0 0 Down Down
268436913 (#182) ethernetCsmacd 0 0 Down Down
268436921 (#183) ethernetCsmacd 0 0 Down Down
268436929 (#184) ethernetCsmacd 0 0 Down Down
268436937 (#185) ethernetCsmacd 0 0 Down Down
268436945 (#186) ethernetCsmacd 0 0 Down Down
268436953 (#187) ethernetCsmacd 0 0 Down Down
268436961 (#188) ethernetCsmacd 0 0 Down Down
268436969 (#189) ethernetCsmacd 0 0 Down Down
268436977 (#190) ethernetCsmacd 0 0 Down Down
268436985 (#191) ethernetCsmacd 0 0 Down Down
268436993 (#192) ethernetCsmacd 0 0 Down Down
268437001 (#193) ethernetCsmacd 0 0 Down Down
268437009 (#194) ethernetCsmacd 0 0 Down Down
268437017 (#195) ethernetCsmacd 0 0 Down Down
268437025 (#196) ethernetCsmacd 0 0 Down Down
268437033 (#197) ethernetCsmacd 0 0 Down Down
268437041 (#198) ethernetCsmacd 0 0 Down Down
268437049 (#199) ethernetCsmacd 0 0 Down Down
268437057 (#200) ethernetCsmacd 0 0 Down Down
268437065 (#201) ethernetCsmacd 0 0 Down Down
268437073 (#202) ethernetCsmacd 0 0 Down Down
268437081 (#203) ethernetCsmacd 0 0 Down Down
268437089 (#204) ethernetCsmacd 0 0 Down Down
268437097 (#205) ethernetCsmacd 0 0 Down Down
268437105 (#206) ethernetCsmacd 0 0 Down Down
268437113 (#207) ethernetCsmacd 0 0 Down Down
268437121 (#208) ethernetCsmacd 0 0 Down Down
268437129 (#209) ethernetCsmacd 0 0 Down Down
268437137 (#210) ethernetCsmacd 0 0 Down Down
268437145 (#211) ethernetCsmacd 0 0 Down Down
268437153 (#212) ethernetCsmacd 0 0 Down Down
268437161 (#213) ethernetCsmacd 0 0 Down Down
268437169 (#214) ethernetCsmacd 0 0 Down Down
268437177 (#215) ethernetCsmacd 0 0 Down Down
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
4-194 Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary 3AG 24622 EAAA TQZZA
Use pursuant to applicable agreements Issue 1 February 2010
System turn-up and testing Procedure 4-25: Provision and test ES64SC data path

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
268437185 (#216) ethernetCsmacd 0 0 Down Down
268437193 (#217) ethernetCsmacd 0 0 Down Down
268437201 (#218) ethernetCsmacd 0 0 Down Down
268437209 (#219) ethernetCsmacd 0 0 Down Down
268437217 (#220) ethernetCsmacd 0 0 Down Down
268437225 (#221) ethernetCsmacd 0 0 Down Down
268437233 (#222) ethernetCsmacd 0 0 Down Down
268437241 (#223) ethernetCsmacd 0 0 Down Down
268437249 (#224) ethernetCsmacd 0 0 Down Down
268437257 (#225) ethernetCsmacd 0 0 Down Down
268437265 (#226) ethernetCsmacd 0 0 Down Down
268437273 (#227) ethernetCsmacd 0 0 Down Down
268437281 (#228) ethernetCsmacd 0 0 Down Down
268437289 (#229) ethernetCsmacd 0 0 Down Down
268437297 (#230) ethernetCsmacd 0 0 Down Down
268437305 (#231) ethernetCsmacd 0 0 Down Down
268437313 (#232) ethernetCsmacd 0 0 Down Down
268437321 (#233) ethernetCsmacd 0 0 Down Down
268437329 (#234) ethernetCsmacd 0 0 Down Down
268437337 (#235) ethernetCsmacd 0 0 Down Down
268437345 (#236) ethernetCsmacd 0 0 Down Down
268437353 (#237) ethernetCsmacd 0 0 Down Down
268437361 (#238) ethernetCsmacd 0 0 Down Down
268437369 (#239) ethernetCsmacd 0 0 Down Down
268437377 (#240) ethernetCsmacd 0 0 Down Down
268437385 (#241) ethernetCsmacd 0 0 Down Down
268437393 (#242) ethernetCsmacd 0 0 Down Down
268437401 (#243) ethernetCsmacd 0 0 Down Down
268437409 (#244) ethernetCsmacd 0 0 Down Down
268437417 (#245) ethernetCsmacd 0 0 Down Down
268437425 (#246) ethernetCsmacd 0 0 Down Down
268437433 (#247) ethernetCsmacd 0 0 Down Down
268437441 (#248) ethernetCsmacd 0 0 Down Down
268437449 (#249) ethernetCsmacd 0 0 Down Down
268437457 (#250) ethernetCsmacd 0 0 Down Down
268437465 (#251) ethernetCsmacd 0 0 Down Down
268437473 (#252) ethernetCsmacd 0 0 Down Down
268437481 (#253) ethernetCsmacd 0 0 Down Down
268437489 (#254) ethernetCsmacd 0 0 Down Down
268437497 (#255) ethernetCsmacd 0 0 Down Down
268437505 (#256) ethernetCsmacd 0 0 Down Down

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

35 Enter etsflowunidir show to verify all provisioned flows.

========================================================================
Show XC Info of '.1.1.1': active
------------------------
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
3AG 24622 EAAA TQZZA Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary 4-195
Issue 1 February 2010 Use pursuant to applicable agreements
System turn-up and testing Procedure 4-25: Provision and test ES64SC data path

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
InFlow 'es64_test1': active, Type: unicastNoAutolearning
-------------------
Port ServiceType PolicingMode VlanPop
------------------------------ -------------- ------------ --------
p1 ethernet colorBlind disabled
TrafficDescriptor
------------------------------
es64_fl1
Flow Classifier Vlan MaxVlan Priority MaxPriority RowStatus
--------------- ---- ------- -------- ----------- -------------
.1.1 4097 0 dontCare pri000 active
OutFlow 'es64_test1': active
--------------------
Port ServerType VlanID VlanStack PriorityMode Priority
PriYellow
------- ------------- ------ ----------- ------------ -------- ---------
p1 ethernet N/A N/A N/A N/A
N/A
========================================================================
Show XC Info of '.2.2.2': active
------------------------
InFlow 'es64_test2': active, Type: unicastNoAutolearning
-------------------
Port ServiceType PolicingMode VlanPop
------------------------------ -------------- ------------ --------
p129 ethernet colorBlind disabled
TrafficDescriptor
------------------------------
es64_fl2
Flow Classifier Vlan MaxVlan Priority MaxPriority RowStatus
--------------- ---- ------- -------- ----------- -------------
.2.2 4097 0 dontCare pri000 active
OutFlow 'es64_test2': active
---------------
Port ServerType VlanID VlanStack PriorityMode Priority
PriYellow
-------- -------------- ------ ---------- ------------ -------- ---------
p129 ethernet N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

36 Enter etsflowunidir brief to verify an overview of all provisioned flows.

Label RowStatus inFlowServiceID

outFlowServerID
----------------------- ------------- ----------------- ----------------
es64_test1 active p1 p1
es64_test2 active p129 p129

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
4-196 Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary 3AG 24622 EAAA TQZZA
Use pursuant to applicable agreements Issue 1 February 2010
System turn-up and testing Procedure 4-25: Provision and test ES64SC data path

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

37 Enter alarmlist to verify there are no alarms on the system.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

38 Do alarms exist?
If yes, go to Step 39.
If no, go to Step 40.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

39 Clear all alarms, then go to Step 40.

Refer to 1678 MCC Maintenance and Trouble-Clearing Guide.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

40 Enter alarmsynth to verify the alarm synthesis.

Equipment Transmission Performance

Monitor
========================================================================
critical - - -
major - - -
minor - - -
warning - - -
indeterminate - - -
cleared - - -

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

41 Enter neinfo show to verify all ES64 information.

NE info of '1.1'.
--------------------
opticsIMExternalTime: 06-02-2008 21:51:49 (DD-MM-YYYY hh:mm:ss)
opticsIMSwUnitLabel: V05_03_260
tsdimSnmpAgtIpAddress: 172.22.71.150 ….IP of the active ES64
tsdimSnmpAgtIpMask: 255.255.255.255
opticsimEpsConfStatus: False (2)
opticsIMRemoteNeSlotId: 0

NE info - system of '0'.

---------------------------
sysDescr: V050326
sysObjectID: 1.3.6.1.4.1.637
sysUpTime: 0 days, 23:57:22 (hr:min:sec)
sysContact:
sysName: sysadm
sysLocation: I& V; @

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
3AG 24622 EAAA TQZZA Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary 4-197
Issue 1 February 2010 Use pursuant to applicable agreements
System turn-up and testing Procedure 4-25: Provision and test ES64SC data path

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
IP LAB
sysServices: 2

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

42 Enter logout, to end CLI session.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

43 Using TL1 interface, enter RTRV-CRS-STS1::ALL; to verify all cross-connections are

entered correctly.

CTAC-1678MCC-1 08-02-06 21:54:09

M P00171 COMPLD
"GBESTS1-1-3-8-1-1,VCGSTS1-1-3-18-1-1:2WAY::IS-NR"
"GBESTS1-1-3-8-1-2,VCGSTS1-1-3-18-1-2:2WAY::IS-NR"
"GBESTS1-1-3-8-1-3,VCGSTS1-1-3-18-1-3:2WAY::IS-NR"
"GBESTS1-1-3-8-1-4,VCGSTS1-1-3-18-1-4:2WAY::IS-NR"
"GBESTS1-1-3-8-1-5,VCGSTS1-1-3-18-1-5:2WAY::IS-NR"
"GBESTS1-1-3-8-1-6,VCGSTS1-1-3-18-1-6:2WAY::IS-NR"
"GBESTS1-1-3-8-1-7,VCGSTS1-1-3-18-1-7:2WAY::IS-NR"
"GBESTS1-1-3-8-1-8,VCGSTS1-1-3-18-1-8:2WAY::IS-NR"
"GBESTS1-1-3-8-1-9,VCGSTS1-1-3-18-1-9:2WAY::IS-NR"
"GBESTS1-1-3-8-1-10,VCGSTS1-1-3-18-1-10:2WAY::IS-NR"
"GBESTS1-1-3-8-1-11,VCGSTS1-1-3-18-1-11:2WAY::IS-NR"
"GBESTS1-1-3-8-1-12,VCGSTS1-1-3-18-1-12:2WAY::IS-NR"
"GBESTS1-1-3-8-1-13,VCGSTS1-1-3-18-1-13:2WAY::IS-NR"
"GBESTS1-1-3-8-1-14,VCGSTS1-1-3-18-1-14:2WAY::IS-NR"
"GBESTS1-1-3-8-1-15,VCGSTS1-1-3-18-1-15:2WAY::IS-NR"
"GBESTS1-1-3-8-1-16,VCGSTS1-1-3-18-1-16:2WAY::IS-NR"
"GBESTS1-1-3-8-1-17,VCGSTS1-1-3-18-1-17:2WAY::IS-NR"
"GBESTS1-1-3-8-1-18,VCGSTS1-1-3-18-1-18:2WAY::IS-NR"
"GBESTS1-1-3-8-1-19,VCGSTS1-1-3-18-1-19:2WAY::IS-NR"
"GBESTS1-1-3-8-1-20,VCGSTS1-1-3-18-1-20:2WAY::IS-NR"
"GBESTS1-1-3-8-1-21,VCGSTS1-1-3-18-1-21:2WAY::IS-NR"
"GBESTS1-1-3-8-2-1,VCGSTS1-1-3-18-129-1:2WAY::IS-NR"
"GBESTS1-1-3-8-2-2,VCGSTS1-1-3-18-129-2:2WAY::IS-NR"
"GBESTS1-1-3-8-2-3,VCGSTS1-1-3-18-129-3:2WAY::IS-NR"
"GBESTS1-1-3-8-2-4,VCGSTS1-1-3-18-129-4:2WAY::IS-NR"
"GBESTS1-1-3-8-2-5,VCGSTS1-1-3-18-129-5:2WAY::IS-NR"
"GBESTS1-1-3-8-2-6,VCGSTS1-1-3-18-129-6:2WAY::IS-NR"
"GBESTS1-1-3-8-2-7,VCGSTS1-1-3-18-129-7:2WAY::IS-NR"
"GBESTS1-1-3-8-2-8,VCGSTS1-1-3-18-129-8:2WAY::IS-NR"
"GBESTS1-1-3-8-2-9,VCGSTS1-1-3-18-129-9:2WAY::IS-NR"
"GBESTS1-1-3-8-2-10,VCGSTS1-1-3-18-129-10:2WAY::IS-NR"
"GBESTS1-1-3-8-2-11,VCGSTS1-1-3-18-129-11:2WAY::IS-NR"
"GBESTS1-1-3-8-2-12,VCGSTS1-1-3-18-129-12:2WAY::IS-NR"
"GBESTS1-1-3-8-2-13,VCGSTS1-1-3-18-129-13:2WAY::IS-NR"
"GBESTS1-1-3-8-2-14,VCGSTS1-1-3-18-129-14:2WAY::IS-NR"
"GBESTS1-1-3-8-2-15,VCGSTS1-1-3-18-129-15:2WAY::IS-NR"
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
4-198 Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary 3AG 24622 EAAA TQZZA
Use pursuant to applicable agreements Issue 1 February 2010
System turn-up and testing Procedure 4-25: Provision and test ES64SC data path

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
"GBESTS1-1-3-8-2-16,VCGSTS1-1-3-18-129-16:2WAY::IS-NR"
"GBESTS1-1-3-8-2-17,VCGSTS1-1-3-18-129-17:2WAY::IS-NR"
"GBESTS1-1-3-8-2-18,VCGSTS1-1-3-18-129-18:2WAY::IS-NR"
"GBESTS1-1-3-8-2-19,VCGSTS1-1-3-18-129-19:2WAY::IS-NR"
"GBESTS1-1-3-8-2-20,VCGSTS1-1-3-18-129-20:2WAY::IS-NR"
"GBESTS1-1-3-8-2-21,VCGSTS1-1-3-18-129-21:2WAY::IS-NR"
/* RTRV-CRS-STS1::ALL [P00171] (28) */

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

44 Are all cross-connections entered correctly?

If yes, go to Step 46.
If no, go to Step 45.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

45 Correct all cross-connections entered incorrectly, then go to Step 46.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

46 Enter RTRV-VCG::ALL; to verify all VCGs are entered correctly.

CTAC-1678MCC-1 08-02-06 21:54:29

M P00172 COMPLD
"GBEVCG-1-3-8-1::ACTMBR=21,LCASENABLE=N,MAXMBR=21,PROVMBR=21,
VCGTYPE=STS1,BIDISERVPROP=Y,TACC=N:IS-NR,SDEE& TRM;"
"GBEVCG-1-3-8-2::ACTMBR=21,LCASENABLE=N,MAXMBR=21,PROVMBR=21,
VCGTYPE=STS1,BIDISERVPROP=Y,TACC=N:IS-NR,SDEE& TRM;"
"ESLPVCG-1-3-18-1::ACTMBR=21,LCASENABLE=N,MAXMBR=21,PROVMBR=21,
VCGTYPE=STS1,BIDISERVPROP=Y,TACC=N:IS-NR,SDEE& TRM;"
"ESLPVCG-1-3-18-129::ACTMBR=21,LCASENABLE=N,MAXMBR=21,PROVMBR=21,
VCGTYPE=STS1,BIDISERVPROP=Y,TACC=N:IS-NR,SDEE& TRM;"

/* RTRV-VCG::ALL [P00172] (28) */

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

47 Are all VCGs entered correctly?

If yes, go to Step 49.
If no, go to Step 48.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

48 Correct all VCGs entered incorrectly, then go to Step 49.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

49 Testing ES-64-SC with GBEs or GBE10s?

If GBEs, go to Step 50.

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
3AG 24622 EAAA TQZZA Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary 4-199
Issue 1 February 2010 Use pursuant to applicable agreements
System turn-up and testing Procedure 4-25: Provision and test ES64SC data path

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
If GBE10s, go to Step 53.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

50 Enter RTRV-GBE::ALL; to verify all GBEs are entered correctly.

TAC-1678MCC-1 08-02-06 21:54:44

M P00173 COMPLD
"GBE-1-3-8-1::AINSTH=72-00,FLOWCONT=ASYMMETRIC-PAUSE,NEGOTN=AUTO:
IS-NR,SDEE& TRM;"
"GBE-1-3-8-2::AINSTH=72-00,FLOWCONT=ASYMMETRIC-PAUSE,NEGOTN=AUTO:
IS-NR,SDEE& TRM;"
/* RTRV-GBE::ALL [P00173] (28) */

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

51 Are all GBEs entered correctly?

If yes, go to Step 56.
If no, go to Step 52.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

52 Correct all GBEs entered incorrectly, then go to Step 56.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

53 Enter RTRV-GBE10::ALL; to verify all GBE10s are entered correctly.

CTAC-1678MCC-1 08-02-06 21:54:44

M P00173 COMPLD
"GBE10-1-3-8-1::AINSTH=72-00,FLOWCONT=ASYMMETRIC-PAUSE,
NEGOTN=DISABLED:IS-NR,SDEE& TRM;"
"GBE10-1-3-8-2::AINSTH=72-00,FLOWCONT=ASYMMETRIC-PAUSE,
NEGOTN=AUTO:IS-NR,SDEE& TRM;"
/* RTRV-GBE10::ALL [P00173] (28) */

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

54 Are all GBE10s entered correctly?

If yes, go to Step 56.
If no, go to Step 55.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

55 Correct all GBE10s entered incorrectly, then go to Step 56.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

56 Enter RTRV-ALM-ALL; to verify there are no alarms present on system.

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
4-200 Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary 3AG 24622 EAAA TQZZA
Use pursuant to applicable agreements Issue 1 February 2010
System turn-up and testing Procedure 4-25: Provision and test ES64SC data path

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

57 Do alarms exist?
If yes, go to Step 58.
If no, go to Step 59.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

58 Clear all alarms.

Refer to 1678 MCC Maintenance and Trouble-Clearing Guide.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

59 Enter RTRV-COND-ALL; to verify there are no conditions present on system.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

60 Do conditions exist?
If yes, go to Step 61.
If no, go to Step 62.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

61 Clear all conditions that can be cleared.

Refer to 1678 MCC Maintenance and Trouble-Clearing Guide.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

62 Is test set type GBE, GBE10 or OC-n?

If GBE, go to Step 63.
If GBE10, go to Step 70.
If OC-n, go to Step 77.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

63 GB Ethernet Test Set

Press RUN/STOP function key on test set to run test. GREEN=RUN, OFF=STOP.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

64 Ensure Gb Ethernet test set is set for auto negotiation. Options may be different
depending on test set model.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

65 Press RESULT function key to access Results window.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

66 Set Results and options as appropriate for Gb Ethernet signal monitoring. Options may be
different depending on test set model.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
3AG 24622 EAAA TQZZA Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary 4-201
Issue 1 February 2010 Use pursuant to applicable agreements
System turn-up and testing Procedure 4-25: Provision and test ES64SC data path

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

67 Reset test set error count to zero.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

68 Are there errors?

If yes, go Step 69.
If no, record verification in “Provision and test L2 data path” (p. 4-405), then go to Step
87.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

69 Refer to 1678 MCC Maintenance and Trouble-Clearing Guide, then go to Step 63.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

70 10 Gb Ethernet Test Set

Press RUN/STOP function key on test set to run test. GREEN=RUN, OFF=STOP.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

71 Set 10 Gb Ethernet test set options as appropriate for 10 Gb Ethernet signal testing.
Options may be different depending on test set model.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

72 Press RESULT function key to access Results window.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

73 Set Results and options as appropriate for 10 Gb Ethernet signal monitoring. Options may
be different depending on test set model.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

74 Reset test set error count to zero.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

75 Are there errors?

If yes, go Step 76.
If no, record verification in “Provision and test L2 data path” (p. 4-405), then go to Step
87.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

76 Refer to 1678 MCC Maintenance and Trouble-Clearing Guide, then go to Step 70.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

77 OC-n Test Set

Press RUN/STOP function key on OC-n test set to run test. GREEN=RUN, OFF=STOP.
Options may be different depending on test set model.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
4-202 Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary 3AG 24622 EAAA TQZZA
Use pursuant to applicable agreements Issue 1 February 2010
System turn-up and testing Procedure 4-25: Provision and test ES64SC data path

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

78 Press RESULT function key to access Results window. Options may be different
depending on test set model.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

79 Set Results=SONET RESULT. Options may be different depending on test set model.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

80 Select the following options for OC-n signal monitoring:

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

81 ERROR SUMMARY: to monitor error bits, optical power (reading power (dBm) minus
attenuation (dBm)), SPE pointer, and elapsed time.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

82 ALARM SECOND: to monitor signal alarm detection. Clear Alarm=0 :

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

83 FREQUENCYSet GATE=16s, to monitor OC-n signal frequency (2488.320 MHz) and

frequency offset. Options may be different depending on test set model.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

84 Reset test set error count to zero.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

85 Are there errors?

If yes, go Step 86.
If no, record verification in “Provision and test L2 data path” (p. 4-405), then go to Step
87.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

86 Refer to 1678 MCC Maintenance and Trouble-Clearing Guide, then go to Step 77.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

87 Enter RTRV-ALM-ALL; to verify there are no alarms present on system.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

88 Do alarms exist?
If yes, go to Step 89.
If no, go to Step 90.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

89 Clear all alarms, then go to Step 87.

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
3AG 24622 EAAA TQZZA Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary 4-203
Issue 1 February 2010 Use pursuant to applicable agreements
System turn-up and testing Procedure 4-25: Provision and test ES64SC data path

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Refer to 1678 MCC Maintenance and Trouble-Clearing Guide.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

90 Enter RTRV-COND-ALL; to verify there are no conditions present on system.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

91 Do conditions exist?
If yes, go to Step 92.
If no, go to Step 94.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

92 Clear all conditions that can be cleared, then go to Step 90.

Refer to 1678 MCC Maintenance and Trouble-Clearing Guide
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

93 Is test configuration for a single or a pair of ES64SCs?

If a single, record verification in “Provision and test L2 data path” (p. 4-405), then go to
Step 108.
If a pair, go to Step 94.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

94 SWITCH MATRIX AND ES64SC COPIES

Enter SW-DX-EQPT::AID; to switch L1 matrix copies.
where:
AID=MX640GA or MX320GA AID
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

95 Wait for test traffic to recover, then reset the test set.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

96 Does test set data recover and run error free following switch?
If yes, go to Step 98.
If no, go to Step 97.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

97 Refer to 1678 MCC Maintenance and Trouble-Clearing Guide to clear problem and go to
Step 94.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

98 Enter SW-DX-EQPT::AID; to switch L2 matrix copies.

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
4-204 Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary 3AG 24622 EAAA TQZZA
Use pursuant to applicable agreements Issue 1 February 2010
System turn-up and testing Procedure 4-25: Provision and test ES64SC data path

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
where:
AID=ES64SC AID
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

99 Wait for test traffic to recover, then reset the test set.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

100 Does test set data recover and run error free following switch?
If yes, go to Step 102.
If no, go to Step 101.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

101 Refer to 1678 MCC Maintenance and Trouble-Clearing Guide to clear problem.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

102 Enter RTRV-ALM-ALL; to verify there are no alarms present on system.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

103 Do alarms exist?

If yes, go to Step 104.
If no, record verification in “Provision and test L2 data path” (p. 4-405), then go to Step
105.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

104 Clear all alarms, then go to Step 105. Refer to 1678 MCC Maintenance and
Trouble-Clearing Guide.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

105 Enter RTRV-COND-ALL; to verify there are no conditions present on system.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

106 Do conditions exist?

If yes, go to Step 107.
If no, record verification in “Provision and test L2 data path” (p. 4-405), then go to Step
108.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

107 Clear all conditions that can be cleared. Refer to 1678 MCC Maintenance and
Trouble-Clearing Guide.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

108 Establish a CLI session to the active ES64SC. Enter ACT-CLI::AID;

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
3AG 24622 EAAA TQZZA Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary 4-205
Issue 1 February 2010 Use pursuant to applicable agreements
System turn-up and testing Procedure 4-25: Provision and test ES64SC data path

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
where:
AID=active ES64SC
User must have sufficient permission level to perform nerestart. For detailed information
on CLI permission levels, refer to the 1678 MCC TL1 User Provisioning Guide Software
Reference Guide.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

109 Enter nerestart TRDB to clean all CLI based ES64SC cross-connects.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

110 Enter logout, to end CLI session.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

111 Are there additional ES64SCs to be tested?

If yes, go to Step 4 to test additional ES64SCs.
If no, go to Step 112.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

112 STOP. This procedure is complete.

E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
4-206 Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary 3AG 24622 EAAA TQZZA
Use pursuant to applicable agreements Issue 1 February 2010
System turn-up and testing Procedure 4-26: Disconnect test equipment and test cables

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Procedure 4-26: Disconnect test equipment and test cables

When to use
This procedure provides instructions to disconnect all test equipment and test cables from
the system.

General
There is no checklist for this procedure.

Task
Complete the following steps.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

1 Disconnect test set(s) connected to IOC module(s). Replace protective cover on TX or

RX port on IOC module after each test set fiber is removed.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

2 Disconnect fiber-optic jumpers used for testing from IOC modules. Replace protective
cover on TX or RX port on IOC module after each jumper end is removed.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

3 STOP. This procedure is complete.

E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
3AG 24622 EAAA TQZZA Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary 4-207
Issue 1 February 2010 Use pursuant to applicable agreements
System turn-up and testing Procedure 4-27: Perform FTP restore of provisioning
database
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Procedure 4-27: Perform FTP restore of provisioning database

When to use
This procedure provides instructions to restore backed up provisioning data
(configuration files) from a remote FTP server to a 1678 Metro Core Connect.

General
The COPY-RFILE command is used to move database or software generic files from and
to different locations: disk storage on the NE or a Remote File Server (RFS).
The RESTORE-DB command copies the backup database stored on STDBY DB to the
primary backup database (ACT-DSK-DB) and resets the system to activate the new
database.
The INIT-SYS command resets the specified equipment entity or the entire NE.
Two database backups are available to restore. One without protection equipment
provisioned and one with protection equipment provisioned. Select the database backup
that best matches the final system configuration.
For information on TL1 command syntax, refer to the 1678 MCC TL1 Command Guide.
Refer to Chapter 5, “1678 Metro Core Connect addresses and locations” for rack, shelf,
and module locations.
Use “Database backup” (p. 4-294) for this procedure.

Before you begin

To perform this procedure the NE being restored must have IP-based access and the user
must be logged in to that node.

Task
Complete the following steps.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

1 Which database backup to restore?

• If backup without protection equipment provisioned, select first database backup.
• If backup with protection equipment provisioned, select second database backup.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

2 Enter COPY-RFILE::RFSDB,STBYDB::::LOCATION=a,CMDMDE=FRCD; to restore

saved provisioning database from FTP server.
where:

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
4-208 Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary 3AG 24622 EAAA TQZZA
Use pursuant to applicable agreements Issue 1 February 2010
System turn-up and testing Procedure 4-27: Perform FTP restore of provisioning
database
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
a=Source/destination url of the files on an RFS to be transferred. The syntax of the url is
as follows:
"ftp://<userid>:<password>@<ftphost>:<port>/<url-path>"
Other parameters are optional. If a value is not entered for these parameters, the system
will use the default value. Refer to 1678 MCC TL1 Command Guide for details on
parameter values.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

3 Wait for completion message.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

4 Enter RESTORE-DB::::::CMDMDE=FRCD; to activate newly restored provisioning

database.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

5 Wait for completion message and verify in “Database backup” (p. 4-294).
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

6 STOP. This procedure is complete.

E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
3AG 24622 EAAA TQZZA Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary 4-209
Issue 1 February 2010 Use pursuant to applicable agreements
System turn-up and testing Procedure 4-28: Verify alarm-free system

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Procedure 4-28: Verify alarm-free system

When to use
This procedure provides instructions to verify that the system is alarm free.

General
For information on TL1 command syntax, refer to the 1678 MCC TL1 Command Guide.
There is no checklist for this procedure.

Task
Complete the following steps.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

1 Enter RTRV-ALM-ALL; to verify there are no alarms present on system.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

2 Do alarms exist?
If yes, go to Step 3.
If no, go to Step 4.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

3 Clear all alarms, then go to Step 4. Refer to 1678 MCC Maintenance and
Trouble-Clearing Guide.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

4 Enter RTRV-COND-ALL; to verify there are no conditions present on system.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

5 Do conditions exist?
If yes, go to Step 6.
If no, go to Step 7.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

6 Clear all conditions that can be cleared, then go to Step 7. Refer to 1678 MCC
Maintenance and Trouble-Clearing Guide.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

7 STOP. This procedure is complete.

E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
4-210 Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary 3AG 24622 EAAA TQZZA
Use pursuant to applicable agreements Issue 1 February 2010
System turn-up and testing Procedure 4-29: Verify NGTRU rack lamp unit

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Procedure 4-29: Verify NGTRU rack lamp unit

When to use
This procedure provides instructions to test the operation of the NGTRU rack lamp unit.

General
Refer to 1678 MCC TL1 Command Guide for more information on commands and
command syntax.
This procedure sets the notification code for the LAN degrade condition type to Critical
(CRI). Disconnects associated LAN cable. Verifies proper reporting of the alarm at the
NGTRU rack lamp unit. Then tests the remaining four notification codes; Major (MAJ),
Minor (MIN), Not Alarmed (NA), and Not Reported (NR).
User should login to the system using RS-232 port to prevent disruption in
communication with the 1678 Metro Core Connect while the LAN cable is disconnected.
Use “Verify NGTRU rack lamp unit” (p. 4-408) for this procedure.

Task

NOTICE
ESD hazard
Plug-in modules contain electrostatic-sensitive devices. These devices can be damaged by
electrostatic discharge.
Refer to Introduction, Section “Electrostatic sensitive devices” (p. 1-17) for special
handling instructions.

NOTICE
Service-disruption hazard
Possibility of service interruption.
Use this procedure only for initial turn-up of a system. Never use this procedure on a
traffic-carrying system. ).

Complete the following steps.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

1 Connect PC to RS-232 port on FLCCONGI in slot 20 using RS-232 cable (PN

3AL89583AAAA).

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
3AG 24622 EAAA TQZZA Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary 4-211
Issue 1 February 2010 Use pursuant to applicable agreements
System turn-up and testing Procedure 4-29: Verify NGTRU rack lamp unit

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

2 Enter ACT-USER::UID:::PID;
where:
UID=User ID
PID=System password
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

3 Enter RTRV-ALM-ALL; to verify there are no alarms present.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

4 Do alarms exist that prevent testing?

If yes, go to Step 5.
If no, verify in “Verify NGTRU rack lamp unit” (p. 4-408), then go to Step 6.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

5 Clear all alarms that prevent testing then go to Step 3.

Refer to 1678 MCC Maintenance and Trouble-Clearing Guide to clear trouble.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

6 Enter RTRV-COND-ALL; to verify there are no conditions present.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

7 Do conditions exist that prevent testing?

If yes, go to Step 8.
If no, verify in “Verify NGTRU rack lamp unit” (p. 4-408), then go to Step 6.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

8 Clear all conditions that prevent testing then go to Step 9. Refer to 1678 MCC
Maintenance and Trouble-Clearing Guide to clear trouble.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

9 Enter RTRV-ATTR-EQPT::FLC; to retrieve current value.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

10 Observe output, record pre-test notification code value for LANDEGR condition type in
“Verify NGTRU rack lamp unit” (p. 4-408).
Test Critical Notification Code
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

11 Enter SET-ATTR-EQPT::FLC:::CR,LANDEGR; to set notification code value to

critical.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
4-212 Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary 3AG 24622 EAAA TQZZA
Use pursuant to applicable agreements Issue 1 February 2010
System turn-up and testing Procedure 4-29: Verify NGTRU rack lamp unit

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

12 Disconnect LAN cable.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

13 Observe NGTRU rack lamp unit LEDs. See Figure 4-25, “NGTRU rack lamp unit detail”
(p. 4-218).
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

14 Did CR alarm LED illuminate?

If yes, go to Step 18.
If no, troubleshoot problem. Connect LAN cable removed in Step 12.
Then go to Step 11.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

15 Connect LAN cable removed in Step 10.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

16 Observe NGTRU rack lamp unit LEDs

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

17 Did CR alarm LED extinguish?

If yes, go to Step 16.
If no, troubleshoot problem. Then go to Step 9.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

18 Verify results in “Verify NGTRU rack lamp unit” (p. 4-408).

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

19 Test Major Notification Code

Enter SET-ATTR-EQPT::FLC:::MJ,LANDEGR; to set notification code value to major.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

20 Disconnect LAN cable.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

21 Observe NGTRU rack lamp unit LEDs. See Figure 4-25, “NGTRU rack lamp unit detail”
(p. 4-218).
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

22 Did MJ alarm LED illuminate?

If yes, go to Step 26.
If no, troubleshoot problem. Connect LAN cable removed in Step 12.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
3AG 24622 EAAA TQZZA Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary 4-213
Issue 1 February 2010 Use pursuant to applicable agreements
System turn-up and testing Procedure 4-29: Verify NGTRU rack lamp unit

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Then go to Step 11.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

23 Connect LAN cable removed in Step 18.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

24 Observe NGTRU rack lamp unit LEDs

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

25 Did MJ alarm LED extinguish?

If yes, go to Step 24.
If no, troubleshoot problem. Then go to Step 9.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

26 Verify results in “Verify NGTRU rack lamp unit” (p. 4-408).

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

27 Test Minor Notification Code

Enter SET-ATTR-EQPT::FLC:::MN,LANDEGR; to set notification code value to minor.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

28 Disconnect LAN cable.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

29 Observe NGTRU rack lamp unit LEDs. See Figure 4-25, “NGTRU rack lamp unit detail”
(p. 4-218).
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

30 Did MN alarm LED illuminate?

If yes, go to Step 34.
If no, troubleshoot problem. Connect LAN cable removed in Step 12.
Then go to Step 11.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

31 Connect LAN cable removed in Step 26.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

32 Observe NGTRU rack lamp unit LEDs

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

33 Did MN alarm LED extinguish?

If yes, go to Step 32.

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
4-214 Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary 3AG 24622 EAAA TQZZA
Use pursuant to applicable agreements Issue 1 February 2010
System turn-up and testing Procedure 4-29: Verify NGTRU rack lamp unit

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
If no, troubleshoot problem. Then go to Step 9.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

34 Verify results in “Verify NGTRU rack lamp unit” (p. 4-408).

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

35 Test Not Alarmed Notification Code

Enter SET-ATTR-EQPT::FLC:::NA,LANDEGR; to set notification code value to not
alarmed.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

36 Disconnect LAN cable.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

37 Observe NGTRU rack lamp unit LEDs. See Figure 4-25, “NGTRU rack lamp unit detail”
(p. 4-218).
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

38 Did MN alarm LED extinguish?

If yes, go to Step 42.
If no, troubleshoot problem. Connect LAN cable removed in Step 12.
Then go to Step 11.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

39 Connect LAN cable removed in Step 34.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

40 Observe NGTRU rack lamp unit LEDs

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

41 Did all LEDs remain extinguish?

If yes, go to Step 40.
If no, troubleshoot problem. Then go to Step 9.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

42 Verify results in “Verify NGTRU rack lamp unit” (p. 4-408).

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

43 Test Not Reported Notification Code

Enter SET-ATTR-EQPT::FLC:::NR,LANDEGR; to set notification code value to not
reported.

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
3AG 24622 EAAA TQZZA Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary 4-215
Issue 1 February 2010 Use pursuant to applicable agreements
System turn-up and testing Procedure 4-29: Verify NGTRU rack lamp unit

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

44 Disconnect LAN cable.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

45 Observe NGTRU rack lamp unit LEDs. See Figure 4-25, “NGTRU rack lamp unit detail”
(p. 4-218).
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

46 Did all LEDs remain extinguish?

If yes, go to Step 47.
If no, troubleshoot problem. Connect LAN cable removed in Step 12.
Then go to Step 11.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

47 Connect LAN cable removed in Step 12.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

48 Observe NGTRU rack lamp unit LEDs. See Figure 4-25, “NGTRU rack lamp unit detail”
(p. 4-218).
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

49 Did all LEDs remain extinguish?

If yes, go to Step 50.
If no, troubleshoot problem. Then go to Step 11.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

50 Verify results in “Verify NGTRU rack lamp unit” (p. 4-408).

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

51 Restore Notification Code

Enter SET-ATTR-EQPT::FLC:::a,LANDEGR; to set notification code value to pre-test
value recorded in “Verify NGTRU rack lamp unit” (p. 4-408).
where:
a=CR, MJ, MN, NA, or NR (value recorded in Step 10)
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

52 Enter RTRV-ATTR-EQPT::FLC:::a,LANDEGR; to retrieve current value.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

53 Observe output.

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
4-216 Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary 3AG 24622 EAAA TQZZA
Use pursuant to applicable agreements Issue 1 February 2010
System turn-up and testing Procedure 4-29: Verify NGTRU rack lamp unit

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

54 Did returned value match the value recorded in Step 10?

If yes, go to Step 55.
If no, repeat Step 51 through Step 54.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

55 Record post-test notification code value for LANDEGR condition type in “Verify
NGTRU rack lamp unit” (p. 4-408)
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

56 STOP. This procedure is complete.

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
3AG 24622 EAAA TQZZA Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary 4-217
Issue 1 February 2010 Use pursuant to applicable agreements
System turn-up and testing Procedure 4-29: Verify NGTRU rack lamp unit

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Figure 4-25 NGTRU rack lamp unit detail

4
1
PWR
CRI
MIN

3 MAJ

LEGEND:

1 – Red Led: Indicates the presence of a critical alarm (CRI)

2 – Red Led: Indicates the presence of a major alarm (MAJ)

3 – Yellow Led: Indicates the presence of a minor alarm (MIN)

4 – Green Led: Indicates the presence of the service call or service battery (PWR)

678-0326-1
070905

E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
4-218 Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary 3AG 24622 EAAA TQZZA
Use pursuant to applicable agreements Issue 1 February 2010
System turn-up and testing Procedure 4-30: Verify shelf redundant power copy 1

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Procedure 4-30: Verify shelf redundant power copy 1

When to use
This procedure provides instructions to verify power supply redundancy for copy 1. This
procedure also provides instructions to verify that traffic remains stable in the event of a
power alarm.

General
Alcatel-Lucent provides expert Installation Services for system configurations outside the
scope of this manual. Contact Alcatel-Lucent at 1-888-252-2832 for details.
Use “Verify shelf redundant power copy 1” (p. 4-409) for this procedure.

Before you begin

The test environment established in Procedure 4-23: “Perform error-free verification test
(copy 1)” (p. 4-166) must be intact.
All circuit breakers and step-up converter power switches must be set to ON.

Task

DANGER
Possibility of personal injury.
Hazardous electrical potentials are present. Severe arcing is possible and can cause
burns or eye injury.
Remove rings, watches, and other metal jewelry when working with primary circuits.
Exercise caution to avoid shorting power input terminals.

NOTICE
ESD hazard
Plug-in modules contain electrostatic-sensitive devices. These devices can be damaged by
electrostatic discharge.
Refer to Introduction, Section “Electrostatic sensitive devices” (p. 1-17) for special
handling instructions.

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
3AG 24622 EAAA TQZZA Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary 4-219
Issue 1 February 2010 Use pursuant to applicable agreements
System turn-up and testing Procedure 4-30: Verify shelf redundant power copy 1

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
NOTICE
Service-disruption hazard
Possibility of service interruption.
Use this procedure only for initial turn-up of a system. Never use this procedure on a
traffic-carrying system. When working with a traffic-carrying system, refer to the 1678
MCC Maintenance and Trouble-Clearing Guide.

NOTICE
Service-disruption hazard
Possibility of service interruption. The procedure to verify shelf redundant power copy 1
should ONLY be performed during a scheduled maintenance window with the customer
present or per customer requirements. All work should be scheduled and agreed upon
with the customer in writing prior to beginning work on Procedure 4-30: “Verify shelf
redundant power copy 1” (p. 4-219).
Complete the following steps.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

1 Enter RTRV-ALM-ALL; to verify there are no alarms present.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

2 Do alarms exist that prevent testing?

If yes, go to Step 3.
If no, verify in “Verify shelf redundant power copy 1” (p. 4-409), then go to Step 4.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

3 Clear all alarms that prevent testing then go to Step 1.

Refer to 1678 MCC Maintenance and Trouble-Clearing Guide to clear trouble.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

4 Enter RTRV-COND-ALL; to verify there are no conditions present.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

5 Do conditions exist that prevent testing?

If yes, go to Step 6.
If no, verify in “Verify shelf redundant power copy 1” (p. 4-409), then go to Step 7.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

6 Clear all conditions that prevent testing then go to Step 4. Refer to 1678 MCC
Maintenance and Trouble-Clearing Guide to clear trouble.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
4-220 Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary 3AG 24622 EAAA TQZZA
Use pursuant to applicable agreements Issue 1 February 2010
System turn-up and testing Procedure 4-30: Verify shelf redundant power copy 1

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

7 At CO BDFB, verify both A and B power circuit breakers are set to ON.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

8 Verify both NGTRU step-up converter power switches are set to ON.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

9 At NGTRU step-up converter slot 1, set power switch to OFF. LED on PSF in slot 24
should turn orange.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

10 Unseat the A-side PSF located in slot 24.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

11 Are the fans operating properly and do the test set(s) indicate error-free operation?
If no, go to Step 12.
If yes, go to Step 13.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

12 Refer to 1678 MCC Maintenance and Trouble-Clearing Guide to clear trouble then go to
Step 7.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

13 Seat the A-side PSF located in slot 24.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

14 At NGTRU step-up converter slot 1, set power switch to ON.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

15 Are the fans operating properly and do the test set(s) indicate error-free operation?
If yes, go to Step 16.
If no, go to Step 17.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

16 Refer to 1678 MCC Maintenance and Trouble-Clearing Guide to clear trouble then go to
Step 7.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

17 At NGTRU step-up converter slot 2, set power switch to OFF. LED on PSF in slot 25
should turn orange.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

18 Unseat the B-side PSF located in slot 25.

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
3AG 24622 EAAA TQZZA Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary 4-221
Issue 1 February 2010 Use pursuant to applicable agreements
System turn-up and testing Procedure 4-30: Verify shelf redundant power copy 1

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

19 Are the fans operating properly and do the test set(s) indicate error-free operation?
If yes, go to Step 20.
If no, go to Step 21.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

20 Refer to 1678 MCC Maintenance and Trouble-Clearing Guide to clear trouble then go to
Step 7.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

21 Seat the B-side PSF located in slot 25.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

22 At NGTRU step-up converter slot 2, set power switch to ON.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

23 Are the fans operating properly and do the test set(s) indicate error-free operation?
If yes, go to Step 24.
If no, go to Step 25.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

24 Refer to 1678 MCC Maintenance and Trouble-Clearing Guide to clear trouble then go to
Step 7.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

25 STOP. This procedure is complete.

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
4-222 Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary 3AG 24622 EAAA TQZZA
Use pursuant to applicable agreements Issue 1 February 2010
System turn-up and testing Procedure 4-30: Verify shelf redundant power copy 1

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Figure 4-26 NGTRU step-up converter front panel

STEP-UP CONVERTER
CONTROLS AND INDICATORS

OUTPUT VOLTAGE TEST POINTS

GREEN POWER LED
RED ALARM LED
POWER SWITCH

+ +

Vout Vout

SLOT 1 SLOT 2
678-0313-1
010507

E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
3AG 24622 EAAA TQZZA Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary 4-223
Issue 1 February 2010 Use pursuant to applicable agreements
System turn-up and testing Procedure 4-31: Install or remove SFP drawer

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Procedure 4-31: Install or remove SFP drawer

When to use
This procedure provides instructions to install or remove an SFP drawer on an OC-48 I/O
card (IR1OC48, LR1OC48, LR2OC48, LR2OC48 (DWDM)), an OC-12 I/O card
(IR1OC12, LR1OC12, LR2OC12), an OC-3 I/O card (IR1OC3, LR10C3, LR2OC3), or
on a Gigabit Ethernet card (1000BSX, 1000BLX).

General
Refer to Chapter 5, “1678 Metro Core Connect addresses and locations” to determine
module location and address. For information on TL1 command syntax, refer to the 1678
MCC TL1 Command Guide

Recommended tools
• Extraction tool, PN 3AL81424AAAA
• Ground wrist straps with cord according to local office procedures.

Task

DANGER
Laser hazard
Laser infrared radiation is present when fiber-optic connector is open and optical
interface is installed. Laser infrared radiation is not visible to naked eye or with laser
safety glasses.
DO NOT LOOK INTO FIBER-OPTIC CONNECTORS. All optical ports must be
connected or capped with safety covers.

NOTICE
ESD hazard
Plug-in modules contain electrostatic-sensitive devices. These devices can be damaged by
electrostatic discharge.
Review local Electrostatic Discharge (ESD) procedures to prevent damage to modules.

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
4-224 Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary 3AG 24622 EAAA TQZZA
Use pursuant to applicable agreements Issue 1 February 2010
System turn-up and testing Procedure 4-31: Install or remove SFP drawer

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
NOTICE
Possibility of equipment damage.
Do not exceed 2.5 lbf.in (0.2065 lbf.ft) ± 10% torque when tightening screws that secure
module to shelf.

Complete the following steps.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

1 Select action.
To install SFP drawer, go to Step 2.
To remove SFP drawer, go to Step 6.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

2 Install SFP Drawer

Remove SFP drawer from ESS protective container.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

3 Place the SFP into the required slot on transponder module.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

4 Ensure that SFP drawer is firmly seated.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

5 Go to Step 12.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

6 Remove SFP Drawer

Ensure the extractor for the SFP, PN 3AL 81424 AAAA, is available. See Figure 4-27,
“SFP extraction tool” (p. 4-226).
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

7 Insert the extractor into the SFP to be removed.

The extractor locks into place when it is secure.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

8 Push the lever in on the left side of the extractor to unlock the SFP from the socket.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

9 Gently pull the SFP out of the slot.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

10 Remove the extractor from the removed SFP.

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
3AG 24622 EAAA TQZZA Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary 4-225
Issue 1 February 2010 Use pursuant to applicable agreements
System turn-up and testing Procedure 4-31: Install or remove SFP drawer

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

11 Place SFP into ESS protective container.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

12 STOP. This procedure is complete.

Figure 4-27 SFP extraction tool

MODULE
RELEASE
SLIDE

SFP RELEASE LEVER

678-0320-1
030507

E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
4-226 Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary 3AG 24622 EAAA TQZZA
Use pursuant to applicable agreements Issue 1 February 2010
System turn-up and testing Procedure 4-32: Install or remove XFP drawer

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Procedure 4-32: Install or remove XFP drawer

When to use
This procedure provides instructions to install or remove an XFP (SR1OC192,
IR2OC192, LR2OC192).

General
Refer to Chapter 5, “1678 Metro Core Connect addresses and locations” to determine
module location and address. For information on TL1 command syntax, refer to the 1678
MCC TL1 Command Guide.

Recommended tool
Ground wrist straps with cord according to local office procedures.

Task

DANGER
Laser hazard
Laser infrared radiation is present when fiber-optic connector is open and optical
interface is installed. Laser infrared radiation is not visible to naked eye or with laser
safety glasses.
DO NOT LOOK INTO FIBER-OPTIC CONNECTORS. All optical ports must be
connected or capped with safety covers.

NOTICE
ESD hazard
Plug-in modules contain electrostatic-sensitive devices. These devices can be damaged by
electrostatic discharge.
Review local Electrostatic Discharge (ESD) procedures to prevent damage to modules.

NOTICE
Possibility of equipment damage.
Do not exceed 2.5 lbf.in (0.2065 lbf.ft) ± 10% torque when tightening screws that secure
module to shelf.

Complete the following steps.

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
3AG 24622 EAAA TQZZA Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary 4-227
Issue 1 February 2010 Use pursuant to applicable agreements
System turn-up and testing Procedure 4-32: Install or remove XFP drawer

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

1 Select action.
To install XFP drawer, go to Step 2.
To remove XFP drawer, go to Step 6.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

2 Install XFP Drawer

Remove XFP drawer from ESS protective container.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

3 Place the XFP into the required slot on transponder module.

When the colored tab to the right moves to the right, the XFP locks into place.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

4 Ensure that SFP drawer is firmly seated.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

5 Go to Step 9.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

6 Remove XFP Drawer

On the XFP, grasp the colored tab to the right.
This unlocks the XFP from the slot.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

7 Gently extract the XFP from the slot.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

8 Place XFP into ESS protective container.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

9 STOP. This procedure is complete.

E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
4-228 Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary 3AG 24622 EAAA TQZZA
Use pursuant to applicable agreements Issue 1 February 2010
System turn-up and testing Procedure 4-33: Module mechanical removal or installation

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Procedure 4-33: Module mechanical removal or installation

When to use
This procedure provides instructions to remove and replace modules mechanically in the
1678 Metro Core Connect.

General
Refer to Chapter 5, “1678 Metro Core Connect addresses and locations” to determine
module location and address.

Before you begin

Module logical removal must be done first. This procedure addresses only mechanical
procedures.

Task

WARNING
Electric-shock hazard
Modules can be installed or removed with bay power on. Hazardous electrical potential
are present.
Use extreme care when installing or removing modules with power on.

NOTICE
Service-disruption hazard
Possibility of service interruption.
Do not remove an in-service (IS) module. Removing a module that is in the IS state causes
a hit to or a loss of traffic. Do applicable trouble clearing and logical replacement
procedures before proceeding with this procedure.

NOTICE
ESD hazard
Modules contain electrostatic-sensitive devices. These devices can be damaged by
electrostatic discharge.
Refer to Introduction, Section “Electrostatic sensitive devices” (p. 1-17) for special
handling instructions.

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
3AG 24622 EAAA TQZZA Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary 4-229
Issue 1 February 2010 Use pursuant to applicable agreements
System turn-up and testing Procedure 4-33: Module mechanical removal or installation

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
NOTICE
Possibility of equipment damage
Screw heads and threads can be damaged by improper alignment or overtightening.
Properly align and do not overtighten these screws. Only hand-tighten screws and never
use power screwdrivers.

Complete the following steps.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

1 Select action.
To remove module, go to Step 7.
To install module, go to Step 7.
Remove Module
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

2 Loosen the screws on the front of the module to be replaced.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

3 Unlock the top and bottom extraction tabs simultaneously by pulling the top tab up and
the bottom tap down.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

4 Slide the module from the slot.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

5 Place module into ESS protective container.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

6 Go to Step 11.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

7 Install Module
Remove module from ESS protective container.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

8 Slide the new module into the slot.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

9 Lock the extraction tabs simultaneously by pressing the top tab down and the bottom tap
up.

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
4-230 Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary 3AG 24622 EAAA TQZZA
Use pursuant to applicable agreements Issue 1 February 2010
System turn-up and testing Procedure 4-33: Module mechanical removal or installation

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

10 NOTICE
Possibility of equipment damage
Screw heads and threads can be damaged by improper alignment or overtightening.
Properly align and do not overtighten these screws. Only hand-tighten screws and never
use power screwdrivers.

Tighten the screws on the front of the new module.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

11 Return to the DLP requiring module removal or installation.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

12 STOP. This procedure is complete.

E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
3AG 24622 EAAA TQZZA Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary 4-231
Issue 1 February 2010 Use pursuant to applicable agreements
System turn-up and testing Procedure 4-34: Confirm cabling between 10GBE I/O and
LGX panel
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Procedure 4-34: Confirm cabling between 10GBE I/O and LGX

panel
When to use
This procedure provides instructions to confirm fiber-optic cabling between the system 10
Gigabit Ethernet (10GBE) I/O modules and the customer LGX panel.

General
For information on TL1 command syntax, refer to the 1678 MCC TL1 Command Guide.
Refer to Chapter 5, “1678 Metro Core Connect addresses and locations” for rack, shelf,
and module locations.
Use “Verify cabling between GBE IO and LGX panel” (p. 4-295) with this procedure.

Required equipment
The following equipment is required for this procedure:
• Test set capable of measuring Gigabit Ethernet
• Optical power meter with LC and SC adapters
• LC-to-SC adapter cables
• Multi-mode fiber optic cables
• Jumper cables compatible with LGX panel
• Optical attenuators (5 dB, 10 dB, 15 dB)

Before you begin

Module logical removal must be done first. This procedure addresses only mechanical
procedures.

Task

CAUTION
Laser hazard
Use of controls or adjustments or performance of procedures other than those specified
herein may result in hazardous radiation exposure.

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
4-232 Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary 3AG 24622 EAAA TQZZA
Use pursuant to applicable agreements Issue 1 February 2010
System turn-up and testing Procedure 4-34: Confirm cabling between 10GBE I/O and
LGX panel
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
NOTICE
Service-disruption hazard
Possibility of service interruption.
Use this procedure for initial turn-up of a system only. Never use this procedure on a
traffic-carrying system. When working with a traffic-carrying system, refer to the 1678
MCC Maintenance and Trouble-Clearing Guide.

Complete the following steps.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

1 Verify LGX to 10GBE Rx fiber-optic cable

Using a test fiber-optic cable, measure the optical power output of the 10 gigabit ethernet
test set TX port and record level in “Verify cabling between 10GBE I/O and LGX panel”
(p. 4-410).
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

2 Disconnect the LGX panel end fiber-optic cable for GBE10 facility and connect to 10
gigabit ethernet test set output.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

3 Connect module end of fiber-optic cable that runs between LGX panel and Rx port of
10GBE module to optical power meter. If necessary, use attenuation at test set end to
protect power meter.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

4 Is Rx fiber OK?
If yes, record results in “Verify cabling between 10GBE I/O and LGX panel” (p. 4-410),
then go to Step 5.
If no, clean fiber connections as explained in Procedure 4-16: “Clean fiber-optic
connectors” (p. 4-75) or replace defective fiber before proceeding.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

5 Remove Module

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
3AG 24622 EAAA TQZZA Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary 4-233
Issue 1 February 2010 Use pursuant to applicable agreements
System turn-up and testing Procedure 4-34: Confirm cabling between 10GBE I/O and
LGX panel
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Disconnect fiber from optical power meter and connect to 10GBE module Rx port. If
necessary, use attenuation at test set end to protect module input. Refer Table 4-9, “XFP
optical power specifications” (p. 4-234) for XFP specifications.

Table 4-9 XFP optical power specifications

Ethernet Optical interface Wavelength TX optical power RX sensitivity (dBm)
rate [nm] (dBm)
Min Max Min Max
10GBE 10GBase ER/EW 1550 -1 2 -14 -1
10GBase LR/LW 1310 -6 -1 -11 -1
10GBase SR/SW 850 -7.3 -1 -11.9 -9.9

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

6 Measure 10GBE Module Tx Output Across Fiber-Optic Cable at LGX Panel End
Connect module end of fiber-optic cable that runs between LGX panel and Tx port of
10GBE module.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

7 Disconnect the LGX panel end fiber-optic cable for GBE10 Tx facility and connect to
optical power meter. If necessary, use attenuation at protect power meter end. Refer to
Figure 4-28, “10GBE LGX panel receive fiber power measurement” (p. 4-235).

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
4-234 Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary 3AG 24622 EAAA TQZZA
Use pursuant to applicable agreements Issue 1 February 2010
System turn-up and testing Procedure 4-34: Confirm cabling between 10GBE I/O and
LGX panel
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Figure 4-28 10GBE LGX panel receive fiber power measurement

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

8 Enter ENT-GBE10::AID:::::IS,AINS; for GBE10 facility under test on a 10GBE

module.
Refer to “Verify cabling between 10GBE I/O and LGX panel” (p. 4-410) for provisioning
order.
where:
AID=access identifier of GBE10 facility.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

9 Is 10GBE module power level, including attenuator value, within minimum and
maximum specifications in table 133-A?
If yes, record results in “Verify cabling between 10GBE I/O and LGX panel” (p. 4-410),
then go to Step 12.
If no, go to Step 10.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

10 Clean fiber-optics and optical connectors (refer to Procedure 4-16: “Clean fiber-optic
connectors” (p. 4-75)0), and then retest connection. If connection still fails test, recheck
fiber-optic cable routing, replace faulty fiber-optic cable or 10GB XFP. Refer to the 1678
MCC Maintenance and Trouble-Clearing Guide.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
3AG 24622 EAAA TQZZA Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary 4-235
Issue 1 February 2010 Use pursuant to applicable agreements
System turn-up and testing Procedure 4-34: Confirm cabling between 10GBE I/O and
LGX panel
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

11 Go to Step 9 to retest connection.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

12 Disconnect fiber-optic cables from 10 gigabit ethernet test set then reconnect LGX Rx
panel connector.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

13 Disconnect fiber-optic cables from optical power meter then reconnect to LGX Tx panel
connector.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

14 Have all 10GBE ports been tested?

If yes, go to Step 15.
If no, go to Step 2.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

15 STOP. This procedure is complete.

E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
4-236 Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary 3AG 24622 EAAA TQZZA
Use pursuant to applicable agreements Issue 1 February 2010
System turn-up and testing Procedure 4-35: 10 GBE error-free verification setup

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Procedure 4-35: 10 GBE error-free verification setup

When to use
This procedure provides setup instructions for performing 10 Gigabit Ethernet (10 GBE)
error-free verification tests. Continuity is tested with physical connection (fiber and
jumpers) and cross-connections.

General
The procedure sets up the test parameters for 10 GBE optical signals.
The parameter setting instructions in this procedure show how to set up transmit and
receiver parameters separately. These settings, however, can be coupled for alternative
setup.
The optical receiver on the test set could be damaged if excessive optical power levels are
applied to the receiver. Make sure the optical signal is within the maximum operating
range of the instrument before applying signal to the optical input port.
To prevent damage to the test set receiver, attenuate the incoming signal before
connecting it to the test set. To determine the level of attenuation, measure the power
level of the 10GBE module output.
In addition, follow these precautions to ensure good, reliable, repeatable measurement:
• Use extreme care when handling all optical cables and connectors.
• Verify that the connector interfaces are clean before making any connections.
• Keep connectors and cable ends covered when not in use.
For instructions on cleaning and inspecting optical cables and interface connectors, refer
to Procedure 4-16: “Clean fiber-optic connectors” (p. 4-75).
For information on TL1 command syntax, refer to the 1678 MCC TL1 Command Guide.
Refer to Chapter 5, “1678 Metro Core Connect addresses and locations” for rack, shelf,
and module locations. In this procedure S=Slot, and P=Port.
Use “Verify 10GBE provisioning” (p. 4-412) for this procedure.

Required equipment
The following equipment is required for this procedure:
• Test set capable of measuring Gigabit Ethernet
• Fiber-optic power meter capable of measuring at wavelengths of 850 nm, 1310 nm,
and 1550 nm
• (2) 5-foot FC-to-SC Single Mode (SM) optic cable
• SC-SC Single Mode (SM) optic cable

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
3AG 24622 EAAA TQZZA Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary 4-237
Issue 1 February 2010 Use pursuant to applicable agreements
System turn-up and testing Procedure 4-35: 10 GBE error-free verification setup

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
• Single Mode and SC-to-SC looping plugs
• Multi-mode fiber optic cables
• Optical attenuators (5 dB, 10 dB, 15 dB)

Before you begin

All optical module IO ports are looped back at the LGX panel following test performed in
Procedure 4-34: “Confirm cabling between 10GBE I/O and LGX panel” (p. 4-232).

Task
Complete the following steps.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

1 Verify all 10GBE module IO ports are fibered to LGX panel following tests performed in
Procedure 4-34: “Confirm cabling between 10GBE I/O and LGX panel” (p. 4-232).
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

2 Enter RTRV-ALM-ALL; to verify there are no alarms present to prevent testing.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

3 Do alarms exist that prevent testing?

If yes, go to Step 4.
If no, go to Step 5.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

4 Clear all alarms that prevent testing then go to Step 5.

Refer to 1678 MCC Maintenance and Trouble-Clearing Guide.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

5 Enter RTRV-COND-ALL; to verify there are no conditions present to prevent testing.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

6 Do conditions exist that prevent testing?

If yes, go to Step 7.
If no, go to Step 8.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

7 Clear all conditions that prevent testing then go to Step 8. Refer to 1678 MCC
Maintenance and Trouble-Clearing Guide.

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
4-238 Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary 3AG 24622 EAAA TQZZA
Use pursuant to applicable agreements Issue 1 February 2010
System turn-up and testing Procedure 4-35: 10 GBE error-free verification setup

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

8 NOTICE
Receiver damage.
The optical receiver on the test set could be damaged if excessive optical power levels are
applied to the receiver.
Make sure the optical signal is within the maximum operating range of the instrument
before applying signal to the optical input port.

Daisy-Chain Compatible GBE10 Facilities

The following steps establish test setup for GBE10 facilities. A unique daisy-chain must
be created to test each GBE10 optical interface wavelength.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

9 Using a test fiber-optic cable, connect 10GBE test set input to first GBE10 facility LGX
panel Tx port. Use attenuation if required. See Figure 4-29, “10GBE LGX ports
jumpered” (p. 4-240). Refer to Table 4-10, “XFP optical power specifications” (p. 4-240).
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

10 Using a test fiber-optic cable, connect 10GBE test set output to first GBE10 facility LGX
panel Rx port. Use attenuation if required. See Figure 4-29, “10GBE LGX ports
jumpered” (p. 4-240). Refer to Table 4-10, “XFP optical power specifications” (p. 4-240).
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

11 Connect a fiber jumper from the second LGX panel GBE10 Tx port to the third GBE10
Rx port. Use attenuation if required. See Figure 4-29, “10GBE LGX ports jumpered”
(p. 4-240). Refer to Table 4-10, “XFP optical power specifications” (p. 4-240).
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

12 Connect a fiber jumper from the second LGX panel GBE10 Rx port to the third GBE10
Tx port. Use attenuation if required. See Figure 4-29, “10GBE LGX ports jumpered”
(p. 4-240). Refer to Table 4-10, “XFP optical power specifications” (p. 4-240).
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

13 Repeat Step 11 and Step 12 and connect fiber jumpers between every other LGX panel Tx
and Rx pair for all equipped GBE10 ports. See Figure 4-29, “10GBE LGX ports
jumpered” (p. 4-240). Refer to Table 4-10, “XFP optical power specifications” (p. 4-240).
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

14 Loop the last GBE10 facility LGX panel. Connect a fiber jumper from the last GBE10
facility LGX panel Tx port to the last GBE10 facility LGX panel Rx port. Use attenuation
if required. See Figure 4-29, “10GBE LGX ports jumpered” (p. 4-240).

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
3AG 24622 EAAA TQZZA Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary 4-239
Issue 1 February 2010 Use pursuant to applicable agreements
System turn-up and testing Procedure 4-35: 10 GBE error-free verification setup

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Refer to Table 4-10, “XFP optical power specifications” (p. 4-240).

Table 4-10 XFP optical power specifications

Ethernet rate Optical interface Wave- TX optical RX
length power (dBm) sensitivity
[nm] (dBm)
min max min max
10GBE 10GBase ER/EW 1550 -1 +2 -14 -1
10GBase LR/LW 1310 -6 -1 -11 -1
10GBase SR/SW 850 -7.3 -1 -11.9 -9.9

Figure 4-29 10GBE LGX ports jumpered

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

15 Enter ENT-VCG::AID::::MAXMBR=64,VCGTYPE=STS3C; to provision a VCG for

every GBE10 facility on 10GBE module.
Enter command for every 10GBE module in shelf.
Refer to “Verify 10GBE provisioning” (p. 4-412).
where:

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
4-240 Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary 3AG 24622 EAAA TQZZA
Use pursuant to applicable agreements Issue 1 February 2010
System turn-up and testing Procedure 4-35: 10 GBE error-free verification setup

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
AID=GBE10VCG facility AID, for example: GBE10VCG-1-3-9-2-1, && ranging and &
grouping allowed
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

16 Enter CNTRL-VCPATH::AID::::PROVMBR=64; to enable traffic through Virtual

Concatenation paths of addressed VCG.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

17 Have VCG been entered for all GBE10 ports on every working 10GBE module?
If yes, go to Step 18.
If no, go to Step 15.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

18 Create Cross-Connections
Enter ENT-CRS-STS3C::::FROM-1&&-64,TO-1&&-64:::2WAY; to establish
cross-connections on STS-3C facilities members 1 through 64 for each equipped GBE10
facility.
where:
FROM=GBE10 AID members 1 through 64
TO=GBE10 AID members 1 through 64
Example, to create cross-connections between 10GBE module resident in slot 7, port 1,
members 1 through 64 to 10GBE module in slot 7, port 2, members 1 through 64 enter:
ENT-CRS-STS3C::GBE10STS3C-1-3-7-1-1-1&&64,GBE10STS3C-1-3-7-2-1-
1&&64:::2WAY;
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

19 Repeat Step 18 until 2WAY connections have been made for all GBE10 facilities. See
Figure 4-30, “GBE10STS3C Cross-Connections” (p. 4-243). Table 4-12, “GBE10
STS-3C connections (shelf fully populated with 10GBEs)” (p. 4-244) lists all
cross-connections required for a shelf fully equipped with 10 GBE facilities.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

20 Press RUN/STOP function key on test set to run test. GREEN=RUN, OFF=STOP.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

21 Ensure 10 GBE test set is set for auto negotiation. Options may be different depending on
test set model.

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
3AG 24622 EAAA TQZZA Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary 4-241
Issue 1 February 2010 Use pursuant to applicable agreements
System turn-up and testing Procedure 4-35: 10 GBE error-free verification setup

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Set the frame size, TX frames, and percent traffic to the recommended test values
dependent upon frame size tested. Refer to Table 4-11, “10 GBE test set provisioning”
(p. 4-242).

Table 4-11 10 GBE test set provisioning

Frame size TX frames Percent traffic
64 100,000,000 93.940
128 100,000,000 99.759
256 100,000,000 98.852
512 100,000,000 96.378
1024 100,000,000 96.960

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

22 Press RESULT function key to access Results window.

Options may be different depending on test set model.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

23 Set Results and options as appropriate for 10 GBE signal monitoring.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

24 Reset test set error count to zero.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

25 Are there errors?

If yes, go Step 26.
If no, record verification in “Verify 10GBE provisioning” (p. 4-412), then go to Step 27.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

26 Refer to 1678 MCC Maintenance and Trouble-Clearing Guide, then go to Step 24.

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
4-242 Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary 3AG 24622 EAAA TQZZA
Use pursuant to applicable agreements Issue 1 February 2010
System turn-up and testing Procedure 4-35: 10 GBE error-free verification setup

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Figure 4-30 GBE10STS3C Cross-Connections

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

27 When test is complete, leave test setup intact for subsequent tests.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

28 Delete Cross-Connections
Enter DLT-CRS-STS3C::FROM-1&&-64,TO-1&&-64; to delete cross-connections on
STS-3C facilities members 1 through 64 for each equipped GBE facility.
where:
FROM=GBE10 AID members 1 through 64
TO=GBE10 AID members 1 through 64
Example, to delete cross-connections between 10GBE module resident in slot 7, port 1,
members 1 through 64 to 10GBE module in slot 7, port 2, members 1 through 64 enter:
DLT-CRS-STS3C::GBE10STS3C-1-3-7-1-1-1&&64,GBE10STS3C-1-3-7-2-1-
1&&64;
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

29 Have cross-connections been deleted for all GBE10 facilities on every working 10GBE
module?
If yes, go to Step 30.
If no, go to Step 28.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

30 Delete Virtual Concatenation Groups

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
3AG 24622 EAAA TQZZA Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary 4-243
Issue 1 February 2010 Use pursuant to applicable agreements
System turn-up and testing Procedure 4-35: 10 GBE error-free verification setup

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Enter DLT-VCG::AID; to delete a VCG for every GBE10 facility on 10GBE module.
Enter command for every 10GBE module in shelf. Refer to “Verify 10GBE provisioning”
(p. 4-412).
where:
AID=GBE10VCG facility AID, for example: GBE10VCG-1-3-9-2-1, && ranging and &
grouping allowed
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

31 Have VCG been deleted for all 10GBE ports on every working 10GBE module?
If yes, go to Step 32.
If no, go to Step 30.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

32 STOP. This procedure is complete.

E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S

Table 4-12 GBE10 STS-3C connections (shelf fully populated with 10GBEs)
Order From STS-3C(Rack-Shelf- To STS-3C(Rack-Shelf-Slot-
Slot-Port#-1-STS3C#) Port#-1-STS3C#)
Working Facility Cross-connections
1 1-3-2-1-1-1 1-3-2-2-1-1
2 1-3-2-1-1-2 1-3-2-2-1-2
3 1-3-2-1-1-3 1-3-2-2-1-3
4 1-3-2-1-1-4 1-3-2-2-1-4
5 1-3-2-1-1-5 1-3-2-2-1-5
6 1-3-2-1-1-6 1-3-2-2-1-6
7 1-3-2-1-1-7 1-3-2-2-1-7
8 1-3-2-1-1-8 1-3-2-2-1-8
9 1-3-2-1-1-9 1-3-2-2-1-9
10 1-3-2-1-1-10 1-3-2-2-1-10
11 1-3-2-1-1-11 1-3-2-2-1-11
12 1-3-2-1-1-12 1-3-2-2-1-12
13 1-3-2-1-1-13 1-3-2-2-1-13
14 1-3-2-1-1-14 1-3-2-2-1-14

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
4-244 Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary 3AG 24622 EAAA TQZZA
Use pursuant to applicable agreements Issue 1 February 2010
System turn-up and testing Procedure 4-35: 10 GBE error-free verification setup

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Table 4-12 GBE10 STS-3C connections (shelf fully populated with 10GBEs)
(continued)
Order From STS-3C(Rack-Shelf- To STS-3C(Rack-Shelf-Slot-
Slot-Port#-1-STS3C#) Port#-1-STS3C#)
Working Facility Cross-connections
15 1-3-2-1-1-15 1-3-2-2-1-15
16 1-3-2-1-1-16 1-3-2-2-1-16
17 1-3-2-1-1-17 1-3-2-2-1-17
18 1-3-2-1-1-18 1-3-2-2-1-18
19 1-3-2-1-1-19 1-3-2-2-1-19
20 1-3-2-1-1-20 1-3-2-2-1-20
21 1-3-2-1-1-21 1-3-2-2-1-21
22 1-3-2-1-1-22 1-3-2-2-1-22
23 1-3-2-1-1-23 1-3-2-2-1-23
24 1-3-2-1-1-24 1-3-2-2-1-24
25 1-3-2-1-1-25 1-3-2-2-1-25
26 1-3-2-1-1-26 1-3-2-2-1-26
27 1-3-2-1-1-27 1-3-2-2-1-27
28 1-3-2-1-1-28 1-3-2-2-1-28
29 1-3-2-1-1-29 1-3-2-2-1-29
30 1-3-2-1-1-30 1-3-2-2-1-30
31 1-3-2-1-1-31 1-3-2-2-1-31
32 1-3-2-1-1-32 1-3-2-2-1-32
33 1-3-2-1-1-33 1-3-2-2-1-33
34 1-3-2-1-1-34 1-3-2-2-1-34
35 1-3-2-1-1-35 1-3-2-2-1-35
36 1-3-2-1-1-36 1-3-2-2-1-36
37 1-3-2-1-1-37 1-3-2-2-1-37
38 1-3-2-1-1-38 1-3-2-2-1-38
39 1-3-2-1-1-39 1-3-2-2-1-39
40 1-3-2-1-1-40 1-3-2-2-1-40
41 1-3-2-1-1-41 1-3-2-2-1-41
42 1-3-2-1-1-42 1-3-2-2-1-42

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
3AG 24622 EAAA TQZZA Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary 4-245
Issue 1 February 2010 Use pursuant to applicable agreements
System turn-up and testing Procedure 4-35: 10 GBE error-free verification setup

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Table 4-12 GBE10 STS-3C connections (shelf fully populated with 10GBEs)
(continued)
Order From STS-3C(Rack-Shelf- To STS-3C(Rack-Shelf-Slot-
Slot-Port#-1-STS3C#) Port#-1-STS3C#)
Working Facility Cross-connections
43 1-3-2-1-1-43 1-3-2-2-1-43
44 1-3-2-1-1-44 1-3-2-2-1-44
45 1-3-2-1-1-45 1-3-2-2-1-45
46 1-3-2-1-1-46 1-3-2-2-1-46
47 1-3-2-1-1-47 1-3-2-2-1-47
48 1-3-2-1-1-48 1-3-2-2-1-48
49 1-3-2-1-1-49 1-3-2-2-1-49
50 1-3-2-1-1-50 1-3-2-2-1-50
51 1-3-2-1-1-51 1-3-2-2-1-51
52 1-3-2-1-1-52 1-3-2-2-1-52
53 1-3-2-1-1-53 1-3-2-2-1-53
54 1-3-2-1-1-54 1-3-2-2-1-54
55 1-3-2-1-1-55 1-3-2-2-1-55
56 1-3-2-1-1-56 1-3-2-2-1-56
57 1-3-2-1-1-57 1-3-2-2-1-57
58 1-3-2-1-1-58 1-3-2-2-1-58
59 1-3-2-1-1-59 1-3-2-2-1-59
60 1-3-2-1-1-60 1-3-2-2-1-60
61 1-3-2-1-1-61 1-3-2-2-1-61
62 1-3-2-1-1-62 1-3-2-2-1-62
63 1-3-2-1-1-63 1-3-2-2-1-63
64 1-3-2-1-1-64 1-3-2-2-1-64
65 1-3-3-1-1-1 1-3-3-2-1-1
66 1-3-3-1-1-2 1-3-3-2-1-2
67 1-3-3-1-1-3 1-3-3-2-1-3
68 1-3-3-1-1-4 1-3-3-2-1-4
69 1-3-3-1-1-5 1-3-3-2-1-5
70 1-3-3-1-1-6 1-3-3-2-1-6

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
4-246 Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary 3AG 24622 EAAA TQZZA
Use pursuant to applicable agreements Issue 1 February 2010
System turn-up and testing Procedure 4-35: 10 GBE error-free verification setup

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Table 4-12 GBE10 STS-3C connections (shelf fully populated with 10GBEs)
(continued)
Order From STS-3C(Rack-Shelf- To STS-3C(Rack-Shelf-Slot-
Slot-Port#-1-STS3C#) Port#-1-STS3C#)
Working Facility Cross-connections
71 1-3-3-1-1-7 1-3-3-2-1-7
72 1-3-3-1-1-8 1-3-3-2-1-8
73 1-3-3-1-1-9 1-3-3-2-1-9
74 1-3-3-1-1-10 1-3-3-2-1-10
75 1-3-3-1-1-11 1-3-3-2-1-11
76 1-3-3-1-1-12 1-3-3-2-1-12
77 1-3-3-1-1-13 1-3-3-2-1-13
78 1-3-3-1-1-14 1-3-3-2-1-14
79 1-3-3-1-1-15 1-3-3-2-1-15
80 1-3-3-1-1-16 1-3-3-2-1-16
81 1-3-3-1-1-17 1-3-3-2-1-17
82 1-3-3-1-1-18 1-3-3-2-1-18
83 1-3-3-1-1-19 1-3-3-2-1-19
84 1-3-3-1-1-20 1-3-3-2-1-20
85 1-3-3-1-1-21 1-3-3-2-1-21
86 1-3-3-1-1-22 1-3-3-2-1-22
87 1-3-3-1-1-23 1-3-3-2-1-23
88 1-3-3-1-1-24 1-3-3-2-1-24
89 1-3-3-1-1-25 1-3-3-2-1-25
90 1-3-3-1-1-26 1-3-3-2-1-26
91 1-3-3-1-1-27 1-3-3-2-1-27
92 1-3-3-1-1-28 1-3-3-2-1-28
93 1-3-3-1-1-29 1-3-3-2-1-29
94 1-3-3-1-1-30 1-3-3-2-1-30
95 1-3-3-1-1-31 1-3-3-2-1-31
96 1-3-3-1-1-32 1-3-3-2-1-32
97 1-3-3-1-1-33 1-3-3-2-1-33
98 1-3-3-1-1-34 1-3-3-2-1-34

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
3AG 24622 EAAA TQZZA Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary 4-247
Issue 1 February 2010 Use pursuant to applicable agreements
System turn-up and testing Procedure 4-35: 10 GBE error-free verification setup

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Table 4-12 GBE10 STS-3C connections (shelf fully populated with 10GBEs)
(continued)
Order From STS-3C(Rack-Shelf- To STS-3C(Rack-Shelf-Slot-
Slot-Port#-1-STS3C#) Port#-1-STS3C#)
Working Facility Cross-connections
99 1-3-3-1-1-35 1-3-3-2-1-35
100 1-3-3-1-1-36 1-3-3-2-1-36
101 1-3-3-1-1-37 1-3-3-2-1-37
102 1-3-3-1-1-38 1-3-3-2-1-38
103 1-3-3-1-1-39 1-3-3-2-1-39
104 1-3-3-1-1-40 1-3-3-2-1-40
105 1-3-3-1-1-41 1-3-3-2-1-41
106 1-3-3-1-1-42 1-3-3-2-1-42
107 1-3-3-1-1-43 1-3-3-2-1-43
108 1-3-3-1-1-44 1-3-3-2-1-44
109 1-3-3-1-1-45 1-3-3-2-1-45
110 1-3-3-1-1-46 1-3-3-2-1-46
111 1-3-3-1-1-47 1-3-3-2-1-47
112 1-3-3-1-1-48 1-3-3-2-1-48
113 1-3-3-1-1-49 1-3-3-2-1-49
114 1-3-3-1-1-50 1-3-3-2-1-50
115 1-3-3-1-1-51 1-3-3-2-1-51
116 1-3-3-1-1-52 1-3-3-2-1-52
117 1-3-3-1-1-53 1-3-3-2-1-53
118 1-3-3-1-1-54 1-3-3-2-1-54
119 1-3-3-1-1-55 1-3-3-2-1-55
120 1-3-3-1-1-56 1-3-3-2-1-56
121 1-3-3-1-1-57 1-3-3-2-1-57
122 1-3-3-1-1-58 1-3-3-2-1-58
123 1-3-3-1-1-59 1-3-3-2-1-59
124 1-3-3-1-1-60 1-3-3-2-1-60
125 1-3-3-1-1-61 1-3-3-2-1-61
126 1-3-3-1-1-62 1-3-3-2-1-62

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
4-248 Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary 3AG 24622 EAAA TQZZA
Use pursuant to applicable agreements Issue 1 February 2010
System turn-up and testing Procedure 4-35: 10 GBE error-free verification setup

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Table 4-12 GBE10 STS-3C connections (shelf fully populated with 10GBEs)
(continued)
Order From STS-3C(Rack-Shelf- To STS-3C(Rack-Shelf-Slot-
Slot-Port#-1-STS3C#) Port#-1-STS3C#)
Working Facility Cross-connections
127 1-3-3-1-1-63 1-3-3-2-1-63
128 1-3-3-1-1-64 1-3-3-2-1-64
129 1-3-4-1-1-1 1-3-4-2-1-1
130 1-3-4-1-1-2 1-3-4-2-1-2
131 1-3-4-1-1-3 1-3-4-2-1-3
132 1-3-4-1-1-4 1-3-4-2-1-4
133 1-3-4-1-1-5 1-3-4-2-1-5
134 1-3-4-1-1-6 1-3-4-2-1-6
135 1-3-4-1-1-7 1-3-4-2-1-7
136 1-3-4-1-1-8 1-3-4-2-1-8
137 1-3-4-1-1-9 1-3-4-2-1-9
138 1-3-4-1-1-10 1-3-4-2-1-10
139 1-3-4-1-1-11 1-3-4-2-1-11
140 1-3-4-1-1-12 1-3-4-2-1-12
141 1-3-4-1-1-13 1-3-4-2-1-13
142 1-3-4-1-1-14 1-3-4-2-1-14
143 1-3-4-1-1-15 1-3-4-2-1-15
144 1-3-4-1-1-16 1-3-4-2-1-16
145 1-3-4-1-1-17 1-3-4-2-1-17
146 1-3-4-1-1-18 1-3-4-2-1-18
147 1-3-4-1-1-19 1-3-4-2-1-19
148 1-3-4-1-1-20 1-3-4-2-1-20
149 1-3-4-1-1-21 1-3-4-2-1-21
150 1-3-4-1-1-22 1-3-4-2-1-22
151 1-3-4-1-1-23 1-3-4-2-1-23
152 1-3-4-1-1-24 1-3-4-2-1-24
153 1-3-4-1-1-25 1-3-4-2-1-25
154 1-3-4-1-1-26 1-3-4-2-1-26

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
3AG 24622 EAAA TQZZA Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary 4-249
Issue 1 February 2010 Use pursuant to applicable agreements
System turn-up and testing Procedure 4-35: 10 GBE error-free verification setup

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Table 4-12 GBE10 STS-3C connections (shelf fully populated with 10GBEs)
(continued)
Order From STS-3C(Rack-Shelf- To STS-3C(Rack-Shelf-Slot-
Slot-Port#-1-STS3C#) Port#-1-STS3C#)
Working Facility Cross-connections
155 1-3-4-1-1-27 1-3-4-2-1-27
156 1-3-4-1-1-28 1-3-4-2-1-28
157 1-3-4-1-1-29 1-3-4-2-1-29
158 1-3-4-1-1-30 1-3-4-2-1-30
159 1-3-4-1-1-31 1-3-4-2-1-31
160 1-3-4-1-1-32 1-3-4-2-1-32
161 1-3-4-1-1-33 1-3-4-2-1-33
162 1-3-4-1-1-34 1-3-4-2-1-34
163 1-3-4-1-1-35 1-3-4-2-1-35
164 1-3-4-1-1-36 1-3-4-2-1-36
165 1-3-4-1-1-37 1-3-4-2-1-37
166 1-3-4-1-1-38 1-3-4-2-1-38
167 1-3-4-1-1-39 1-3-4-2-1-39
168 1-3-4-1-1-40 1-3-4-2-1-40
169 1-3-4-1-1-41 1-3-4-2-1-41
170 1-3-4-1-1-42 1-3-4-2-1-42
171 1-3-4-1-1-43 1-3-4-2-1-43
172 1-3-4-1-1-44 1-3-4-2-1-44
173 1-3-4-1-1-45 1-3-4-2-1-45
174 1-3-4-1-1-46 1-3-4-2-1-46
175 1-3-4-1-1-47 1-3-4-2-1-47
176 1-3-4-1-1-48 1-3-4-2-1-48
177 1-3-4-1-1-49 1-3-4-2-1-49
178 1-3-4-1-1-50 1-3-4-2-1-50
179 1-3-4-1-1-51 1-3-4-2-1-51
180 1-3-4-1-1-52 1-3-4-2-1-52
181 1-3-4-1-1-53 1-3-4-2-1-53
182 1-3-4-1-1-54 1-3-4-2-1-54

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
4-250 Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary 3AG 24622 EAAA TQZZA
Use pursuant to applicable agreements Issue 1 February 2010
System turn-up and testing Procedure 4-35: 10 GBE error-free verification setup

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Table 4-12 GBE10 STS-3C connections (shelf fully populated with 10GBEs)
(continued)
Order From STS-3C(Rack-Shelf- To STS-3C(Rack-Shelf-Slot-
Slot-Port#-1-STS3C#) Port#-1-STS3C#)
Working Facility Cross-connections
183 1-3-4-1-1-55 1-3-4-2-1-55
184 1-3-4-1-1-56 1-3-4-2-1-56
185 1-3-4-1-1-57 1-3-4-2-1-57
186 1-3-4-1-1-58 1-3-4-2-1-58
187 1-3-4-1-1-59 1-3-4-2-1-59
188 1-3-4-1-1-60 1-3-4-2-1-60
189 1-3-4-1-1-61 1-3-4-2-1-61
190 1-3-4-1-1-62 1-3-4-2-1-62
191 1-3-4-1-1-63 1-3-4-2-1-63
192 1-3-4-1-1-64 1-3-4-2-1-64
193 1-3-5-1-1-1 1-3-5-2-1-1
194 1-3-5-1-1-2 1-3-5-2-1-2
195 1-3-5-1-1-3 1-3-5-2-1-3
196 1-3-5-1-1-4 1-3-5-2-1-4
197 1-3-5-1-1-5 1-3-5-2-1-5
198 1-3-5-1-1-6 1-3-5-2-1-6
199 1-3-5-1-1-7 1-3-5-2-1-7
200 1-3-5-1-1-8 1-3-5-2-1-8
201 1-3-5-1-1-9 1-3-5-2-1-9
202 1-3-5-1-1-10 1-3-5-2-1-10
203 1-3-5-1-1-11 1-3-5-2-1-11
204 1-3-5-1-1-12 1-3-5-2-1-12
205 1-3-5-1-1-13 1-3-5-2-1-13
206 1-3-5-1-1-14 1-3-5-2-1-14
207 1-3-5-1-1-15 1-3-5-2-1-15
208 1-3-5-1-1-16 1-3-5-2-1-16
209 1-3-5-1-1-17 1-3-5-2-1-17
210 1-3-5-1-1-18 1-3-5-2-1-18

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
3AG 24622 EAAA TQZZA Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary 4-251
Issue 1 February 2010 Use pursuant to applicable agreements
System turn-up and testing Procedure 4-35: 10 GBE error-free verification setup

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Table 4-12 GBE10 STS-3C connections (shelf fully populated with 10GBEs)
(continued)
Order From STS-3C(Rack-Shelf- To STS-3C(Rack-Shelf-Slot-
Slot-Port#-1-STS3C#) Port#-1-STS3C#)
Working Facility Cross-connections
211 1-3-5-1-1-19 1-3-5-2-1-19
212 1-3-5-1-1-20 1-3-5-2-1-20
213 1-3-5-1-1-21 1-3-5-2-1-21
214 1-3-5-1-1-22 1-3-5-2-1-22
215 1-3-5-1-1-23 1-3-5-2-1-23
216 1-3-5-1-1-24 1-3-5-2-1-24
217 1-3-5-1-1-25 1-3-5-2-1-25
218 1-3-5-1-1-26 1-3-5-2-1-26
219 1-3-5-1-1-27 1-3-5-2-1-27
220 1-3-5-1-1-28 1-3-5-2-1-28
221 1-3-5-1-1-29 1-3-5-2-1-29
222 1-3-5-1-1-30 1-3-5-2-1-30
223 1-3-5-1-1-31 1-3-5-2-1-31
224 1-3-5-1-1-32 1-3-5-2-1-32
225 1-3-5-1-1-33 1-3-5-2-1-33
226 1-3-5-1-1-34 1-3-5-2-1-34
227 1-3-5-1-1-35 1-3-5-2-1-35
228 1-3-5-1-1-36 1-3-5-2-1-36
229 1-3-5-1-1-37 1-3-5-2-1-37
230 1-3-5-1-1-38 1-3-5-2-1-38
231 1-3-5-1-1-39 1-3-5-2-1-39
232 1-3-5-1-1-40 1-3-5-2-1-40
233 1-3-5-1-1-41 1-3-5-2-1-41
234 1-3-5-1-1-42 1-3-5-2-1-42
235 1-3-5-1-1-43 1-3-5-2-1-43
236 1-3-5-1-1-44 1-3-5-2-1-44
237 1-3-5-1-1-45 1-3-5-2-1-45
238 1-3-5-1-1-46 1-3-5-2-1-46

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
4-252 Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary 3AG 24622 EAAA TQZZA
Use pursuant to applicable agreements Issue 1 February 2010
System turn-up and testing Procedure 4-35: 10 GBE error-free verification setup

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Table 4-12 GBE10 STS-3C connections (shelf fully populated with 10GBEs)
(continued)
Order From STS-3C(Rack-Shelf- To STS-3C(Rack-Shelf-Slot-
Slot-Port#-1-STS3C#) Port#-1-STS3C#)
Working Facility Cross-connections
239 1-3-5-1-1-47 1-3-5-2-1-47
240 1-3-5-1-1-48 1-3-5-2-1-48
241 1-3-5-1-1-49 1-3-5-2-1-49
242 1-3-5-1-1-50 1-3-5-2-1-50
243 1-3-5-1-1-51 1-3-5-2-1-51
244 1-3-5-1-1-52 1-3-5-2-1-52
245 1-3-5-1-1-53 1-3-5-2-1-53
246 1-3-5-1-1-54 1-3-5-2-1-54
247 1-3-5-1-1-55 1-3-5-2-1-55
248 1-3-5-1-1-56 1-3-5-2-1-56
249 1-3-5-1-1-57 1-3-5-2-1-57
250 1-3-5-1-1-58 1-3-5-2-1-58
251 1-3-5-1-1-59 1-3-5-2-1-59
252 1-3-5-1-1-60 1-3-5-2-1-60
253 1-3-5-1-1-61 1-3-5-2-1-61
254 1-3-5-1-1-62 1-3-5-2-1-62
255 1-3-5-1-1-63 1-3-5-2-1-63
256 1-3-5-1-1-64 1-3-5-2-1-64
257 1-3-6-1-1-1 1-3-6-2-1-1
258 1-3-6-1-1-2 1-3-6-2-1-2
259 1-3-6-1-1-3 1-3-6-2-1-3
260 1-3-6-1-1-4 1-3-6-2-1-4
261 1-3-6-1-1-5 1-3-6-2-1-5
262 1-3-6-1-1-6 1-3-6-2-1-6
263 1-3-6-1-1-7 1-3-6-2-1-7
264 1-3-6-1-1-8 1-3-6-2-1-8
265 1-3-6-1-1-9 1-3-6-2-1-9
266 1-3-6-1-1-10 1-3-6-2-1-10

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
3AG 24622 EAAA TQZZA Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary 4-253
Issue 1 February 2010 Use pursuant to applicable agreements
System turn-up and testing Procedure 4-35: 10 GBE error-free verification setup

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Table 4-12 GBE10 STS-3C connections (shelf fully populated with 10GBEs)
(continued)
Order From STS-3C(Rack-Shelf- To STS-3C(Rack-Shelf-Slot-
Slot-Port#-1-STS3C#) Port#-1-STS3C#)
Working Facility Cross-connections
267 1-3-6-1-1-11 1-3-6-2-1-11
268 1-3-6-1-1-12 1-3-6-2-1-12
269 1-3-6-1-1-13 1-3-6-2-1-13
270 1-3-6-1-1-14 1-3-6-2-1-14
271 1-3-6-1-1-15 1-3-6-2-1-15
272 1-3-6-1-1-16 1-3-6-2-1-16
273 1-3-6-1-1-17 1-3-6-2-1-17
274 1-3-6-1-1-18 1-3-6-2-1-18
275 1-3-6-1-1-19 1-3-6-2-1-19
276 1-3-6-1-1-20 1-3-6-2-1-20
277 1-3-6-1-1-21 1-3-6-2-1-21
278 1-3-6-1-1-22 1-3-6-2-1-22
279 1-3-6-1-1-23 1-3-6-2-1-23
280 1-3-6-1-1-24 1-3-6-2-1-24
281 1-3-6-1-1-25 1-3-6-2-1-25
282 1-3-6-1-1-26 1-3-6-2-1-26
283 1-3-6-1-1-27 1-3-6-2-1-27
284 1-3-6-1-1-28 1-3-6-2-1-28
285 1-3-6-1-1-29 1-3-6-2-1-29
286 1-3-6-1-1-30 1-3-6-2-1-30
287 1-3-6-1-1-31 1-3-6-2-1-31
288 1-3-6-1-1-32 1-3-6-2-1-32
289 1-3-6-1-1-33 1-3-6-2-1-33
290 1-3-6-1-1-34 1-3-6-2-1-34
291 1-3-6-1-1-35 1-3-6-2-1-35
292 1-3-6-1-1-36 1-3-6-2-1-36
293 1-3-6-1-1-37 1-3-6-2-1-37
294 1-3-6-1-1-38 1-3-6-2-1-38

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
4-254 Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary 3AG 24622 EAAA TQZZA
Use pursuant to applicable agreements Issue 1 February 2010
System turn-up and testing Procedure 4-35: 10 GBE error-free verification setup

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Table 4-12 GBE10 STS-3C connections (shelf fully populated with 10GBEs)
(continued)
Order From STS-3C(Rack-Shelf- To STS-3C(Rack-Shelf-Slot-
Slot-Port#-1-STS3C#) Port#-1-STS3C#)
Working Facility Cross-connections
295 1-3-6-1-1-39 1-3-6-2-1-39
296 1-3-6-1-1-40 1-3-6-2-1-40
297 1-3-6-1-1-41 1-3-6-2-1-41
298 1-3-6-1-1-42 1-3-6-2-1-42
299 1-3-6-1-1-43 1-3-6-2-1-43
300 1-3-6-1-1-44 1-3-6-2-1-44
301 1-3-6-1-1-45 1-3-6-2-1-45
302 1-3-6-1-1-46 1-3-6-2-1-46
303 1-3-6-1-1-47 1-3-6-2-1-47
304 1-3-6-1-1-48 1-3-6-2-1-48
305 1-3-6-1-1-49 1-3-6-2-1-49
306 1-3-6-1-1-50 1-3-6-2-1-50
307 1-3-6-1-1-51 1-3-6-2-1-51
308 1-3-6-1-1-52 1-3-6-2-1-52
309 1-3-6-1-1-53 1-3-6-2-1-53
310 1-3-6-1-1-54 1-3-6-2-1-54
311 1-3-6-1-1-55 1-3-6-2-1-55
312 1-3-6-1-1-56 1-3-6-2-1-56
313 1-3-6-1-1-57 1-3-6-2-1-57
314 1-3-6-1-1-58 1-3-6-2-1-58
315 1-3-6-1-1-59 1-3-6-2-1-59
316 1-3-6-1-1-60 1-3-6-2-1-60
317 1-3-6-1-1-61 1-3-6-2-1-61
318 1-3-6-1-1-62 1-3-6-2-1-62
319 1-3-6-1-1-63 1-3-6-2-1-63
320 1-3-6-1-1-64 1-3-6-2-1-64
321 1-3-7-1-1-1 1-3-7-2-1-1
322 1-3-7-1-1-2 1-3-7-2-1-2

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
3AG 24622 EAAA TQZZA Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary 4-255
Issue 1 February 2010 Use pursuant to applicable agreements
System turn-up and testing Procedure 4-35: 10 GBE error-free verification setup

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Table 4-12 GBE10 STS-3C connections (shelf fully populated with 10GBEs)
(continued)
Order From STS-3C(Rack-Shelf- To STS-3C(Rack-Shelf-Slot-
Slot-Port#-1-STS3C#) Port#-1-STS3C#)
Working Facility Cross-connections
323 1-3-7-1-1-3 1-3-7-2-1-3
324 1-3-7-1-1-4 1-3-7-2-1-4
325 1-3-7-1-1-5 1-3-7-2-1-5
326 1-3-7-1-1-6 1-3-7-2-1-6
327 1-3-7-1-1-7 1-3-7-2-1-7
328 1-3-7-1-1-8 1-3-7-2-1-8
329 1-3-7-1-1-9 1-3-7-2-1-9
330 1-3-7-1-1-10 1-3-7-2-1-10
331 1-3-7-1-1-11 1-3-7-2-1-11
332 1-3-7-1-1-12 1-3-7-2-1-12
333 1-3-7-1-1-13 1-3-7-2-1-13
334 1-3-7-1-1-14 1-3-7-2-1-14
335 1-3-7-1-1-15 1-3-7-2-1-15
336 1-3-7-1-1-16 1-3-7-2-1-16
337 1-3-7-1-1-17 1-3-7-2-1-17
338 1-3-7-1-1-18 1-3-7-2-1-18
339 1-3-7-1-1-19 1-3-7-2-1-19
340 1-3-7-1-1-20 1-3-7-2-1-20
341 1-3-7-1-1-21 1-3-7-2-1-21
342 1-3-7-1-1-22 1-3-7-2-1-22
343 1-3-7-1-1-23 1-3-7-2-1-23
344 1-3-7-1-1-24 1-3-7-2-1-24
345 1-3-7-1-1-25 1-3-7-2-1-25
346 1-3-7-1-1-26 1-3-7-2-1-26
347 1-3-7-1-1-27 1-3-7-2-1-27
348 1-3-7-1-1-28 1-3-7-2-1-28
349 1-3-7-1-1-29 1-3-7-2-1-29
350 1-3-7-1-1-30 1-3-7-2-1-30

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
4-256 Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary 3AG 24622 EAAA TQZZA
Use pursuant to applicable agreements Issue 1 February 2010
System turn-up and testing Procedure 4-35: 10 GBE error-free verification setup

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Table 4-12 GBE10 STS-3C connections (shelf fully populated with 10GBEs)
(continued)
Order From STS-3C(Rack-Shelf- To STS-3C(Rack-Shelf-Slot-
Slot-Port#-1-STS3C#) Port#-1-STS3C#)
Working Facility Cross-connections
351 1-3-7-1-1-31 1-3-7-2-1-31
352 1-3-7-1-1-32 1-3-7-2-1-32
353 1-3-7-1-1-33 1-3-7-2-1-33
354 1-3-7-1-1-34 1-3-7-2-1-34
355 1-3-7-1-1-35 1-3-7-2-1-35
356 1-3-7-1-1-36 1-3-7-2-1-36
357 1-3-7-1-1-37 1-3-7-2-1-37
358 1-3-7-1-1-38 1-3-7-2-1-38
359 1-3-7-1-1-39 1-3-7-2-1-39
360 1-3-7-1-1-40 1-3-7-2-1-40
361 1-3-7-1-1-41 1-3-7-2-1-41
362 1-3-7-1-1-42 1-3-7-2-1-42
363 1-3-7-1-1-43 1-3-7-2-1-43
364 1-3-7-1-1-44 1-3-7-2-1-44
365 1-3-7-1-1-45 1-3-7-2-1-45
366 1-3-7-1-1-46 1-3-7-2-1-46
367 1-3-7-1-1-47 1-3-7-2-1-47
368 1-3-7-1-1-48 1-3-7-2-1-48
369 1-3-7-1-1-49 1-3-7-2-1-49
370 1-3-7-1-1-50 1-3-7-2-1-50
371 1-3-7-1-1-51 1-3-7-2-1-51
372 1-3-7-1-1-52 1-3-7-2-1-52
373 1-3-7-1-1-53 1-3-7-2-1-53
374 1-3-7-1-1-54 1-3-7-2-1-54
375 1-3-7-1-1-55 1-3-7-2-1-55
376 1-3-7-1-1-56 1-3-7-2-1-56
377 1-3-7-1-1-57 1-3-7-2-1-57
378 1-3-7-1-1-58 1-3-7-2-1-58

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
3AG 24622 EAAA TQZZA Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary 4-257
Issue 1 February 2010 Use pursuant to applicable agreements
System turn-up and testing Procedure 4-35: 10 GBE error-free verification setup

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Table 4-12 GBE10 STS-3C connections (shelf fully populated with 10GBEs)
(continued)
Order From STS-3C(Rack-Shelf- To STS-3C(Rack-Shelf-Slot-
Slot-Port#-1-STS3C#) Port#-1-STS3C#)
Working Facility Cross-connections
379 1-3-7-1-1-59 1-3-7-2-1-59
380 1-3-7-1-1-60 1-3-7-2-1-60
381 1-3-7-1-1-61 1-3-7-2-1-61
382 1-3-7-1-1-62 1-3-7-2-1-62
383 1-3-7-1-1-63 1-3-7-2-1-63
384 1-3-7-1-1-64 1-3-7-2-1-64
385 1-3-8-1-1-1 1-3-8-2-1-1
386 1-3-8-1-1-2 1-3-8-2-1-2
387 1-3-8-1-1-3 1-3-8-2-1-3
388 1-3-8-1-1-4 1-3-8-2-1-4
389 1-3-8-1-1-5 1-3-8-2-1-5
390 1-3-8-1-1-6 1-3-8-2-1-6
391 1-3-8-1-1-7 1-3-8-2-1-7
392 1-3-8-1-1-8 1-3-8-2-1-8
393 1-3-8-1-1-9 1-3-8-2-1-9
394 1-3-8-1-1-10 1-3-8-2-1-10
395 1-3-8-1-1-11 1-3-8-2-1-11
396 1-3-8-1-1-12 1-3-8-2-1-12
397 1-3-8-1-1-13 1-3-8-2-1-13
398 1-3-8-1-1-14 1-3-8-2-1-14
399 1-3-8-1-1-15 1-3-8-2-1-15
400 1-3-8-1-1-16 1-3-8-2-1-16
401 1-3-8-1-1-17 1-3-8-2-1-17
402 1-3-8-1-1-18 1-3-8-2-1-18
403 1-3-8-1-1-19 1-3-8-2-1-19
404 1-3-8-1-1-20 1-3-8-2-1-20
405 1-3-8-1-1-21 1-3-8-2-1-21
406 1-3-8-1-1-22 1-3-8-2-1-22

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
4-258 Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary 3AG 24622 EAAA TQZZA
Use pursuant to applicable agreements Issue 1 February 2010
System turn-up and testing Procedure 4-35: 10 GBE error-free verification setup

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Table 4-12 GBE10 STS-3C connections (shelf fully populated with 10GBEs)
(continued)
Order From STS-3C(Rack-Shelf- To STS-3C(Rack-Shelf-Slot-
Slot-Port#-1-STS3C#) Port#-1-STS3C#)
Working Facility Cross-connections
407 1-3-8-1-1-23 1-3-8-2-1-23
408 1-3-8-1-1-24 1-3-8-2-1-24
409 1-3-8-1-1-25 1-3-8-2-1-25
410 1-3-8-1-1-26 1-3-8-2-1-26
411 1-3-8-1-1-27 1-3-8-2-1-27
412 1-3-8-1-1-28 1-3-8-2-1-28
413 1-3-8-1-1-29 1-3-8-2-1-29
414 1-3-8-1-1-30 1-3-8-2-1-30
415 1-3-8-1-1-31 1-3-8-2-1-31
416 1-3-8-1-1-32 1-3-8-2-1-32
417 1-3-8-1-1-33 1-3-8-2-1-33
418 1-3-8-1-1-34 1-3-8-2-1-34
419 1-3-8-1-1-35 1-3-8-2-1-35
420 1-3-8-1-1-36 1-3-8-2-1-36
421 1-3-8-1-1-37 1-3-8-2-1-37
422 1-3-8-1-1-38 1-3-8-2-1-38
423 1-3-8-1-1-39 1-3-8-2-1-39
424 1-3-8-1-1-40 1-3-8-2-1-40
425 1-3-8-1-1-41 1-3-8-2-1-41
426 1-3-8-1-1-42 1-3-8-2-1-42
427 1-3-8-1-1-43 1-3-8-2-1-43
428 1-3-8-1-1-44 1-3-8-2-1-44
429 1-3-8-1-1-45 1-3-8-2-1-45
430 1-3-8-1-1-46 1-3-8-2-1-46
431 1-3-8-1-1-47 1-3-8-2-1-47
432 1-3-8-1-1-48 1-3-8-2-1-48
433 1-3-8-1-1-49 1-3-8-2-1-49
434 1-3-8-1-1-50 1-3-8-2-1-50

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
3AG 24622 EAAA TQZZA Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary 4-259
Issue 1 February 2010 Use pursuant to applicable agreements
System turn-up and testing Procedure 4-35: 10 GBE error-free verification setup

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Table 4-12 GBE10 STS-3C connections (shelf fully populated with 10GBEs)
(continued)
Order From STS-3C(Rack-Shelf- To STS-3C(Rack-Shelf-Slot-
Slot-Port#-1-STS3C#) Port#-1-STS3C#)
Working Facility Cross-connections
435 1-3-8-1-1-51 1-3-8-2-1-51
436 1-3-8-1-1-52 1-3-8-2-1-52
437 1-3-8-1-1-53 1-3-8-2-1-53
438 1-3-8-1-1-54 1-3-8-2-1-54
439 1-3-8-1-1-55 1-3-8-2-1-55
440 1-3-8-1-1-56 1-3-8-2-1-56
441 1-3-8-1-1-57 1-3-8-2-1-57
442 1-3-8-1-1-58 1-3-8-2-1-58
443 1-3-8-1-1-59 1-3-8-2-1-59
444 1-3-8-1-1-60 1-3-8-2-1-60
445 1-3-8-1-1-61 1-3-8-2-1-61
446 1-3-8-1-1-62 1-3-8-2-1-62
447 1-3-8-1-1-63 1-3-8-2-1-63
448 1-3-8-1-1-64 1-3-8-2-1-64
449 1-3-9-1-1-1 1-3-9-2-1-1
450 1-3-9-1-1-2 1-3-9-2-1-2
451 1-3-9-1-1-3 1-3-9-2-1-3
452 1-3-9-1-1-4 1-3-9-2-1-4
453 1-3-9-1-1-5 1-3-9-2-1-5
454 1-3-9-1-1-6 1-3-9-2-1-6
455 1-3-9-1-1-7 1-3-9-2-1-7
456 1-3-9-1-1-8 1-3-9-2-1-8
457 1-3-9-1-1-9 1-3-9-2-1-9
458 1-3-9-1-1-10 1-3-9-2-1-10
459 1-3-9-1-1-11 1-3-9-2-1-11
460 1-3-9-1-1-12 1-3-9-2-1-12
461 1-3-9-1-1-13 1-3-9-2-1-13
462 1-3-9-1-1-14 1-3-9-2-1-14

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
4-260 Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary 3AG 24622 EAAA TQZZA
Use pursuant to applicable agreements Issue 1 February 2010
System turn-up and testing Procedure 4-35: 10 GBE error-free verification setup

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Table 4-12 GBE10 STS-3C connections (shelf fully populated with 10GBEs)
(continued)
Order From STS-3C(Rack-Shelf- To STS-3C(Rack-Shelf-Slot-
Slot-Port#-1-STS3C#) Port#-1-STS3C#)
Working Facility Cross-connections
463 1-3-9-1-1-15 1-3-9-2-1-15
464 1-3-9-1-1-16 1-3-9-2-1-16
465 1-3-9-1-1-17 1-3-9-2-1-17
466 1-3-9-1-1-18 1-3-9-2-1-18
467 1-3-9-1-1-19 1-3-9-2-1-19
468 1-3-9-1-1-20 1-3-9-2-1-20
469 1-3-9-1-1-21 1-3-9-2-1-21
470 1-3-9-1-1-22 1-3-9-2-1-22
471 1-3-9-1-1-23 1-3-9-2-1-23
472 1-3-9-1-1-24 1-3-9-2-1-24
473 1-3-9-1-1-25 1-3-9-2-1-25
474 1-3-9-1-1-26 1-3-9-2-1-26
475 1-3-9-1-1-27 1-3-9-2-1-27
476 1-3-9-1-1-28 1-3-9-2-1-28
477 1-3-9-1-1-29 1-3-9-2-1-29
478 1-3-9-1-1-30 1-3-9-2-1-30
479 1-3-9-1-1-31 1-3-9-2-1-31
480 1-3-9-1-1-32 1-3-9-2-1-32
481 1-3-9-1-1-33 1-3-9-2-1-33
482 1-3-9-1-1-34 1-3-9-2-1-34
483 1-3-9-1-1-35 1-3-9-2-1-35
484 1-3-9-1-1-36 1-3-9-2-1-36
485 1-3-9-1-1-37 1-3-9-2-1-37
486 1-3-9-1-1-38 1-3-9-2-1-38
487 1-3-9-1-1-39 1-3-9-2-1-39
488 1-3-9-1-1-40 1-3-9-2-1-40
489 1-3-9-1-1-41 1-3-9-2-1-41
490 1-3-9-1-1-42 1-3-9-2-1-42

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
3AG 24622 EAAA TQZZA Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary 4-261
Issue 1 February 2010 Use pursuant to applicable agreements
System turn-up and testing Procedure 4-35: 10 GBE error-free verification setup

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Table 4-12 GBE10 STS-3C connections (shelf fully populated with 10GBEs)
(continued)
Order From STS-3C(Rack-Shelf- To STS-3C(Rack-Shelf-Slot-
Slot-Port#-1-STS3C#) Port#-1-STS3C#)
Working Facility Cross-connections
491 1-3-9-1-1-43 1-3-9-2-1-43
492 1-3-9-1-1-44 1-3-9-2-1-44
493 1-3-9-1-1-45 1-3-9-2-1-45
494 1-3-9-1-1-46 1-3-9-2-1-46
495 1-3-9-1-1-47 1-3-9-2-1-47
496 1-3-9-1-1-48 1-3-9-2-1-48
497 1-3-9-1-1-49 1-3-9-2-1-49
498 1-3-9-1-1-50 1-3-9-2-1-50
499 1-3-9-1-1-51 1-3-9-2-1-51
500 1-3-9-1-1-52 1-3-9-2-1-52
501 1-3-9-1-1-53 1-3-9-2-1-53
502 1-3-9-1-1-54 1-3-9-2-1-54
503 1-3-9-1-1-55 1-3-9-2-1-55
504 1-3-9-1-1-56 1-3-9-2-1-56
505 1-3-9-1-1-57 1-3-9-2-1-57
506 1-3-9-1-1-58 1-3-9-2-1-58
507 1-3-9-1-1-59 1-3-9-2-1-59
508 1-3-9-1-1-60 1-3-9-2-1-60
509 1-3-9-1-1-61 1-3-9-2-1-61
510 1-3-9-1-1-62 1-3-9-2-1-62
511 1-3-9-1-1-63 1-3-9-2-1-63
512 1-3-9-1-1-64 1-3-9-2-1-64
513 1-3-12-1-1-1 1-3-12-2-1-1
514 1-3-12-1-1-2 1-3-12-2-1-2
515 1-3-12-1-1-3 1-3-12-2-1-3
516 1-3-12-1-1-4 1-3-12-2-1-4
517 1-3-12-1-1-5 1-3-12-2-1-5
518 1-3-12-1-1-6 1-3-12-2-1-6

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
4-262 Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary 3AG 24622 EAAA TQZZA
Use pursuant to applicable agreements Issue 1 February 2010
System turn-up and testing Procedure 4-35: 10 GBE error-free verification setup

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Table 4-12 GBE10 STS-3C connections (shelf fully populated with 10GBEs)
(continued)
Order From STS-3C(Rack-Shelf- To STS-3C(Rack-Shelf-Slot-
Slot-Port#-1-STS3C#) Port#-1-STS3C#)
Working Facility Cross-connections
519 1-3-12-1-1-7 1-3-12-2-1-7
520 1-3-12-1-1-8 1-3-12-2-1-8
521 1-3-12-1-1-9 1-3-12-2-1-9
522 1-3-12-1-1-10 1-3-12-2-1-10
523 1-3-12-1-1-11 1-3-12-2-1-11
524 1-3-12-1-1-12 1-3-12-2-1-12
525 1-3-12-1-1-13 1-3-12-2-1-13
526 1-3-12-1-1-14 1-3-12-2-1-14
527 1-3-12-1-1-15 1-3-12-2-1-15
528 1-3-12-1-1-16 1-3-12-2-1-16
529 1-3-12-1-1-17 1-3-12-2-1-17
530 1-3-12-1-1-18 1-3-12-2-1-18
531 1-3-12-1-1-19 1-3-12-2-1-19
532 1-3-12-1-1-20 1-3-12-2-1-20
533 1-3-12-1-1-21 1-3-12-2-1-21
534 1-3-12-1-1-22 1-3-12-2-1-22
535 1-3-12-1-1-23 1-3-12-2-1-23
536 1-3-12-1-1-24 1-3-12-2-1-24
537 1-3-12-1-1-25 1-3-12-2-1-25
538 1-3-12-1-1-26 1-3-12-2-1-26
539 1-3-12-1-1-27 1-3-12-2-1-27
540 1-3-12-1-1-28 1-3-12-2-1-28
541 1-3-12-1-1-29 1-3-12-2-1-29
542 1-3-12-1-1-30 1-3-12-2-1-30
543 1-3-12-1-1-31 1-3-12-2-1-31
544 1-3-12-1-1-32 1-3-12-2-1-32
545 1-3-12-1-1-33 1-3-12-2-1-33
546 1-3-12-1-1-34 1-3-12-2-1-34

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
3AG 24622 EAAA TQZZA Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary 4-263
Issue 1 February 2010 Use pursuant to applicable agreements
System turn-up and testing Procedure 4-35: 10 GBE error-free verification setup

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Table 4-12 GBE10 STS-3C connections (shelf fully populated with 10GBEs)
(continued)
Order From STS-3C(Rack-Shelf- To STS-3C(Rack-Shelf-Slot-
Slot-Port#-1-STS3C#) Port#-1-STS3C#)
Working Facility Cross-connections
547 1-3-12-1-1-35 1-3-12-2-1-35
548 1-3-12-1-1-36 1-3-12-2-1-36
549 1-3-12-1-1-37 1-3-12-2-1-37
550 1-3-12-1-1-38 1-3-12-2-1-38
551 1-3-12-1-1-39 1-3-12-2-1-39
552 1-3-12-1-1-40 1-3-12-2-1-40
553 1-3-12-1-1-41 1-3-12-2-1-41
554 1-3-12-1-1-42 1-3-12-2-1-42
555 1-3-12-1-1-43 1-3-12-2-1-43
556 1-3-12-1-1-44 1-3-12-2-1-44
557 1-3-12-1-1-45 1-3-12-2-1-45
558 1-3-12-1-1-46 1-3-12-2-1-46
559 1-3-12-1-1-47 1-3-12-2-1-47
560 1-3-12-1-1-48 1-3-12-2-1-48
561 1-3-12-1-1-49 1-3-12-2-1-49
562 1-3-12-1-1-50 1-3-12-2-1-50
563 1-3-12-1-1-51 1-3-12-2-1-51
564 1-3-12-1-1-52 1-3-12-2-1-52
565 1-3-12-1-1-53 1-3-12-2-1-53
566 1-3-12-1-1-54 1-3-12-2-1-54
567 1-3-12-1-1-55 1-3-12-2-1-55
568 1-3-12-1-1-56 1-3-12-2-1-56
569 1-3-12-1-1-57 1-3-12-2-1-57
570 1-3-12-1-1-58 1-3-12-2-1-58
571 1-3-12-1-1-59 1-3-12-2-1-59
572 1-3-12-1-1-60 1-3-12-2-1-60
573 1-3-12-1-1-61 1-3-12-2-1-61
574 1-3-12-1-1-62 1-3-12-2-1-62

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
4-264 Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary 3AG 24622 EAAA TQZZA
Use pursuant to applicable agreements Issue 1 February 2010
System turn-up and testing Procedure 4-35: 10 GBE error-free verification setup

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Table 4-12 GBE10 STS-3C connections (shelf fully populated with 10GBEs)
(continued)
Order From STS-3C(Rack-Shelf- To STS-3C(Rack-Shelf-Slot-
Slot-Port#-1-STS3C#) Port#-1-STS3C#)
Working Facility Cross-connections
575 1-3-12-1-1-63 1-3-12-2-1-63
576 1-3-12-1-1-64 1-3-12-2-1-64
577 1-3-13-1-1-1 1-3-13-2-1-1
578 1-3-13-1-1-2 1-3-13-2-1-2
579 1-3-13-1-1-3 1-3-13-2-1-3
580 1-3-13-1-1-4 1-3-13-2-1-4
581 1-3-13-1-1-5 1-3-13-2-1-5
582 1-3-13-1-1-6 1-3-13-2-1-6
583 1-3-13-1-1-7 1-3-13-2-1-7
584 1-3-13-1-1-8 1-3-13-2-1-8
585 1-3-13-1-1-9 1-3-13-2-1-9
586 1-3-13-1-1-10 1-3-13-2-1-10
587 1-3-13-1-1-11 1-3-13-2-1-11
588 1-3-13-1-1-12 1-3-13-2-1-12
589 1-3-13-1-1-13 1-3-13-2-1-13
590 1-3-13-1-1-14 1-3-13-2-1-14
591 1-3-13-1-1-15 1-3-13-2-1-15
592 1-3-13-1-1-16 1-3-13-2-1-16
593 1-3-13-1-1-17 1-3-13-2-1-17
594 1-3-13-1-1-18 1-3-13-2-1-18
595 1-3-13-1-1-19 1-3-13-2-1-19
596 1-3-13-1-1-20 1-3-13-2-1-20
597 1-3-13-1-1-21 1-3-13-2-1-21
598 1-3-13-1-1-22 1-3-13-2-1-22
599 1-3-13-1-1-23 1-3-13-2-1-23
600 1-3-13-1-1-24 1-3-13-2-1-24
601 1-3-13-1-1-25 1-3-13-2-1-25
602 1-3-13-1-1-26 1-3-13-2-1-26

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
3AG 24622 EAAA TQZZA Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary 4-265
Issue 1 February 2010 Use pursuant to applicable agreements
System turn-up and testing Procedure 4-35: 10 GBE error-free verification setup

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Table 4-12 GBE10 STS-3C connections (shelf fully populated with 10GBEs)
(continued)
Order From STS-3C(Rack-Shelf- To STS-3C(Rack-Shelf-Slot-
Slot-Port#-1-STS3C#) Port#-1-STS3C#)
Working Facility Cross-connections
603 1-3-13-1-1-27 1-3-13-2-1-27
604 1-3-13-1-1-28 1-3-13-2-1-28
605 1-3-13-1-1-29 1-3-13-2-1-29
606 1-3-13-1-1-30 1-3-13-2-1-30
607 1-3-13-1-1-31 1-3-13-2-1-31
608 1-3-13-1-1-32 1-3-13-2-1-32
609 1-3-13-1-1-33 1-3-13-2-1-33
610 1-3-13-1-1-34 1-3-13-2-1-34
611 1-3-13-1-1-35 1-3-13-2-1-35
612 1-3-13-1-1-36 1-3-13-2-1-36
613 1-3-13-1-1-37 1-3-13-2-1-37
614 1-3-13-1-1-38 1-3-13-2-1-38
615 1-3-13-1-1-39 1-3-13-2-1-39
616 1-3-13-1-1-40 1-3-13-2-1-40
617 1-3-13-1-1-41 1-3-13-2-1-41
618 1-3-13-1-1-42 1-3-13-2-1-42
619 1-3-13-1-1-43 1-3-13-2-1-43
620 1-3-13-1-1-44 1-3-13-2-1-44
621 1-3-13-1-1-45 1-3-13-2-1-45
622 1-3-13-1-1-46 1-3-13-2-1-46
623 1-3-13-1-1-47 1-3-13-2-1-47
624 1-3-13-1-1-48 1-3-13-2-1-48
625 1-3-13-1-1-49 1-3-13-2-1-49
626 1-3-13-1-1-50 1-3-13-2-1-50
627 1-3-13-1-1-51 1-3-13-2-1-51
628 1-3-13-1-1-52 1-3-13-2-1-52
629 1-3-13-1-1-53 1-3-13-2-1-53
630 1-3-13-1-1-54 1-3-13-2-1-54

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
4-266 Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary 3AG 24622 EAAA TQZZA
Use pursuant to applicable agreements Issue 1 February 2010
System turn-up and testing Procedure 4-35: 10 GBE error-free verification setup

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Table 4-12 GBE10 STS-3C connections (shelf fully populated with 10GBEs)
(continued)
Order From STS-3C(Rack-Shelf- To STS-3C(Rack-Shelf-Slot-
Slot-Port#-1-STS3C#) Port#-1-STS3C#)
Working Facility Cross-connections
631 1-3-13-1-1-55 1-3-13-2-1-55
632 1-3-13-1-1-56 1-3-13-2-1-56
633 1-3-13-1-1-57 1-3-13-2-1-57
634 1-3-13-1-1-58 1-3-13-2-1-58
635 1-3-13-1-1-59 1-3-13-2-1-59
636 1-3-13-1-1-60 1-3-13-2-1-60
637 1-3-13-1-1-61 1-3-13-2-1-61
638 1-3-13-1-1-62 1-3-13-2-1-62
639 1-3-13-1-1-63 1-3-13-2-1-63
640 1-3-13-1-1-64 1-3-13-2-1-64
641 1-3-14-1-1-1 1-3-14-2-1-1
642 1-3-14-1-1-2 1-3-14-2-1-2
643 1-3-14-1-1-3 1-3-14-2-1-3
644 1-3-14-1-1-4 1-3-14-2-1-4
645 1-3-14-1-1-5 1-3-14-2-1-5
646 1-3-14-1-1-6 1-3-14-2-1-6
647 1-3-14-1-1-7 1-3-14-2-1-7
648 1-3-14-1-1-8 1-3-14-2-1-8
649 1-3-14-1-1-9 1-3-14-2-1-9
650 1-3-14-1-1-10 1-3-14-2-1-10
651 1-3-14-1-1-11 1-3-14-2-1-11
652 1-3-14-1-1-12 1-3-14-2-1-12
653 1-3-14-1-1-13 1-3-14-2-1-13
654 1-3-14-1-1-14 1-3-14-2-1-14
655 1-3-14-1-1-15 1-3-14-2-1-15
656 1-3-14-1-1-16 1-3-14-2-1-16
657 1-3-14-1-1-17 1-3-14-2-1-17
658 1-3-14-1-1-18 1-3-14-2-1-18

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
3AG 24622 EAAA TQZZA Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary 4-267
Issue 1 February 2010 Use pursuant to applicable agreements
System turn-up and testing Procedure 4-35: 10 GBE error-free verification setup

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Table 4-12 GBE10 STS-3C connections (shelf fully populated with 10GBEs)
(continued)
Order From STS-3C(Rack-Shelf- To STS-3C(Rack-Shelf-Slot-
Slot-Port#-1-STS3C#) Port#-1-STS3C#)
Working Facility Cross-connections
659 1-3-14-1-1-19 1-3-14-2-1-19
660 1-3-14-1-1-20 1-3-14-2-1-20
661 1-3-14-1-1-21 1-3-14-2-1-21
662 1-3-14-1-1-22 1-3-14-2-1-22
663 1-3-14-1-1-23 1-3-14-2-1-23
664 1-3-14-1-1-24 1-3-14-2-1-24
665 1-3-14-1-1-25 1-3-14-2-1-25
666 1-3-14-1-1-26 1-3-14-2-1-26
667 1-3-14-1-1-27 1-3-14-2-1-27
668 1-3-14-1-1-28 1-3-14-2-1-28
669 1-3-14-1-1-29 1-3-14-2-1-29
670 1-3-14-1-1-30 1-3-14-2-1-30
671 1-3-14-1-1-31 1-3-14-2-1-31
672 1-3-14-1-1-32 1-3-14-2-1-32
673 1-3-14-1-1-33 1-3-14-2-1-33
674 1-3-14-1-1-34 1-3-14-2-1-34
675 1-3-14-1-1-35 1-3-14-2-1-35
676 1-3-14-1-1-36 1-3-14-2-1-36
677 1-3-14-1-1-37 1-3-14-2-1-37
678 1-3-14-1-1-38 1-3-14-2-1-38
679 1-3-14-1-1-39 1-3-14-2-1-39
680 1-3-14-1-1-40 1-3-14-2-1-40
681 1-3-14-1-1-41 1-3-14-2-1-41
682 1-3-14-1-1-42 1-3-14-2-1-42
683 1-3-14-1-1-43 1-3-14-2-1-43
684 1-3-14-1-1-44 1-3-14-2-1-44
685 1-3-14-1-1-45 1-3-14-2-1-45
686 1-3-14-1-1-46 1-3-14-2-1-46

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
4-268 Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary 3AG 24622 EAAA TQZZA
Use pursuant to applicable agreements Issue 1 February 2010
System turn-up and testing Procedure 4-35: 10 GBE error-free verification setup

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Table 4-12 GBE10 STS-3C connections (shelf fully populated with 10GBEs)
(continued)
Order From STS-3C(Rack-Shelf- To STS-3C(Rack-Shelf-Slot-
Slot-Port#-1-STS3C#) Port#-1-STS3C#)
Working Facility Cross-connections
687 1-3-14-1-1-47 1-3-14-2-1-47
688 1-3-14-1-1-48 1-3-14-2-1-48
689 1-3-14-1-1-49 1-3-14-2-1-49
690 1-3-14-1-1-50 1-3-14-2-1-50
691 1-3-14-1-1-51 1-3-14-2-1-51
692 1-3-14-1-1-52 1-3-14-2-1-52
693 1-3-14-1-1-53 1-3-14-2-1-53
694 1-3-14-1-1-54 1-3-14-2-1-54
695 1-3-14-1-1-55 1-3-14-2-1-55
696 1-3-14-1-1-56 1-3-14-2-1-56
697 1-3-14-1-1-57 1-3-14-2-1-57
698 1-3-14-1-1-58 1-3-14-2-1-58
699 1-3-14-1-1-59 1-3-14-2-1-59
700 1-3-14-1-1-60 1-3-14-2-1-60
701 1-3-14-1-1-61 1-3-14-2-1-61
702 1-3-14-1-1-62 1-3-14-2-1-62
703 1-3-14-1-1-63 1-3-14-2-1-63
704 1-3-14-1-1-64 1-3-14-2-1-64
705 1-3-15-1-1-1 1-3-15-2-1-1
706 1-3-15-1-1-2 1-3-15-2-1-2
707 1-3-15-1-1-3 1-3-15-2-1-3
708 1-3-15-1-1-4 1-3-15-2-1-4
709 1-3-15-1-1-5 1-3-15-2-1-5
710 1-3-15-1-1-6 1-3-15-2-1-6
711 1-3-15-1-1-7 1-3-15-2-1-7
712 1-3-15-1-1-8 1-3-15-2-1-8
713 1-3-15-1-1-9 1-3-15-2-1-9
714 1-3-15-1-1-10 1-3-15-2-1-10

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
3AG 24622 EAAA TQZZA Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary 4-269
Issue 1 February 2010 Use pursuant to applicable agreements
System turn-up and testing Procedure 4-35: 10 GBE error-free verification setup

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Table 4-12 GBE10 STS-3C connections (shelf fully populated with 10GBEs)
(continued)
Order From STS-3C(Rack-Shelf- To STS-3C(Rack-Shelf-Slot-
Slot-Port#-1-STS3C#) Port#-1-STS3C#)
Working Facility Cross-connections
715 1-3-15-1-1-11 1-3-15-2-1-11
716 1-3-15-1-1-12 1-3-15-2-1-12
717 1-3-15-1-1-13 1-3-15-2-1-13
718 1-3-15-1-1-14 1-3-15-2-1-14
719 1-3-15-1-1-15 1-3-15-2-1-15
720 1-3-15-1-1-16 1-3-15-2-1-16
721 1-3-15-1-1-17 1-3-15-2-1-17
722 1-3-15-1-1-18 1-3-15-2-1-18
723 1-3-15-1-1-19 1-3-15-2-1-19
724 1-3-15-1-1-20 1-3-15-2-1-20
725 1-3-15-1-1-21 1-3-15-2-1-21
726 1-3-15-1-1-22 1-3-15-2-1-22
727 1-3-15-1-1-23 1-3-15-2-1-23
728 1-3-15-1-1-24 1-3-15-2-1-24
729 1-3-15-1-1-25 1-3-15-2-1-25
730 1-3-15-1-1-26 1-3-15-2-1-26
731 1-3-15-1-1-27 1-3-15-2-1-27
732 1-3-15-1-1-28 1-3-15-2-1-28
733 1-3-15-1-1-29 1-3-15-2-1-29
734 1-3-15-1-1-30 1-3-15-2-1-30
735 1-3-15-1-1-31 1-3-15-2-1-31
736 1-3-15-1-1-32 1-3-15-2-1-32
737 1-3-15-1-1-33 1-3-15-2-1-33
738 1-3-15-1-1-34 1-3-15-2-1-34
739 1-3-15-1-1-35 1-3-15-2-1-35
740 1-3-15-1-1-36 1-3-15-2-1-36
741 1-3-15-1-1-37 1-3-15-2-1-37
742 1-3-15-1-1-38 1-3-15-2-1-38

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
4-270 Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary 3AG 24622 EAAA TQZZA
Use pursuant to applicable agreements Issue 1 February 2010
System turn-up and testing Procedure 4-35: 10 GBE error-free verification setup

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Table 4-12 GBE10 STS-3C connections (shelf fully populated with 10GBEs)
(continued)
Order From STS-3C(Rack-Shelf- To STS-3C(Rack-Shelf-Slot-
Slot-Port#-1-STS3C#) Port#-1-STS3C#)
Working Facility Cross-connections
743 1-3-15-1-1-39 1-3-15-2-1-39
744 1-3-15-1-1-40 1-3-15-2-1-40
745 1-3-15-1-1-41 1-3-15-2-1-41
746 1-3-15-1-1-42 1-3-15-2-1-42
747 1-3-15-1-1-43 1-3-15-2-1-43
748 1-3-15-1-1-44 1-3-15-2-1-44
749 1-3-15-1-1-45 1-3-15-2-1-45
750 1-3-15-1-1-46 1-3-15-2-1-46
751 1-3-15-1-1-47 1-3-15-2-1-47
752 1-3-15-1-1-48 1-3-15-2-1-48
753 1-3-15-1-1-49 1-3-15-2-1-49
754 1-3-15-1-1-50 1-3-15-2-1-50
755 1-3-15-1-1-51 1-3-15-2-1-51
756 1-3-15-1-1-52 1-3-15-2-1-52
757 1-3-15-1-1-53 1-3-15-2-1-53
758 1-3-15-1-1-54 1-3-15-2-1-54
759 1-3-15-1-1-55 1-3-15-2-1-55
760 1-3-15-1-1-56 1-3-15-2-1-56
761 1-3-15-1-1-57 1-3-15-2-1-57
762 1-3-15-1-1-58 1-3-15-2-1-58
763 1-3-15-1-1-59 1-3-15-2-1-59
764 1-3-15-1-1-60 1-3-15-2-1-60
765 1-3-15-1-1-61 1-3-15-2-1-61
766 1-3-15-1-1-62 1-3-15-2-1-62
767 1-3-15-1-1-63 1-3-15-2-1-63
768 1-3-15-1-1-64 1-3-15-2-1-64
769 1-3-16-1-1-1 1-3-16-2-1-1
770 1-3-16-1-1-2 1-3-16-2-1-2

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
3AG 24622 EAAA TQZZA Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary 4-271
Issue 1 February 2010 Use pursuant to applicable agreements
System turn-up and testing Procedure 4-35: 10 GBE error-free verification setup

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Table 4-12 GBE10 STS-3C connections (shelf fully populated with 10GBEs)
(continued)
Order From STS-3C(Rack-Shelf- To STS-3C(Rack-Shelf-Slot-
Slot-Port#-1-STS3C#) Port#-1-STS3C#)
Working Facility Cross-connections
771 1-3-16-1-1-3 1-3-16-2-1-3
772 1-3-16-1-1-4 1-3-16-2-1-4
773 1-3-16-1-1-5 1-3-16-2-1-5
774 1-3-16-1-1-6 1-3-16-2-1-6
775 1-3-16-1-1-7 1-3-16-2-1-7
776 1-3-16-1-1-8 1-3-16-2-1-8
777 1-3-16-1-1-9 1-3-16-2-1-9
778 1-3-16-1-1-10 1-3-16-2-1-10
779 1-3-16-1-1-11 1-3-16-2-1-11
780 1-3-16-1-1-12 1-3-16-2-1-12
781 1-3-16-1-1-13 1-3-16-2-1-13
782 1-3-16-1-1-14 1-3-16-2-1-14
783 1-3-16-1-1-15 1-3-16-2-1-15
784 1-3-16-1-1-16 1-3-16-2-1-16
785 1-3-16-1-1-17 1-3-16-2-1-17
786 1-3-16-1-1-18 1-3-16-2-1-18
787 1-3-16-1-1-19 1-3-16-2-1-19
788 1-3-16-1-1-20 1-3-16-2-1-20
789 1-3-16-1-1-21 1-3-16-2-1-21
790 1-3-16-1-1-22 1-3-16-2-1-22
791 1-3-16-1-1-23 1-3-16-2-1-23
792 1-3-16-1-1-24 1-3-16-2-1-24
793 1-3-16-1-1-25 1-3-16-2-1-25
794 1-3-16-1-1-26 1-3-16-2-1-26
795 1-3-16-1-1-27 1-3-16-2-1-27
796 1-3-16-1-1-28 1-3-16-2-1-28
797 1-3-16-1-1-29 1-3-16-2-1-29
798 1-3-16-1-1-30 1-3-16-2-1-30

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
4-272 Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary 3AG 24622 EAAA TQZZA
Use pursuant to applicable agreements Issue 1 February 2010
System turn-up and testing Procedure 4-35: 10 GBE error-free verification setup

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Table 4-12 GBE10 STS-3C connections (shelf fully populated with 10GBEs)
(continued)
Order From STS-3C(Rack-Shelf- To STS-3C(Rack-Shelf-Slot-
Slot-Port#-1-STS3C#) Port#-1-STS3C#)
Working Facility Cross-connections
799 1-3-16-1-1-31 1-3-16-2-1-31
800 1-3-16-1-1-32 1-3-16-2-1-32
801 1-3-16-1-1-33 1-3-16-2-1-33
802 1-3-16-1-1-34 1-3-16-2-1-34
803 1-3-16-1-1-35 1-3-16-2-1-35
804 1-3-16-1-1-36 1-3-16-2-1-36
805 1-3-16-1-1-37 1-3-16-2-1-37
806 1-3-16-1-1-38 1-3-16-2-1-38
807 1-3-16-1-1-39 1-3-16-2-1-39
808 1-3-16-1-1-40 1-3-16-2-1-40
809 1-3-16-1-1-41 1-3-16-2-1-41
810 1-3-16-1-1-42 1-3-16-2-1-42
811 1-3-16-1-1-43 1-3-16-2-1-43
812 1-3-16-1-1-44 1-3-16-2-1-44
813 1-3-16-1-1-45 1-3-16-2-1-45
814 1-3-16-1-1-46 1-3-16-2-1-46
815 1-3-16-1-1-47 1-3-16-2-1-47
816 1-3-16-1-1-48 1-3-16-2-1-48
817 1-3-16-1-1-49 1-3-16-2-1-49
818 1-3-16-1-1-50 1-3-16-2-1-50
819 1-3-16-1-1-51 1-3-16-2-1-51
820 1-3-16-1-1-52 1-3-16-2-1-52
821 1-3-16-1-1-53 1-3-16-2-1-53
822 1-3-16-1-1-54 1-3-16-2-1-54
823 1-3-16-1-1-55 1-3-16-2-1-55
824 1-3-16-1-1-56 1-3-16-2-1-56
825 1-3-16-1-1-57 1-3-16-2-1-57
826 1-3-16-1-1-58 1-3-16-2-1-58

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
3AG 24622 EAAA TQZZA Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary 4-273
Issue 1 February 2010 Use pursuant to applicable agreements
System turn-up and testing Procedure 4-35: 10 GBE error-free verification setup

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Table 4-12 GBE10 STS-3C connections (shelf fully populated with 10GBEs)
(continued)
Order From STS-3C(Rack-Shelf- To STS-3C(Rack-Shelf-Slot-
Slot-Port#-1-STS3C#) Port#-1-STS3C#)
Working Facility Cross-connections
827 1-3-16-1-1-59 1-3-16-2-1-59
828 1-3-16-1-1-60 1-3-16-2-1-60
829 1-3-16-1-1-61 1-3-16-2-1-61
830 1-3-16-1-1-62 1-3-16-2-1-62
831 1-3-16-1-1-63 1-3-16-2-1-63
832 1-3-16-1-1-64 1-3-16-2-1-64
833 1-3-17-1-1-1 1-3-17-2-1-1
834 1-3-17-1-1-2 1-3-17-2-1-2
835 1-3-17-1-1-3 1-3-17-2-1-3
836 1-3-17-1-1-4 1-3-17-2-1-4
837 1-3-17-1-1-5 1-3-17-2-1-5
838 1-3-17-1-1-6 1-3-17-2-1-6
839 1-3-17-1-1-7 1-3-17-2-1-7
840 1-3-17-1-1-8 1-3-17-2-1-8
841 1-3-17-1-1-9 1-3-17-2-1-9
842 1-3-17-1-1-10 1-3-17-2-1-10
843 1-3-17-1-1-11 1-3-17-2-1-11
844 1-3-17-1-1-12 1-3-17-2-1-12
845 1-3-17-1-1-13 1-3-17-2-1-13
846 1-3-17-1-1-14 1-3-17-2-1-14
847 1-3-17-1-1-15 1-3-17-2-1-15
848 1-3-17-1-1-16 1-3-17-2-1-16
849 1-3-17-1-1-17 1-3-17-2-1-17
850 1-3-17-1-1-18 1-3-17-2-1-18
851 1-3-17-1-1-19 1-3-17-2-1-19
852 1-3-17-1-1-20 1-3-17-2-1-20
853 1-3-17-1-1-21 1-3-17-2-1-21
854 1-3-17-1-1-22 1-3-17-2-1-22

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
4-274 Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary 3AG 24622 EAAA TQZZA
Use pursuant to applicable agreements Issue 1 February 2010
System turn-up and testing Procedure 4-35: 10 GBE error-free verification setup

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Table 4-12 GBE10 STS-3C connections (shelf fully populated with 10GBEs)
(continued)
Order From STS-3C(Rack-Shelf- To STS-3C(Rack-Shelf-Slot-
Slot-Port#-1-STS3C#) Port#-1-STS3C#)
Working Facility Cross-connections
855 1-3-17-1-1-23 1-3-17-2-1-23
856 1-3-17-1-1-24 1-3-17-2-1-24
857 1-3-17-1-1-25 1-3-17-2-1-25
858 1-3-17-1-1-26 1-3-17-2-1-26
859 1-3-17-1-1-27 1-3-17-2-1-27
860 1-3-17-1-1-28 1-3-17-2-1-28
861 1-3-17-1-1-29 1-3-17-2-1-29
862 1-3-17-1-1-30 1-3-17-2-1-30
863 1-3-17-1-1-31 1-3-17-2-1-31
864 1-3-17-1-1-32 1-3-17-2-1-32
865 1-3-17-1-1-33 1-3-17-2-1-33
866 1-3-17-1-1-34 1-3-17-2-1-34
867 1-3-17-1-1-35 1-3-17-2-1-35
868 1-3-17-1-1-36 1-3-17-2-1-36
869 1-3-17-1-1-37 1-3-17-2-1-37
870 1-3-17-1-1-38 1-3-17-2-1-38
871 1-3-17-1-1-39 1-3-17-2-1-39
872 1-3-17-1-1-40 1-3-17-2-1-40
873 1-3-17-1-1-41 1-3-17-2-1-41
874 1-3-17-1-1-42 1-3-17-2-1-42
875 1-3-17-1-1-43 1-3-17-2-1-43
876 1-3-17-1-1-44 1-3-17-2-1-44
877 1-3-17-1-1-45 1-3-17-2-1-45
878 1-3-17-1-1-46 1-3-17-2-1-46
879 1-3-17-1-1-47 1-3-17-2-1-47
880 1-3-17-1-1-48 1-3-17-2-1-48
881 1-3-17-1-1-49 1-3-17-2-1-49
882 1-3-17-1-1-50 1-3-17-2-1-50

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
3AG 24622 EAAA TQZZA Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary 4-275
Issue 1 February 2010 Use pursuant to applicable agreements
System turn-up and testing Procedure 4-35: 10 GBE error-free verification setup

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Table 4-12 GBE10 STS-3C connections (shelf fully populated with 10GBEs)
(continued)
Order From STS-3C(Rack-Shelf- To STS-3C(Rack-Shelf-Slot-
Slot-Port#-1-STS3C#) Port#-1-STS3C#)
Working Facility Cross-connections
883 1-3-17-1-1-51 1-3-17-2-1-51
884 1-3-17-1-1-52 1-3-17-2-1-52
885 1-3-17-1-1-53 1-3-17-2-1-53
886 1-3-17-1-1-54 1-3-17-2-1-54
887 1-3-17-1-1-55 1-3-17-2-1-55
888 1-3-17-1-1-56 1-3-17-2-1-56
889 1-3-17-1-1-57 1-3-17-2-1-57
890 1-3-17-1-1-58 1-3-17-2-1-58
891 1-3-17-1-1-59 1-3-17-2-1-59
892 1-3-17-1-1-60 1-3-17-2-1-60
893 1-3-17-1-1-61 1-3-17-2-1-61
894 1-3-17-1-1-62 1-3-17-2-1-62
895 1-3-17-1-1-63 1-3-17-2-1-63
896 1-3-17-1-1-64 1-3-17-2-1-64
897 1-3-18-1-1-1 1-3-18-2-1-1
898 1-3-18-1-1-2 1-3-18-2-1-2
899 1-3-18-1-1-3 1-3-18-2-1-3
900 1-3-18-1-1-4 1-3-18-2-1-4
901 1-3-18-1-1-5 1-3-18-2-1-5
902 1-3-18-1-1-6 1-3-18-2-1-6
903 1-3-18-1-1-7 1-3-18-2-1-7
904 1-3-18-1-1-8 1-3-18-2-1-8
905 1-3-18-1-1-9 1-3-18-2-1-9
906 1-3-18-1-1-10 1-3-18-2-1-10
907 1-3-18-1-1-11 1-3-18-2-1-11
908 1-3-18-1-1-12 1-3-18-2-1-12
909 1-3-18-1-1-13 1-3-18-2-1-13
910 1-3-18-1-1-14 1-3-18-2-1-14

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
4-276 Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary 3AG 24622 EAAA TQZZA
Use pursuant to applicable agreements Issue 1 February 2010
System turn-up and testing Procedure 4-35: 10 GBE error-free verification setup

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Table 4-12 GBE10 STS-3C connections (shelf fully populated with 10GBEs)
(continued)
Order From STS-3C(Rack-Shelf- To STS-3C(Rack-Shelf-Slot-
Slot-Port#-1-STS3C#) Port#-1-STS3C#)
Working Facility Cross-connections
911 1-3-18-1-1-15 1-3-18-2-1-15
912 1-3-18-1-1-16 1-3-18-2-1-16
913 1-3-18-1-1-17 1-3-18-2-1-17
914 1-3-18-1-1-18 1-3-18-2-1-18
915 1-3-18-1-1-19 1-3-18-2-1-19
916 1-3-18-1-1-20 1-3-18-2-1-20
917 1-3-18-1-1-21 1-3-18-2-1-21
918 1-3-18-1-1-22 1-3-18-2-1-22
919 1-3-18-1-1-23 1-3-18-2-1-23
920 1-3-18-1-1-24 1-3-18-2-1-24
921 1-3-18-1-1-25 1-3-18-2-1-25
922 1-3-18-1-1-26 1-3-18-2-1-26
923 1-3-18-1-1-27 1-3-18-2-1-27
924 1-3-18-1-1-28 1-3-18-2-1-28
925 1-3-18-1-1-29 1-3-18-2-1-29
926 1-3-18-1-1-30 1-3-18-2-1-30
927 1-3-18-1-1-31 1-3-18-2-1-31
928 1-3-18-1-1-32 1-3-18-2-1-32
929 1-3-18-1-1-33 1-3-18-2-1-33
930 1-3-18-1-1-34 1-3-18-2-1-34
931 1-3-18-1-1-35 1-3-18-2-1-35
932 1-3-18-1-1-36 1-3-18-2-1-36
933 1-3-18-1-1-37 1-3-18-2-1-37
934 1-3-18-1-1-38 1-3-18-2-1-38
935 1-3-18-1-1-39 1-3-18-2-1-39
936 1-3-18-1-1-40 1-3-18-2-1-40
937 1-3-18-1-1-41 1-3-18-2-1-41
938 1-3-18-1-1-42 1-3-18-2-1-42

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
3AG 24622 EAAA TQZZA Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary 4-277
Issue 1 February 2010 Use pursuant to applicable agreements
System turn-up and testing Procedure 4-35: 10 GBE error-free verification setup

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Table 4-12 GBE10 STS-3C connections (shelf fully populated with 10GBEs)
(continued)
Order From STS-3C(Rack-Shelf- To STS-3C(Rack-Shelf-Slot-
Slot-Port#-1-STS3C#) Port#-1-STS3C#)
Working Facility Cross-connections
939 1-3-18-1-1-43 1-3-18-2-1-43
940 1-3-18-1-1-44 1-3-18-2-1-44
941 1-3-18-1-1-45 1-3-18-2-1-45
942 1-3-18-1-1-46 1-3-18-2-1-46
943 1-3-18-1-1-47 1-3-18-2-1-47
944 1-3-18-1-1-48 1-3-18-2-1-48
945 1-3-18-1-1-49 1-3-18-2-1-49
946 1-3-18-1-1-50 1-3-18-2-1-50
947 1-3-18-1-1-51 1-3-18-2-1-51
948 1-3-18-1-1-52 1-3-18-2-1-52
949 1-3-18-1-1-53 1-3-18-2-1-53
950 1-3-18-1-1-54 1-3-18-2-1-54
951 1-3-18-1-1-55 1-3-18-2-1-55
952 1-3-18-1-1-56 1-3-18-2-1-56
953 1-3-18-1-1-57 1-3-18-2-1-57
954 1-3-18-1-1-58 1-3-18-2-1-58
955 1-3-18-1-1-59 1-3-18-2-1-59
956 1-3-18-1-1-60 1-3-18-2-1-60
957 1-3-18-1-1-61 1-3-18-2-1-61
958 1-3-18-1-1-62 1-3-18-2-1-62
959 1-3-18-1-1-63 1-3-18-2-1-63
960 1-3-18-1-1-64 1-3-18-2-1-64
961 1-3-19-1-1-1 1-3-19-2-1-1
962 1-3-19-1-1-2 1-3-19-2-1-2
963 1-3-19-1-1-3 1-3-19-2-1-3
964 1-3-19-1-1-4 1-3-19-2-1-4
965 1-3-19-1-1-5 1-3-19-2-1-5
966 1-3-19-1-1-6 1-3-19-2-1-6

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
4-278 Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary 3AG 24622 EAAA TQZZA
Use pursuant to applicable agreements Issue 1 February 2010
System turn-up and testing Procedure 4-35: 10 GBE error-free verification setup

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Table 4-12 GBE10 STS-3C connections (shelf fully populated with 10GBEs)
(continued)
Order From STS-3C(Rack-Shelf- To STS-3C(Rack-Shelf-Slot-
Slot-Port#-1-STS3C#) Port#-1-STS3C#)
Working Facility Cross-connections
967 1-3-19-1-1-7 1-3-19-2-1-7
968 1-3-19-1-1-8 1-3-19-2-1-8
969 1-3-19-1-1-9 1-3-19-2-1-9
970 1-3-19-1-1-10 1-3-19-2-1-10
971 1-3-19-1-1-11 1-3-19-2-1-11
972 1-3-19-1-1-12 1-3-19-2-1-12
973 1-3-19-1-1-13 1-3-19-2-1-13
974 1-3-19-1-1-14 1-3-19-2-1-14
975 1-3-19-1-1-15 1-3-19-2-1-15
976 1-3-19-1-1-16 1-3-19-2-1-16
977 1-3-19-1-1-17 1-3-19-2-1-17
978 1-3-19-1-1-18 1-3-19-2-1-18
979 1-3-19-1-1-19 1-3-19-2-1-19
980 1-3-19-1-1-20 1-3-19-2-1-20
981 1-3-19-1-1-21 1-3-19-2-1-21
982 1-3-19-1-1-22 1-3-19-2-1-22
983 1-3-19-1-1-23 1-3-19-2-1-23
984 1-3-19-1-1-24 1-3-19-2-1-24
985 1-3-19-1-1-25 1-3-19-2-1-25
986 1-3-19-1-1-26 1-3-19-2-1-26
987 1-3-19-1-1-27 1-3-19-2-1-27
988 1-3-19-1-1-28 1-3-19-2-1-28
989 1-3-19-1-1-29 1-3-19-2-1-29
990 1-3-19-1-1-30 1-3-19-2-1-30
991 1-3-19-1-1-31 1-3-19-2-1-31
992 1-3-19-1-1-32 1-3-19-2-1-32
993 1-3-19-1-1-33 1-3-19-2-1-33
994 1-3-19-1-1-34 1-3-19-2-1-34

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
3AG 24622 EAAA TQZZA Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary 4-279
Issue 1 February 2010 Use pursuant to applicable agreements
System turn-up and testing Procedure 4-35: 10 GBE error-free verification setup

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Table 4-12 GBE10 STS-3C connections (shelf fully populated with 10GBEs)
(continued)
Order From STS-3C(Rack-Shelf- To STS-3C(Rack-Shelf-Slot-
Slot-Port#-1-STS3C#) Port#-1-STS3C#)
Working Facility Cross-connections
995 1-3-19-1-1-35 1-3-19-2-1-35
996 1-3-19-1-1-36 1-3-19-2-1-36
997 1-3-19-1-1-37 1-3-19-2-1-37
998 1-3-19-1-1-38 1-3-19-2-1-38
999 1-3-19-1-1-39 1-3-19-2-1-39
1000 1-3-19-1-1-40 1-3-19-2-1-40
1001 1-3-19-1-1-41 1-3-19-2-1-41
1002 1-3-19-1-1-42 1-3-19-2-1-42
1003 1-3-19-1-1-43 1-3-19-2-1-43
1004 1-3-19-1-1-44 1-3-19-2-1-44
1005 1-3-19-1-1-45 1-3-19-2-1-45
1006 1-3-19-1-1-46 1-3-19-2-1-46
1007 1-3-19-1-1-47 1-3-19-2-1-47
1008 1-3-19-1-1-48 1-3-19-2-1-48
1009 1-3-19-1-1-49 1-3-19-2-1-49
1010 1-3-19-1-1-50 1-3-19-2-1-50
1011 1-3-19-1-1-51 1-3-19-2-1-51
1012 1-3-19-1-1-52 1-3-19-2-1-52
1013 1-3-19-1-1-53 1-3-19-2-1-53
1014 1-3-19-1-1-54 1-3-19-2-1-54
1015 1-3-19-1-1-55 1-3-19-2-1-55
1016 1-3-19-1-1-56 1-3-19-2-1-56
1017 1-3-19-1-1-57 1-3-19-2-1-57
1018 1-3-19-1-1-58 1-3-19-2-1-58
1019 1-3-19-1-1-59 1-3-19-2-1-59
1020 1-3-19-1-1-60 1-3-19-2-1-60
1021 1-3-19-1-1-61 1-3-19-2-1-61
1022 1-3-19-1-1-62 1-3-19-2-1-62

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
4-280 Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary 3AG 24622 EAAA TQZZA
Use pursuant to applicable agreements Issue 1 February 2010
System turn-up and testing Procedure 4-35: 10 GBE error-free verification setup

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Table 4-12 GBE10 STS-3C connections (shelf fully populated with 10GBEs)
(continued)
Order From STS-3C(Rack-Shelf- To STS-3C(Rack-Shelf-Slot-
Slot-Port#-1-STS3C#) Port#-1-STS3C#)
Working Facility Cross-connections
1023 1-3-19-1-1-63 1-3-19-2-1-63
1024 1-3-19-1-1-64 1-3-19-2-1-64

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
3AG 24622 EAAA TQZZA Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary 4-281
Issue 1 February 2010 Use pursuant to applicable agreements
System turn-up and testing Procedure 4-36: Provision equipment protection

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Procedure 4-36: Provision equipment protection

When to use
This procedure provides setup instructions for provisioning equipment protection, both
FFP pairs and DX equipment pairs.

General
The procedure provisions OCn FFP protection pairs and ES64SC protection pairs.
For information on TL1 command syntax, refer to the 1678 MCC TL1 Command Guide.
Refer to Chapter 5, “1678 Metro Core Connect addresses and locations” for rack, shelf,
and module locations. In this procedure S=Slot, and P=Port.
Use “Verify OCn provisioning” (p. 4-377) with this procedure.

Task
Complete the following steps.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

1 PROVISION FAST FACILITY PROTECTION FOR OCn PORTS

System equipped with OCn ports?
If yes, go to Step 2.
If no, go to Step 4.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

2 Enter
ENT-FFP-OCn::PROTECTED_ID,PROTECTING_ID::::PTYPE=LINEAR,PSDIRN=
UNI; to create facility protection groups with working and protect facilities. Create paired
facility protection groups for all OC-n ports on all OCn modules in shelf. Use same port
number on adjacent modules for the FFP. For example: OCn-OCnSTSnC-1-3-12-5
(protected AID) and OCn-OCnSTSnC-1-3-13-5 (protecting AID).
Refer to “Verify OCn provisioning” (p. 4-377) and record completion.
where:
n=3 (for OC3), 12 (for OC12), 48 (for OC48), or 192 (for OC192)
PROTECTED_ID= OC-n AID
PROTECTING_ID= OC-n AID
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

3 Have FFPs been entered for all OC-n ports on every working OCn module?

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
4-282 Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary 3AG 24622 EAAA TQZZA
Use pursuant to applicable agreements Issue 1 February 2010
System turn-up and testing Procedure 4-36: Provision equipment protection

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
If yes, go to Step 4.
If no, go to Step 2.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

4 PROVISION ES64SC PROTECTION GROUPS

System equipped with ES64SCs?
If yes, go to Step 5.
If no, go to Step 8.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

5 Is test configuration for a single or a pair of ES64SCs?

If a single, go to Step 8.
If a pair, go to Step 6.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

6 Enter ENT-DX-EQPT::AID1,AID2; to provision ES64SC protection group.

where:
AID1=ES64SC AID in lower numbered slot (protected ES64SC).
AID2=ES64SC AID in higher numbered slot (protecting ES64SC).
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

7 Have ES64SC protection groups been entered for all ES64SC modules?
If yes, go to Step 8.
If no, go to Step 6.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

8 STOP. This procedure is complete.

E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
3AG 24622 EAAA TQZZA Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary 4-283
Issue 1 February 2010 Use pursuant to applicable agreements
System turn-up and testing Record site information

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Record site information

Use this checklist for Procedure 4-2: “Site-specific information” (p. 4-10).
Table 4-13 Site-specific information
Customer Name Sales Order Number Completion Date

Site Name and Address Start Date

Customer Representative Name Phone Number

Signature
Alcatel-Lucent Field Service Engineer Name Phone Number

Signature
Alcatel-Lucent User Access On_____ Off_____
Alcatel-Lucent User Modem Access Yes_____ No_____ Modem Number Location of TSG
Modem
Customer Contact Title Phone Number

Address (If different than above)

Software Generic Release Configured Database Loaded Yes_____ No_____

Configured Database Provisioned Yes_____ No_____ Software Checksums Verified Yes_____ No_____
(hard copy attached)
Customer Supplied IP Addresses Matrix Size: 320G or
640G
Number of GBE ports equipped: GBE error-free verification test run time:
15 minutes
Number of 10GBE ports equipped: 10GBE error-free verification test run time:
15 minutes

Number of OC-3 ports equipped: OC-3 error-free verification test run time:
15 minutes
Number of OC-12 ports equipped: OC-12 error-free verification test run time:
15 minutes
Number of OC-48 ports equipped: OC-48 error-free verification test run time:
15 minutes

Number of OC-192 ports equipped: OC-192 error-free verification test run time:
15 minutes

Notes:

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
4-284 Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary 3AG 24622 EAAA TQZZA
Use pursuant to applicable agreements Issue 1 February 2010
System turn-up and testing Visual inspection and module installation

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Visual inspection and module installation

Use this checklist for Procedure 4-3: “Perform overall visual inspection” (p. 4-12),
Procedure 4-5: “Verify NGTRU power” (p. 4-15), and Procedure 4-6: “Install plug-in
modules” (p. 4-27).
Refer to Table 4-14, “Visual inspection list” (p. 4-285), Table 4-15, “NGTRU modules”
(p. 4-285), Table 4-16, “Equipped shelf modules” (p. 4-285), and Table 4-17, “Equipped
SFPs/XFPs” (p. 4-286) to help ensure the site is ready to start turn up. Place a checkmark
(✓) in the Verified column of Table 4-14, “Visual inspection list” (p. 4-285), Table 4-15,
“NGTRU modules” (p. 4-285), and Table 4-16, “Equipped shelf modules” (p. 4-285) for
each item verified, and circle equipped item when multiple items are listed for a slot.
Indicate N/A in the Verified column of Table 4-16, “Equipped shelf modules”
(p. 4-285) for unequipped items. Use Table 4-17, “Equipped SFPs/XFPs” (p. 4-286) to
record the type of SFP or XFP installed in each IOC port.
Refer to Table 4-18, “Verify spare modules” (p. 4-288) and record spare modules. Place a
checkmark (✓) in the Verified column as each item is verified during the procedure.

Table 4-14 Visual inspection list

Description Verified (✓)
Office configuration is obtained from order.
Correct shelves are in designated locations.
Each shelf is secure and undamaged.
Modules are available per order.
CT cable kit (PN 3AL89585AAAA) F–Interface

Table 4-15 NGTRU modules

Slot Modules Verified (✓)
1 Step-up Converter
2 Step-up Converter
3 Blank panel
4 Blank panel
5 Blank panel
6 By-pass module

Table 4-16 Equipped shelf modules

Slot Modules Verified (✓)
1 FLCSERVA
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
3AG 24622 EAAA TQZZA Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary 4-285
Issue 1 February 2010 Use pursuant to applicable agreements
System turn-up and testing Visual inspection and module installation

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Table 4-16 Equipped shelf modules (continued)
Slot Modules Verified (✓)
2 ES64SC/P8GE/P16GE/P16S1S/P16S1S4/P8S16/P16S16/P2S64X/P2XGE/P4S64X
3 ES64SC/P8GE/P16GE/P16S1S/P16S1S4/P8S16/P16S16/P2S64X/P2XGE/P4S64X
4 ES64SC/P8GE/P16GE/P16S1S/P16S1S4/P8S16/P16S16/P2S64X/P2XGE/P4S64X
5 ES64SC/P8GE/P16GE/P16S1S/P16S1S4/P8S16/P16S16/P2S64X/P2XGE/P4S64X
6 ES64SC/P8GE/P16GE/P16S1S/P16S1S4/P8S16/P16S16/P2S64X/P2XGE/P4S64X
7 ES64SC/P8GE/P16GE/P16S1S/P16S1S4/P8S16/P16S16/P2S64X/P2XGE/P4S64X
8 ES64SC/P8GE/P16GE/P16S1S/P16S1S4/P8S16/P16S16/P2S64X/P2XGE/P4S64X
9 ES64SC/P8GE/P16GE/P16S1S/P16S1S4/P8S16/P16S16/P2S64X/P2XGE/P4S64X
10 MX320GA/MX640GA
11 MX320GA/MX640GA
12 ES64SC/P8GE/P16GE/P16S1S/P16S1S4/P8S16/P16S16/P2S64X/P2XGE/P4S64X
13 ES64SC/P8GE/P16GE/P16S1S/P16S1S4/P8S16/P16S16/P2S64X/P2XGE/P4S64X
14 ES64SC/P8GE/P16GE/P16S1S/P16S1S4/P8S16/P16S16/P2S64X/P2XGE/P4S64X
15 ES64SC/P8GE/P16GE/P16S1S/P16S1S4/P8S16/P16S16/P2S64X/P2XGE/P4S64X
16 ES64SC/P8GE/P16GE/P16S1S/P16S1S4/P8S16/P16S16/P2S64X/P2XGE/P4S64X
17 ES64SC/P8GE/P16GE/P16S1S/P16S1S4/P8S16/P16S16/P2S64X/P2XGE/P4S64X
18 ES64SC/P8GE/P16GE/P16S1S/P16S1S4/P8S16/P16S16/P2S64X/P2XGE/P4S64X
19 ES64SC/P8GE/P16GE/P16S1S/P16S1S4/P8S16/P16S16/P2S64X/P2XGE/P4S64X
20 FLCCONGI
21 BUSTERM
22 BUSTERM
23
24 PSF
25 PSF

Table 4-17 Equipped SFPs/XFPs

Port Slot
2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
1.
2.
3.

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
4-286 Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary 3AG 24622 EAAA TQZZA
Use pursuant to applicable agreements Issue 1 February 2010
System turn-up and testing Visual inspection and module installation

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Table 4-17 Equipped SFPs/XFPs (continued)
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
12.
13.
14.
15.
16.
Port Slot
12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
12.
13.
14.
15.
16.

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
3AG 24622 EAAA TQZZA Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary 4-287
Issue 1 February 2010 Use pursuant to applicable agreements
System turn-up and testing Visual inspection and module installation

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Table 4-18 Verify spare modules

Spare module type Verified (✓)

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
4-288 Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary 3AG 24622 EAAA TQZZA
Use pursuant to applicable agreements Issue 1 February 2010
System turn-up and testing Visual inspection and module installation

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Table 4-18 Verify spare modules (continued)
Spare module type Verified (✓)

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
3AG 24622 EAAA TQZZA Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary 4-289
Issue 1 February 2010 Use pursuant to applicable agreements
System turn-up and testing Recommended test equipment

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Recommended test equipment

Use this checklist for Procedure 4-4: “Verify test equipment availability” (p. 4-13).
Refer to Table 4-19, “Test equipment and miscellaneous items” (p. 4-290) for a list of
suggested test equipment. This list may change due to equipment availability or
obsolescence. Check off the recommended items in the USE column and add any
recommended item not listed at the bottom of the table. Also note the serial number and
calibration date where appropriate. Equivalent test equipment can be substituted for
recommended test equipment. Before substituting test equipment, carefully check the
procedure to determine required characteristics.
Personnel using test equipment must be familiar with its operation. Operating instructions
for test equipment are not included in this documentation. Obtain these instructions from
the manufacturer.
Table 4-19 Test equipment and miscellaneous items
Serial number/
USE Description Calibration date
Test set capable of measuring STS-1 through OC-192 or equivalent
Test set capable of measuring Gigabit Ethernet
Test set capable of measuring 10 Gigabit Ethernet
Optical power meter capable of measuring +3 to −30 dBm at wavelengths of
850 nm, 1310 nm, and 1550 nm
Optical power meter adapter, AMP 492328-2
Inspection microscope, 200X to 400X—Aerotech World Trade Ltd. AWT200
or AWT300
CLETOP® fiber-optic cleaner—Aerotech World Trade Ltd. PN 14100500
Optical fiber light source
Laser safety glasses
Plug-in style ESD wrist strap
CT cable kit (PN 3AL89585AAAA) F–Interface
(2) 5-foot FC-to-SC Single Mode (SM) optic cable
(2) SC-SC Single Mode (SM) optic cable
(1) Dual SC-MTRJ Single Mode (SM) optic cable
(1) SC-SC dual optic coupler
Single Mode and SC-to-SC looping plugs
Single Mode FC-to-SC jumper cables
LC-to-SC adapter cables

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
4-290 Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary 3AG 24622 EAAA TQZZA
Use pursuant to applicable agreements Issue 1 February 2010
System turn-up and testing Recommended test equipment

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Table 4-19 Test equipment and miscellaneous items (continued)
Serial number/
USE Description Calibration date
5 dBm optical attenuators
10 dBm optical attenuators
15 dBm optical attenuators

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
3AG 24622 EAAA TQZZA Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary 4-291
Issue 1 February 2010 Use pursuant to applicable agreements
System turn-up and testing Verify NGTRU power

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Verify NGTRU power

Use this checklist for Procedure 4-5: “Verify NGTRU power” (p. 4-15).
Refer to Table 4-20, “NGTRU verification” (p. 4-292) to verify NGTRU operation.
Record voltages and place a checkmark (✓) in the Verified column of Table 4-20,
“NGTRU verification” (p. 4-292) for each item verified.

Table 4-20 NGTRU verification

Description Voltage Verified (✓)
An input voltage within range, −40.5 V DC to −57 V DC
B input voltage within range, −40.5 V DC to −57 V DC
Slot 1 step-up converter output voltage
Slot 2 step-up converter output voltage
Step-up converter power LEDs OK

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
4-292 Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary 3AG 24622 EAAA TQZZA
Use pursuant to applicable agreements Issue 1 February 2010
System turn-up and testing Verify software download

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Verify software download

Use this checklist for Procedure 4-8: “Verify FLC software load” (p. 4-39).
Perform tasks listed and obtain a printout of messages. Place a checkmark (✓) in the
Accomplished column as each task is completed.

Table 4-21 Load software generic verification

Description Accomplished (✓)
Software was retrieved from FTP server successfully.
Generic copy of software was installed on node.
Image was activated successfully.
Record software release number __________.
Record software release date __________.
Temporary IP and Gateway were cleared.
Reboot was successful.
Default user was able to log in.

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
3AG 24622 EAAA TQZZA Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary 4-293
Issue 1 February 2010 Use pursuant to applicable agreements
System turn-up and testing Database backup

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Database backup
Use this checklist for Procedure 4-12: “Create clean database backup” (p. 4-54) and
Procedure 4-27: “Perform FTP restore of provisioning database” (p. 4-208).
For Procedure 4-12: “Create clean database backup” (p. 4-54) refer to Table 4-22, “Items
to verify before creating a clean backup” (p. 4-294) and Table 4-23, “Items to record after
creating a clean backup” (p. 4-294) and place a check mark (✓) in the Verified column as
each item is verified during backup procedure.
For Procedure 4-27: “Perform FTP restore of provisioning database” (p. 4-208) refer to
Table 4-24, “Items to record after restoring a backup” (p. 4-294) and place a check mark
(✓) in the Verified column as each item is verified during backup procedure.

Table 4-22 Items to verify before creating a clean backup

Description Verified (✓)
No alarms
No conditions

Table 4-23 Items to record after creating a clean backup

Description Verified (✓)
Provisioning database successfully backed up
Provisioning database successfully copied to FTP server

Table 4-24 Items to record after restoring a backup

Description Verified (✓)
Provisioning database copied from FTP server
Provisioning database successfully restored to NE

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
4-294 Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary 3AG 24622 EAAA TQZZA
Use pursuant to applicable agreements Issue 1 February 2010
System turn-up and testing Verify cabling between GBE IO and LGX panel

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Verify cabling between GBE IO and LGX panel

Purpose
Use this checklist for Procedure 4-14: “Confirm cabling between GBE I/O and LGX
panel” (p. 4-64). Refer to Table 4-25, “OC3 optical transmitter power measurements over
fiber” (p. 4-295) to record GBE module measurements.
GBE test set output level __________ dBm.
Table 4-25 OC3 optical transmitter power measurements over fiber
GBE-B-Sh-S-P Measured RX Measured TX
Prov. Order (OC3-Bay-Shelf Slot Port) level OK (✓) level OK (dBm) Notes
1. GBE-1-3-2-1
2. GBE-1-3-2-2
3. GBE-1-3-2-3
4. GBE-1-3-2-4
5. GBE-1-3-2-5
6. GBE-1-3-2-6
7. GBE-1-3-2-7
8. GBE-1-3-2-8
9. GBE-1-3-2-9
10. GBE-1-3-2-10
11. GBE-1-3-2-11
12. GBE-1-3-2-12
13. GBE-1-3-2-13
14. GBE-1-3-2-14
15. GBE-1-3-2-15
16. GBE-1-3-2-16
17. GBE-1-3-3-1
18. GBE-1-3-3-2
19. GBE-1-3-3-3
20. GBE-1-3-3-4
21. GBE-1-3-3-5
22. GBE-1-3-3-6
23. GBE-1-3-3-7

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
3AG 24622 EAAA TQZZA Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary 4-295
Issue 1 February 2010 Use pursuant to applicable agreements
System turn-up and testing Verify cabling between GBE IO and LGX panel

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Table 4-25 OC3 optical transmitter power measurements over fiber
(continued)
GBE-B-Sh-S-P Measured RX Measured TX
Prov. Order (OC3-Bay-Shelf Slot Port) level OK (✓) level OK (dBm) Notes
24. GBE-1-3-3-8
25. GBE-1-3-3-9
26. GBE-1-3-3-10
27. GBE-1-3-3-11
28. GBE-1-3-3-12
29. GBE-1-3-3-13
30. GBE-1-3-3-14
31. GBE-1-3-3-15
32. GBE-1-3-3-16
33. GBE-1-3-4-1
34. GBE-1-3-4-2
35. GBE-1-3-4-3
36. GBE-1-3-4-4
37. GBE-1-3-4-5
38. GBE-1-3-4-6
39. GBE-1-3-4-7
40. GBE-1-3-4-8
41. GBE-1-3-4-9
42. GBE-1-3-4-10
43. GBE-1-3-4-11
44. GBE-1-3-4-12
45. GBE-1-3-4-13
46. GBE-1-3-4-14
47. GBE-1-3-4-15
48. GBE-1-3-4-16
49. GBE-1-3-5-1
50. GBE-1-3-5-2
51. GBE-1-3-5-3
52. GBE-1-3-5-4

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
4-296 Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary 3AG 24622 EAAA TQZZA
Use pursuant to applicable agreements Issue 1 February 2010
System turn-up and testing Verify cabling between GBE IO and LGX panel

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Table 4-25 OC3 optical transmitter power measurements over fiber
(continued)
GBE-B-Sh-S-P Measured RX Measured TX
Prov. Order (OC3-Bay-Shelf Slot Port) level OK (✓) level OK (dBm) Notes
53. GBE-1-3-5-5
54. GBE-1-3-5-6
55. GBE-1-3-5-7
56. GBE-1-3-5-8
57. GBE-1-3-5-9
58. GBE-1-3-5-10
59. GBE-1-3-5-11
60. GBE-1-3-5-12
61. GBE-1-3-5-13
62. GBE-1-3-5-14
63. GBE-1-3-5-15
64. GBE-1-3-5-16
65. GBE-1-3-6-1
66. GBE-1-3-6-2
67. GBE-1-3-6-3
68. GBE-1-3-6-4
69. GBE-1-3-6-5
70. GBE-1-3-6-6
71. GBE-1-3-6-7
72. GBE-1-3-6-8
73. GBE-1-3-6-9
74. GBE-1-3-6-10
75. GBE-1-3-6-11
76. GBE-1-3-6-12
77. GBE-1-3-6-13
78. GBE-1-3-6-14
79. GBE-1-3-6-15
80. GBE-1-3-6-16
81. GBE-1-3-7-1

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
3AG 24622 EAAA TQZZA Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary 4-297
Issue 1 February 2010 Use pursuant to applicable agreements
System turn-up and testing Verify cabling between GBE IO and LGX panel

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Table 4-25 OC3 optical transmitter power measurements over fiber
(continued)
GBE-B-Sh-S-P Measured RX Measured TX
Prov. Order (OC3-Bay-Shelf Slot Port) level OK (✓) level OK (dBm) Notes
82. GBE-1-3-7-2
83. GBE-1-3-7-3
84. GBE-1-3-7-4
85. GBE-1-3-7-5
86. GBE-1-3-7-6
87. GBE-1-3-7-7
88. GBE-1-3-7-8
89. GBE-1-3-7-9
90. GBE-1-3-7-10
91. GBE-1-3-7-11
92. GBE-1-3-7-12
93. GBE-1-3-7-13
94. GBE-1-3-7-14
95. GBE-1-3-7-15
96. GBE-1-3-7-16
97. GBE-1-3-8-1
98. GBE-1-3-8-2
99. GBE-1-3-8-3
100. GBE-1-3-8-4
101. GBE-1-3-8-5
102. GBE-1-3-8-6
103. GBE-1-3-8-7
104. GBE-1-3-8-8
105. GBE-1-3-8-9
106. GBE-1-3-8-10
107. GBE-1-3-8-11
108. GBE-1-3-8-12
109. GBE-1-3-8-13
110. GBE-1-3-8-14

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
4-298 Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary 3AG 24622 EAAA TQZZA
Use pursuant to applicable agreements Issue 1 February 2010
System turn-up and testing Verify cabling between GBE IO and LGX panel

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Table 4-25 OC3 optical transmitter power measurements over fiber
(continued)
GBE-B-Sh-S-P Measured RX Measured TX
Prov. Order (OC3-Bay-Shelf Slot Port) level OK (✓) level OK (dBm) Notes
111. GBE-1-3-8-15
112. GBE-1-3-8-16
113. GBE-1-3-9-1
114. GBE-1-3-9-2
115. GBE-1-3-9-3
116. GBE-1-3-9-4
117. GBE-1-3-9-5
118. GBE-1-3-9-6
119. GBE-1-3-9-7
120. GBE-1-3-9-8
121. GBE-1-3-9-9
122. GBE-1-3-9-10
123. GBE-1-3-9-11
124. GBE-1-3-9-12
125. GBE-1-3-9-13
126. GBE-1-3-9-14
127. GBE-1-3-9-15
128. GBE-1-3-9-16
129. GBE-1-3-12-1
130. GBE-1-3-12-2
131. GBE-1-3-12-3
132. GBE-1-3-12-4
133. GBE-1-3-12-5
134. GBE-1-3-12-6
135. GBE-1-3-12-7
136. GBE-1-3-12-8
137. GBE-1-3-12-9
138. GBE-1-3-12-10
139. GBE-1-3-12-11

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
3AG 24622 EAAA TQZZA Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary 4-299
Issue 1 February 2010 Use pursuant to applicable agreements
System turn-up and testing Verify cabling between GBE IO and LGX panel

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Table 4-25 OC3 optical transmitter power measurements over fiber
(continued)
GBE-B-Sh-S-P Measured RX Measured TX
Prov. Order (OC3-Bay-Shelf Slot Port) level OK (✓) level OK (dBm) Notes
140. GBE-1-3-12-12
141. GBE-1-3-12-13
142. GBE-1-3-12-14
143. GBE-1-3-12-15
144. GBE-1-3-12-16
145. GBE-1-3-13-1
146. GBE-1-3-13-2
147. GBE-1-3-13-3
148. GBE-1-3-13-4
149. GBE-1-3-13-5
150. GBE-1-3-13-6
151. GBE-1-3-13-7
152. GBE-1-3-13-8
153. GBE-1-3-13-9
154. GBE-1-3-13-10
155. GBE-1-3-13-11
156. GBE-1-3-13-12
157. GBE-1-3-13-13
158. GBE-1-3-13-14
159. GBE-1-3-13-15
160. GBE-1-3-13-16
161. GBE-1-3-14-1
162. GBE-1-3-14-2
163. GBE-1-3-14-3
164. GBE-1-3-14-4
165. GBE-1-3-14-5
166. GBE-1-3-14-6
167. GBE-1-3-14-7
168. GBE-1-3-14-8

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
4-300 Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary 3AG 24622 EAAA TQZZA
Use pursuant to applicable agreements Issue 1 February 2010
System turn-up and testing Verify cabling between GBE IO and LGX panel

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Table 4-25 OC3 optical transmitter power measurements over fiber
(continued)
GBE-B-Sh-S-P Measured RX Measured TX
Prov. Order (OC3-Bay-Shelf Slot Port) level OK (✓) level OK (dBm) Notes
169. GBE-1-3-14-9
170. GBE-1-3-14-10
171. GBE-1-3-14-11
172. GBE-1-3-14-12
173. GBE-1-3-14-13
174. GBE-1-3-14-14
175. GBE-1-3-14-15
176. GBE-1-3-14-16
177. GBE-1-3-15-1
178. GBE-1-3-15-2
179. GBE-1-3-15-3
180. GBE-1-3-15-4
181. GBE-1-3-15-5
182. GBE-1-3-15-6
183. GBE-1-3-15-7
184. GBE-1-3-15-8
185. GBE-1-3-15-9
186. GBE-1-3-15-10
187. GBE-1-3-15-11
188. GBE-1-3-15-12
189. GBE-1-3-15-13
190. GBE-1-3-15-14
191. GBE-1-3-15-15
192. GBE-1-3-15-16
193. GBE-1-3-16-1
194. GBE-1-3-16-2
195. GBE-1-3-16-3
196. GBE-1-3-16-4
197. GBE-1-3-16-5

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
3AG 24622 EAAA TQZZA Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary 4-301
Issue 1 February 2010 Use pursuant to applicable agreements
System turn-up and testing Verify cabling between GBE IO and LGX panel

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Table 4-25 OC3 optical transmitter power measurements over fiber
(continued)
GBE-B-Sh-S-P Measured RX Measured TX
Prov. Order (OC3-Bay-Shelf Slot Port) level OK (✓) level OK (dBm) Notes
198. GBE-1-3-16-6
199. GBE-1-3-16-7
200. GBE-1-3-16-8
201. GBE-1-3-16-9
202. GBE-1-3-16-10
203. GBE-1-3-16-11
204. GBE-1-3-16-12
205. GBE-1-3-16-13
206. GBE-1-3-16-14
207. GBE-1-3-16-15
208. GBE-1-3-16-16
209. GBE-1-3-17-1
210. GBE-1-3-17-2
211. GBE-1-3-17-3
212. GBE-1-3-17-4
213. GBE-1-3-17-5
214. GBE-1-3-17-6
215. GBE-1-3-17-7
216. GBE-1-3-17-8
217. GBE-1-3-17-9
218. GBE-1-3-17-10
219. GBE-1-3-17-11
220. GBE-1-3-17-12
221. GBE-1-3-17-13
222. GBE-1-3-17-14
223. GBE-1-3-17-15
224. GBE-1-3-17-16
225. GBE-1-3-18-1
226. GBE-1-3-18-2

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
4-302 Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary 3AG 24622 EAAA TQZZA
Use pursuant to applicable agreements Issue 1 February 2010
System turn-up and testing Verify cabling between GBE IO and LGX panel

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Table 4-25 OC3 optical transmitter power measurements over fiber
(continued)
GBE-B-Sh-S-P Measured RX Measured TX
Prov. Order (OC3-Bay-Shelf Slot Port) level OK (✓) level OK (dBm) Notes
227. GBE-1-3-18-3
228. GBE-1-3-18-4
229. GBE-1-3-18-5
230. GBE-1-3-18-6
231. GBE-1-3-18-7
232. GBE-1-3-18-8
233. GBE-1-3-18-9
234. GBE-1-3-18-10
235. GBE-1-3-18-11
236. GBE-1-3-18-12
237. GBE-1-3-18-13
238. GBE-1-3-18-14
239. GBE-1-3-18-15
240. GBE-1-3-18-16
241. GBE-1-3-19-1
242. GBE-1-3-19-2
243. GBE-1-3-19-3
244. GBE-1-3-19-4
245. GBE-1-3-19-5
246. GBE-1-3-19-6
247. GBE-1-3-19-7
248. GBE-1-3-19-8
249. GBE-1-3-19-9
250. GBE-1-3-19-10
251. GBE-1-3-19-11
252. GBE-1-3-19-12
253. GBE-1-3-19-13
254. GBE-1-3-19-14
255. GBE-1-3-19-15

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
3AG 24622 EAAA TQZZA Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary 4-303
Issue 1 February 2010 Use pursuant to applicable agreements
System turn-up and testing Verify cabling between GBE IO and LGX panel

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Table 4-25 OC3 optical transmitter power measurements over fiber
(continued)
GBE-B-Sh-S-P Measured RX Measured TX
Prov. Order (OC3-Bay-Shelf Slot Port) level OK (✓) level OK (dBm) Notes
256. GBE-1-3-19-16

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
4-304 Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary 3AG 24622 EAAA TQZZA
Use pursuant to applicable agreements Issue 1 February 2010
System turn-up and testing Verify cabling between OC-n I/O and LGX panel

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Verify cabling between OC-n I/O and LGX panel

Purpose
Use this checklist for Procedure 4-15: “Confirm cabling between OC-n I/O and LGX
panel” (p. 4-68). Refer to Table 4-26, “OC3 optical transmitter power measurements over
fiber” (p. 4-305) to record OCn module measurements.
OCn test set output level __________ dBm.
Table 4-26 OC3 optical transmitter power measurements over fiber
OCn-B-Sh-S-P Measured Measured
Prov. (OC3-Bay-Shelf TX level RX level OK
Order Slot Port) (dBm) (✓) Notes
1. OCn-1-3-2-1
2. OCn-1-3-2-2
3. OCn-1-3-2-3
4. OCn-1-3-2-4
5. OCn-1-3-2-5
6. OCn-1-3-2-6
7. OCn-1-3-2-7
8. OCn-1-3-2-8
9. OCn-1-3-2-9
10. OCn-1-3-2-10
11. OCn-1-3-2-11
12. OCn-1-3-2-12
13. OCn-1-3-2-13
14. OCn-1-3-2-14
15. OCn-1-3-2-15
16. OCn-1-3-2-16
17. OCn-1-3-3-1
18. OCn-1-3-3-2
19. OCn-1-3-3-3
20. OCn-1-3-3-4
21. OCn-1-3-3-5
22. OCn-1-3-3-6
23. OCn-1-3-3-7
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
3AG 24622 EAAA TQZZA Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary 4-305
Issue 1 February 2010 Use pursuant to applicable agreements
System turn-up and testing Verify cabling between OC-n I/O and LGX panel

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Table 4-26 OC3 optical transmitter power measurements over fiber
(continued)
OCn-B-Sh-S-P Measured Measured
Prov. (OC3-Bay-Shelf TX level RX level OK
Order Slot Port) (dBm) (✓) Notes
24. OCn-1-3-3-8
25. OCn-1-3-3-9
26. OCn-1-3-3-10
27. OCn-1-3-3-11
28. OCn-1-3-3-12
29. OCn-1-3-3-13
30. OCn-1-3-3-14
31. OCn-1-3-3-15
32. OCn-1-3-3-16
33. OCn-1-3-4-1
34. OCn-1-3-4-2
35. OCn-1-3-4-3
36. OCn-1-3-4-4
37. OCn-1-3-4-5
38. OCn-1-3-4-6
39. OCn-1-3-4-7
40. OCn-1-3-4-8
41. OCn-1-3-4-9
42. OCn-1-3-4-10
43. OCn-1-3-4-11
44. OCn-1-3-4-12
45. OCn-1-3-4-13
46. OCn-1-3-4-14
47. OCn-1-3-4-15
48. OCn-1-3-4-16
49. OCn-1-3-5-1
50. OCn-1-3-5-2
51. OCn-1-3-5-3
52. OCn-1-3-5-4

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
4-306 Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary 3AG 24622 EAAA TQZZA
Use pursuant to applicable agreements Issue 1 February 2010
System turn-up and testing Verify cabling between OC-n I/O and LGX panel

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Table 4-26 OC3 optical transmitter power measurements over fiber
(continued)
OCn-B-Sh-S-P Measured Measured
Prov. (OC3-Bay-Shelf TX level RX level OK
Order Slot Port) (dBm) (✓) Notes
53. OCn-1-3-5-5
54. OCn-1-3-5-6
55. OCn-1-3-5-7
56. OCn-1-3-5-8
57. OCn-1-3-5-9
58. OCn-1-3-5-10
59. OCn-1-3-5-11
60. OCn-1-3-5-12
61. OCn-1-3-5-13
62. OCn-1-3-5-14
63. OCn-1-3-5-15
64. OCn-1-3-5-16
65. OCn-1-3-6-1
66. OCn-1-3-6-2
67. OCn-1-3-6-3
68. OCn-1-3-6-4
69. OCn-1-3-6-5
70. OCn-1-3-6-6
71. OCn-1-3-6-7
72. OCn-1-3-6-8
73. OCn-1-3-6-9
74. OCn-1-3-6-10
75. OCn-1-3-6-11
76. OCn-1-3-6-12
77. OCn-1-3-6-13
78. OCn-1-3-6-14
79. OCn-1-3-6-15
80. OCn-1-3-6-16
81. OCn-1-3-7-1

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
3AG 24622 EAAA TQZZA Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary 4-307
Issue 1 February 2010 Use pursuant to applicable agreements
System turn-up and testing Verify cabling between OC-n I/O and LGX panel

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Table 4-26 OC3 optical transmitter power measurements over fiber
(continued)
OCn-B-Sh-S-P Measured Measured
Prov. (OC3-Bay-Shelf TX level RX level OK
Order Slot Port) (dBm) (✓) Notes
82. OCn-1-3-7-2
83. OCn-1-3-7-3
84. OCn-1-3-7-4
85. OCn-1-3-7-5
86. OCn-1-3-7-6
87. OCn-1-3-7-7
88. OCn-1-3-7-8
89. OCn-1-3-7-9
90. OCn-1-3-7-10
91. OCn-1-3-7-11
92. OCn-1-3-7-12
93. OCn-1-3-7-13
94. OCn-1-3-7-14
95. OCn-1-3-7-15
96. OCn-1-3-7-16
97. OCn-1-3-8-1
98. OCn-1-3-8-2
99. OCn-1-3-8-3
100. OCn-1-3-8-4
101. OCn-1-3-8-5
102. OCn-1-3-8-6
103. OCn-1-3-8-7
104. OCn-1-3-8-8
105. OCn-1-3-8-9
106. OCn-1-3-8-10
107. OCn-1-3-8-11
108. OCn-1-3-8-12
109. OCn-1-3-8-13
110. OCn-1-3-8-14

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
4-308 Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary 3AG 24622 EAAA TQZZA
Use pursuant to applicable agreements Issue 1 February 2010
System turn-up and testing Verify cabling between OC-n I/O and LGX panel

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Table 4-26 OC3 optical transmitter power measurements over fiber
(continued)
OCn-B-Sh-S-P Measured Measured
Prov. (OC3-Bay-Shelf TX level RX level OK
Order Slot Port) (dBm) (✓) Notes
111. OCn-1-3-8-15
112. OCn-1-3-8-16
113. OCn-1-3-9-1
114. OCn-1-3-9-2
115. OCn-1-3-9-3
116. OCn-1-3-9-4
117. OCn-1-3-9-5
118. OCn-1-3-9-6
119. OCn-1-3-9-7
120. OCn-1-3-9-8
121. OCn-1-3-9-9
122. OCn-1-3-9-10
123. OCn-1-3-9-11
124. OCn-1-3-9-12
125. OCn-1-3-9-13
126. OCn-1-3-9-14
127. OCn-1-3-9-15
128. OCn-1-3-9-16
129. OCn-1-3-12-1
130. OCn-1-3-12-2
131. OCn-1-3-12-3
132. OCn-1-3-12-4
133. OCn-1-3-12-5
134. OCn-1-3-12-6
135. OCn-1-3-12-7
136. OCn-1-3-12-8
137. OCn-1-3-12-9
138. OCn-1-3-12-10
139. OCn-1-3-12-11

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
3AG 24622 EAAA TQZZA Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary 4-309
Issue 1 February 2010 Use pursuant to applicable agreements
System turn-up and testing Verify cabling between OC-n I/O and LGX panel

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Table 4-26 OC3 optical transmitter power measurements over fiber
(continued)
OCn-B-Sh-S-P Measured Measured
Prov. (OC3-Bay-Shelf TX level RX level OK
Order Slot Port) (dBm) (✓) Notes
140. OCn-1-3-12-12
141. OCn-1-3-12-13
142. OCn-1-3-12-14
143. OCn-1-3-12-15
144. OCn-1-3-12-16
145. OCn-1-3-13-1
146. OCn-1-3-13-2
147. OCn-1-3-13-3
148. OCn-1-3-13-4
149. OCn-1-3-13-5
150. OCn-1-3-13-6
151. OCn-1-3-13-7
152. OCn-1-3-13-8
153. OCn-1-3-13-9
154. OCn-1-3-13-10
155. OCn-1-3-13-11
156. OCn-1-3-13-12
157. OCn-1-3-13-13
158. OCn-1-3-13-14
159. OCn-1-3-13-15
160. OCn-1-3-13-16
161. OCn-1-3-14-1
162. OCn-1-3-14-2
163. OCn-1-3-14-3
164. OCn-1-3-14-4
165. OCn-1-3-14-5
166. OCn-1-3-14-6
167. OCn-1-3-14-7
168. OCn-1-3-14-8

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
4-310 Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary 3AG 24622 EAAA TQZZA
Use pursuant to applicable agreements Issue 1 February 2010
System turn-up and testing Verify cabling between OC-n I/O and LGX panel

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Table 4-26 OC3 optical transmitter power measurements over fiber
(continued)
OCn-B-Sh-S-P Measured Measured
Prov. (OC3-Bay-Shelf TX level RX level OK
Order Slot Port) (dBm) (✓) Notes
169. OCn-1-3-14-9
170. OCn-1-3-14-10
171. OCn-1-3-14-11
172. OCn-1-3-14-12
173. OCn-1-3-14-13
174. OCn-1-3-14-14
175. OCn-1-3-14-15
176. OCn-1-3-14-16
177. OCn-1-3-15-1
178. OCn-1-3-15-2
179. OCn-1-3-15-3
180. OCn-1-3-15-4
181. OCn-1-3-15-5
182. OCn-1-3-15-6
183. OCn-1-3-15-7
184. OCn-1-3-15-8
185. OCn-1-3-15-9
186. OCn-1-3-15-10
187. OCn-1-3-15-11
188. OCn-1-3-15-12
189. OCn-1-3-15-13
190. OCn-1-3-15-14
191. OCn-1-3-15-15
192. OCn-1-3-15-16
193. OCn-1-3-16-1
194. OCn-1-3-16-2
195. OCn-1-3-16-3
196. OCn-1-3-16-4
197. OCn-1-3-16-5

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
3AG 24622 EAAA TQZZA Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary 4-311
Issue 1 February 2010 Use pursuant to applicable agreements
System turn-up and testing Verify cabling between OC-n I/O and LGX panel

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Table 4-26 OC3 optical transmitter power measurements over fiber
(continued)
OCn-B-Sh-S-P Measured Measured
Prov. (OC3-Bay-Shelf TX level RX level OK
Order Slot Port) (dBm) (✓) Notes
198. OCn-1-3-16-6
199. OCn-1-3-16-7
200. OCn-1-3-16-8
201. OCn-1-3-16-9
202. OCn-1-3-16-10
203. OCn-1-3-16-11
204. OCn-1-3-16-12
205. OCn-1-3-16-13
206. OCn-1-3-16-14
207. OCn-1-3-16-15
208. OCn-1-3-16-16
209. OCn-1-3-17-1
210. OCn-1-3-17-2
211. OCn-1-3-17-3
212. OCn-1-3-17-4
213. OCn-1-3-17-5
214. OCn-1-3-17-6
215. OCn-1-3-17-7
216. OCn-1-3-17-8
217. OCn-1-3-17-9
218. OCn-1-3-17-10
219. OCn-1-3-17-11
220. OCn-1-3-17-12
221. OCn-1-3-17-13
222. OCn-1-3-17-14
223. OCn-1-3-17-15
224. OCn-1-3-17-16
225. OCn-1-3-18-1
226. OCn-1-3-18-2

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
4-312 Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary 3AG 24622 EAAA TQZZA
Use pursuant to applicable agreements Issue 1 February 2010
System turn-up and testing Verify cabling between OC-n I/O and LGX panel

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Table 4-26 OC3 optical transmitter power measurements over fiber
(continued)
OCn-B-Sh-S-P Measured Measured
Prov. (OC3-Bay-Shelf TX level RX level OK
Order Slot Port) (dBm) (✓) Notes
227. OCn-1-3-18-3
228. OCn-1-3-18-4
229. OCn-1-3-18-5
230. OCn-1-3-18-6
231. OCn-1-3-18-7
232. OCn-1-3-18-8
233. OCn-1-3-18-9
234. OCn-1-3-18-10
235. OCn-1-3-18-11
236. OCn-1-3-18-12
237. OCn-1-3-18-13
238. OCn-1-3-18-14
239. OCn-1-3-18-15
240. OCn-1-3-18-16
241. OCn-1-3-19-1
242. OCn-1-3-19-2
243. OCn-1-3-19-3
244. OCn-1-3-19-4
245. OCn-1-3-19-5
246. OCn-1-3-19-6
247. OCn-1-3-19-7
248. OCn-1-3-19-8
249. OCn-1-3-19-9
250. OCn-1-3-19-10
251. OCn-1-3-19-11
252. OCn-1-3-19-12
253. OCn-1-3-19-13
254. OCn-1-3-19-14
255. OCn-1-3-19-15

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
3AG 24622 EAAA TQZZA Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary 4-313
Issue 1 February 2010 Use pursuant to applicable agreements
System turn-up and testing Verify cabling between OC-n I/O and LGX panel

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Table 4-26 OC3 optical transmitter power measurements over fiber
(continued)
OCn-B-Sh-S-P Measured Measured
Prov. (OC3-Bay-Shelf TX level RX level OK
Order Slot Port) (dBm) (✓) Notes
256. OCn-1-3-19-16

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
4-314 Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary 3AG 24622 EAAA TQZZA
Use pursuant to applicable agreements Issue 1 February 2010
System turn-up and testing Verify GBE provisioning

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Verify GBE provisioning

Purpose
Use this checklist for Procedure 4-17: “GBE error-free verification setup” (p. 4-85).
Place a check mark (✓) in the appropriate column of Table 4-27, “Verify provisioning
GBE facility and STS3C” (p. 4-315) for each GBE facility provisioned and STS-3C
provisioned.
Table 4-27 Verify provisioning GBE facility and STS3C
Prov. Order (✓) Provisioned GBESTS3C Notes
GBEVCG cross-connected
(✓)
1. 1-3-2-1-1
2. 1-3-2-1-2
3. 1-3-2-1-3
4. 1-3-2-1-4
5. 1-3-2-1-5
6. 1-3-2-1-6
7. 1-3-2-1-7
8. 1-3-2-2-1
9. 1-3-2-2-2
10. 1-3-2-2-3
11. 1-3-2-2-4
12. 1-3-2-2-5
13. 1-3-2-2-6
14. 1-3-2-2-7
15. 1-3-2-3-1
16. 1-3-2-3-2
17. 1-3-2-3-3
18. 1-3-2-3-4
19. 1-3-2-3-5
20. 1-3-2-3-6
21. 1-3-2-3-7
22. 1-3-2-4-1
23. 1-3-2-4-2
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
3AG 24622 EAAA TQZZA Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary 4-315
Issue 1 February 2010 Use pursuant to applicable agreements
System turn-up and testing Verify GBE provisioning

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Table 4-27 Verify provisioning GBE facility and STS3C (continued)
Prov. Order (✓) Provisioned GBESTS3C Notes
GBEVCG cross-connected
(✓)
24. 1-3-2-4-3
25. 1-3-2-4-4
26. 1-3-2-4-5
27. 1-3-2-4-6
28. 1-3-2-4-7
29. 1-3-2-5-1
30. 1-3-2-5-2
31. 1-3-2-5-3
32. 1-3-2-5-4
33. 1-3-2-5-5
34. 1-3-2-5-6
35. 1-3-2-5-7
36. 1-3-2-6-1
37. 1-3-2-6-2
38. 1-3-2-6-3
39. 1-3-2-6-4
40. 1-3-2-6-5
41. 1-3-2-6-6
42. 1-3-2-6-7
43. 1-3-2-7-1
44. 1-3-2-7-2
45. 1-3-2-7-3
46. 1-3-2-7-4
47. 1-3-2-7-5
48. 1-3-2-7-6
49. 1-3-2-7-7
50. 1-3-2-8-1
51. 1-3-2-8-2
52. 1-3-2-8-3

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
4-316 Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary 3AG 24622 EAAA TQZZA
Use pursuant to applicable agreements Issue 1 February 2010
System turn-up and testing Verify GBE provisioning

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Table 4-27 Verify provisioning GBE facility and STS3C (continued)
Prov. Order (✓) Provisioned GBESTS3C Notes
GBEVCG cross-connected
(✓)
53. 1-3-2-8-4
54. 1-3-2-8-5
55. 1-3-2-8-6
56. 1-3-2-8-7
57. 1-3-2-9-1
58. 1-3-2-9-2
59. 1-3-2-9-3
60. 1-3-2-9-4
61. 1-3-2-9-5
62. 1-3-2-9-6
63. 1-3-2-9-7
64. 1-3-2-10-1
65. 1-3-2-10-2
66. 1-3-2-10-3
67. 1-3-2-10-4
68. 1-3-2-10-5
69. 1-3-2-10-6
70. 1-3-2-10-7
71. 1-3-2-11-1
72. 1-3-2-11-2
73. 1-3-2-11-3
74. 1-3-2-11-4
75. 1-3-2-11-5
76. 1-3-2-11-6
77. 1-3-2-11-7
78. 1-3-2-12-1
79. 1-3-2-12-2
80. 1-3-2-12-3
81. 1-3-2-12-4

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
3AG 24622 EAAA TQZZA Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary 4-317
Issue 1 February 2010 Use pursuant to applicable agreements
System turn-up and testing Verify GBE provisioning

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Table 4-27 Verify provisioning GBE facility and STS3C (continued)
Prov. Order (✓) Provisioned GBESTS3C Notes
GBEVCG cross-connected
(✓)
82. 1-3-2-12-5
83. 1-3-2-12-6
84. 1-3-2-12-7
85. 1-3-2-13-1
86. 1-3-2-13-2
87. 1-3-2-13-3
88. 1-3-2-13-4
89. 1-3-2-13-5
90. 1-3-2-13-6
91. 1-3-2-13-7
92. 1-3-2-14-1
93. 1-3-2-14-2
94. 1-3-2-14-3
95. 1-3-2-14-4
96. 1-3-2-14-5
97. 1-3-2-14-6
98. 1-3-2-14-7
99. 1-3-2-15-1
100. 1-3-2-15-2
101. 1-3-2-15-3
102. 1-3-2-15-4
103. 1-3-2-15-5
104. 1-3-2-15-6
105. 1-3-2-15-7
106. 1-3-2-16-1
107. 1-3-2-16-2
108. 1-3-2-16-3
109. 1-3-2-16-4
110. 1-3-2-16-5

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
4-318 Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary 3AG 24622 EAAA TQZZA
Use pursuant to applicable agreements Issue 1 February 2010
System turn-up and testing Verify GBE provisioning

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Table 4-27 Verify provisioning GBE facility and STS3C (continued)
Prov. Order (✓) Provisioned GBESTS3C Notes
GBEVCG cross-connected
(✓)
111. 1-3-2-16-6
112. 1-3-2-16-7
113. 1-3-3-1-1
114. 1-3-3-1-2
115. 1-3-3-1-3
116. 1-3-3-1-4
117. 1-3-3-1-5
118. 1-3-3-1-6
119. 1-3-3-1-7
120. 1-3-3-2-1
121. 1-3-3-2-2
122. 1-3-3-2-3
123. 1-3-3-2-4
124. 1-3-3-2-5
125. 1-3-3-2-6
126. 1-3-3-2-7
127. 1-3-3-3-1
128. 1-3-3-3-2
129. 1-3-3-3-3
130. 1-3-3-3-4
131. 1-3-3-3-5
132. 1-3-3-3-6
133. 1-3-3-3-7
134. 1-3-3-4-1
135. 1-3-3-4-2
136. 1-3-3-4-3
137. 1-3-3-4-4
138. 1-3-3-4-5
139. 1-3-3-4-6

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
3AG 24622 EAAA TQZZA Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary 4-319
Issue 1 February 2010 Use pursuant to applicable agreements
System turn-up and testing Verify GBE provisioning

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Table 4-27 Verify provisioning GBE facility and STS3C (continued)
Prov. Order (✓) Provisioned GBESTS3C Notes
GBEVCG cross-connected
(✓)
140. 1-3-3-4-7
141. 1-3-3-5-1
142. 1-3-3-5-2
143. 1-3-3-5-3
144. 1-3-3-5-4
145. 1-3-3-5-5
146. 1-3-3-5-6
147. 1-3-3-5-7
148. 1-3-3-6-1
149. 1-3-3-6-2
150. 1-3-3-6-3
151. 1-3-3-6-4
152. 1-3-3-6-5
153. 1-3-3-6-6
154. 1-3-3-6-7
155. 1-3-3-7-1
156. 1-3-3-7-2
157. 1-3-3-7-3
158. 1-3-3-7-4
159. 1-3-3-7-5
160. 1-3-3-7-6
161. 1-3-3-7-7
162. 1-3-3-8-1
163. 1-3-3-8-2
164. 1-3-3-8-3
165. 1-3-3-8-4
166. 1-3-3-8-5
167. 1-3-3-8-6
168. 1-3-3-8-7

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
4-320 Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary 3AG 24622 EAAA TQZZA
Use pursuant to applicable agreements Issue 1 February 2010
System turn-up and testing Verify GBE provisioning

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Table 4-27 Verify provisioning GBE facility and STS3C (continued)
Prov. Order (✓) Provisioned GBESTS3C Notes
GBEVCG cross-connected
(✓)
169. 1-3-3-9-1
170. 1-3-3-9-2
171. 1-3-3-9-3
172. 1-3-3-9-4
173. 1-3-3-9-5
174. 1-3-3-9-6
175. 1-3-3-9-7
176. 1-3-3-10-1
177. 1-3-3-10-2
178. 1-3-3-10-3
179. 1-3-3-10-4
180. 1-3-3-10-5
181. 1-3-3-10-6
182. 1-3-3-10-7
183. 1-3-3-11-1
184. 1-3-3-11-2
185. 1-3-3-11-3
186. 1-3-3-11-4
187. 1-3-3-11-5
188. 1-3-3-11-6
189. 1-3-3-11-7
190. 1-3-3-12-1
191. 1-3-3-12-2
192. 1-3-3-12-3
193. 1-3-3-12-4
194. 1-3-3-12-5
195. 1-3-3-12-6
196. 1-3-3-12-7
197. 1-3-3-13-1

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
3AG 24622 EAAA TQZZA Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary 4-321
Issue 1 February 2010 Use pursuant to applicable agreements
System turn-up and testing Verify GBE provisioning

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Table 4-27 Verify provisioning GBE facility and STS3C (continued)
Prov. Order (✓) Provisioned GBESTS3C Notes
GBEVCG cross-connected
(✓)
198. 1-3-3-13-2
199. 1-3-3-13-3
200. 1-3-3-13-4
201. 1-3-3-13-5
202. 1-3-3-13-6
203. 1-3-3-13-7
204. 1-3-3-14-1
205. 1-3-3-14-2
206. 1-3-3-14-3
207. 1-3-3-14-4
208. 1-3-3-14-5
209. 1-3-3-14-6
210. 1-3-3-14-7
211. 1-3-3-15-1
212. 1-3-3-15-2
213. 1-3-3-15-3
214. 1-3-3-15-4
215. 1-3-3-15-5
216. 1-3-3-15-6
217. 1-3-3-15-7
218. 1-3-3-16-1
219. 1-3-3-16-2
220. 1-3-3-16-3
221. 1-3-3-16-4
222. 1-3-3-16-5
223. 1-3-3-16-6
224. 1-3-3-16-7
225. 1-3-4-1-1
226. 1-3-4-1-2

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
4-322 Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary 3AG 24622 EAAA TQZZA
Use pursuant to applicable agreements Issue 1 February 2010
System turn-up and testing Verify GBE provisioning

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Table 4-27 Verify provisioning GBE facility and STS3C (continued)
Prov. Order (✓) Provisioned GBESTS3C Notes
GBEVCG cross-connected
(✓)
227. 1-3-4-1-3
228. 1-3-4-1-4
229. 1-3-4-1-5
230. 1-3-4-1-6
231. 1-3-4-1-7
232. 1-3-4-2-1
233. 1-3-4-2-2
234. 1-3-4-2-3
235. 1-3-4-2-4
236. 1-3-4-2-5
237. 1-3-4-2-6
238. 1-3-4-2-7
239. 1-3-4-3-1
240. 1-3-4-3-2
241. 1-3-4-3-3
242. 1-3-4-3-4
243. 1-3-4-3-5
244. 1-3-4-3-6
245. 1-3-4-3-7
246. 1-3-4-4-1
247. 1-3-4-4-2
248. 1-3-4-4-3
249. 1-3-4-4-4
250. 1-3-4-4-5
251. 1-3-4-4-6
252. 1-3-4-4-7
253. 1-3-4-5-1
254. 1-3-4-5-2
255. 1-3-4-5-3

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
3AG 24622 EAAA TQZZA Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary 4-323
Issue 1 February 2010 Use pursuant to applicable agreements
System turn-up and testing Verify GBE provisioning

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Table 4-27 Verify provisioning GBE facility and STS3C (continued)
Prov. Order (✓) Provisioned GBESTS3C Notes
GBEVCG cross-connected
(✓)
256. 1-3-4-5-4
257. 1-3-4-5-5
258. 1-3-4-5-6
259. 1-3-4-5-7
260. 1-3-4-6-1
261. 1-3-4-6-2
262. 1-3-4-6-3
263. 1-3-4-6-4
264. 1-3-4-6-5
265. 1-3-4-6-6
266. 1-3-4-6-7
267. 1-3-4-7-1
268. 1-3-4-7-2
269. 1-3-4-7-3
270. 1-3-4-7-4
271. 1-3-4-7-5
272. 1-3-4-7-6
273. 1-3-4-7-7
274. 1-3-4-8-1
275. 1-3-4-8-2
276. 1-3-4-8-3
277. 1-3-4-8-4
278. 1-3-4-8-5
279. 1-3-4-8-6
280. 1-3-4-8-7
281. 1-3-4-9-1
282. 1-3-4-9-2
283. 1-3-4-9-3
284. 1-3-4-9-4

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
4-324 Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary 3AG 24622 EAAA TQZZA
Use pursuant to applicable agreements Issue 1 February 2010
System turn-up and testing Verify GBE provisioning

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Table 4-27 Verify provisioning GBE facility and STS3C (continued)
Prov. Order (✓) Provisioned GBESTS3C Notes
GBEVCG cross-connected
(✓)
285. 1-3-4-9-5
286. 1-3-4-9-6
287. 1-3-4-9-7
288. 1-3-4-10-1
289. 1-3-4-10-2
290. 1-3-4-10-3
291. 1-3-4-10-4
292. 1-3-4-10-5
293. 1-3-4-10-6
294. 1-3-4-10-7
295. 1-3-4-11-1
296. 1-3-4-11-2
297. 1-3-4-11-3
298. 1-3-4-11-4
299. 1-3-4-11-5
300. 1-3-4-11-6
301. 1-3-4-11-7
302. 1-3-4-12-1
303. 1-3-4-12-2
304. 1-3-4-12-3
305. 1-3-4-12-4
306. 1-3-4-12-5
307. 1-3-4-12-6
308. 1-3-4-12-7
309. 1-3-4-13-1
310. 1-3-4-13-2
311. 1-3-4-13-3
312. 1-3-4-13-4
313. 1-3-4-13-5

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
3AG 24622 EAAA TQZZA Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary 4-325
Issue 1 February 2010 Use pursuant to applicable agreements
System turn-up and testing Verify GBE provisioning

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Table 4-27 Verify provisioning GBE facility and STS3C (continued)
Prov. Order (✓) Provisioned GBESTS3C Notes
GBEVCG cross-connected
(✓)
314. 1-3-4-13-6
315. 1-3-4-13-7
316. 1-3-4-14-1
317. 1-3-4-14-2
318. 1-3-4-14-3
319. 1-3-4-14-4
320. 1-3-4-14-5
321. 1-3-4-14-6
322. 1-3-4-14-7
323. 1-3-4-15-1
324. 1-3-4-15-2
325. 1-3-4-15-3
326. 1-3-4-15-4
327. 1-3-4-15-5
328. 1-3-4-15-6
329. 1-3-4-15-7
330. 1-3-4-16-1
331. 1-3-4-16-2
332. 1-3-4-16-3
333. 1-3-4-16-4
334. 1-3-4-16-5
335. 1-3-4-16-6
336. 1-3-4-16-7
337. 1-3-5-1-1
338. 1-3-5-1-2
339. 1-3-5-1-3
340. 1-3-5-1-4
341. 1-3-5-1-5
342. 1-3-5-1-6

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
4-326 Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary 3AG 24622 EAAA TQZZA
Use pursuant to applicable agreements Issue 1 February 2010
System turn-up and testing Verify GBE provisioning

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Table 4-27 Verify provisioning GBE facility and STS3C (continued)
Prov. Order (✓) Provisioned GBESTS3C Notes
GBEVCG cross-connected
(✓)
343. 1-3-5-1-7
344. 1-3-5-2-1
345. 1-3-5-2-2
346. 1-3-5-2-3
347. 1-3-5-2-4
348. 1-3-5-2-5
349. 1-3-5-2-6
350. 1-3-5-2-7
351. 1-3-5-3-1
352. 1-3-5-3-2
353. 1-3-5-3-3
354. 1-3-5-3-4
355. 1-3-5-3-5
356. 1-3-5-3-6
357. 1-3-5-3-7
358. 1-3-5-4-1
359. 1-3-5-4-2
360. 1-3-5-4-3
361. 1-3-5-4-4
362. 1-3-5-4-5
363. 1-3-5-4-6
364. 1-3-5-4-7
365. 1-3-5-5-1
366. 1-3-5-5-2
367. 1-3-5-5-3
368. 1-3-5-5-4
369. 1-3-5-5-5
370. 1-3-5-5-6
371. 1-3-5-5-7

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
3AG 24622 EAAA TQZZA Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary 4-327
Issue 1 February 2010 Use pursuant to applicable agreements
System turn-up and testing Verify GBE provisioning

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Table 4-27 Verify provisioning GBE facility and STS3C (continued)
Prov. Order (✓) Provisioned GBESTS3C Notes
GBEVCG cross-connected
(✓)
372. 1-3-5-6-1
373. 1-3-5-6-2
374. 1-3-5-6-3
375. 1-3-5-6-4
376. 1-3-5-6-5
377. 1-3-5-6-6
378. 1-3-5-6-7
379. 1-3-5-7-1
380. 1-3-5-7-2
381. 1-3-5-7-3
382. 1-3-5-7-4
383. 1-3-5-7-5
384. 1-3-5-7-6
385. 1-3-5-7-7
386. 1-3-5-8-1
387. 1-3-5-8-2
388. 1-3-5-8-3
389. 1-3-5-8-4
390. 1-3-5-8-5
391. 1-3-5-8-6
392. 1-3-5-8-7
393. 1-3-5-9-1
394. 1-3-5-9-2
395. 1-3-5-9-3
396. 1-3-5-9-4
397. 1-3-5-9-5
398. 1-3-5-9-6
399. 1-3-5-9-7
400. 1-3-5-10-1

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
4-328 Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary 3AG 24622 EAAA TQZZA
Use pursuant to applicable agreements Issue 1 February 2010
System turn-up and testing Verify GBE provisioning

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Table 4-27 Verify provisioning GBE facility and STS3C (continued)
Prov. Order (✓) Provisioned GBESTS3C Notes
GBEVCG cross-connected
(✓)
401. 1-3-5-10-2
402. 1-3-5-10-3
403. 1-3-5-10-4
404. 1-3-5-10-5
405. 1-3-5-10-6
406. 1-3-5-10-7
407. 1-3-5-11-1
408. 1-3-5-11-2
409. 1-3-5-11-3
410. 1-3-5-11-4
411. 1-3-5-11-5
412. 1-3-5-11-6
413. 1-3-5-11-7
414. 1-3-5-12-1
415. 1-3-5-12-2
416. 1-3-5-12-3
417. 1-3-5-12-4
418. 1-3-5-12-5
419. 1-3-5-12-6
420. 1-3-5-12-7
421. 1-3-5-13-1
422. 1-3-5-13-2
423. 1-3-5-13-3
424. 1-3-5-13-4
425. 1-3-5-13-5
426. 1-3-5-13-6
427. 1-3-5-13-7
428. 1-3-5-14-1
429. 1-3-5-14-2

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
3AG 24622 EAAA TQZZA Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary 4-329
Issue 1 February 2010 Use pursuant to applicable agreements
System turn-up and testing Verify GBE provisioning

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Table 4-27 Verify provisioning GBE facility and STS3C (continued)
Prov. Order (✓) Provisioned GBESTS3C Notes
GBEVCG cross-connected
(✓)
430. 1-3-5-14-3
431. 1-3-5-14-4
432. 1-3-5-14-5
433. 1-3-5-14-6
434. 1-3-5-14-7
435. 1-3-5-15-1
436. 1-3-5-15-2
437. 1-3-5-15-3
438. 1-3-5-15-4
439. 1-3-5-15-5
440. 1-3-5-15-6
441. 1-3-5-15-7
442. 1-3-5-16-1
443. 1-3-5-16-2
444. 1-3-5-16-3
445. 1-3-5-16-4
446. 1-3-5-16-5
447. 1-3-5-16-6
448. 1-3-5-16-7
449. 1-3-6-1-1
450. 1-3-6-1-2
451. 1-3-6-1-3
452. 1-3-6-1-4
453. 1-3-6-1-5
454. 1-3-6-1-6
455. 1-3-6-1-7
456. 1-3-6-2-1
457. 1-3-6-2-2
458. 1-3-6-2-3

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
4-330 Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary 3AG 24622 EAAA TQZZA
Use pursuant to applicable agreements Issue 1 February 2010
System turn-up and testing Verify GBE provisioning

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Table 4-27 Verify provisioning GBE facility and STS3C (continued)
Prov. Order (✓) Provisioned GBESTS3C Notes
GBEVCG cross-connected
(✓)
459. 1-3-6-2-4
460. 1-3-6-2-5
461. 1-3-6-2-6
462. 1-3-6-2-7
463. 1-3-6-3-1
464. 1-3-6-3-2
465. 1-3-6-3-3
466. 1-3-6-3-4
467. 1-3-6-3-5
468. 1-3-6-3-6
469. 1-3-6-3-7
470. 1-3-6-4-1
471. 1-3-6-4-2
472. 1-3-6-4-3
473. 1-3-6-4-4
474. 1-3-6-4-5
475. 1-3-6-4-6
476. 1-3-6-4-7
477. 1-3-6-5-1
478. 1-3-6-5-2
479. 1-3-6-5-3
480. 1-3-6-5-4
481. 1-3-6-5-5
482. 1-3-6-5-6
483. 1-3-6-5-7
484. 1-3-6-6-1
485. 1-3-6-6-2
486. 1-3-6-6-3
487. 1-3-6-6-4

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
3AG 24622 EAAA TQZZA Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary 4-331
Issue 1 February 2010 Use pursuant to applicable agreements
System turn-up and testing Verify GBE provisioning

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Table 4-27 Verify provisioning GBE facility and STS3C (continued)
Prov. Order (✓) Provisioned GBESTS3C Notes
GBEVCG cross-connected
(✓)
488. 1-3-6-6-5
489. 1-3-6-6-6
490. 1-3-6-6-7
491. 1-3-6-7-1
492. 1-3-6-7-2
493. 1-3-6-7-3
494. 1-3-6-7-4
495. 1-3-6-7-5
496. 1-3-6-7-6
497. 1-3-6-7-7
498. 1-3-6-8-1
499. 1-3-6-8-2
500. 1-3-6-8-3
501. 1-3-6-8-4
502. 1-3-6-8-5
503. 1-3-6-8-6
504. 1-3-6-8-7
505. 1-3-6-9-1
506. 1-3-6-9-2
507. 1-3-6-9-3
508. 1-3-6-9-4
509. 1-3-6-9-5
510. 1-3-6-9-6
511. 1-3-6-9-7
512. 1-3-6-10-1
513. 1-3-6-10-2
514. 1-3-6-10-3
515. 1-3-6-10-4
516. 1-3-6-10-5

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
4-332 Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary 3AG 24622 EAAA TQZZA
Use pursuant to applicable agreements Issue 1 February 2010
System turn-up and testing Verify GBE provisioning

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Table 4-27 Verify provisioning GBE facility and STS3C (continued)
Prov. Order (✓) Provisioned GBESTS3C Notes
GBEVCG cross-connected
(✓)
517. 1-3-6-10-6
518. 1-3-6-10-7
519. 1-3-6-11-1
520. 1-3-6-11-2
521. 1-3-6-11-3
522. 1-3-6-11-4
523. 1-3-6-11-5
524. 1-3-6-11-6
525. 1-3-6-11-7
526. 1-3-6-12-1
527. 1-3-6-12-2
528. 1-3-6-12-3
529. 1-3-6-12-4
530. 1-3-6-12-5
531. 1-3-6-12-6
532. 1-3-6-12-7
533. 1-3-6-13-1
534. 1-3-6-13-2
535. 1-3-6-13-3
536. 1-3-6-13-4
537. 1-3-6-13-5
538. 1-3-6-13-6
539. 1-3-6-13-7
540. 1-3-6-14-1
541. 1-3-6-14-2
542. 1-3-6-14-3
543. 1-3-6-14-4
544. 1-3-6-14-5
545. 1-3-6-14-6

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
3AG 24622 EAAA TQZZA Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary 4-333
Issue 1 February 2010 Use pursuant to applicable agreements
System turn-up and testing Verify GBE provisioning

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Table 4-27 Verify provisioning GBE facility and STS3C (continued)
Prov. Order (✓) Provisioned GBESTS3C Notes
GBEVCG cross-connected
(✓)
546. 1-3-6-14-7
547. 1-3-6-15-1
548. 1-3-6-15-2
549. 1-3-6-15-3
550. 1-3-6-15-4
551. 1-3-6-15-5
552. 1-3-6-15-6
553. 1-3-6-15-7
554. 1-3-6-16-1
555. 1-3-6-16-2
556. 1-3-6-16-3
557. 1-3-6-16-4
558. 1-3-6-16-5
559. 1-3-6-16-6
560. 1-3-6-16-7
561. 1-3-7-1-1
562. 1-3-7-1-2
563. 1-3-7-1-3
564. 1-3-7-1-4
565. 1-3-7-1-5
566. 1-3-7-1-6
567. 1-3-7-1-7
568. 1-3-7-2-1
569. 1-3-7-2-2
570. 1-3-7-2-3
571. 1-3-7-2-4
572. 1-3-7-2-5
573. 1-3-7-2-6
574. 1-3-7-2-7

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
4-334 Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary 3AG 24622 EAAA TQZZA
Use pursuant to applicable agreements Issue 1 February 2010
System turn-up and testing Verify GBE provisioning

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Table 4-27 Verify provisioning GBE facility and STS3C (continued)
Prov. Order (✓) Provisioned GBESTS3C Notes
GBEVCG cross-connected
(✓)
575. 1-3-7-3-1
576. 1-3-7-3-2
577. 1-3-7-3-3
578. 1-3-7-3-4
579. 1-3-7-3-5
580. 1-3-7-3-6
581. 1-3-7-3-7
582. 1-3-7-4-1
583. 1-3-7-4-2
584. 1-3-7-4-3
585. 1-3-7-4-4
586. 1-3-7-4-5
587. 1-3-7-4-6
588. 1-3-7-4-7
589. 1-3-7-5-1
590. 1-3-7-5-2
591. 1-3-7-5-3
592. 1-3-7-5-4
593. 1-3-7-5-5
594. 1-3-7-5-6
595. 1-3-7-5-7
596. 1-3-7-6-1
597. 1-3-7-6-2
598. 1-3-7-6-3
599. 1-3-7-6-4
600. 1-3-7-6-5
601. 1-3-7-6-6
602. 1-3-7-6-7
603. 1-3-7-7-1

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
3AG 24622 EAAA TQZZA Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary 4-335
Issue 1 February 2010 Use pursuant to applicable agreements
System turn-up and testing Verify GBE provisioning

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Table 4-27 Verify provisioning GBE facility and STS3C (continued)
Prov. Order (✓) Provisioned GBESTS3C Notes
GBEVCG cross-connected
(✓)
604. 1-3-7-7-2
605. 1-3-7-7-3
606. 1-3-7-7-4
607. 1-3-7-7-5
608. 1-3-7-7-6
609. 1-3-7-7-7
610. 1-3-7-8-1
611. 1-3-7-8-2
612. 1-3-7-8-3
613. 1-3-7-8-4
614. 1-3-7-8-5
615. 1-3-7-8-6
616. 1-3-7-8-7
617. 1-3-7-9-1
618. 1-3-7-9-2
619. 1-3-7-9-3
620. 1-3-7-9-4
621. 1-3-7-9-5
622. 1-3-7-9-6
623. 1-3-7-9-7
624. 1-3-7-10-1
625. 1-3-7-10-2
626. 1-3-7-10-3
627. 1-3-7-10-4
628. 1-3-7-10-5
629. 1-3-7-10-6
630. 1-3-7-10-7
631. 1-3-7-11-1
632. 1-3-7-11-2

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
4-336 Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary 3AG 24622 EAAA TQZZA
Use pursuant to applicable agreements Issue 1 February 2010
System turn-up and testing Verify GBE provisioning

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Table 4-27 Verify provisioning GBE facility and STS3C (continued)
Prov. Order (✓) Provisioned GBESTS3C Notes
GBEVCG cross-connected
(✓)
633. 1-3-7-11-3
634. 1-3-7-11-4
635. 1-3-7-11-5
636. 1-3-7-11-6
637. 1-3-7-11-7
638. 1-3-7-12-1
639. 1-3-7-12-2
640. 1-3-7-12-3
641. 1-3-7-12-4
642. 1-3-7-12-5
643. 1-3-7-12-6
644. 1-3-7-12-7
645. 1-3-7-13-1
646. 1-3-7-13-2
647. 1-3-7-13-3
648. 1-3-7-13-4
649. 1-3-7-13-5
650. 1-3-7-13-6
651. 1-3-7-13-7
652. 1-3-7-14-1
653. 1-3-7-14-2
654. 1-3-7-14-3
655. 1-3-7-14-4
656. 1-3-7-14-5
657. 1-3-7-14-6
658. 1-3-7-14-7
659. 1-3-7-15-1
660. 1-3-7-15-2
661. 1-3-7-15-3

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
3AG 24622 EAAA TQZZA Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary 4-337
Issue 1 February 2010 Use pursuant to applicable agreements
System turn-up and testing Verify GBE provisioning

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Table 4-27 Verify provisioning GBE facility and STS3C (continued)
Prov. Order (✓) Provisioned GBESTS3C Notes
GBEVCG cross-connected
(✓)
662. 1-3-7-15-4
663. 1-3-7-15-5
664. 1-3-7-15-6
665. 1-3-7-15-7
666. 1-3-7-16-1
667. 1-3-7-16-2
668. 1-3-7-16-3
669. 1-3-7-16-4
670. 1-3-7-16-5
671. 1-3-7-16-6
672. 1-3-7-16-7
673. 1-3-8-1-1
674. 1-3-8-1-2
675. 1-3-8-1-3
676. 1-3-8-1-4
677. 1-3-8-1-5
678. 1-3-8-1-6
679. 1-3-8-1-7
680. 1-3-8-2-1
681. 1-3-8-2-2
682. 1-3-8-2-3
683. 1-3-8-2-4
684. 1-3-8-2-5
685. 1-3-8-2-6
686. 1-3-8-2-7
687. 1-3-8-3-1
688. 1-3-8-3-2
689. 1-3-8-3-3
690. 1-3-8-3-4

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
4-338 Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary 3AG 24622 EAAA TQZZA
Use pursuant to applicable agreements Issue 1 February 2010
System turn-up and testing Verify GBE provisioning

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Table 4-27 Verify provisioning GBE facility and STS3C (continued)
Prov. Order (✓) Provisioned GBESTS3C Notes
GBEVCG cross-connected
(✓)
691. 1-3-8-3-5
692. 1-3-8-3-6
693. 1-3-8-3-7
694. 1-3-8-4-1
695. 1-3-8-4-2
696. 1-3-8-4-3
697. 1-3-8-4-4
698. 1-3-8-4-5
699. 1-3-8-4-6
700. 1-3-8-4-7
701. 1-3-8-5-1
702. 1-3-8-5-2
703. 1-3-8-5-3
704. 1-3-8-5-4
705. 1-3-8-5-5
706. 1-3-8-5-6
707. 1-3-8-5-7
708. 1-3-8-6-1
709. 1-3-8-6-2
710. 1-3-8-6-3
711. 1-3-8-6-4
712. 1-3-8-6-5
713. 1-3-8-6-6
714. 1-3-8-6-7
715. 1-3-8-7-1
716. 1-3-8-7-2
717. 1-3-8-7-3
718. 1-3-8-7-4
719. 1-3-8-7-5

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
3AG 24622 EAAA TQZZA Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary 4-339
Issue 1 February 2010 Use pursuant to applicable agreements
System turn-up and testing Verify GBE provisioning

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Table 4-27 Verify provisioning GBE facility and STS3C (continued)
Prov. Order (✓) Provisioned GBESTS3C Notes
GBEVCG cross-connected
(✓)
720. 1-3-8-7-6
721. 1-3-8-7-7
722. 1-3-8-8-1
723. 1-3-8-8-2
724. 1-3-8-8-3
725. 1-3-8-8-4
726. 1-3-8-8-5
727. 1-3-8-8-6
728. 1-3-8-8-7
729. 1-3-8-9-1
730. 1-3-8-9-2
731. 1-3-8-9-3
732. 1-3-8-9-4
733. 1-3-8-9-5
734. 1-3-8-9-6
735. 1-3-8-9-7
736. 1-3-8-10-1
737. 1-3-8-10-2
738. 1-3-8-10-3
739. 1-3-8-10-4
740. 1-3-8-10-5
741. 1-3-8-10-6
742. 1-3-8-10-7
743. 1-3-8-11-1
744. 1-3-8-11-2
745. 1-3-8-11-3
746. 1-3-8-11-4
747. 1-3-8-11-5
748. 1-3-8-11-6

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
4-340 Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary 3AG 24622 EAAA TQZZA
Use pursuant to applicable agreements Issue 1 February 2010
System turn-up and testing Verify GBE provisioning

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Table 4-27 Verify provisioning GBE facility and STS3C (continued)
Prov. Order (✓) Provisioned GBESTS3C Notes
GBEVCG cross-connected
(✓)
749. 1-3-8-11-7
750. 1-3-8-12-1
751. 1-3-8-12-2
752. 1-3-8-12-3
753. 1-3-8-12-4
754. 1-3-8-12-5
755. 1-3-8-12-6
756. 1-3-8-12-7
757. 1-3-8-13-1
758. 1-3-8-13-2
759. 1-3-8-13-3
760. 1-3-8-13-4
761. 1-3-8-13-5
762. 1-3-8-13-6
763. 1-3-8-13-7
764. 1-3-8-14-1
765. 1-3-8-14-2
766. 1-3-8-14-3
767. 1-3-8-14-4
768. 1-3-8-14-5
769. 1-3-8-14-6
770. 1-3-8-14-7
771. 1-3-8-15-1
772. 1-3-8-15-2
773. 1-3-8-15-3
774. 1-3-8-15-4
775. 1-3-8-15-5
776. 1-3-8-15-6
777. 1-3-8-15-7

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
3AG 24622 EAAA TQZZA Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary 4-341
Issue 1 February 2010 Use pursuant to applicable agreements
System turn-up and testing Verify GBE provisioning

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Table 4-27 Verify provisioning GBE facility and STS3C (continued)
Prov. Order (✓) Provisioned GBESTS3C Notes
GBEVCG cross-connected
(✓)
778. 1-3-8-16-1
779. 1-3-8-16-2
780. 1-3-8-16-3
781. 1-3-8-16-4
782. 1-3-8-16-5
783. 1-3-8-16-6
784. 1-3-8-16-7
785. 1-3-9-1-1
786. 1-3-9-1-2
787. 1-3-9-1-3
788. 1-3-9-1-4
789. 1-3-9-1-5
790. 1-3-9-1-6
791. 1-3-9-1-7
792. 1-3-9-2-1
793. 1-3-9-2-2
794. 1-3-9-2-3
795. 1-3-9-2-4
796. 1-3-9-2-5
797. 1-3-9-2-6
798. 1-3-9-2-7
799. 1-3-9-3-1
800. 1-3-9-3-2
801. 1-3-9-3-3
802. 1-3-9-3-4
803. 1-3-9-3-5
804. 1-3-9-3-6
805. 1-3-9-3-7
806. 1-3-9-4-1

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
4-342 Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary 3AG 24622 EAAA TQZZA
Use pursuant to applicable agreements Issue 1 February 2010
System turn-up and testing Verify GBE provisioning

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Table 4-27 Verify provisioning GBE facility and STS3C (continued)
Prov. Order (✓) Provisioned GBESTS3C Notes
GBEVCG cross-connected
(✓)
807. 1-3-9-4-2
808. 1-3-9-4-3
809. 1-3-9-4-4
810. 1-3-9-4-5
811. 1-3-9-4-6
812. 1-3-9-4-7
813. 1-3-9-5-1
814. 1-3-9-5-2
815. 1-3-9-5-3
816. 1-3-9-5-4
817. 1-3-9-5-5
818. 1-3-9-5-6
819. 1-3-9-5-7
820. 1-3-9-6-1
821. 1-3-9-6-2
822. 1-3-9-6-3
823. 1-3-9-6-4
824. 1-3-9-6-5
825. 1-3-9-6-6
826. 1-3-9-6-7
827. 1-3-9-7-1
828. 1-3-9-7-2
829. 1-3-9-7-3
830. 1-3-9-7-4
831. 1-3-9-7-5
832. 1-3-9-7-6
833. 1-3-9-7-7
834. 1-3-9-8-1
835. 1-3-9-8-2

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
3AG 24622 EAAA TQZZA Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary 4-343
Issue 1 February 2010 Use pursuant to applicable agreements
System turn-up and testing Verify GBE provisioning

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Table 4-27 Verify provisioning GBE facility and STS3C (continued)
Prov. Order (✓) Provisioned GBESTS3C Notes
GBEVCG cross-connected
(✓)
836. 1-3-9-8-3
837. 1-3-9-8-4
838. 1-3-9-8-5
839. 1-3-9-8-6
840. 1-3-9-8-7
841. 1-3-9-9-1
842. 1-3-9-9-2
843. 1-3-9-9-3
844. 1-3-9-9-4
845. 1-3-9-9-5
846. 1-3-9-9-6
847. 1-3-9-9-7
848. 1-3-9-10-1
849. 1-3-9-10-2
850. 1-3-9-10-3
851. 1-3-9-10-4
852. 1-3-9-10-5
853. 1-3-9-10-6
854. 1-3-9-10-7
855. 1-3-9-11-1
856. 1-3-9-11-2
857. 1-3-9-11-3
858. 1-3-9-11-4
859. 1-3-9-11-5
860. 1-3-9-11-6
861. 1-3-9-11-7
862. 1-3-9-12-1
863. 1-3-9-12-2
864. 1-3-9-12-3

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
4-344 Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary 3AG 24622 EAAA TQZZA
Use pursuant to applicable agreements Issue 1 February 2010
System turn-up and testing Verify GBE provisioning

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Table 4-27 Verify provisioning GBE facility and STS3C (continued)
Prov. Order (✓) Provisioned GBESTS3C Notes
GBEVCG cross-connected
(✓)
865. 1-3-9-12-4
866. 1-3-9-12-5
867. 1-3-9-12-6
868. 1-3-9-12-7
869. 1-3-9-13-1
870. 1-3-9-13-2
871. 1-3-9-13-3
872. 1-3-9-13-4
873. 1-3-9-13-5
874. 1-3-9-13-6
875. 1-3-9-13-7
876. 1-3-9-14-1
877. 1-3-9-14-2
878. 1-3-9-14-3
879. 1-3-9-14-4
880. 1-3-9-14-5
881. 1-3-9-14-6
882. 1-3-9-14-7
883. 1-3-9-15-1
884. 1-3-9-15-2
885. 1-3-9-15-3
886. 1-3-9-15-4
887. 1-3-9-15-5
888. 1-3-9-15-6
889. 1-3-9-15-7
890. 1-3-9-16-1
891. 1-3-9-16-2
892. 1-3-9-16-3
893. 1-3-9-16-4

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
3AG 24622 EAAA TQZZA Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary 4-345
Issue 1 February 2010 Use pursuant to applicable agreements
System turn-up and testing Verify GBE provisioning

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Table 4-27 Verify provisioning GBE facility and STS3C (continued)
Prov. Order (✓) Provisioned GBESTS3C Notes
GBEVCG cross-connected
(✓)
894. 1-3-9-16-5
895. 1-3-9-16-6
896. 1-3-9-16-7
897. 1-3-12-1-1
898. 1-3-12-1-2
899. 1-3-12-1-3
900. 1-3-12-1-4
901. 1-3-12-1-5
902. 1-3-12-1-6
903. 1-3-12-1-7
904. 1-3-12-2-1
905. 1-3-12-2-2
906. 1-3-12-2-3
907. 1-3-12-2-4
908. 1-3-12-2-5
909. 1-3-12-2-6
910. 1-3-12-2-7
911. 1-3-12-3-1
912. 1-3-12-3-2
913. 1-3-12-3-3
914. 1-3-12-3-4
915. 1-3-12-3-5
916. 1-3-12-3-6
917. 1-3-12-3-7
918. 1-3-12-4-1
919. 1-3-12-4-2
920. 1-3-12-4-3
921. 1-3-12-4-4
922. 1-3-12-4-5

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
4-346 Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary 3AG 24622 EAAA TQZZA
Use pursuant to applicable agreements Issue 1 February 2010
System turn-up and testing Verify GBE provisioning

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Table 4-27 Verify provisioning GBE facility and STS3C (continued)
Prov. Order (✓) Provisioned GBESTS3C Notes
GBEVCG cross-connected
(✓)
923. 1-3-12-4-6
924. 1-3-12-4-7
925. 1-3-12-5-1
926. 1-3-12-5-2
927. 1-3-12-5-3
928. 1-3-12-5-4
929. 1-3-12-5-5
930. 1-3-12-5-6
931. 1-3-12-5-7
932. 1-3-12-6-1
933. 1-3-12-6-2
934. 1-3-12-6-3
935. 1-3-12-6-4
936. 1-3-12-6-5
937. 1-3-12-6-6
938. 1-3-12-6-7
939. 1-3-12-7-1
940. 1-3-12-7-2
941. 1-3-12-7-3
942. 1-3-12-7-4
943. 1-3-12-7-5
944. 1-3-12-7-6
945. 1-3-12-7-7
946. 1-3-12-8-1
947. 1-3-12-8-2
948. 1-3-12-8-3
949. 1-3-12-8-4
950. 1-3-12-8-5
951. 1-3-12-8-6

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
3AG 24622 EAAA TQZZA Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary 4-347
Issue 1 February 2010 Use pursuant to applicable agreements
System turn-up and testing Verify GBE provisioning

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Table 4-27 Verify provisioning GBE facility and STS3C (continued)
Prov. Order (✓) Provisioned GBESTS3C Notes
GBEVCG cross-connected
(✓)
952. 1-3-12-8-7
953. 1-3-12-9-1
954. 1-3-12-9-2
955. 1-3-12-9-3
956. 1-3-12-9-4
957. 1-3-12-9-5
958. 1-3-12-9-6
959. 1-3-12-9-7
960. 1-3-12-10-1
961. 1-3-12-10-2
962. 1-3-12-10-3
963. 1-3-12-10-4
964. 1-3-12-10-5
965. 1-3-12-10-6
966. 1-3-12-10-7
967. 1-3-12-11-1
968. 1-3-12-11-2
969. 1-3-12-11-3
970. 1-3-12-11-4
971. 1-3-12-11-5
972. 1-3-12-11-6
973. 1-3-12-11-7
974. 1-3-12-12-1
975. 1-3-12-12-2
976. 1-3-12-12-3
977. 1-3-12-12-4
978. 1-3-12-12-5
979. 1-3-12-12-6
980. 1-3-12-12-7

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
4-348 Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary 3AG 24622 EAAA TQZZA
Use pursuant to applicable agreements Issue 1 February 2010
System turn-up and testing Verify GBE provisioning

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Table 4-27 Verify provisioning GBE facility and STS3C (continued)
Prov. Order (✓) Provisioned GBESTS3C Notes
GBEVCG cross-connected
(✓)
981. 1-3-12-13-1
982. 1-3-12-13-2
983. 1-3-12-13-3
984. 1-3-12-13-4
985. 1-3-12-13-5
986. 1-3-12-13-6
987. 1-3-12-13-7
988. 1-3-12-14-1
989. 1-3-12-14-2
990. 1-3-12-14-3
991. 1-3-12-14-4
992. 1-3-12-14-5
993. 1-3-12-14-6
994. 1-3-12-14-7
995. 1-3-12-15-1
996. 1-3-12-15-2
997. 1-3-12-15-3
998. 1-3-12-15-4
999. 1-3-12-15-5
1000. 1-3-12-15-6
1001. 1-3-12-15-7
1002. 1-3-12-16-1
1003. 1-3-12-16-2
1004. 1-3-12-16-3
1005. 1-3-12-16-4
1006. 1-3-12-16-5
1007. 1-3-12-16-6
1008. 1-3-12-16-7
1009. 1-3-13-1-1

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
3AG 24622 EAAA TQZZA Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary 4-349
Issue 1 February 2010 Use pursuant to applicable agreements
System turn-up and testing Verify GBE provisioning

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Table 4-27 Verify provisioning GBE facility and STS3C (continued)
Prov. Order (✓) Provisioned GBESTS3C Notes
GBEVCG cross-connected
(✓)
1010. 1-3-13-1-2
1011. 1-3-13-1-3
1012. 1-3-13-1-4
1013. 1-3-13-1-5
1014. 1-3-13-1-6
1015. 1-3-13-1-7
1016. 1-3-13-2-1
1017. 1-3-13-2-2
1018. 1-3-13-2-3
1019. 1-3-13-2-4
1020. 1-3-13-2-5
1021. 1-3-13-2-6
1022. 1-3-13-2-7
1023. 1-3-13-3-1
1024. 1-3-13-3-2
1025. 1-3-13-3-3
1026. 1-3-13-3-4
1027. 1-3-13-3-5
1028. 1-3-13-3-6
1029. 1-3-13-3-7
1030. 1-3-13-4-1
1031. 1-3-13-4-2
1032. 1-3-13-4-3
1033. 1-3-13-4-4
1034. 1-3-13-4-5
1035. 1-3-13-4-6
1036. 1-3-13-4-7
1037. 1-3-13-5-1
1038. 1-3-13-5-2

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
4-350 Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary 3AG 24622 EAAA TQZZA
Use pursuant to applicable agreements Issue 1 February 2010
System turn-up and testing Verify GBE provisioning

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Table 4-27 Verify provisioning GBE facility and STS3C (continued)
Prov. Order (✓) Provisioned GBESTS3C Notes
GBEVCG cross-connected
(✓)
1039. 1-3-13-5-3
1040. 1-3-13-5-4
1041. 1-3-13-5-5
1042. 1-3-13-5-6
1043. 1-3-13-5-7
1044. 1-3-13-6-1
1045. 1-3-13-6-2
1046. 1-3-13-6-3
1047. 1-3-13-6-4
1048. 1-3-13-6-5
1049. 1-3-13-6-6
1050. 1-3-13-6-7
1051. 1-3-13-7-1
1052. 1-3-13-7-2
1053. 1-3-13-7-3
1054. 1-3-13-7-4
1055. 1-3-13-7-5
1056. 1-3-13-7-6
1057. 1-3-13-7-7
1058. 1-3-13-8-1
1059. 1-3-13-8-2
1060. 1-3-13-8-3
1061. 1-3-13-8-4
1062. 1-3-13-8-5
1063. 1-3-13-8-6
1064. 1-3-13-8-7
1065. 1-3-13-9-1
1066. 1-3-13-9-2
1067. 1-3-13-9-3

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
3AG 24622 EAAA TQZZA Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary 4-351
Issue 1 February 2010 Use pursuant to applicable agreements
System turn-up and testing Verify GBE provisioning

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Table 4-27 Verify provisioning GBE facility and STS3C (continued)
Prov. Order (✓) Provisioned GBESTS3C Notes
GBEVCG cross-connected
(✓)
1068. 1-3-13-9-4
1069. 1-3-13-9-5
1070. 1-3-13-9-6
1071. 1-3-13-9-7
1072. 1-3-13-10-1
1073. 1-3-13-10-2
1074. 1-3-13-10-3
1075. 1-3-13-10-4
1076. 1-3-13-10-5
1077. 1-3-13-10-6
1078. 1-3-13-10-7
1079. 1-3-13-11-1
1080. 1-3-13-11-2
1081. 1-3-13-11-3
1082. 1-3-13-11-4
1083. 1-3-13-11-5
1084. 1-3-13-11-6
1085. 1-3-13-11-7
1086. 1-3-13-12-1
1087. 1-3-13-12-2
1088. 1-3-13-12-3
1089. 1-3-13-12-4
1090. 1-3-13-12-5
1091. 1-3-13-12-6
1092. 1-3-13-12-7
1093. 1-3-13-13-1
1094. 1-3-13-13-2
1095. 1-3-13-13-3
1096. 1-3-13-13-4

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
4-352 Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary 3AG 24622 EAAA TQZZA
Use pursuant to applicable agreements Issue 1 February 2010
System turn-up and testing Verify GBE provisioning

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Table 4-27 Verify provisioning GBE facility and STS3C (continued)
Prov. Order (✓) Provisioned GBESTS3C Notes
GBEVCG cross-connected
(✓)
1097. 1-3-13-13-5
1098. 1-3-13-13-6
1099. 1-3-13-13-7
1100. 1-3-13-14-1
1101. 1-3-13-14-2
1102. 1-3-13-14-3
1103. 1-3-13-14-4
1104. 1-3-13-14-5
1105. 1-3-13-14-6
1106. 1-3-13-14-7
1107. 1-3-13-15-1
1108. 1-3-13-15-2
1109. 1-3-13-15-3
1110. 1-3-13-15-4
1111. 1-3-13-15-5
1112. 1-3-13-15-6
1113. 1-3-13-15-7
1114. 1-3-13-16-1
1115. 1-3-13-16-2
1116. 1-3-13-16-3
1117. 1-3-13-16-4
1118. 1-3-13-16-5
1119. 1-3-13-16-6
1120. 1-3-13-16-7
1121. 1-3-14-1-1
1122. 1-3-14-1-2
1123. 1-3-14-1-3
1124. 1-3-14-1-4
1125. 1-3-14-1-5

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
3AG 24622 EAAA TQZZA Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary 4-353
Issue 1 February 2010 Use pursuant to applicable agreements
System turn-up and testing Verify GBE provisioning

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Table 4-27 Verify provisioning GBE facility and STS3C (continued)
Prov. Order (✓) Provisioned GBESTS3C Notes
GBEVCG cross-connected
(✓)
1126. 1-3-14-1-6
1127. 1-3-14-1-7
1128. 1-3-14-2-1
1129. 1-3-14-2-2
1130. 1-3-14-2-3
1131. 1-3-14-2-4
1132. 1-3-14-2-5
1133. 1-3-14-2-6
1134. 1-3-14-2-7
1135. 1-3-14-3-1
1136. 1-3-14-3-2
1137. 1-3-14-3-3
1138. 1-3-14-3-4
1139. 1-3-14-3-5
1140. 1-3-14-3-6
1141. 1-3-14-3-7
1142. 1-3-14-4-1
1143. 1-3-14-4-2
1144. 1-3-14-4-3
1145. 1-3-14-4-4
1146. 1-3-14-4-5
1147. 1-3-14-4-6
1148. 1-3-14-4-7
1149. 1-3-14-5-1
1150. 1-3-14-5-2
1151. 1-3-14-5-3
1152. 1-3-14-5-4
1153. 1-3-14-5-5
1154. 1-3-14-5-6

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
4-354 Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary 3AG 24622 EAAA TQZZA
Use pursuant to applicable agreements Issue 1 February 2010
System turn-up and testing Verify GBE provisioning

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Table 4-27 Verify provisioning GBE facility and STS3C (continued)
Prov. Order (✓) Provisioned GBESTS3C Notes
GBEVCG cross-connected
(✓)
1155. 1-3-14-5-7
1156. 1-3-14-6-1
1157. 1-3-14-6-2
1158. 1-3-14-6-3
1159. 1-3-14-6-4
1160. 1-3-14-6-5
1161. 1-3-14-6-6
1162. 1-3-14-6-7
1163. 1-3-14-7-1
1164. 1-3-14-7-2
1165. 1-3-14-7-3
1166. 1-3-14-7-4
1167. 1-3-14-7-5
1168. 1-3-14-7-6
1169. 1-3-14-7-7
1170. 1-3-14-8-1
1171. 1-3-14-8-2
1172. 1-3-14-8-3
1173. 1-3-14-8-4
1174. 1-3-14-8-5
1175. 1-3-14-8-6
1176. 1-3-14-8-7
1177. 1-3-14-9-1
1178. 1-3-14-9-2
1179. 1-3-14-9-3
1180. 1-3-14-9-4
1181. 1-3-14-9-5
1182. 1-3-14-9-6
1183. 1-3-14-9-7

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
3AG 24622 EAAA TQZZA Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary 4-355
Issue 1 February 2010 Use pursuant to applicable agreements
System turn-up and testing Verify GBE provisioning

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Table 4-27 Verify provisioning GBE facility and STS3C (continued)
Prov. Order (✓) Provisioned GBESTS3C Notes
GBEVCG cross-connected
(✓)
1184. 1-3-14-10-1
1185. 1-3-14-10-2
1186. 1-3-14-10-3
1187. 1-3-14-10-4
1188. 1-3-14-10-5
1189. 1-3-14-10-6
1190. 1-3-14-10-7
1191. 1-3-14-11-1
1192. 1-3-14-11-2
1193. 1-3-14-11-3
1194. 1-3-14-11-4
1195. 1-3-14-11-5
1196. 1-3-14-11-6
1197. 1-3-14-11-7
1198. 1-3-14-12-1
1199. 1-3-14-12-2
1200. 1-3-14-12-3
1201. 1-3-14-12-4
1202. 1-3-14-12-5
1203. 1-3-14-12-6
1204. 1-3-14-12-7
1205. 1-3-14-13-1
1206. 1-3-14-13-2
1207. 1-3-14-13-3
1208. 1-3-14-13-4
1209. 1-3-14-13-5
1210. 1-3-14-13-6
1211. 1-3-14-13-7
1212. 1-3-14-14-1

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
4-356 Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary 3AG 24622 EAAA TQZZA
Use pursuant to applicable agreements Issue 1 February 2010
System turn-up and testing Verify GBE provisioning

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Table 4-27 Verify provisioning GBE facility and STS3C (continued)
Prov. Order (✓) Provisioned GBESTS3C Notes
GBEVCG cross-connected
(✓)
1213. 1-3-14-14-2
1214. 1-3-14-14-3
1215. 1-3-14-14-4
1216. 1-3-14-14-5
1217. 1-3-14-14-6
1218. 1-3-14-14-7
1219. 1-3-14-15-1
1220. 1-3-14-15-2
1221. 1-3-14-15-3
1222. 1-3-14-15-4
1223. 1-3-14-15-5
1224. 1-3-14-15-6
1225. 1-3-14-15-7
1226. 1-3-14-16-1
1227. 1-3-14-16-2
1228. 1-3-14-16-3
1229. 1-3-14-16-4
1230. 1-3-14-16-5
1231. 1-3-14-16-6
1232. 1-3-14-16-7
1233. 1-3-15-1-1
1234. 1-3-15-1-2
1235. 1-3-15-1-3
1236. 1-3-15-1-4
1237. 1-3-15-1-5
1238. 1-3-15-1-6
1239. 1-3-15-1-7
1240. 1-3-15-2-1
1241. 1-3-15-2-2

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
3AG 24622 EAAA TQZZA Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary 4-357
Issue 1 February 2010 Use pursuant to applicable agreements
System turn-up and testing Verify GBE provisioning

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Table 4-27 Verify provisioning GBE facility and STS3C (continued)
Prov. Order (✓) Provisioned GBESTS3C Notes
GBEVCG cross-connected
(✓)
1242. 1-3-15-2-3
1243. 1-3-15-2-4
1244. 1-3-15-2-5
1245. 1-3-15-2-6
1246. 1-3-15-2-7
1247. 1-3-15-3-1
1248. 1-3-15-3-2
1249. 1-3-15-3-3
1250. 1-3-15-3-4
1251. 1-3-15-3-5
1252. 1-3-15-3-6
1253. 1-3-15-3-7
1254. 1-3-15-4-1
1255. 1-3-15-4-2
1256. 1-3-15-4-3
1257. 1-3-15-4-4
1258. 1-3-15-4-5
1259. 1-3-15-4-6
1260. 1-3-15-4-7
1261. 1-3-15-5-1
1262. 1-3-15-5-2
1263. 1-3-15-5-3
1264. 1-3-15-5-4
1265. 1-3-15-5-5
1266. 1-3-15-5-6
1267. 1-3-15-5-7
1268. 1-3-15-6-1
1269. 1-3-15-6-2
1270. 1-3-15-6-3

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
4-358 Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary 3AG 24622 EAAA TQZZA
Use pursuant to applicable agreements Issue 1 February 2010
System turn-up and testing Verify GBE provisioning

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Table 4-27 Verify provisioning GBE facility and STS3C (continued)
Prov. Order (✓) Provisioned GBESTS3C Notes
GBEVCG cross-connected
(✓)
1271. 1-3-15-6-4
1272. 1-3-15-6-5
1273. 1-3-15-6-6
1274. 1-3-15-6-7
1275. 1-3-15-7-1
1276. 1-3-15-7-2
1277. 1-3-15-7-3
1278. 1-3-15-7-4
1279. 1-3-15-7-5
1280. 1-3-15-7-6
1281. 1-3-15-7-7
1282. 1-3-15-8-1
1283. 1-3-15-8-2
1284. 1-3-15-8-3
1285. 1-3-15-8-4
1286. 1-3-15-8-5
1287. 1-3-15-8-6
1288. 1-3-15-8-7
1289. 1-3-15-9-1
1290. 1-3-15-9-2
1291. 1-3-15-9-3
1292. 1-3-15-9-4
1293. 1-3-15-9-5
1294. 1-3-15-9-6
1295. 1-3-15-9-7
1296. 1-3-15-10-1
1297. 1-3-15-10-2
1298. 1-3-15-10-3
1299. 1-3-15-10-4

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
3AG 24622 EAAA TQZZA Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary 4-359
Issue 1 February 2010 Use pursuant to applicable agreements
System turn-up and testing Verify GBE provisioning

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Table 4-27 Verify provisioning GBE facility and STS3C (continued)
Prov. Order (✓) Provisioned GBESTS3C Notes
GBEVCG cross-connected
(✓)
1300. 1-3-15-10-5
1301. 1-3-15-10-6
1302. 1-3-15-10-7
1303. 1-3-15-11-1
1304. 1-3-15-11-2
1305. 1-3-15-11-3
1306. 1-3-15-11-4
1307. 1-3-15-11-5
1308. 1-3-15-11-6
1309. 1-3-15-11-7
1310. 1-3-15-12-1
1311. 1-3-15-12-2
1312. 1-3-15-12-3
1313. 1-3-15-12-4
1314. 1-3-15-12-5
1315. 1-3-15-12-6
1316. 1-3-15-12-7
1317. 1-3-15-13-1
1318. 1-3-15-13-2
1319. 1-3-15-13-3
1320. 1-3-15-13-4
1321. 1-3-15-13-5
1322. 1-3-15-13-6
1323. 1-3-15-13-7
1324. 1-3-15-14-1
1325. 1-3-15-14-2
1326. 1-3-15-14-3
1327. 1-3-15-14-4
1328. 1-3-15-14-5

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
4-360 Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary 3AG 24622 EAAA TQZZA
Use pursuant to applicable agreements Issue 1 February 2010
System turn-up and testing Verify GBE provisioning

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Table 4-27 Verify provisioning GBE facility and STS3C (continued)
Prov. Order (✓) Provisioned GBESTS3C Notes
GBEVCG cross-connected
(✓)
1329. 1-3-15-14-6
1330. 1-3-15-14-7
1331. 1-3-15-15-1
1332. 1-3-15-15-2
1333. 1-3-15-15-3
1334. 1-3-15-15-4
1335. 1-3-15-15-5
1336. 1-3-15-15-6
1337. 1-3-15-15-7
1338. 1-3-15-16-1
1339. 1-3-15-16-2
1340. 1-3-15-16-3
1341. 1-3-15-16-4
1342. 1-3-15-16-5
1343. 1-3-15-16-6
1344. 1-3-15-16-7
1345. 1-3-16-1-1
1346. 1-3-16-1-2
1347. 1-3-16-1-3
1348. 1-3-16-1-4
1349. 1-3-16-1-5
1350. 1-3-16-1-6
1351. 1-3-16-1-7
1352. 1-3-16-2-1
1353. 1-3-16-2-2
1354. 1-3-16-2-3
1355. 1-3-16-2-4
1356. 1-3-16-2-5
1357. 1-3-16-2-6

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
3AG 24622 EAAA TQZZA Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary 4-361
Issue 1 February 2010 Use pursuant to applicable agreements
System turn-up and testing Verify GBE provisioning

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Table 4-27 Verify provisioning GBE facility and STS3C (continued)
Prov. Order (✓) Provisioned GBESTS3C Notes
GBEVCG cross-connected
(✓)
1358. 1-3-16-2-7
1359. 1-3-16-3-1
1360. 1-3-16-3-2
1361. 1-3-16-3-3
1362. 1-3-16-3-4
1363. 1-3-16-3-5
1364. 1-3-16-3-6
1365. 1-3-16-3-7
1366. 1-3-16-4-1
1367. 1-3-16-4-2
1368. 1-3-16-4-3
1369. 1-3-16-4-4
1370. 1-3-16-4-5
1371. 1-3-16-4-6
1372. 1-3-16-4-7
1373. 1-3-16-5-1
1374. 1-3-16-5-2
1375. 1-3-16-5-3
1376. 1-3-16-5-4
1377. 1-3-16-5-5
1378. 1-3-16-5-6
1379. 1-3-16-5-7
1380. 1-3-16-6-1
1381. 1-3-16-6-2
1382. 1-3-16-6-3
1383. 1-3-16-6-4
1384. 1-3-16-6-5
1385. 1-3-16-6-6
1386. 1-3-16-6-7

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
4-362 Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary 3AG 24622 EAAA TQZZA
Use pursuant to applicable agreements Issue 1 February 2010
System turn-up and testing Verify GBE provisioning

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Table 4-27 Verify provisioning GBE facility and STS3C (continued)
Prov. Order (✓) Provisioned GBESTS3C Notes
GBEVCG cross-connected
(✓)
1387. 1-3-16-7-1
1388. 1-3-16-7-2
1389. 1-3-16-7-3
1390. 1-3-16-7-4
1391. 1-3-16-7-5
1392. 1-3-16-7-6
1393. 1-3-16-7-7
1394. 1-3-16-8-1
1395. 1-3-16-8-2
1396. 1-3-16-8-3
1397. 1-3-16-8-4
1398. 1-3-16-8-5
1399. 1-3-16-8-6
1400. 1-3-16-8-7
1401. 1-3-16-9-1
1402. 1-3-16-9-2
1403. 1-3-16-9-3
1404. 1-3-16-9-4
1405. 1-3-16-9-5
1406. 1-3-16-9-6
1407. 1-3-16-9-7
1408. 1-3-16-10-1
1409. 1-3-16-10-2
1410. 1-3-16-10-3
1411. 1-3-16-10-4
1412. 1-3-16-10-5
1413. 1-3-16-10-6
1414. 1-3-16-10-7
1415. 1-3-16-11-1

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
3AG 24622 EAAA TQZZA Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary 4-363
Issue 1 February 2010 Use pursuant to applicable agreements
System turn-up and testing Verify GBE provisioning

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Table 4-27 Verify provisioning GBE facility and STS3C (continued)
Prov. Order (✓) Provisioned GBESTS3C Notes
GBEVCG cross-connected
(✓)
1416. 1-3-16-11-2
1417. 1-3-16-11-3
1418. 1-3-16-11-4
1419. 1-3-16-11-5
1420. 1-3-16-11-6
1421. 1-3-16-11-7
1422. 1-3-16-12-1
1423. 1-3-16-12-2
1424. 1-3-16-12-3
1425. 1-3-16-12-4
1426. 1-3-16-12-5
1427. 1-3-16-12-6
1428. 1-3-16-12-7
1429. 1-3-16-13-1
1430. 1-3-16-13-2
1431. 1-3-16-13-3
1432. 1-3-16-13-4
1433. 1-3-16-13-5
1434. 1-3-16-13-6
1435. 1-3-16-13-7
1436. 1-3-16-14-1
1437. 1-3-16-14-2
1438. 1-3-16-14-3
1439. 1-3-16-14-4
1440. 1-3-16-14-5
1441. 1-3-16-14-6
1442. 1-3-16-14-7
1443. 1-3-16-15-1
1444. 1-3-16-15-2

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
4-364 Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary 3AG 24622 EAAA TQZZA
Use pursuant to applicable agreements Issue 1 February 2010
System turn-up and testing Verify GBE provisioning

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Table 4-27 Verify provisioning GBE facility and STS3C (continued)
Prov. Order (✓) Provisioned GBESTS3C Notes
GBEVCG cross-connected
(✓)
1445. 1-3-16-15-3
1446. 1-3-16-15-4
1447. 1-3-16-15-5
1448. 1-3-16-15-6
1449. 1-3-16-15-7
1450. 1-3-16-16-1
1451. 1-3-16-16-2
1452. 1-3-16-16-3
1453. 1-3-16-16-4
1454. 1-3-16-16-5
1455. 1-3-16-16-6
1456. 1-3-16-16-7
1457. 1-3-17-1-1
1458. 1-3-17-1-2
1459. 1-3-17-1-3
1460. 1-3-17-1-4
1461. 1-3-17-1-5
1462. 1-3-17-1-6
1463. 1-3-17-1-7
1464. 1-3-17-2-1
1465. 1-3-17-2-2
1466. 1-3-17-2-3
1467. 1-3-17-2-4
1468. 1-3-17-2-5
1469. 1-3-17-2-6
1470. 1-3-17-2-7
1471. 1-3-17-3-1
1472. 1-3-17-3-2
1473. 1-3-17-3-3

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
3AG 24622 EAAA TQZZA Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary 4-365
Issue 1 February 2010 Use pursuant to applicable agreements
System turn-up and testing Verify GBE provisioning

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Table 4-27 Verify provisioning GBE facility and STS3C (continued)
Prov. Order (✓) Provisioned GBESTS3C Notes
GBEVCG cross-connected
(✓)
1474. 1-3-17-3-4
1475. 1-3-17-3-5
1476. 1-3-17-3-6
1477. 1-3-17-3-7
1478. 1-3-17-4-1
1479. 1-3-17-4-2
1480. 1-3-17-4-3
1481. 1-3-17-4-4
1482. 1-3-17-4-5
1483. 1-3-17-4-6
1484. 1-3-17-4-7
1485. 1-3-17-5-1
1486. 1-3-17-5-2
1487. 1-3-17-5-3
1488. 1-3-17-5-4
1489. 1-3-17-5-5
1490. 1-3-17-5-6
1491. 1-3-17-5-7
1492. 1-3-17-6-1
1493. 1-3-17-6-2
1494. 1-3-17-6-3
1495. 1-3-17-6-4
1496. 1-3-17-6-5
1497. 1-3-17-6-6
1498. 1-3-17-6-7
1499. 1-3-17-7-1
1500. 1-3-17-7-2
1501. 1-3-17-7-3
1502. 1-3-17-7-4

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
4-366 Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary 3AG 24622 EAAA TQZZA
Use pursuant to applicable agreements Issue 1 February 2010
System turn-up and testing Verify GBE provisioning

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Table 4-27 Verify provisioning GBE facility and STS3C (continued)
Prov. Order (✓) Provisioned GBESTS3C Notes
GBEVCG cross-connected
(✓)
1503. 1-3-17-7-5
1504. 1-3-17-7-6
1505. 1-3-17-7-7
1506. 1-3-17-8-1
1507. 1-3-17-8-2
1508. 1-3-17-8-3
1509. 1-3-17-8-4
1510. 1-3-17-8-5
1511. 1-3-17-8-6
1512. 1-3-17-8-7
1513. 1-3-17-9-1
1514. 1-3-17-9-2
1515. 1-3-17-9-3
1516. 1-3-17-9-4
1517. 1-3-17-9-5
1518. 1-3-17-9-6
1519. 1-3-17-9-7
1520. 1-3-17-10-1
1521. 1-3-17-10-2
1522. 1-3-17-10-3
1523. 1-3-17-10-4
1524. 1-3-17-10-5
1525. 1-3-17-10-6
1526. 1-3-17-10-7
1527. 1-3-17-11-1
1528. 1-3-17-11-2
1529. 1-3-17-11-3
1530. 1-3-17-11-4
1531. 1-3-17-11-5

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
3AG 24622 EAAA TQZZA Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary 4-367
Issue 1 February 2010 Use pursuant to applicable agreements
System turn-up and testing Verify GBE provisioning

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Table 4-27 Verify provisioning GBE facility and STS3C (continued)
Prov. Order (✓) Provisioned GBESTS3C Notes
GBEVCG cross-connected
(✓)
1532. 1-3-17-11-6
1533. 1-3-17-11-7
1534. 1-3-17-12-1
1535. 1-3-17-12-2
1536. 1-3-17-12-3
1537. 1-3-17-12-4
1538. 1-3-17-12-5
1539. 1-3-17-12-6
1540. 1-3-17-12-7
1541. 1-3-17-13-1
1542. 1-3-17-13-2
1543. 1-3-17-13-3
1544. 1-3-17-13-4
1545. 1-3-17-13-5
1546. 1-3-17-13-6
1547. 1-3-17-13-7
1548. 1-3-17-14-1
1549. 1-3-17-14-2
1550. 1-3-17-14-3
1551. 1-3-17-14-4
1552. 1-3-17-14-5
1553. 1-3-17-14-6
1554. 1-3-17-14-7
1555. 1-3-17-15-1
1556. 1-3-17-15-2
1557. 1-3-17-15-3
1558. 1-3-17-15-4
1559. 1-3-17-15-5
1560. 1-3-17-15-6

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
4-368 Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary 3AG 24622 EAAA TQZZA
Use pursuant to applicable agreements Issue 1 February 2010
System turn-up and testing Verify GBE provisioning

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Table 4-27 Verify provisioning GBE facility and STS3C (continued)
Prov. Order (✓) Provisioned GBESTS3C Notes
GBEVCG cross-connected
(✓)
1561. 1-3-17-15-7
1562. 1-3-17-16-1
1563. 1-3-17-16-2
1564. 1-3-17-16-3
1565. 1-3-17-16-4
1566. 1-3-17-16-5
1567. 1-3-17-16-6
1568. 1-3-17-16-7
1569. 1-3-18-1-1
1570. 1-3-18-1-2
1571. 1-3-18-1-3
1572. 1-3-18-1-4
1573. 1-3-18-1-5
1574. 1-3-18-1-6
1575. 1-3-18-1-7
1576. 1-3-18-2-1
1577. 1-3-18-2-2
1578. 1-3-18-2-3
1579. 1-3-18-2-4
1580. 1-3-18-2-5
1581. 1-3-18-2-6
1582. 1-3-18-2-7
1583. 1-3-18-3-1
1584. 1-3-18-3-2
1585. 1-3-18-3-3
1586. 1-3-18-3-4
1587. 1-3-18-3-5
1588. 1-3-18-3-6
1589. 1-3-18-3-7

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
3AG 24622 EAAA TQZZA Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary 4-369
Issue 1 February 2010 Use pursuant to applicable agreements
System turn-up and testing Verify GBE provisioning

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Table 4-27 Verify provisioning GBE facility and STS3C (continued)
Prov. Order (✓) Provisioned GBESTS3C Notes
GBEVCG cross-connected
(✓)
1590. 1-3-18-4-1
1591. 1-3-18-4-2
1592. 1-3-18-4-3
1593. 1-3-18-4-4
1594. 1-3-18-4-5
1595. 1-3-18-4-6
1596. 1-3-18-4-7
1597. 1-3-18-5-1
1598. 1-3-18-5-2
1599. 1-3-18-5-3
1600. 1-3-18-5-4
1601. 1-3-18-5-5
1602. 1-3-18-5-6
1603. 1-3-18-5-7
1604. 1-3-18-6-1
1605. 1-3-18-6-2
1606. 1-3-18-6-3
1607. 1-3-18-6-4
1608. 1-3-18-6-5
1609. 1-3-18-6-6
1610. 1-3-18-6-7
1611. 1-3-18-7-1
1612. 1-3-18-7-2
1613. 1-3-18-7-3
1614. 1-3-18-7-4
1615. 1-3-18-7-5
1616. 1-3-18-7-6
1617. 1-3-18-7-7
1618. 1-3-18-8-1

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
4-370 Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary 3AG 24622 EAAA TQZZA
Use pursuant to applicable agreements Issue 1 February 2010
System turn-up and testing Verify GBE provisioning

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Table 4-27 Verify provisioning GBE facility and STS3C (continued)
Prov. Order (✓) Provisioned GBESTS3C Notes
GBEVCG cross-connected
(✓)
1619. 1-3-18-8-2
1620. 1-3-18-8-3
1621. 1-3-18-8-4
1622. 1-3-18-8-5
1623. 1-3-18-8-6
1624. 1-3-18-8-7
1625. 1-3-18-9-1
1626. 1-3-18-9-2
1627. 1-3-18-9-3
1628. 1-3-18-9-4
1629. 1-3-18-9-5
1630. 1-3-18-9-6
1631. 1-3-18-9-7
1632. 1-3-18-10-1
1633. 1-3-18-10-2
1634. 1-3-18-10-3
1635. 1-3-18-10-4
1636. 1-3-18-10-5
1637. 1-3-18-10-6
1638. 1-3-18-10-7
1639. 1-3-18-11-1
1640. 1-3-18-11-2
1641. 1-3-18-11-3
1642. 1-3-18-11-4
1643. 1-3-18-11-5
1644. 1-3-18-11-6
1645. 1-3-18-11-7
1646. 1-3-18-12-1
1647. 1-3-18-12-2

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
3AG 24622 EAAA TQZZA Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary 4-371
Issue 1 February 2010 Use pursuant to applicable agreements
System turn-up and testing Verify GBE provisioning

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Table 4-27 Verify provisioning GBE facility and STS3C (continued)
Prov. Order (✓) Provisioned GBESTS3C Notes
GBEVCG cross-connected
(✓)
1648. 1-3-18-12-3
1649. 1-3-18-12-4
1650. 1-3-18-12-5
1651. 1-3-18-12-6
1652. 1-3-18-12-7
1653. 1-3-18-13-1
1654. 1-3-18-13-2
1655. 1-3-18-13-3
1656. 1-3-18-13-4
1657. 1-3-18-13-5
1658. 1-3-18-13-6
1659. 1-3-18-13-7
1660. 1-3-18-14-1
1661. 1-3-18-14-2
1662. 1-3-18-14-3
1663. 1-3-18-14-4
1664. 1-3-18-14-5
1665. 1-3-18-14-6
1666. 1-3-18-14-7
1667. 1-3-18-15-1
1668. 1-3-18-15-2
1669. 1-3-18-15-3
1670. 1-3-18-15-4
1671. 1-3-18-15-5
1672. 1-3-18-15-6
1673. 1-3-18-15-7
1674. 1-3-18-16-1
1675. 1-3-18-16-2
1676. 1-3-18-16-3

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
4-372 Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary 3AG 24622 EAAA TQZZA
Use pursuant to applicable agreements Issue 1 February 2010
System turn-up and testing Verify GBE provisioning

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Table 4-27 Verify provisioning GBE facility and STS3C (continued)
Prov. Order (✓) Provisioned GBESTS3C Notes
GBEVCG cross-connected
(✓)
1677. 1-3-18-16-4
1678. 1-3-18-16-5
1679. 1-3-18-16-6
1680. 1-3-18-16-7
1681. 1-3-19-1-1
1682. 1-3-19-1-2
1683. 1-3-19-1-3
1684. 1-3-19-1-4
1685. 1-3-19-1-5
1686. 1-3-19-1-6
1687. 1-3-19-1-7
1688. 1-3-19-2-1
1689. 1-3-19-2-2
1690. 1-3-19-2-3
1691. 1-3-19-2-4
1692. 1-3-19-2-5
1693. 1-3-19-2-6
1694. 1-3-19-2-7
1695. 1-3-19-3-1
1696. 1-3-19-3-2
1697. 1-3-19-3-3
1698. 1-3-19-3-4
1699. 1-3-19-3-5
1700. 1-3-19-3-6
1701. 1-3-19-3-7
1702. 1-3-19-4-1
1703. 1-3-19-4-2
1704. 1-3-19-4-3
1705. 1-3-19-4-4

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
3AG 24622 EAAA TQZZA Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary 4-373
Issue 1 February 2010 Use pursuant to applicable agreements
System turn-up and testing Verify GBE provisioning

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Table 4-27 Verify provisioning GBE facility and STS3C (continued)
Prov. Order (✓) Provisioned GBESTS3C Notes
GBEVCG cross-connected
(✓)
1706. 1-3-19-4-5
1707. 1-3-19-4-6
1708. 1-3-19-4-7
1709. 1-3-19-5-1
1710. 1-3-19-5-2
1711. 1-3-19-5-3
1712. 1-3-19-5-4
1713. 1-3-19-5-5
1714. 1-3-19-5-6
1715. 1-3-19-5-7
1716. 1-3-19-6-1
1717. 1-3-19-6-2
1718. 1-3-19-6-3
1719. 1-3-19-6-4
1720. 1-3-19-6-5
1721. 1-3-19-6-6
1722. 1-3-19-6-7
1723. 1-3-19-7-1
1724. 1-3-19-7-2
1725. 1-3-19-7-3
1726. 1-3-19-7-4
1727. 1-3-19-7-5
1728. 1-3-19-7-6
1729. 1-3-19-7-7
1730. 1-3-19-8-1
1731. 1-3-19-8-2
1732. 1-3-19-8-3
1733. 1-3-19-8-4
1734. 1-3-19-8-5

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
4-374 Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary 3AG 24622 EAAA TQZZA
Use pursuant to applicable agreements Issue 1 February 2010
System turn-up and testing Verify GBE provisioning

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Table 4-27 Verify provisioning GBE facility and STS3C (continued)
Prov. Order (✓) Provisioned GBESTS3C Notes
GBEVCG cross-connected
(✓)
1735. 1-3-19-8-6
1736. 1-3-19-8-7
1737. 1-3-19-9-1
1738. 1-3-19-9-2
1739. 1-3-19-9-3
1740. 1-3-19-9-4
1741. 1-3-19-9-5
1742. 1-3-19-9-6
1743. 1-3-19-9-7
1744. 1-3-19-10-1
1745. 1-3-19-10-2
1746. 1-3-19-10-3
1747. 1-3-19-10-4
1748. 1-3-19-10-5
1749. 1-3-19-10-6
1750. 1-3-19-10-7
1751. 1-3-19-11-1
1752. 1-3-19-11-2
1753. 1-3-19-11-3
1754. 1-3-19-11-4
1755. 1-3-19-11-5
1756. 1-3-19-11-6
1757. 1-3-19-11-7
1758. 1-3-19-12-1
1759. 1-3-19-12-2
1760. 1-3-19-12-3
1761. 1-3-19-12-4
1762. 1-3-19-12-5
1763. 1-3-19-12-6

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
3AG 24622 EAAA TQZZA Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary 4-375
Issue 1 February 2010 Use pursuant to applicable agreements
System turn-up and testing Verify GBE provisioning

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Table 4-27 Verify provisioning GBE facility and STS3C (continued)
Prov. Order (✓) Provisioned GBESTS3C Notes
GBEVCG cross-connected
(✓)
1764. 1-3-19-12-7
1765. 1-3-19-13-1
1766. 1-3-19-13-2
1767. 1-3-19-13-3
1768. 1-3-19-13-4
1769. 1-3-19-13-5
1770. 1-3-19-13-6
1771. 1-3-19-13-7
1772. 1-3-19-14-1
1773. 1-3-19-14-2
1774. 1-3-19-14-3
1775. 1-3-19-14-4
1776. 1-3-19-14-5
1777. 1-3-19-14-6
1778. 1-3-19-14-7
1779. 1-3-19-15-1
1780. 1-3-19-15-2
1781. 1-3-19-15-3
1782. 1-3-19-15-4
1783. 1-3-19-15-5
1784. 1-3-19-15-6
1785. 1-3-19-15-7
1786. 1-3-19-16-1
1787. 1-3-19-16-2
1788. 1-3-19-16-3
1789. 1-3-19-16-4
1790. 1-3-19-16-5
1791. 1-3-19-16-6
1792. 1-3-19-16-7

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
4-376 Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary 3AG 24622 EAAA TQZZA
Use pursuant to applicable agreements Issue 1 February 2010
System turn-up and testing Verify OCn provisioning

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Verify OCn provisioning

Purpose
Use this checklist for Procedure 4-18: “OC-n error-free verification setup” (p. 4-124).
Place a check mark (✓) in the appropriate column of Table 4-28, “Verify provisioning
facility, FFP, and STSnC” (p. 4-377) for each OC-n provisioned, FFP provisioned, and
STS-nC provisioned.
Table 4-28 Verify provisioning facility, FFP, and STSnC
Prov. Provisioned (Protected) Prov. Provisioned FFP Provisioned First STS-nC
Order (✓) OCn Order (✓) (Protecting) OCn (✓) Provisioned (✓)

1. 1-3-2-1 17. 1-3-3-1

2. 1-3-2-2 18. 1-3-3-2

3. 1-3-2-3 19. 1-3-3-3
4. 1-3-2-4 20. 1-3-3-4
5. 1-3-2-5 21. 1-3-3-5

6. 1-3-2-6 22. 1-3-3-6

7. 1-3-2-7 23. 1-3-3-7
8. 1-3-2-8 24. 1-3-3-8
9. 1-3-2-9 25. 1-3-3-9
10. 1-3-2-10 26. 1-3-3-10
11. 1-3-2-11 27. 1-3-3-11
12. 1-3-2-12 28. 1-3-3-12

13. 1-3-2-13 29. 1-3-3-13

14. 1-3-2-14 30. 1-3-3-14

15. 1-3-2-15 31. 1-3-3-15

16. 1-3-2-16 32. 1-3-3-16

33. 1-3-4-1 49. 1-3-5-1

34. 1-3-4-2 50. 1-3-5-2

35. 1-3-4-3 51. 1-3-5-3
36. 1-3-4-4 52. 1-3-5-4

37. 1-3-4-5 53. 1-3-5-5

38. 1-3-4-6 54. 1-3-5-6

39. 1-3-4-7 55. 1-3-5-7

40. 1-3-4-8 56. 1-3-5-8

41. 1-3-4-9 57. 1-3-5-9

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
3AG 24622 EAAA TQZZA Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary 4-377
Issue 1 February 2010 Use pursuant to applicable agreements
System turn-up and testing Verify OCn provisioning

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Table 4-28 Verify provisioning facility, FFP, and STSnC (continued)
Prov. Provisioned (Protected) Prov. Provisioned FFP Provisioned First STS-nC
Order (✓) OCn Order (✓) (Protecting) OCn (✓) Provisioned (✓)

42. 1-3-4-10 58. 1-3-5-10

43. 1-3-4-11 59. 1-3-5-11

44. 1-3-4-12 60. 1-3-5-12

45. 1-3-4-13 61. 1-3-5-13

46. 1-3-4-14 62. 1-3-5-14

47. 1-3-4-15 63. 1-3-5-15

48. 1-3-4-16 64. 1-3-5-16

65. 1-3-6-1 81. 1-3-7-1

66. 1-3-6-2 82. 1-3-7-2

67. 1-3-6-3 83. 1-3-7-3
68. 1-3-6-4 84. 1-3-7-4
69. 1-3-6-5 85. 1-3-7-5

70. 1-3-6-6 86. 1-3-7-6

71. 1-3-6-7 87. 1-3-7-7

72. 1-3-6-8 88. 1-3-7-8

73. 1-3-6-9 89. 1-3-7-9
74. 1-3-6-10 90. 1-3-7-10
75. 1-3-6-11 91. 1-3-7-11
76. 1-3-6-12 92. 1-3-7-12
77. 1-3-6-13 93. 1-3-7-13
78. 1-3-6-14 94. 1-3-7-14

79. 1-3-6-15 95. 1-3-7-15

80. 1-3-6-16 96. 1-3-7-16

97. 1-3-8-1 113. 1-3-9-1
98. 1-3-8-2 114. 1-3-9-2

99. 1-3-8-3 115. 1-3-9-3

100. 1-3-8-4 116. 1-3-9-4

101. 1-3-8-5 117. 1-3-9-5

102. 1-3-8-6 118. 1-3-9-6

103. 1-3-8-7 119. 1-3-9-7

104. 1-3-8-8 120. 1-3-9-8

105. 1-3-8-9 121. 1-3-9-9

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
4-378 Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary 3AG 24622 EAAA TQZZA
Use pursuant to applicable agreements Issue 1 February 2010
System turn-up and testing Verify OCn provisioning

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Table 4-28 Verify provisioning facility, FFP, and STSnC (continued)
Prov. Provisioned (Protected) Prov. Provisioned FFP Provisioned First STS-nC
Order (✓) OCn Order (✓) (Protecting) OCn (✓) Provisioned (✓)

106. 1-3-8-10 122. 1-3-9-10

107. 1-3-8-11 123. 1-3-9-11

108. 1-3-8-12 124. 1-3-9-12

109. 1-3-8-13 125. 1-3-9-13

110. 1-3-8-14 126. 1-3-9-14

111. 1-3-8-15 127. 1-3-9-15

112. 1-3-8-16 128. 1-3-9-16

129. 1-3-12-1 145. 1-3-13-1

130. 1-3-12-2 146. 1-3-13-2

131. 1-3-12-3 147. 1-3-13-3
132. 1-3-12-4 148. 1-3-13-4
133. 1-3-12-5 149. 1-3-13-5

134. 1-3-12-6 150. 1-3-13-6

135. 1-3-12-7 151. 1-3-13-7

136. 1-3-12-8 152. 1-3-13-8

137. 1-3-12-9 153. 1-3-13-9
138. 1-3-12-10 154. 1-3-13-10
139. 1-3-12-11 155. 1-3-13-11
140. 1-3-12-12 156. 1-3-13-12
141. 1-3-12-13 157. 1-3-13-13
142. 1-3-12-14 158. 1-3-13-14

143. 1-3-12-15 159. 1-3-13-15

144. 1-3-12-16 160. 1-3-13-16

161. 1-3-14-1 177. 1-3-15-1
162. 1-3-14-2 178. 1-3-15-2

163. 1-3-14-3 179. 1-3-15-3

164. 1-3-14-4 180. 1-3-15-4

165. 1-3-14-5 181. 1-3-15-5

166. 1-3-14-6 182. 1-3-15-6

167. 1-3-14-7 183. 1-3-15-7

168. 1-3-14-8 184. 1-3-15-8

169. 1-3-14-9 185. 1-3-15-9

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
3AG 24622 EAAA TQZZA Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary 4-379
Issue 1 February 2010 Use pursuant to applicable agreements
System turn-up and testing Verify OCn provisioning

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Table 4-28 Verify provisioning facility, FFP, and STSnC (continued)
Prov. Provisioned (Protected) Prov. Provisioned FFP Provisioned First STS-nC
Order (✓) OCn Order (✓) (Protecting) OCn (✓) Provisioned (✓)

170. 1-3-14-10 186. 1-3-15-10

171. 1-3-14-11 187. 1-3-15-11

172. 1-3-14-12 188. 1-3-15-12

173. 1-3-14-13 189. 1-3-15-13

174. 1-3-14-14 190. 1-3-15-14

175. 1-3-14-15 191. 1-3-15-15

176. 1-3-14-16 192. 1-3-15-16

193. 1-3-16-1 209. 1-3-17-1

194. 1-3-16-2 210. 1-3-17-2

195. 1-3-16-3 211. 1-3-17-3
196. 1-3-16-4 212. 1-3-17-4
197. 1-3-16-5 213. 1-3-17-5

198. 1-3-16-6 214. 1-3-17-6

199. 1-3-16-7 215. 1-3-17-7

200. 1-3-16-8 216. 1-3-17-8

201. 1-3-16-9 217. 1-3-17-9
202. 1-3-16-10 218. 1-3-17-10
203. 1-3-16-11 219. 1-3-17-11
204. 1-3-16-12 220. 1-3-17-12
205. 1-3-16-13 221. 1-3-17-13
206. 1-3-16-14 222. 1-3-17-14

207. 1-3-16-15 223. 1-3-17-15

208. 1-3-16-16 224. 1-3-17-16

225. 1-3-18-1 241. 1-3-19-1
226. 1-3-18-2 242. 1-3-19-2

227. 1-3-18-3 243. 1-3-19-3

228. 1-3-18-4 244. 1-3-19-4

229. 1-3-18-5 245. 1-3-19-5

230. 1-3-18-6 246. 1-3-19-6

231. 1-3-18-7 247. 1-3-19-7

232. 1-3-18-8 248. 1-3-19-8

233. 1-3-18-9 249. 1-3-19-9

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
4-380 Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary 3AG 24622 EAAA TQZZA
Use pursuant to applicable agreements Issue 1 February 2010
System turn-up and testing Verify OCn provisioning

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Table 4-28 Verify provisioning facility, FFP, and STSnC (continued)
Prov. Provisioned (Protected) Prov. Provisioned FFP Provisioned First STS-nC
Order (✓) OCn Order (✓) (Protecting) OCn (✓) Provisioned (✓)

234. 1-3-18-10 250. 1-3-19-10

235. 1-3-18-11 251. 1-3-19-11

236. 1-3-18-12 252. 1-3-19-12

237. 1-3-18-13 253. 1-3-19-13

238. 1-3-18-14 254. 1-3-19-14

239. 1-3-18-15 255. 1-3-19-15

240. 1-3-18-16 256. 1-3-19-16

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
3AG 24622 EAAA TQZZA Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary 4-381
Issue 1 February 2010 Use pursuant to applicable agreements
System turn-up and testing Record error-free verification test results (copy 0)

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Record error-free verification test results (copy 0)

Use this checklist for Procedure 4-19: “Perform error-free verification test (copy 0)”
(p. 4-134).
Refer to Table 4-29, “Copy 0 error-free verification test results” (p. 4-382) and place a
check mark (✓) in the Verified column as each item is verified during the procedure.

Table 4-29 Copy 0 error-free verification test results

Description Verified (✓)
No alarms that prevent testing are present.
No conditions that prevent testing are present.
EXTERNALA or LINEA is reported for CURREFSRC.
No errors occur during 15-minute monitoring period when traffic
is locked to copy 0 matrix.
Logical removal of copy 1 matrix does not cause errors.
Physical removal of copy 1 matrix does not cause errors.
Physical insertion of copy 1 matrix does not cause errors.
Logical restoration of copy 1 matrix does not cause errors.

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
4-382 Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary 3AG 24622 EAAA TQZZA
Use pursuant to applicable agreements Issue 1 February 2010
System turn-up and testing Verify shelf redundant power copy 0

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Verify shelf redundant power copy 0

Use this checklist for Procedure 4-20: “Verify shelf redundant power copy 0” (p. 4-139).
Refer to Table 4-30, “Verify redundant power copy 0” (p. 4-383) and place a check mark
(✓) in the Verified column as each item is verified during the verifying redundant power
procedure.
Table 4-30 Verify redundant power copy 0
Description APWR/BPWR No errors
alarm set Verified (✓)
Verified (✓)
There are no alarms preventing this test. N/A
There are no conditions preventing this test. N/A
DIRECT POWER CONNECTION TO CO BDFB
Errors are not reported when A power breaker is switched off.
Errors are not reported when B power breaker is switched off.
POWER CONNECTION THROUGH NGTRU
Errors are not reported when slot 1 step-up converter is switched off.
Errors are not reported when slot 2 step-up converter is switched off.

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
3AG 24622 EAAA TQZZA Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary 4-383
Issue 1 February 2010 Use pursuant to applicable agreements
System turn-up and testing Verify clock and control subsystem switching

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Verify clock and control subsystem switching

Use this checklist for Procedure 4-21: “Verify clock and control switching” (p. 4-144).
Refer to Table 4-31, “Verify clock and control subsystem switching” (p. 4-384) and place
a (✓) in the Verified column as each item is verified during FLC and clock subsystem
switching procedure.

Table 4-31 Verify clock and control subsystem switching

Description Verified (✓)
No alarms exist that prevent testing FLCs
No conditions exist that prevent testing
CLKMDE=NORMAL and CLKREF=BITS-1
Is LOS reported against BITS-0
Logically removing FLCSERVA caused no errors
Unseating FLCSERVA caused no errors
Seating FLCSERVA caused no errors
Logically restoring FLCSERVA caused no errors
LOS condition against BITS-0 cleared
CLKMDE=NORMAL and CLKREF=BITS-0
LOS reported against BITS-1
FLC switch caused no errors
Logically removing FLCCONGI caused no errors
Unseating FLCCONGI caused no errors
Seating FLCSERVA caused no errors
Logically restoring FLCCONGI caused no errors
LOS condition against BITS-1 cleared

Table 4-32 Verify primary BITS clock output and control subsystem switching
Description Verified (✓)
CLKMDE=NORMAL
Both test sets are running error-free
Logically removing FLCCONGI caused no errors
Unseating FLCCONGI caused no errors
Seating FLCCONGI caused no errors
Logically restoring FLCCONGI caused no errors
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
4-384 Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary 3AG 24622 EAAA TQZZA
Use pursuant to applicable agreements Issue 1 February 2010
System turn-up and testing Verify clock and control subsystem switching

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Table 4-32 Verify primary BITS clock output and control subsystem switching
(continued)
Description Verified (✓)
Test set at FLCCONGI is running error-free
Both test sets are running error-free
Logically removing FLCSERVA caused no errors
Unseating FLCSERVA caused no errors
Seating FLCSERVA caused no errors
Logically restoring FLCSERVA caused no errors
Test set at FLCSERVA is running error-free

Table 4-33 Verify secondary BITS clock output and control subsystem switching
Description Verified (✓)
CLKMDE=NORMAL
Both test sets are running error-free
Logically removing FLCCONGI caused no errors
Unseating FLCCONGI caused no errors
Seating FLCCONGI caused no errors
Logically restoring FLCCONGI caused no errors
Test set at FLCCONGI is running error-free
Both test sets are running error-free
Logically removing FLCSERVA caused no errors
Unseating FLCSERVA caused no errors
Seating FLCSERVA caused no errors
Logically restoring FLCSERVA caused no errors
Test set at FLCSERVA is running error-free

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
3AG 24622 EAAA TQZZA Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary 4-385
Issue 1 February 2010 Use pursuant to applicable agreements
System turn-up and testing Verify OC-n protection switching (working to protect)

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Verify OC-n protection switching (working to protect)

Use this checklist for Procedure 4-24: “Verify OC-n protection switching (protect to
working)” (p. 4-171).
Refer to Table 4-34, “Verify protection switching test (OC-n)” (p. 4-386) and place a
check mark (✓) in the Verified column as each item is verified during procedure.

Table 4-34 Verify protection switching test (OC-n)

Module location Switch to protect Error free
(Module-Slot-Subslot) Verified (✓) Verified (✓)
OCn-1-3-2-1
OCn-1-3-2-2
OCn-1-3-2-3
OCn-1-3-2-4
OCn-1-3-2-5
OCn-1-3-2-6
OCn-1-3-2-7
OCn-1-3-2-8
OCn-1-3-2-9
OCn-1-3-2-10
OCn-1-3-2-11
OCn-1-3-2-12
OCn-1-3-2-13
OCn-1-3-2-14
OCn-1-3-2-15
OCn-1-3-2-16
OCn-1-3-3-1
OCn-1-3-3-2
OCn-1-3-3-3
OCn-1-3-3-4
OCn-1-3-3-5
OCn-1-3-3-6
OCn-1-3-3-7
OCn-1-3-3-8
OCn-1-3-3-9

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
4-386 Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary 3AG 24622 EAAA TQZZA
Use pursuant to applicable agreements Issue 1 February 2010
System turn-up and testing Verify OC-n protection switching (working to protect)

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Table 4-34 Verify protection switching test (OC-n) (continued)
Module location Switch to protect Error free
(Module-Slot-Subslot) Verified (✓) Verified (✓)
OCn-1-3-3-10
OCn-1-3-3-11
OCn-1-3-3-12
OCn-1-3-3-13
OCn-1-3-3-14
OCn-1-3-3-15
OCn-1-3-3-16
OCn-1-3-4-1
OCn-1-3-4-2
OCn-1-3-4-3
OCn-1-3-4-4
OCn-1-3-4-5
OCn-1-3-4-6
OCn-1-3-4-7
OCn-1-3-4-8
OCn-1-3-4-9
OCn-1-3-4-10
OCn-1-3-4-11
OCn-1-3-4-12
OCn-1-3-4-13
OCn-1-3-4-14
OCn-1-3-4-15
OCn-1-3-4-16
OCn-1-3-5-1
OCn-1-3-5-2
OCn-1-3-5-3
OCn-1-3-5-4
OCn-1-3-5-5
OCn-1-3-5-6
OCn-1-3-5-7

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
3AG 24622 EAAA TQZZA Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary 4-387
Issue 1 February 2010 Use pursuant to applicable agreements
System turn-up and testing Verify OC-n protection switching (working to protect)

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Table 4-34 Verify protection switching test (OC-n) (continued)
Module location Switch to protect Error free
(Module-Slot-Subslot) Verified (✓) Verified (✓)
OCn-1-3-5-8
OCn-1-3-5-9
OCn-1-3-5-10
OCn-1-3-5-11
OCn-1-3-5-12
OCn-1-3-5-13
OCn-1-3-5-14
OCn-1-3-5-15
OCn-1-3-5-16
OCn-1-3-6-1
OCn-1-3-6-2
OCn-1-3-6-3
OCn-1-3-6-4
OCn-1-3-6-5
OCn-1-3-6-6
OCn-1-3-6-7
OCn-1-3-6-8
OCn-1-3-6-9
OCn-1-3-6-10
OCn-1-3-6-11
OCn-1-3-6-12
OCn-1-3-6-13
OCn-1-3-6-14
OCn-1-3-6-15
OCn-1-3-6-16
OCn-1-3-7-1
OCn-1-3-7-2
OCn-1-3-7-3
OCn-1-3-7-4
OCn-1-3-7-5

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
4-388 Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary 3AG 24622 EAAA TQZZA
Use pursuant to applicable agreements Issue 1 February 2010
System turn-up and testing Verify OC-n protection switching (working to protect)

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Table 4-34 Verify protection switching test (OC-n) (continued)
Module location Switch to protect Error free
(Module-Slot-Subslot) Verified (✓) Verified (✓)
OCn-1-3-7-6
OCn-1-3-7-7
OCn-1-3-7-8
OCn-1-3-7-9
OCn-1-3-7-10
OCn-1-3-7-11
OCn-1-3-7-12
OCn-1-3-7-13
OCn-1-3-7-14
OCn-1-3-7-15
OCn-1-3-7-16
OCn-1-3-8-1
OCn-1-3-8-2
OCn-1-3-8-3
OCn-1-3-8-4
OCn-1-3-8-5
OCn-1-3-8-6
OCn-1-3-8-7
OCn-1-3-8-8
OCn-1-3-8-9
OCn-1-3-8-10
OCn-1-3-8-11
OCn-1-3-8-12
OCn-1-3-8-13
OCn-1-3-8-14
OCn-1-3-8-15
OCn-1-3-8-16
OCn-1-3-9-1
OCn-1-3-9-2
OCn-1-3-9-3

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
3AG 24622 EAAA TQZZA Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary 4-389
Issue 1 February 2010 Use pursuant to applicable agreements
System turn-up and testing Verify OC-n protection switching (working to protect)

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Table 4-34 Verify protection switching test (OC-n) (continued)
Module location Switch to protect Error free
(Module-Slot-Subslot) Verified (✓) Verified (✓)
OCn-1-3-9-4
OCn-1-3-9-5
OCn-1-3-9-6
OCn-1-3-9-7
OCn-1-3-9-8
OCn-1-3-9-9
OCn-1-3-9-10
OCn-1-3-9-11
OCn-1-3-9-12
OCn-1-3-9-13
OCn-1-3-9-14
OCn-1-3-9-15
OCn-1-3-9-16
OCn-1-3-12-1
OCn-1-3-12-2
OCn-1-3-12-3
OCn-1-3-12-4
OCn-1-3-12-5
OCn-1-3-12-6
OCn-1-3-12-7
OCn-1-3-12-8
OCn-1-3-12-9
OCn-1-3-12-10
OCn-1-3-12-11
OCn-1-3-12-12
OCn-1-3-12-13
OCn-1-3-12-14
OCn-1-3-12-15
OCn-1-3-12-16
OCn-1-3-13-1

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
4-390 Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary 3AG 24622 EAAA TQZZA
Use pursuant to applicable agreements Issue 1 February 2010
System turn-up and testing Verify OC-n protection switching (working to protect)

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Table 4-34 Verify protection switching test (OC-n) (continued)
Module location Switch to protect Error free
(Module-Slot-Subslot) Verified (✓) Verified (✓)
OCn-1-3-13-2
OCn-1-3-13-3
OCn-1-3-13-4
OCn-1-3-13-5
OCn-1-3-13-6
OCn-1-3-13-7
OCn-1-3-13-8
OCn-1-3-13-9
OCn-1-3-13-10
OCn-1-3-13-11
OCn-1-3-13-12
OCn-1-3-13-13
OCn-1-3-13-14
OCn-1-3-13-15
OCn-1-3-13-16
OCn-1-3-14-1
OCn-1-3-14-2
OCn-1-3-14-3
OCn-1-3-14-4
OCn-1-3-14-5
OCn-1-3-14-6
OCn-1-3-14-7
OCn-1-3-14-8
OCn-1-3-14-9
OCn-1-3-14-10
OCn-1-3-14-11
OCn-1-3-14-12
OCn-1-3-14-13
OCn-1-3-14-14
OCn-1-3-14-15

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
3AG 24622 EAAA TQZZA Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary 4-391
Issue 1 February 2010 Use pursuant to applicable agreements
System turn-up and testing Verify OC-n protection switching (working to protect)

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Table 4-34 Verify protection switching test (OC-n) (continued)
Module location Switch to protect Error free
(Module-Slot-Subslot) Verified (✓) Verified (✓)
OCn-1-3-14-16
OCn-1-3-15-1
OCn-1-3-15-2
OCn-1-3-15-3
OCn-1-3-15-4
OCn-1-3-15-5
OCn-1-3-15-6
OCn-1-3-15-7
OCn-1-3-15-8
OCn-1-3-15-9
OCn-1-3-15-10
OCn-1-3-15-11
OCn-1-3-15-12
OCn-1-3-15-13
OCn-1-3-15-14
OCn-1-3-15-15
OCn-1-3-15-16
OCn-1-3-16-1
OCn-1-3-16-2
OCn-1-3-16-3
OCn-1-3-16-4
OCn-1-3-16-5
OCn-1-3-16-6
OCn-1-3-16-7
OCn-1-3-16-8
OCn-1-3-16-9
OCn-1-3-16-10
OCn-1-3-16-11
OCn-1-3-16-12
OCn-1-3-16-13

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
4-392 Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary 3AG 24622 EAAA TQZZA
Use pursuant to applicable agreements Issue 1 February 2010
System turn-up and testing Verify OC-n protection switching (working to protect)

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Table 4-34 Verify protection switching test (OC-n) (continued)
Module location Switch to protect Error free
(Module-Slot-Subslot) Verified (✓) Verified (✓)
OCn-1-3-16-14
OCn-1-3-16-15
OCn-1-3-16-16
OCn-1-3-17-1
OCn-1-3-17-2
OCn-1-3-17-3
OCn-1-3-17-4
OCn-1-3-17-5
OCn-1-3-17-6
OCn-1-3-17-7
OCn-1-3-17-8
OCn-1-3-17-9
OCn-1-3-17-10
OCn-1-3-17-11
OCn-1-3-17-12
OCn-1-3-17-13
OCn-1-3-17-14
OCn-1-3-17-15
OCn-1-3-17-16
OCn-1-3-18-1
OCn-1-3-18-2
OCn-1-3-18-3
OCn-1-3-18-4
OCn-1-3-18-5
OCn-1-3-18-6
OCn-1-3-18-7
OCn-1-3-18-8
OCn-1-3-18-9
OCn-1-3-18-10
OCn-1-3-18-11

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
3AG 24622 EAAA TQZZA Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary 4-393
Issue 1 February 2010 Use pursuant to applicable agreements
System turn-up and testing Verify OC-n protection switching (working to protect)

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Table 4-34 Verify protection switching test (OC-n) (continued)
Module location Switch to protect Error free
(Module-Slot-Subslot) Verified (✓) Verified (✓)
OCn-1-3-18-12
OCn-1-3-18-13
OCn-1-3-18-14
OCn-1-3-18-15
OCn-1-3-18-16
OCn-1-3-19-1
OCn-1-3-19-2
OCn-1-3-19-3
OCn-1-3-19-4
OCn-1-3-19-5
OCn-1-3-19-6
OCn-1-3-19-7
OCn-1-3-19-8
OCn-1-3-19-9
OCn-1-3-19-10
OCn-1-3-19-11
OCn-1-3-19-12
OCn-1-3-19-13
OCn-1-3-19-14
OCn-1-3-19-15
OCn-1-3-19-16

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
4-394 Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary 3AG 24622 EAAA TQZZA
Use pursuant to applicable agreements Issue 1 February 2010
System turn-up and testing Record error-free verification test results (copy 1)

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Record error-free verification test results (copy 1)

Use this checklist for Procedure 4-23: “Perform error-free verification test (copy 1)”
(p. 4-166).
Refer to Table 4-35, “Copy 1 error-free verification test results” (p. 4-395) and place a
check mark (✓) in the Verified column as each item is verified during the procedure.

Table 4-35 Copy 1 error-free verification test results

Description Verified (✓)
No alarms that prevent testing are present.
No conditions that prevent testing are present.
EXTERNALA or LINEA is reported for CURREFSRC.
No errors occur during 15-minute monitoring period when traffic is locked
to copy 1 matrix.
Logical removal of copy 0 matrix does not cause errors.
Physical removal of copy 0 matrix does not cause errors.
Physical insertion of copy 0 matrix does not cause errors.
Logical restoration of copy 0 matrix does not cause errors.

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
3AG 24622 EAAA TQZZA Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary 4-395
Issue 1 February 2010 Use pursuant to applicable agreements
System turn-up and testing Verify OC-n protection switching (protect to working)

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Verify OC-n protection switching (protect to working)

Use this checklist for Procedure 4-24: “Verify OC-n protection switching (protect to
working)” (p. 4-171).
Refer to Table 4-36, “Verify protection switching test (OC-n)” (p. 4-396) and place a
check mark (✓) in the Verified column as each item is verified during procedure.

Table 4-36 Verify protection switching test (OC-n)

Module Location Switch to Protect Error Free
(Module-Slot-Subslot) Verified (✓) Verified (✓)
OCn-1-3-2-1
OCn-1-3-2-2
OCn-1-3-2-3
OCn-1-3-2-4
OCn-1-3-2-5
OCn-1-3-2-6
OCn-1-3-2-7
OCn-1-3-2-8
OCn-1-3-2-9
OCn-1-3-2-10
OCn-1-3-2-11
OCn-1-3-2-12
OCn-1-3-2-13
OCn-1-3-2-14
OCn-1-3-2-15
OCn-1-3-2-16
OCn-1-3-3-1
OCn-1-3-3-2
OCn-1-3-3-3
OCn-1-3-3-4
OCn-1-3-3-5
OCn-1-3-3-6
OCn-1-3-3-7
OCn-1-3-3-8
OCn-1-3-3-9

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
4-396 Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary 3AG 24622 EAAA TQZZA
Use pursuant to applicable agreements Issue 1 February 2010
System turn-up and testing Verify OC-n protection switching (protect to working)

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Table 4-36 Verify protection switching test (OC-n) (continued)
Module Location Switch to Protect Error Free
(Module-Slot-Subslot) Verified (✓) Verified (✓)
OCn-1-3-3-10
OCn-1-3-3-11
OCn-1-3-3-12
OCn-1-3-3-13
OCn-1-3-3-14
OCn-1-3-3-15
OCn-1-3-3-16
OCn-1-3-4-1
OCn-1-3-4-2
OCn-1-3-4-3
OCn-1-3-4-4
OCn-1-3-4-5
OCn-1-3-4-6
OCn-1-3-4-7
OCn-1-3-4-8
OCn-1-3-4-9
OCn-1-3-4-10
OCn-1-3-4-11
OCn-1-3-4-12
OCn-1-3-4-13
OCn-1-3-4-14
OCn-1-3-4-15
OCn-1-3-4-16
OCn-1-3-5-1
OCn-1-3-5-2
OCn-1-3-5-3
OCn-1-3-5-4
OCn-1-3-5-5
OCn-1-3-5-6
OCn-1-3-5-7

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
3AG 24622 EAAA TQZZA Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary 4-397
Issue 1 February 2010 Use pursuant to applicable agreements
System turn-up and testing Verify OC-n protection switching (protect to working)

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Table 4-36 Verify protection switching test (OC-n) (continued)
Module Location Switch to Protect Error Free
(Module-Slot-Subslot) Verified (✓) Verified (✓)
OCn-1-3-5-8
OCn-1-3-5-9
OCn-1-3-5-10
OCn-1-3-5-11
OCn-1-3-5-12
OCn-1-3-5-13
OCn-1-3-5-14
OCn-1-3-5-15
OCn-1-3-5-16
OCn-1-3-6-1
OCn-1-3-6-2
OCn-1-3-6-3
OCn-1-3-6-4
OCn-1-3-6-5
OCn-1-3-6-6
OCn-1-3-6-7
OCn-1-3-6-8
OCn-1-3-6-9
OCn-1-3-6-10
OCn-1-3-6-11
OCn-1-3-6-12
OCn-1-3-6-13
OCn-1-3-6-14
OCn-1-3-6-15
OCn-1-3-6-16
OCn-1-3-7-1
OCn-1-3-7-2
OCn-1-3-7-3
OCn-1-3-7-4
OCn-1-3-7-5

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
4-398 Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary 3AG 24622 EAAA TQZZA
Use pursuant to applicable agreements Issue 1 February 2010
System turn-up and testing Verify OC-n protection switching (protect to working)

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Table 4-36 Verify protection switching test (OC-n) (continued)
Module Location Switch to Protect Error Free
(Module-Slot-Subslot) Verified (✓) Verified (✓)
OCn-1-3-7-6
OCn-1-3-7-7
OCn-1-3-7-8
OCn-1-3-7-9
OCn-1-3-7-10
OCn-1-3-7-11
OCn-1-3-7-12
OCn-1-3-7-13
OCn-1-3-7-14
OCn-1-3-7-15
OCn-1-3-7-16
OCn-1-3-8-1
OCn-1-3-8-2
OCn-1-3-8-3
OCn-1-3-8-4
OCn-1-3-8-5
OCn-1-3-8-6
OCn-1-3-8-7
OCn-1-3-8-8
OCn-1-3-8-9
OCn-1-3-8-10
OCn-1-3-8-11
OCn-1-3-8-12
OCn-1-3-8-13
OCn-1-3-8-14
OCn-1-3-8-15
OCn-1-3-8-16
OCn-1-3-9-1
OCn-1-3-9-2
OCn-1-3-9-3

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
3AG 24622 EAAA TQZZA Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary 4-399
Issue 1 February 2010 Use pursuant to applicable agreements
System turn-up and testing Verify OC-n protection switching (protect to working)

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Table 4-36 Verify protection switching test (OC-n) (continued)
Module Location Switch to Protect Error Free
(Module-Slot-Subslot) Verified (✓) Verified (✓)
OCn-1-3-9-4
OCn-1-3-9-5
OCn-1-3-9-6
OCn-1-3-9-7
OCn-1-3-9-8
OCn-1-3-9-9
OCn-1-3-9-10
OCn-1-3-9-11
OCn-1-3-9-12
OCn-1-3-9-13
OCn-1-3-9-14
OCn-1-3-9-15
OCn-1-3-9-16
OCn-1-3-12-1
OCn-1-3-12-2
OCn-1-3-12-3
OCn-1-3-12-4
OCn-1-3-12-5
OCn-1-3-12-6
OCn-1-3-12-7
OCn-1-3-12-8
OCn-1-3-12-9
OCn-1-3-12-10
OCn-1-3-12-11
OCn-1-3-12-12
OCn-1-3-12-13
OCn-1-3-12-14
OCn-1-3-12-15
OCn-1-3-12-16
OCn-1-3-13-1

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
4-400 Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary 3AG 24622 EAAA TQZZA
Use pursuant to applicable agreements Issue 1 February 2010
System turn-up and testing Verify OC-n protection switching (protect to working)

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Table 4-36 Verify protection switching test (OC-n) (continued)
Module Location Switch to Protect Error Free
(Module-Slot-Subslot) Verified (✓) Verified (✓)
OCn-1-3-13-2
OCn-1-3-13-3
OCn-1-3-13-4
OCn-1-3-13-5
OCn-1-3-13-6
OCn-1-3-13-7
OCn-1-3-13-8
OCn-1-3-13-9
OCn-1-3-13-10
OCn-1-3-13-11
OCn-1-3-13-12
OCn-1-3-13-13
OCn-1-3-13-14
OCn-1-3-13-15
OCn-1-3-13-16
OCn-1-3-14-1
OCn-1-3-14-2
OCn-1-3-14-3
OCn-1-3-14-4
OCn-1-3-14-5
OCn-1-3-14-6
OCn-1-3-14-7
OCn-1-3-14-8
OCn-1-3-14-9
OCn-1-3-14-10
OCn-1-3-14-11
OCn-1-3-14-12
OCn-1-3-14-13
OCn-1-3-14-14
OCn-1-3-14-15

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
3AG 24622 EAAA TQZZA Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary 4-401
Issue 1 February 2010 Use pursuant to applicable agreements
System turn-up and testing Verify OC-n protection switching (protect to working)

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Table 4-36 Verify protection switching test (OC-n) (continued)
Module Location Switch to Protect Error Free
(Module-Slot-Subslot) Verified (✓) Verified (✓)
OCn-1-3-14-16
OCn-1-3-15-1
OCn-1-3-15-2
OCn-1-3-15-3
OCn-1-3-15-4
OCn-1-3-15-5
OCn-1-3-15-6
OCn-1-3-15-7
OCn-1-3-15-8
OCn-1-3-15-9
OCn-1-3-15-10
OCn-1-3-15-11
OCn-1-3-15-12
OCn-1-3-15-13
OCn-1-3-15-14
OCn-1-3-15-15
OCn-1-3-15-16
OCn-1-3-16-1
OCn-1-3-16-2
OCn-1-3-16-3
OCn-1-3-16-4
OCn-1-3-16-5
OCn-1-3-16-6
OCn-1-3-16-7
OCn-1-3-16-8
OCn-1-3-16-9
OCn-1-3-16-10
OCn-1-3-16-11
OCn-1-3-16-12
OCn-1-3-16-13

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
4-402 Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary 3AG 24622 EAAA TQZZA
Use pursuant to applicable agreements Issue 1 February 2010
System turn-up and testing Verify OC-n protection switching (protect to working)

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Table 4-36 Verify protection switching test (OC-n) (continued)
Module Location Switch to Protect Error Free
(Module-Slot-Subslot) Verified (✓) Verified (✓)
OCn-1-3-16-14
OCn-1-3-16-15
OCn-1-3-16-16
OCn-1-3-17-1
OCn-1-3-17-2
OCn-1-3-17-3
OCn-1-3-17-4
OCn-1-3-17-5
OCn-1-3-17-6
OCn-1-3-17-7
OCn-1-3-17-8
OCn-1-3-17-9
OCn-1-3-17-10
OCn-1-3-17-11
OCn-1-3-17-12
OCn-1-3-17-13
OCn-1-3-17-14
OCn-1-3-17-15
OCn-1-3-17-16
OCn-1-3-18-1
OCn-1-3-18-2
OCn-1-3-18-3
OCn-1-3-18-4
OCn-1-3-18-5
OCn-1-3-18-6
OCn-1-3-18-7
OCn-1-3-18-8
OCn-1-3-18-9
OCn-1-3-18-10
OCn-1-3-18-11

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
3AG 24622 EAAA TQZZA Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary 4-403
Issue 1 February 2010 Use pursuant to applicable agreements
System turn-up and testing Verify OC-n protection switching (protect to working)

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Table 4-36 Verify protection switching test (OC-n) (continued)
Module Location Switch to Protect Error Free
(Module-Slot-Subslot) Verified (✓) Verified (✓)
OCn-1-3-18-12
OCn-1-3-18-13
OCn-1-3-18-14
OCn-1-3-18-15
OCn-1-3-18-16
OCn-1-3-19-1
OCn-1-3-19-2
OCn-1-3-19-3
OCn-1-3-19-4
OCn-1-3-19-5
OCn-1-3-19-6
OCn-1-3-19-7
OCn-1-3-19-8
OCn-1-3-19-9
OCn-1-3-19-10
OCn-1-3-19-11
OCn-1-3-19-12
OCn-1-3-19-13
OCn-1-3-19-14
OCn-1-3-19-15
OCn-1-3-19-16

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
4-404 Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary 3AG 24622 EAAA TQZZA
Use pursuant to applicable agreements Issue 1 February 2010
System turn-up and testing Provision and test L2 data path

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Provision and test L2 data path

Use this checklist for Procedure 4-25: “Provision and test ES64SC data path” (p. 4-177).
Refer to Table 4-37, “Items to verify before testing” (p. 4-405) and Table 4-40, “Error
free operation and data switch” (p. 4-407) and place a check mark (✓) in the Verified
column as each item is verified during backup procedure.

Table 4-37 Items to verify before testing

Module Before testing Before testing After testing After testing
location no alarms no conditions no alarms no conditions
(module-slot) Verified (✓) Verified (✓) Verified (✓) Verified (✓)
IOC-1-3-2
IOC-1-3-3
IOC-1-3-4
IOC-1-3-5
IOC-1-3-6
IOC-1-3-7
IOC-1-3-8
IOC-1-3-9
IOC-1-3-12
IOC-1-3-13
IOC-1-3-14
IOC-1-3-15
IOC-1-3-16
IOC-1-3-17
IOC-1-3-18
IOC-1-3-19

Table 4-38 Previous test provisioning changes

Module location Existing cross- IOC optical ports
(module-slot) connections deleted daisy-chained and test
Verified (✓) set connected
Verified (✓)
IOC-1-3-2
IOC-1-3-3
IOC-1-3-4

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
3AG 24622 EAAA TQZZA Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary 4-405
Issue 1 February 2010 Use pursuant to applicable agreements
System turn-up and testing Provision and test L2 data path

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Table 4-38 Previous test provisioning changes (continued)
Module location Existing cross- IOC optical ports
(module-slot) connections deleted daisy-chained and test
Verified (✓) set connected
Verified (✓)
IOC-1-3-5
IOC-1-3-6
IOC-1-3-7
IOC-1-3-8
IOC-1-3-9
IOC-1-3-12
IOC-1-3-13
IOC-1-3-14
IOC-1-3-15
IOC-1-3-16
IOC-1-3-17
IOC-1-3-18
IOC-1-3-19

Table 4-39 L1 and L2 provisioning

Module ES64SC ES64SC ES64SC Data path L2
location protection logical VCGs activated connections
(module- provisioned ports provisioned Verified (✓) provisioned
slot) Verified (✓) provisioned Verified (✓) Verified (✓)
Verified (✓)
IOC-1-3-2
IOC-1-3-3
IOC-1-3-4
IOC-1-3-5
IOC-1-3-6
IOC-1-3-7
IOC-1-3-8
IOC-1-3-9
IOC-1-3-12
IOC-1-3-13

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
4-406 Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary 3AG 24622 EAAA TQZZA
Use pursuant to applicable agreements Issue 1 February 2010
System turn-up and testing Provision and test L2 data path

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Table 4-39 L1 and L2 provisioning (continued)
Module ES64SC ES64SC ES64SC Data path L2
location protection logical VCGs activated connections
(module- provisioned ports provisioned Verified (✓) provisioned
slot) Verified (✓) provisioned Verified (✓) Verified (✓)
Verified (✓)
IOC-1-3-14
IOC-1-3-15
IOC-1-3-16
IOC-1-3-17
IOC-1-3-18
IOC-1-3-19

Table 4-40 Error free operation and data switch

Module Error free L1 matrix Error free ES64SC Error free
location Verified (✓) switch Verified (✓) switch Verified (✓)
(module- Verified (✓) Verified (✓)
slot)
IOC-1-3-2
IOC-1-3-3
IOC-1-3-4
IOC-1-3-5
IOC-1-3-6
IOC-1-3-7
IOC-1-3-8
IOC-1-3-9
IOC-1-3-12
IOC-1-3-13
IOC-1-3-14
IOC-1-3-15
IOC-1-3-16
IOC-1-3-17
IOC-1-3-18
IOC-1-3-19

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
3AG 24622 EAAA TQZZA Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary 4-407
Issue 1 February 2010 Use pursuant to applicable agreements
System turn-up and testing Verify NGTRU rack lamp unit

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Verify NGTRU rack lamp unit

Use this checklist for Procedure 4-29: “Verify NGTRU rack lamp unit” (p. 4-211).
Place a check mark (✓) in the Verified column as each item is verified during NGTRU
rack lamp unit LED test procedure.

Table 4-41 Provisioned value for LANDEGR

Description NTFCNCDE
Pre-Test Value
Post-Test Value

Table 4-42 NGTRU rack lamp unit test results

Description Verified (✓)
There are no alarms preventing this test.
There are no conditions preventing this test.
Critical (CRI)
Major (MAJ)
Minor (MIN)
Not Alarmed (NA)
Not Reported (NR)

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
4-408 Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary 3AG 24622 EAAA TQZZA
Use pursuant to applicable agreements Issue 1 February 2010
System turn-up and testing Verify shelf redundant power copy 1

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Verify shelf redundant power copy 1

Use this checklist for Procedure 4-30: “Verify shelf redundant power copy 1” (p. 4-219).
Refer to Table 4-43, “Verify redundant power copy 1” (p. 4-409) and place a check mark
(✓) in the Verified column as each item is verified during the verifying redundant power
procedure.

Table 4-43 Verify redundant power copy 1

APWR/BPWR
alarm set No errors
Description Verified (✓) Verified (✓)
There are no alarms preventing this test. N/A
There are no conditions preventing this test. N/A
DIRECT POWER CONNECTION TO CO BDFB
Errors are not reported when A power breaker is
switched off.
Errors are not reported when B power breaker is
switched off.
POWER CONNECTION THROUGH NGTRU
Errors are not reported when slot 1 step-up converter is
switched off.
Errors are not reported when slot 2 step-up converter is
switched off.

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
3AG 24622 EAAA TQZZA Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary 4-409
Issue 1 February 2010 Use pursuant to applicable agreements
System turn-up and testing Verify cabling between 10GBE I/O and LGX panel

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Verify cabling between 10GBE I/O and LGX panel

Use this checklist for Procedure 4-34: “Confirm cabling between 10GBE I/O and LGX
panel” (p. 4-232).
Refer toTable 4-44, “10GBE Optical power measurements over fiber ” (p. 4-410) to
record 10GBE module measurements.
10 Gigabit Ethernet test set output level __________ dBm.
Table 4-44 10GBE Optical power measurements over fiber
Prov. 10GBE-B-Sh-S-P(10GBE-Bay- Measured RX level Measured TX Notes
Order Shelf-Slot-Port) OK (✓) level OK (dBm)
1 10GBE-1-3-2-1
2 10GBE-1-3-2-2
3 10GBE-1-3-3-1
4 10GBE-1-3-3-2
5 10GBE-1-3-4-1
6 10GBE-1-3-4-2
7 10GBE-1-3-5-1
8 10GBE-1-3-5-2
9 10GBE-1-3-6-1
10 10GBE-1-3-6-2
11 10GBE-1-3-7-1
12 10GBE-1-3-7-2
13 10GBE-1-3-8-1
14 10GBE-1-3-8-2
15 10GBE-1-3-9-1
16 10GBE-1-3-9-2
17 10GBE-1-3-12-1
18 10GBE-1-3-12-2
19 10GBE-1-3-13-1
20 10GBE-1-3-13-2
21 10GBE-1-3-14-1
22 10GBE-1-3-14-2
23 10GBE-1-3-15-1
24 10GBE-1-3-15-2

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
4-410 Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary 3AG 24622 EAAA TQZZA
Use pursuant to applicable agreements Issue 1 February 2010
System turn-up and testing Verify cabling between 10GBE I/O and LGX panel

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Table 4-44 10GBE Optical power measurements over fiber (continued)
Prov. 10GBE-B-Sh-S-P(10GBE-Bay- Measured RX level Measured TX Notes
Order Shelf-Slot-Port) OK (✓) level OK (dBm)
25 10GBE-1-3-16-1
26 10GBE-1-3-16-2
27 10GBE-1-3-17-1
28 10GBE-1-3-17-2
29 10GBE-1-3-18-1
30 10GBE-1-3-18-2
31 10GBE-1-3-19-1
32 10GBE-1-3-19-2

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
3AG 24622 EAAA TQZZA Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary 4-411
Issue 1 February 2010 Use pursuant to applicable agreements
System turn-up and testing Verify 10GBE provisioning

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Verify 10GBE provisioning

Use this checklist for Procedure 4-35: “10 GBE error-free verification setup” (p. 4-237).
Refer to Table 4-45, “Verify provisioning GBE10 facility and STS3C ” (p. 4-412) and
place a check mark (✓) in the appropriate column for each GBE10 facility provisioned
and STS-3C provisioned.

Table 4-45 Verify provisioning GBE10 facility and STS3C

Prov. (✓) Provisioned GBE10VCG GBE10STS3 Notes
order Cross-
connected (✓)
1. 1-3-2-1-1-1
2. 1-3-2-1-1-2
3. 1-3-2-1-1-3
4. 1-3-2-1-1-4
5. 1-3-2-1-1-5
6. 1-3-2-1-1-6
7. 1-3-2-1-1-7
8. 1-3-2-1-1-8
9. 1-3-2-1-1-9
10. 1-3-2-1-1-10
11. 1-3-2-1-1-11
12. 1-3-2-1-1-12
13. 1-3-2-1-1-13
14. 1-3-2-1-1-14
15. 1-3-2-1-1-15
16. 1-3-2-1-1-16
17. 1-3-2-1-1-17
18. 1-3-2-1-1-18
19. 1-3-2-1-1-19
20. 1-3-2-1-1-20
21. 1-3-2-1-1-21
22. 1-3-2-1-1-22
23. 1-3-2-1-1-23
24. 1-3-2-1-1-24

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
4-412 Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary 3AG 24622 EAAA TQZZA
Use pursuant to applicable agreements Issue 1 February 2010
System turn-up and testing Verify 10GBE provisioning

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Table 4-45 Verify provisioning GBE10 facility and STS3C (continued)
Prov. (✓) Provisioned GBE10VCG GBE10STS3 Notes
order Cross-
connected (✓)
25. 1-3-2-1-1-25
26. 1-3-2-1-1-26
27. 1-3-2-1-1-27
28. 1-3-2-1-1-28
29. 1-3-2-1-1-29
30. 1-3-2-1-1-30
31. 1-3-2-1-1-31
32. 1-3-2-1-1-32
33. 1-3-2-1-1-33
34. 1-3-2-1-1-34
35. 1-3-2-1-1-35
36. 1-3-2-1-1-36
37. 1-3-2-1-1-37
38. 1-3-2-1-1-38
39. 1-3-2-1-1-39
40. 1-3-2-1-1-40
41. 1-3-2-1-1-41
42. 1-3-2-1-1-42
43. 1-3-2-1-1-43
44. 1-3-2-1-1-44
45. 1-3-2-1-1-45
46. 1-3-2-1-1-46
47. 1-3-2-1-1-47
48. 1-3-2-1-1-48
49. 1-3-2-1-1-49
50. 1-3-2-1-1-50
51. 1-3-2-1-1-51
52. 1-3-2-1-1-52
53. 1-3-2-1-1-53

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
3AG 24622 EAAA TQZZA Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary 4-413
Issue 1 February 2010 Use pursuant to applicable agreements
System turn-up and testing Verify 10GBE provisioning

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Table 4-45 Verify provisioning GBE10 facility and STS3C (continued)
Prov. (✓) Provisioned GBE10VCG GBE10STS3 Notes
order Cross-
connected (✓)
54. 1-3-2-1-1-54
55. 1-3-2-1-1-55
56. 1-3-2-1-1-56
57. 1-3-2-1-1-57
58. 1-3-2-1-1-58
59. 1-3-2-1-1-59
60. 1-3-2-1-1-60
61. 1-3-2-1-1-61
62. 1-3-2-1-1-62
63. 1-3-2-1-1-63
64. 1-3-2-1-1-64
65. 1-3-3-1-1-1
66. 1-3-3-1-1-2
67. 1-3-3-1-1-3
68. 1-3-3-1-1-4
69. 1-3-3-1-1-5
70. 1-3-3-1-1-6
71. 1-3-3-1-1-7
72. 1-3-3-1-1-8
73. 1-3-3-1-1-9
74. 1-3-3-1-1-10
75. 1-3-3-1-1-11
76. 1-3-3-1-1-12
77. 1-3-3-1-1-13
78. 1-3-3-1-1-14
79. 1-3-3-1-1-15
80. 1-3-3-1-1-16
81. 1-3-3-1-1-17
82. 1-3-3-1-1-18

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
4-414 Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary 3AG 24622 EAAA TQZZA
Use pursuant to applicable agreements Issue 1 February 2010
System turn-up and testing Verify 10GBE provisioning

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Table 4-45 Verify provisioning GBE10 facility and STS3C (continued)
Prov. (✓) Provisioned GBE10VCG GBE10STS3 Notes
order Cross-
connected (✓)
83. 1-3-3-1-1-19
84. 1-3-3-1-1-20
85. 1-3-3-1-1-21
86. 1-3-3-1-1-22
87. 1-3-3-1-1-23
88. 1-3-3-1-1-24
89. 1-3-3-1-1-25
90. 1-3-3-1-1-26
91. 1-3-3-1-1-27
92. 1-3-3-1-1-28
93. 1-3-3-1-1-29
94. 1-3-3-1-1-30
95. 1-3-3-1-1-31
96. 1-3-3-1-1-32
97. 1-3-3-1-1-33
98. 1-3-3-1-1-34
99. 1-3-3-1-1-35
100. 1-3-3-1-1-36
101. 1-3-3-1-1-37
102. 1-3-3-1-1-38
103. 1-3-3-1-1-39
104. 1-3-3-1-1-40
105. 1-3-3-1-1-41
106. 1-3-3-1-1-42
107. 1-3-3-1-1-43
108. 1-3-3-1-1-44
109. 1-3-3-1-1-45
110. 1-3-3-1-1-46
111. 1-3-3-1-1-47

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
3AG 24622 EAAA TQZZA Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary 4-415
Issue 1 February 2010 Use pursuant to applicable agreements
System turn-up and testing Verify 10GBE provisioning

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Table 4-45 Verify provisioning GBE10 facility and STS3C (continued)
Prov. (✓) Provisioned GBE10VCG GBE10STS3 Notes
order Cross-
connected (✓)
112. 1-3-3-1-1-48
113. 1-3-3-1-1-49
114. 1-3-3-1-1-50
115. 1-3-3-1-1-51
116. 1-3-3-1-1-52
117. 1-3-3-1-1-53
118. 1-3-3-1-1-54
119. 1-3-3-1-1-55
120. 1-3-3-1-1-56
121. 1-3-3-1-1-57
122. 1-3-3-1-1-58
123. 1-3-3-1-1-59
124. 1-3-3-1-1-60
125. 1-3-3-1-1-61
126. 1-3-3-1-1-62
127. 1-3-3-1-1-63
128. 1-3-3-1-1-64
129. 1-3-4-1-1-1
130. 1-3-4-1-1-2
131. 1-3-4-1-1-3
132. 1-3-4-1-1-4
133. 1-3-4-1-1-5
134. 1-3-4-1-1-6
135. 1-3-4-1-1-7
136. 1-3-4-1-1-8
137. 1-3-4-1-1-9
138. 1-3-4-1-1-10
139. 1-3-4-1-1-11
140. 1-3-4-1-1-12

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
4-416 Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary 3AG 24622 EAAA TQZZA
Use pursuant to applicable agreements Issue 1 February 2010
System turn-up and testing Verify 10GBE provisioning

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Table 4-45 Verify provisioning GBE10 facility and STS3C (continued)
Prov. (✓) Provisioned GBE10VCG GBE10STS3 Notes
order Cross-
connected (✓)
141. 1-3-4-1-1-13
142. 1-3-4-1-1-14
143. 1-3-4-1-1-15
144. 1-3-4-1-1-16
145. 1-3-4-1-1-17
146. 1-3-4-1-1-18
147. 1-3-4-1-1-19
148. 1-3-4-1-1-20
149. 1-3-4-1-1-21
150. 1-3-4-1-1-22
151. 1-3-4-1-1-23
152. 1-3-4-1-1-24
153. 1-3-4-1-1-25
154. 1-3-4-1-1-26
155. 1-3-4-1-1-27
156. 1-3-4-1-1-28
157. 1-3-4-1-1-29
158. 1-3-4-1-1-30
159. 1-3-4-1-1-31
160. 1-3-4-1-1-32
161. 1-3-4-1-1-33
162. 1-3-4-1-1-34
163. 1-3-4-1-1-35
164. 1-3-4-1-1-36
165. 1-3-4-1-1-37
166. 1-3-4-1-1-38
167. 1-3-4-1-1-39
168. 1-3-4-1-1-40
169. 1-3-4-1-1-41

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
3AG 24622 EAAA TQZZA Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary 4-417
Issue 1 February 2010 Use pursuant to applicable agreements
System turn-up and testing Verify 10GBE provisioning

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Table 4-45 Verify provisioning GBE10 facility and STS3C (continued)
Prov. (✓) Provisioned GBE10VCG GBE10STS3 Notes
order Cross-
connected (✓)
170. 1-3-4-1-1-42
171. 1-3-4-1-1-43
172. 1-3-4-1-1-44
173. 1-3-4-1-1-45
174. 1-3-4-1-1-46
175. 1-3-4-1-1-47
176. 1-3-4-1-1-48
177. 1-3-4-1-1-49
178. 1-3-4-1-1-50
179. 1-3-4-1-1-51
180. 1-3-4-1-1-52
181. 1-3-4-1-1-53
182. 1-3-4-1-1-54
183. 1-3-4-1-1-55
184. 1-3-4-1-1-56
185. 1-3-4-1-1-57
186. 1-3-4-1-1-58
187. 1-3-4-1-1-59
188. 1-3-4-1-1-60
189. 1-3-4-1-1-61
190. 1-3-4-1-1-62
191. 1-3-4-1-1-63
192. 1-3-4-1-1-64
193. 1-3-5-1-1-1
194. 1-3-5-1-1-2
195. 1-3-5-1-1-3
196. 1-3-5-1-1-4
197. 1-3-5-1-1-5
198. 1-3-5-1-1-6

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
4-418 Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary 3AG 24622 EAAA TQZZA
Use pursuant to applicable agreements Issue 1 February 2010
System turn-up and testing Verify 10GBE provisioning

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Table 4-45 Verify provisioning GBE10 facility and STS3C (continued)
Prov. (✓) Provisioned GBE10VCG GBE10STS3 Notes
order Cross-
connected (✓)
199. 1-3-5-1-1-7
200. 1-3-5-1-1-8
201. 1-3-5-1-1-9
202. 1-3-5-1-1-10
203. 1-3-5-1-1-11
204. 1-3-5-1-1-12
205. 1-3-5-1-1-13
206. 1-3-5-1-1-14
207. 1-3-5-1-1-15
208. 1-3-5-1-1-16
209. 1-3-5-1-1-17
210. 1-3-5-1-1-18
211. 1-3-5-1-1-19
212. 1-3-5-1-1-20
213. 1-3-5-1-1-21
214. 1-3-5-1-1-22
215. 1-3-5-1-1-23
216. 1-3-5-1-1-24
217. 1-3-5-1-1-25
218. 1-3-5-1-1-26
219. 1-3-5-1-1-27
220. 1-3-5-1-1-28
221. 1-3-5-1-1-29
222. 1-3-5-1-1-30
223. 1-3-5-1-1-31
224. 1-3-5-1-1-32
225. 1-3-5-1-1-33
226. 1-3-5-1-1-34
227. 1-3-5-1-1-35

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
3AG 24622 EAAA TQZZA Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary 4-419
Issue 1 February 2010 Use pursuant to applicable agreements
System turn-up and testing Verify 10GBE provisioning

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Table 4-45 Verify provisioning GBE10 facility and STS3C (continued)
Prov. (✓) Provisioned GBE10VCG GBE10STS3 Notes
order Cross-
connected (✓)
228. 1-3-5-1-1-36
229. 1-3-5-1-1-37
230. 1-3-5-1-1-38
231. 1-3-5-1-1-39
232. 1-3-5-1-1-40
233. 1-3-5-1-1-41
234. 1-3-5-1-1-42
235. 1-3-5-1-1-43
236. 1-3-5-1-1-44
237. 1-3-5-1-1-45
238. 1-3-5-1-1-46
239. 1-3-5-1-1-47
240. 1-3-5-1-1-48
241. 1-3-5-1-1-49
242. 1-3-5-1-1-50
243. 1-3-5-1-1-51
244. 1-3-5-1-1-52
245. 1-3-5-1-1-53
246. 1-3-5-1-1-54
247. 1-3-5-1-1-55
248. 1-3-5-1-1-56
249. 1-3-5-1-1-57
250. 1-3-5-1-1-58
251. 1-3-5-1-1-59
252. 1-3-5-1-1-60
253. 1-3-5-1-1-61
254. 1-3-5-1-1-62
255. 1-3-5-1-1-63
256. 1-3-5-1-1-64

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
4-420 Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary 3AG 24622 EAAA TQZZA
Use pursuant to applicable agreements Issue 1 February 2010
System turn-up and testing Verify 10GBE provisioning

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Table 4-45 Verify provisioning GBE10 facility and STS3C (continued)
Prov. (✓) Provisioned GBE10VCG GBE10STS3 Notes
order Cross-
connected (✓)
257. 1-3-6-1-1-1
258. 1-3-6-1-1-2
259. 1-3-6-1-1-3
260. 1-3-6-1-1-4
261. 1-3-6-1-1-5
262. 1-3-6-1-1-6
263. 1-3-6-1-1-7
264. 1-3-6-1-1-8
265. 1-3-6-1-1-9
266. 1-3-6-1-1-10
267. 1-3-6-1-1-11
268. 1-3-6-1-1-12
269. 1-3-6-1-1-13
270. 1-3-6-1-1-14
271. 1-3-6-1-1-15
272. 1-3-6-1-1-16
273. 1-3-6-1-1-17
274. 1-3-6-1-1-18
275. 1-3-6-1-1-19
276. 1-3-6-1-1-20
277. 1-3-6-1-1-21
278. 1-3-6-1-1-22
279. 1-3-6-1-1-23
280. 1-3-6-1-1-24
281. 1-3-6-1-1-25
282. 1-3-6-1-1-26
283. 1-3-6-1-1-27
284. 1-3-6-1-1-28
285. 1-3-6-1-1-29

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
3AG 24622 EAAA TQZZA Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary 4-421
Issue 1 February 2010 Use pursuant to applicable agreements
System turn-up and testing Verify 10GBE provisioning

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Table 4-45 Verify provisioning GBE10 facility and STS3C (continued)
Prov. (✓) Provisioned GBE10VCG GBE10STS3 Notes
order Cross-
connected (✓)
286. 1-3-6-1-1-30
287. 1-3-6-1-1-31
288. 1-3-6-1-1-32
289. 1-3-6-1-1-33
290. 1-3-6-1-1-34
291. 1-3-6-1-1-35
292. 1-3-6-1-1-36
293. 1-3-6-1-1-37
294. 1-3-6-1-1-38
295. 1-3-6-1-1-39
296. 1-3-6-1-1-40
297. 1-3-6-1-1-41
298. 1-3-6-1-1-42
299. 1-3-6-1-1-43
300. 1-3-6-1-1-44
301. 1-3-6-1-1-45
302. 1-3-6-1-1-46
303. 1-3-6-1-1-47
304. 1-3-6-1-1-48
305. 1-3-6-1-1-49
306. 1-3-6-1-1-50
307. 1-3-6-1-1-51
308. 1-3-6-1-1-52
309. 1-3-6-1-1-53
310. 1-3-6-1-1-54
311. 1-3-6-1-1-55
312. 1-3-6-1-1-56
313. 1-3-6-1-1-57
314. 1-3-6-1-1-58

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
4-422 Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary 3AG 24622 EAAA TQZZA
Use pursuant to applicable agreements Issue 1 February 2010
System turn-up and testing Verify 10GBE provisioning

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Table 4-45 Verify provisioning GBE10 facility and STS3C (continued)
Prov. (✓) Provisioned GBE10VCG GBE10STS3 Notes
order Cross-
connected (✓)
315. 1-3-6-1-1-59
316. 1-3-6-1-1-60
317. 1-3-6-1-1-61
318. 1-3-6-1-1-62
319. 1-3-6-1-1-63
320. 1-3-6-1-1-64
321. 1-3-7-1-1-1
322. 1-3-7-1-1-2
323. 1-3-7-1-1-3
324. 1-3-7-1-1-4
325. 1-3-7-1-1-5
326. 1-3-7-1-1-6
327. 1-3-7-1-1-7
328. 1-3-7-1-1-8
329. 1-3-7-1-1-9
330. 1-3-7-1-1-10
331. 1-3-7-1-1-11
332. 1-3-7-1-1-12
333. 1-3-7-1-1-13
334. 1-3-7-1-1-14
335. 1-3-7-1-1-15
336. 1-3-7-1-1-16
337. 1-3-7-1-1-17
338. 1-3-7-1-1-18
339. 1-3-7-1-1-19
340. 1-3-7-1-1-20
341. 1-3-7-1-1-21
342. 1-3-7-1-1-22
343. 1-3-7-1-1-23

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
3AG 24622 EAAA TQZZA Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary 4-423
Issue 1 February 2010 Use pursuant to applicable agreements
System turn-up and testing Verify 10GBE provisioning

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Table 4-45 Verify provisioning GBE10 facility and STS3C (continued)
Prov. (✓) Provisioned GBE10VCG GBE10STS3 Notes
order Cross-
connected (✓)
344. 1-3-7-1-1-24
345. 1-3-7-1-1-25
346. 1-3-7-1-1-26
347. 1-3-7-1-1-27
348. 1-3-7-1-1-28
349. 1-3-7-1-1-29
350. 1-3-7-1-1-30
351. 1-3-7-1-1-31
352. 1-3-7-1-1-32
353. 1-3-7-1-1-33
354. 1-3-7-1-1-34
355. 1-3-7-1-1-35
356. 1-3-7-1-1-36
357. 1-3-7-1-1-37
358. 1-3-7-1-1-38
359. 1-3-7-1-1-39
360. 1-3-7-1-1-40
361. 1-3-7-1-1-41
362. 1-3-7-1-1-42
363. 1-3-7-1-1-43
364. 1-3-7-1-1-44
365. 1-3-7-1-1-45
366. 1-3-7-1-1-46
367. 1-3-7-1-1-47
368. 1-3-7-1-1-48
369. 1-3-7-1-1-49
370. 1-3-7-1-1-50
371. 1-3-7-1-1-51
372. 1-3-7-1-1-52

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
4-424 Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary 3AG 24622 EAAA TQZZA
Use pursuant to applicable agreements Issue 1 February 2010
System turn-up and testing Verify 10GBE provisioning

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Table 4-45 Verify provisioning GBE10 facility and STS3C (continued)
Prov. (✓) Provisioned GBE10VCG GBE10STS3 Notes
order Cross-
connected (✓)
373. 1-3-7-1-1-53
374. 1-3-7-1-1-54
375. 1-3-7-1-1-55
376. 1-3-7-1-1-56
377. 1-3-7-1-1-57
378. 1-3-7-1-1-58
379. 1-3-7-1-1-59
380. 1-3-7-1-1-60
381. 1-3-7-1-1-61
382. 1-3-7-1-1-62
383. 1-3-7-1-1-63
384. 1-3-7-1-1-64
385. 1-3-8-1-1-1
386. 1-3-8-1-1-2
387. 1-3-8-1-1-3
388. 1-3-8-1-1-4
389. 1-3-8-1-1-5
390. 1-3-8-1-1-6
391. 1-3-8-1-1-7
392. 1-3-8-1-1-8
393. 1-3-8-1-1-9
394. 1-3-8-1-1-10
395. 1-3-8-1-1-11
396. 1-3-8-1-1-12
397. 1-3-8-1-1-13
398. 1-3-8-1-1-14
399. 1-3-8-1-1-15
400. 1-3-8-1-1-16
401. 1-3-8-1-1-17

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
3AG 24622 EAAA TQZZA Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary 4-425
Issue 1 February 2010 Use pursuant to applicable agreements
System turn-up and testing Verify 10GBE provisioning

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Table 4-45 Verify provisioning GBE10 facility and STS3C (continued)
Prov. (✓) Provisioned GBE10VCG GBE10STS3 Notes
order Cross-
connected (✓)
402. 1-3-8-1-1-18
403. 1-3-8-1-1-19
404. 1-3-8-1-1-20
405. 1-3-8-1-1-21
406. 1-3-8-1-1-22
407. 1-3-8-1-1-23
408. 1-3-8-1-1-24
409. 1-3-8-1-1-25
410. 1-3-8-1-1-26
411. 1-3-8-1-1-27
412. 1-3-8-1-1-28
413. 1-3-8-1-1-29
414. 1-3-8-1-1-30
415. 1-3-8-1-1-31
416. 1-3-8-1-1-32
417. 1-3-8-1-1-33
418. 1-3-8-1-1-34
419. 1-3-8-1-1-35
420. 1-3-8-1-1-36
421. 1-3-8-1-1-37
422. 1-3-8-1-1-38
423. 1-3-8-1-1-39
424. 1-3-8-1-1-40
425. 1-3-8-1-1-41
426. 1-3-8-1-1-42
427. 1-3-8-1-1-43
428. 1-3-8-1-1-44
429. 1-3-8-1-1-45
430. 1-3-8-1-1-46

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
4-426 Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary 3AG 24622 EAAA TQZZA
Use pursuant to applicable agreements Issue 1 February 2010
System turn-up and testing Verify 10GBE provisioning

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Table 4-45 Verify provisioning GBE10 facility and STS3C (continued)
Prov. (✓) Provisioned GBE10VCG GBE10STS3 Notes
order Cross-
connected (✓)
431. 1-3-8-1-1-47
432. 1-3-8-1-1-48
433. 1-3-8-1-1-49
434. 1-3-8-1-1-50
435. 1-3-8-1-1-51
436. 1-3-8-1-1-52
437. 1-3-8-1-1-53
438. 1-3-8-1-1-54
439. 1-3-8-1-1-55
440. 1-3-8-1-1-56
441. 1-3-8-1-1-57
442. 1-3-8-1-1-58
443. 1-3-8-1-1-59
444. 1-3-8-1-1-60
445. 1-3-8-1-1-61
446. 1-3-8-1-1-62
447. 1-3-8-1-1-63
448. 1-3-8-1-1-64
449. 1-3-9-1-1-1
450. 1-3-9-1-1-2
451. 1-3-9-1-1-3
452. 1-3-9-1-1-4
453. 1-3-9-1-1-5
454. 1-3-9-1-1-6
455. 1-3-9-1-1-7
456. 1-3-9-1-1-8
457. 1-3-9-1-1-9
458. 1-3-9-1-1-10
459. 1-3-9-1-1-11

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
3AG 24622 EAAA TQZZA Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary 4-427
Issue 1 February 2010 Use pursuant to applicable agreements
System turn-up and testing Verify 10GBE provisioning

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Table 4-45 Verify provisioning GBE10 facility and STS3C (continued)
Prov. (✓) Provisioned GBE10VCG GBE10STS3 Notes
order Cross-
connected (✓)
460. 1-3-9-1-1-12
461. 1-3-9-1-1-13
462. 1-3-9-1-1-14
463. 1-3-9-1-1-15
464. 1-3-9-1-1-16
465. 1-3-9-1-1-17
466. 1-3-9-1-1-18
467. 1-3-9-1-1-19
468. 1-3-9-1-1-20
469. 1-3-9-1-1-21
470. 1-3-9-1-1-22
471. 1-3-9-1-1-23
472. 1-3-9-1-1-24
473. 1-3-9-1-1-25
474. 1-3-9-1-1-26
475. 1-3-9-1-1-27
476. 1-3-9-1-1-28
477. 1-3-9-1-1-29
478. 1-3-9-1-1-30
479. 1-3-9-1-1-31
480. 1-3-9-1-1-32
481. 1-3-9-1-1-33
482. 1-3-9-1-1-34
483. 1-3-9-1-1-35
484. 1-3-9-1-1-36
485. 1-3-9-1-1-37
486. 1-3-9-1-1-38
487. 1-3-9-1-1-39
488. 1-3-9-1-1-40

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
4-428 Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary 3AG 24622 EAAA TQZZA
Use pursuant to applicable agreements Issue 1 February 2010
System turn-up and testing Verify 10GBE provisioning

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Table 4-45 Verify provisioning GBE10 facility and STS3C (continued)
Prov. (✓) Provisioned GBE10VCG GBE10STS3 Notes
order Cross-
connected (✓)
489. 1-3-9-1-1-41
490. 1-3-9-1-1-42
491. 1-3-9-1-1-43
492. 1-3-9-1-1-44
493. 1-3-9-1-1-45
494. 1-3-9-1-1-46
495. 1-3-9-1-1-47
496. 1-3-9-1-1-48
497. 1-3-9-1-1-49
498. 1-3-9-1-1-50
499. 1-3-9-1-1-51
500. 1-3-9-1-1-52
501. 1-3-9-1-1-53
502. 1-3-9-1-1-54
503. 1-3-9-1-1-55
504. 1-3-9-1-1-56
505. 1-3-9-1-1-57
506. 1-3-9-1-1-58
507. 1-3-9-1-1-59
508. 1-3-9-1-1-60
509. 1-3-9-1-1-61
510. 1-3-9-1-1-62
511. 1-3-9-1-1-63
512. 1-3-9-1-1-64
513. 1-3-12-1-1-1
514. 1-3-12-1-1-2
515. 1-3-12-1-1-3
516. 1-3-12-1-1-4
517. 1-3-12-1-1-5

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
3AG 24622 EAAA TQZZA Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary 4-429
Issue 1 February 2010 Use pursuant to applicable agreements
System turn-up and testing Verify 10GBE provisioning

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Table 4-45 Verify provisioning GBE10 facility and STS3C (continued)
Prov. (✓) Provisioned GBE10VCG GBE10STS3 Notes
order Cross-
connected (✓)
518. 1-3-12-1-1-6
519. 1-3-12-1-1-7
520. 1-3-12-1-1-8
521. 1-3-12-1-1-9
522. 1-3-12-1-1-10
523. 1-3-12-1-1-11
524. 1-3-12-1-1-12
525. 1-3-12-1-1-13
526. 1-3-12-1-1-14
527. 1-3-12-1-1-15
528. 1-3-12-1-1-16
529. 1-3-12-1-1-17
530. 1-3-12-1-1-18
531. 1-3-12-1-1-19
532. 1-3-12-1-1-20
533. 1-3-12-1-1-21
534. 1-3-12-1-1-22
535. 1-3-12-1-1-23
536. 1-3-12-1-1-24
537. 1-3-12-1-1-25
538. 1-3-12-1-1-26
539. 1-3-12-1-1-27
540. 1-3-12-1-1-28
541. 1-3-12-1-1-29
542. 1-3-12-1-1-30
543. 1-3-12-1-1-31
544. 1-3-12-1-1-32
545. 1-3-12-1-1-33
546. 1-3-12-1-1-34

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
4-430 Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary 3AG 24622 EAAA TQZZA
Use pursuant to applicable agreements Issue 1 February 2010
System turn-up and testing Verify 10GBE provisioning

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Table 4-45 Verify provisioning GBE10 facility and STS3C (continued)
Prov. (✓) Provisioned GBE10VCG GBE10STS3 Notes
order Cross-
connected (✓)
547. 1-3-12-1-1-35
548. 1-3-12-1-1-36
549. 1-3-12-1-1-37
550. 1-3-12-1-1-38
551. 1-3-12-1-1-39
552. 1-3-12-1-1-40
553. 1-3-12-1-1-41
554. 1-3-12-1-1-42
555. 1-3-12-1-1-43
556. 1-3-12-1-1-44
557. 1-3-12-1-1-45
558. 1-3-12-1-1-46
559. 1-3-12-1-1-47
560. 1-3-12-1-1-48
561. 1-3-12-1-1-49
562. 1-3-12-1-1-50
563. 1-3-12-1-1-51
564. 1-3-12-1-1-52
565. 1-3-12-1-1-53
566. 1-3-12-1-1-54
567. 1-3-12-1-1-55
568. 1-3-12-1-1-56
569. 1-3-12-1-1-57
570. 1-3-12-1-1-58
571. 1-3-12-1-1-59
572. 1-3-12-1-1-60
573. 1-3-12-1-1-61
574. 1-3-12-1-1-62
575. 1-3-12-1-1-63

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
3AG 24622 EAAA TQZZA Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary 4-431
Issue 1 February 2010 Use pursuant to applicable agreements
System turn-up and testing Verify 10GBE provisioning

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Table 4-45 Verify provisioning GBE10 facility and STS3C (continued)
Prov. (✓) Provisioned GBE10VCG GBE10STS3 Notes
order Cross-
connected (✓)
576. 1-3-12-1-1-64
577. 1-3-13-1-1-1
578. 1-3-13-1-1-2
579. 1-3-13-1-1-3
580. 1-3-13-1-1-4
581. 1-3-13-1-1-5
582. 1-3-13-1-1-6
583. 1-3-13-1-1-7
584. 1-3-13-1-1-8
585. 1-3-13-1-1-9
586. 1-3-13-1-1-10
587. 1-3-13-1-1-11
588. 1-3-13-1-1-12
589. 1-3-13-1-1-13
590. 1-3-13-1-1-14
591. 1-3-13-1-1-15
592. 1-3-13-1-1-16
593. 1-3-13-1-1-17
594. 1-3-13-1-1-18
595. 1-3-13-1-1-19
596. 1-3-13-1-1-20
597. 1-3-13-1-1-21
598. 1-3-13-1-1-22
599. 1-3-13-1-1-23
600. 1-3-13-1-1-24
601. 1-3-13-1-1-25
602. 1-3-13-1-1-26
603. 1-3-13-1-1-27
604. 1-3-13-1-1-28

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
4-432 Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary 3AG 24622 EAAA TQZZA
Use pursuant to applicable agreements Issue 1 February 2010
System turn-up and testing Verify 10GBE provisioning

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Table 4-45 Verify provisioning GBE10 facility and STS3C (continued)
Prov. (✓) Provisioned GBE10VCG GBE10STS3 Notes
order Cross-
connected (✓)
605. 1-3-13-1-1-29
606. 1-3-13-1-1-30
607. 1-3-13-1-1-31
608. 1-3-13-1-1-32
609. 1-3-13-1-1-33
610. 1-3-13-1-1-34
611. 1-3-13-1-1-35
612. 1-3-13-1-1-36
613. 1-3-13-1-1-37
614. 1-3-13-1-1-38
615. 1-3-13-1-1-39
616. 1-3-13-1-1-40
617. 1-3-13-1-1-41
618. 1-3-13-1-1-42
619. 1-3-13-1-1-43
620. 1-3-13-1-1-44
621. 1-3-13-1-1-45
622. 1-3-13-1-1-46
623. 1-3-13-1-1-47
624. 1-3-13-1-1-48
625. 1-3-13-1-1-49
626. 1-3-13-1-1-50
627. 1-3-13-1-1-51
628. 1-3-13-1-1-52
629. 1-3-13-1-1-53
630. 1-3-13-1-1-54
631. 1-3-13-1-1-55
632. 1-3-13-1-1-56
633. 1-3-13-1-1-57

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
3AG 24622 EAAA TQZZA Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary 4-433
Issue 1 February 2010 Use pursuant to applicable agreements
System turn-up and testing Verify 10GBE provisioning

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Table 4-45 Verify provisioning GBE10 facility and STS3C (continued)
Prov. (✓) Provisioned GBE10VCG GBE10STS3 Notes
order Cross-
connected (✓)
634. 1-3-13-1-1-58
635. 1-3-13-1-1-59
636. 1-3-13-1-1-60
637. 1-3-13-1-1-61
638. 1-3-13-1-1-62
639. 1-3-13-1-1-63
640. 1-3-13-1-1-64
641. 1-3-14-1-1-1
642. 1-3-14-1-1-2
643. 1-3-14-1-1-3
644. 1-3-14-1-1-4
645. 1-3-14-1-1-5
646. 1-3-14-1-1-6
647. 1-3-14-1-1-7
648. 1-3-14-1-1-8
649. 1-3-14-1-1-9
650. 1-3-14-1-1-10
651. 1-3-14-1-1-11
652. 1-3-14-1-1-12
653. 1-3-14-1-1-13
654. 1-3-14-1-1-14
655. 1-3-14-1-1-15
656. 1-3-14-1-1-16
657. 1-3-14-1-1-17
658. 1-3-14-1-1-18
659. 1-3-14-1-1-19
660. 1-3-14-1-1-20
661. 1-3-14-1-1-21
662. 1-3-14-1-1-22

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
4-434 Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary 3AG 24622 EAAA TQZZA
Use pursuant to applicable agreements Issue 1 February 2010
System turn-up and testing Verify 10GBE provisioning

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Table 4-45 Verify provisioning GBE10 facility and STS3C (continued)
Prov. (✓) Provisioned GBE10VCG GBE10STS3 Notes
order Cross-
connected (✓)
663. 1-3-14-1-1-23
664. 1-3-14-1-1-24
665. 1-3-14-1-1-25
666. 1-3-14-1-1-26
667. 1-3-14-1-1-27
668. 1-3-14-1-1-28
669. 1-3-14-1-1-29
670. 1-3-14-1-1-30
671. 1-3-14-1-1-31
672. 1-3-14-1-1-32
673. 1-3-14-1-1-33
674. 1-3-14-1-1-34
675. 1-3-14-1-1-35
676. 1-3-14-1-1-36
677. 1-3-14-1-1-37
678. 1-3-14-1-1-38
679. 1-3-14-1-1-39
680. 1-3-14-1-1-40
681. 1-3-14-1-1-41
682. 1-3-14-1-1-42
683. 1-3-14-1-1-43
684. 1-3-14-1-1-44
685. 1-3-14-1-1-45
686. 1-3-14-1-1-46
687. 1-3-14-1-1-47
688. 1-3-14-1-1-48
689. 1-3-14-1-1-49
690. 1-3-14-1-1-50
691. 1-3-14-1-1-51

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
3AG 24622 EAAA TQZZA Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary 4-435
Issue 1 February 2010 Use pursuant to applicable agreements
System turn-up and testing Verify 10GBE provisioning

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Table 4-45 Verify provisioning GBE10 facility and STS3C (continued)
Prov. (✓) Provisioned GBE10VCG GBE10STS3 Notes
order Cross-
connected (✓)
692. 1-3-14-1-1-52
693. 1-3-14-1-1-53
694. 1-3-14-1-1-54
695. 1-3-14-1-1-55
696. 1-3-14-1-1-56
697. 1-3-14-1-1-57
698. 1-3-14-1-1-58
699. 1-3-14-1-1-59
700. 1-3-14-1-1-60
701. 1-3-14-1-1-61
702. 1-3-14-1-1-62
703. 1-3-14-1-1-63
704. 1-3-14-1-1-64
705. 1-3-15-1-1-1
706. 1-3-15-1-1-2
707. 1-3-15-1-1-3
708. 1-3-15-1-1-4
709. 1-3-15-1-1-5
710. 1-3-15-1-1-6
711. 1-3-15-1-1-7
712. 1-3-15-1-1-8
713. 1-3-15-1-1-9
714. 1-3-15-1-1-10
715. 1-3-15-1-1-11
716. 1-3-15-1-1-12
717. 1-3-15-1-1-13
718. 1-3-15-1-1-14
719. 1-3-15-1-1-15
720. 1-3-15-1-1-16

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
4-436 Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary 3AG 24622 EAAA TQZZA
Use pursuant to applicable agreements Issue 1 February 2010
System turn-up and testing Verify 10GBE provisioning

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Table 4-45 Verify provisioning GBE10 facility and STS3C (continued)
Prov. (✓) Provisioned GBE10VCG GBE10STS3 Notes
order Cross-
connected (✓)
721. 1-3-15-1-1-17
722. 1-3-15-1-1-18
723. 1-3-15-1-1-19
724. 1-3-15-1-1-20
725. 1-3-15-1-1-21
726. 1-3-15-1-1-22
727. 1-3-15-1-1-23
728. 1-3-15-1-1-24
729. 1-3-15-1-1-25
730. 1-3-15-1-1-26
731. 1-3-15-1-1-27
732. 1-3-15-1-1-28
733. 1-3-15-1-1-29
734. 1-3-15-1-1-30
735. 1-3-15-1-1-31
736. 1-3-15-1-1-32
737. 1-3-15-1-1-33
738. 1-3-15-1-1-34
739. 1-3-15-1-1-35
740. 1-3-15-1-1-36
741. 1-3-15-1-1-37
742. 1-3-15-1-1-38
743. 1-3-15-1-1-39
744. 1-3-15-1-1-40
745. 1-3-15-1-1-41
746. 1-3-15-1-1-42
747. 1-3-15-1-1-43
748. 1-3-15-1-1-44
749. 1-3-15-1-1-45

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
3AG 24622 EAAA TQZZA Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary 4-437
Issue 1 February 2010 Use pursuant to applicable agreements
System turn-up and testing Verify 10GBE provisioning

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Table 4-45 Verify provisioning GBE10 facility and STS3C (continued)
Prov. (✓) Provisioned GBE10VCG GBE10STS3 Notes
order Cross-
connected (✓)
750. 1-3-15-1-1-46
751. 1-3-15-1-1-47
752. 1-3-15-1-1-48
753. 1-3-15-1-1-49
754. 1-3-15-1-1-50
755. 1-3-15-1-1-51
756. 1-3-15-1-1-52
757. 1-3-15-1-1-53
758. 1-3-15-1-1-54
759. 1-3-15-1-1-55
760. 1-3-15-1-1-56
761. 1-3-15-1-1-57
762. 1-3-15-1-1-58
763. 1-3-15-1-1-59
764. 1-3-15-1-1-60
765. 1-3-15-1-1-61
766. 1-3-15-1-1-62
767. 1-3-15-1-1-63
768. 1-3-15-1-1-64
769. 1-3-16-1-1-1
770. 1-3-16-1-1-2
771. 1-3-16-1-1-3
772. 1-3-16-1-1-4
773. 1-3-16-1-1-5
774. 1-3-16-1-1-6
775. 1-3-16-1-1-7
776. 1-3-16-1-1-8
777. 1-3-16-1-1-9
778. 1-3-16-1-1-10

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
4-438 Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary 3AG 24622 EAAA TQZZA
Use pursuant to applicable agreements Issue 1 February 2010
System turn-up and testing Verify 10GBE provisioning

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Table 4-45 Verify provisioning GBE10 facility and STS3C (continued)
Prov. (✓) Provisioned GBE10VCG GBE10STS3 Notes
order Cross-
connected (✓)
779. 1-3-16-1-1-11
780. 1-3-16-1-1-12
781. 1-3-16-1-1-13
782. 1-3-16-1-1-14
783. 1-3-16-1-1-15
784. 1-3-16-1-1-16
785. 1-3-16-1-1-17
786. 1-3-16-1-1-18
787. 1-3-16-1-1-19
788. 1-3-16-1-1-20
789. 1-3-16-1-1-21
790. 1-3-16-1-1-22
791. 1-3-16-1-1-23
792. 1-3-16-1-1-24
793. 1-3-16-1-1-25
794. 1-3-16-1-1-26
795. 1-3-16-1-1-27
796. 1-3-16-1-1-28
797. 1-3-16-1-1-29
798. 1-3-16-1-1-30
799. 1-3-16-1-1-31
800. 1-3-16-1-1-32
801. 1-3-16-1-1-33
802. 1-3-16-1-1-34
803. 1-3-16-1-1-35
804. 1-3-16-1-1-36
805. 1-3-16-1-1-37
806. 1-3-16-1-1-38
807. 1-3-16-1-1-39

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
3AG 24622 EAAA TQZZA Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary 4-439
Issue 1 February 2010 Use pursuant to applicable agreements
System turn-up and testing Verify 10GBE provisioning

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Table 4-45 Verify provisioning GBE10 facility and STS3C (continued)
Prov. (✓) Provisioned GBE10VCG GBE10STS3 Notes
order Cross-
connected (✓)
808. 1-3-16-1-1-40
809. 1-3-16-1-1-41
810. 1-3-16-1-1-42
811. 1-3-16-1-1-43
812. 1-3-16-1-1-44
813. 1-3-16-1-1-45
814. 1-3-16-1-1-46
815. 1-3-16-1-1-47
816. 1-3-16-1-1-48
817. 1-3-16-1-1-49
818. 1-3-16-1-1-50
819. 1-3-16-1-1-51
820. 1-3-16-1-1-52
821. 1-3-16-1-1-53
822. 1-3-16-1-1-54
823. 1-3-16-1-1-55
824. 1-3-16-1-1-56
825. 1-3-16-1-1-57
826. 1-3-16-1-1-58
827. 1-3-16-1-1-59
828. 1-3-16-1-1-60
829. 1-3-16-1-1-61
830. 1-3-16-1-1-62
831. 1-3-16-1-1-63
832. 1-3-16-1-1-64
833. 1-3-17-1-1-1
834. 1-3-17-1-1-2
835. 1-3-17-1-1-3
836. 1-3-17-1-1-4

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
4-440 Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary 3AG 24622 EAAA TQZZA
Use pursuant to applicable agreements Issue 1 February 2010
System turn-up and testing Verify 10GBE provisioning

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Table 4-45 Verify provisioning GBE10 facility and STS3C (continued)
Prov. (✓) Provisioned GBE10VCG GBE10STS3 Notes
order Cross-
connected (✓)
837. 1-3-17-1-1-5
838. 1-3-17-1-1-6
839. 1-3-17-1-1-7
840. 1-3-17-1-1-8
841. 1-3-17-1-1-9
842. 1-3-17-1-1-10
843. 1-3-17-1-1-11
844. 1-3-17-1-1-12
845. 1-3-17-1-1-13
846. 1-3-17-1-1-14
847. 1-3-17-1-1-15
848. 1-3-17-1-1-16
849. 1-3-17-1-1-17
850. 1-3-17-1-1-18
851. 1-3-17-1-1-19
852. 1-3-17-1-1-20
853. 1-3-17-1-1-21
854. 1-3-17-1-1-22
855. 1-3-17-1-1-23
856. 1-3-17-1-1-24
857. 1-3-17-1-1-25
858. 1-3-17-1-1-26
859. 1-3-17-1-1-27
860. 1-3-17-1-1-28
861. 1-3-17-1-1-29
862. 1-3-17-1-1-30
863. 1-3-17-1-1-31
864. 1-3-17-1-1-32
865. 1-3-17-1-1-33

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
3AG 24622 EAAA TQZZA Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary 4-441
Issue 1 February 2010 Use pursuant to applicable agreements
System turn-up and testing Verify 10GBE provisioning

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Table 4-45 Verify provisioning GBE10 facility and STS3C (continued)
Prov. (✓) Provisioned GBE10VCG GBE10STS3 Notes
order Cross-
connected (✓)
866. 1-3-17-1-1-34
867. 1-3-17-1-1-35
868. 1-3-17-1-1-36
869. 1-3-17-1-1-37
870. 1-3-17-1-1-38
871. 1-3-17-1-1-39
872. 1-3-17-1-1-40
873. 1-3-17-1-1-41
874. 1-3-17-1-1-42
875. 1-3-17-1-1-43
876. 1-3-17-1-1-44
877. 1-3-17-1-1-45
878. 1-3-17-1-1-46
879. 1-3-17-1-1-47
880. 1-3-17-1-1-48
881. 1-3-17-1-1-49
882. 1-3-17-1-1-50
883. 1-3-17-1-1-51
884. 1-3-17-1-1-52
885. 1-3-17-1-1-53
886. 1-3-17-1-1-54
887. 1-3-17-1-1-55
888. 1-3-17-1-1-56
889. 1-3-17-1-1-57
890. 1-3-17-1-1-58
891. 1-3-17-1-1-59
892. 1-3-17-1-1-60
893. 1-3-17-1-1-61
894. 1-3-17-1-1-62

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
4-442 Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary 3AG 24622 EAAA TQZZA
Use pursuant to applicable agreements Issue 1 February 2010
System turn-up and testing Verify 10GBE provisioning

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Table 4-45 Verify provisioning GBE10 facility and STS3C (continued)
Prov. (✓) Provisioned GBE10VCG GBE10STS3 Notes
order Cross-
connected (✓)
895. 1-3-17-1-1-63
896. 1-3-17-1-1-64
897. 1-3-18-1-1-1
898. 1-3-18-1-1-2
899. 1-3-18-1-1-3
900. 1-3-18-1-1-4
901. 1-3-18-1-1-5
902. 1-3-18-1-1-6
903. 1-3-18-1-1-7
904. 1-3-18-1-1-8
905. 1-3-18-1-1-9
906. 1-3-18-1-1-10
907. 1-3-18-1-1-11
908. 1-3-18-1-1-12
909. 1-3-18-1-1-13
910. 1-3-18-1-1-14
911. 1-3-18-1-1-15
912. 1-3-18-1-1-16
913. 1-3-18-1-1-17
914. 1-3-18-1-1-18
915. 1-3-18-1-1-19
916. 1-3-18-1-1-20
917. 1-3-18-1-1-21
918. 1-3-18-1-1-22
919. 1-3-18-1-1-23
920. 1-3-18-1-1-24
921. 1-3-18-1-1-25
922. 1-3-18-1-1-26
923. 1-3-18-1-1-27

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
3AG 24622 EAAA TQZZA Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary 4-443
Issue 1 February 2010 Use pursuant to applicable agreements
System turn-up and testing Verify 10GBE provisioning

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Table 4-45 Verify provisioning GBE10 facility and STS3C (continued)
Prov. (✓) Provisioned GBE10VCG GBE10STS3 Notes
order Cross-
connected (✓)
924. 1-3-18-1-1-28
925. 1-3-18-1-1-29
926. 1-3-18-1-1-30
927. 1-3-18-1-1-31
928. 1-3-18-1-1-32
929. 1-3-18-1-1-33
930. 1-3-18-1-1-34
931. 1-3-18-1-1-35
932. 1-3-18-1-1-36
933. 1-3-18-1-1-37
934. 1-3-18-1-1-38
935. 1-3-18-1-1-39
936. 1-3-18-1-1-40
937. 1-3-18-1-1-41
938. 1-3-18-1-1-42
939. 1-3-18-1-1-43
940. 1-3-18-1-1-44
941. 1-3-18-1-1-45
942. 1-3-18-1-1-46
943. 1-3-18-1-1-47
944. 1-3-18-1-1-48
945. 1-3-18-1-1-49
946. 1-3-18-1-1-50
947. 1-3-18-1-1-51
948. 1-3-18-1-1-52
949. 1-3-18-1-1-53
950. 1-3-18-1-1-54
951. 1-3-18-1-1-55
952. 1-3-18-1-1-56

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
4-444 Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary 3AG 24622 EAAA TQZZA
Use pursuant to applicable agreements Issue 1 February 2010
System turn-up and testing Verify 10GBE provisioning

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Table 4-45 Verify provisioning GBE10 facility and STS3C (continued)
Prov. (✓) Provisioned GBE10VCG GBE10STS3 Notes
order Cross-
connected (✓)
953. 1-3-18-1-1-57
954. 1-3-18-1-1-58
955. 1-3-18-1-1-59
956. 1-3-18-1-1-60
957. 1-3-18-1-1-61
958. 1-3-18-1-1-62
959. 1-3-18-1-1-63
960. 1-3-18-1-1-64
961. 1-3-19-1-1-1
962. 1-3-19-1-1-2
963. 1-3-19-1-1-3
964. 1-3-19-1-1-4
965. 1-3-19-1-1-5
966. 1-3-19-1-1-6
967. 1-3-19-1-1-7
968. 1-3-19-1-1-8
969. 1-3-19-1-1-9
970. 1-3-19-1-1-10
971. 1-3-19-1-1-11
972. 1-3-19-1-1-12
973. 1-3-19-1-1-13
974. 1-3-19-1-1-14
975. 1-3-19-1-1-15
976. 1-3-19-1-1-16
977. 1-3-19-1-1-17
978. 1-3-19-1-1-18
979. 1-3-19-1-1-19
980. 1-3-19-1-1-20
981. 1-3-19-1-1-21

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
3AG 24622 EAAA TQZZA Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary 4-445
Issue 1 February 2010 Use pursuant to applicable agreements
System turn-up and testing Verify 10GBE provisioning

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Table 4-45 Verify provisioning GBE10 facility and STS3C (continued)
Prov. (✓) Provisioned GBE10VCG GBE10STS3 Notes
order Cross-
connected (✓)
982. 1-3-19-1-1-22
983. 1-3-19-1-1-23
984. 1-3-19-1-1-24
985. 1-3-19-1-1-25
986. 1-3-19-1-1-26
987. 1-3-19-1-1-27
988. 1-3-19-1-1-28
989. 1-3-19-1-1-29
990. 1-3-19-1-1-30
991. 1-3-19-1-1-31
992. 1-3-19-1-1-32
993. 1-3-19-1-1-33
994. 1-3-19-1-1-34
995. 1-3-19-1-1-35
996. 1-3-19-1-1-36
997. 1-3-19-1-1-37
998. 1-3-19-1-1-38
999. 1-3-19-1-1-39
1000. 1-3-19-1-1-40
1001. 1-3-19-1-1-41
1002. 1-3-19-1-1-42
1003. 1-3-19-1-1-43
1004. 1-3-19-1-1-44
1005. 1-3-19-1-1-45
1006. 1-3-19-1-1-46
1007. 1-3-19-1-1-47
1008. 1-3-19-1-1-48
1009. 1-3-19-1-1-49
1010. 1-3-19-1-1-50

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
4-446 Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary 3AG 24622 EAAA TQZZA
Use pursuant to applicable agreements Issue 1 February 2010
System turn-up and testing Verify 10GBE provisioning

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Table 4-45 Verify provisioning GBE10 facility and STS3C (continued)
Prov. (✓) Provisioned GBE10VCG GBE10STS3 Notes
order Cross-
connected (✓)
1011. 1-3-19-1-1-51
1012. 1-3-19-1-1-52
1013. 1-3-19-1-1-53
1014. 1-3-19-1-1-54
1015. 1-3-19-1-1-55
1016. 1-3-19-1-1-56
1017. 1-3-19-1-1-57
1018. 1-3-19-1-1-58
1019. 1-3-19-1-1-59
1020. 1-3-19-1-1-60
1021. 1-3-19-1-1-61
1022. 1-3-19-1-1-62
1023. 1-3-19-1-1-63
1024. 1-3-19-1-1-64

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
3AG 24622 EAAA TQZZA Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary 4-447
Issue 1 February 2010 Use pursuant to applicable agreements
5 5678 Metro Core Connect
1
addresses and locations

Overview
Purpose
This section is a work aid that provides unit identification and location information for
plug-in modules in the 1678 Metro Core Connect broadband cross-connect system. Much
of the information in this document is supplied by illustrations of fully equipped racks
and shelves and tables that provide Access Identifiers (AIDs) and shelf numbers. See
Figure 5-1, “NGTRU and recommended shelf locations (upper shelf)” (p. 5-2) for a
typical rack configuration. See Figure 5-2, “NGTRU and alternate shelf locations (lower
shelf)” (p. 5-3) for an alternate rack configuration.

Typical rack configuration

A typical rack configuration is equipped with the following equipment:
• One 1678 Metro Core Connect shelf
• Supporting equipment such as fans and New Generation Top Rack Unit (NGTRU)
• Covers and trim panels

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
3AG 24622 EAAA TQZZA Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary 5-1
Issue 1 February 2010 Use pursuant to applicable agreements
1678 Metro Core Connect addresses and locations Overview

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Figure 5-1 NGTRU and recommended shelf locations (upper shelf)

NGTRU
INSTALLS IN
RU 2-5

AIR DEFLECTOR
RU 7-8

1678 SHELF
FAN ASSEMBLY INSTALLS IN
RU 8-23

FILTER ASSEMBLY

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
5-2 Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary 3AG 24622 EAAA TQZZA
Use pursuant to applicable agreements Issue 1 February 2010
1678 Metro Core Connect addresses and locations Overview

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Figure 5-2 NGTRU and alternate shelf locations (lower shelf)

NGTRU
INSTALLS IN
RU 2-5

AIR DEFLECTOR
RU 26-27

1678 SHELF
FAN ASSEMBLY INSTALLS IN
RU 27-42

FILTER ASSEMBLY

678-0340-1
050108

Contents

Numbering scheme 5-4

System shelves 5-9

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
3AG 24622 EAAA TQZZA Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary 5-3
Issue 1 February 2010 Use pursuant to applicable agreements
1678 Metro Core Connect addresses and locations Numbering scheme

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Numbering scheme
The system uses different syntax for facility port addressing and equipment addressing.

Facility port addressing

The syntax for facility Access Identifiers (AIDs) in the shelf, TL1 commands, responses,
and messages follows:
AID=N-R-Sh-S-a-b-c-d-e
where:
N=3- to 8-character mnemonic that identifies facility type
R=rack number where facility is located
Sh=shelf number where facility is located
S=slot number where facility is located
a=facility number
b=embedded facility number
c=embedded facility number
d=embedded facility number
e=embedded facility number
Refer to Table 5-1, “GigE and embedded facility AIDs and values” (p. 5-4) through Table
5-7, “Logical port on ES64 L2 switching server and embedded facility AIDs and values”
(p. 5-6) for facility AIDs and their associated values.
Table 5-1 GigE and embedded facility AIDs and values
Facility AID Value
GigE GBE-R-Sh-S-a 1-3-(2-9,12-19)-(1-16)
STS-1 constituting VCG in GBESTS1-R-Sh-S-a-b 1-3-(2-9,12-19)-(1-16)-(1-21)
GigE
STS-3c constituting VCG in GBESTS3C-R-Sh-S-a-b 1-3-(2-9,12-19)-(1-16)-(1-7)
GigE
VCG in GigE GBEVCG-R-Sh-S-a 1-3-(2-9,12-19)-(1-16)

Table 5-2 GBE10 and embedded facility AIDs and values

Facility AID Value
GBE10 GBE10-R-Sh-S-a 1-3-(2-9,12-19)-(1-2)

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
5-4 Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary 3AG 24622 EAAA TQZZA
Use pursuant to applicable agreements Issue 1 February 2010
1678 Metro Core Connect addresses and locations Numbering scheme

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Table 5-2 GBE10 and embedded facility AIDs and values (continued)
STS-1 constituting VCG in GBE10STS1-R-Sh-S-a-b-c 1-3-(2-9,12-19)-(1-2)-1-(1-192)
GBE10
STS-3c constituting VCG in GBE10STS3C-R-Sh-S-a-b-c 1-3-(2-9,12-19)-(1-2)-1-(1-64)
GBE10
VCG in GBE10 GBE10VCG-R-Sh-S-a-b 1-3-(2-9,12-19)-(1-2)-1

Table 5-3 OC-3 and embedded facility AIDs and values

Facility AID Value
OC-3 OC3-R-Sh-S-a 1-3-(2-9,12-19)-(1-16)
STS-1 in OC-3 OC3STS1-R-Sh-S-a-b 1-3-(2-9,12-19)-(1-16)-(1-3)
STS-3c in OC-3 OC3STS3C-R-Sh-S-a 1-3-(2-9,12-19)-(1-16)

Table 5-4 OC-12 and embedded facility AIDs and values

Facility AID Value
OC-12 OC12-R-Sh-S-a 1-3-(2-9,12-19)-(1-16)
STS-1 in OC-12 OC12STS1-R-Sh-S-a-b-c 1-3-(2-9,12-19)-(1-16)-(1-4)-(1-3)
STS-3c in OC-12 OC12STS3C-R-Sh-S-a-b 1-3-(2-9,12-19)-(1-16)-(1-4)
STS-12c in OC-12 OC12STS12C-R-Sh-S-a 1-3-(2-9,12-19)-(1-16)

Table 5-5 OC-48 and embedded facility AIDs and values

Facility AID Value
OC-48 OC48-R-Sh-S-a 1-3-(2-9,12-19)-(1-16)
STS-1 in OC-48 OC48STS1-R-Sh-S-a-b-c 1-3-(2-9,12-19)-(1-16)-(1-16)-(1-3)
STS-3c in OC-48 OC48STS3C-R-Sh-S-a-b 1-3-(2-9,12-19)-(1-16)-(1-16)
STS-12c in OC-48 OC48STS12C-R-Sh-S-a-b 1-3-(2-9,12-19)-(1-16)-(1,5,9,13)
STS-48c in OC-48 OC48STS48C-R-Sh-S-a 1-3-(2-9,12-19)-(1-16)

Table 5-6 OC-192 and embedded facility AIDs and values

Facility AID Value
OC-192 OC192-R-Sh-S-a 1-3-(2-9,12-19)-(1-4)
STS-1 in OC-192 OC192STS1-R-Sh-S-a-b-c 1-3-(2-9,12-19)-(1-4)-(1-64)-(1-3)
STS-3c in OC-192 OC192STS3C-R-Sh-S-a-b 1-3-(2-9,12-19)-(1-4)-(1-64)

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
3AG 24622 EAAA TQZZA Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary 5-5
Issue 1 February 2010 Use pursuant to applicable agreements
1678 Metro Core Connect addresses and locations Numbering scheme

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Table 5-6 OC-192 and embedded facility AIDs and values (continued)
STS-12c in OC-192 OC192STS12C-R-Sh-S-a-b 1-3-(2-9,12-19)-(1-4)-(1,5,9,13,17,21,25,29,
33,37,41,45,49,53,57,61)
STS-48c in OC-192 OC192STS48C-R-Sh-S-a-b 1-3-(2-9,12-19)-(1-4)-(1,17,33,49)
STS-192c in OC-192 OC192STS192C-R-Sh-S-a 1-3-(2-9,12-19)-(1-4)

Table 5-7 Logical port on ES64 L2 switching server and embedded facility AIDs
and values
Facility AID Value
Logical port ESLP-R-Sh-S-a 1-3-(2-9,12-19)-(1-126,129-254)
DS3 in logical port for ESLPT3-R-Sh-S-a 1-3-(2-9,12-19)-(1-126,129-254)
direct-mapped Ethernet
STS-1 constituting VCG in VCGSTS1-R-Sh-S-a-b 1-3-(2-9,12-19)-(1-126,129-254)-(1-192)
logical port
STS-3c constituting VCG in VCGSTS3C-R-Sh-S-a-b 1-3-(2-9,12-19)-(1-126,129-254)-(1-64)
logical port
STS-1 in logical port for ESLPSTS1-R-Sh-S-a 1-3-(2-9,12-19)-(1-126,129-254)
direct-mapped Ethernet
STS-3c in logical port for ESLPSTS3C-R-Sh-S-a 1-3-(2-9,12-19)-(1-64,129-192)
direct-mapped Ethernet
STS-12c in logical port for ESLPSTS12C-R-Sh-S-a 1-3-{2-9,12-19}-{1-64,129-192}
direct-mapped Ethernet
VCG in logical port ESLPVCG-R-Sh-S-a 1-3-(2-9,12-19)-(1-126,129-254)
VCG embedded in a GBE GBEVCG-R-Sh-S-a 1-3-(2-9,12-19)-(1-16)
VCG in GBE10 GBE10VCG-R-Sh-S-a-b 1-3-(2-9,12-19)-(1-2)-1

Equipment addressing
The system uses AIDs to identify removable equipment modules. Refer to Table 5-8,
“Equipment addressing” (p. 5-7) for a list of valid AIDs. Depending on the system size
and configuration, some of the AIDs may not apply. Most AIDs use the
module-rack-shelf-slot-interface (N-R-Sh-S-I) scheme to describe equipment module
type, rack location, shelf, and module position.
AID=N-R-Sh-S-I
where:
N=3- to 8-character mnemonic that identifies module type
R=rack number
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
5-6 Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary 3AG 24622 EAAA TQZZA
Use pursuant to applicable agreements Issue 1 February 2010
1678 Metro Core Connect addresses and locations Numbering scheme

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Sh=shelf number in rack
S=slot number of module
I=interface number of SFP/XFP

Table 5-8 Equipment addressing

Hardware mnenomic Software addressing
BUSTERM BUSTERM-1-3-(21,22)
BYPASS BYPASS-1-1-6
FAN FAN-1-(2,4)-1
FLCCONGI FLCCONGI-1-3-20
FLCSERVA FLCSERVA-1-3-1
MX320GA MX320GA-1-3-(10,11)
MX640GA MX640GA-1-3-(10,11)
PSF PSF-1-3-(24,25)
STEPUP STEPUP-1-1-(1-6)
ES64SC ES64SC-1-3-(2-9,12-19)
P2XGE P2XGE-1-3-(2-9,12-19)
P8GE P8GEFC-1-3-(2-9,12-19)
P16GE P16GEFC-1-3-(2-9,12-19)
P16S1S P16S1S-1-3-(2-9,12-19)
P16S1S4 P16S1S4-1-3-(2-9,12-19)
P8S16 P8S16-1-3-(2-9,12-19)
P16S16 P16S16-1-3-(2-9,12-19)
P2S64X P2S64X-1-3-(2-9,12-19)
P4S64X P4S64X-1-3-(2-9,12-19)
SFP SFP-1-3-(2-9,12-19)-(1-16)
XFP XFP-1-3-(2-9,12-19)-(1-16)

Timing reference addressing

The AID for the external timing references is BITS-(0,1). The AID for the retrieval of
Clock Reference Generator (CRG) synchronization information is NESYNC.

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
3AG 24622 EAAA TQZZA Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary 5-7
Issue 1 February 2010 Use pursuant to applicable agreements
1678 Metro Core Connect addresses and locations Numbering scheme

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Common entity addressing
Refer to table for common entity AIDs.

Table 5-9 Common system entity AIDs

Entity AID
Common system entity COM
Unprovisioned equipment MDL-1-(1-4)-(1-25)-(1-16)
Level 1 Routing that indentifies a reachable L1ROU
Level 1 Intermediate System
Level 2 routing that identifies a reachable L2ROU
Level 2 Intermediate System
OSI areas (default and additional) OSIAREA-(1-10)
OSI areas (additional, non-default) OSIAREA-(2-10)
Internet Protocol Tunnel IPT-(1-160)
Management LAN entitity LAN-1
All entities ALL

Database backup addressing

Refer to table for database backup AIDs.

Table 5-10 Database backup AIDs

Database backup AID
Primary backup database ACTDSKDB
Secondary backup database STBYDB
Database backup on RFS RFSDB

Software generic addressing

Refer to table for software generic AIDs.

Table 5-11 Software generic AIDs

Software load AID
Standby software generic on NE STBYSW
Software generic on RFS RFSSW

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
5-8 Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary 3AG 24622 EAAA TQZZA
Use pursuant to applicable agreements Issue 1 February 2010
1678 Metro Core Connect addresses and locations System shelves

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

System shelves
A rack contains one New Generation Top Rack Unit (NGTRU) at the top of the rack and
one 1678 Metro Core Connect shelf below the NGTRU.

NGTRU
The NGTRU houses two DC/DC step-up converters, a rack lamp unit, and a bypass
module. See Figure 5-3, “NGTRU, front view” (p. 5-9) for a front view of the NGTRU
that shows the module complement.

Figure 5-3 NGTRU, front view

–A +A GNDM +B –B
RACK LAMPUNIT

STEPUP-1-1-1

STEPUP-1-1-2

BYPASS-1-1-6
678-0276-1
042907

1678 Metro Core Connect shelf

The 1678 Metro Core Connect shelf has slots on the front. See Figure 5-4, “1678 Metro
Core Connect shelf, front view” (p. 5-10) for a front view of the shelf that shows the
module complement. In addition, the I/O modules, excluding the ES64SC, contain SFPs
or XFPs. Refer to Table 5-12, “I/O module and SFP/XFP relationships” (p. 5-11) for
information on which SFPs or XFPs each I/O module can accommodate.

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
3AG 24622 EAAA TQZZA Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary 5-9
Issue 1 February 2010 Use pursuant to applicable agreements
1678 Metro Core Connect addresses and locations System shelves

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Figure 5-4 1678 Metro Core Connect shelf, front view

FAN-1-2-1

PSF-1-3-24

PSF-1-3-25
FLCCONGI1-3-20
FLCSERVA1-3-1

MX640GA/MX320GA-1-3-10

MX640GA/MX320GA-1-3-11
BUSTERM-1-3-21

BUSTERM-1-3-22
I/O-1-3-12*
I/O-1-3-13*
I/O-1-3-14*
I/O-1-3-15*
I/O-1-3-16*
I/O-1-3-17*
I/O-1-3-18*
I/O-1-3-19*
I/O-1-3-2*
I/O-1-3-3*
I/O-1-3-4*
I/O-1-3-5*
I/O-1-3-6*
I/O-1-3-7*
I/O-1-3-8*
I/O-1-3-9*

FAN-1-4-1

AIR FILTER
678-0275-1
042907

*NOTE: I/O MODULES INCLUDE THE FOLLOWING: ES64SC, P8GEFC, P16GEFC,

P16S1S, P16S1S4, P8S16, P16S16, P2XGE, P2S64X, P4S64X. IN ADDITION, EACH OF
THESE MODULES, EXCLUDING THE ES64SC, IS EQUIPPED WITH SFPs OR XFPs, WHICH
ARE NOT SHOWN FOR SIMPLICITY.

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
5-10 Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary 3AG 24622 EAAA TQZZA
Use pursuant to applicable agreements Issue 1 February 2010
1678 Metro Core Connect addresses and locations System shelves

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Table 5-12 I/O module and SFP/XFP relationships

I/O module Allowed SFPs Allowed XFPs
P8GEFC 1000BLX --
1000BSX
P16GEFC 1000BLX --
1000BSX
P16S1 (P16OC3) IR10C3 --
LR10C3
LR2OC3
P16S1S4 (P16OC3OC12) IR10C3 --
LR10C3
LR2OC3
IR10C12
LR1OC12
LR2OC12
P8S16 (P8OC48) IR1OC48 --
LR1OC48
LR2OC48
SR1OC48
P16S16 (P16OC48) IR1OC48 --
LR1OC48
LR2OC48
SR1OC48
P2S64X (P2OC192) SR1OC192
LR1OC192
LR2OC192
P4S64X (P4OC192) SR1OC192
LR1OC192
LR2OC192

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
3AG 24622 EAAA TQZZA Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary 5-11
Issue 1 February 2010 Use pursuant to applicable agreements
Glossary

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Numerics

1:1
A 1:N system where N=1.

1+1, 1P1
Non-expandable protection scheme; (Pronounced “one plus one”). Two full-duplex channels: one
active, one standby; either can provide service. Protection switching behavior may be revertive or
nonrevertive (normal case). When active channel fails, traffic is switched to standby channel. In
revertive, one channel is the preferred active; when preferred channel is repaired, traffic switches
back to it. In nonrevertive neither channel is preferred, and switch-back does not occur.

1:N
(Pronounced “one for N”) N+1 full-duplex channels, N main and one standby (or protection). The
main channels provide service: If a main channel fails, the standby channel switches to provide
service in place of failed channel. Switching is revertive, which permits extra traffic to be carried
on the standby channel. (For example, when the main channel is repaired, service will be switched
back to it, thus making the standby channel available to protect a subsequent failure.)

2FBLSR
Two-Fiber Bidirectional Line-Switched Ring. See Bidirectional Ring (Bi-Ring).

2SR
2 Second Response.

42S
40-input to 20-output switch ASIC.

4FBLSR
Four-Fiber Bidirectional Line-Switched Ring. See Bidirectional Ring (Bi-Ring).

802.1E
An IEEE protocol that allows the loading of a file on an NE on a multicast or point-to-point basis

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

A ABAM
A four-digit cable identification code for T1-compatible 22 American Wire Gauge (AWG) copper
wire, a standard for paired copper cabling.

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
3AG 24622 EAAA TQZZA Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary GL-1
Issue 1 February 2010 Use pursuant to applicable agreements
Glossary

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
ABN
Abnormal alarm.

ABN CONFG
Abnormal Configuration.

ABT
Abort Output Function.

ABTM
A four-digit cable identification code for T1-compatible 26 American Wire Gauge (AWG) copper
wire; standard for paired copper cabling.

Access Identifier (AID)

Specifies the object entity (port or equipment) specified in a TL1 command; used to specify
“object entities” within an NE to which user commands are to be applied. Facilities and signals
are examples of object entities. The term “object entity” is used by Bellcore; it does not mean the
NE is implemented in an object-oriented manner.

ACD
Alcatel Control Domain

ACL
Administration Communication Link. An RS-485 signal level bus for communication between the
APS and all SI48 and matrix shelves. Up to 2 Mb/s half-duplex communication link; implements
HDLC-NRM multidrop communication configuration; supports up to 2000 feet bus length; and
consists of transmit data, receive data, clock, reset enable, and CPI.

ACM
Administrative Communications Module (module).

ACO
See Alarm Cutoff (ACO).

ACSE
Association Control Service Element. An OSI convention used to establish, maintain, or terminate
a connection between two applications.

ACT
1. Active redundant.
2. Active unit.
3. Active secondary service state; indicates that the entity is capable of being protected and is
currently the active entity.

Action Button
A pushbutton common to 1301 Network Manager (NM) dialog boxes.

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
GL-2 Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary 3AG 24622 EAAA TQZZA
Use pursuant to applicable agreements Issue 1 February 2010
Glossary

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
ACU
Alarm Communications Unit.

Add-Drop Multiplexer (ADM)

Network elements that provide access to all N, or some subset M of Synchronous Transport
Signal (STS) line signals contained within an OC-N optical channel. (M is a standard hierarchical
level vN.) STSs are added to (inserted) and/or dropped from (extracted) the OC-N signal as it
passes through the ADM. ADMs include linear applications between terminals (referred to as a
Linear ADM or LADM) and ring network applications (referred to as unidirectional ring [uniring]
and bidirectional ring [bi-ring] ADMs). See also Linear Add-Drop Multiplexer (LADM).

ADDR
Address.

ADL
1. Add-Drop Linear. See Linear Add-Drop Multiplexer (LADM).
2. Asynchronous Data Link

ADL12
Add-Drop Linear for OC12. See Linear Add-Drop Multiplexer (LADM).

ADM
See Add-Drop Multiplexer (ADM).

ADMIN
Administrative domain server.

Administration
A 1301 Network Manager (NM) main menu option; displays the general status and inventory of a
system.

Administrator
A user who has access to all security, system, and database maintenance functions in addition to
standard user capabilities.

ADR
Add-Drop Ring.

ADR12
Add-Drop Ring for OC12.

ADSL
See Asymmetric Digital Subscriber Line (ADSL).

AFI
Address Format Identifier.

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
3AG 24622 EAAA TQZZA Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary GL-3
Issue 1 February 2010 Use pursuant to applicable agreements
Glossary

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
AGC
Automatic Gain Control.

AIC
Application Identification Channel. Identifies DS3 frame application (C-bit=1, W23=alternate 0s
and 1s).

AID
See Access Identifier (AID).

AINS
Automatic In Service.

AIS
See Alarm Indication Signal (AIS).

AISL
Alarm Indication Signal, Line. See Alarm Indication Signal (AIS).

AISS
AIS Second.

AIU
Attachment User Interface.

Alarm (ALM)
Binary visual or audible indication of trouble, significant number of irregularities, or failure;
signifies a malfunction or abnormality within the communications equipment; usually classified
as minor, major, or critical.

Alarm Cutoff (ACO)

An ACO silences an office alarm.

Alarm Indication
Indication of upstream transmission span failure. In a network of tandem maintenance spans,
service-affecting failures may occur, which disrupt normal signals and cause the generation of
maintenance alarms.

Alarm Indication Signal (AIS)

A unique line signal sent downstream in a digital network to indicate that an upstream failure is
detected and alarmed. Signal replaces normal traffic when a maintenance alarm is activated. There
are two types: American (framed; alternating 1s and 0s) and nonstandard (unframed; all 1s).

Alarm Log
Record of recent alarm events logged for a particular Network Element (NE).

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
GL-4 Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary 3AG 24622 EAAA TQZZA
Use pursuant to applicable agreements Issue 1 February 2010
Glossary

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alarm/Condition Codes
1. Critical (CR) or (CRI)*.
2. In service (IS).
3. Maintenance (MAINT) or (MT).
4. Major (MAJ) or (MJ)*.
5. Manual control (ManCont).
6. Manual operation (MAN).
7. Memory administration (MA)*.
8. Minor (MN) or (MIN)*.
9. Out of Service (OOS).
* Also referred to as Severity level or Notification Code.

ALC
1. Automatic Level Control.
2. Automatic Laser Control.

ALM
See Alarm (ALM).

ALMAP
Alcatel Management Platform

ALMID
Alarm Identifier, parallel E2A.

ALS
Automatic Laser Shutdown.

ALSP
AIS or LOP-Path Second.

ALTAID
Alternate Equipment Access Identifier.

Alternate Mark Inversion (AMI)

1. Line coding format in T-1 transmission systems, whereby successive ones (marks) are
alternately inverted (sent with polarity opposite that of the preceding mark).
2. A line code that uses a ternary signal to convey binary digits; successive binary ones are
represented by signal elements normally of alternating, positive/negative polarity but equal in
amplitude, and in which binary zeros are represented by signal elements with zero amplitude
(an AT&T definition).

AMI
See Alternate Mark Inversion (AMI).
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
3AG 24622 EAAA TQZZA Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary GL-5
Issue 1 February 2010 Use pursuant to applicable agreements
Glossary

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
AMR
Alternate Mark Inversion.

ANS
Alcatel Network Systems, Inc., now known as Alcatel USA.

ANSAID
Alcatel Network Systems, Inc. equipment Access Identifier.

AOD
Automatic Offline Diagnostics.

AOW
Analog Orderwire. See Order Wire, Orderwire (OW).

AP
Administrative Processor (generic term for an APS).

APD
Avalanche Photodiode.

API
Application Programming Interface

APM
Administrative Processing System, Minor.

APP
1. Application software kit.
2. ACL Patch Panel (module).

Application-Specific Integrated Circuit (ASIC)

A chip built for a specific application and used by manufacturers to consolidate many chips into a
single package, reducing system board size and power consumption. Many video boards and
modems use ASICs. ASICs span Programmable Array Logic (PAL) devices, Electrically
Programmable Logic Devices (ELPDs), Field-programmable Gate Arrays (PPGAs), standard
cell-based devices, and full custom-designed Integrated Circuits (ICs).

APR
Alarm Processing Remote.

APS
1. Automatic Protection Switching. See Protection Switching (PS).
2. Administrative Processing System.

APSB
Automatic Protection Switching Byte. See Protection Switching (PS).

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
GL-6 Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary 3AG 24622 EAAA TQZZA
Use pursuant to applicable agreements Issue 1 February 2010
Glossary

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
APSCM
Automatic Protection Switching Channel Mismatch. See also Protection Switching (PS).

APSCONF
Automatic Protection Switching Configuration error. See also Protection Switching (PS).

APSD
Automatic Power Shutdown.

APSI
Automatic Protection Switching Inhibit. See also Protection Switching (PS).

Arrow Keys
Collective name used for up, down, left, and right cursor-moving keys, designated with
directional arrows.

AS
1. Assigned
2. Alarm Surveillance

AS&C
Alarm, Surveillance & Control. Part of the TABS protocol for the general telemetry processor.

ASAM
ATM Subscriber Access Multiplexer. (Also called Digital Subscriber Line Access Multiplexer
[DSLAM].)

ASE
Amplifier Spontaneous Emission.

ASIC
See Application-Specific Integrated Circuit (ASIC).

ASN.1
Abstract Syntax Notation One. Replacement syntax for TL1 used for machine-to-machine
communications.

Asymmetric Digital Subscriber Line (ADSL)

An evolving high-speed transmission technology originally developed by Bellcore; now
standardized by American National Standards Institute (ANSI) as T1.413; European Technical
Standards Committee (ETSI) contributed an annex to the standards to reflect European
requirements. ADSL uses existing Unshielded Twisted Pair (UTP) copper wires from the
telephone company Central Office (CO) to the subscriber premises; involves electronic equipment
(ADSL modems) at the CO and subscriber premises; and sends high-speed digital signals up and
down those copper wires, sending more information one way the other, hence the term
asymmetric.

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
3AG 24622 EAAA TQZZA Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary GL-7
Issue 1 February 2010 Use pursuant to applicable agreements
Glossary

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Asynchronous mode
Bytes are sent without clocking information. Each byte is identified by a start bit and terminated
by one or more stop bits.

Asynchronous signal
A digital signal in which there is no common clock. Timing must be recovered from information
sent within signal.

Asynchronous Transfer Mode (ATM)

A multiplexing/switching technique that organizes information into fixed-length cells with each
cell consisting of an identification header field and an information field; the transfer mode is
asynchronous in that the recurrence of cells depends on the required or instantaneous bit rate. See
also Distributed Queue Data Bus (DQDB).

ATAG
Autonomous Message Tag; an automatically generated tag for autonomous reports.

ATM
See Asynchronous Transfer Mode (ATM).

ATO
Assemble To Order.

Attribute(s)
1. Constitutes a specific property about an object.
2. The form of information items provided by the X.500 Directory Service; directory
information base consists of entries, each having one or more attributes; each attribute has a
type identifier together with one or more values.
3. MS-DOS file information, indicating whether file is read-only, hidden, or system, and
whether it has been changed since it was last backed up.

AU
Administrative Unit, SDH term.

AUD
Audible alarm.

AUG
Administrative Unit Group, SDH term.

AUI
Attachment Unit Interface.

AUXINV
Auxiliary Inventory (equipment).

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
GL-8 Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary 3AG 24622 EAAA TQZZA
Use pursuant to applicable agreements Issue 1 February 2010
Glossary

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
AWG
American Wire Gauge.

AXM
SX Administrative Cross-connect Manager Subsystem.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

B B3ZS
1. Bipolar with 3 Zero Substitution. The line code used in DS3 transmission systems. This code
follows the bipolar rule; however, when three consecutive zeroes occur, the three zeroes are
replaced with a unique code that contains bipolar violations in a defined manner.
2. Bipolar 3-Zero Substitution (DS3/STS1). See also Bipolar Signal.

B8ZS
Bipolar 8-Zero Substitution (DS1). See Bipolar Signal.

Bandwidth
Capacity of a network element allocated to a user.

BAR
Base Address Register.

Basic Rate Interface (BRI)

Two 64 Kb/s B channels and one 16 Kb/s D channel comprise BRI and yield a total of 144 Kb/s.
The B channels send data; the D channel sends signaling information for routing data coming in
over the B channels. BRI enables users to talk on the telephone and send email messages
simultaneously. BRI users must be within 3.4 miles of the Central Office (CO) offering BRI or the
telephone company would have to use repeater equipment to boost the signal. Compare with
Primary Rate Interface (PRI).

Baud
Specifies bit rate at which CPORT operates. This parameter is applicable only to USI type ports
because X.25 connections are synchronous.

Bayonet Neill Concelman (BNC)

A connector for coaxial cable such as that used for some video connections and RG58
connections. A BNC connector has a bayonet-type shell with two small knobs on the female
connector that lock into spiral slots in the male connector when it is twisted on. (Different sources
expand BNC as Bayonet Navy Connector, British Naval Connector, or Bayonet Nut Connection.)

BDLA
Bidirectional Line Amplifier. See Bidirectional Ring (Bi-Ring).

BER
See Bit Error Rate (or Ratio) (BER).

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
3AG 24622 EAAA TQZZA Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary GL-9
Issue 1 February 2010 Use pursuant to applicable agreements
Glossary

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
BER-HT
Bit Error Ratio-High Threshold. See Bit Error Rate (or Ratio) (BER).

BER-LT
Bit Error Ratio-Low Threshold. See Bit Error Rate (or Ratio) (BER).

BERL
Bit Error Ratio, Line. See Bit Error Rate (or Ratio) (BER).

BERP
Bit Error Ratio, Path. See Bit Error Rate (or Ratio) (BER).

BFL
Baffle assembly.

Bi-Ring
Bidirectional Line-Switched Ring (BLSR). See Bidirectional Ring (Bi-Ring).

Bidirectional Coupler (optical)

A device that combines transmit and receive optical signals within a single fiber.

Bidirectional Ring (Bi-Ring)

A Synchronous Optical Network (SONET) ring network configuration in which traffic between
any two nodes flows in a single path between the two nodes. The other path around the ring is
used for protection purposes, providing high reliability. Bi-rings allow reuse of bandwidth around
the ring (unlike a unidirectional ring) but are technically much more complicated to protect.

Bidirectional Switching
The protection switching scheme in which both paths of the duplex channel are switched to the
protection path when either fails.

BIP
See Parity Bit Interleaved Parity-N (BIP-N).

BIP-N
See Bit Interleaved Parity-N (BIP-N).

BIPL
Bit Interleaved Parity errors, Line. See Parity Bit Interleaved Parity-N (BIP-N).

Bipolar Signal
1. A 3-level digital signal in which logic 1 bits are pulses (typically RZ) which alternate in
polarity, and logic 0 bits are 0 volts. The resulting waveform has a dc level of 0 volts. Also
referred to as AMI.
2. A signal having two non-zero polarities. It must have two-state or three-state binary coding
scheme; is usually symmetrical with respect to zero amplitude.

Bipolar Violation (BPV)

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
GL-10 Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary 3AG 24622 EAAA TQZZA
Use pursuant to applicable agreements Issue 1 February 2010
Glossary

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
The presence of two consecutive same-polarity one bits on the T carrier line.

BIPS
Bit Interleaved Parity errors, Section. See Parity Bit Interleaved Parity-N (BIP-N).

BIST
Built-in Self Test

Bit
Binary digit; smallest unit of data in a data stream. The amount of information obtained by asking
a yes-or-no question; a computational quantity that can take on one of two values: true and false
or 0 and 1; the smallest unit of storage, sufficient to hold one bit. A bit is set if its value is true or
1, and reset or clear if its value is false or 0. Regarding setting and clearing bits: To toggle or
invert a bit changes it (from 0 to 1 or from 1 to 0).

Bit Error Rate (or Ratio) (BER)

Rate at which errors occur in a digital signal divided by the number of transmitted bits. See also
Severely Errored Seconds (SES) and Signal Fail (SF).

Bit Interleaved Parity-N (BIP-N)

Method of error monitoring. If even parity is used, the transmitting equipment generates an N-bit
code over a specified portion of the first bit of all N-bit sequences in the covered portion of the
signal, and the second bit provides even parity over the second bits of all N-bit sequences within
the specified portion, etc. Even parity is generated by setting the BIP-N bits so that there is an
even number of ones in each of all N-bit sequences including the BIP-N.

BITS
1. Building Integrated Timing Source
2. See Building Integrated Timing Supply (BITS).

Bits per Second (b/s)

The rate at which data is sent over some communication line. For example, data rate of a modem
is usually measured in kilobits per second.

BITSSYNC
Output synchronization

BKRST
Backup and Restore

BLT
Both-way Line Termination

BNC
1. A coaxial connector type commonly known by abbreviation of manufacturer
Bayonet-Neill-Concelman
2. See also Bayonet Neill Concelman (BNC).
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
3AG 24622 EAAA TQZZA Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary GL-11
Issue 1 February 2010 Use pursuant to applicable agreements
Glossary

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
BOC
Bell Operating Company

Boot, BOOT
Processor running boot code. To load and initialize the operating system on a computer. See also
Bootdisk.

Bootdisk
In reference to Operating System (OS): The magnetic disk (usually a hard disk) from which an
OS kernel is loaded (or “bootstrapped”). This second phase in system start-up is performed by a
simple bootstrap loader program held in Read-only Memory (ROM), possibly configured by data
stored in some form of writable non-volatile storage.

BPM
Binary Performance Monitoring

BPV
See Bipolar Violation (BPV).

BRDG
Multipoint Data Bridge

BRI
See Basic Rate Interface (BRI).

BSC
Basic Switch Chip

Buffer
A temporary storage device that compensates for the difference between data transmission speeds
when transferring data from one device to another

Building Integrated Timing Supply (BITS)

In North America, the clocks that provide and distribute timing to a wire line network lower
levels; known in the rest of the world as Synchronization Supply Unit (SSU).
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

C C-source
A method of protecting against power supply failure by applying the output of redundant units to
a common bus via diode-coupling.

CAL
Current Alarm List

CAMR
Centralized Autonomous Message Reporting

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
GL-12 Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary 3AG 24622 EAAA TQZZA
Use pursuant to applicable agreements Issue 1 February 2010
Glossary

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Card
A module might contain one, two, three, or more cards. The MATX101 Matrix Module (1680
OGM) is an example of a circuit pack that contains five cards. In the past, there was nearly always
one card in each module; therefore, “card” might be used when “module” was actually meant.
Components (for example, integrated circuits, resistors, capacitors, etc.) mount on the card or
Printed Wiring Board (PWB). Conductors in the PWB carry electrical current from one
component to another.

Card Presence Indication (CPI)

A distributed diode matrix structure used to allow the control system to detect the presence of
installed circuit packs in the shelf.

Card Presence Indicator (CPI)

Indicates presence or absence of a module; provides an interrupt to the shelf processor through the
Serial Communications Interface (SCI) for modules that have a microcontroller; enables shelf
processors to detect removal and/or insertion of any module (or circuit pack) in the shelf. See also
Serial Communications Interface (SCI).

CAS
Channel-Associated Signal

CASMIM
Connection and Service Management Information Model

CB
Circuit Breaker (also CKB)

CBIT
Parity monitoring. Select CBIT monitoring when operating with equipment that generates CBIT
parity to monitor signal performance.

CC
1. Communication Controller
2. See also Country Code (CC).

CCAL
Command Community Authorization Level

CCFC
Command Community Functional Category

CCL
1. See Computer Control Language (CCL).
2. Configuration Control Letter
3. See Coral Common LISP (CCL).

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
3AG 24622 EAAA TQZZA Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary GL-13
Issue 1 February 2010 Use pursuant to applicable agreements
Glossary

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
CCLK
Composite Clock

CCM
Cross-connect Map

CCN
Cross-connect Network

CD
See Chromatic Dispersion (CD).

CDA
Central Clock Distribution (circuit pack). A circuit pack that distributes 24 modulated 155.52
MHz reference clocks to Clock Distribution B circuit packs.

CDAC
Custom-Defined Alarms and Controls

CDB
Clock Distribution (module). A module that regenerates and distributes 24 modulated 155.52
MHz clocks to their associated user circuit packs.

CDE
Common Desktop Environment

CDM
See Code Division Multiple Access (CDMA).

CDU
Clock Distribution Unit (module)

Central Office (CO)

Typically called C-O; a telephone company facility where subscriber lines are joined to switching
equipment for connecting other local and long-distance subscribers to each other; sometimes it
means wire center in which there are several switching exchanges. The overseas term for CO is
“public exchange”.

CEV
See Controlled Environmental Vault (CEV).

CFA
Carrier Failure Alarm

CFC
1. Clock and Frame Converter
2. Clock Frame Circuit

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
GL-14 Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary 3AG 24622 EAAA TQZZA
Use pursuant to applicable agreements Issue 1 February 2010
Glossary

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
CGA
Carrier Group Alarm

Checksum
The sum of a group of data items used for error checking. Checksum is computed by the sending
computer based upon an algorithm that counts the bits going out in a packet. The check digit is
then sent to the other end as the packet tail (or trailer). As the packet is being received, the
receiving computer goes through the same algorithm. If the receiving computer goes through the
same algorithm, and if the check digit it comes up with is the same as the one received, all is well.
Otherwise, it requests the packet be sent again.

CHIME
Circuit Installation and Maintenance Package

Chromatic Dispersion (CD)

The generally known form of dispersion found in single-mode fiber; determined by the CD
characteristics of the fiber; temporal in nature, related only to the optical signal wavelength. An
optical receiver is capable of accepting a certain amount of dispersion broadening, essentially
where individual pulses cannot be distinguished. Because dispersion is the broadening of a
transmit pulse of finite width, the narrower the transmit pulse, the more the dispersion that can be
tolerated in a system. A transmitter with a narrower spectral width allows the system to tolerate
more dispersion. Effects of CD are measured in PICO-seconds (ps). The CD coefficient that
describes fiber is given in terms of ps/nm-km. CD tolerance of a system is determined by the
transmitter being used and is given in ps/nm. Like attenuation, the CD characteristics of fiber are
wavelength dependent.

CID
1. Calling address Identification
2. Communications Interface Device
3. Connect Identification Device
4. Connection Identifier
5. Craft Interface Device

CIF
DS3/STS1 Customer Interface

CIM
Communications Interface Module

CIMAP
Circuit Installation and Maintenance Package

CIOP Circuit Pack

Coaxial Input/Output panel for EC1/DS3 terminations; representation of the equipment that can
be inserted or assigned to a slot within a shelf; also known as CIOP module.

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
3AG 24622 EAAA TQZZA Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary GL-15
Issue 1 February 2010 Use pursuant to applicable agreements
Glossary

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Circuit Pack
Representation of equipment that can be inserted or assigned to a slot within a shelf; the
SYNC601 Master Sync is an example of a circuit pack that contains one card, otherwise known as
a Printed Wiring Board (PWB). “Module” is the name used for decades by Alcatel, Rockwell
International, and probably Collins Radio. “Circuit pack” came into use as the result of a
customer requirement.

CIT
Craft Interface Terminal (also known as user interface terminal)

CIU
Communication Interface Unit (sometimes referred to as Customer Interface Unit).

CKB
Circuit Breaker (also called CB)

Cladding
1. The transparent material, usually glass, that surrounds the optical fiber core. Cladding glass
has a lower refractive index than core glass. As the light signal travels down the central core
transmission path, it naturally spreads out (modal dispersion). The cladding causes the light to
be reflected back into the central core, thereby serving to maintain the signal strength over a
long distance.
2. When referring to a metallic cable, a process of covering with a metal (usually achieved by
pressure rolling, extruding, drawing, or swaging) until a bond is achieved.

CLEI code
Common Language Equipment Identification code (assigned by Bell Communications Research
Inc. [Bellcore]).

CLFI
Common Language Facility Identifier

CLK
Clock

CLLI
Common Language Location Identifier. Indicates the location of circuit packs at a network
element.

CLNP
Connectionless-node Network Layer Protocol. OSI network layer protocol that does not require a
circuit to be established before data is transmitted.

CLNS
Connectionless Network Service

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
GL-16 Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary 3AG 24622 EAAA TQZZA
Use pursuant to applicable agreements Issue 1 February 2010
Glossary

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
CLO
Command Lockout

Clock (CLK)
When used alone, refers to a primary synchronizing signal. It may appear with a subscript to refer
to the synchronizing signal on a particular signal path.

Close Button
A 1301 Network Manager action button that closes the screen without sending any commands to
the network element.

CMD
Circuit Breaker (also called CKB)

CMI
Coded Mark Inversion

CMIP
See Common Management Information Protocol (CMIP).

CMIS
See Common Management Information Services (CMIS).

CMISE
See Common Management Information Service Element (CMISE).

CMOS
Complementary Metal-Oxide Semiconductor. High-speed, low-power solid state component.

CMU
Master Clock (module)

CNM
Customer Network Management

CO
See Central Office (CO).

COA
Craft Orderwire and Alarms

Code Division Multiple Access (CDMA)

A form of multiplexing where the transmitter encodes the signal using a pseudo-random sequence
that the receiver also knows and can use to decode the received signal. Each different random
sequence corresponds to a different communication channel. (CDMA is also referred to as “spread
spectrum”.) Motorola uses CDMA for digital cellular phones.

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
3AG 24622 EAAA TQZZA Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary GL-17
Issue 1 February 2010 Use pursuant to applicable agreements
Glossary

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Code Violation
Violation of a coding rule; for example, the Alternate Mark Inversion (AMI) code is corrupted by
a Bipolar Violation (BPV).

Coding Violation (CV)

1. A violation in the coding of a signal over a digital circuit; the count of BIT-8 errors. See also
Code Violation.
2. Checksum Value. See also Checksum.
3. Combined Voice. Old Bell-Speak for single-line phone.

COM
Communications port (usually COM1 or COM2, referring to communications port #1 or port #2
on a personal computer [PC]).

Command Language
A set of procedural operators with a related syntax to indicate the functions to be performed by an
operating system.

Commands
Short-term maintenance controls such as loopback and manual switch.

Common Management Information Protocol (CMIP)

The Network Management (NM) standard for Open Systems Interconnection (OSI) networks.
NM information services are used by peer processes to exchange information and commands for
the purpose of NM. CMIS defines a message set and the structure and content of the messages
such that they might be used by “open” systems; can exchange information between an
application and a management station; is similar to Simple Network Management Protocol
(SNMP), but more powerful.

Common Management Information Service Element (CMISE)

CMISE functionality is provided by Common Management Information Protocol (CMIP) in
transporting network management information. Bellcore-specified protocol for communication
between network elements. A wireless telecommunications term.

Common Management Information Services (CMIS)

Network management information services are used by peer processes to exchange information
and commands for network management. CMIS defines a message set and the structure and
content of the messages such that they might be used by “open” systems. In concept, it is similar
to Simple Network Management Protocol (SNMP), but more powerful and more complex.

Communication Processor Card (CPC)

Provides interfaces to Operations Support System (OSS) and Transaction Language (TL) and to
Data Communications Channel (DCC), Local Communications Network (LCN), and X.25
networks; operates Communication Interface Unit (CIU) shelf.

Complex Programmable Logic Device (CPLD)

A programmable circuit similar to Field-programmable Gate Array (FPGA), but generally on a
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
GL-18 Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary 3AG 24622 EAAA TQZZA
Use pursuant to applicable agreements Issue 1 February 2010
Glossary

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
smaller scale; invented by Xilinx Inc. See also Field-programmable Gate Array (FPGA).

Computer Control Language (CCL)

English-like query language based on COLINGO, for IBM 1401 and IBM 1410.

Concatenated Synchronous Transport Signal Level N (STS-Nc)

An STS-N Line layer signal in which the STS envelope capacities from the N STS1s have been
combined to carry an STS-Nc synchronous payload envelope (SPE), which must be transported as
a single entity, not as several separate signals.

Concatenated Virtual Tributary (VTx-Nc)

A set of Virtual Tributaries (VTs) in which the VT envelope capacities from N VTxs have been
combined to carry a VTx-Nc, which must be transported as a single entity, not as several separate
signals.

Concatenation
A Synchronous Optical Network/Synchronous Digital Hierarchy (SONET/SDH) mechanism for
allocating contiguous bandwidth for transport of a payload greater than Synchronous Transport
Signal Level 1 (STS-1) (the electrical equivalent Optical Carrier Level 1 [OC-1], 51.84 Mb/s; T-3
plus Synchronous Optical Network (SONET) overhead). By using concatenation pointers,
multiple OC-1s can be linked end-to-end to provide contiguous bandwidth. The same approach is
used in higher SONET OC levels. Concatenation applications include bandwidth-intensive video
and high-speed data. See also Synchronous Optical Network (SONET) and Synchronous Digital
Hierarchy (SDH).

Condition Type
Reported fault or event type

Configured size
System configuration size as defined in database

Configuring
The act of defining the features to be contained on a module, shelf, or system.

CONP
Connection-oriented Network Protocol. OSI protocol that provides connection-oriented operation
to upper-layer protocols.

CONS
Connection-oriented Network Service

Control Menu
Located in the upper-left corner of each windows screen; contains commands that change the size
and position, and close the application window. Double-clicking the mouse can close the
application window. Control menu commands are also accessible through the keyboard.

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
3AG 24622 EAAA TQZZA Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary GL-19
Issue 1 February 2010 Use pursuant to applicable agreements
Glossary

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Control Points
Relay contact closures provided by the system so that it may cause electrical control circuits
exterior to itself to be activated under software control.

Controlled Environmental Vault (CEV)

An underground room that houses electronic and/or optical equipment under controlled
temperature and humidity.

Coral Common LISP (CCL)

A dialect of LISt Processing (LISP) language defined by a consortium of companies brought
together in 1981 by the Defence Advanced Research Projects Agency (DARPA). Common Lisp is
a large, complex language; it features lexical binding, data structures using destruct and shift,
closures, multiple values, types using declare and a variety of numerical types.

CORBA
Common Object Request Broker Architecture

Correlation Tag (CTAG)

All commands issued to the network element using TL1 are given a correlation tag; response to
the command has the same correlation tag.

COSE
Common Open System Environment

Country Code (CC)

Identifies the country of the called party at an international telephone number; CC can be one,
two, or three digits. An international phone number consists of the CC and the Nationally
Significant Number (NSN) of up to 11 digits (for a total v12 digits) until December 31, 1996,
after which the CC stays at up to three digits and the NSN goes to up to 14 digits (for a total v15
digits).

CPC
See Communication Processor Card (CPC).

CPD
Circuit Provisioning Data

CPE
1. C-bit Parity Error
2. Customer Premise Equipment

CPI

CPI
See Card Presence Indicator (CPI).

CPLD
See Complex Programmable Logic Device (CPLD).
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
GL-20 Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary 3AG 24622 EAAA TQZZA
Use pursuant to applicable agreements Issue 1 February 2010
Glossary

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
CPORT, C port
Control Port that interfaces printers, terminals, and X.25 communications links

CPR number
Continuing Property Record number

CPU
Central Processing Unit (module)

CR
1. Critical. See also Alarm/Condition Codes.
2. Change Request

Craft Orderwire Alarms (COA)

A communication part on a network element.

CRC
See Cyclic Redundancy Check (CRC).

CRI
Critical alarm. See also Alarm/Condition Codes.

Cross-connect
Connection point for DSX transmit/receive signals with defined characteristics.

CRS
Cross-connect

CRT
1. Cathode Ray Tube
2. Customer Response Team

CS
Center Stage.

CSDB
Command Security DataBase

CSES
Consecutive Severely Errored Second

CSU
1. Channel Service Unit
2. Customer Service Unit

CSX
Compact SONET Cross-connect System
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
3AG 24622 EAAA TQZZA Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary GL-21
Issue 1 February 2010 Use pursuant to applicable agreements
Glossary

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
CT
Craft Terminal

CTAG
See Correlation Tag (CTAG).

CV
See Coding Violation (CV).

CVL
Coding Violation count, Line. See Coding Violation (CV).

CVP
Coding Violation count, Path. See Coding Violation (CV).

CVS
Coding Violation count, Section; detected by section parity monitoring. See also Parity Check and
Coding Violation (CV).

Cyclic Redundancy Check (CRC)

A number derived from a block of data and stored or transmitted with the data to detect any errors
in transmission; similar to a checksum, but more complicated. A CRC is often calculated by
adding words or bytes of the data. The receiving card recalculates the CRC from the data received
and compares it to the value originally transmitted; if the values are different, it indicates a
transmission error. The CRC is called redundant because it adds no significant information to the
transmission itself.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

D D&E
A particular type of communications terminal device per RS-232 standards.

DAC
Digital-to-Analog Converter

DAT
Digital Audio Tape

Data Communications Channel (DCC)

Synchronous Optical Network (SONET) overhead reserved for communication between network
elements. The channel transports signals from one data processing device location to another data
processing device location.

Data Communications Equipment (DCE)

The devices and connections of a communications network that connect the communication
circuit between data source and destination (the Data Terminal Equipment [DTE]). A modem is
the most common DCE. Before data can be transmitted over a modem, the Data Terminal Ready
(DTR) signal must be active. DTR tells the DCE that the DTE is ready to transmit and receive.
DCE and DTE are usually connected by an RS-232 serial line. It is necessary to distinguish these
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
GL-22 Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary 3AG 24622 EAAA TQZZA
Use pursuant to applicable agreements Issue 1 February 2010
Glossary

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
two devices because their connectors must be wired differently if a “straight-through” cable (pin 1
to pin 1, pin 2 to pin 2, etc.) is used. DCE should have a female connector and should transmit on
pin two and receive on pin three. Many modems are “DTE” according to the original standard.

Data Link (DL)

A Data Link Control Identifier (DLCI) is a channel number is attached to data frames to tell the
network how to route the data.

Data Terminal Equipment (DTE)

A device acting as the source and/or destination of data and controlling the communication
channel; includes terminals, computers, protocol converters, and multiplexers; usually connected
by means of an RS-232 serial line to Data Communication Equipment (DCE), typically a modem.
It is necessary to distinguish these two device types because their connectors must be wired
differently if a “straight-through” cable (pin 1 to pin 1, pin 2 to pin 2 etc.) is used.

Database Change (DBCHG)

When the network element database is changed as a result of a user command, an autonomous
DBCHG report is generated to notify users of the change. These messages are used to keep all
users synchronized to the actual database contents.

Datapath Module
A matrix module, sync module, or Digital Signal Module (DSM). These modules/cards cannot
communicate with an IFS101 Interface Server installed in the multiflex shelf and strapped as
master (MIFS) module because they are not on the Internal Local Area Network (ILAN) bus.

Dataphone Digital Service (DDS)

The first private-line digital service offered by AT&T, with data rates typically at 2.4, 4.8, 9.6, and
56 kilobits per second. DDS is now part of AT&T Accunet family of services. Most Local
Exchange Carriers (LECs) and IntereXchange Carriers (IXC) offer similar services.

DB
Database

DBCHG
See Database Change (DBCHG).

DCC
See Data Communications Channel (DCC).

DCE
1. See Data Communication Equipment (DCE).
2. Data Circuit-terminating Equipment

DCF
Dispersion Compensation Fiber

DCN
Data Communications Network
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
3AG 24622 EAAA TQZZA Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary GL-23
Issue 1 February 2010 Use pursuant to applicable agreements
Glossary

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
DCP
Data Collection Processor

DCS
Digital Cross-connect System

DDFS
Digital Direct Frequency Synthesizer

DDS
1. See Digital Data Service (DDS). The class of service offered by telecommunications
companies for transmitting digital data as opposed to voice.
2. Digital Data System
3. See Dataphone Digital Service (DDS).

DEACT
Deactivate

Demux
Demultiplex (-er, -ing)

Dense Wavelength Division Multiplex (DWDM)

A high-speed version of Wave Division Multiplex (WDM); increases capacity of Synchronous
Optical Network (SONET) fiber-optic transmission systems through the multiplexing of multiple
wavelengths of light; uses optical channel spacing on the order of 1.6 nm (200 GHz) and is
compatible with the International Telecommunications Union (ITU) channel plan. Wavelength
tolerance for these channels is ±0.3 nm. This permits as many as 16 channels in the optical band
from 1530 nm to 1560 nm. A SONET term. See also Narrow-Band Wavelength Division
Multiplex (NB-WDM).

DFB-SLM
Distributed Feedback - Single Longitudinal Mode (laser diode)

DG
Drop Group

DGN
Diagnostics

DHCP
Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol

DID
Directory Identifier

DIF
Desktop Integration Framework

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
GL-24 Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary 3AG 24622 EAAA TQZZA
Use pursuant to applicable agreements Issue 1 February 2010
Glossary

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
DIG
Digroup

Digital Data Service (DDS)

The class of service offered by telecommunications companies for transmitting digital data as
opposed to voice.

Direct Entry
Function that enables users to interact with a network element in TL1 form.

Dispersion
Dispersion is the process whereby optical pulses are widened as they travel along an optical fiber.
It is caused by the different wavelength components of a light signal of finite spectral width
traveling down the fiber at different velocities. The effect is a pulse at the terminating end of a
fiber that is wider than the original pulse that was transmitted. If the amount of widening is
excessive the individual pulses will not be distinguishable by the receiver. See also Chromatic
Dispersion and Polarization Mode Dispersion (PMD).

Distributed Queue Data Bus (DQDB)

A multiplexing/switching technique similar to Asynchronous Transfer Mode (ATM) that uses
IEEE 802.6 PLCP.

Distributed Queue Dual Bus (DQDB)

The Metropolitan Area Network (MAN) access technique defined by IEEE 802.6 standard for
Switched Multimegabit Data Service (SMDS); based on Queued Packet Synchronous Exchange
(QPSX); operates by maintaining a queue at each station to determine when the station may
access its dual buses, which provide bidirectional access to its dual buses. Dual buses provide
bidirectional transmission between originating and terminating stations with excellent, end-to-end
congestion control ensured. DQDB consists of two unidirectional buses connected as an open ring
(for example, each bus is not directly interconnected). It provides for full-duplex operation
between any two nodes. See also Asynchronous Transfer Mode (ATM).

DL
See Data Link (DL).

DLMAP
Data Link Map

DLT
Download Tool

DMA
Direct Memory Access

DMAC
1. Direct Memory Access Control
2. Direct Memory Access Controller

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
3AG 24622 EAAA TQZZA Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary GL-25
Issue 1 February 2010 Use pursuant to applicable agreements
Glossary

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
DMACS
Distributed Monitoring And Control System (an AT&T system definition standard).

DMI
Drop Module Interface

DNM
Distributed Network Management

DNS
Domain Naming System. Used in the Internet for translating names of network nodes into
addresses.

Domain
According to Management Information System (MIS) use, domain is the part of a computer
network in which data processing resources are under common control. In Microsoft™
networking, a domain is a collection of computers sharing a common domain database and
security policy that is stored on a Windows NT™ server domain controller. Each domain has a
unique name.

DOW
Digital Orderwire

DP
Datapath

DPLL
Digital Phase-Locked Loop

DPRAM
Dual-Port Random Access Memory

DQDB
1. Digital Queue Dual Bus
2. See Distributed Queue Data Bus (DQDB).
3. See Distributed Queue Dual Bus (DQDB).

DRAM
Dynamic Random Access Memory

Drop
Individual connections (sometimes called nodes) on a multipoint (also called multidrop) circuit.

Drop Side Signal

A traffic path connecting to the tributary side of the network element; path can be electrical (such
as DS3 or STS1) or optical (such as OC3 or OC12) and can include Synchronous Optical
Network (SONET) overhead information/access. Specific capabilities and format are product and

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
GL-26 Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary 3AG 24622 EAAA TQZZA
Use pursuant to applicable agreements Issue 1 February 2010
Glossary

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
feature dependent.

DS0 Path-Terminating Equipment (DS0 PTE)

Network elements that multiplex/demultiplex the DS0 channels. DS0 PTEs interpret and either
modify or create the DS0 signaling information necessary to transport the DS0 channels.

DS0 PTE
Digital Signal, level 0 Path-Terminating Equipment

DS0, DS-0
Digital Signal, level 0; pronounced “D-S zero”; a DS0 is 64,000 bits per second (b/s) (64
kilobits), equal to one voice conversation digitized under Pulse Code Modulation (PCM).
Twenty-four DS0s (24 64 kb/s) equal one DS1, which is T-1 or 1.544 million b/s.

DS1
Digital Signal level 1 (1.544 Mb/s). Can contain 24 DS0s.

DS1CP
Connectorized input/output panel for DS1 terminations.

DS1WW
Wire-wrap input/output panel for DS1 terminations.

DS2
Digital Signal level 2 (6.312 Mb/s). Can contain 96 DS0s.

DS3
Digital Signal, level 3. Bell System-compatible 44.736 Mb/s digital signal format. See AT&T
Compatibility Bulletin 119 (CB-119) (formerly Technical Advisory 34); (T3 equivalent). Can
contain 28 DS1s. See ANSI T1LB-117 for details.

DS4NA
Digital Signal Level 4 North America

DSB
DCC Server Board

DSF
Dispersion-shifted Fiber

DSI
DS1 Interface (module)

DSK
1. Disk unit
2. Hard Disk Drive (module)

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
3AG 24622 EAAA TQZZA Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary GL-27
Issue 1 February 2010 Use pursuant to applicable agreements
Glossary

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
DSM
1. Digital Signal Module. Modules that support optical facilities include OC192, OC48, OC12,
OC3, and DS3.
2. Distributed System Management

DSP
1. Digital Signal Parameter
2. Digital Signal Processing
3. Domain-specific Port

DSX
Digital Signal Cross-connect

DSx
Digital Signal of an unspecified rate

DSX-1
Digital Signal, level 1 cross-connect

DSX-3
Bell System-compatible Digital Signal cross-connect point for equipment that generates or uses
DS3 signals. This point has defined wave shapes and voltage levels, in accordance with American
National Standard T1.102-1987 (formerly AT&T Compatibility Bulletin 119).

DTAU
Digital Test Access Unit

DTE
See Data Terminal Equipment (DTE).

DTMF
Dual-Tone Multifrequency

Duplex (DX)
Simultaneous communication in both directions between two locations.

DUS
Do not Use for Synchronization

DWDM
See Dense Wavelength Division Multiplex (DWDM).

DX
Duplex configuration. See Duplex (DX).

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
GL-28 Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary 3AG 24622 EAAA TQZZA
Use pursuant to applicable agreements Issue 1 February 2010
Glossary

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Dx, DEMUX
Demultiplex direction, the tributary output signal, arriving on the optical carrier and leaving
through the tributary (electrical) outbound data stream.

DXC
Digital Cross-connect Control

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

E E2A
An AT&T alarm and control interface specification.

EC
Electrical Container

EC1
1. Electrical Carrier, level 1
2. Electrical Connection Level 1, STS-1 line and section object entity (electrical STSX-1)

ECL
Emitter-Coupled Logic

EDFA
Erbium-Doped Fiber Amplifier

EDFFA
Erbium-Doped Fluoride Fiber Amplifier

EDSX
Electronic Digital Signal Cross-connect

EEPROM
Electronically Erasable Programmable Read-only Memory

EF
Environmental Factor

EFD
Event Forwarding Discriminator

EIA
Electronic Industries Association

Element
Port number

ELF
Event Log File

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
3AG 24622 EAAA TQZZA Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary GL-29
Issue 1 February 2010 Use pursuant to applicable agreements
Glossary

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
ELM
Event and Log Manager

EM
Element Management

EMA
Element Management Application

Embedded Facility
A lower level (for example, DS1) digital signal transported in a higher level signal. Examples are
a DS1 signal embedded in a DS3, or a DS3 embedded in an STS-1 facility.

EMI
Electromagnetic Interference

EML
1. Element Management Layer
2. Equipment Management Layer

EMS
Element Management System

End System (ES)

A system where an Asynchronous Transfer Mode (ATM) connection is terminated or initiated. An
originating ES initiates the ATM connection; terminating ES terminates the ATM connection.
Operations, Administration, and Maintenance (OAM) cells can be generated.

End System to Intermediate System (ES-IS)

The Open Systems Interconnection (OSI) protocol used for router detection and address
resolution.

ENE
End Network Element

Entity
Refers to anything within XXX that has a service state associated with it; this includes equipment
and facilities.

EOB
Electrical-Optical Converter (module)

EOC
1. Electrical-Optical Converter (shelf)
2. Embedded Operations Channel; implies Section Overhead.
3. Extended Operating temperature Condition

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
GL-30 Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary 3AG 24622 EAAA TQZZA
Use pursuant to applicable agreements Issue 1 February 2010
Glossary

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
EOCL
Embedded Operation Channel failure, Line

EP3
DS3 Interface (module)

EPROM
Erasable Programmable Read-only Memory

EQPT
See Equipment (EQPT)

Equipment (EQPT)
Electronic or mechanical devices at network nodes where end users are connected to
communications network

Equipped size
Total amount of hardware equipped within some maximum port capacity. Equipped size must be
less than or equal to configured (or wired) size.

Equipping
The act of installing a plug-in module into a shelf and declaring use of that module to the system.
See also In Service (IS) and Out of Service (OOS).

Erbium-Doped Fiber Amplifier (EDFA)

The dominant method for signal amplification in long-haul light wave transmission systems.
EDFAs differ from the normal method regenerative or electro-optic repeaters in that light does not
have to be converted to an electrical signal, amplified, then converted back to light. EDFAs are
not frequency dependent, so they allow bandwidth upgrades (within) limits without replacing the
entire transmission systems. Undersea transmission systems use EDFA technology.

Errored Second (ES)

A second during which a Coding Violation (CV) occurs.

ES
1. End Stage
2. See Errored Second (ES).
3. See End System (ES).

ES-IS
See End System to Intermediate System (ES-IS).

ES1
STS-1 Interface (module)

ESA
DS1 Adapter (module)

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
3AG 24622 EAAA TQZZA Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary GL-31
Issue 1 February 2010 Use pursuant to applicable agreements
Glossary

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
ESCP
Errored Seconds-CP-bit Path

ESD
Electrostatic-Sensitive Device. A circuit component, such as CMOS integrated circuit, that is
prone to damage from static electricity. See also ESS.

ESF
See Extended Superframe (ESF).

ESF
1. Extended Superframe Format. DS1 signal framing format consisting of 24 frames. Each
frame contains a payload of 24 channels plus 1 overhead bit.
2. See also Extended Superframe (ESF).

ESF-FDL
Extended Superframe Format-Facility Data Link. A 4 kb/s data link embedded in the DS1
overhead bits.

ESL
Errored Second, Line. See Errored Second (ES)

ESP
Errored Second, Path. See Errored Second (ES)

ESS
1. Electrostatic-Sensitive Device. A circuit component, such as CMOS integrated circuit, that is
prone to damage from static electricity. Also ESS.
2. Errored Second, Section. See Errored Second (ES)

ESW
Excessive Switching

EXBER
Excessive Bit Error Rate. See Bit Error Rate (or Ratio) (BER) and Superframe (SF).

EXNFF
Excessive Number of Failed Facilities
Expansion. Increase of system switching capacity by addition of hardware and/or software

Expansion
Increase of system switching capacity by addition of hardware and/or software.

Extended Superframe (ESF)

One of two possible framing patterns for a DS1 signal. ESF has an extra channel that can pass
synchronization messages; the Superframe (SF) cannot.

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
GL-32 Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary 3AG 24622 EAAA TQZZA
Use pursuant to applicable agreements Issue 1 February 2010
Glossary

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
EXZ
Excessive Zeros; a performance primitive for DS1 facilities.

Eye Diagram
A graphic presentation formed by the superimposition of the waveforms of all possible pulse
sequences.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

F F3
Fractional T3

Facility
1. The uni-direction external data interfaces with Alcatel equipment; possible facilities include
OC-M, STS-N, STS-Nc, and DSn; each has an associated direction to distinguish between
transmit and receive.
2. Lines and paths between network elements and connecting network element to DS3 network

FACTERM
Facility/Circuit TERMination equipment failure

FAD
1. Facility Access Digroup. Test access port component. One FAD is associated with equipment
side of connection and the other FAD is associated with facility side of connection.
2. Functional Access Domain

FBE
Frame Bit Error. An error on an incoming DS3 signal detected and reported by the performance
monitor.

FC
Failure Count

FC/PC
A specific type of fiber-optic cable connector.

FCC
Federal Communications Commission

FCP
Failed Count-Path

FDDI
Fiber Distributed Data Interface

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
3AG 24622 EAAA TQZZA Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary GL-33
Issue 1 February 2010 Use pursuant to applicable agreements
Glossary

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
FDL
1. Facility Data Link
2. See Frame Data Link (FDL).

FDL
Facility Data Link. An overhead channel in DS1 ESF framing format providing reliability
information

FDLPM
Facility Data Link Performance Monitoring

FDM
See Frequency Division Multiplexing (FDM).

FDN
Fully Distinguished Name

FE
Far-End

FEAC
Far-End Alarm and Control. Channel bit used in C-bit formatting for status and control
communications.

FEBE
Far-End Block Error. Channel bit used in C-bit formatting for performance monitoring event.

FEND
Far End

FERF
Far-End Receive Failure

FES
Frame Errored Seconds

FFP
Fast Facility Protection

FFT1
Fast Facility Protection Threshold 1

FFT2
Fast Facility Protection Threshold 2

FFT3
Fast Facility Protection Threshold 3

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
GL-34 Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary 3AG 24622 EAAA TQZZA
Use pursuant to applicable agreements Issue 1 February 2010
Glossary

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
FG, FGND
Frame Ground

FI
Fault Isolation

Fiber Optic Cable

The core of the fiber optic cable is made of very pure glass; it is surrounded by four protective
layers, given here from the core out: cladding, buffer, dielectric strength member, and the
polyvinyl chloride (PVC) subunit jacket.

FIC
Frame Identification Code. Identifies the DS1 within a building.

Field-programmable Gate Array (FPGA)

Used on some cards to modify hardware operation through software, rather than physically
changing the hardware on the card; logic network can be programmed into the device after its
manufacture. An FPGA consists of an array of logic elements. Most FPGAs are reprogrammable
because their logic functions and interconnect are defined by Random Access Memory (RAM)
cells; others can be programmed only once, retaining programming permanently. FPGAs have
enabled development of logic emulators. See also Complex Programmable Logic Device (CPLD).

FIFO
First In, First Out

FIT
Failures In Time: 1 billion hours (Failures per billion hours).

Fixed Stuff (R-Bits/Bytes)

Fixed stuff (R) bits and bytes compensate for the differences between the bandwidth available in
the STS1 and Virtual Tributary (VT) synchronous payload envelopes and the bandwidth required
for the actual payload mappings (for example, DS1, DS1C, DS2, DS3, etc.). They facilitate
interworking with existing transmission systems or allow interworking between fixed and floating
VTs. R-bits and bytes have no defined value. The receiver ignores the value of these bits/bytes
(except for BIP-8 calculation/verification).

FLEXCOM
A trademark of Bellcore.

FLT
Fault

FM
Fault Manager

FMBIT
Parity monitoring. Monitors total path performance and provides a true indication of errors from
point of inception to point of monitoring.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
3AG 24622 EAAA TQZZA Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary GL-35
Issue 1 February 2010 Use pursuant to applicable agreements
Glossary

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Format
Refers to basic structure and arrangement or order of elements in a command or data.

FP
Fabry-Perot (laser diode)

FP-MLM
Fabry-Perot-Multilongitudinal Mode (laser)

FPE
Frame Parity Error

FPGA
1. Fused Programmable Gate Array
2. See also Field-programmable Gate Array (FPGA).

FPI
Fast Protection Interrupt

FPT
Full Pass-Through

Frame
A sequence of bits preceded by or followed by a valid framing bit

Frame Data Link (FDL)

A message channel in the overhead of a DS1 Extended Superframe (ESF) signal that can relay
clock-quality information.

Frame ground
The ground reference provided by the metal rack structure; also referred to as rack ground. Tied
to CO ground bus at top of each rack.

FRCD
Forced

Frequency Division Multiplexing (FDM)

The simultaneous transmission of multiple separate signals through a shared medium (such as a
wire, optical fiber or light beam) by modulating, at the transmitter, the separate signals into
separable frequency bands, and adding those results linearly either before transmission or within
the medium. While combined, all signals can be amplified, conducted, translated in frequency,
and routed toward a destination as a single signal, resulting in economies (the motivation for
multiplexing). Apparatus at the receiver separates the multiplexed signals by frequency passing or
rejecting filters and individually demodulating the results appropriately for the modulation
scheme used for that band or group. Bands are joined to form groups, and groups can then be
joined into larger groups, a technique is common only in large and sophisticated systems and is
not a necessary part of FDM. Transmitters and receivers need not be close to each other.

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
GL-36 Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary 3AG 24622 EAAA TQZZA
Use pursuant to applicable agreements Issue 1 February 2010
Glossary

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
FSBE
Frame Synchronization Bit Error

FSS
First Stage Switch

FTP
File Transfer Protocol. An IP-based file transfer protocol.

FTS
Fiber Transmission System

Full Duplex
1. Independent, simultaneous communication in both directions between two locations.
2. Standard 2-way connection.

Full-Duplex Transmission
1. Simultaneous two-way independent transmission in both directions. Compare with
Half-Duplex Transmission.
2. Describes terminals in the echoplex modem.

FWHM
Full Width, Half Maximum. A measure of the spectral width of the optical signal.

FWK
Framework (ALMAP)

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

G GAP
Generic Alarm Proxy

Gateway Communications Functions

Functions to facilitate operations communications between two communicating entities across
dissimilar subnetworks. Examples include concentration, message routing and relaying (Network
Layer), and application layer protocol conversion and/or message translation. See also Mediation
Functions.

GC
Generic Component

GDL
Green Data Link

GDMO
Generic Description of Managed Objects

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
3AG 24622 EAAA TQZZA Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary GL-37
Issue 1 February 2010 Use pursuant to applicable agreements
Glossary

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
GEM
Generic Element Manager

Generic upgrade
Software update from one release to the next. Releases must not be skipped when performing a
generic upgrade.

GLO
Green Lockout

GM
General Market

GND (or Gnd)

Ground

GNE
Gateway Network Element

GOS
Grade of Service

Graphical User Interface (GUI)

This interface supports applications that consist of a series of rectangular presentation regions
called windows. Each window displays another application.

Grooming
The process of moving traffic from one point to another.

Growth
Increasing system port capacity

GTI
Generic Transport Interface

GTIO
Optical Generic Transport Interface

GTP
General Telemetry Processor

GTS
Generic Test System

GUI
See Graphical User Interface (GUI).

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
GL-38 Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary 3AG 24622 EAAA TQZZA
Use pursuant to applicable agreements Issue 1 February 2010
Glossary

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

H HAL
Hixtorical Alarm List

Half duplex
Standard 1-way connection

Half-Duplex Transmission
A circuit designed for data transmission in both directions, but not at the same time. Telex is an
example of a half-duplex system, as is speaking on with most speaker-phones. Compare with
Full-Duplex Transmission.

HALog
Historical Alarm Log

HD Repeater
High Density Repeater

HDB
Hard Disk Backup

HDLC
High-level Data Link Control. Used on the bus that connects the Shelf Processor Card (SPC) with
its Datapath (DP) cards on the same shelf.

HDLC-NRC
High-level Data Link Control-Normal Response Control

HDLC-NRM
High-level Data Link Control-Normal Response Mode

Head End
The point where the line overhead is inserted. (Tail end describes the point where the line
overhead is terminated.) A central control device required within some Local Area Network/Area
Network (LAN/MAN) systems to provide such centralized functions as remodulation, retiming,
message accountability, contention control, diagnostic control, and access.

HIF
High-speed InterFace

HLD
High-level Design

HLDOVER
See Holdover.

HMI
Human Machine Interface
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
3AG 24622 EAAA TQZZA Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary GL-39
Issue 1 February 2010 Use pursuant to applicable agreements
Glossary

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
HMU
23 Muldem (module)

HOD
Hour of Day

Holdover
A mode in which an oscillator that was previously tracking a reference attempts to maintain the
last-known frequency instead of continuing to track. Transition to Holdover could occur for a
variety of reasons, including failure on a reference or a manual switch.

HPSC
High-Performance System Controller

HRC
Hekimian React Compatibility

HS
High Speed

HSS
High-speed Shelf

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

I I-LAN
Intra-System 10BASE-T Local Area Network

I/O
See Input/Output (I/O).

IBFEC
In-Band Forward Error Correction

ICL
Interface Control Link. An RS-485 signal level bus for communication between master and slave
configurations from a satellite processor multitapped transmission media; link speed is 6.25 MHz;
consists of receive data, transmit data, clock, bus enable and copy active.

ICL(d)
Interface Control Link (differential). An RS-485 signal level bus for alarm register read/write
from the RSP and PDU: multitapped transmission media; link speed is 6.25 MHz;1 consists of
receive data, transmit data, clock, and bus enable.

ICM
Intelligent Communications Module (circuit pack)

ICS
Item Change Status
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
GL-40 Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary 3AG 24622 EAAA TQZZA
Use pursuant to applicable agreements Issue 1 February 2010
Glossary

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
ID
Identification

ID/NSAP
Identification/Network Service Access Point

IDL
Interface Definition Language

IDMA
Independent Direct Memory Access

IEC
1. Incoming Error Count
2. International Electrotechnical Commission

IFS
InterFace Server module

IGFET
Insulated Gate Field Effect Transistor

IIC
Inter-Integrated Circuit

IID
Image ID

ILAN
Internal Local Area Network (internal to the Network Element [NE]); the bus used between the
Interface Server Module (IFS) and shelf processor cards in NE.

IM
Information Model

IMAGE
Alternate Map Storage

IMP
Integrated Multi-protocol

In Service (IS)
An equipment module is available for use by the system. (It may be online or offline.) An
equipped module is either IS or Out of Service (OOS).

In-Service Growth
A feature that enables service providers to install one optical channel initially, then upgrade to
additional optical channels or a mix of data rates. Additional modules may be added one at a time
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
3AG 24622 EAAA TQZZA Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary GL-41
Issue 1 February 2010 Use pursuant to applicable agreements
Glossary

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
while the system is in service.

INCFAD
Incoming Failure because of Facility (or Fading)

INE
1. Intelligent Network Element
2. Intermediate Network Element

Information Processing Functions

Functions, centralized in a subnetwork, to perform common application processing and
management for Network Elements (NEs) within subnetwork. Example NE functions include
performance data storage and failure condition thresholding for alarm reporting. Example
management functions include migration of “OS-like” functions out to the network for
subnetwork trouble sectionalization, configuration (for example, cross-connection) management,
and Customer Network Management (CNM). See also Mediation Functions.

InGaAs
Indium Gallium Arsenide

InGaAsP
Indium Gallium Arsenide Phosphorus

Input/Output (I/O)
Two of the three computer functions; the third is processing. I/O describes the interrelated tasks of
providing information to the computer and providing the results of processing to the user. I/O
devices include keyboards (input) and printers (output). A disk drive is an input and an output
device because it provides information to the computer and receives information from the
computer.

INT
Internal

Integrated Services Digital Network (ISDN)

ISDN is a special telephone line that allows data to be transmitted using end-to-end digital
connectivity. (Data transmits digitally directly from sender to receiver.) Two basic types of ISDN:
BRI (144,000 bits per second [b/s] designed for the desktop) and PRI (1,544,000 b/s, designed for
telephone switches, computer telephony, and voice processing systems). Neither ISDN Basic Rate
Interface (BRI) nor ISDN Primary Rate Interface (PRI) is a standard service, though there are
several “standard” configurations. A difficult service to run, ISDN requires a special ISDN
modem (a terminal adapter [hardware] that allows the sending and receiving of digital signals
over ISDN lines. Typical modems convert digital signals from the computer into analog signals
that can be sent over copper cables. But an ISDN terminal adapter transmits only digital data.

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
GL-42 Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary 3AG 24622 EAAA TQZZA
Use pursuant to applicable agreements Issue 1 February 2010
Glossary

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Interleave
1. Transmission of pulses from two or more digital sources in time-division sequence over a
single path.
2. A data communication technique, used in conjunction with error-correcting codes, to reduce
the number of undetected error bursts. In the interleaving process code symbols are reordered
before transmission so that any two successive code symbols are separated by |-1 (| is called
the degree of interleaving). Upon reception, interleaved code symbols are reordered into their
original sequence, effectively spreading or randomizing errors (in time) to enable more
complete correction by a random error-correcting code.
3. Refers to the way a computer writes to and reads from a hard disk.

Intermediate Reach (IR)

Refers to optical sections from a few kilometers (km) to approximately 15 km; an AT&T
Synchronous Optical Network (SONET) term.

Intermediate System (IS)

Refers to a system that originates and terminates traffic, and forwards traffic to other systems; an
Open Systems Interconnection (OSI) term.

Intermediate System to Intermediate System (IS-IS)

An Open Systems Interconnection (OSI) link-state hierarchical routing protocol, based on
DECnet Phase V routing, whereby intermediate systems (routers) exchange routing information
based on a single metric to determine network topology.

Internet Protocol (IP)

Part of the Transmission Control Protocol/Internet Protocol (TCP/IP) family of protocols
describing software that tracks the Internet address of nodes, routes outgoing messages, and
recognizes incoming messages; used in gateways to connect networks of Open Systems
Interconnection (OSI) network Level 3 and above. See also Internet Protocol (IP) Address and
Transmission Control Protocol/Internet Protocol (TCP/IP).

Internet Protocol (IP) Address

A unique, 32-bit number for a specific transmission control protocol/internet protocol (TCP/IP)
host on the Internet; normally printed in dotted decimal form (for example, 128.126.50.224).
When a domain is assigned a group of numbers by the Internet central registry, it can house one or
several domains and/or hosts. Some IP addresses are reserved for broadcasts in respective
domains. See also Domain.

IOB
I/O Optical Converter (module)

IOC
Input/Output Conditioner

IOO
OS-OS Interface

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
3AG 24622 EAAA TQZZA Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary GL-43
Issue 1 February 2010 Use pursuant to applicable agreements
Glossary

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
IP
1. In Progress
2. See Internet Protocol (IP).

IPB
Internal Protect module. A space matrix that provides a cross-connect between the continuing path
of the failed DS3/STS-1 and the protection path from the DS3/STS-1 interface protection circuit
pack.

IPC
Interprocess Communications

IPE
In-Service Parameter Editing

IPU
Interface Processing Unit (module)

IR
See Intermediate Reach (IR).

IRB
Inter-Rack Bus

IRO
Interrack Optics

IS
1. See In Service (IS).
2. See Intermediate System (IS).

IS-ANR
In Service-Abnormal

IS-IS
See Intermediate System to Intermediate System (IS-IS).

IS-NR
In Service-Normal

ISDN
See Integrated Services Digital Network (ISDN).

ISID
1. Idle Signal Identifier
2. Idle Signal Identification

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
GL-44 Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary 3AG 24622 EAAA TQZZA
Use pursuant to applicable agreements Issue 1 February 2010
Glossary

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
ISL
Interprocessor Sanity Link. Control interface between duplex processor modules of cross-connect
control system (that is, IPUs, APUs, or CPUs)

ISLTD
Isolated, fully

ISU
In-Service Upgrade

ITAG
Informational Message Tag

ITB
DS3/STS-1 Test Board (module)

ITS
Integrated Test System; a Bell OS

IW
Insertion Word

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

J JFET
Junction Field Effect Transistor

Jitter
Relative phase change between data time slots and clock (timing) pulses. Results in bit errors and,
in voice circuits, noise in telephone circuits. Jitter is cumulative and is primary limitation to
maximum system length, including terminals and repeaters, of a digital transmission system.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

K KAM
Keep Alive Message

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

L L1
Level 1

L2PE
Level 2 Processor Element

L3PE
Level 3 Processor Element

L3PE2
Level 3 Processor Element II
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
3AG 24622 EAAA TQZZA Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary GL-45
Issue 1 February 2010 Use pursuant to applicable agreements
Glossary

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
LADM
Linear 1:1 Add-Drop Multiplexer. See Linear Add-Drop Multiplexer (LADM).

LAN
Local Area Network

LANCE
Local Area Network Controller for Ethernet

LAPB
Line Access Procedure, Balanced

LAPD
Link Access Procedure, D-channel

LBCL
Laser Bias Current, Line

LBO
See Line Buildout (LBO).

LCI
Logical Channel Identifier

LCN
1. Local Communications Network, a Local Area Network (LAN).
2. Logical Channel Number

LD
Line Driver

LDAP
Lightweight Directory Access Protocol

LDB
Loop Detection Buffer

LDCC
Line Data Communications Channel

LDR
Line Driver/Receiver (ECI or DS3)

LEC
Local Exchange Carrier

LED
Light-emitting Diode
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
GL-46 Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary 3AG 24622 EAAA TQZZA
Use pursuant to applicable agreements Issue 1 February 2010
Glossary

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
LEFF
Laser Efficiency

LEMA
Legacy Element Management Application

LEMSDXC
Legacy Element Management Application—Digital Cross-connect

LEMSSNT
Legacy Element Management Application—SONET

Level translator
Provides interfaces from the Administrative Processor to external devices or communication links.
See also LTx.

LF
Loop Filter

LFACS
Loop Facilities Assignment and Control System; a Bell OS

LG
Line Group

LIF
Low-speed Interface

Light Power Received Normalized (LPRN)

The optical power level as an integer percentage of the calibrated optical power level. The
calibrated optical power level is a “snapshot” of the received power level at a user-requested point
in time.

Limited mode
System operating mode that allows access to a limited number of commands. It is primarily used
for database restoration.

Line
A transmission medium, together with the associated Line-Terminating Equipment (LTE),
required to provide the means of transporting information between two consecutive
line-terminating network elements: One originates the line signal, and the other terminates the line
signal. In SONET, the line envelope is a subset of the section envelope.

Line Alarm Indication Signal (AIS) Code

A code generated by Section-Terminating Equipment (STE) upon loss of input signal, loss of
frame, or equipment failure. Line AIS signal maintains operation of downstream regenerators and
prevents generation of unnecessary alarms. At the same time, data and orderwire communication
is retained between the regenerators and downstream Line-Terminating Equipment (LTE).
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
3AG 24622 EAAA TQZZA Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary GL-47
Issue 1 February 2010 Use pursuant to applicable agreements
Glossary

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Line Buildout (LBO)
Equalization pad or artificial line network.

Line Group
Group of Synchronous Optical Network (SONET) signals at an Add/Drop Multiplexer (ADM)
connection.

Line Side Signal

A signal suitable for transmission over outside plant facilities or across an administrative
boundary.

Line-Terminating Equipment (LTE)

Network Elements (NEs) that originate and/or terminate line (OC-N) signals; LTE includes NEs
that originate and/or terminate line signals. LTEs originate, access, modify, and/or terminate the
transport overhead.

Linear Add-Drop Multiplexer (LADM)

Network element in a linear network that provides access to all N, or some subset M (M is a
standard hierarchical level vN), of the STS line signals contained within an OC-N optical channel.
STS signals are added to (inserted) and/or dropped from (extracted) the OC-N signal as it passes
through Add-Drop Multiplexer (ADM).

LMC
Large Matrix Configuration

LMF
Loss of Multiframe

LMU
12 Muldem (module)

LOA
Loss of Activity

Location
The physical location (site) of a network device.

LOF
Loss of Frame

Long Band
The longer wavelength half of the Erbium-Doped Fiber Amplifier (EDFA) amplification window
that is approximately 1547 nm to 1560 nm.

Long Reach (LR)

Refers to optical sections of approximately 25 kilometers or more in length and is applicable to all
Synchronous Optical Network (SONET) rates. Compare with Short Reach (SR).

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
GL-48 Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary 3AG 24622 EAAA TQZZA
Use pursuant to applicable agreements Issue 1 February 2010
Glossary

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Loopback
A maintenance condition that redirects normal input to output, or vice versa; consists of a
diagnostic test in which the transmitted signal is returned to the sending device after passing
through a data communications link or network, thereby allowing a technician (or built-in
diagnostic circuit) to compare the returned signal with the transmitted signal and determine what
is wrong. Loopbacks are often done by excluding one piece of equipment after another,
eliminating non-problematic equipment to isolate a problem.

LOP
Loss of Pointer

LOS
Loss of Signal

LOSS
Loss of Signal Second

LPF
Low-Pass Filter

LPRN
See Light Power Received Normalized (LPRN)

LPTA
Line/Path Terminating ASIC

LR
1. Line Receiver
2. See also Long Reach (LR).

LSS
Local Security Server

LT1
LT1 Level Translator (module)

LT2
LT2 Level Translator (module)

LT3
LT3 Level Translator (module)

LT4
LT4 Level Translator (module)

LT5
LT5 Level Translator (module)

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
3AG 24622 EAAA TQZZA Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary GL-49
Issue 1 February 2010 Use pursuant to applicable agreements
Glossary

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
LT8
LT8 Level Trasnaltor (module)

LTE
1. Line-Terminating Element
2. See also Line-Terminating Equipment (LTE).
3. Lite-terminating equipment (Synchronous Optical Network [SONET]). Asynchronous
Transfer Mode (ATM) equipment, terminating a communications facility using a SONET Lite
Transmission Convergence (TC) layer (usually reserved for end user or Local Area Network
[LAN] equipment); does not implement some of the maintenance functions used in long-haul
networks such as termination of path, line, and section overhead.

LTx
Level Translator. Generic term for one of several level translator modules used in the APS to
interface between user control ports and internal formats. Types include RS-232, RS-485, X.25,
and TABS physical interfaces.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

M M13
Multiplex/demultiplex DS1 to/from DS3

M16
Matrix 16?16. A time-space matrix circuit pack with 16 horizontal and 16 vertical inputs and
outputs.

M32
Matrix 32?32. A time-space matrix circuit pack with 32 horizontal and 32 vertical inputs and
outputs.

M40
Matrix 40?40. A time-space matrix circuit pack with 40 horizontal and 40 vertical inputs and
outputs.

MA
1. Maintenance Assembly. An alarm or PM point checked for changes in a TABS system.
2. Memory Administration (Out of Service)

MAC
1. Memory Arbitration Circuit
2. Media Access Control. A standard data link layer address that is required for every port of
device that connects to a LAN.

MAINT
Maintenance

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
GL-50 Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary 3AG 24622 EAAA TQZZA
Use pursuant to applicable agreements Issue 1 February 2010
Glossary

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
MAINT, MT
Maintenance

MAJ
Major

MAL
Maintenance Access Link

MAN
Manual operation

ManCont
Manual Control

MB
1. Management Information Base
2. MegaByte(s)

MCB
Master Clock (module). It provides a 155.52 MHz, modulated with 166.67 Hz frame signal,
reference clock.

MCR
Master Control Register

MD
Mediation Device

MDB
Multipoint Data Bridge

MDL
Maintenance Data Link. Three bits used as a 28.2 kb/s terminal-to-terminal link identifier. Part of
the overhead in the C-bit parity format.

Mediation Functions
Usually consist of gateway communications functions, but can include information processing
functions. When the two functions are combined, they are often contained in a stand-alone
mediation device (MD) or packaged as an added module to an Network Element (NE) or
equipment frame. Gateway communications functions often exist alone in a gateway NE or
intermediate NE.

Menu Bar
Contains a list of menus. After menus are opened, commands are selected that instruct the
application to perform an action.

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
3AG 24622 EAAA TQZZA Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary GL-51
Issue 1 February 2010 Use pursuant to applicable agreements
Glossary

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
MIB
Management Information Base

MIC
1. Module Interface Circuit
2. Module Interface Controller

MIN
Minor

MJ
Major

MJU
Multijunction Unit

MLM
Multilongitudinal Mode

MLP
Multilink Processor

MML
Man-Machine Language

MMU
Memory Management Unit

MN
Minor

Mnemonics
Displays as an underlined character in a menu item or any dialog box control text. A mnemonic
provides quick access to any menu item or dialog box field with a single keystroke.

MNP
Microcom Networking Protocol

MOC
Managed Object Class

Modem
Modulator/Demodulator

Modulator/Demodulator (Modem)
A communications device that enables the computer to transmit information over a telephone line.

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
GL-52 Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary 3AG 24622 EAAA TQZZA
Use pursuant to applicable agreements Issue 1 February 2010
Glossary

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Module
An electrical assembly (usually a printed circuit board and faceplate) mechanically designed as a
single detachable unit. (Also called circuit pack.)

Module
An independent assembly of electronic components with some distinct function. A module might
contain one, two, three, or more cards. In the past, there was nearly always one card in each
module; therefore, “card” might be used when “module” was actually meant. Even in the case of a
module that contains only one card, the module includes a front panel, ejector handles, etc. that
are mounted on the card. See also Card and Circuit Packs.

Monitor
1. Visual display device (usually a CRT) associated with a control terminal
2. To receive outputs directed to another control port or user

MOP
Method of Procedure

Most-Significant Bit
The left-most bit position, Bit 1. The most-significant bit is transmitted first.

MPS
MIB Procesing System

MPU
Microprocessor Unit

MQW
Multiple Quantum Well

MRA
Maintenance Resource Administration

MRC
Master Control Register

MSB
Most Significant Bit

MSI
Microprocessor Serial Interface

MT, MAINT
Maintenance

MTBF
Mean Time Between Failures

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
3AG 24622 EAAA TQZZA Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary GL-53
Issue 1 February 2010 Use pursuant to applicable agreements
Glossary

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
MTCE
Removed for maintenance

MTL
Memory Transfer Link. A 12.5 Mb/s serial data link to allow higher-level processor to lower-level
processor, satellite processor to OBPE/UBPE, communications

MTTR
Mean Time To Repair

MTX
Matrix module

Multiplex (MUX, Mx)

Multiplex direction, the tributary input signal arriving on tributary interface (electrical) and being
multiplexed up onto optical signal, then leaving system. Combining several signals for
transmission on some shared medium; signals are combined at the transmitter by a multiplexer
(MUX) and split up at the receiver by a demultiplexer (DEMUX). The communications channel
can be shared between the independent signals in one of several different ways: Time Division
Multiplexing (TDM), Frequency Division Multiplexing (FDM), and Code Division Multiplexing
(CDM). If the inputs take turns to use the output channel (TDM), the output bandwidth need be
no greater than the maximum bandwidth of any input. If many inputs are active simultaneously,
the output bandwidth must be at least as great as the total bandwidth of all simultaneously active
inputs. In this case the multiplexer is also known as a concentrator. See also Time Division
Multiplexing (TDM), Frequency Division Multiplexing (FDM),and Code Division Multiple
Access (CDMA).

MUX
See Multiplex (MUX, Mx).

Mx
See Multiplex (Mx, MUX).

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

N NA
1. Not Alarmed or No Alarm
2. Not Applicable
3. Not Available, in reference to performance monitoring parameter validity flags.

NAD
Network Access Domain

Narrow-Band Wavelength Division Multiplex (NB-WDM)

A Wavelength Division Multiplex (WDM) that uses optical channel spacing on the order of 7 nm
or more; permits as many as four channels in the optical band from 1532 nm to 1558 nm. See also
Dense Wavelength Division Multiplex (DWDM).

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
GL-54 Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary 3AG 24622 EAAA TQZZA
Use pursuant to applicable agreements Issue 1 February 2010
Glossary

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
NAS
North American Standard

NB-WDM
See Narrow-Band Wavelength Division Multiplex (NB-WDM).

NC
Normally Closed

NCO
Numerically Controlled Oscillator

NDC
National Destination Code

NDSF
Nondispersion-Shifted Fiber

NE
1. Near End. See also NEND.
2. Network Element. Can be a switching NE or a transport NE. Cross-connects are transport
NEs.
3. See also Network Element (NE).

NE Configuration
The physical components within a Network Element (NE).

NE Type
The model number of a specific Network Element (NE).

NEBS
Network Equipment-Building System typical equipment requirements (Bell Communications
Research; technical reference TR-EOP-000063).

NEC
National Electric Code

NEND
Near End

NEP
Network Element Processor

NEREF
Network Element Reference

NES
Network Element Synthesis
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
3AG 24622 EAAA TQZZA Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary GL-55
Issue 1 February 2010 Use pursuant to applicable agreements
Glossary

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
NET
Network Entity Title

Network
Database representation of resources allocated to a secondary user. Network may also refer to
physical elements of a communications system; equipment, transmission facilities, and end users.

Network Element (NE)

Configurable transmission controller used as a multiplexer, access node, or Add/Drop multiplexer.

Network entity
Any of the physical devices that make up the communications network

Network facility
Equipment used to connect individual NEs

Network resource
All physical devices, including end equipment, transmission facilities, and end users

Network Service Access Point (NSAP)

The point at which the Open Systems Interconnection (OSI) network service is made available to
a transport entity. NSAPs are identified by OSI network addresses. The NSAP is a generic
standard for a network address consisting of 20 octets. ATM has specified E.164 for public
network addressing and the NSAP address structure for private network addresses.

NIMAN
Not Isolated, requires Manual isolation.

NIPSS
Not fully isolated

NLAN
Network Local Area Network

NM
Network Management or Network Manager

NMA
1. Network Monitoring and Analysis
2. Network Management Application

NMC
Network Management Components

NMI
Nonmaskable Interrupt

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
GL-56 Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary 3AG 24622 EAAA TQZZA
Use pursuant to applicable agreements Issue 1 February 2010
Glossary

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
NML
Network Management Layer

NMS
Network Management System

NMU
Network Management Unit

NN
National Number

NO
Normally Open

NOC
Network Operation Center

Node
A point where transmission lines originate, interconnect, switch, or terminate. Generally consists
of one or more pieces of equipment and is connected to other nodes via network facilities.
Typically provides switching capabilities, multiplexing capabilities, end-point termination or
origination, or other similar networking services. A point in the network where a network element
is physically located (such as a digital cross-connect system)

Nonblocking
A feature that allows any input port to be connected to any output port. Nonblocking switch paths
ensure that a connection can always be established between any two idle ports without
rearranging existing connections.

Nonregenerative
A type of optical amplification whereby the optical signal is amplified without being converted to
an electrical signal and then fed directly to the transmission line (as opposed to regenerative
amplification where the optical signal is first converted into an electrical signal, amplified,
converted back into an optical signal, and then fed to the transmission line).

Nonrevertive
As applied to protection switching, means that service is not automatically reestablished to
previously active device when failure is corrected.

NORM
NORMal

North American AIS

The accepted Alarm Indication Signal (AIS) for use in North American Network, consisting of
alternating 1010 pattern with valid framing and fixed overhead bit content. (Also called Standard
AIS.)

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
3AG 24622 EAAA TQZZA Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary GL-57
Issue 1 February 2010 Use pursuant to applicable agreements
Glossary

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Not Alarmed (NA)
A condition noted on the alarm manager screen, but does not cause an alarm situation to be
recorded.

Not Reported (NR)

A condition that is not reported on any screen.

NR
1. Normal
2. Not Reported

NRM
Normal Response Mode

NRZ
Nonreturn to Zero

NS
Narrow-Spaced (wavelength division multiplexing)

NSA
Nonservice-Affecting

NSAP
See Network Service Access Point (NSAP).

NSDU
Network Service Data Unit

NTE
Network Terminal Equipment

NTMS
Network Traffic Management System

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

O O-LAN
Office LAN

O1B
OC-3 Interface (module)

O4M
OC-12 Interface (module)

OA
Optical Amplifier

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
GL-58 Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary 3AG 24622 EAAA TQZZA
Use pursuant to applicable agreements Issue 1 February 2010
Glossary

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
OAD
Object Access Domain

OADM
Optical Add/Drop Multiplexer

OAM&P
Operations, Administration, Maintenance, and Provisioning

OAS
Optical Amplifier Section (per ITU-T G.681)

OBC
On-board Controller

OBPE
On-board Processor Element. The third-tier processing element in a 3-tier control system.

OC
Optical Carrier

OC-M
Optical Carrier, level M (for low-speed drops)

OC-N
Optical Carrier, level N (for high-speed drops)

OC1
Optical Carrier, level 1 (51.84 Mb/s)

OC12
Optical Carrier, level 12 (622.08 Mb/s)

OC12c
Optical Carrier, level 12 (622.08 Mb/s) Concatenated

OC192
Optical Carrier, level 192 (10 Gb/s)

OC24
Optical Carrier, level 24 (1.244 Gb/s)

OC3
Optical Carrier, level 3 (155.52 Mb/s)

OC3c
Optical Carrier, level 3 (155.52 Mb/s) Concatenated

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
3AG 24622 EAAA TQZZA Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary GL-59
Issue 1 February 2010 Use pursuant to applicable agreements
Glossary

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
OC48
Optical Carrier, level 48 (2.488 Gb/s)

OCH
Optical CHannel. Maps sequentially from OTS 1-4, following individual channel assignments.

OCM
Optical Transceiver

OEM
Original Equipment Manufacturer

Off Normal
A term used in the telephone industry for operation action.

OH
OverHead, Synchronous Optical Network (SONET)

OID
Object Identifier

OLH
Online Help

OMS
Optical Multiplex Section (per ITU-T G.681)

OOBFEC
Out-of-Band Forward Error Correction

OOF
Out of Frame

OOFP
Out of Frame-Path

OOS
See Out of Service (OOS).

OOS-AU
Out of Service-Autonomous. Entity is incapable of performing any of its provisioned functions,
and there is no external administrative restriction inhibiting the entity from performing these
functions. This state is entered when the network element detects an event rendering the entity
incapable of performing any of its provisioned functions. The event may be from the entity, a
supporting entity, or external network condition. In OOS-AU state, provisioning data updates and
service-affecting maintenance are not permitted.Fault detection is active.

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
GL-60 Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary 3AG 24622 EAAA TQZZA
Use pursuant to applicable agreements Issue 1 February 2010
Glossary

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
OOS-AUMA
Out-of-Service-Autonomous Management

OOS-MA
1. Out-of-Service-Management
2. Out-of-Service-Memory administration
3. Traditionally called “Manual Out-of-service”. Entity is intentionally suspended by the
external management command performing all of its provisioned functions; entity is
operationally capable of performing its provisioning functions, although suspended by
external management. While in this state: Updates of provisioning data and maintenance
activities are permitted; physical actions, such as unplugging a circuit pack, will not generate
alarms; fault detection is performed; alarm notifications are suppressed; however, when
entering a new state without fault suppression, any new or cleared alarms that have not been
reported, must be. See also OOS-MA-UAS, which restricts maintenance and fault detection
activities.

OOS-MA-AS
Out-of-Service-Memory administration-Assigned

OOS-MA-MT
1. Out-of-Service-Management-Maintenance
2. Out-of-Service-Memory Administration-Maintenance
The entity has been manually removed from service for maintenance activity.

OOS-MA-UAS
1. Out-of-Service-Management-Unassigned
2. Out-of-Service-Memory Administration-Unassigned
The entity has not been assigned with the necessary provisioning data. No service activity or
maintenance activity is permitted because the necessary data has not been assigned.

OOS-MT
Out-of-Service-Maintenance

OOS-UAS
Out-of-Service-Unassigned. The entity has not been assigned with the necessary provisioning
data; no service activity or maintenance activity is permitted because the necessary data has not
been assigned.

OPD
1. Optical Disk unit
2. Optical Disk Drive (module)

Open Systems Interconnection (OSI)

The only internationally accepted framework of standards for communication between different
systems made by different vendors. The primary intent for OSI is to create an open systems
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
3AG 24622 EAAA TQZZA Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary GL-61
Issue 1 February 2010 Use pursuant to applicable agreements
Glossary

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
networking environment in which any vendor computer system, connected to any network, can
freely share data with any other computer system on that network or a linked network. OSI was
developed by the International Standards Organization. Most of the dominant communications
protocols used have a structure based on the OSI model.

Operations Support System (OSS)

Methods and procedures (mechanized or not) that directly support the telecommunications
infrastructure daily operation. The average Local Exchange Carrier (LEC) has hundreds of OSSs,
including automated systems supporting order negotiation, order processing, line assignment, line
testing, and billing.

Operator Action
An operator-initiated action that interferes with the normal mechanism within the product for
response to detected conditions, such as forced switching, inhibited switching, or taking a
working module out of service.

OPS
Operations Processing System

OPS-INE
Operations System - Intelligent Network Element

OPS/INE
Operations Provisioning System for Intelligent Network Elements. An operations system used to
implement memory administration on NEs like the 1631 SX. Typically a Stratus computer with
software written by Bellcore.

Optical Carrier Level 1 (OC-1)

Optical signal that results from an optical conversion of an electrical STS-1 signal; this signal
forms the basis of the interface.

Optical Carrier Level 12 (OC-12)

Optical signal produced by converting an STS-12 from an electrical signal to an optical signal.

Optical Carrier Level 3 (OC-3)

Optical signal produced by converting an STS-3 from an electrical signal to an optical signal.

Optical Carrier Level 48 (OC-48)

Optical signal produced by converting an STS-48 from an electrical signal to an optical signal.

Optical Carrier Level N (OC-N)

Optical signal resulting from an optical conversion of an electrical STS-N signal.

Optical Modules
Elements of the system that provide the photonic interface for either transmit or receive functions.

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
GL-62 Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary 3AG 24622 EAAA TQZZA
Use pursuant to applicable agreements Issue 1 February 2010
Glossary

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Optical Pulse Distortion/Dispersion
The property of an optical fiber that causes optical signals passing through the fiber to be
bandwidth limited. A received light pulse will be wider than that that was transmitted; the amount
of this distortion increases with the fiber length.

Option Button
A 1301 Network Manger Explorer (NMX) action button; represents a single choice in a limited
set of mutually exclusive choices. In a group of buttons user can select only one at any time.

ORB
Object Request Broker

Order Wire, Orderwire (OW)

1. A circuit used by telephone personnel for fixing, installing, and removing phone lines.
2. Equipment and circuit providing a telephone company the means to establish voice contact
between central office and carrier repeater locations.
3. A Synchronous Optical Network/Synchronous Digital Hierarchy (SONET/SDH) term for a
connection request; consists of one octet contained within the Section Overhead (SOH).

ORS
Object Registration Service

OS
1. Operations System (Also called OSS.)
2. Operating System, as in HP-UX, DOS, or Windows 2000

OSB
Overhead Server Board

OSC
See Oscillator (OSC).

Oscillator (OSC)
1. A device for generating an analog test signal.
2. An electronic circuit that creates a single-frequency signal.

OSDB
Operations System Database

OSI
See Open Systems Interconnection (OSI).

OSL
Output Subscription Level

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
3AG 24622 EAAA TQZZA Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary GL-63
Issue 1 February 2010 Use pursuant to applicable agreements
Glossary

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
OSLINK
Operations System LINK has failed (X.25 link)

OSMINE
Operations Systems Modifications for the Integration of Network Elements.

OSPORT
Operations System Port

OSS
1. See Operations Support System (OSS) (Also called OS.)
2. Operating System Surveillance

OSSMAINT
Operations Support System - MAINTenance

OSSNMA
Operations Support System - Network Monitoring and Analysis

OSSPROV
Operations Support System - Provisioning

OSSTEST
Operations Support System - Testing

OTDR
Optical Time Domain Reflectometer

OTG
Online Troubleshooting Guide

OTGR
Operations Technology Generic Requirements. Bellcore requirements for network elements.

OTPROM
One-Time Programmable Read-only Memory

OTS
1. Object Transport Service
2. Optical Transmission Section (per ITU-T G.681)
3. Optical Transport System, a dense WDM system (per AT&T RFP)

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
GL-64 Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary 3AG 24622 EAAA TQZZA
Use pursuant to applicable agreements Issue 1 February 2010
Glossary

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Out of Service (OOS)
1. A status indication that function is not being performed by a given circuit pack and it can be
removed for maintenance.
2. An equipped module is OOS when unavailable for system use; module may be OOS for
operator action, equipment failure, diagnostic testing, or family of equipment not carrying
traffic. See also SNOS (Status, Not currently Out of Service).
3. Equipment or channel not carrying traffic.
4. Status indicating that traffic is not being processed by a given module and that the module can
be removed for maintenance.
5. Designation for an inactive address or function.

OV
OpenView

Overhead
Anything that is not traffic in a digital bit stream. Traffic is the payload, or information being
carried by signal. Overhead is that portion of signal that carries information about timing and
maintenance of signal, but does not carry any portion of information originally sent and meant to
be received at the far end.

OVFL
Overflow

OVw
OpenView Windows

OW
See Order Wire, Orderwire (OW),

OXB
Optical Transceiver (module)

OXO
Oven-Controlled Oscillator

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

P P
Preferred

P-bus
Processor/Poll Bus - A multidrop CMOS serial bus that implements HDLC-NRM protocol for
normal polling of traffic

P39
3 V Power Converter (module)

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
3AG 24622 EAAA TQZZA Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary GL-65
Issue 1 February 2010 Use pursuant to applicable agreements
Glossary

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
P56
5 V Power Converter (module)

PA
1. Parallel Alarm
2. Public Archive

PA/ST
Parallel Alarm/Serial Telemetry

Packet Switching
A communications paradigm in which packets (messages or fragments of messages) are
individually routed between nodes, with no previously established communication path. Packets
are routed to their destination through the most expedient route (as determined by some routing
algorithm). Not all packets traveling between the same two hosts, even those from a single
message, will necessarily follow the same route. The destination computer reassembles the
packets into their appropriate sequence. Packet switching optimizes available bandwidth use in a
network and minimizes latency. See also X.25.

PAD
Packet Assembler/Disassembler

Parameter
An element of a command, which further defines the object of the command or provides data
needed for proper command execution. See individual command descriptions.

Parity Check
A process for detecting whether bits of data (parts of characters) have been altered during
transmission of that data. Data are transmitted as a stream of bits with values of one or zero; for
example, each character of data composed of seven bits has another bit added to it. The value of
that bit is chosen so that either the total number of one bits is always even if Even Parity error
correction is to be obeyed, or always odd if Odd Parity correction is chosen.

Path
1. A path at a given bit rate is a logical connection between the point at which a standard frame
format for the signal is assembled and the point at which the standard frame format for the
signal is disassembled.
2. The route a telecommunications signal follows through a circuit or through the air.

Path command
Any valid connect or disconnect command directed to matrix

Path Overhead (POH)

Synchronous Optical Network (SONET) path overhead assigned to and transported with the
payload until payload is demultiplexed; used for functions necessary to transport the payload, for
example, end-to-end network management. These functions include parity check and trace

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
GL-66 Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary 3AG 24622 EAAA TQZZA
Use pursuant to applicable agreements Issue 1 February 2010
Glossary

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
capability. POH is not implemented in SONET Lite. See also STS Path Overhead (STS POH).

Payload Pointer
The pointer that indicates the location of the beginning of the Synchronous Payload Envelope
(SPE).

PBIT
Parity monitoring. Select PBIT monitoring to monitor performance on signals other than CBIT
parity. PBIT is corrected at each DS3 level; therefore, it provides only error monitoring from DS3
electrical interface to DS3 interface.

PC
1. Personal computer.
2. For connectors, positive or physical connection.

PCA
See Protection Channel Access (PCA).

PCM
1. See Pulse Code Modulation (PCM).
2. PCM is also slang for the Sony F1 format, which stores PCM digital audio on videotape.

PCN
Product Change Notice.

PCS
Privileged Command Script.

PDN
Public Data Network

PDU
Power Distribution Unit.

PECL
Positive Electron-Coupled Logic.

Peer or PEER
1. A unit of communications hardware or software on the same protocol layer of a network as
another. A common way of viewing a communications link is as two protocol stacks that are
actually connected only at the very lowest (physical) layer, but can be regarded as being
connected at each higher layer by virtue of the lower layers services provided. Peer-to-peer
communication refers to these real or virtual connections between corresponding systems in

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
3AG 24622 EAAA TQZZA Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary GL-67
Issue 1 February 2010 Use pursuant to applicable agreements
Glossary

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
each layer. For example, when two people talk to each other, the lowest layer is the physical
layer, the sound waves traveling from mouth to ear (so mouths and ears are peers). The next
layer might be the speech and hearing centers in the brains and the top layer their cerebellums
or minds. Although, barring telepathy, nothing passes directly between the two minds, there is
a peer-to-peer communication between them.
2. User security channel identifier

Performance Monitoring (PM)

Reports and analyzes deviations from defined parameters, detecting any signal degradation that
could lead to a service-affecting failure; refers to actions that monitor signal integrity and quality
(such as counting parity errors in Synchronous Optical Network [SONET] equipment) and
equipment impairments (such as laser degrade). Nominally includes reporting of values recorded
during monitoring and sending them over a digitally multiplexed transmission channel.

Permanent Virtual Circuit (PVC)

A virtual circuit that is permanently established, saving the time associated with circuit
establishment and tear-down.

PEROM
Programmable Erasable Read-only Memory

Persistence
Continuity of the state of an object across reboots; a property of a programming language where
created objects and variables continue to exist and retain their values between runs of the
program.

PES
Parity Errored Second

PFO
Premium Feature Option

PG
Point Generator

PGA
Pin Grid Array

Phase-Locked Loop (PLL)

A circuit containing a voltage-controlled oscillator whose phase or frequency can be “steered” to
keep it in sync with a reference source. A PLL circuit is generally used to lock onto and
“up-convert” the frequency of a stable source.

Physical network
The actual equipment in a communications network.

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
GL-68 Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary 3AG 24622 EAAA TQZZA
Use pursuant to applicable agreements Issue 1 February 2010
Glossary

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Pi Mux
A configuration of Add-Drop Multiplex (ADM) circuit that uses a back-to-back terminal type of
repeater configuration, allowing add/drop of channels in either or both directions independently.
An application of this configuration is thinning routes. The configuration is similar to a pair of 1:1
terminals back-to-back. Pi mux is correctly referred to as Linear ADM (LADM). Compare with T
Mux.

PIC
Programmable Interrupt Controller

PID
1. Password Identifier
2. Path Identification
3. Product Identifier

Pigtail
A length of optical fiber with one end terminated at a connector and the other end attached to a
light source or detector. The fiber couples light from a source to a connectorized fiber cable or
from a fiber cable to a detector.

PIN
1. Positive Intrinsic Negative. Type of photo detector used to sense light wave energy then to
convert it to electrical signals.
2. A type of semiconductor diode that has a 3-layer structure composed of P-type, intrinsic type,
and N-type material.

PJC
Pointer Justification Count

PJN
Pointer Justification Negative

PJP
Pointer Justification Positive

PLD
Programmable Logic Device

PLL
Phase-Locked Loop. See Phase-Locked Loop (PLL).

PM
See Performance Monitoring (PM).

PMC
Process Monitory and Control

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
3AG 24622 EAAA TQZZA Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary GL-69
Issue 1 February 2010 Use pursuant to applicable agreements
Glossary

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
PMV
Performance Monitoring Visualization

PNM
Physical Network Manager

POH
See Path Overhead (POH).

Point of Presence (POP)

1. A physical place within a Local Access and Transport Area (LATA) where a long-distance
carrier or a cellular provider interfaces with the network of the Local Exchange Carrier
(LEC), also called the local telephone company.
2. The point at which the LEC terminates subscriber circuits for cellular phone call,
long-distance dial-up phone call, or leased-line communications.
3. A meet point where Internet Service Providers (ISPs) exchange traffic and routes.

Point-to-Point Protocol (PPP)

A communications protocol; the protocol defined in RFC 1661, the Internet standard for
transmitting network layer datagrams (for example, IP packets) over serial point-to-point links.
PPP is designed to operate over asynchronous connections and bit-oriented synchronous systems.
It can configure connections to a remote network dynamically and test that the link is usable. PPP
can be configured to encapsulate different network layer protocols by using appropriate Network
Control Protocol (NCP).

Polarization Mode Dispersion (PMD)

Identified around 1990, PMD might become a limiting issue in optical span design now that data
rates are going higher (10 Gb/s and 40 Gb/s), and spans are getting longer. PMD is the dispersion
of an optical signal, caused by the different polarization modes of the optical signal traveling
down a fiber at slightly different velocities. The amount of PMD is statistical in nature and varies
randomly with time. PMD is independent of chromatic dispersion, so a span can be PMD-limited
in distance even in the absence of chromatic dispersion. Due to the random nature of the physical
causes of PMD, it is more difficult to be compensated for, as chromatic dispersion, but newer
techniques are being developed. See also Chromatic Dispersion.

POP
See Point of Presence (POP).

Port
1. A physical connection on a network element that has a specified rate and type of physical
attachment; a connection or socket on the computer. Ports are used for connecting devices
(cables, modems, printers, monitors) to a PC, then sending information from the computer to
the devices. Serial ports (COM 1-COM 4) and parallel ports (LPT1, LPT2) are the most
commonly used.
2. An interface point between the system and its external environment. Can be physical, logical,
or both.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
GL-70 Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary 3AG 24622 EAAA TQZZA
Use pursuant to applicable agreements Issue 1 February 2010
Glossary

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Portability
Software designed for one computer system can be used on other systems; little software outside
MS-DOS software for IBM and IBM clone computers is portable; UNIX software is portable to
an extent.

PPP
Point-to-Point Protocol. See Point-to-Point Protocol (PPP).

PPS
Path Protection Switching. See Protection Switching (PS).

PPSN
Public Packet Switched Network

PRI
1. Primary (alarm)
2. Primary Rate Interface. See Primary Rate Interface (PRI).
3. Protection Release Inhibited

Primary Rate Interface (PRI)

PRI is intended for heavy-duty users. The typical channel structure is composed of 23 B channels
plus one 64 Kb/s D channel for a total of 1536 Kb/s.

PRM
Performance Report Messages

PRN
Printer

PROT
PROTection

Protection Channel Access (PCA)

The tributary signals carried by the protection channel when it is offline (i.e., not protecting the
working traffic). It is lower priority and will be dropped in favor of the working traffic in the
event of a working channel failure.

Protection Switch Count (PSC)

The Performance Monitoring (PM) parameter used to count the number of protection switches for
a protection group.

Protection Switch Oscillation Control (PSOC)

A policy (for 1680 OGM) replacing Switch Hold in which alarm conditions (i.e. signal fail or
degrade) are “locked” on a facility for a period of time after a number of alarm oscillations have
occurred. This state is called Alarm Lock; while active, it causes a facility to be treated as though
the locked alarm were active. This policy accomplishes prevention of rapid switching oscillation
in a much cleaner fashion than Switch Hold. Also, it directly addresses requirements CR5-52 and

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
3AG 24622 EAAA TQZZA Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary GL-71
Issue 1 February 2010 Use pursuant to applicable agreements
Glossary

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
R5-53 of GR-253-CORE, which Switch Hold does not.

Protection Switching (PS)

The automatic Network Element (NE) function that provides recovery of traffic in the event of a
network or equipment failure. Protection may be an individual NE function (as in unidirectional
linear protection or in a unidirectional ring) or a network function (as in bidirectional linear
protection or in a bidirectional ring).

Protection Switching Duration (PSD)

This parameter measures the total time, in seconds, for which service was removed from a given
(nonprotection) line.

Protection Switching Line, Counts

This parameter measures the number of times service switches from a particular working line to a
protection line.

Protocol
A set of rules that govern the interaction of processes or applications in a system or network

PROV
See Provisioning (PROV).

ProvData
Provisioning Data

Provision
Transmission of TL1 messages to a Network Element (NE) to modify the NE database.
Provisioning allows for modification of the NE options, configuration, connection, and
cross-connections.

Provisioning (PROV)
1. The act of providing operational transmission service by performing the following tasks:
equipping (or installing modules and equipment), configuring, and setting the data path In
Service (IS) or Out of Service (OOS).
2. The entry into a network image of network resources that are installed in network image and
are available for assignment.

Proxy
Provides protocol conversion between TL1 commands and Common Management Information
Service Element (CMISE) commands.

PRS
Primary Reference System

PRT
DS1 Protect (module)

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
GL-72 Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary 3AG 24622 EAAA TQZZA
Use pursuant to applicable agreements Issue 1 February 2010
Glossary

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
PRT
DS1 Protect (module)

PSA
Power Supply Alarm

PSC
See Protection Switch Count (PSC).

PSCC
Processor Serial Control Circuit

PSD
Protection Switching Duration

PSF
5 V Power Supply (module)

PSN
Packet-switched Network. See Packet Switching. See also X.25.

PSOC
See Protection Switch Oscillation Control (PSOC).

PSOS
Portable Scalable Operating System. See Portability. See also Scalable.

PSU
Power Supply Unit

PSW
Protect Switch

PTA
Port and Telecommunications Administration

PTE
Path-Terminating Equipment. See also DS0 Path-Terminating Equipment (DS0 PTE).

Pulse Code Modulation (PCM)

A method by which an audio signal is represented as digital data. Virtually all digital audio
systems use PCM.

PVC
1. Permanent Virtual Channel
2. See Permanent Virtual Circuit (PVC).

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
3AG 24622 EAAA TQZZA Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary GL-73
Issue 1 February 2010 Use pursuant to applicable agreements
Glossary

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
3. Permanent Virtual Connection (Asynchronous Transfer Mode [ATM] terminology)
4. Polyvinyl Chloride

PWM
Pulse-Width Modulator

PWR
1. Power
2. Power converter

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Q Q3
Reference point between two layers in the TNM model

QRS
Quasi-Random Signal

QRSF
Quasi-Random Signal, Framed

QRSS
Quasi-Random Signal Source. Signals used for testing digital circuits, particularly DS-1 (for
example, T-1) circuits.

QRSU
Quasi-Random Signal, Unframed

QTY
Quantity

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

R R
Redundant

R-bus
Remote Inventory Bus. A bidirectional CMOS/TTL level serial data bus, provides access to the
remote inventory data bank on each circuit pack.

Rack
An assembly of shelves within a standard set of vertical mounting posts or rails (called rack
channels).

RADM
Ring Add-Drop Multiplexer

RADMAP
Remote Alarm Display Map
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
GL-74 Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary 3AG 24622 EAAA TQZZA
Use pursuant to applicable agreements Issue 1 February 2010
Glossary

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
RAM
See Random Access Memory (RAM).

Random Access Memory (RAM)

The working memory of the card; memory used for storing data temporarily while working on it,
running application programs, etc. “Random access” means that any RAM area can be accessed
directly and immediately. RAM is called volatile memory; information in RAM will disappear if
the power is switched off before it is saved to disk. RAM is used on all downloadable cards to run
the application loads of the cards.

Range of terms
The beginning and ending terms separated by two ampersands and a hyphen (&&-). For example,
range T3-8&&-12 expands to {T3-8, T3-9, T3-10, T3-11, T3-12}.

RBD
1. Rear Beam Detect
2. Rear Beam Photo Detector

RCC
Relay Contact-closure Control

RCV
Receive module

RDI
Remote Defect Indication

RDU
Rack Distribution Unit (module)

Redundancy, Redundant
1. That part of any message that may be eliminated without losing important information.
2. Having one or more “backup” systems available in case of failure of the main system.

Remote Defect Indication-Line (RDI-L)

An indication returned to a transmitting Line-Terminating Equipment (LTE) upon receipt of a line
Alarm Indication Signal (AIS) code or detection of an incoming line failure at the receiving LTE.
(Formerly Line Far-end Receive Failure [FERF].)

Revertive
Service is automatically restored to the primary device after failure is corrected.

RFI
Radio Frequency Interference

RFS
Remote File Server
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
3AG 24622 EAAA TQZZA Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary GL-75
Issue 1 February 2010 Use pursuant to applicable agreements
Glossary

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
RI
Remote Inventory

Ring
A network where the network nodes are interconnected by means of a circular route that may be
broken at any one point without permanently disrupting traffic. Rings are either unidirectional
(uniring) or bidirectional (bi-ring).

Ring Add-Drop Multiplexer (RADM)

Network element in a ring network that provides access to all N, or some subset M (M is a
standard hierarchical level v N), of the STS line signals contained within an OC-N optical
channel. STS signals are added to (inserted) and/or dropped from (extracted) the OC-N signal as it
passes through the ADM. Ring ADMs may be either unidirectional (uniring) or bidirectional
(bi-ring).

RIP
Routing Information Protocol

RMAS
Remote Memory Administration System

RMS
Root Means Square

Roll
An operation that switches (rolls) a cross-connection from one output port to another with no
disruption of service

Route Diversity
A network configuration that provides two connection paths between two points, each physically
separated from the other except at the terminal end points. This method retains service over one of
the routes if the other route is broken (such as when a cable is cut). A route diversity application
can be built using a ring network or a linear network as a basis.

RPB
Ring Protect Board (module)

RPC
1. Redundant Power Converter
2. Remote Procedure Call

RS-232
An Electronic Industry Association (EIA) data communications standard using serial binary data
interchange standard applicable to interconnection of Data Terminal Equipment (DTE); the most
common asynchronous serial line standard; the EIA equivalent of ITU-T V.24 and V.28. RS-232
specifies connector gender and pin use, but not their physical type (RS-423 specifies the electrical
signals.); 25-way D-type connectors are common but often only three wires are connected: one
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
GL-76 Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary 3AG 24622 EAAA TQZZA
Use pursuant to applicable agreements Issue 1 February 2010
Glossary

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
ground (pin seven) and one for data in each direction; other pins are mostly related to hardware
handshaking between sender and receiver and to carrier detection on modems, inoperative
circuits, busy conditions etc. The standard classifies equipment as either Data Communications
Equipment (DCE) or DTE.

RS-232C
An Electronic Industry Association (EIA) standard applicable to interconnection of Data Terminal
Equipment (DTE) and Data Communication Equipment (DCE) using serial binary data
interchange.

RS-422
An Electronic Industry Association (EIA) standard that specifies the electrical characteristics of a
balanced voltage digital interface circuit for the interchange of serial binary signals between Data
Terminal Equipment (DTE) and Data Communications Equipment (DCE).

RS-449
An Electronic Industry Association (EIA) data communications standard employing synchronous
serial binary data interchange

RS-485
An Electronic Industry Association (EIA) data communications standard for high-speed, long
distance multipoint connections

RSP
Rack Status Panel (module)

RT
Remote Terminal

RTC
Real-time Clock

RTN
Return

RTU
Remote Test Unit

RX
Receive, receiver

RX+TX
Receiver plus Transceiver

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

S S3M
STM Interface (module)

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
3AG 24622 EAAA TQZZA Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary GL-77
Issue 1 February 2010 Use pursuant to applicable agreements
Glossary

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
SA
Service-Affecting

SABM
Set Asynchronous Balanced Mode

SAM
System Administrator Manager

SARTS
Switched Access Remote Test System

SAS
Severe errored frame/Alarm indication signal (SEF/AIS) Second

SBI
Serial Bus Interface

SBT
System Bus Termination (module)

SC
A specific type of fiber-optic cable connector. Scalable

Scalable
Often refers to technology applications that can be made greater or smaller without great leaps in
cost. for example, Virtual Private Networks (Switched 56/64, X.25, Frame Relay, Switched
Multimegabit Data Service (SMDS), and Asynchronous Transfer Mode [ATM] networks) serve as
effective replacements for dedicated, leased-line networks because their capabilities are scalable,
with the costs remaining in reasonable relationship to associated functionality.

SCC
Serial Communications Controller

SCHED
Schedule

SCI
See Serial Communications Interface (SCI).

SCO
Serial Communications interface data from shelf processor to microcontroller.

SCS
Center Stage Switch

SCSI
Small Computer System Interface. A bus that links the optical and hard disks to the processor.

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
GL-78 Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary 3AG 24622 EAAA TQZZA
Use pursuant to applicable agreements Issue 1 February 2010
Glossary

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
SCU
Stratum Clock Unit

SDC
Serial-to-Dual-bit Converter

SDCC
Section Data Communications Channel. See also Data Communications Channel (DCC).

SDH
See Synchronous Digital Hierarchy (SDH).

SDMA
Serial Direct Memory Access

SEA
Supported Entity Outage

SEC
1. Secondary
2. Security Manager

Section
The portion of a transmission facility (including terminating points) between a terminal network
element and a regenerator or between two regenerators. A terminating point is the point after
signal regeneration, where Performance Monitoring (PM) is or can be done. In Synchronous
Optical Network (SONET), the section envelope encompasses the line envelope. See also
Synchronous Payloads.

Section-Terminating Equipment (STE)

Network elements that terminate the Synchronous Optical Network (SONET) physical and
section layers. STE is either a regenerator or part of a Line-Terminating Equipment (LTE). STEs
interpret and either modify or create the section SONET overhead.

SEEPROM
Serially Electronically Erasable Programmable Read-only Memory

SEF
Severely Errored Frame

SEFS
Severely Errored Frame Seconds

Send Button
A 1301 Network Manger (NM) action button that forwards commands to the network element.

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
3AG 24622 EAAA TQZZA Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary GL-79
Issue 1 February 2010 Use pursuant to applicable agreements
Glossary

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Seq
Sequence

Serial Communications Interface (SCI)

An asynchronous full-duplex serial data link between the shelf processor and modules containing
microcontrollers. Card Presence Indicator (CPI), SCI, and Serial Communications (SCO)
interface data signals comprise this link.

Service Condition
A data path can be selected as In Service (IS), which is the normal operational state, or
Out-of-service (OOS) condition, which disables protection switching and alarm and Performance
Monitoring (PM) functions. An OOS data path may or may not be able to carry test traffic,
depending on system configuration.

SESCP
Severely Errored Seconds-CP-bit Path

SESL
Severely Errored Seconds-Line

SESP
Severely Errored Seconds-Path

Session
1. A logical network connection between two addressable units for the exchange of data.
2. A connection between a user and the Network Element (NE). One user can have multiple
sessions. All provisioning operations, queries, and autonomous reports are transported
between the NE and user through a session.

Severely Errored Seconds (SES)

Contains more than N Coding Violations (CVs). The value of N with frame size and bit rate
should be chosen to correspond to a Bit Error Ratio (BER) of approximately 10-3, assuming
errors are randomly distributed. This count may be used to determine problems for particular
types of services and/or as a measure of facility outage duration.

SF
1. See Signal Fail (SF).
2. See Superframe (SF).

SFF
1. TSI Switch Frame Format
2. Superframe Format (DS1 signal)

SFFT1
STS-1 Fast Facility Protection Threshold 1

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
GL-80 Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary 3AG 24622 EAAA TQZZA
Use pursuant to applicable agreements Issue 1 February 2010
Glossary

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
SFFT2
STS-1 Fast Facility Protection Threshold 2

SFFT3
STS-1 Fast Facility Protection Threshold 3

SFT
First/Third Stage Switch

SGND
Signal Ground

Shelf
Basic rack assembly unit; contains subassemblies (usually circuit packs, also referred to as
modules).

Short Band
The shorter wavelength half of the Erbium-Doped Fiber Amplifier (EDFA) amplification window
that is approximately 1530 nm to 1543 nm.

Short Reach (SR)

A Synchronous Optical Network (SONET) term; refers to optical sections of approximately 2
kilometers or less in length. The sections may be interoffice or intraoffice. Compare with Long
Reach (LR).

SI36
SONET I/O 36 STS-1 rack or shelf

SI48
SONET I/O 48 DS3/STS-1 rack or shelf

SIB
System Integration Block

SID
1. System Identification. A five-digit number assigned to identify the particular cellular carrier
from whom one is obtaining service; identifies “home” system.
2. System Identifier. An alphanumeric designator that uniquely identifies a particular system or
site within the network.
3. Site Identifier

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
3AG 24622 EAAA TQZZA Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary GL-81
Issue 1 February 2010 Use pursuant to applicable agreements
Glossary

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
SID/NSAP
See System Identification/ Network Service Access Point (SID/NSAP).

Signal Fail (SF)

1. Also known as Loss of Signal (LOS), detection of a LOS, Loss of Frame (LOF), or Loss of
Pointer (LOP) on the lines or on tributaries (for example, OC12s) connected to the system.
2. Threshold value used to compare calculated Bit Error Rate (or Ratio) (BER) value with SF
threshold. If BER value is less than SF threshold, an Excessive BER (EXBER) condition is
declared. See also Bit Error Rate (or Ratio) (BER).

Simplex (SX)
1. Operating a channel in one direction only with no ability to operate in the other direction.
2. One-sided printing.

SIO
Serial Input/Output (module)

SIS
Selectable (DS1) Idle Signal

SKP
Skip

SLC
Smart Line Card

SLM
Single Longitudinal Mode (laser)

SLTP
Section/Line Terminating Processor

SLU
Standard-to-Large Upgrade

SM
1. SONET (Synchronous Optical Network) Multiplexer. See Synchronous Optical Network
(SONET). See also Multiplex (MUX, Mx).
2. Subrate Multiplexer. See also SRM.

SMC
1. Standard Matrix Configuration.
2. Switching Matrix Circuit.

SMF
System Managment Function
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
GL-82 Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary 3AG 24622 EAAA TQZZA
Use pursuant to applicable agreements Issue 1 February 2010
Glossary

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
SML
1. Small Machine Language
2. Synchronous Maintenance Link

SMPS
Switched-Mode Power Supply

SMS
Small Machine Shelf

SMT
Matrix Terminator

SN
Subscriber Number

SNIDER
Asynchronous ASCII Echoplex Protocol (A trademark of Bellcore.)

SNML
Sub-Network Management Layer

SNMP
Simple Network Management Protocol

SNOS
Status, Not currently Out of Service. In the 1680 OGM this is a TL1 error code returned when a
user attempts to place an entity Out of Service (OOS) when it is already OOS.

SOC
Standard Operating Conditions

Software Generic
A set of files representing a software release for an NE

SOH
Section Overhead

SOIC
Small Outline Integrated Circuit

SOM
Second of Minute

SONET
See Synchronous Optical Network (SONET).

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
3AG 24622 EAAA TQZZA Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary GL-83
Issue 1 February 2010 Use pursuant to applicable agreements
Glossary

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Span
1. Refers to the optical fiber(s) connecting one site to another site; that portion of a high-speed
digital system that connects a Central Office (CO) or terminal office to terminal office.
2. Also called a T-Span Line; a repeated outside plant four-wire, two twisted-pair transmission
line.
3. A call center term: the total duration of a schedule from start time to stop time, including all
breaks.

SPB
Satellite Processor (module)

SPC
1. Shelf Processor Card.
2. Serial-to-Parallel Converter
3. Serial Parallel Chip

SPE
Synchronous Payload Envelope. See also Synchronous Payloads.

SPI
Serial Peripheral Interface.

SPL
DS1 Splitter

SPLTA
Split Connection, A Side

SPLTB
Split Connection, B Side

SPLTE
Split Connection, Equipment Side

SPLTEF
Split Connection, Equipment and Facility Sides

SPLTF
Split Connection, Facility Side

SPRAM
Single-Port Random Access Memory

SPU
Shelf Processor Unit

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
GL-84 Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary 3AG 24622 EAAA TQZZA
Use pursuant to applicable agreements Issue 1 February 2010
Glossary

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
SR
See Short Reach (SR).

SRAM
Static Random Access Memory

SRDM
Subrate Digital Multiplexing

SRM
Subrate Multiplexer. See also SM.

SSP
System Status Panel

SST
Secondary State

SSU
1. Subrate Service Unit
2. Synchronization Supply Unit. See also Building Integrated Timing Supply (BITS).

Standard AIS
The accepted Alarm Indication Signal (AIS) for use in North American Network, consisting of
alternating 1010 pattern with valid framing and fixed overhead bit content (Also called North
American AIS.)

Status Points
Electrical circuit activation points; provide a mechanism for electrical control circuits exterior to
the product to notify it that a specific event has occurred; provide confirmation that control-point
initiated actions have occurred, and/or monitor local office environmental alarm conditions, such
as power failure, fire, and temperature.

Status Response
When an operator enters a command into the product through the user interface, each command
entered will receive a status response to indicate the success or failure of the command.

STBY
Standby

STBYC
Cold Standby

STBYH
Standby Hot, secondary service state; indicates that the entity is providing hot standby redundant
protection.

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
3AG 24622 EAAA TQZZA Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary GL-85
Issue 1 February 2010 Use pursuant to applicable agreements
Glossary

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
STC
STS-1 Transport Conditioner

STD
Standard

STE
Section-Terminating Equipment

STM-1
Synchronous Transport Module, level 1

STM-16
Synchronous Transport Module, level 16

STM-4
Synchronous Transport Module, level 4

STM-N
Synchronous Transport Module, Level N

STNE
Sectionalize Trouble Network Element

STP
STS-1 Transport Protect

STS Envelope Capacity

Bandwidth within and aligned to the Synchronous Transport Signal (STS) frame that carries the
STS Synchronous Payload Envelope (SPE). This bandwidth can be combined from N STS1s to
carry an STS-Nc SPE. See also STS Synchronous Payload Envelope (STS SPE).

STS Path Overhead (STS POH)

Nine evenly distributed path overhead bytes per 125 μs starting at the first byte of the
Synchronous Transport Signal Synchronous Payload Envelope (STS SPE); provides for
communication between creation and disassembly points of the STS SPE.

STS Path-Terminating Equipment (STS PTE)

Network elements that multiplex/demultiplex the Synchronous Transport Signal (STS) payload.
STS PTEs interpret and either modify or create the STS Path Overhead (STS POH) necessary to
transport the STS payload.

STS Payload Capacity

The maximum bandwidth within the Synchronous Transport Signal Synchronous Payload
Envelope (STS SPE) available for payload. See also STS Synchronous Payload Envelope (STS
SPE).

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
GL-86 Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary 3AG 24622 EAAA TQZZA
Use pursuant to applicable agreements Issue 1 February 2010
Glossary

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
STS POH
See STS Path Overhead (STS POH).

STS PTE
See STS Path-Terminating Equipment (STS PTE).

STS Synchronous Payload Envelope (STS SPE)

A 125-ms frame structure composed of Synchronous Transport Signal Path Overhead (STS POH)
and bandwidth for payload. See also STS Path Overhead (STS POH).

STS-1
Synchronous Transport Signal, level 1; the basic logical building block Synchronous Optical
Network (SONET) electrical signal with a rate of 51.84 Mb/s.

STS-12c
Concatenated Synchronous Transport Signal, level 12.

STS-3
Synchronous Transport Signal, level 3

STS-3c
Concatenated Synchronous Transport Signal, level 3. A concatenated signal is formed by linking 3
STS-1 signals together, which allows transport of payloads larger than the capacity of an STS-1.
An STS-3c payload consists of 2349 bytes (3 783).

STS-48
Synchronous Transport Signal, level 48.

STS-N
Synchronous Transport Signal, level N.

STS-Nc
Concatenated Synchronous Transport Signal, level N. The concatenated signal is formed by
linking N STS-1 signals together. For example, an STS-3c payload consists of N x 783 bytes.

STS-SPE
See STS Synchronous Payload Envelope (STS SPE) and STS Envelope Capacity.

STSX-1
Electronic Synchronous Transport Signal, level 1. Digital signal cross-connect point for
equipment that generates or uses STS1 signals. This point has defined wave shapes and voltage
levels, per Bell Communications Research; Technical Reference TR-NWT-000253.

Super Rate Signal

A signal that must be carried by a concatenated Synchronous Transport Signal (STS), level N
(STS-Nc). Payloads larger than one STS-1 are known as super-rate payloads.

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
3AG 24622 EAAA TQZZA Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary GL-87
Issue 1 February 2010 Use pursuant to applicable agreements
Glossary

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Super-Rate Payload
Payload larger than one STS-1.

Superframe (SF)
One possible framing format for a DS1 signal (corresponding to D4). Unlike Extended
Superframe (ESF), there is no sync messaging channel in an SF signal. Compare with Extended
Superframe (ESF).

SVC
Switched Virtual Circuit. See also Virtual Circuit (VC).

SWDL
Software Downloaded

SWI
DS1 Switch (module)

Switch Exercise
An exercise of the K-Byte protocol that coordinates protection switching between network
elements. Traffic is not effected by an exercise (for example, no bridge, select, or squelch
operations occur).

Switch Hold
A policy adopted in Synchronous Optical Network (SONET) Multiplexer products prior to the
Enhanced in which switching would be disallowed for a period of time after X number of
switches had occurred in a specified time period. Purpose: to prevent rapid oscillation between
facilities or equipment when Wait to Restore (WTR) did not prevent it.

SX
1. Identifier for Alcatel Digital Cross-connect product family.
2. See also Simplex (SX).

SYNC
Synchronous. Events that are phase and frequency locked to a common timing reference.

Synchronization Supply Unit (SSU)

See Building Integrated Timing Supply (BITS).

Synchronous
The essential characteristic of time scales or signals in which their corresponding significant
instants occur at precisely the same average rate.

Synchronous Digital Hierarchy (SDH)

European set of standard fiber-optic-based serial standards planned for use with Synchronous
Optical Network (SONET) and Asynchronous Transfer Mode (ATM); some SDH and SONET
standards are identical; standardized by the International Telecommunications Union (ITU). See
also Asynchronous Transfer Mode (ATM) and Synchronous Optical Network (SONET).

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
GL-88 Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary 3AG 24622 EAAA TQZZA
Use pursuant to applicable agreements Issue 1 February 2010
Glossary

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Synchronous Network
The synchronization of the payloads of a transmission system to a master (network) clock that can
be traced to a reference clock.

Synchronous Optical Network (SONET)

A family of fiber-optic transmission rates (51.84 Mb/s to 13.22 Gb/s), created to provide needed
flexibility to transport many digital signals with different capacities, and to provide a design
standard. SONET is an optical interface standard that allows interworking of transmission
products from multiple vendors; it defines physical interface, optical line rates (optical carrier
[OC] signals), frame format, and an Operations, Administration, Maintenance, and Provisioning
(OAM&P) protocol. A standard for interconnecting digital networks and light wave systems
agreed upon by most major manufacturers. SONET supports new broadband services, and
enhanced OAM&P. This standard permits connecting SONET-compatible equipment of one
manufacturer to SONET-compatible equipment of another manufacturer on the other end. All
present services, such as DS1s, DS2s, DS3s, LANs, etc., can be brought onto a hub and interfaced
with SONET.

Synchronous Payloads
Payloads derivable from a network transmission signal by removing integral numbers of bits in
every frame; (for example, there are no variable bit stuffing rate adjustments required to fit the
payload in the transmission signal).

Synchronous Signal
A signal associated with a clock, or timing, signal. Clock moves data from one point to another.
NRZ signals are usually synchronous.

Synchronous Transport Module

This electrical signal is obtained by byte interleaving four STM-1 signals together. The rate of the
STM-4 is 622.080 Mb/s.

Synchronous Transport Module Level 1 (STM-1)

The basic Synchronous Digital Hierarchy (SDH) logical building block electrical signal with a
rate of 155.520 Mb/s. European SDS building block that equates to STS3.

Synchronous Transport Module Level 4 (STM-4)

This electrical signal is obtained by byte interleaving four STM-1 signals together. The rate of the
STM-4 is 622.080 Mb/s. European Synchronous Digital Hierarchy (SDH) building block that
equates to STS12.

Synchronous Transport Signal Level 1 (STS1)

The basic Synchronous Optical Network (SONET) logical building block electrical signal with a
rate of 51.84 Mb/s.

Synchronous Transport Signal Level N (STS-N)

This electrical signal is obtained by byte interleaving N STS1 signals together. The rate of the
STS-N is N times 51.84 Mb/s.

System Identification/Network Service Access Point (SID/NSAP)

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
3AG 24622 EAAA TQZZA Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary GL-89
Issue 1 February 2010 Use pursuant to applicable agreements
Glossary

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
An alphanumeric designator that uniquely identifies a particular system or site within a network.
See also Network Service Access Point (NSAP).
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

T T Mux
A configuration of Add-Drop Multiplex (ADM) circuit that uses a back-to-back terminal type of
repeater configuration that allows add/drop of channels; used in ring networks. This configuration
differs from pi mux in that it may receive from either direction but always sends in both
directions. This configuration typically uses only one optical channel. Compare with Pi Mux.

T0
Digital transmission link with a capacity of 64 kb/s (DS0)

T1
1. A collective term referring to the DS1 facility as a whole. Refers to traffic-carrying circuits.
2. Digital transmission link with a capacity of 1.544 Mb/s (DS1)

T1DM
T1 Digital Multiplex Format

T3
1. A collective term referring to the DS3 facility as a whole. Refers to traffic-carrying circuits
rather than to modules.
2. Digital transmission link with a capacity of 44.736 Mb/s (DS3)

TABS
Telemetry Asynchronous Block, Serial. A protocol used to collect data on alarms and performance
monitoring. (A registered trademark of Bellcore.)

TACC
Test Access

TADRMAP
Target identifier ADdress Resolution Map

TAP
1. Test Access Port
2. Test Access Path
3. Trouble Analysis Procedures

TAPP
Test Access Port Pair

Target Identifier (TID)

Number that may be null (missing). TIDs identify which network element receives a Transaction

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
GL-90 Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary 3AG 24622 EAAA TQZZA
Use pursuant to applicable agreements Issue 1 February 2010
Glossary

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Language 1 (TL1) message.

TARP
Target identifier Address Resolution Protocol

TASSA
Technical Assistance and Software Support Agreement

TB
Test Busy (diagnostic)

TB1
Terminal Block 1

TBD
To Be Determined

TBOS
See Telemetry Byte-Oriented Serial (TBOS).

TCA
See Threshold Crossing Alert (TCA).

TCP/IP
Transmission Control Protocol/Internet Protocol. A networking protocol that provides
communication across interconnected networks, between computers with diverse hardware
architectures and various operating systems.

TCXO
Temperature-Compensated Crystal Oscillator

TDM
1. Time Division Multiplexed
2. See also Time Division Multiplexing (TDM).

TDSN
Time Division Subchannel Number

TEC
Thermo-Electric Cooler

TEL
Telemetry module. See Telemetry Module (TEL).

Telemetry Byte-Oriented Serial (TBOS)

Protocol for transmitting alarm, status, and control points between network element and
operations system. TBOS is described in AT&T Communications Compatibility Bulletin No. 149,
Issue 2.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
3AG 24622 EAAA TQZZA Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary GL-91
Issue 1 February 2010 Use pursuant to applicable agreements
Glossary

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Telemetry Module (TEL)
A generic name given to synchronization modules in the 1648 SM product.

Terminal
An end point or a device connected to same.

Threshold Crossing Alert (TCA)

Threshold crossing parameters are values assigned to specific types of error conditions. The
values represent the number of times that condition occurs within a 15-minute or 1-day time
frame. If the number of occurrences exceeds the threshold value, a TCA situation displays on the
appropriate Performance Monitoring (PM) screen. See also Performance Monitoring (PM).

TID
See Target Identifier (TID).

TIE
Time Interval Error

Time Division Multiplexing (TDM)

A type of multiplexing where two or more channels of information are transmitted over the same
link by allocating a different time interval (“slot” or “slice”) for the transmission of each channel.
(For example: The channels take turns to use the link. Typically a periodic synchronizing signal or
distinguishing identifier is required so the receiver can determine which channel is which. TDM
becomes inefficient when traffic is intermittent because the time slot remains allocated even when
the channel has no data to transmit. Statistical TDM was developed to overcome this problem.
Compare with Frequency Division Multiplexing (FDM) and Code Division Multiplexing (CDM).

Time Slot
1. In time division multiplexing or switching, the slot belonging to a voice, data, or video
conversation; it can be occupied with conversation or left blank, but the slot is always present.
The capacity of the switch or the transmission channel can be determined by figuring how
many slots are present.
2. The smallest switchable data unit on the SCbus or SCxbus data bus. A time slot consists of
eight consecutive bits of data. One time slot is equivalent to a data path with a bandwidth of
64 Kpbs. (A Signal Computing System Architecture [SCSA] term.)

TIRKS
Trunks Integrated Record Keeping System (A registered trademark of Bellcore.)

TL1
See Transaction Language 1 (TL1).

TL1 DAT
Transaction Language 1 Direct Access Terminal

TLP
Transmission Level Point

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
GL-92 Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary 3AG 24622 EAAA TQZZA
Use pursuant to applicable agreements Issue 1 February 2010
Glossary

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
TLS
Terminate-and-Leave State

TM
Terminal Multiplexer

TMAS
Transport, Maintenance, and Administration System

TMB
TSI Muldem module

TMC
Transmux Converter

TMN
Telecommunications Management Network

TOD
Time of Day

TP
Termination Point

TPS
Transmission Processing System

TPU
1. Tape Unit
2. TABS Points Upgrade

Transaction Language 1 (TL1)

A Bellcore-specified protocol for communication between network elements; a subset of CCITT
MML Standard.

Transparent
An action or activity that is not apparent to the user or device.

Transport
Facilities associated with the transmission of OC1 or higher-level signals.

Transport Overhead
The overhead added to Synchronous Transport Signal (STS) Synchronous Payload Envelope
(SPE) for transport; consists of Line and Section overhead.

TRM
Bus Termination (module)

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
3AG 24622 EAAA TQZZA Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary GL-93
Issue 1 February 2010 Use pursuant to applicable agreements
Glossary

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
TS0.
Time Slot Zero

TSC
Technical Support Center

TSC
Test Session Controller

TSGR
Test Signal Generator

TSI
Time Slot Interchange

TSI
Time Slot multiplexer

TSID
1. Test Signal Identification
2. Transmission Identification

TSS
Third Stage Switch

TTL
Transistor-to-Transistor Logic

TTY
Teletype Terminal (keyboard-equipped terminal with no cursor-addressable display)

TVA
Topology Viewer Application

TX
Transmitter, transmit path

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

U UA
Unnumbered Acknowledgement

UART
See Universal Asynchronous Receiver/Transmitter (UART).

UASCP
Unavailable Seconds-CP-bit Path

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
GL-94 Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary 3AG 24622 EAAA TQZZA
Use pursuant to applicable agreements Issue 1 February 2010
Glossary

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
UASL
Unavailable Seconds-Line

UASP
Unavailable Seconds-Path

UB
User Board

UBPE
User Board Processor Element

UCAL
User Community Authorization Level

UCFC
User Community Functional Category

UCFCI
User Community Functional Category Input

UCFCO
User Community Functional Category Output

UDR
See Unidirectional Ring (UDR).

UDS
Unit Data Sheet

UEQ
Unequipped. Equipment entity is not equipped with necessary hardware.

UI
User Interface

UID
User Identifier

UL
Underwriters Laboratories

UNAM
User name

Unassigned (X-Bits/Bytes)
Those locations within the signal that do not have an assigned function or value; receiver ignores
the value of these bytes (except for BIP-8 calculation/verification).

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
3AG 24622 EAAA TQZZA Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary GL-95
Issue 1 February 2010 Use pursuant to applicable agreements
Glossary

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Unavailable Seconds (UAS)
The parameter UAS measures the duration for which service was unavailable (in seconds).
Service becomes unavailable if 10 consecutive Severely Errored Seconds (SES) occur. When the
service becomes unavailable, it remains unavailable until 10 consecutive non severely errored
seconds.

UNEQ-P
Unequipped-Path

Unequipped Channel
A portion of an STS-N such as an STS1 Synchronous Payload Envelope (SPE) or an intentionally
unoccupied Virtual Tributary (VT) SPE.

Unequipped Indication
A code that originating equipment places in unequipped channels to indicate to Path-Terminating
Equipment (PTE) that the channel is intentionally unoccupied so that alarms may be inhibited.

UNFR
Unframed DS1 signal format

Unidirectional Ring (UDR)

Ring networks that send the same traffic over two different routes (for example, counter-rotating
paths) to each node in the network. This allows the node to select one direction or the other for its
own traffic for protection purposes. Rings send all traffic through each node. Rings also permit
add/drop of channels at any node using a T Mux.

Unidirectional Switching
The protection switching scheme whereby the failed path is switched to the protection path, but
the path in the other direction is not switched.

Universal Asynchronous Receiver/Transmitter (UART)

A device, usually an integrated circuit chip, that performs the parallel-to-serial conversion of
digital data to be transmitted and the serial-to-parallel conversion of digital data received;
converts incoming serial data from a modem (or whatever else is connected to the serial port) into
the parallel form the Personal Computer (PC) handles. Parallel data conversion into serial data
makes data suitable for asynchronous transmission on phone lines. PCs have a serial port used for
bringing data into and out of the computer; this serial port is used for data movement on a channel
that requires that one bit be sent (or received) after another, serially; UART chips control PC serial
ports.

Unprotected Operation
A network element (usually a terminal) where the individual transport element does not provide
traffic protection; a higher network device, such as a cross-connect, provides protection by
moving the traffic from the failed transmission path to other paths in the network.

UPPS
Unidirectional Path Protection Switching

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
GL-96 Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary 3AG 24622 EAAA TQZZA
Use pursuant to applicable agreements Issue 1 February 2010
Glossary

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
UPSR
Unidirectional Path Switched Ring

USDB
User Security Database

User Channel
This is allocated to the user for input of information such as data communication for use in
maintenance activities and remoting of alarms external to the span equipment in a proprietary
fashion.

USI
User System Interface. More commonly referred to as Communication Interface Unit (CIU). Also
called CID or CPORT.

USI-LAN
User System Interface-Local Area Network

USM
User Services Manager

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

V V5
Virtual tributary path overhead. See Virtual Tributary (VT).

VA
Volt-Amperes

VC
1. Virtual Channel
2. Virtual Container
3. See also Virtual Circuit (VC).

VCN
Virtual Channel Number

VCXO
Voltage-Controlled Crystal Oscillator

Vdc
Volts Direct Current

VDT
Video Display Terminal. Keyboard-equipped terminal with cursor-addressable display.

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
3AG 24622 EAAA TQZZA Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary GL-97
Issue 1 February 2010 Use pursuant to applicable agreements
Glossary

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
VF
1. Voice Frequency
2. Variable Factor. An Asynchronous Transfer Mode (ATM) term; , a relative measure of the cell
rate margin normalized by the variance of the aggregate cell rate on the link.

VGA
1. Virtual Graphics Application
2. Variable Graphics Array

VI
Valid Interrupt

Violation Monitoring and Removal (VMR)

Process by which parity errors are corrected at a switch and section. Equivalent to an infinite stop
filter in a Frequency Division Multiplexing (FDM) system. Only parity violations are removed;
the bit errors that caused them still exist. Detected violations are removed so they do not
propagate beyond maintenance span.

Virtual Circuit (VC)

A communications line, voice or data, that appears to the user to be a dedicated point-to-point
circuit. VCs are generally set up on a per call basis and disconnected when the call is ended; VC
concept was first used in data communications with packet switching; VCs have become more
common in ultra-high speed applications; VC is referred to as a logical, rather than physical path
for a call.

Virtual Tributary (VT)

A structure designed for transport and switching of sub-DS3 payloads. A unit of sub-SONET
bandwidth that can be combined, or concatenated, for transmission through the network; VT1.5
equals 1.544 Mb/s; VT2 equals 2,048 Mb/s; VT3 equals 3 Mb/s; VT6 equals 6 Mb/s.

Virtual Tributary Group (VTG)

A 9-row by 12-column structure (108 bytes) that carries one or more Virtual Tributaries (VTs) of
the same size. Seven VT groups (756 bytes) are byte interleaved within the VT-structured
Synchronous Payload Envelope (SPE).

Virtual Tributary, Envelope Capacity

Bandwidth within, and aligned to, the VT superframe that is available for the VT synchronous
payload envelope.

Virtual Tributary, Path Overhead (V5)

One path overhead for every 500 μs located at the first byte of the Virtual Tributary, Synchronous
Payload Envelope (VT SPE). VT path overhead provides for communication between point of
creation and point of disassembly of a VT SPE.

Virtual Tributary, Path-Terminating Equipment (VT PTE)

Network elements that multiplex/demultiplex the Virtual Tributary (VT) payload. VT PTEs
interpret and either modify or create the path overhead necessary to transport VT payload. A VT
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
GL-98 Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary 3AG 24622 EAAA TQZZA
Use pursuant to applicable agreements Issue 1 February 2010
Glossary

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
PTE is considered a Synchronous Transport Signal Path-Terminating Equipment (STS PTE), a
Line-Terminating Equipment (LTE), and/or a Section-Terminating Equipment (STE).

Virtual Tributary, Synchronous Payload Envelope (VT SPE)

A 500-μs frame structure carried by the VT is composed of VT path overhead and bandwidth for
payload; envelope is contained within and can have any alignment with respect to VT envelope
capacity. The term typically refers to VT1.5, VT2, VT3, VT6, and VTx-Nc SPEs.

VLR
1. Very Long Reach.
2. Visitors Location Register. A wireless telecommunications term; refers to local database
maintained by cellular provider.

VMR
See Violation Monitoring and Removal (VMR).

VSCC
Virtual Tributary/Synchronous Transport Signal (level 1) Cross-connect

VT
See Virtual Tributary (VT).

VT Payload Capacity
The maximum bandwidth within the Virtual Tributary (VT) Synchronous Payload Envelope
(SPE) that is available for payload.

VT PTE
See Virtual Tributary, Path-Terminating Equipment (VT PTE).

VT SPE
See Virtual Tributary, Synchronous Payload Envelope (VT SPE).

VT Superframe
The Virtual Tributary (VT) is organized into a 500-ms superframe structure overlaid on and
aligned to the 125-μs STS1 Synchronous Payload Envelope (SPE), which contains the VT
payload pointer and the VT SPE.

VT1
Virtual Tributary 1.

VT1.5
Virtual Tributary 1.5 (1.728 Mb/s).

VT2
Virtual Tributary level 2.

VTG
See Virtual Tributary Group (VTG).
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
3AG 24622 EAAA TQZZA Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary GL-99
Issue 1 February 2010 Use pursuant to applicable agreements
Glossary

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
VTx
A VT of size x (currently x = 1.5, 2, 3, or 6).

VTx-Nc
See Concatenated Virtual Tributary (VTx-Nc) and Virtual Tributary (VT).

VUE
Visual User Environment.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

W W
Watts.

W/ft2
Watts per square foot.

WAD
Wavelength Add-Drop.

WADM
Wavelength Add-Drop Multiplexer (-ing).

WAN
Wide-Area Network.

WB-WDM
See Wide-Band Wavelength Division Multiplex (WB-WDM).

WDCS
Wideband Digital Cross-connect System.

WDM
Wavelength Division Multiplex (-er, -ing).

WECo
Western Electric Company.

Wide-Band Wavelength Division Multiplex (WB-WDM)

Wavelength Division Multiplexing that uses two optical channels: one at 1310 nm, and the other
at approximately 1550 nm.

Window
Area on the 1301 Network Manager (NM) screen that has a border; can include menus, icons,
buttons, check lists, prompts, and instructions.

Window Border
Window outer edge; use the mouse to select and drag border to resize window.

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
GL-100 Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary 3AG 24622 EAAA TQZZA
Use pursuant to applicable agreements Issue 1 February 2010
Glossary

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Window Title
Located in the left side of the title bar; displays the application name.

Windows Application
Refers to an application designed to run with Microsoft Windows™. It does not run without
Windows. All Windows applications follow similar conventions for menu arrangement, dialog
box style, and keyboard and mouse use.

Workstation (WS)
Any one of a variety of Visual Display Terminals (VDTs), ranging from a simple
keyboard/monitor to an intelligent, processor-controlled VDT.

WS DS1
Wayside Digital Signal 1.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

X X-bits
Two overhead bits per DS3 M-frame used as an alarm channel.

X.25
A Packet-switched Network (PSN). Approved by the International Organization for
Standardization (ISO), X.25 defines standard physical layer, data link layer, and network layers,
providing a standard protocol suite for the Data Terminal Equipment-Data Communications
Equipment (DTE-DCE) interface, typically used for Open Systems (OS) communication. X.25
was developed to describe how data passes into and out of public data communications networks.
X.25 networks are in use throughout the world. Standards and protocols for Packet-switched
Networks (PSNs) are from the International Telegraph and Telephone Consultative Committee
(CCITT), now known as International Telecommunications Union (ITU).

XBP
X-Bit Processing.

XCO
Crystal-Controlled Oscillator.

XCV
Transceiver module.

XMT
Transmit module.

XO
Crystal Oscillator.

XON
XON(/XOFF) communications flow control protocol.

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
3AG 24622 EAAA TQZZA Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary GL-101
Issue 1 February 2010 Use pursuant to applicable agreements
Index

Numerics verify GBE provisioning, confirm cabling between OC-n I/O

10 GBE error-free verification 4-315 and LGX panel, 4-68
setup, 4-237 verify NGTRU power, 4-292 connect power cables between
1678 Metro Core Connect NGTRU and 1678 Metro Core
verify NGTRU rack lamp unit,
addresses and locations, 5-1 Connect, 3-51
4-408
numbering scheme, 5-4 connect shelf and NGTRU ground
verify OC-n protection
cables to rack, 3-43
system shelves, 5-9 switching (protect to
working), 4-396 create clean database backup, 4-54
typical rack configuration, 5-1
verify OC-n protection .............................................................
1678 Metro Core Connect shelf, switching (working to
5-9 D database backup, 4-294
protect), 4-386
............................................................. database backup addressing, 5-8
verify OCn provisioning,
C checklists 4-377 disconnect test equipment and test
verify shelf redundant power cables, 4-207
database backup, 4-294
copy 0, 4-383 .............................................................
provision and test L2 data path,
verify shelf redundant power E equipment addressing, 5-6
4-405
copy 1, 4-409
recommended test equipment, .............................................................
verify software download,
4-290
4-293 F facility port addressing, 5-4
record error-free verification
visual inspection and module .............................................................
test results (copy 1), 4-395
installation, 4-285
record site information, 4-284 G GBE error-free verification setup,
clean fiber-optic connectors, 4-75 4-85
verify 10 GBE provisioning,
4-412 common entity addressing, 5-7 .............................................................

verify cabling between 10GBE configure BITS timing source and

I install AC outlets, 3-83
I/O and LGX panel, 4-410 clock output, 4-49
install an FTP server, 4-33
verify cabling between OC-n confirm cabling between 10GBE
I/O and LGX panel, 4-305 I/O and LGX panel, 4-232 install electrical cables, 3-64
confirm cabling between GBE I/O install electrical switch, 3-89
verify clock and control
and LGX panel, 4-64
subsystem switching, 4-384 install fiber management, 3-70
install front base plate, 3-87
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
3AG 24622 EAAA TQZZA Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary IN-1
Issue 1 February 2010 Use pursuant to applicable agreements
Index

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
install NGTRU cables, 3-46 unpack and inspect equipment, perform overall visual inspection,
3-3 4-12
install or remove SFP drawer,
4-224 verify final installation, 3-110 prepare floor, 3-5
install or remove XFP drawer, verify frame ground, 3-98 provision and test ES64SC data
4-227 path, 4-177
verify NGTRU ground, 3-92
install overhead rack support, 3-19 provision and test L2 data path,
.............................................................
4-405
install plug-in modules, 4-27
M module mechanical removal or
provision equipment, 4-57
install racks, 3-14 installation, 4-229
provision equipment protection,
install rear kick plate, 3-82 mount 1678 Metro Core Connect 4-282
install trim, 3-100 shelf and NGTRU in rack, 3-24
provision LAN communication to
installation, 3-1 .............................................................
external router, 4-47
connect power cables between N next generation top rack unit .............................................................
NGTRU and 1678 Metro (NGTRU), 5-9
Core Connect, 3-51 R recommended test equipment,
NGTRU 4-290
connect shelf and NGTRU See: next generation top rack
ground cables to rack, 3-43 unit (NGTRU) record error-free verification test
results (copy 1), 4-395
install AC outlets, 3-83 numbering scheme, 5-4
record site information, 4-284
install electrical cables, 3-64 common entity addressing, 5-7
route and connect frame-ground
install electrical switch, 3-89 database backup addressing, cable, 3-22
5-8
install fiber management, 3-70 route and terminate office battery
equipment addressing, 5-6 power cables, 3-57
install front base plate, 3-87
facility port addressing, 5-4 route fiber-optic cables, 3-74
install NGTRU cables, 3-46
software generic addressing, .............................................................
install overhead rack support,
5-8
3-19
S set up and verify system and
timing reference addressing,
install racks, 3-14 ES64SC IP communications,
5-7
4-43
install rear kick plate, 3-82
.............................................................
site-specific information, 4-10
install trim, 3-100
O OC-n error-free verification setup,
software generic addressing, 5-8
mount 1678 Metro Core 4-124
Connect shelf and NGTRU in system shelves, 5-9
rack, 3-24 .............................................................
1678 Metro Core Connect
prepare floor, 3-5 P perform error-free verification test shelf, 5-9
(copy 0), 4-134
route and connect next generation top rack unit
frame-ground cable, 3-22 perform error-free verification test (NGTRU), 5-9
(copy 1), 4-166
route and terminate office system turn-up and testing, 4-1
battery power cables, 3-57 perform FTP restore of
10 GBE error-free verification
provisioning database, 4-208
route fiber-optic cables, 3-74 setup, 4-237

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
IN-2 Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary 3AG 24622 EAAA TQZZA
Use pursuant to applicable agreements Issue 1 February 2010
Index

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
clean fiber-optic connectors, provision LAN communication verify cabling between OC-n I/O
4-75 to external router, 4-47 and LGX panel, 4-305
configure BITS timing source set up and verify system and verify clock and control subsystem
and clock output, 4-49 ES64SC IP communications, switching, 4-384
4-43
confirm cabling between verify clock and control switching,
10GBE I/O and LGX panel, site-specific information, 4-10 4-144
4-232
verify alarm-free system, verify final installation, 3-110
confirm cabling between GBE 4-210
verify FLC software load, 4-39
I/O and LGX panel, 4-64
verify and turn-up system, 4-4
verify frame ground, 3-98
confirm cabling between OC-n
verify clock and control
I/O and LGX panel, 4-68 verify GBE provisioning, 4-315
switching, 4-144
create clean database backup, verify NGTRU ground, 3-92
verify FLC software load, 4-39
4-54
verify NGTRU power
verify NGTRU power, 4-15
disconnect test equipment and
checklist, 4-292
test cables, 4-207 verify NGTRU rack lamp unit,
4-211 system turn-up and testing,
GBE error-free verification
4-15
setup, 4-85 verify OC-n protection
switching (protect to verify NGTRU rack lamp unit
install an FTP server, 4-33
working), 4-171
checklist, 4-408
install or remove SFP drawer,
verify OC-n protection
4-224 system turn-up and testing,
switching (working to
4-211
install or remove XFP drawer, protect), 4-160
4-227 verify OC-n protection switching
verify shelf redundant power
(protect to working)
install plug-in modules, 4-27 copy 0, 4-139
checklist, 4-396
module mechanical removal or verify shelf redundant power
installation, 4-229 copy 1, 4-219 system turn-up and testing,
4-171
OC-n error-free verification verify test equipment
setup, 4-124 availability, 4-13 verify OC-n protection switching
(working to protect)
perform error-free verification .............................................................
test (copy 0), 4-134 checklist, 4-386
T timing reference addressing, 5-7
perform error-free verification system turn-up and testing,
............................................................. 4-160
test (copy 1), 4-166
perform FTP restore of U unpack and inspect equipment, 3-3 verify OCn provisioning, 4-377
provisioning database, 4-208 ............................................................. verify shelf redundant power copy
perform overall visual 0
V verify 10 GBE provisioning, 4-412
inspection, 4-12 checklist, 4-383
provision and test ES64SC verify alarm-free system, 4-210
system turn-up and testing,
data path, 4-177 verify and turn-up system, 4-4 4-139
provision equipment, 4-57 verify cabling between 10GBE I/O
provision equipment and LGX panel, 4-410
protection, 4-282
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
3AG 24622 EAAA TQZZA Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary IN-3
Issue 1 February 2010 Use pursuant to applicable agreements
Index

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
verify shelf redundant power copy
1
checklist, 4-409
system turn-up and testing,
4-219
verify software download, 4-293
verify test equipment availability,
4-13
visual inspection and module
installation, 4-285

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
IN-4 Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary 3AG 24622 EAAA TQZZA
Use pursuant to applicable agreements Issue 1 February 2010